Josette STARCKLycée Richelieu, Rueil-MalmaisonFormateur IUFM Versailles

Pascale CAMPS-VAQUERCollège Les Vallées, La Garenne-ColombesFormateur IUFM Versailles

Dominique SANTONICollège-Lycée Buffon, Paris

Isabelle ZIMMERLycée Léonard de Vinci, Saint-Michel-sur-Orge

Paul LARREYAProfesseur de linguistique anglaise

Avec la participation de Ruth PHAN, Lycée Charles de Gaulle, Poissy

Meeting Point 2de

Conception maquette : Marc et Yvette

Mise en page : Isabelle Vacher, Graphisme

Illustrations : Pénélope Paicheler - Anthony Cocain (2010)

Cartographie : Corédoc

Édition : Catherine de Bernis

Toute représentation ou reproduction, intégrale ou partielle, faite sans le consentement de l’auteur, ou de ses ayants droits, ou ayants cause, est illicite (article L. 122-4 du Code de la Propriété Intellectuelle). Cette représentation ou reproduction, par quelque procédé que ce soit, constituerait une contrefaçon sanctionnée par l’article L. 335-2 du Code de la Propriété Intellectuelle. Le Code de la Propriété Intellectuelle n’autorise, aux termes de l’article L. 122-5, que les copies ou reproductions strictement réservées à l’usage du copiste et non destinées à une utilisation collective, d’une part, et, d’autre part, que les analyses et les courtes citations dans un but d’exemple et d’illustration. Une représentation ou reproduction sans autorisation de l’éditeur ou du Centre Français d’Exploitation du droit de Copie(20, rue des Grands-Augustins, 75006 Paris) constituerait une contrefaçon sanctionnée par les articles 425 et suivants du Code Pénal.

© Hatier – Paris, 2010 ISBN : 978-2-218-94430-7

S O M M A I R E

Avant-propos p. 4

Unit 1 SONG OF MYSELF p. 11

Unit 2 HALL OF FAME p. 27

Unit 3 MAKE A WISH p. 42

Unit 4 HEROES p. 61

Unit 5 CITY OF GLASS p. 86

Unit 6 WILD WILD WEST p. 109

Unit 7 ROBOT DREAMS p. 128

Unit 8 TRUE BRITS p. 149

Unit 9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL p. 174

Unit 10 LIFE IS ART p. 202

Unit 11 A WORLD OF GEEKS p. 225

Unit 12 MOTHER EARTH p. 245

Unit 13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE p. 260

Unit 14 A MIND TO MURDER p. 278

Unit 15 OVER THE RAINBOW p. 296

Unit 16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON p. 316

Fiches d’évaluation (fiches photocopiables) p. 342

Reading corner (fiches photocopiables) p. 383

Exploitation du DVD-Rom p. 409

Fiches d’exploitation des dialogues du site compagnon p. 457

3

4

I. Nos choix

Plusieurs objectifs majeurs ont présidé à la conception de Meeting Point 2de.

1) Nous avons tout d’abord voulu mettre en œuvre le CECRL, qui vise à faire évoluer les

pratiques en matière d’enseignement et d’évaluation. Nous nous sommes posé plusieurs

questions. Comment réellement mettre en pratique le CECRL ? Comment renouveler nos

pratiques ? Comment motiver les élèves ? Comment s’aider du CECRL ?

Pour s’adosser aux programmes officiels et rendre notre enseignement plus communicatif,

nous avons conçu des projets pédagogiques qui s’articulent autour d’une tâche et d’un

contenu culturel. Chaque séquence met en jeu différentes activités langagières et permet

d’enseigner une langue de culture et de communication.

2) Le pilotage par la tâche est au cœur de nos préoccupations. Cette démarche actionnelle

donne du sens à tout l’apprentissage au cours de l’unité. C’est pourquoi elle est annoncée

dès le début de l’unité. Les contenus culturels, la tâche et les objectifs linguistiques sont

étroitement liés.

La tâche se définit comme la mise en œuvre de compétences données (skills) pour parvenir

à un résultat concret, identifiable, observable.

La tâche doit être une vraie situation de communication, une situation authentique et aussi

naturelle que possible. Elle doit permettre à l’élève de mobiliser et réinvestir tout ce qu’il a

appris. Elle permet de s’entraîner, mais aussi de s’approprier et de mémoriser ce qui a été

introduit auparavant.

Il est important de souligner que la tâche détermine l’activité langagière dominante.

Dominante ne veut cependant pas dire exclusive. Toutes les autres activités langagières

peuvent être travaillées au cours d’une unité.

3) Le but de l’apprentissage en classe de seconde est de passer d’un niveau A1 ou A2 à un niveau B1.

4) Quelles conséquences ces objectifs ont-ils sur notre enseignement ?

k La tâche détermine l’activité langagière travaillée au cours de la séquence et

oriente ainsi tout le projet. L’activité langagière privilégiée sera le fil conducteur de l’unité.

Elle s’appuiera sur les autres activités sans les exclure.

k Des micro-tâches, tâches intermédiaires (jeux de rôles, comptes rendus de textes,

de documents iconographiques par exemple) devront préparer la mise en place de la tâche

finale. Toutes les compétences ne sont pas nécessairement travaillées au cours de l’heure.

k Ceci impose d’alterner les activités langagières travaillées dans chaque projet.

k Les cinq activités langagières, pas seulement celles de compréhension et de production

écrite, seront travaillées. L’expression orale et ses deux volets (en continu et en interaction)

sont importants dans un enseignement communicatif : ceci implique de développer la parole

de l’élève et par conséquent de limiter le questionnement magistral.

k La langue devient alors un moyen de réaliser une tâche et n’est plus un objet d’étude en soi.

k L’objectif est de construire une pratique communicative : pourquoi lit-on, pourquoi

parle-t-on ? Le but est de développer l’oral en particulier, de donner de vraies raisons

d’apprendre, de communiquer (information gap) et de prendre la parole.

k L’approche choisie a pour but de dédramatiser la parole de l’élève avec des aides à la

prise de parole et une auto-évaluation positive (des descripteurs positifs : je peux, je sais).

Le projet, qui est centré sur la tâche, permet de donner aux élèves les moyens de

s’exprimer, de les remettre au centre de leur apprentissage.

AVANT-PROPOS

5

k Notre souci a aussi été de répondre à l’hétérogénéité des classes de Seconde en

offrant des documents très divers et de difficulté variable.

k Il nous apparaît important de diversifier les activités, de ne pas privilégier l’analyse

de texte et le commentaire de texte. Tout texte n’est pas à « essorer ». Certains serviront

uniquement à une récolte d’informations et ne mériteront pas que l’on s’y attarde.

k Nous n’avons pas négligé l’acquisition lexicale (lexique et phonologie sont liés) et syntaxique par un entraînement régulier tout au long de l’année.

k Notre préoccupation constante a été de préserver, en l’enrichissant et en l’élargissant, une

démarche que les professeurs connaissent et maîtrisent bien : approche méthodologique,

ainsi que la réflexion sur la langue en contexte.

Avec Meeting Point nous avons donc cherché à concevoir un manuel novateur qui, tout en

tenant compte des acquis antérieurs dans l’enseignement des langues, s’inscrit résolument

dans une mise en œuvre réaliste et très concrète du CECRL.

Nous avons aussi voulu tenir compte des acquis de collège : un professeur de collège et

un autre, à cheval sur les deux cycles, nous ont guidés dans cette démarche et nous ont

permis de construire un parcours très progressif.

II. La structure du manuel

Le manuel s’ouvre sur une évaluation diagnostique dans les cinq activités langagières qui

servira à faire le bilan des acquis en début d’année. Ces différentes évaluations permet-

tront la constitution des groupes de compétences. Pour se préparer à chaque évaluation

l’élève pourra s’entraîner et s’auto-évaluer à l’aide de la grille et du barème fournis.

Le manuel comporte cinq grandes parties correspondant aux cinq activités langagières

dominantes. La première comprend quatre unités, les quatre autres seulement trois.

1) Ces cinq modules permettent un travail équilibré des cinq activités langagières du CECRL.Pour travailler la prise de parole en continu, la première et la deuxième unités sont plus

courtes, ce qui facilitera la transition avec le collège. Ces unités s’appuient sur des thèmes

étudiés au collège, exigibles au niveau A2 : parler de soi, de ses goûts, de ses capacités

et savoir développer une description physique.

2) Chaque module est encadré par des pages spécifiques :– une double page d’ouverture (y figurent un sommaire des thèmes travaillés ainsi que

les tâches finales à réaliser) ;

– une double page de méthodologie pour aider l’élève dans l’activité visée (nous avons

d’ailleurs consacré quatre pages à l’expression écrite). Ces pages ont été conçues pour

permettre à l’élève d’être actif : il observe, compare, déduit et s’entraîne (les conseils ne

viennent pas du professeur, mais l’élève est invité à tirer les conclusions de son observation).

➼ Nous avons en effet accordé une importance particulière à l’aide méthodologique et aux savoir-faire que l’élève doit acquérir pour être autonome.

3) Chaque unité comprend trois pages de Language at work pour travailler la phonologie,

le lexique et la grammaire.

4) Chaque unité se clôture par une double page Your task, permettant de réaliser la tâche

finale.

6

5) Chaque groupe d’unités se termine sur une évaluation sommative de l’activité langa-

gière dominante. Un entraînement avant l’évaluation finale est proposé à chaque fois. Ce galop d’essai aidera l’élève à faire le point sur ses acquis avant l’évaluation sommative.

6) La fin du manuel comprend des pages de lecture suivie (Reading corner), un renfor-

cement lexical, un précis grammatical, une liste de verbes irréguliers, une double page de

phonologie et quelques pages de méthodologie (Commenter une scène de film, Commenter

un document visuel, Comprendre les consignes).

Tout au long du manuel, nous avons eu à cœur de rester réalistes et concrets : enseignants

sur le terrain, nous avons testé les unités et les documents en classe ; les mises en œuvre

du Fichier pédagogique et les productions proposées ont été élaborées en cours.

III. Développer la parole de l’élève

1) Sept unités sont consacrées à l’expression orale (prise de parole en continu et en

interaction), en outre trois unités sont centrées sur la compréhension orale, ce qui permet

à l’élève de s’entraîner régulièrement.

2) L’aide à l’élève est notre souci permanent, c’est pourquoi :

k l’entrée dans le projet pédagogique est la plupart du temps visuelle (exemple : Tune in!

p. 72) ;

k les textes sont courts ou, s’ils sont plus longs, nous les avons fractionnés (exemple :

p. 214) ;

k les fiches de compréhension écrite et orale du Workbook sont des fiches d’entraînement et non d’évaluation ;

k l’aide lexicale fournie dans les rubriques Help! est organisée en parties en fonction du

support et par nature de mots (ceci afin de faciliter la mémorisation et l’expression orale) ;

k des amorces sont fournies pour aider les élèves les plus fragiles à se lancer à l’oral

(exemple : p. 187).

3) Mise en œuvre des documentsTous les documents peuvent être mis en œuvre soit de façon classique avec tout le groupe

classe, soit de façon plus communicative. L’enseignant est libre de privilégier telle ou telle

démarche en fonction de ses objectifs et du profil de la classe.

k Nous avons donné au professeur la possibilité de choisir son approche, de constituer

des groupes au sein de la classe et de confier à chaque groupe un document, s’il le désire.

Ainsi on peut organiser un travail par binômes ou par groupes sur :

– un texte (exemple : p. 64) ;

– des parties de texte (exemple : p. 118) ;

– des images (exemple : p. 86 et 87).

k Des fiches d’analyse des documents iconographiques ont été conçues (exemple : p. 159).

k Des mini-tâches, simulations de role play ou act it out, sont aussi proposées (exemple : p. 46).

k Faire le compte rendu d’un document écrit ou oral est un exercice fondamental (exemple :

p. 216) auquel nos élèves doivent être entraînés.

k Réciter un poème (exemple : p. 40) ou jouer une scène de théâtre (exemple : p. 178)

permet de mettre en place et d’automatiser bien des règles de phonologie sans que l’élève

s’en aperçoive.

7

4) Consolidation des acquisk Le travail phonologique est intégré dans les unités pour que l’élève prenne confiance.

La rubrique Improve your pronunciation permet de travailler la prononciation des mots clés de

l’unité. Ces rubriques sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon pour permettre à l’élève de

préparer ces exercices à la maison tout en écoutant un modèle phonologique authentique.

k Le travail lexical (Build up your vocabulary) ainsi que le renforcement lexical (p. 251

à p. 254) est aussi étroitement lié à la thématique et à la tâche finale. L’apprentissage du

lexique se fait en contexte et a pour but d’aider l’élève à enrichir sa palette lexicale.

k La double page de Language at work consacrée à la grammaire a deux finalités :

examiner le fonctionnement de la langue en contexte, observer des faits de langue, en

déduire des règles de fonctionnement. Ensuite, opérer un transfert et manipuler ces faits

de langue dans des contextes différents pour vérifier que les connaissances étudiées sont

bien utilisées. Nous avons intégré à chaque fois un document iconographique afin que la

grammaire soit tout le temps utilisée en contexte.

k De nombreuses fiches du Workbook sont suivies d’une rubrique Action! pour un

guidage de la prise de parole et incitent les plus faibles à se lancer à l’oral.

➼ Tous ces types de mise en œuvre amènent à limiter le questionnement magistral et à développer la parole de l’élève.

5) Ouvrir l’élève au monde de l’artk En plus de l’unité 10 (Life is Art) et des différents supports iconographiques qui jalon-

nent le manuel nous avons souhaité prolonger le projet sur New York (unité 5 : City of

Glass) et faire travailler les élèves sur des représentations de la ville mythique par des artistes de différentes époques. Ce Art Project a pour but de découvrir des œuvres d’art, d’acquérir des repères historiques et culturels, de situer ces œuvres dans le temps et

de s’interroger sur le sens de ces tableaux ou photos.

IV. Développer l’autonomie de l’élève

k Le développement de cette autonomie passe notamment par la lecture de textes plus longs (Reading corner). Nous avons pensé au tremplin vers la Première avec des textes plus

longs en fin de manuel, des textes variés (une nouvelle sur un pionnier aux États-Unis, un

poème, une chanson, des textes littéraires classiques, une nouvelle policière), avec fiches

d’entraînement dans le Fichier pédagogique.

k Douze compréhensions orales sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon avec fiches d’évaluation, corrigés et scripts disponibles dans ce Fichier et sur le site Internet.

Elles sont reliées à la thématique de l’unité et peuvent constituer un entraînement individuel à

la maison.

k Les aides méthodologiques sont récurrentes dans le manuel. Chaque groupe d’unités se

clôture sur une double page de méthodologie de l’activité langagière dominante.

k Pour faciliter l’apprentissage, nous avons créé des pages d’aide à :

– l’utilisation d’un dictionnaire (p. 97) ;

– l’exploitation d’une vidéo (Commenter une scène de film, p. 279-280) ;

– l’étude d’un document iconographique (Commenter un document visuel, p. 281-282) ;

– la compréhension des consignes (Comprendre les consignes, p. 283-284).

k Le précis grammatical, volontairement court, permet à l’élève de consolider ses bases,

compléter ses connaissances, mieux comprendre le fonctionnement de la langue anglaise.

k Les verbes irréguliers ont été enregistrés sur le CD classe n° 3 (piste 33) pour offrir

un modèle phonologique et faciliter l’apprentissage des élèves.

8

V. Différencier entraînement et évaluation

Le Workbook est un outil pour que l’élève devienne autonome lorsqu’il s’agit d’activités de

réception, compréhension écrite et orale et production orale.

1) C’est pourquoi les fiches fournies sont des fiches d’entraînement et non d’évaluation.

Les fiches proposées ne visent pas à obtenir la bonne réponse, à vérifier tout de suite la

compréhension. Elles partent du repérage que les élèves peuvent faire, puis du classement

d’informations / données. Une fois ce repérage effectué, l’élève peut essayer de tisser des

réseaux de sens. Comprendre est un cheminement, implique de bâtir du sens. Lorsqu’il

écoute un document sonore, l’élève perçoit des chaînes de sons et repère des indices,

qu’il va mettre en relation. Il va émettre des hypothèses à partir des indices repérés, des

mots porteurs de sens. L’activité de compréhension orale consiste à faire émerger du sens.

Il faut donc encourager l’élève à repérer et s’appuyer sur le connu, à classer les éléments

entendus, et accepter l’idée d’une reconstitution progressive du sens. Il s’agit également

pour l’élève d’acquérir des stratégies pour gérer l’inconnu ; il nous faut donc l’entraîner à

se forger des stratégies d’écoute qui lui permettent de devenir autonome.

Il est aussi essentiel de faire prendre conscience aux élèves des parallèles avec la compréhension

écrite. Certains processus mentaux sont communs et peuvent donc être transférables d’une

compétence à l’autre. La démarche est la même en compréhension écrite : repérer certains

éléments clés, tisser des réseaux de sens, s’appuyer sur la dérivation, la composition, le contexte

pour deviner le sens des mots inconnus. Là aussi, il y a des zones d’ombre à accepter.

Pour que l’élève soit actif, nous prévoyons des tâches qu’il aura à accomplir pendant l’écoute.

Ces tâches encadrent l’écoute, facilitent la concentration et dirigent son attention sur les

points essentiels.

2) Les rubriques Action! du Workbook visent à encadrer la parole de l’élève, à lui donner les

outils suffisants pour prendre la parole en cours. Elles renforcent l’autonomie de l’élève et le

mettent en confiance pour lui permettre de prendre la parole. Cette phase est capitale.

VI. Les périphériques

1) Un DVD-Rom propose 12 vidéos d’une durée totale de 25 minutes, rattachées aux

unités, accompagnées de fiches d’entraînement, de corrigés, de pistes d’exploitation

pédagogique, de scripts et d’informations complémentaires (le Fichier présent réunit les

exploitations pédagogiques et les fiches). La partie Rom du DVD propose un appareil

pédagogique complet, permettant de voir simultanément les vidéos, les scripts et les

différentes ressources pédagogiques. Grâce à cet outil multimédia, l’enseignant peut

prendre connaissance facilement de toutes les ressources proposées pour l’étude d’une

vidéo lorsqu’il prépare son cours, puis de les vidéoprojeter en classe pendant la séance.

2) Seize transparents et leur livret d’accompagnement sont également disponibles.

3) Les trois CD classe comprennent des documents authentiques, tous les

enregistrements nécessaires à la réalisation des activités du manuel, les verbes irréguliers

et toutes les rubriques Help!

Les unités du manuel ont été testées et les mises en œuvre proposées et détaillées dans

ce Fichier sont le fruit de nos expériences en classe.

Nous sommes très intéressés par vos remarques, suggestions et critiques sur cet ouvrage.

(Meeting Point, Éditions Hatier, 8 rue d’Assas, 75278 Paris Cedex 06)

Les auteurs

Unités du manuel

SONG OF MYSELFUNIT

1

UNIT 1 • 1 1

Song of myselfS’exprimer à l’oral en continu :les descripteurs du CECRL

Niveau A2 Niveau B1

Grille d’auto-évaluation

Je peux utiliser une série de phrases ou

d’expression pour décrire en termes simples ma famille et d’autres gens,

mes conditions de vie, ma situation

actuelle.

Ma prononciation, parfois encore

hésitante, me permet de me faire

comprendre en général.

Je peux m’exprimer de manière

simple pour raconter des expériences et des événements.

Je peux donner brièvement les

raisons de mes opinions et projets.

Je peux raconter l’intrigue d’un livre

ou d’un film et exprimer mes réactions.

Ma prononciation est assez bonne

pour me faire comprendre.

Étendue du lexique

Possède un répertoire restreint, peut communiquer en termes simples sur des situations concrètes

de la vie quotidienne (informations

personnelles et familiales), peut décrire

son environnement proche. Utilise des

structures élémentaires, des blocs lexicalisés et des phrases simples.

Montre une bonne maîtrise du vocabulaire, malgré des erreurs

lorsqu’il s’agit d’exprimer une

pensée plus complexe. Peut

combiner de nouvelles expressions.

Peut se servir avec une correction

suffisante de tournures et d’expressions

fréquemment utilisées et associées

à des situations plutôt prévisibles.

Phonologie La prononciation est en général

suffisamment claire pour être

comprise malgré un net accent

français, mais l’interlocuteur devra

parfois faire répéter.

La prononciation est clairement

intelligible même si un accent

étranger est quelquefois perceptible

et si des erreurs de prononciation

surviennent occasionnellement.

Correction Utilise des structures simples

correctement, mais fait encore des

erreurs élémentaires qui ne gênent

pas le sens.

Peut se servir avec une correction

suffisante d’un répertoire

de tournures et expressions

fréquemment utilisées et associées

à des situations plutôt prévisibles.

Discours structuré et organisé

Peut raconter une histoire ou décrire quelque chose avec une simple liste de

points successifs.

Les connecteurs logiques utilisés sont

simples : « et », « mais » et « parce que ».

Peut enchaîner quelques points

et donner des explications.

Aisance à l’oral

Peut se faire comprendre dans

une brève intervention, même si

les pauses et les faux démarrages

sont nombreux. A recours à des

reformulations et des gestes pour

combler le manque de lexique.

Peut s’exprimer avec une certaine aisance, malgré quelques problèmes

de formulation ayant pour conséquence

des pauses et des redémarrages.

Peut faire un exposé s’il a été préparé à l’avance.

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

1 2 • UNIT 1

Nous avons choisi de commencer l’année avec deux unités plus courtes pour faciliter

la transition avec la classe de troisième. Parler de soi, de ses goûts a été traité au collège

et doit donc être familier aux élèves. Ce vocabulaire concret sera rebrassé et approfondi

au cours de l’unité. Nous avons en outre sélectionné des thèmes qui devraient intéresser

les adolescents de cette tranche d’âge : musique, téléréalité…

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Se présenter, parler de soi, de ses goûts,

de ses passe-temps et des raisons pour

lesquelles on souhaite participer au casting

d’une émission de télévision

Échanges • Lien social

k se présenter, présenter les autres (nom,

âge, nationalité...) (p. 18)

k se décrire physiquement (p. 18)

k parler de soi (p. 18-20)

k parler de ses goûts (p. 19-20)

k parler de ses loisirs (p. 19-21)

k parler de ses habitudes (p. 22)

k les émissions de téléréalité américaines

(p. 21)

k Check your vocabulary (p. 19)

k le présent simple (p. 22)

k repérage des mots accentués (p. 20)

k repérage des liaisons (p. 20)

k désirs et souhaits

k exprimer ses goûts

k capacité

Workbook

X

XX

XX

Fichesphotocopiables

X

X

UNIT 1 • 1 3

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe.

Lire

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

k Personality quiz (p. 19)k “I am” poems (p. 20)k Real TV, émissions de téléréalité

aux États-Unis (p. 21)

k Tune in, passeports authentiques (p. 18)k faire connaissance avec quelqu’un (p. 18)

k Personality quiz (p. 19)

k commenter un document iconographique

(p. 20-21)

k présenter quelqu’un (p. 18)

k se présenter, parler de soi et de ses

goûts (p. 18 et 23)

k réagir à un quiz (p. 19)

k lire un poème à haute voix (p. 20)

k faire un compte rendu oral d’un document

sonore (p. 21)

k Your task (p. 23)

k écrire un “I am poem” (p. 20)

k écrire un paragraphe sur la vie quotidienne

(p. 22)

k Get ready, p. 18

k Train your ears, p. 20

k A man for the job (p. 21)k site compagnon, Please meet Kareem

Poor Little Rich Girls, extrait d’une émission

de téléréalité (p. 21)

Workbook

X

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

XX

X

X

MANUEL k P. 18

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

1 4 • UNIT 1

TUNE IN!> Mise en œuvre : cette activité de sensibilisation pourra être menée rapidement.

1. Get ready

Dans un premier temps, on demandera aux élèves de lire rapidement les passeports p. 18.

Ils doivent repérer les informations principales concernant les personnes.

a. Écoute et prise de notes : on fera écouter quatre courts enregistrements et on demandera

aux élèves de prendre des notes pour identifier les enregistrements correspondant aux deux

passeports. Pour aider les élèves dans leur prise de notes, on pourra fournir la grille suivante.

Cette grille pourra être (rétro)projetée à l’aide d’un transparent ou d’un vidéoprojecteur. On

pourra donner un transparent à un élève qui complétera la grille au fur et à mesure de l’écoute.

On reprendra la grille et on la complètera, en la corrigeant collectivement au fur et à mesure.

> Script de l’enregistrement

1. I’m Sheila Hutchinson and I’m Jamaican. I was born on February 29th, 1981 in Kingston,

which is the capital of this country. I don’t live in Jamaica because I’m studying in the USA

to become a lawyer. My passport was issued in 2002 because I’m very fond of travelling.

I love visiting foreign countries! I go abroad every summer.

2. My name is Shani Robinson and I was also born in Jamaica on February 29th, but in 1989,

in Manchester, which is also in the southern part of Jamaica. I’m an actuary, though at the

moment, I work in France in a lycée. I needed a passport to go to France, that’s why my

passport is fairly recent: It was issued in July 2008 and will expire in 2018. I hope to have

visited many European countries by that time!

3. My name is Sarah Kendal Stine, and I am an American citizen. I was born on January 7th,

1986 in Alabama. My passport was issued in New Orleans, Louisiana because it is the state

where I live and study now. My passport was issued in 2003 and is valid for ten years.

4. I’m Debbie Steiner. I was born on June 7th, 1981 in New Orleans, and I’m Anglo-American.

I live and work as a teacher in Montgomery, Alabama which is famous because Martin Luther

King was born there. I don’t really like travelling but I needed a passport to visit my English

family next summer, so my passport is brand-new: It was issued in January 2009 and will

hopefully last until 2019 if I don’t lose it before then. I’m so careless!

Full nameNationalityDate of birthAgePlace of birthResidenceJob

Date passport was issued

Date passport will expire

UNIT 1 • 1 5

b. Synthèse : les élèves doivent maintenant présenter les deux jeunes personnes qu’ils ont

écoutées à l’aide de leurs notes. Cela donnera lieu à une prise de parole en continu sur

chaque personne qui pourra servir de base à la trace écrite.

Productions possibles : Shani is Jamaican / a Jamaican citizen / comes from Jamaica,

a Carribean island. She was born in Manchester, on February 1989, she is in her twenties,

early twenties. She is an actuary (a statistician of an insurance company who calculates risks

and premiums). Her passport is valid until 2018.

2. Tell me more

> Mise en œuvre

k Avec une classe fragile il sera peut-être utile de réviser les constructions interrogatives.

On pourra commencer par un brainstorming afin de revoir rapidement les questions les plus

usuelles (nom, âge, adresse, nationalité, téléphone…) que les élèves manipulent depuis la 6e.

k On utilisera ensuite la fiche ci-dessous, soit (rétro)projetée, soit distribuée en copie

à la classe.

k Travail en binômes : les élèves pourront s’interroger pour apprendre à mieux se connaître.

Vous pourrez utiliser la grille page suivante (fiche photocopiable sur le site compagnon).

N. B. : tous les élèves auront la même fiche de travail.

Find the questions with the help of these prompts.

Name What…?

Age How…?

Date of birth When were \wEr\…?

Place of birth Where \weEr\…?

Nationality What…?

Residence (address)

Where…?

What…?

Height How tall \tO…l\…?

Family (brothers / sisters) How many…?

Parents’ occupation What’s your…? Where does… mother / father?

Music What… favourite…?

Books What…?

TV series What is…?

Travels What English-speaking countries…? Where…? Have…?

Hobbies How… your free time?

Dreams What…? (dream of + V-ing / hope to + V)

Qualities What are…?

Defects What are…?

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

1 6 • UNIT 1

1. Before speaking, work on your own. You have two minutes to fill in the grid with

information about yourself. You will use these elements to answer your friend’s questions.

About me:Name My…

Age I am…

Date of birth I was born...

Place of birth I…

Nationality I…

Residence (address)

I live in a town \taÁn\, in a village \"vIlIdZ\, in a city.

I live at…

Height I am… tall.

Family (brothers / sisters)I have…

… only child / the eldest… / older than… / younger than...

Parents’ occupationMy… a…

My... works in / for...

Music My favourite…

Books My...

TV series I love / enjoy…

Travels I have visited / been…

HobbiesDreamsQualities I think I am...

Defects I am...

2. Interview! Ask your friend about himself / herself and fill in this grid.

About my friend:Name Age Date of birth Place of birth Nationality Residence (address)Height Family (brothers / sisters)Parents’ occupationMusicBooksTV seriesTravelsHobbiesDreamsQualitiesDefects

MANUEL k P. 19

UNIT 1 • 1 7

k Présentation croisée : enfin les élèves pourront présenter leur partenaire à la classe. Ils

pourront ainsi utiliser la troisième personne du singulier : s/he lives, s/he hopes, s/he has...

3. What about you?

On demandera aux élèves de remplir la fiche de renseignements les concernant dans le

Workbook p. 5. Cette activité pourra servir de « fiche de début d’année » faite en classe

ou donnée comme travail à la maison.

Travail de groupe / module : on pourra aussi demander aux élèves une prise de parole en

continu (se présenter en s’appuyant simplement sur cette fiche remplie).

1. PERSONALITY QUIZ

Anticipation à partir de l’illustration

On demandera aux élèves de formuler des suggestions quant au contenu du texte qu’ils

vont lire.

Productions possibles : I can see three young boys sitting on a bench, in a park. I can see

teenagers relaxing in a park. I can see three teenagers listening to an iPod/music. They

share headphones so they can listen to the same music. They may be listening to new types

of music. The scene must take place at the weekend or after school because the boys look

relaxed / because they don’t wear uniforms. They seem to have plenty of time to enjoy

themselves / to have fun. They look like any teenagers. They are dressed like any teenagers

with jeans and T-shirts. Their clothes are casual. We / I can easily identify with them because

they behave as we / I do. The text may deal with teenagers’ tastes and activities. It may

be about music / listening to music. The text may be about teenagers’ behaviour. The text

deals with what teenagers do in their free time. The topic may be teenagers and their leisure

activities / hobbies / pastimes.

1. What’s your music personality?

> Mise en œuvre

k Lecture silencieuse. Les élèves liront le quiz et répondront aux questions puis prendront

individuellement connaissance de l’analyse correspondant à leur résultat.

k Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, ou si certains élèves ont des problèmes de

compréhension, on pourra demander de trouver les équivalents anglais des mots suivants

(dans l’ordre du texte) :

– paroles d’une chanson (lyrics) – genre de musique (kind of music)

– passer du temps (spend time) – se moquer de (don’t care)

– air / mélodie (tune) – se préoccuper de (be concerned with)

– groupe / orchestre (band) – apprendre à connaître (get to know)

– rechercher des informations – atteindre ses objectifs

(researching information) (achieve one’s goals)

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

Check your vocabulary

1 8 • UNIT 1

2. React

Productions possibles : The quiz is well-made, relevant, too obvious, too simple…

Prolongements possibles :

La question 5 (What is the role of music in your life?) pourra être davantage exploitée

et donner lieu à un sondage.

a. Mise en œuvre du sondage : on pourra faire bâtir un sondage à la classe en dehors

des heures de cours, les résultats pourront être donnés en classe et commentés par tous.

Voici quelques pistes.

– When do you listen to music? While you are doing your homework, on your computer, on

your way to school, in your bathroom, in your room, during the breaks at school?

– What influences you in your choice of music? Your friends, ads on TV, magazines, TV

shows, the radio stations you listen to?

– What is your favourite type of music?

b. Exploitation du sondage : les résultats pourront être présentés à la classe et commentés

à l’aide de transparents ou d’un PowerPoint élève.

c. Trace écrite possible : Listening to music plays an important part in our lives. We spend

a lot of time / of our spare time listening to music or even singing. We are addicted to music,

we can’t do without our iPod / without listening to music every day. We listen to music when

we are feeling depressed, stressed, nervous, when we are in a good / bad mood… We are all

music lovers / very keen on music…

Appropriation et mémorisation du lexique du quiz grâce à la fiche ci-dessous (fiche

photocopiable sur le site compagnon).

Donnez les équivalents anglais de ces mots.a. paroles d’une chanson : g. genre de musique :

b. passer du temps : h. se moquer de :

c. air / mélodie : i. se préoccuper de :

d. répéter (un spectacle) : j. apprendre à connaître :

e. groupe / orchestre : k. atteindre ses objectifs :

f. rechercher des informations :

Traduisez ces phrases.a. Quelle sorte de musique aimes-tu ?

b. Je me moque de ce que les autres pensent de mes goûts.

c. Il faut du temps pour apprendre à connaître quelqu’un.

Classez ces mots en fonction de la voyelle -a- soulignée. Attention : il y a un intrus.appreciate • favourite • party • equally • chatting • bad • about • name • started •

information • attractive • able • taste • same • care

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

\œ\ cat \eI\ snake \A…\ shark \E\ gorilla

UNIT 1 • 1 9

Lisez la transcription phonétique, puis écrivez le mot correspondant. \mju…"zISEn\ \"kØltSEr\ \Æp∏…sE"nœlIti\ \"O…gEnaIzd\ \E"tSi…v\ \mIs"tIErIEs\ \"bIznIs\ \E"pIErEns\

Travaillez sur la formation des mots et complétez le tableau qui suit. Puis vérifiez à l’aide d’un dictionnaire.

Rappels1. Au début d’un mot (= préfixe) 2. À la fin d’un mot ( = suffixe)

k Adjectif : un-, dis-, im-, in- k Adjectif ou adverbe : -ly

( = préfixes négatifs) k Adjectif : -ed, -y

k Nom : -ness, -(at)ion, -ance, -(i)ty

CORRIGÉ

a. lyrics g. kind of music

b. spend time h. not care

c. tune i. be concerned about

d. rehearse j. get to know

e. band k. achieve one’s goals

f. search information

a. What kind of music do you like?

b. I don’t care about what other people think about my tastes.

c. It takes time to get to know somebody.

L’intrus est le mot care \k”Er\.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Nom Adjectif (positif) Adjectif (négatif) Adverbe

important

honesty

organized

tidy

fitness

loyal

\œ\ cat \eI\ snake \A…\ shark \E\ gorilla

chatting • bad favourite • name •

information • able •

taste • same

party • started appreciate • equally

• about • attractive

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

2 0 • UNIT 1

\mju…"zISEn\ musician \"kØltSEr\ culture \Æp∏…sE"nœlIti\ personality

\"O…gEnaIzd\ organized \E"tSi…v\ achieve \mIs"tIErIEs\ mysterious

\"bIznIs\ business \E"pIErEns\ appearance

2. “I AM” POEMS> Mise en œuvre possible

On pourra exploiter les deux illustrations en posant la question suivante : What sort of person

does each picture correspond to?

k Cette question pourra être traitée individuellement, en binômes, ou collectivement.

k On laissera aux élèves un temps de réflexion pour chercher des idées et produire des

énoncés (sous forme de notes).

k Un élève, ou un rapporteur de binômes, prendra la parole en continu. Une reprise

collective pourra avoir ensuite lieu.

Productions possibles : The first picture corresponds to someone who loves solitude,

deserted beaches, being on his / her own, being lonely, away from civilization. This person

certainly enjoys going on holiday on an exotic island, fishing, swimming, sailing, scuba-diving.

This person loves nature, living close to nature, in the wilderness. It’s about a surfer, someone

who enjoys taking risks / having thrilling adventures.

The second picture corresponds to somebody who loves sportscars and surfing. It reminds

me of California or Hawaii because we can see beaches and palm trees. This person enjoys

surfing and speed.

1. Me, myself and I

Les élèves liront ensuite silencieusement les deux poèmes et remarqueront la structure de

chacun d’entre eux.

On pourra alors procéder à un exercice de mémorisation. On demandera aux élèves de

mémoriser un vers chacun dans le premier (facile) ou le second poème (plus difficile). À la

chaîne, ils réciteront ensuite le vers qu’ils ont mémorisé, et l’on pourra aussi reconstituer

tout le poème.

4.

5.

MANUEL k P. 20

Nom Adjectif (positif) Adjectif (négatif) Adverbe

importance important unimportant importantly

honesty honest dishonest honestly

organization organized disorganized

tidiness tidy untidy tidily

fitness fit unfit

loyalty loyal disloyal loyally

UNIT 1 • 2 1

2. Train your ears

Ce travail sur l’accentuation et les liaisons consonne-voyelle préparera l’activité 3. b.

3. Over to you

a. Les élèves échangeront sur les raisons de leur préférence pour tel ou tel poème. Insister pour

qu’ils justifient leurs choix. Cette activité pourra être menée en binômes ou en groupes.

Productions possibles : I prefer the first poem because I’m like the first teenager, I enjoy

travelling to new places, discovering the world. Unlike / Contrary to the second teenager

I’m very tidy and I’m sporty.

I prefer the second poem because I’m just like her. I love going to the beach and I can get

angry when people laugh at me. However I hate jazz. I prefer listening to R&B / rap music.

b. Les élèves liront à haute voix le poème de leur choix. On pourra faire un enregistrement

de leur lecture en salle multimédia pour qu’ils travaillent leur prononciation.

c. L’écriture du poème pourra être réalisée en individuel ou en binôme, en classe ou à la maison

avec ou sans l’aide de la fiche du Workbook, p. 6.

Une fois les poèmes rédigés, le professeur pourra en choisir un, l’écrire ou le faire écrire

sur un transparent, le (rétro)projeter et le corriger collectivement. Les meilleurs poèmes

pourront être affichés dans la classe.

Production possible :

Pragmatic but zany1

I am pragmatic but zany

I’d like to learn the tango which originated in Argentina

I must read more Dickens who is one of Britain’s greatest authors

I mustn’t be impolite since that is unbecoming of a lady

I am pragmatic but zany

I dream of becoming a playwright

I try to be well-informed

I worry about my grandmother who is 85 and lives alone

I remember Hurricane Gilbert which ravaged the Caribbean

I am pragmatic but zany

I can be angry when I disappoint myself

I can be friendly when I am at a party

I feel sad when it is overcast

I feel moved when reading Baudelaire

I believe in living within one’s means

I love pineapple juice and Jane Austen novels

1. crazy or unusual in a way that is amusing

Shani Robinson, 2009

MANUEL k P. 21

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

2 2 • UNIT 1

3. I AM THE MAN OF YOUR FUTURE1. Get ready

> Exploitation de la photo : Speaker’s Corner

k On pourra demander aux élèves de faire une recherche rapide sur Speaker’s Corner.

k La reprise en classe donnera lieu à une prise de parole en continu.

Productions possibles : Speaker’s Corner is an area in the northeast corner of Hyde Park

in London, where ordinary people can go, especially on Sunday mornings, to make a speech

about any subject, and other people listen to them and sometimes argue with them. People

often stand on a box to make their speeches. For over 150 years it has been one of London’s

most unique and eccentric attractions. It is an open forum. Speakers are allowed to speak as

long as the police consider their speeches lawful. It is one of Britain’s most famous places for

public debate and discussion.

a. Productions possibles : The man is standing on a ladder and is holding a board. He is standing

on a ladder because he wants to be seen and heard by the crowd. The message is very clear.

This man is not gullible, he doesn’t trust anybody. He must be cautious, diffident, very suspicious.

He must also have a good sense of humour to write this tongue-in-cheek message.

b. Réponses : 1d • 2a • 3b • 4e • 5f • 6c

2. A man for the job

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Teachers, friends and fellow classmates, I stand before you today to promote myself as a

potential candidate for class president.

➼ Part 2 Do you feel that your needs, opinions and ideas go unnoticed? Would you like to make

changes around the school? Cheaper prices in the cafeteria? Longer breaks between

classes? Less homework? Well, I am just the person to voice these ideas and to get them

moving. Your vote will bring the changes you want to this school.

➼ Part 3But you may be asking, why vote for me? I am a highly reliable and responsible person.

Working as a referee forces you to make important decisions and apply the rules equally

to everyone. You can count on me to carry out your plans. A vote for me is a vote for your

future.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK, P. 7-8

I. A man for the job

➼ PART 1

teachers • friends • classmates • candidate • class • president1.

UNIT 1 • 2 3

➼ PART 2

changes • prices • cafeteria • breaks • classes • homework

k cheaper – longer – less

k prices – breaks – homework

k When elected as class president, Sebastian will do his best to have cheaper products

at the cafeteria, longer breaks between classes and less homework.

➼ PART 3

But you may be asking, why vote for me?

a. reliable • responsible

b. referee • important • decisions • apply • rules • count • carry out • plans • vote •

future

You can count on me to carry out your plans. A vote for me is a vote for your future.

II. Action!k Recap 1: Sebastian plans to promote himself as a future candidate for class president.

That’s why he addresses his friends and fellow classmates and teachers too.

k Recap 2: Sebastian is ready to support his schoolmates to make changes at school. He

wants to promote their needs, opinions and ideas because many students are not satisfied

and think the prices in the cafeteria are too expensive, the breaks between classes are too

short and they are given too much homework.

k Recap 3: As a referee, Sebastian often makes important decisions. He has to apply the

rules to everyone. So he is a responsible young man and his school friends can trust him

and count on him: He is reliable. Because of all his skills and qualities, Sebastian can voice

other people’s opinions and get them moving.

3. Recap

> Mise en œuvre

k L’élève s’appuiera sur ses notes et les amorces données dans le manuel.

k Pendant qu’un élève prendra la parole, on pourra demander aux autres de prendre des

notes sur ce qui est dit sur un transparent. Ces derniers pourront avoir des tâches ciblées,

repérer les erreurs de prononciation, lexique et grammaire. On pourra procéder à une

reprise collective avec correction des erreurs les plus importantes. Les notes prises sur

le transparent pourront être (rétro)projetées et corrigées collectivement. Elles pourront

ensuite servir de base à une trace écrite.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Who is Sebastian speaking to? What for?

teachers • friends • classmates candidate • class president

Job outside school Role played in his job Qualities needed

referee apply rules •

make important decisions

reliable (you can count on him) •

responsible

MANUEL k P. 21

MANUEL k P. 22

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

2 4 • UNIT 1

Productions possibles : The recording deals with Sebastian’s plan to promote himself

as candidate for class president.

First, he explains that he can be a spokesperson for his friends. He voices his friends and

fellow classmates’ ideas, needs, opinions and demands. Then, he asks them if they would

like to make changes around the school because he wants to have cheaper prices at the

cafeteria, for example. He can defend them and improve their working conditions. Finally he

mentions the fact that he works as a referee in his free time so he’s used to applying the rules

to everyone and to making important decisions.

He also wants to convince them he’s the right person for the job. He insists on his skills and

qualities because he wants to be sure his classmates know he’s responsible, trustworthy and

reliable. He gives the reasons why he wants to become class president.

k La prestation de l’élève pourra être évaluée par ses camarades. Ils trouveront p. 54 et

55 du manuel les structures utiles pour commenter ce qui a été dit.

k On pourra aussi se servir de la grille fournie p. 55 pour évaluer la prise de parole.

4. REAL TV1. Read and match

Réponses : 1B • 2C • 3A

2. Watch a video

Voir p. 412-413 et 431-432.

LANGUAGE AT WORK> Le présent simple

Sujet (3e personne du singulier) + verbe + sSujet (autres personnes) + verbe

Forme affirmative : I come

Formes négatives : I don’t understand / she is not

Formes interrogatives : do you come? does it mean? does she do?

On utilise un auxiliaire aux formes interrogative et négative (does à la troisième personne

du singulier, do aux autres personnes). On n’utilise aucun auxiliaire à la forme affirmative.

twice a year • every summer • always • never

Le temps utilisé est le présent simple. Il exprime la répétition d’une action, la récurrence

d’une action qui en devient habituelle.

Il n’y a pas d’indication explicite de temps car cela n’est pas nécessaire. On comprend grâce

au contexte (au sens du verbe entre autres) que l’action évoquée est une caractéristique

du sujet (enjoy renvoie aux goûts du sujet qui ne sont pas soumis à un changement fréquent,

de même pour live, on ne déménage pas tous les jours ; quant au verbe look, il évoque là

clairement une caractéristique du sujet de l’énoncé).

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 23

UNIT 1 • 2 5

a. On utilise le présent simple pour faire le portrait de quelqu’un, pour parler de ses goûts (1. a), de son apparence (4. a), de tout ce qui le caractérise (4. c).b. On emploie aussi le présent simple pour parler d’une habitude, d’une action qui se répète (3. a, b, c et d).

> Practice

Productions possibles : When they arrive at work, my masters always check their e-mails.

After that, their secretary gives them their mail, they open it and read it. Then they check

their diary to see what appointments or meetings they have and they start working. At around

10:00, I know they never miss the break and they have tea or coffee with their colleagues.

They occasionnally phone each other. After the break they usually go to their meetings or

appointments outside. They are always stressed / freaked out when they have to present a

new project in front of their partners or rivals!

At lunchtime they manage to eat out twice a week together so they go to a nice restaurant to

unwind / relax. Or they have lunch at the cafeteria with the rest of the staff they work with.

In the afternoon, they start working again and it’s really hectic as they say they never have

time to rest.

Every day they go back home at 8:00. They have dinner at 8:30. They only eat out at weekends

because they are exhausted. They never go to bed before 11:30 because the only moment

when they can talk and sort out everyday problems is in the evening.

YOUR TASK > Mises en œuvre possibles

k Exploitation de l’image : prise de parole en continuProductions possibles : The young lady seems upset. She may be crying. She’s hiding her face

because she has tears in her eyes / because she’s ashamed of herself. She knows she won’t be

able to face the millions of spectators. As she was too stressed, she may have forgotten the lyrics

of the song she was about to sing / she may be unable to sing. It was probably the first time she

was singing in front of an audience and she couldn’t face the situation. She must have been too

stressed. She may also be crying out of joy because she has just won an important contest.

k Travail autonome : écoute du document oral sur le site compagnon (Please meet Kareem) et travail sur la fiche de compréhension orale (voir p. 458).

k Travail en modulesL’heure de demi-groupe pourra être utilisée pour permettre à plusieurs élèves, voire toute la

classe, de prendre la parole en continu.

k On donnera un temps de préparation de dix à quinze minutes. L’élève suivra les étapes

suggérées dans le manuel et relira les conseils donnés avant de se lancer.

k Pendant qu’un élève prendra la parole, on pourra donner aux autres des tâches ciblées

(repérer les erreurs de prononciation, lexique et grammaire).

k La prestation de l’élève pourra être évaluée par ses camarades. Ils trouveront p. 54 et

55 du manuel les structures utiles pour commenter ce qui a été dit.

k On pourra aussi se servir de la grille fournie p. 55 pour évaluer la prise de parole et

attribuer une note.

5.

UNIT

1 SONG OF MYSELF

2 6 • UNIT 1

k Si l’établissement est équipé d’un labo multimédia• Les élèves liront les consignes et les conseils afin de s’assurer qu’ils ont bien compris

la démarche à suivre. On insistera sur le fait qu’ils ne doivent rédiger aucune phrase mais

uniquement prendre des notes pour leur prestation.

• Ils disposeront ensuite de 30 à 40 minutes pour rassembler leurs idées et préparer leur

présentation.

• Ils pourront ensuite s’enregistrer en salle multimédia. Ils auront 10 à 15 minutes pour

s’entraîner et procéder à l’enregistrement final qui ne devra pas dépasser 2 minutes et que

le professeur copiera sur sa clé USB pour en faire la correction.

> Évaluation de la tâche

À titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer

sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de points attribué à chaque critère.

Nom : Classe :

Total = / 20 points

Critères d’évaluation de la prise de parole en continu Oui Non1. Prise en compte de l’auditoire a. A regardé l’auditoire en s’adressant à lui.

b. A parlé sans lire ses notes.

c. A parlé distinctement et assez fort pour qu’on l’entende.

111

000

2. Qualité du discoursa. A essayé de garder la parole, en limitant les pauses et les faux démarrages.

b. A fait un exposé précis, complet et clair.

c. A enchaîné plusieurs phrases à la suite, avec des liens logiques.

d. A donné son point de vue.

e. A utilisé des gap fillers en cas d’hésitation.

12111

00000

3. Langue orale employéea. A fait attention à accentuer les mots porteurs de sens.

b. A respecté les groupes de souffle.

c. A respecté le rythme (formes pleines et réduites).

d. A pris garde à prononcer correctement les phonèmes des mots nouveaux.

2111

0000

4. Lexique et grammairea. A utilisé un lexique approprié et précis.

b. A eu recours à des périphrases pour compenser le lexique inconnu.

c. A limité ses erreurs, qui ne gênent pas la compréhension.

d. A été capable de s’auto-corriger.

2211

0000

HALL OF FAMEUNIT

2

UNIT 2 • 2 7

Hall of fameNous poursuivons ici la phase de révision et d’approfondissement initiée avec l’unité 1,

Song of myself. C’est pourquoi cette unité ne compte que six pages, comme la précédente.

Nous introduisons ici un texte littéraire authentique de Sue Townsend (p. 26-27 du manuel)

avec fiche d’entraînement à la compréhension écrite. L’étude de documents iconographiques

pourra aussi être abordée au cours de ces pages, notamment grâce à l’illustration du texte

littéraire et au tableau de Rockwell servant de follow-up work au texte et reproduit dans le

Workbook ainsi que sur un transparent.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à l’expression orale en continu, voir p. 11.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Créer une galerie de héros / célébrités

admirés par la classe. Défendre son choix

devant la classe.

Échanges • Lien social

k genres cinématographiques (p. 24)

k description physique (p. 25)

k relations parents / enfants (p. 26-27)

k tristesse et solitude (p. 26-27)

k comparatif des adjectifs (p. 28)

k le prétérit : temps du récit (p. 24

et 26-27)

k accentuation des mots porteurs de

sens : Prepare your task (p. 24, 25 et 27)

et Your task (p. 29)

k exprimer ses goûts

k exprimer son accord et son désaccord

k donner son point de vue

k comparer

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

MANUEL k P. 24

UNIT

2 HALL OF FAME

2 8 • UNIT 2

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe.

TUNE IN!

1. Your favourites

> Mise en œuvre

I. EXPLOITATION DES DEUX AFFICHES

a. Le professeur fera observer en silence les deux affiches.

b. On pourra diviser la classe en deux et donner à chaque groupe une image à observer

de près. On demandera ensuite aux élèves de fermer leurs livres et de dresser la liste

de tous les éléments qu’ils auront remarqués et mémorisés sur leur affiche.

Pour localiser les différents éléments sur l’affiche, les élèves pourront se reporter aux

p. 281-282 du manuel (« Commenter un document visuel »).

Lire

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Écouter

Manuel

k Happy Birthday, extrait de roman (p. 26-27)

k Tune in, Your favourites (p. 24)k The Actors Studio (p. 25)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un document

sonore (p. 24)

k décrire et comparer (p. 25)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un récit (p. 27)k commenter un tableau de N. Rockwell,

(p. 27)

k présenter quelqu’un de façon

convaincante (p. 29)

k un paragraphe sur une affiche de film

ou sa star préférée (p. 24)

k Tune in, Your favourites (p. 24)

Workbook

X

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

XX

X

UNIT 2 • 2 9

On pourra classer ces éléments dans une grille de ce type.

Productions possibles :k Affiche 1

k Affiche 2

c. Ce sera le moment privilégié pour introduire ou réactiver du Classroom English : I don’t

know, I can’t remember, What’s the English for…?, How do you say… in English?, Can you

spell it please?, Could you repeat?, I think, I suppose...

d. Les élèves pourront alors définir le genre cinématographique de ces films, à l’aide du Help!

p. 24 et de la p. 279 du manuel (« Commenter une scène de film »).

L’exercice 1 de la p. 279 pourra d’ailleurs être donné en travail à la maison afin d’introduire

ou de revoir le lexique du cinéma.

Enfin, les élèves pourront définir l’angle de prise de vue utilisé en se référant à la p. 280

de leur manuel (paragraphe « Plans et angles »).

TitlePeople / CharactersStriking elementsActorsDateDominant colours

Title Pirates of the Caribbean / The Curse of the Black Pearl

People / Characters girl, three men (two young men, an older man)

Striking elementspirates, sword, boat, ship, fight, battle, boats on fire, skulls, lying

on the ground, headband, a hat, a ring

Actors Johnny Depp and Keira Knightley

Date July 9

Dominant coloursBlack and red (the sea seems to be on fire), there’s very little

light, the whole picture is very dark.

Title Juno

People / Characters Two teenagers

Striking elements

– A brown sweatshirt, yellow shorts, mid-calf socks, black snea-

kers, yellow wristband, yellow headband

– Boy taller than the girl

– An orange and white striped T-shirt, a pregnant teenager,

blue jeans, a brown skirt, black sneakers with orange shoelaces,

brown leather jacket

Actors Ellen Page and Michael Cera

Dates December

Dominant colours Yellow, orange and green

UNIT

2 HALL OF FAME

3 0 • UNIT 2

II. ÉCOUTE DE L’ENREGISTREMENT

À l’aide de la fiche d’entraînement du Workbook (p. 9-10), les élèves repéreront les indices

clés et pourront citer les titres de film évoqués.

Les deux premiers enregistrements ont été divisés en deux parties. Si les élèves ont trouvé

le titre du film à la fin de la première partie, il est inutile de leur faire entendre la seconde.

> Script de l’enregistrement1. Part 1In my favourite movie the main character is a sailor who’s very funny. There is also one

actor who plays the good guy stereotype. He’s a sword maker and is also very good at

sword fighting. And of course there is also the beautiful young lady who is the daughter

of the governor of an island. She’s also very independent.

Part 2The basic plot of the movie is this: The young lady is kidnapped by the cursed crew of a ship

and the good guy sets out to get her back. The sailor helps them throughout this adventure

and they all end up finding out what the curse of the ship is all about. My favourite character

in the movie is the sailor because he is very funny and his wit and his intelligence help him to

beat many of his enemies.

2. Part 1One of my favourite films is about a young boy who must go on a long journey to save his

country and his people. They are in danger and threatened by evil people and creatures and

he must destroy a very powerful piece of jewellery which can only be destroyed in one way

and in one specific place. However the jewellery has evil powers and tries to lure the boy

into becoming evil.

Part 2The hero is of average height with bright blue eyes, curly brown hair and pointed ears.

He’s a good-hearted person, soft-spoken, a little naïve but kind. He has a companion

shorter than he is, and a bit plump with blond hair. He is also less wise but he has good

intentions, and is a loyal friend.

3. My favourite movie is very witty and the dialogue is well-written. The movie is about a

teenage girl who gets pregnant and decides to have the baby and give it to a good family.

My favourite character is the teenage boy because he reminds me of my friend Cole

from high school. I also loved the movie because it used music from one of my favourite

musicians and her old band.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 9-10)

> TRACK N° 1

➼ PART 1

a) main – sailor – actor – good guy – sword-maker – lady – island – daughter – governor –

independent b) Pirates of the Caribbean

➼ PART 2

young lady – kidnapped – crew – ship – good guy – get back – sailor – help – adventure

Clues: ship, sailor, island Title: Pirates of the Caribbean

1.

2.

UNIT 2 • 3 1

> TRACK N° 2a) boy – long – journey – save – country – evil – people – creatures – powerful – jewellery –

powers b) Who? young boy Goals? long journey to save his country and his people and

destroy a very powerful piece of jewellery which has evil powers Enemies: evil people and

creatures Clues: adventure, quest, fiction Title: The Lord of the Rings

> TRACK N° 3favourite – movie – dialogue – teenage girl – pregnant – decide – baby – give – character –

teenage – boy – reminds – friend – high school – band – music – favourite – musicians

Main character: teenage girl Turning point: gets pregnant Decision: have the baby and

give it to a good family Clues: teenage girl gets pregnant Title: Juno

Approfondissements possibles :1. The first person speaks about the film Pirates of the Caribbean. She mentions / introduces

three characters: a sailor, the good guy, and the lovely girl. The first one is played by Johnny

Depp, the second is Orlando Bloom, and Keira Knightley is the pretty girl. She sums up the

film plot / the story of the film in a few words. It’s all about the girl being kidnapped, and the

adventures that follow.

2. The second interview is about the film The Lord of the Rings; she says she loves Frodo

who is of average height with bright blue eyes, curly brown hair and pointed ears. He is a nice

person. He has got a good friend who is shorter and a bit plump with blond hair. He is very

naïve, but very loyal.

3. The third interview deals with the film Juno. The two main characters are teenagers. First,

there is a girl who gets pregnant and decides to have the baby and give it to a good family,

then there is a boy who is on the poster.

III. RÉACTION PERSONNELLE À CHAQUE AFFICHE

k Production possible : The first poster is more striking, more mysterious, the man in the

middle looks intriguing.

k Les élèves qui ont vu le(s) film(s) pourront en raconter l’histoire (voir résumés ci-dessous).

Pirates of the Carribean: Elizabeth Swann, the daughter of Governor Swann is kidnapped

by a group of pirates led by Captain Barbossa, and taken aboard their ship, The Black Pearl.

Will Turner, the young man who loves Elizabeth, is determined to rescue her. But he can’t do

it alone, so he asks the ship’s captain, Jack Sparrow, to help him. Together they try to find The

Black Pearl. But they soon discover that the captain and crew aren’t average pirates. They have

been cursed to remain between the living and the dead. When they learn that the only thing that

can break the curse is Elizabeth’s blood, Jack and Will race against time and fight to save the

Governor’s daughter.

Juno: The story takes place in the autumn. Juno, a 16-year-old high school junior in Minnesota,

discovers she is pregnant and is going to have a baby with her boyfriend, Bleeker. In the waiting

room of an abortion clinic, Juno decides to give birth and to place the child with an adoptive couple.

She finds a couple, contacts them, then tells her father and step-mother. She carries on going to

school. The chosen parents, trendy yuppies, meet Juno, sign papers, and the year unfolds.

k On enchaînera avec l’opinion des élèves sur ces films et sur le genre cinématographique

qu’ils préfèrent. On se servira du Help! On en profitera pour réviser l’expression du goût et

de la préférence.

1.

2.

UNIT

2 HALL OF FAME

3 2 • UNIT 2

Productions possibles : I haven’t seen this film yet but I have heard it is very good. / I don’t

know this movie.

I quite like this film but I much prefer... I enjoyed watching it last summer.

As for me I am very fond of adventure films because they are so relaxing. I recommend... /

I can’t stand romantic comedies and I usually watch thrillers.

Informations complémentaires Voici les définitions de trois genres cinématographiques et quelques exemples.

k Action films usually include high energy, physical stunts and chases, possibly with

rescues, battles, fights, escapes, destructive crises (floods, explosions, natural disasters,

fires, etc.), non-stop motion, and adventurous, often two-dimensional “good-guy” heroes

(or recently, heroines) battling “bad guys”.

Examples: 48 Hours, Die Hard, Air Force One, Jurassic Park, Speed, The Terminator, Twister...

k Adventure films are usually exciting stories, with new experiences or exotic searches

or expeditions for lost continents, “jungle” and “desert” epics, treasure hunts, disaster films,

or searches for the unknown.

Examples: Apollo 13, The Deep, Indiana Jones and the Temple of Doom, Little Big Man,

Lawrence of Arabia, Robinson Crusoe, Water World...

k Epics (historical dramas, war films) often cover a large expanse of time and deal with an

historical or imagined event, mythic, legendary, or heroic figure. War films show the horror

and heartbreak of war, and actual combat fighting.

Examples: Shakespeare in Love, Bridge on the River Kwai, Butch Cassidy and the Sundance

Kid, Ghandi, Gone with the Wind, Schindler’s List...

2. Your choice

> Mise en œuvre 1

k Cette première tâche intermédiaire (Prepare your task) peut être préparée à la maison

ou en classe. On demandera aux élèves d’apporter un poster, une photo de film ou d’un ac-

teur et de préparer une prise de parole en continu sous forme de mots clés, par exemple :

– Name of the film / star – His / Her personality

– Sort of film – Quick summary of the plot

– Physical description of the hero – Reasons for my choice

Le temps de parole sera d’une minute, une minute trente.

k Pendant qu’un élève s’exprime, on pourra demander aux autres de prendre des notes

sur un transparent, éventuellement en se concentrant sur des points spécifiques (repérer

les erreurs de prononciation, de lexique et de grammaire). On pourra procéder à une

reprise collective avec correction des erreurs les plus importantes. Les notes prises sur le

transparent pourront être (rétro)projetées et corrigées collectivement. Ces notes pourront

ensuite servir de base à une trace écrite.

k Cette question pourra aussi donner lieu à un travail d’expression écrite (80 mots).

Pairwork

UNIT 2 • 3 3

> Mise en œuvre 2

On pourra diviser la classe en deux groupes, ou former des paires d’élèves. Le groupe A ou

l’élève A sera chargé de parler de son film favori ou de sa star préférée au groupe B ou à

l’élève B. Ensuite, ce sera le tour de ce dernier.

k Si la classe est organisée en pairwork, on distribuera la grille ci-dessous (fiche téléchargeable

sur le site compagnon) afin que les élèves s’interrogent mutuellement (révision de la forme

interrogative).

k On procèdera enfin à une présentation croisée : chaque élève récapitulera ce qu’il a

appris des goûts de son voisin (passage à la 3e personne) : X likes… very much because…

he / she thinks… looks…

GRID A

Fill in the first column in silence. Find a title in each of the 4 categories (either in English, or in French).

Interview your friend and fill the column “My friend’s opinion”. Ask your friend if he / she likes or does not like the films selected, and why or why not.

GRID B

Fill in the first column in silence. Find a title in each of the 4 categories (either in English, or in French).

Interview your friend and fill the column “My friend’s opinion”. Ask your friend if he / she likes or does not like the films selected, and why or why not.

1.

2.

1.

2.

Film selection My friend’s opinion

Type of film Title of a film A F I Because...

Romantic comedy

Horror film

Detective story

Series

Film selection My friend’s opinion

Type of film Title of a film A F I Because...

Adventure film

Science-fiction

Dance film

Comedy

MANUEL k P. 25

UNIT

2 HALL OF FAME

Check your vocabulary

3 4 • UNIT 2

1. THE ACTORS STUDIO> Objectifsk Compétences : production orale en continu et / ou en interaction

k Communication : décrire et comparer des personnes

1. Bruce and George

> Mise en œuvre : avant de lancer cette activité, il serait peut-être utile de réviser

en amont le lexique de la description physique (parties du corps, du visage, adjectifs

qualificatifs), grâce à la fiche ci-dessous (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

Faites correspondre ces mots aux numéros de l’image. Utilisez un dictionnaire si besoin.Example: head = 1

arm = back =

elbow = hand =

leg = finger =

neck = ankle =

shoulder = belly-button =

knee = thumb =

chest = fist =

toe = foot (pl.: feet) =

Placez les numéros correspondant à ces parties du corps sur le dessin ci-dessous. 1 = nose 7 = chin

2 = cheek 8 = lip

3 = forehead 9 = ear

4 = eyebrow 10 = eye

5 = mouth 11 = tooth (pl.: teeth)

6 = face 12 = hair

Pouvez-vous retrouver les mots correspondant à ces définitions ?a. hair some men grow under their nose =

b. hair men grow on their chin =

c. an accessory you use when you can’t see well enough =

d. women often use it to make their lips red or their eyes darker =

e. old people have a lot of these lines around their eyes and mouth =

Lisez ce texte et dessinez le visage de cette personne. Utilisez un dictionnaire si besoin.This person’s face is round and plump. She has got long wavy chestnut-brown hair.

Her large blue eyes are bright and her mouth is thin and pink. Her cheeks are covered

in freckles. Her nose is slightly crooked. She’s got a little mole on her chin. She is not

very cute, but she looks nice and lively.

Retrouvez ces adjectifs retranscrits en phonétique.a. \"pOIntId\ d. \streIt\ b. \"k∏…li\ e. \"sØntœnd\ c. \"hœnsEm\ f. \E"trœktIv\

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

{

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

9

10

1112

13

14

1516

17

UNIT 2 • 3 5

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE

arm = 7 back = 5

elbow = 6 hand = 8

leg = 13 finger = 12

neck = 2 ankle = 17

shoulder = 3 belly-button = 9

knee = 14 thumb = 11

chest = 4 fist = 10

toe = 16 foot (pl.: feet) = 15

1 = nose 7 = chin

2 = cheek 8 = lip

3 = forehead 9 = ear

4 = eyebrow 10 = eye

5 = mouth 11 = tooth (pl.: teeth)

6 = face 12 = hair

a. moustache b. beard c. glasses d. make-up e. wrinkles

5. a. pointed

b. curly

c. handsome

d. straight

e. sun-tanned

f. attractive

> Mises en œuvre possibles

a. Travail de toute la classe sur les deux caricatures.

b. Travail par moitié de classe : le groupe 1 prendra en charge Bruce Willis tandis que le

groupe 2 traitera la caricature de George Clooney.

k Lors du récapitulatif en groupe classe, les élèves devront écouter attentivement leurs

camarades parler de la caricature qu’ils n’ont pas étudiée et prendront des notes. Par

exemple, ils peuvent noter l’ordre dans lequel les parties du visage sont mentionnées, puis

réagir et donner leur opinion.

Productions possibles : I can see Bruce Willis’ caricature; his face is distorted. It makes me

laugh / smile because his forehead is so big. It is much bigger than in reality / on the photo.

His ears are larger.

As for Clooney’s caricature, he looks (far) more stupid, sillier than in real life. He is wearing

a white coat, just like when he was in E.R. His cheekbones are prominent, and his chin is not

as big in the photo. I think he looks ugly.

k Ensuite, après une reprise collective, les élèves listeront les points d’entente et de

désaccord.

Productions possibles : We both agree that the caricatures are funny. But we disagree on

which one is the best. X thinks B. Willis is ridiculous, but I consider Clooney’ caricature far better.

k Enfin, on amènera la classe à comparer les deux dessins, et à dire quelle caricature ils

préfèrent, en justifiant leurs réponses.

1.

2.

3.4.

{ 12

3 4

5

6

7

8

910

11

12

MANUEL k P. 26-27

UNIT

2 HALL OF FAME

3 6 • UNIT 2

Productions possibles : Clooney is pale and clean-shaven, whereas Willis is sun-tanned and

he is growing a beard.

The first drawing is effective because it makes fun of B. Willis, but I think the second one is

far-fetched.

I don’t agree: I think it is hilarious, pathetic, because he has lost all his charm. He is no longer

handsome, a sex symbol. He looks ridiculous.

2. Guess who?

Cette activité pourrait donner lieu à un jeu de Who’s Who? en binômes ou en groupes.

Un élève décrit l’une des quatre caricatures au reste de la classe (dont les livres sont fermés)

et ses camarades doivent deviner de qui il s’agit.

Réponses (de gauche à droite) : Angelina Jolie – Mr Bean / Rowan Atkinson – Britney

Spears – Amy Winehouse

Productions possibles : – Angelina Jolie: The American Hollywood star is portrayed with full and sensual lips. She

looks ugly, although she is glamorous and one of the world’s most beautiful women.

– Mr Bean / Rowan Atkinson: We are immediately struck / We immediately notice Mr Beans’s

bushy eyebrows and black hair. The caricature of the British comedian and actor is close to

reality. He is said to be bug-eyed and weak-chinned.

– Britney Spears looks like a bimbo (an attractive but unintelligent young woman). She looks

like a sex bomb with her low-necked tank top. She is holding a can of Coke.

– Amy Winehouse: The British singer and song-writer, looks gothic. She is dressed in dark

clothes, wears heavy make-up. I quite like this caricature of a famous singer who has got dark

hair and black eyes. Her head and her mouth are distorted, whereas her body is tiny. She

looks like a rebel. Her make-up is too heavy. She looks weird, drunk, stoned.

Informations complémentaires Mr Bean became a cult favourite in the British series Blackadder, and an even bigger star in

big screen comedies including Four Weddings and a Funeral and Love Actually.

Prolongement possible : on trouvera à l’adresse suivante www.magixl.com/heads/cliparts.php

toute une série de caricatures. Après avoir procédé à une sélection, on pourra s’en servir pour

une production écrite, ou encourager les élèves à choisir une star et à en dresser le portrait à

l’écrit ou en prise de parole en continu.

2. HAPPY BIRTHDAYN.B. : l’enregistrement de ce texte se trouve sur le CD classe n°1, piste 8.

> Exploitation de l’illustration

Cette photo servira de sensibilisation au thème abordé et permettra d’introduire du lexique

utile pour reformuler l’implicite du texte. Il faudra néanmoins veiller à fournir ces quelques

mots au préalable : sweatshirt, a hooded (fleece) jacket, a pair of jeans.

On demandera aux élèves de décrire l’image dans un premier temps, avant de passer à son

interprétation.

UNIT 2 • 3 7

Productions possibles : A teenager is seen from behind. He is wearing a hooded (fleece)

jacket and jeans. He is watching the pedestrians, the passers-by walking in the street. He is

on his own / alone / by himself.

He looks lonely / lonesome, isolated, cut off from the others, miserable, depressed, gloomy.

He seems to be an outsider, a misfit, on the fringe of society. He seems to be an outcast

(a person who is rejected or excluded from a group or from society). He is without friends.

As he is seen from behind, we can suppose he symbolizes teenagers who feel rejected by

their friends and families. There is a huge gap between him and the passers-by. This gap may

suggest this young boy has problems communicating with others.

1. Get ready

Une première lecture rapide du texte (skimming) devrait permettre aux élèves de repérer

rapidement des informations clés.

Réponses : a. Adrian Mole, 16 b. Saturday April 2nd; it’s his birthday. c. Manchester d. his

parents, a waitress, the dog, three policemen, a desk sergeant e. a fish lorry, Manchester

railway station café, a park bench, in the vicinity of the Blood Transfusion Headquarters

2. Understanding the text

La fiche d’entraînement du Workbook fera l’objet d’un travail en classe ou à la maison. Pour

mieux comprendre les consignes données dans le Workbook, on conseillera aux élèves de

s’aider des p. 283-284 du manuel (« Comprendre les consignes »).

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 10-12)

I. Understanding the text

➼ PART 1

they = Mum and Dad; We = Adrian Mole and his dog; It = Adrian’s dog

“the railway station café” (l. 7)

Happy Birthday

well / happy / unhappy

Happiness: life and laughter

Affection: darling / love / admiring / loving

It’s his birthday. / He has run away from home. / He feels cheerful.

“Come home son.”

No he doesn’t. Nobody said “Happy Birthday” to him.

➼ PART 2

Time references: 6 o’clock news / night

Location: in the open / park bench / vicinity of Blood Transfusion Headquarters

Feelings: isolated / miserable / can’t face another night in the open / there is never one

around when you need one.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

UNIT

2 HALL OF FAME

3 8 • UNIT 2

“There was nothing about me on the six o’clock news.” (l . 26)

Size and build: small for his age

Face and hair: mousey hair / disfigured skin

Clothes: green school blazer / orange waterproof trousers / a blue shirt / balaclava helmet /

brown Doc Martens

Pet: mongrel dog

The words are negative.

Adrian Mole / The police officer, desk sergeant

II. ACTION!

➼ RECAP PART 1

He’s miserable, so he pretends to have run away.

We are told that it is his 16th birthday and he is the eldest child of the family.

His mongrel dog is his friend.

He feels miserable because nobody has said “Happy Birthday” to him. So, he writes himself

a birthday card because he feels lonely and wants to celebrate his birthday. He thinks his

parents miss him.

All alone in the streets.

➼ RECAP PART 2

He feels anxious and miserable because he is going to spend another night on the streets.

He’s afraid of spending one more night alone on the streets. He wants to say he has been

reported missing by the police. He seems anxious because no one has reacted.

His portrait and that of his dog are negative because he is not self-confident. We realize

that he has run away to cry for help.

Not reported missing.

N. B. : les synthèses proposées dans le Workbook pourront être traitées au fur et à mesure

(c’est-à-dire après l’étude de chaque partie du texte) ou à la fin de l’élucidation du texte.

La synthèse partielle pourra se faire individuellement ou par binômes. Un élève ou un

rapporteur de binôme pourra faire la synthèse à l’oral. Si la synthèse est faite à l’écrit, le

professeur pourra donner à un ou deux groupes un transparent qu’il (rétro)projettera et l’on

corrigera collectivement. Cette synthèse pourra servir de base à une trace écrite.

3. Story telling

> Mise en œuvre

On encouragera la classe à utiliser le Help! On pourra aussi se servir du Action! du Workbook

pour préparer la prise de parole en continu visant à résumer le texte.

Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, on divisera la classe en deux. On demandera à chaque

groupe de préparer un résumé oral de ce qu’il a lu. Le premier parlera de la matinée et de

l’après-midi du jeune héros, alors que le second s’attachera à la soirée d’Adrian Mole.

10.11.

12.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

UNIT 2 • 3 9

Chaque groupe écoutera les autres avec attention et prendra des notes. Il pourra intervenir

à tout moment pour demander des explications et corriger si nécessaire.

Productions possibles : The hero is a teenager who is quite small, not so strong and who is

wearing a green school blazer and orange trousers. He’s got a dog.

He left his home because he felt lonely. He hitch-hiked Manchester Railway Station and was

so embarrassed he pretended to be asleep.

We learn it is his birthday today. But he is alone / lonely / isolated and miserable. He went to

the railway café to get some food, but could not stay and he feels both angry and sad.

Indeed, he keeps thinking about his parents and their reaction when they realise he has run

away. Maybe they will take no notice, won’t care a damn about him.

So he writes himself a birthday card and writes his own message inside to cheer himself up.

I think he can’t stand his parents’ indifference towards him. They probably haven’t got any

present for him.

He feels so desperate that he hides his situation: He doesn’t want anyone to see he is neglected.

Yet he decides to call the police and ask for help. However they don’t care.They think it is a

practical joke, he is joking / kidding, he is taking them for a ride, pulling their legs.

4. Follow-up work

En début d’année le travail sur le tableau de Norman Rockwell pourra être mené en classe.

Les élèves s’aideront des p. 281-282 du manuel (« Commenter un document visuel ») pour

localiser les objets et les personnages.

Le tableau pourra être étudié en s’appuyant sur la fiche du Workbook ou (rétro)projeté en

couleur grâce au transparent n° 1.

On peut fournir les aides lexicales suivantes.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 13)

– The atmosphere is cheerful and relaxed in the painting, whereas it is gloomy and sad in

the text. Indeed the characters are all smiling in the picture.

– In the text, the policeman is sarcastic and makes a laughing stock of the boy. On the

contrary, the policeman seems friendly and ready to help in the painting.

– The waitress was hostile and makes Adrian leave the café while the barman in the painting

looks amiable and takes his time to listen to the little boy.

1.

Atmosphere People’s description Place Actionsfriendly

relaxed

tense

inquisitive

a uniform

cap

holster

boots

casual clothes

tiny: minuscule

bulky: volumineux

strong

well-dressed

well-behaved

clean-shaven: rasé de près

at the counter

stool: tabouret

floor: sol

order a drink

have a break

chat

lean over

smile at sb

MANUEL k P. 28

UNIT

2 HALL OF FAME

4 0 • UNIT 2

BOY: “Good afternoon, can I have a glass of milk please?”

BARMAN: “Certainly you can. Are you travelling on your own?”

BOY: “Yes sir.”

POLICEMAN: “Hello young man, have you lost your way, can I be of any help?”

BOY: “It’s OK, I’m just on my way to my grand-ma.”

POLICEMAN: “Well, does she live around here? Do you want me to get you there?”

BOY: “Oh no, she is in Chicago!”

BARMAN: “Chicago, that’s quite some distance, miles away from here! Are you walking?”

BOY: “Yes, Dad always says exercise is good for you. Anyway, I want to live with her because

she is much nicer than my Mum and Dad. And she can cook real good cakes!”

POLICEMAN: “Oh I see you are a runaway, a big adventurer, a man on the move.”

BOY: “That’s it. I want to see a city before school starts. This country life is too boring for

me.”

BARMAN: “But your parents will be dead worried, won’t they?”

BOY: “ Oh, I don’t think so, I left them a message on the kitchen table, so they’ll know.”

POLICEMAN: “Well boy drink up this glass of milk, and we’ll give them a call, just in case, and

see what we can do then.”

Ensuite, on amènera la classe à comparer les deux fugitifs, celui du texte et celui du tableau.

Les deux ambiances sont très différentes.

Productions possibles : The runaway in the painting looks cheerful and relaxed, whereas

Adrian Mole is ill-at-ease and sad. I think Adrian Mole is more desperate and unhappy. The

little boy is neither scared nor anxious. He is not as worried as the teenager.

The policeman in the painting looks nice and understanding, whereas in the text the police

officer sounds bored and uninterested.

LANGUAGE AT WORK> Le comparatif des adjectifs

Comparatif de supériorité : adjectifs courts (1 syllabe) k adjectif + -er + than

adjectifs longs (2 syllabes et plus) k more + adjectif + than

Comparatif d’infériorité : négation + as + adjectif + as

Comparatif d’égalité : as + adjectif + as

– good • nice • funny • big

– Better est un comparatif irrégulier.

2.

2.

3.

4.

Comparatif de supériorité Comparatif d’infériorité Comparatif d’égalitéyounger than

more attractive

better than

smarter

funnier than

bigger than

not as thrilling as as funny as

MANUEL k P. 29

UNIT 2 • 4 1

– Devant -er, le -y final précédé d’une consonne se transforme en -i : funnier.

– Les adjectifs courts contenant une voyelle suivie d’une consonne doublent leur consonne

finale : bigger.

– La règle orthographique de redoublement des consonnes ne concerne pas les consonnes

suivies d’un -e muet.

> Practice

a. James Bond is more attractive and better-looking than Indiana Jones.

b. The kids in South Park are lazier and funnier than the Simpsons.

c. Cinderella is more romantic and prettier than Ugly Betty.

d. Ironman is more energetic and stronger than Spiderman.

e. Terminator is more determined and crazier than Mr Bean.

The black woman is trendier than the old fair-haired woman. She is slimmer / thinner. She is

happier too. She is obviously younger and taller than the lady on the left. Her hair is thicker.

She looks livelier than the fair-haired lady. She is more outspoken than the old lady.

The old woman is not as fashionable as the black woman. She is fatter. She is not as slim /

thin as the young woman. She is older. She is uglier than the black woman. She is sadder too.

She is more old-fashioned.

The man on the left is not as young as the man on the right. He is shorter. He is not as tall.

He is colder because it’s raining. He is quieter than the young man.

YOUR TASK

k Évaluation de la tâche : vous pouvez utiliser la grille d’évaluation p. 26 de ce Fichier

Pédagogique, même si vous êtes bien entendu libre d’élaborer votre propre grille ou de

modifier le nombre de points attribué à chaque critère.

1.

2.

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

4 2 • UNIT 3

Make a wishAu travers de cette unité, nous avons souhaité aborder tous les types de rêve : construire un

monde de paix et de fraternité, connaître une existence meilleure, pouvoir vivre de sa passion…

Nous avons également voulu familiariser les élèves avec différents types de documents (bande

dessinée, chanson, texte littéraire, enregistrement audio authentique, article de journal,

poèmes, discours politique…).

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à l’expression orale en continu, voir p. 11.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Choisir un poème ou un extrait de discours,

l’apprendre par cœur et le réciter après

avoir justifié son choix

Mémoire • Lien social • Création

k rêves et réalité (paix et harmonie entre

les hommes / peuples, vie meilleure,

différences sociales)

k oppositions parents / enfants (p. 30

et 36)

k monde du cinéma (p. 35)

k rêves de jeunesse et trajectoires de vie

(p. 35 et 36)

k cauchemars (p. 40)

k prétérit simple : valeur imaginaire (p. 38)

k phrases conditionnelles : If… (p. 38)

k accent de mot (p. 37)

k mots accentués et non accentués (p. 37)

k donner son opinion

k exprimer la cause

k aimer / ne pas aimer

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

MANUEL k P. 30-31

UNIT 3 • 4 3

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

TUNE IN!

1. Understanding the comic strip

a. On pourra projeter la bande dessinée de Calvin and Hobbes en transparent en se concentrant

tout d’abord sur la 1re vignette pour identifier la situation. Puis, livre ouvert, on laissera aux

élèves le temps de prendre connaissance de l’ensemble du document en se concentrant

sur la deuxième vignette et en s’aidant des mots spaceman et planet Mok. On s’assurera

que la situation est claire pour tous les élèves, et qu’ils ont notamment compris que Calvin

et Spaceman Spiff sont un seul et même personnage.

b. On se penchera à nouveau sur la 1re vignette, en la comparant à la dernière et on demandera

à différents élèves de décrire les lieux, personnages et actions.

Productions possibles : The scene takes place in a spaceship. Vile monsters like larvae or

lice can see Spaceman Spiff is approaching and want to attack / to open fire on him whereas

in the last frame, Calvin, a little boy, is having a bath and his mother is washing his hair but

Calvin is thrashing around, he is angry / cross and calls his mother a fiend.

L’opposition entre les vignettes 1 et 8 fera ressortir l’idée du rêve. On pourra alors espérer

des productions du type : He must be dreaming. It’s a fantasy. He dreams he is a super

spaceman with super powers.

Lire

Écrire

Écouter

Manuel

k bande dessinée, Calvin and Hobbes (p. 30)

k chanson, Imagine (p. 32) k extrait du discours I have a dream (p. 33) k extrait de roman, Bums in the Attic (p. 34)

k poème, Dreams (p. 35) k article de journal, The New Generation

Gap (p. 36)

k une strophe commençant par Imagine

ou I have a dream (p. 33)

k une interview, Childhood dreams (p. 35)

k un poème et travailler sur sa pronunciation (p. 35)

Workbook

X

XX

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

MANUEL k P. 32-33

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

4 4 • UNIT 3

c. k On reprendra ensuite l’ensemble du document en invitant les élèves à utiliser le Help!

On leur laissera le temps nécessaire pour préparer un résumé de la situation.

k Dans une approche plus communicative, on pourra partager la classe en deux :

le groupe 1 résumera les vignettes 2 à 4 et le groupe 2 les vignettes 5 à 7.

k La vignette 8 sera reprise et complétée à la lumière du résumé de ces aventures.

Productions possibles : In his dream, Calvin is a hero, an astronaut flying in his spaceship

and living incredible adventures but he has a problem with his spaceship and must land on

planet Mok. He crashes on the planet and is immediately attacked by the space monsters.

As he is brave and bold, reckless and fearless he opens fire on them. He is nevertheless

made prisoner by the monsters and is sent to jail. The vicious monsters want to torture him,

make him speak and make fun of him. He endures ordeals. We understand that Calvin is

dreaming. Washing his hair is like torture to him. He hates having a bath. He sees his mother

as the enemy who wants to force him to wash his hair.

2. Re-order the text

a. On fera lire le texte des bulles aux élèves avant de leur accorder quelques minutes pour les

associer aux vignettes correspondantes. Ce travail se fera individuellement.

b. Puis on demandera à un maximum d’élèves de donner leurs réponses en les justifiant à l’aide

des mots clés qui leur ont permis de trouver la solution. Ceci permettra d’insister sur les

mots : crash landing, taken prisoner, dungeon (qui est un faux ami dans ce contexte), daring

(à rapprocher de bold dans le Help!), interrogation room et ominous (à rapprocher de sinister).

Corrigé : A6 (monster) • B5 • C4 • D6 (Calvin) • E7 • F3

3. Dreams versus reality

a. On réactivera l’expression du contraste et de l’opposition. Pour les élèves en difficulté,

on mettra au point un énoncé basé sur la 3e case du Help! (section Dream) : Calvin is

dreaming: He wishes he could fly in a spaceship. Puis on fera rebrasser cette structure.

Productions possibles : Calvin is dreaming: He wishes he were a hero, he identifies with

Spaceman Spiff and he wishes he could fight with the space monsters. He wishes he lived

thrilling adventures. He is daydreaming! He certainly wishes his mother didn’t wash him / he

didn’t have to wash his hair, to obey.

b. On passera ici à un élargissement personnel avec appel au vécu. Cette prise de parole sera

préparée en classe ou donnée en travail à la maison. On pourra préciser la consigne avec

les questions suivantes : What about? How often? In what circumstances?

1. A BETTER WORLD?

1. Get ready

> Mise en œuvre possible :

k Le travail pourra être mené collectivement ou donner lieu à un travail en binômes suivi

d’une reprise collective.

UNIT 3 • 4 5

k En début d’année quelques questions pourront aider les élèves à analyser le document :

– What are people doing?

– What does this gap / chasm symbolize?

– What are the artist’s goals? Is the message optimistic or pessimistic? Why?

Productions possibles : We are immediately struck by the bridge that is being built over a

chasm. We can see men and women building a bridge over a huge and deep chasm between

two high and steep mountains. It could represent people living in two different worlds, countries

or continents. The gap / the great divide may symbolize the limit between the North and South,

developing and developed countries, different ethnic groups or religious groups, people who

are enemies, borders between countries. It may symbolize cultural differences: food, lifestyle,

religion, values. Everyone is participating / giving a hand. They are helping one another. It’s a

common achievement. They are trying to bridge the gap, that is to say to overcome prejudices,

to have relations / contacts / exchanges with people on the other side. These people are trying

to break down barriers. It seems to be a long and difficult process that will take a long time.

The message is quite optimistic because it means that everything is possible when we make

an effort and try to overcome our differences. This illustration is idealistic and hopeful. I believe

this dream could come true if everybody tried. The themes of the song may be peace and

communion between people.

2. Understanding the text

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Approche collective : l’ensemble de la classe travaillera sur toute la chanson.

k Travail en binômes ou en groupes : le professeur partagera la classe en deux groupes.

Le groupe 1 se concentrera sur les strophes 1 et 2, alors que le groupe 2 se concentrera sur

le refrain (en strophes 3 et 5) et la strophe 4. Après un travail de préparation (en classe ou à

la maison), un rapporteur sera désigné pour chaque question. Les réponses à la question c. seront synthétisées à l’aide d’une grille tracée au tableau ou (rétro)projetée.

Corrigé :

a. – He wants us to forget about good and evil. – He wants people to be free from all judgements.

b. “You” refers to us, the listeners of the song.

c. Dreams Consequences

Stanza 1 There’s no heaven

No hell

Only sky

All the people living for today

Stanza 2 There’s no countries

And no religion too

Nothing to kill or die for

All the people living life in peace

Chorus (Stanzas 3 and 5) Someday you’ll join us The world will be as one

Stanza 4 No possessions No need for greed or hunger

A brotherhood of man

Sharing all the world

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

4 6 • UNIT 3

d. This a committed song. John Lennon denounces all the causes of division and the sources

of conflict, the selfishness, violence and greed of man. He refers to / hints at conflicts and

invasions of territories, we can imagine soldiers, heads of states led by jingoism, and extremism

leading to wars. He also denounces religious intolerance. In stanza 4, he criticizes the feeling of

jealousy between men, due to their possessions and their desire to always own more and more

things instead of sharing things and living like brothers in harmony.

3. Recap

k Ce Recap se fera à l’aide de la fiche correspondante du Workbook p. 14 tout en insistant

sur la structure de cette prise de parole grâce aux mots de liaison proposés.

k Ce travail pourra faire l’objet d’une préparation à la maison.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 14)

a. In this song, John Lennon first opposes reality with dreams / the dream of a world in which all men could live together and in harmony. In a world without nationalism / jingoism there won’t be any wars, any casualties, any disputes over territories, no reason to kill.Secondly, he underlines the contrasts between the different countries and beliefs / religions in the world. He then denounces the materialistic world in which we live and which leads men to envy and jealousy.Finally, he urges people to dream / keep dreaming and accept others as they are and to live in a unified and peaceful world. He’s optimistic because he knows he is not the only one to dream: He can urge other people to dream of a better world too, therefore he hopes he can persuade other people to dream like him / with him, to act for peace.He believes in a better world in which everyone can live in harmony, that’s why he gives the image of a world “as one” / he repeats “imagine” in his song.

He would like to abolish all borders / barriers between countries and religions / eradicate

all jealousy and rivalry between men.

He would like people to help one another / live peacefully / with no rivalry / like brothers

and not enemies.

He dreams of a better world in which solidarity would be the rule. He hopes to urge people

to believe in this dream and dream with him.

He wishes he could convince as many people as he can. He wishes people were more

respectful / open-minded / generous / kind with one another. He wishes people believed

in this dream / a peaceful world.

He hopes his dream will come true one day. He is confident / optimistic in the future.

He longs / yearns for a better world.

I believe that this is a utopia / idealistic / naïve / this is not possible.

To my mind if everyone tried to be a bit more friendly with one another, the world would be

a better place / this vision is too optimistic: Politics and religion are too important in the

world. This dream represents an ideal; I’d like to believe in it.

It is an anti-religious, anti-national and anti-capitalist song.

It is a protest song, the song of a peace activist.

1.

2.

3.

UNIT 3 • 4 7

Grille d’évaluation de la prise de parole

Prolongements possibles :

k On pourra évidemment faire écouter la chanson de John Lennon.

k Les professeurs qui le désireront pourront donner (ou demander aux élèves de trouver)

quelques données biographiques sur le chanteur, notamment dans la seconde partie de sa

vie, marquée par son militantisme pour la paix.

k Par ailleurs, une partie de l’unité 9 du manuel, Destination Liverpool, traite de la carrière

des Beatles.

4. “I have a dream”

Objectifs :

k faire ressortir les similarités entre cet extrait du célèbre discours de Martin Luther King

et la chanson de John Lennon ;

k préparer les élèves à découvrir un autre extrait de discours, p. 40.

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k travail individuel en classe ou à la maison ;

k travail en binômes ou en groupes, avec un ou plusieurs rapporteurs, prise de parole en

continu et reprise collective.

Productions possibles : Martin Luther King lists the problems he was confronted with at

that time in the USA: He mentions the colour of his skin. He also mentions Alabama which is a

southern state where segregation and racism were very strong. The Civil Rights Act was only

signed in 1964. At the same time, his vision is peaceful and optimistic. He wants his children not

to be judged by the colour of their skin, on racist grounds but for themselves and who they are.

He believes people are created equal by God. I believe King and Lennon share similar goals and

are both optimistic: They both want people to realize that adults or children are all equal and

can live like brothers and sisters / that love should motivate people and not hatred. The image

of joining hands reminds me of Lennon’s song and of the illustration. Lennon wants people

to believe in a world “as one” and King refers to an ideal nation where everyone could live in

harmony with the rest of the population. Lennon urges people to join him in his dream when he

repeats “imagine” and King repeats “I have a dream” as if to convince people. He dreams of a

day when all barriers between people will be abolished and when the colour of one’s skin will

not make any difference. I believe it is beautiful to finish on an optimistic note with the word

“today”: He wants to act for peace now.

Compte rendu clair et audible 0 1 2

Compte rendu complet et organisé 0 1 2 3 4 5

Prononciation 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Richesse de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Utilisation des gap fillers 0 1

Total des points / 20

MANUEL k P. 34

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

4 8 • UNIT 3

Prolongement possible : on pourra faire rechercher des informations complémentaires

sur Martin Luther King, par exemple sur le site suivant :

www.nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/peace/laureates/1964/king-bio.html

5. Song writing

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k travail individuel, en binômes ou en groupes ;

k travail en classe ou à la maison ;

k les poèmes pourront être (rétro)projetés, commentés et corrigés en classe ;

k on pourra élire le meilleur poème, l’afficher, l’imprimer dans le journal du lycée, ou le mettre

sur le site du lycée, s’il y en a un.

k On trouvera des exemples de poèmes à l’adresse suivante :

www.globalclassroom.org/mlk.html

Grille d’évaluation de la production écrite

2. BUMS IN THE ATTIC

1. Get ready

Exploitation du tableau : la préparation pourra être individuelle ou donner lieu à un travail

en binômes ou en groupes.

Écrire quelques questions au tableau pourra aider à analyser le tableau :

– What is this young woman doing?

– What impressions are given?

– What explains her attitude?

On demandera aux élèves d’observer l’image accompagnant le texte pour en faire ressortir

les lieux et le personnage, ce qui aidera à la compréhension de la première phrase du texte :

a house on a hill.

Productions possibles : This painting is entitled Christina’s World and was painted in 1948

by Andrew Wyeth. In the foreground, a young woman is turning her back to us and is half lying

on a field facing two huge houses in the background. Although she is not looking at us, we can

almost feel she is staring at these houses. The huge gap between the woman and the houses

in the distance suggests she is an outsider, she does not belong to this world or that she may

be estranged from this world. She may be envying these people. She may have been rejected

by her family. She may feel lonely and miserable. She may be desperate because she has

nobody to talk to, who can understand her.

Respect de la forme 0 1 2 3 4

Poème original et intéressant 0 1 2 3 4 5

Richesse de la langue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4 5

Total des points / 20

UNIT 3 • 4 9

Informations complémentairesThe woman crawling through the tawny grass was the artist’s neighbor in Maine, who,

crippled by polio, “was limited physically but by no means spiritually”. Wyeth further

explained, “The challenge to me was to do justice to her extraordinary conquest of a

life which most people would consider hopeless.” He recorded the arid landscape, rural

house, and shacks with great detail, painting minute blades of grass, individual strands of

hair, and nuances of light and shadow. In this style of painting, known as magic realism,

everyday scenes are imbued with poetic mystery.

www.moma.org

Corrigé : The narrator must be a young boy or girl whose father works for rich people / whose

father is a gardener and who dreams of having a beautiful / comfortable / luxurious house

like rich people. She / He must be poor / belong to the working-class.

2. Understanding the text

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Approche collective : élucidation du texte avec l’aide de la fiche du Workbook en

classe entière.

k Travail en binômes ou en groupes : la préparation pourra être faite à la maison à l’aide

de la fiche du Workbook. Les binômes ou groupes confronteront ensuite leurs résultats.

Un ou plusieurs rapporteurs prendra la parole en continu tandis que le reste de la classe

prendra des notes. On procédera enfin à une reprise collective avec enrichissement des

énoncés.

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n°1, piste 12.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 14-16)

1. The narrator, his or her Papa and Mama and Nenny who might be the sister or

grandmother.

2. The father works as a gardener (“the gardens where Papa works”, l. 2) in rich houses

“on hills” (l. 13).

3. Sunday corresponds to the father’s day off when he doesn’t work.

4. “I” (l. 1): the narrator, a child

“We” (l. 3): the narrator’s family / the narrator and his / her parents

“You” (l. 4): the narrator

5. “stuck-up” (l. 6) and “ashamed” (l. 8).

6. “stare” (l. 8)

7. … we will buy a house like these too / we will not only dream but live our dream

8. sleep: rich people who live in houses on hills

forget: rich people

live: poor people like the narrator’s family

don’t look down: rich people

have nothing to do: rich people

9. the rich and the poor

10. These two words (“One day”, l. 21) refer to the narrator’s future when she / he is an adult.

I.

MANUEL k P. 35

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

5 0 • UNIT 3

11.

12. k “passing bums” (l. 23), “them” (l. 24)

k “happy” (l. 29)

1. He / She belongs to a poor, working-class family who must live in dire straits. The narrator

is only a child and envies the houses where his / her father works. He / She looks forward to

having such a house one day, to being generous and giving shelter to bums.

2. For the narrator, a house on a hill corresponds to the world of the haves, an impossible

world he / she cannot afford to buy and live in.

He / She must be eager to have such a house.

Approfondissement possible : He / She is envious of wealthy people who own big and

comfortable houses. He / She has stopped going for walks in these neighbourhoods because

he / she can’t tell his / her family he / she is ashamed of their attitude, he / she is tired of it,

he / she is embarrassed and resentful. He / She is aware of the gap between the haves and

the have-nots. He / She is aware that rich people look down on him / her, ignore those who are

worse off. They are selfish, self-centered. They don’t have to live in awful conditions. That’s why

the narrator will never forget his / her origins / past. When he / she owns his / her own house,

he / she will help the homeless, the underdogs. He / She will be generous and warm-hearted.

3. Speak in chains

a. Les élèves s’appuieront sur leurs notes dans le Workbook ; chaque élève fournira une phrase,

le suivant enchaînera et devra écouter ce qui vient d’être dit. On veillera à ce que les phrases

s’enchaînent assez vite.

b. Ici, on rebrassera (ou mettra en place) les structures de l’opinion.

Productions possibles : In my opinion the woman in the painting and the narrator both look

envious, they both stare at houses on the hills. They are outsiders, are cut off from people.

The woman has a long way to go, has difficulty reaching her goal. It gives an impression of

loneliness. There is a parallel between the two situations.

3. DREAMS

1. Understanding the poem

k On exploitera tout d’abord l’illustration accompagnant le poème en demandant aux

élèves leurs impressions.

Productions possibles : It makes me think of a peaceful landscape. I can see a field covered

in snow, it must be dawn or dusk as the sun is ready to rise or set. I like the bluish colour of

the photograph. In the background, the sun is like a golden dot, a light in this cold and yet

peaceful atmosphere. There’s a general impression of quietness and serenity, as if we were

the only ones to witness this scene. The sun may symbolize hope / a glimmer of hope / the

promise of better days.

II.

Possessions Actionswill own won’t forget • will ask • will offer • will ask… to stay • will sit •

will squeak • will ask • will say • will be happy

UNIT 3 • 5 1

k Après lecture du texte, les élèves se tourneront vers leur Workbook pour étudier ce court

poème et en apprécier la forme.

k Concernant la question b., qui constitue une mini-tâche, on s’aidera du Action! de la fiche

du Workbook qui apporte toute l’aide nécessaire. Un élève proposera ses réponses et le reste

de la classe les complétera.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 16-17)

1. The poem is composed of two stanzas of four lines each. 2. k have in one’s hand: hold k because: for

k firmly, tightly: fast k not fertile: barren

3. a field

4. broken-winged = participe passé (past participle) + nom (noun) + -ed

It means a bird with wings that are broken.

It conveys an image of despair, death, of a handicap.

5. “Frozen” is the past participle of the verb “freeze”.

It is associated with “field” and also “life”.

6. The narrator is speaking to everyone, potential and real dreamers.

7.

The message of the poem is to continue to dream / keep dreaming because without

dreams, life is not worth living. The poet urges everyone to dream if they want to see their

dreams come true.

Approfondissement possible : In this poem the poet stresses that dreams are the soul

of life. Without dreams life is not worth living. It is a powerful incentive, a driving force.

The narrator urges us to keep dreaming, to keep struggling if we want to make our dreams

come true or make them turn into reality, if we want to fulfil our dreams. Dreams give us

a glimmer of hope. Thanks to them we remain optimistic, energetic, hopeful. Even if it is

hard / No matter how hard it is, we must keep on dreaming. However hard it is we must

keep struggling.

2. How to pronounce

k Grâce au CD classe n° 1 piste 13, les élèves pourront travailler spécifiquement sur la

prononciation de ce poème avant de se lancer dans sa lecture à haute voix, cette lecture

pouvant faire l’objet d’une évaluation.

k Il est vivement conseillé de faire lire le poème à haute voix ; cet exercice est un bon

entraînement à la prise de parole car il permet aux élèves de prendre conscience de la

mélodie de la langue anglaise et de mettre en place plusieurs phénomènes phonologiques.

k Le poème peut aussi être appris par cœur et récité en classe.

I.

II.

Life without dreams Advice givena broken-winged bird • that cannot fly •

a barren field • frozen with snow

hold fast to dreams

MANUEL k P. 35

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

5 2 • UNIT 3

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 17-18)

k die k winged k barren k frozen

The words in bold letters correspond to the stressed words / the essential words to understand

the message.

For if dreams die

Life is a broken-winged bird

\tE\

Hold fast to dreams 3For if dreams die 3Life is a broken-winged bird 3That cannot fly. 5

Critères d’évaluation (proposition de barème)

Prolongement possible : on pourra travailler avec le transparent n° 2 qui propose deux

illustrations sur ce poème. On pourra demander celle qui illustre le mieux le poème, ce qui

donnera lieu à une prise de parole en continu, ou à une évaluation écrite ou orale.

3. More about Langston Hughes

k Ce travail pourra se faire à la maison, au CDI ou encore au laboratoire multimédia.

k Le professeur divisera la classe en deux groupes qui travailleront chacun sur un des

deux sites indiqués.

k Puis, en classe, des rapporteurs de chaque groupe donneront les résultats de leurs

recherches catégorie après catégorie (dates, ethnic group…). Les autres élèves pourront

ainsi compléter avec les informations repérées.

4. CHILDHOOD DREAMS

a. Avant de travailler sur cette compréhension orale, le professeur invitera les élèves à décrire

et commenter l’image de la p. 35 en leur demandant d’émettre des hypothèses quant au

contenu de l’interview.

Productions possibles : I can see a boy who is daydreaming in a tree. He is barefoot and

is looking up at the sky. He looks quiet and may be dreaming about his life, his future or his

goals. Maybe he wants to become an astronaut or an explorer. I think everyone needs to have

peaceful moments to reflect on what they want in life.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.

Voix claire et audible 0 1 2

Implication personnelle, ton juste 0 1 2 3

Intonation 0 1 2 3

Réalisation des liaisons consonne-voyelle 0 1 2 3 4

Accentuation des mots porteurs de sens 0 1 2 3 4

Prononciation correcte 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points /20

UNIT 3 • 5 3

Le professeur pourra ensuite demander aux élèves ce qu’ils savent de George Lucas

(a famous American director / directed Star Wars…).

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1I was a terrible student in High School and the thing that the auto accident did – and it

happened just as I graduated, so I was at this sort of crossroads – but it made me apply

myself more, because I realized more than anything else what a thin thread we hang on in

life, and I really wanted to make something out of my life.

➼ Part 2And I was in an accident that, in theory, no one could survive. So it was like, “Well I’m here,

and every day now is an extra day. I’ve been given an extra day so I’ve got to make the most

of it.” And then the next day I began with two extra days. And I’ve sort of – you can’t help in

that situation but get into a mind set like that, which is you’ve been given this gift and every

single day is a gift, and I wanted to make the most of it.

➼ Part 3Before, when I was in High School, I just sort of wandered around. I wanted to be a car

mechanic and I wanted to race cars and the idea of trying to make something out of my life

wasn’t really a priority.

➼ Part 4But the accident allowed me to apply myself at school. I got great grades. Eventually I got

very excited about anthropology and about social sciences and psychology, and I was able

to push my photography even further and eventually discovered films and film schools.

➼ Part 5I decided to go to film school because I loved the idea of making films. I loved photography

and everybody said it was a crazy thing to do because in those days nobody made it into

the film business. I mean, unless you were related to somebody there was no way in. So

everybody was thinking I was silly. “You’re never going to get a job.”

➼ Part 6But I wasn’t moved by that. I set the goal of getting through film school, and just then focused

on getting to that level because I didn’t – you know, I didn’t know where I was going to go

after that. I wanted to make documentary films, and eventually I got into the goal of – once I

got to school – of making a film. One of the most telling things about film school is you’ve got

a lot of students in those days especially, it’s not quite so much today, but wandering around

saying, “Oh, I wish I could make a movie. I wish I could make a movie.” You know, “I can’t get

in this class. I can’t get any this or that.”

➼ Part 7The first class I had was an animation class. It wasn’t a production class. I had a history class

and an animation class. And, in the animation class they gave us one minute of film to put

onto the animation camera to operate it, to see how you could move left, move right, make

it go up and down. It was a test. You had certain requirements that you had to do. You had

to make it go up and had to make it go down, and then the teacher would look at it and say,

“Oh yes, you manoeuvred this machine to do these things.” I took that one minute of film and

made it into a movie, and it was a movie that won like, you know twenty or twenty-five awards

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

5 4 • UNIT 3

in every film festival in the world and kind of changed the whole animation department.

Meanwhile all the other guys were going around saying, “Oh, I wish I could make a movie.

I wish I was in a production class.” So then I got into another class and it wasn’t really a

production class but I managed to get some film and I made a movie. And, I made lots of

movies while in school while everybody else was running around saying, “Oh, I wish I could

make a movie. I wish they’d give me some film.”

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 18-20)

people in High School: students

results at an exam High School at the end of the studies: graduated

positive = negative =

pass fail

What you get after each test: grades

2. terrible • auto accident

when he graduated

Réponse libre

a) an extra day • an extra day • two extra days

b) Réponse libre

c) He felt lucky he was given extra days to live and do something with his life.

before

gift

mechanic • race • wasn’t

Before the accident, he wanted to become a car mechanic and was only interested in race. but the accident

m’appliquer

photography • unless • related

a) Réponse libre

b)

1.

1. 3.4.5.

6.

7.8.9.10.11.12.13.

14.15.

Type of student Turning point Consequencesa terrible student a bad auto accident made him apply himself more • wanted

to make something out of his life

Topics of interest Discoveryanthropology • social sciences •

psychology • photography

films • film schools

School he decided to go to

Why? People’s reaction? Why?

film school – loved the idea of making films

– loved photography

– said it was a crazy thing

– thought he was silly

UNIT 3 • 5 5

a) I wish I could make a movie.

b) The other film students said that.

c) not moved

d) focused a) animation • class • minute • operate • camera • test • award • festival • manage to

b) His first class was an animation class and he had one minute to operate a camera. It was

a test. He made a movie based on this one minute film and won awards in film festivals with

that film. Then he managed to make other movies.

b. Les élèves jouent le rôle d’un journaliste et doivent, en utilisant leurs notes, présenter en

une minute le parcours du réalisateur George Lucas.

Conseillez-leur d’inventer le nom d’une radio et de penser à une phrase de lancement.

Ils doivent s’entraîner à adopter un ton vivant pour leur présentation qui pourra se faire

de plusieurs façons : en classe devant les autres élèves, au labo de langues ou encore à

la maison en s’enregistrant et en remettant ensuite l’enregistrement au professeur.

Productions possibles : Everybody knows George Lucas, who is a famous film director. But

did you know that he had a terrible auto accident during his childhood. After that, he decided to

apply himself more at school and to make something out of his life. Although everybody said it

was a crazy idea, he kept dreaming about going to film school to make films. He persevered /

never lost hope, he was determined and believed in himself. He stuck to his dreams to make

films, he held on to his dream. He fulfilled his dream when he made a one-minute film for his

animation class and it became his first film which won many awards. It is very encouraging to

hear George Lucas share his personal experience and prove that you can succeed if you believe

in yourself.

Informations complémentairesThis recording reminds us of Henry David Thoreau: “Go confidently in the direction of your

dreams! Live the life you have imagined.”

Critères d’évaluation (proposition de barème)À titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer

sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de points attribué à chaque critère.

16.

17.

EXPRESSION ORALE EN CONTINUClair et audible 0 1 2

Reprise des informations données dans le document 0 1 2 3 4

Richesse du lexique et des structures 0 1 2 3 4 5

Prononciation 0 1 2 3 4 5

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points /20

INTERACTIONQuestions posées correctement 0 1 2 3 4 5

Total des points /5

MANUEL k P. 36

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

5 6 • UNIT 3

5. THE NEW GENERATION GAP

1. Get ready

a. On demandera tout d’abord aux élèves de parcourir des yeux l’ensemble du document.

Dans le cas d’une classe fragile, on pourra éventuellement attirer leur attention sur certains

éléments en leur donnant quelques mots : Kind of text? Source? Illustration? Beginning of

the text?

Productions possibles : It’s a press / newspaper article. / It’s an article from a magazine.

It dates back to 2008. A photograph illustrates the article whose headline is “The daughters

of immigrants often make career choices their moms don’t understand.” The article may

deal with this woman’s life and dreams. She must be a singer / an artist and maybe she has

dreamt of becoming a singer since she was a child. Perhaps her mother disapproves of /

objects to her choice and doesn’t understand why / her motives.

b. On demandera ensuite aux élèves de lire les deux premières phrases de l’article et d’y réagir

immédiatement en affinant leurs hypothèses.

Productions possibles : The article may deal with the problems girls have with their mothers

who have immigrated from foreign countries when they choose a job their parents don’t accept.

Mothers may want their daughters to marry or have great jobs. Maybe they want them to become

doctors or lawyers. Perhaps parents, especially mothers, had different dreams or expectations

for their daughters. They may want a better life for them.

2. Understanding the text

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Approche collective : on demandera aux élèves de lire les questions a. à e. et de lire

le texte pour y répondre en leur donnant le temps nécessaire pour le faire. Ceci peut faire

l’objet d’un travail à la maison.

k Travail en groupes / en binômes : on divisera la classe en deux groupes. Le groupe 1 se

concentrera sur les questions a. et b. tandis que le groupe 2 répondra aux questions c. à e.Dans chaque groupe, un ou plusieurs rapporteurs procédera à une prise de parole en continu,

pendant que les autres élèves prendront des notes et poseront des questions si nécessaire.

Productions possibles :a. The girl in the picture is Sparlha Swa, she is 27.

b. – Her mother is called Juliet Hart and she is from Jamaica. She broke her back and worked 16

hours a day.

– Sparlha was a brilliant / an excellent student / a straight-A student and majored in

anthropology in Stanford, a prestigious American university.

– Her dream was to become a musician. She dreamed of being a musician and making a living

out of her passion for music.

– She believes her mother sacrificed herself for her children and wants to honour her, that’s

why she wrote a song for her. Her mother has become her biggest fan, so they must really get

on well and have a special / very close relationship.

c. Words referring to music: passion (l. 20) • singer-songwriter (l. 20) • performed (l. 21) •

songs (l. 21) • lines (l. 22) • fan (l. 24)

MANUEL k P. 37-39

UNIT 3 • 5 7

d. Words connected with conflict: clash (l. 5) • conflict (l. 5) • painful (l. 6) • inexplicable (l. 14)

e. The word “dream” is repeated four times.

Approfondissement possible : The mother expected her daughter to go to university. She

was looking forward to seeing her daughter climb the rungs of the social ladder. For the mother

who is an immigrant, education is a way of escaping poverty, a chance of improving one’s

living conditions, of changing classes. Her dream was shattered when Sparlha announced she

wanted to become a musician. The mother may think being a singer is a risky job. She may

be disappointed. Sparlha realizes her mother had sacrificed her life for her sake, to give her

children better prospects. She dedicated her life to her children. She never fulfilled her own

dreams. That’s why the daughter wants to seize the opportunity she is given and honour her

mother at the same time.

3. Invent a dialogue

k Le professeur divisera la classe en deux groupes : ceux qui joueront le rôle du ou de la

journaliste (et devront donc s’inventer une identité avec un nom de chaîne et préparer leurs

questions en accord avec ce qu’ils ont appris dans l’article) et ceux qui joueront Sparlha.

Ces derniers devront donc revoir leurs notes pour répondre aux questions.

k On privilégiera le naturel de l’interview en faisant préparer les questions (ce qui fera l’objet

d’un travail à la maison) sans que les élèves qui joueront Sparlha en prennent connaissance

à l’avance.

k Critères d’évaluation (proposition de barème) : voir grille p. 55.

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

success • succeed • difficult • difficulty • purpose

b.

Mots non accentués :

– is • than

– You • do • the • you • you • do

– or • is • the • to • our

À mettre particulièrement en relief :

– imagination • knowledge

– must • thing • cannot

– effort • key • potential

Ces mots apportent les informations essentielles.

1.

2.

3.

Première syllable Deuxième syllabe Troisième syllabeobstacle advantage • achieve •

prevent • fulfil • determined

opportunity • optimistic

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

5 8 • UNIT 3

> Build up your vocabulary

failure • unsuccessful • disadvantage / drawback • easy • dangerous

a purpose • a means to • an attempt • willpower • abandon • optimistic

His dream was fulfilled / came true.

a. She succeeds in all she does.

b. We haven’t made up our minds about going abroad yet.

c. I have taken to playing the guitar lately.

d. They met with a lot of difficulties during their trip.

a. He overcame / has overcome a lot of difficulties.

b. Nous vaincrons un jour.

> Le prétérit simple : valeur imaginaire Les phrases conditionnelles : If…

Chaque forme verbale soulignée est composée d’un modal (will ou would) et d’une BV.

a.2 b.1 c.3

a. Si elle gagne au loto, elle achètera sa propre maison.

b. Si elle gagnait au loto, elle achèterait sa propre maison.

c. Si elle avait une maison bien à elle / sa propre maison, elle serait plus heureuse.

a. Pour le verbe be, on n’a pas was mais were, à toutes les personnes.

b. Elle appartient à la langue courante.

Le verbe wish exprime le regret de la situation présente.

C’est un prétérit qui est utilisé.

Ils regrettent de ne pas avoir d’argent pour faire ce qu’ils veulent.

Elle regrette de ne pas vivre dans une maison plus confortable.

La mère regrette que sa fille soit chanteuse.

La mère regrette que sa fille ne soit pas professeur d’université.

L’enfant regrette que ses parents ne lui permettent pas de faire ce qu’il veut.

On observe que le français utilise une infinitive après « de » et le subjonctif après « que »

et une formulation inverse de celle de l’anglais : négative quand on a une forme affirmative

en anglais et affirmative là où on a une forme négative.

If only she could fulfil her dreams!

If only I owned my own house!

Il est temps que tu arrêtes de rêver.

> Practice

1.E 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.C

– If I were as small as a fly, I would be practically invisible and would go everywhere and spy

on people.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

if + présent will + BV

if + prétérit would + BV

MANUEL k P. 40-41

UNIT 3 • 5 9

– If I won the lottery, I would have a big party with all the people I love and would travel around

the world / abroad, I would buy a lovely house, I would buy lots of presents for my friends.

– If I didn’t have to work later, I would spend my time helping people / I would do just what I want!

– If my teachers were replaced by computers, I wouldn’t have to go to school.

– If only more women were managers, business would change.

– If school wasn’t compulsory, I would stay in bed for hours in the morning / I would not learn

anything.

– If guns disappeared, the world would be a better place / fewer people would die!

– If I were Paris Hilton, I wouldn’t have to work.

– If work didn’t exist, people would be on holiday all the time.

It will be terrible if I lose my mobile phone.

It will be a disaster if my mother forgets to wake me up in the morning.

It will be terrible if I don’t have good grades in English!

It will be terrible if nobody speaks to me.

I wish …

– pupils were able to have all their afternoons free.

– the cafeteria served fries and ice creams everyday / the food was better, the place was

not as noisy.

– I didn’t have any homework to do. / I only had homework in the subjects I like.

– I could create my own timetable: I would only work from 10 to 12 in the mornings and 2 to 4

in the afternoons.

– teachers didn’t give us any work to do and didn’t complain about our being lazy, would be

happy with us all the time.

– I didn’t have to learn but knew everything automatically!

YOUR TASK

> Mise en œuvre

k Le professeur rappellera que le poème le plus long fera l’objet d’un bonus de 2 points

au moins pour « prise de risque ».

k La lecture des trois extraits pourra faire l’objet d’un travail à la maison.

k Les enregistrements se trouvent sur le CD classe n° 1, pistes 15 à 17 et sur le site

compagnon, U3–Your task (1), (2), (3).

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 21)

1. Les mots accentués (mis en relief) sont en gras.

Last night, while I lay thinking here, |Some Whatifs crawled inside my ear |And pranced and partied all night long |

And sang their same old Whatif song: |Whatif I’m dumb in school? |

Whatif they’ve closed the swimming pool? |Whatif I get beat up? |

3.

4.

5.

I.

UNIT

3 MAKE A WISH

6 0 • UNIT 3

Whatif there’s poison in my cup? |Whatif I start to cry? |Whatif I get sick and die? |Whatif I flunk that test? |Whatif green hair grows on my chest? |

Whatif nobody likes me? |Whatif a bolt of lightning strikes me? |Whatif I don’t grow tall? |

Whatif my head starts getting smaller? |Whatif the fish won’t bite? |Whatif the wind tears up my kite? |

Whatif they start a war? |Whatif my parents get divorced? |Whatif the bus is late? |Whatif my teeth don’t grow in straight? |

Whatif I tear my pants? |Whatif I never learn to dance? |Everything seems swell, and then |

The nighttime Whatifs strike again! |

2. Listen to the MUSTN’TS, child, |Listen to the DON’TS |Listen to the SHOULDN’TS |

The IMPOSSIBLES, the WON’TS |

Listen to the NEVER HAVES. |Then listen close to me – |

Anything can happen, child, |ANYTHING can be. |

I chose to run for president at this moment in history | because I believe deeply that

we cannot solve the challenges of our time | unless we solve them together| – unless

we perfect our union by understanding that we may have different stories, | but we

hold common hopes; | that we may not look the same | and we may not have come

from the same place, | but we all want to move in the same direction | – towards a

better future for our children |and our grandchildren.

Critères d’évaluation (proposition de barème)

Mémorisation du poème / de l’extrait 0 1 2 3 4 5

Respect de la prononciation 0 1 2 3

Intonation et groupes de souffle 0 1 2 3

Justification du choix : – opinion

– réutilisation du vocabulaire

– structures

0 1 2

0 1 2

0 1 2

Aisance à l’oral 0 1 2 3

Total des points /20

HEROESUNIT

4

UNIT 4 • 6 1

HeroesL’objectif de cette unité est, d’une part, de faire connaître aux élèves des personnalités dont

ils n’ont pas forcément entendu parler (Sir Edmund Hillary, Cathy Freeman, Dian Fossey…)

et, d’autre part, de parler de types de héros très différents (défenseur de l’environnement ou

des droits de l’homme, détenteur de records, héros du quotidien…) afin d’aborder et / ou de

rebrasser des champs lexicaux extrêmement variés. Enfin, choisir des héros proches de l’âge

des élèves (Bethany Hamilton, Sebastian Clover, Ishmael Beah, Mattie Stepanek) ne devrait

pas les laisser indifférents.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à l’expression orale en continu, voir p. 11.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Présenter un héros à l’oral en gardant

la parole le plus longtemps possible

Mémoire • Lien social

k biographies (p. 43 et 46 à 48)

k courage, bravoure (p. 45)

k espèces en voie de disparition (p. 46)

k sport, alpinisme (p. 47)

k conflits armés et droits de l’Homme

(p. 48)

k superlatif (p. 50) k verbes être et avoir (p. 50)

k réalisation des formes faibles are, was,

were (p. 49)

k accentuation des mots porteurs (p. 44,

47, 53)

k liaisons consonne-voyelle et schémas

intonatifs (p. 44)

k exprimer son admiration

k comparer

k exprimer la capacité

k donner son opinion

Workbook

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

UNIT

4 HEROES

6 2 • UNIT 4

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

Prendre la paroleen continu

Prendre la parole en interaction

Lire et prendre la parole en interaction

Écrire

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un texte

(p. 44 à 48)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un document

sonore (p. 47)

k role play (p. 42, 45 et 46)

k lire un poème à haute voix (p. 44)

k convaincre un auditoire (p. 53)

k Tune in (p. 42)

k Role models, biographies (p. 43)k On being a champion, poème (p. 44)

k Little big man, article de presse (p. 45) k Gorillas in the mist, page d’un site

Internet (p. 46)

k Over oceans and mountain tops, article de presse (p. 47)k War and peace, couverture et extrait d’un livre (p. 48)

k une quatrième de couverture (p. 43)

k un plan détaillé pour une prise de parole

(p. 45, 46, 47)

k une biographie (p. 53)

k On being a champion, poème (p. 44)

k Who’s your hero?, interview (p. 47)k War and peace, extrait littéraire (p. 48)

k site compagnon, U4–Dialogue: Great

inspiration

Mountain Gorillas, documentaire (p. 46)

Workbook

X

X

XXX

X

X

X

X

XX

Fichesphotocopiables

X

X

X

MANUEL k P. 42

UNIT 4 • 6 3

TUNE IN!

1. React to this book cover

> Mise en œuvre

L’analyse de la photo pourra être préparée en classe ou à la maison.

a. On peut s’attendre à ce que les élèves associent l’homme de la photo à un acteur (Ben Affleck

dans le film Pearl Harbor, Tom Cruise dans Top Gun, Christopher Reeve dans Superman…), ou à

Saint-Exupéry.

Productions possibles : The man in the picture makes me think of Ben Affleck starring in

Pearl Harbor. This man who is standing proudly reminds me of... He is wearing his pilot’s

gear, a leather jacket, a helmet, goggles, and gloves. He is standing still, motionless, upright

and erect. He looks ready to go on another mission. He seems to be just back from a battle.

b. L’objectif est ici de lister les qualités intrinsèques d’un héros.

Productions possibles : This is a low-angle shot. Its impact on the viewer is quite obvious:

The man looks taller and even more courageous. I think he seems to be triumphant and

fearless. The low-angle shot conveys the impression the man is tough, strong, impressive,

well-built, muscular, brave and courageous. He looks all the more heroic because of the

low-angle shot. He seems to have a little smile on his face because he has achieved his goal.

I like this man who is handsome and sporty. He looks really attractive to me. He may be a

womanizer when we see the blond girl drawn on his jacket. He is the kind of person ready

to risk his life for others and who never gives up till he has overcome all the difficulties.

2. Role play

> Mise en œuvre

k Au préalable, le professeur peut procéder à un brainstorming afin de déterminer quelles

expressions peuvent être utilisées lorsqu’un bureau éditorial se réunit.

Productions possibles : Good afternoon, we have to decide today what picture would be

best for the book How to Be a Hero. Look, I’ve found this super shot: What do you think? He

looks handsome, doesn’t he?

Suggérer aux élèves d’utiliser des gap fillers ainsi que des mots de liaison pour articuler les

cinq arguments à trouver.

k On pourra mettre en place l’activité intitulée Just a minute sur le site de l’Académie de

Caen (rubrique : « Débats Citoyens, Quelques activités d’entraînement possibles »). Un

premier élève doit essayer de parler pendant une minute. Il ne doit pas se répéter, être hors

sujet ou hésiter (mais peut et doit même utiliser des gap fillers). S’il ne respecte pas ces

règles, le premier élève qui brandit une carte « Hésitation », « Répétition » ou « Déviation »

prend la parole et le time-keeper remet son chronomètre à zéro.

k On pourra également demander aux élèves d’apporter la photo de la personne qui, à

leurs yeux, illustrerait au mieux ce livre.

k Le lexique de la rubrique Help! pourra être fixé à l’aide de la fiche suivante (disponible

sur le site compagnon en version photocopiable).

UNIT

4 HEROES

Check your vocabulary

6 4 • UNIT 4

Traduisez les phrases suivantes. (Les mots en gras se trouvent dans le Help!, p. 42)a. Cette photo me rappelle Ben Affleck dans Pearl Harbor.

b. Il a l’air fier, déterminé, impressionnant. c. Il semble prêt à risquer sa vie et surmonter de nombreuses difficultés.

d. Il a l’air satisfait de lui-même.

Donnez les adjectifs dérivés des racines suivantes.a. enterprise b. courage c. triumph d. fear e. sport

Donnez le contraire de ces mots. a. fail (échouer) b. go on = continue

CORRIGÉ

a. This photo reminds me of Ben Affleck in Pearl Harbor.

b. He looks proud, determined, impressive.

c. He looks ready to risk his life and overcome many difficulties.

d. He looks self-satisfied.

a. enterprising b. courageous c. triumphant d. fearless / fearful e. sporty

a. achieve (one’s goals) b. give up / stop / cease

1. ROLE MODELS

Objectifs :– compétences langagières : compréhension écrite, expression écrite, production orale

en continu et / ou interaction ;

– compétences linguistiques : amener les élèves à parler plus longtemps en étoffant leurs

productions grâce à des éléments biographiques.

1. Do you know them?

> Mise en œuvre possible

a. Avant de faire ouvrir le manuel, le professeur peut noter au tableau (ou sur un transparent

pour rétroprojecteur) les noms des huit personnages évoqués sur cette page. Puis il

demandera aux élèves s’ils en connaissent certains. M.L. King, C. Freeman et N. Armstrong

seront probablement cités. On encouragera alors les élèves à dire ce qu’ils savent de ces

héros. Pour les autres personnages, nous suggérons de mettre en place un jeu rapide de

Who’s Who? Les élèves interrogeant leur professeur tout en prenant des notes (Is he / she still

alive? When did he / she live? What is / was his / her nationality? Where does / did she work?

What did he / she explore / discover?)

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 43

UNIT 4 • 6 5

b. et c. Corrigé : A5 • B 6 • C8 • D4 • E1 • F7 • G3 • H2

Productions possibles : Alexander Fleming was a scientist as it was a bacteriologist.

He became famous because he discovered penicillin and he is now considered the father

of modern medicine. He must have been a very persevering man.

Prolongement possible : on pourra suggérer un Follow-up work en demandant aux élèves de

faire de brèves recherches sur l’un de ces héros et de se préparer à le présenter à la classe

pour le cours suivant.

2. Pairwork

Le Pairwork (Workbook, p. 22, activité I) permettra aux élèves d’identifier les informations

devant figurer dans une biographie et de travailler les questions qui s’y rapportent : When was

he / she born? When did he / she die? What is / was he / she famous for? Il est nécessaire

que la classe ait bien compris au préalable les règles d’un travail en binôme : le français

est à proscrire et il faut écouter son / sa camarade en lui demandant de répéter si besoin.

Plusieurs schémas d’organisation sont possibles : partager la classe en groupes de 2 (un

élève A, un élève B) ou en 2 groupes (l’équipe A et l’équipe B). Laisser les élèves travailler

en autonomie environ 5 minutes. Le Recap qui permet de clore les échanges individuels et

de recentrer l’attention de la classe peut servir à constituer la trace écrite du cours ou à faire

un travail écrit individuel.

3. Writing a book cover

> Mise en œuvre possible

k En préparation à cette activité, on pourra utiliser le texte à trous du Workbook (p. 22,

activité II, exercice 1).

k Le professeur pourra ensuite demander aux élèves de s’appuyer sur les exercices 2

et 3 du Workbook (p. 23), qui leur fourniront des amorces et des aides à la prise de parole

en continu.

k La rédaction de la quatrième de couverture pourra se faire individuellement ou en

groupe, en classe, à la maison ou en salle multimédia où l’on pourra réaliser une véritable

mise en page.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 22-23)

1: generous • 2: determined • 3: devoted • 4: hopeful • 5: enterprising • 6: fearless /

brave • 7: inspired • 8: fearless

Example M.L. King: 20th • 1929 • 1968 • American • Human Rights fighter • fought for

equality / against discrimination

Example A. Fleming: he was a leading bacteriologist / scientist • father of modern

medicine • dedicated • clever • he discovered penicillin / helped save thousands of lives

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique de la rubrique

Help! grâce à la fiche page suivante (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon). Tous les mots

demandés se trouvent p. 42-43 du manuel.

1.

2.

3.

UNIT

4 HEROES

Check your vocabulary

6 6 • UNIT 4

Retrouvez les synonymes et les antonymes de ces mots.

Complétez par le mot approprié.a. Someone who enjoys physical activity and knows about sport rules is considered

.

b. M. Luther King received many titles. He was the Nobel Peace

Prize in 1964.

c. A is used by bikers and soldiers: It protects the head in case

of impact.

d. Emilia Earhart had to fight hard and many hardships to become

a pilot.

e. Michael Phelps is the most famous American in swimming

competitions.

Entourez la syllabe accentuée de ces mots.a. nineteenth c. difficulties e. accomplish

b. achieve d. energetic f. explorer

Classez ces mots dans le tableau suivant la prononciation de la voyelle -o-.hero • discover • sporty • born • devoted • shot • become • goggles • gloves

CORRIGÉ

a. famous d. daring g. selfless

b. dedicated e. clever h. generous

c. brave f. triumphant i. energetic

a. sporty b. awarded c. helmet d. overcome e. record-breaker

a. nineteenth c. difficulties e. accomplish

b. achieve d. energetic f. explorer

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.3.

4.

a. well-known = f. defeated ≠

b. devoted = g. selfish ≠

c. courageous = h. stingy ≠

d. fearless = i. lazy ≠

e. intelligent =

\Å\ comme dog \O…\ comme horse \EÁ\ comme boat \Ø\ comme sun

\Å\ comme dog \O…\ comme horse \EÁ\ comme boat \Ø\ comme sunshot • goggles sporty • born hero • devoted discover • become •

gloves

UNIT 4 • 6 7

2. ON BEING A CHAMPION

Objectifs :– compétences langagières : compréhension écrite et orale, production orale en continu

et / ou en interaction ;

– compétences linguistiques : s’entraîner à repérer les éléments accentués de la chaîne

parlée ainsi que s’approprier des schémas intonatifs et accentuels.

1. Get ready

> Mise en œuvre possible

k On pourra commencer par exploiter l’illustration en renvoyant les élèves à la p. 280

de leur manuel (paragraphe : « Plans et angles »).

Productions possibles : This photo looks intriguing. It takes time to realize it is a low-angle

shot. It is taken in a glacier, in the middle of a crevasse, people are climbing up a cliff, we

can see shoes with crampons, the climbers in the background are holding ice axes. It must

be very dangerous, these people are reckless, daredevils. It requires a lot of skill / courage /

determination to go up this wall of ice. It must be thrilling / exhilarating / scary / a fantastic

experience.

k On écoutera ensuite l’enregistrement du poème en entier (CD classe n° 1, piste 20). Le

professeur pourra demander de repérer les mots clés. Les élèves trouveront assez facilement

champion, winner, hero, spirit, life mais aussi peut-être challenge, optimist, game.

k Avec une classe faible, l’enseignant peut concevoir une étape préliminaire d’anticipation :

il fournira les transcriptions phonétiques des mots à repérer, en y glissant des intrus

(pessimist, live, willing, shampoo…) pour guider le travail de repérage lors de l’écoute.

2. Understanding the poem

Corrigés : a. a champion is • someone who • even when • if we live as

b. a champion is a hero, someone who never gives up

c. solidarity • hope • courage • determination • willpower

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 23)

1. a champion is • someone who • even when • if we live as

2. Success: champion • winner • hero • winning • overcome • optimist • hopeful •

hopeful spirit

Difficulties: gives up • gets rough • challenges

Qualities: never gives up • creative solution • optimist • hopeful • plays the game

3. Everybody can be a hero: “There can be a champion in each of us,” (l. 13)

4. Life is the biggest challenge: “Even when the game is called life.” (l. 12)

5. friendship • hope • solidarity • energy • joy • courage

I.

MANUEL k P. 44

UNIT

4 HEROES

6 8 • UNIT 4

3. Recap

Pour le récapitulatif on demandera aux élèves de s’appuyer sur les amorces de la p. 44

du manuel et sur l’exercice Action! p. 24 du Workbook. Ces réponses pourront donner lieu

à un travail individuel, en binômes ou en groupes, être préparées en classe ou à la maison.

La prise de parole en continu d’un élève ou d’un rapporteur sera suivie d’une reprise de la

classe.

a. Productions possibles : Anybody can be a hero provided he / she is ready to get involved,

be committed, to fight to achieve his / her goals. Heroes are not necessarily famous people,

they can be ordinary, average citizens who resist, try to overcome difficulties.

The qualities needed are optimism, energy, willpower. Heroes need to be determined, strong-

willed, wilful, resolute, defiant, strong-minded. Fighting against pressure entails / implies /

requires a lot of moral courage. A hero is someone who wants to win life’s battles and who

has enough courage to face any challenges and hardships, such as illness, suffering, personal

problems, unhappy love stories or failures... He or she embodies courage, determination,

positive thinking, energy, which means a hero must be brave, strong-willed, active... He /

She can’t be complaining all the time, asking others for help, or waiting for better times. He /

She has to face the problems of life and find solutions. It’s a person who is never grumpy or

sad; on the contrary he / she is always optimistic and creative. Besides, Mattie thinks a hero

doesn’t act alone because human beings are members of a group; your actions can help

others. Therefore solidarity, friendship and mutual aid are important values.

b. Pour faciliter la recherche d’idées on pourra poser une question-relais : “Can you think

of ordinary heroes?”

Productions possibles : Firefighters, policemen, doctors, nurses are ordinary heroes because

they are able to sacrifice their own safety and sometimes even their lives. Firefighters can be

admired for their courage, generosity and sense of sacrifice. They are as courageous as French

Doctors or people working for relief organizations.

c. Productions possibles : Mattie has become a hero because this young boy had a tragic

fate, he fought against his disease very courageously. He wrote poems that are worth reading

and learning, because he is the living example of an ordinary hero, he embodies all the qualities

he praises. He has become a role model for many American teenagers. He never gave up and

fought till the end.

d. Les structures se rapportant à likes et dislikes seront rebrassées ici. Réponse libre.

e. Réponse libre.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 24)

1. a winner / an optimist • determined and courageous • gives up • fights • life is difficult •

accepts the challenges of life • everybody

2. Réponse libre.

II.

UNIT 4 • 6 9

4. Speak up

> Mise en œuvre possible

k Il est vivement conseillé de faire lire le poème à haute voix ; cet exercice est un bon

entraînement à la prise de parole car il permet aux élèves de prendre conscience de la

mélodie de la langue anglaise et de mettre en place plusieurs phénomènes phonologiques.

k La lecture oralisée peut se faire en alternant à chaque vers une voix de fille et une voix

de garçon. On peut imaginer d’autres organisations (un élève dit un vers, son voisin le suivant,

et ainsi de suite, de la façon le plus naturelle possible).

k Le poème peut aussi être appris par cœur et récité en classe.

Critères d’évaluation (proposition de barème)

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 24)

1. \I\ winner • hero • require • spirit • even • live \aI\ require • life \i…\ team • each

2. et 3. A champion is a winner, 3A hero... 3Someone who never gives up 3Even when the going gets rough. 5A champion is a member of 3A winning team... 3Someone who overcomes challenges 3Even when it requires creative solutions. 5A champion is an optimist, 3A hopeful spirit... 3Someone who plays the game, 3Even when the game is called life. 5There can be a champion in each of us, 3If we live as a winner, 3If we live as a member of a team, 3If we live with a hopeful spirit, 3For life. 5

III.

Voix claire et audible 0 1 2

Implication personnelle, ton juste 0 1 2 3

Intonation 0 1 2 3

Réalisation des liaisons consonne-voyelle 0 1 2 3 4

Accentuation des mots porteurs de sens 0 1 2 3 4

Prononciation correcte 0 1 2 3 4

Total : / 20

UNIT

4 HEROES

7 0 • UNIT 4

3. LITTLE BIG MAN

1. Understanding the text

> Mises en œuvre possibles

➼ PREMIÈRE VARIANTE

À la maison ou en classe, faire lire le texte en entier.

– Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, on pourra avoir recours à la fiche d’entraînement du

Workbook p. 25-26.

– Si la classe est solide, les questions du livre pourront servir de guidelines dans la recherche

des informations essentielles.

– Dans le cadre d’une pédagogie différenciée, les élèves les plus fragiles pourront se servir

de la grille du Workbook, les plus solides uniquement des questions du manuel.

➼ DEUXIÈME VARIANTE

– Diviser la classe en 3 groupes, avec un rapporteur pour chaque groupe. Le groupe A lira le

premier paragraphe, le groupe B le paragraphe Heroic Rescue, et le groupe C le paragraphe

Rewards for Bravery. Chaque groupe traitera la partie correspondante du Workbook.

– Lors du Recap, toute la classe devra écouter avec attention les rapporteurs des autres

groupes et prendre des notes. Bien sûr les autres membres de l’équipe peuvent intervenir

à tout moment pour aider le rapporteur et compléter son compte rendu. L’histoire pourra

ainsi être résumée à la chaîne.

– L’illustration du texte pourra servir de prise de parole en continu en début de cours suivant.

L’élève devra commenter la photo et réutiliser ce qui a été dit au cours précédent.

Corrigé :

a. – New York • Wesley Autrey • Cameron Hollopeter.

– 50 = Autrey’s age • 20 = Hollopeter’s age

– subway • train • subway station • platform • track

b. – Autrey: 50 • construction worker • Navy veteran • 2 young daughters

– Hollopeter: 20 • New York Film Academy student

– 1: He jumped off the platform. 2: He rolled with the victim between the tracks.

3: He protected the victim with his body. 4: He didn’t move while five cars passed.

c. – Michael Bloomberg: New York City Mayor • Donald Trump: businessman

– $10,000 from Donald Trump • $5,000 from the New York Film Academy • a trip to

Disney World • one year of free subway rides

– Subway superhero • real-life Superman • an angel • a great man

Productions possibles (Recap) : The hero happened to be in the subway waiting for a train

when he saw a young man fall onto the tracks as a train was entering the station. The victim

was a young man called Hollopeter, a 20-year-old student who nearly died. Autrey, an army

veteran, certainly a very fit man, jumped onto the track in-between the rails and used his

body to protect the young man. As he stepped back onto the platform he became an instant

hero and received many rewards, such as the city bronze medallion and thousands of dollars.

But most amazingly, Autrey declared he is not a hero, just a plain citizen who acted without

thinking twice.

MANUEL k P. 45

UNIT 4 • 7 1

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 25)

➼ PART 1

a) Wesley Autrey • Cameron Hollopeter b) New York c) 50: Autrey’s age • 20: Hollopeter’s

age d) subway • train • subway station • platform • track e) male • 20

➼ PART 2

– construction worker – Navy veteran – has 2 young daughters

1. He jumped off the platform. • 2. He rolled with the victim between the tracks. •

3. He protected the victim with his body. • 4. He didn’t move while five cars passed.

(from left to right and from the top downwards) platform • car • tracks

➼ PART 3

1. Michael Bloomberg, Mayor 2. Donald Trump, businessman

10,000: 10,000 dollars award Donald Trump gave Autrey • 5,000: 5,000 dollars award

the New York Film Academy gave Autrey

a trip to Disney World • a year of free subway rides

Subway superhero • real life Superman • an angel • a great man

2. Role play

> Mise en œuvre

k On pourra utiliser le Action! du Workbook p. 26 qui fournit des amorces et des noms

de radios new-yorkaises.

k Les élèves peuvent préparer leur script à la maison, mais il faudra les prévenir qu’ils

ne pourront pas lire leurs notes lors de leur prise de parole mais seulement des mots clés.

k Certains élèves souhaiteront peut-être s’enregistrer ou se filmer et ajouter des jingles

et des bruitages. Il faudra les y encourager et les amener à jouer leur rôle de façon

convaincante.

k On peut aussi accepter d’autres scénarios : une interview entre un journaliste et un

témoin de l’accident, un adjoint au maire de New York, ou Autrey en personne.

k Voici un exemple de fiche qui a servi d’amorces à la prise de parole d’élèves.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Description:

Description: Description: Description:

Description:

Description: Description:

UNIT

4 HEROES

7 2 • UNIT 4

Prolongement possible : après cette activité, les élèves pourront comparer leurs productions

à la réalité en visionnant l’interview de Wesley Autrey disponible sur YouTube.

4. GORILLAS IN THE MIST

1. Get ready

> Mise en œuvre

a. k Le professeur pourra demander aux élèves de faire une recherche préalable sur Dian

Fossey et de présenter ces informations lors d’une prise de parole en continu en début

de séance.

k Sinon, l’enseignant procédera à une anticipation sur les gorilles ; il notera au tableau

Gorillas? et demandera à la classe ce qu’elle sait.

Productions possibles : They are big monkeys living in Africa. I think they are an endangered

species. They live in groups or communities with one male leader. They are wild and fearless.

Males usually bang their chests with their fists to deter enemies from approching the group.

k Ensuite le professeur pourra se servir de l’encadré jaune en haut de la page du manuel.

Nous suggérons d’en faire une copie sur transparent ou de noter ces informations au

tableau afin que la classe se concentre sur les gorilles avant de s’intéresser à Dian Fossey.

Le professeur demandera aux élèves de le lire en silence en mémorisant le maximum

d’informations. Puis l’enseignant cachera l’encadré ou fera fermer le manuel. Il pourra

noter au tableau des amorces du type : Gorillas are / do… because / which means / so…

Compared to human beings, they… Les élèves diront ce dont ils se souviennent.

k L’anticipation sur les gorilles avec l’encadré jaune en haut de la page du manuel peut aussi

se faire en binômes ou en groupes. Seule une partie de la classe a accès aux informations sur

les gorilles. Le reste de la classe doit préparer des questions pour le premier groupe. Suivant

les compétences de la classe, le professeur pourrait envisager deux types d’amorces :

– Groupe assez autonome : food? lifespan? size? weight (kg)? protection status?

– Groupe plus fragile : What food ... eat? How long ... live? How tall ...? How heavy ...?

.... protected?

Les élèves procéderont à une récapitulation en groupes.

Productions possibles : They are omnivorous, which means they eat anything from meat to

plants, either fish or berries. They can live up to 35 years which is longer than cats and dogs.

What is amazing is their size; they can be up to 1.8m standing which is as tall as a grown-up

man, but they weigh from 135 to 220kgs, so much heavier than us. Sadly they are greatly

endangered, hunted down for their meat, their heads and hands which are collected as

trophees. They also suffer from deforestation which destroys their habitat.

MANUEL k P. 46

UNIT 4 • 7 3

Informations complémentairesMountain gorillas are found in the Virunga volcanic mountains of Central Africa (south-west

Uganda, north-west Rwanda, eastern Democratic Republic of Congo and Uganda’s Bwindi

Impenetrable Forest). They are threatened by poaching, loss of habitat, and disease.

– Poaching: They have been killed for their heads, hands, and feet, which are sold to

collectors. Infants are sold to zoos, researchers, and people who want them as pets.

Poaching for meat is particularly threatening in regions of political unrest. Most of them

live in areas of war and political unrest in central Africa.

– Habitat loss: The forests where mountain gorillas live are surrounded by rapidly

increasing human settlement. The resulting deforestation limits the gorillas’ territory.

– Disease: Humans and gorillas are genetically quite similar, so gorillas are vulnerable to

many of the same diseases as humans. Groups visited by tourists have the greatest risk.

b. On demandera ensuite à la classe de réagir à la photo. On peut, par exemple, écrire au

tableau Who? Where? How many? Attitude?

Productions possibles : I can see a woman surrounded by a group of gorillas who seem to

be friendly enough. Dian Fossey was probably a photographer, an animal rights fighter, an

earthkeeper. She worked in Africa, in the forest. I think she became friends with a group of

gorillas. She doesn’t seem to be scared or threatened by them.

2. More about Dian Fossey

Quant au texte, on demandera à la classe de le lire et de retrouver l’ordre chronologique

de la biographie en s’appuyant sur les dates, les connecteurs logiques, les marqueurs de

temps et la ponctuation (voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook, page suivante, exercice I).

3. Watch a video

Voir p. 414-415 et 433-435.

Prolongements possibles :

k D’autres vidéos sont disponibles sur le site de l’association Dian Fossey Gorilla Fund :

www.gorillafund.org/gorilla_videos/index.php

k En Follow-up work, les élèves pourront présenter une espèce menacée (en faisant

un clip pour une association de protection) ou une personne ayant consacré sa vie à la

protection d’une espèce (Jane Goodall et les chimpanzés, Roxanne Kremer et les dauphins,

Alan Rabonowitz et les jaguars…). Pour plus d’informations :

www.myhero.com/myhero/go/directory/directory.asp?dir=earthkeeper

4. Role play

Voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook page suivante (exercice II).

UNIT

4 HEROES

7 4 • UNIT 4

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 26-27)

1G • 2D • 3B • 4F • 5H • 6C • 7E • 8A

Hello everybody, it’s nice to see you, it’s been quite a while… Guess what I’ve just watched.

Right, I’ve seen the most fascinating story about gorillas. There was this woman, Dian

Fossey, who devoted her whole life to these massive monkeys. After college she went to

Rwanda and Zaire, and spent months in the jungle making friends with them. She learnt a

lot, and did her best to protect them from poachers. She was first-rate, the bravest woman

I’ve ever heard of! Of course many people opposed her work and she was threatened many

times. Poor woman, she died because of her work! Right, she was murdered in Rwanda and

nobody was arrested for it. She’s one of the heroes of the twentieth century because now

gorillas are protected, and everybody knows about her fight. Come on guys, let’s rent the

film Gorillas in the Mist for tonight. It’s going to be great, we’ll have fun and learn something

at the same time. And why don’t we adopt a gorilla? It would help raise money and we

would do something concrete to save these animals. Don’t you think it’s a good idea?

5. OVER OCEANS AND MOUNTAIN TOPSIci aussi l’enseignant pourra commencer par une anticipation thématique en demandant

aux élèves de préparer un mini exposé sur un des héros sportifs qu’ils apprécient.

1. Understanding the text

> Mise en œuvre

On divisera la classe en deux groupes. Le premier lira le début du texte (juqu’à “the region”,

l. 16) avec l’aide de la fiche du Workbook correspondante p. 27-28 (Part 1). Le second grou-

pe se concentrera sur la fin du texte (à partir de “He never liked”, l. 17) et la fiche d’aide à

la lecture, appelée Part 2. On demandera à chaque groupe de préparer un résumé oral de

ce qui a été lu. Le premier parlera de l’aventure sportive et du Himalayan Trust, alors que le

second s’attachera à la modestie du personnage et aux valeurs qu’il chérissait. Pour guider

les élèves on peut noter des amorces au tableau pour chaque groupe :

– Group 1: – Group 2:

✓ 29, May 1953 ✓ Pastime

✓ Previous attempts ✓ Nicknames

✓ Himalayan Trust ✓ His values and philosophy

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 27-28)

➼ PART 1

1953 • Everest

Sir Edmund Hillary • Sherpa Tenzing Norgay • Queen Elizabeth II

New Zealand • Nepal

He was the first man to reach the Everest peak.

“… huge accomplisment against nature as many attempts had previously failed.” (l. 7)

I.

II.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

MANUEL k P. 47

UNIT 4 • 7 5

New Zealander

➼ PART 2

“humanitarian work” (l. 22)

“modest abilities” (l. 24) • “ordinary person with ordinary qualities” (l. 28)

In private: Ed Public figure: a quintessential Kiwi • Sir Ed

determination • humility • generosity

“ordinary person with ordinary qualities” (l. 28)

Corrigé :

– Edmund Hillary is from New Zealand.

– He was the first man to reach the Everest peak on May, 29 1953.

– “... devote much of his life to aiding the mountain people of Nepal and set up the Himalayan

Trust through which he built schools, hospitals and bridges in the region.” (l. 15) “... he wished

to be remembered mostly for his humanitarian work.” (l. 21)

– “He never liked to be known as a hero, preferring to be called ‘Ed’ and considering himself

just an ordinary beekeeper.” (l. 17) “Adventuring can be for the ordinary person with ordinary

qualities, such as I regard myself,” (l. 28)

Ensuite on incitera les élèves à dire ce qu’ils ont appris dans ce texte, en utilisant les amorces

fournies en bas de la p. 47 du manuel.

Productions possibles : Sir Edmund Hillary was a famous New Zealander, or a Kiwi, if you

prefer. He became famous in 1953 when he reached the top of Mount Everest / because he

was the first man to reach the top of Mount Everest. It was a tremendous achievement / a huge

victory because people had tried and failed again and again. He used his international fame

to help the people of Nepal get a better life. He was so generous that he gave / he devoted

much of his time and money to building schools, hospitals and roads. Yet he was a very humble

man who enjoyed beekeeping and regarded himself as an ordinary person even though he had

become the most famous mountaineer of the 20th century.

2. Who’s your hero?

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Journalist: Good afternoon Susie, welcome. I’ve heard you intend to be in one of the next

expeditions to Mount Everest.

Susie: Yes, we’ll be going next Spring... climbing the North-East ridge.

J: ... And this is for charity!

S: Indeed, we will be raising money for Cancer Link.

➼ Part 2J: How, well, why did you become a climber, a mountaineer? Why Mount Everest which is

a legend?

S: When I was little, I read a book about Sir Edmund Hillary and he’s been my hero ever

since. I remember watching an interview in which he recalled his boyhood: As a child he

dreamed a lot and read a lot of books about adventure. Then he became a competent

mountaineer and went off to the Himalayas, doing a lot of climbing.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

UNIT

4 HEROES

7 6 • UNIT 4

J: Apparently he also joined expeditions to the Antarctic.

S: Right, he was a real adventurer, but as he grew older, he devoted much of his life to

helping the Sherpas of Nepal. He was more involved in organizing, raising funds or leading

expeditions... He became less active, less sporty maybe.

➼ Part 3J: But he got more and more interested in humanitarian causes, didn’t he?

S: Oh definitely! He built up very close friendships with the people of the Himalayas.

Through his efforts, schools, bridges, roads and hospitals were built. At the end of his life,

he became more and more worried about the huge number of tourists who leave tons of

rubbish behind. He also became very much involved in environmental matters. So, his

major interests were then in people and in the environment. He is an inspiration to me

because he was an explorer who fulfilled his dream and took risks to achieve his goals.

J: Thank you, that was fascinating.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 28-29)

➼ PART 1

welcome • intend • expeditions • Mount Everest • going • next • Spring • climbing •

North-East • ridge • charity • raising • money • cancer

Plans: intend • next climbing expedition • going next Spring

Where? Mount Everest • North-East • ridge

What for? charity • raising money for Cancer Link

She is a mountaineer who is going to climb the North-East ridge of the Everest.

➼ PART 2

When I was little, I read a book about Sir Edmund Hillary and he’s been my hero ever since.

I remember watching an interview in which he recalled his boyhood.

the Himalayas • the Antarctic

adventure • adventurer • funds • involved • raise

read • books • competent • mountaineer • climbing • helping • organizing • leading •

less • more active • sporty

Childhood: dreamed a lot • read books about adventure

Youth: competent mountaineer • did a lot of climbing

Later years: helping Sherpas • raising funds • leading expeditions

➼ PART 3

interested • humanitarian • friendships

k buildings: schools • hospitals k transport: roads • bridges k protection of the

environment: environmental matters • huge number of tourists • rubbish

At the end of his life he became involved in humanitarian causes and in the protection of

the environment, especially in Nepal.

inspiration • explorer • fulfilled • dream • risks • achieve • goals

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

UNIT 4 • 7 7

3. A famous Kiwi

Les élèves pourront s’appuyer sur le Action! du Workbook p. 30.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 30)

This $5 New Zealander bank note is very colourful! I like it because it is quite unusual, I can

see Sir Edmund Hillary in the middle. He is quite young. He is smiling. It represents him when

he was a mountaineer at the summit of his fame. Indeed, Mount Everest is in the background.

So they have selected the Everest conqueror as a popular icon for their 5$ banknote.

Edmund Hillary was born in 1919 in New Zealand. He died in 2008. He is a real hero because

he was the first to climb the Everest peak in 1953. He succeeded where so many other

trained athletes had failed. He certainly overcame many hardships to get there. In his old

age, his interests became both humanitarian causes and the protection of the environment,

especially in Nepal.

Therefore he became a symbol for New Zealand and is a national and international hero.

He is greatly admired for his victory and numerous climbing successes and for his humble

temperament. Indeed he thought he was no hero, just a normal Mr Everybody led by

determination and generosity. He embodies the true hero, generous at heart, with no

self-pride who devotes his life to others / who turns his personal success into a means to

help other human beings. He thought anyone can become a hero if he or she is generous,

determined and humble.

6. WAR AND PEACE

1. War times

> Mises en œuvre possibles

➼ PREMIÈRE VARIANTE

On pourrait demander aux élèves d’observer rapidement la couverture du livre et de dire de

quoi il parle à leur avis. Ils auront certainement repéré les mots true story et child soldier et

fait le lien avec la photo du jeune Africain portant un fusil. Ils rempliront ensuite la fiche du

Workbook p. 31-32.

➼ DEUXIÈME VARIANTE

La découverte du livre et de l’histoire d’Ishmael Beah peut se faire en groupes ou en

binômes. L’équipe ou l’élève A se concentrera sur la couverture du livre et fera les activités

du Workbook intitulées Part 1 et Part 2, l’équipe ou l’élève B lira le texte Rebel with a cause

et travaillera la Part 3 du Workbook. Chaque groupe ou élève récapitulera ce qu’il a appris

pendant que le reste de la classe ou le second élément du binôme prendra des notes avec

l’aide de l’enseignant (voir grille de Pairwork du Fichier Pédagogique p. 79-80).

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 48

UNIT

4 HEROES

7 8 • UNIT 4

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 31-32)

➼ PART 1

a) title = 3 • subtitle = 1 • illustration = 5 • book reviews = 2 + 8 • author = 4 • extract = 6 •

summary = 7

b) The title of the book, a part of the extract, the summary, the names of the newspapers

and the illustration are in colour.

The dominant colours are black and red.

➼ PART 2

a) everybody = people in Sierra Leone • you = Ishmael • I = Ishmael Beah • us = US children

b) Sierra Leone • Africa

c) an autobiography

d) 12 = Beah’s age • fifty = conflicts all over the world • 300,000 = number of child soldiers •

one = Ishmael, one of the child soldiers

e) war and violence: fighting • attacking • violent • terrible act • fought • rebels

the army: conscripted • AK-47 • soldiers

➼ PART 3

a) I = Ishmael Beah • us / we = children in Sierra Leone

b) tâches • se venger

c) k loss: perte k starvation • survive

d) Key problem: civil war

Consequences on children: families are killed • surviving children starve • they have to

join the army • children become soldiers

Reasons for joining the army: they lost their families • starvation • they want to belong

to a group / to take their revenge

e) Past: joined the army to survive • wanted to avenge the deaths of his family • had to get

some food • was to be part of the army

Present: have been rehabilitated • not a soldier anymore but a child

f) children all over the world: “it’s a global issue” (l. 10), “all over the world” (l. 11)

2. Rebel with a cause

Il s’agit ici de synthétiser ce qui a été appris lors de la phase d’échange entre groupes ou

élèves, par exemple grâce à la grille de Pairwork page suivante (téléchargeable sur le site

compagnon).

N. B. : ce texte peut être écouté sur le CD classe n° 1, piste 22.

1.

2.

3.

Pairwork

UNIT 4 • 7 9

PUPIL / GROUP A

Work in silence! Write your answers with information collected in the extract.

Work in silence! Prepare questions to ask your partner on the extract.

Speak! Get ready to ask the questions written in your grid.

PUPIL / GROUP B

Work in silence! Write your answers with information collected in the extract.

1.

2.

3.

1.

Sort of book Beah’s age when it happened His companions of war His actions in the conflict Reason for his enduranceHis decision His new school friends’ interestsNumber of child soldiers

Major disaster in Sierra Leone Consequences for children New job to survive Causes of Beah’s enrolmentHis obsession Beah’s opinion on his role The change in his life His new fight

My questions: My friend’s answers:Major disaster in Sierra Leone?

What was ?

Consequences for children?

What were ?

New job to survive? How did ?

Causes of Beah’s enrolment?

What ?

His obsession?What ?

(be obsessed with)

Beah’s opinion on his role?

What ?

(think of)

The change in his life? How ?

His new fight? What ?

UNIT

4 HEROES

8 0 • UNIT 4

Work in silence! Prepare questions to ask your partner on the front and back covers.

Speak! Ask the questions written in your grid, and answer your partner’s questions.

Productions possibles :a. A Long Way Gone is an autobiography written by young Ishmael Beah. It is definitely a true

and sad story. He was just 12 years old when war started in Sierra Leone and his whole family

was slaughtered. He was an orphan who lost all his family in the war. He explains he was

forced / drafted into the army to survive, to get food and clothes and to defend himself. Like

many other children he felt vulnerable / desperate / miserable. He couldn’t fend for himself.

He was not self-sufficient and he depended entirely on adults. As he says, “the need to be

safe and to be part of something” explains why he felt hopeless / helpless / defenceless /

weak. That’s the reason why the army gave him a sense of belonging. He was also eager to

take his revenge and strike back. Like 300,000 other child soldiers he was made to kill and

torture. He was mistreated / ill-treated / brutalised. Adults drugged him to prevent him from

rebelling or running away. When children are drafted into the army, they are compelled to

do the most dangerous jobs. Children were manipulated, brainwashed and had to endure a

terrible ordeal.

b. When eventually he escaped he became a spokesperson for ill-treated and defenceless

children enrolled into armies all over the world. He feels it is his duty to defend their rights /

speak out for children. His aim is to put an end to the use of child soldiers / to the exploitation

of children in conflicts. A huge number of children are involved in wars. It is a widespread

phenomenon, a global problem, that’s why he spoke before the United Nations. The exploitation

of children should be banned and the law should be enforced. Children should be protected and

prevented from being involved in conflicts all over the world.

3. Role play

On s’appuiera sur le Action! du Workbook p. 32.

2.

3.

My questions: My friend’s answers:

Sort of book? What ?

Beah’s age when it happened?

How ?

His companions of war?

Who did ?

His actions in the conflict?

What ?

Reason for his endurance?

How ?

(survive on + name / live on)

His decision?What ?

(decide / choose to + BV)

His new school friends’ interests

What ?

(be interested in + V-ING)

Number of child soldiers

How many ?

UNIT 4 • 8 1

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

On fera relire toutes ces phrases à haute voix pour en fixer la prononciation.

> Build up your vocabulary

a.

b. My hero is Abraham Lincoln; he was born 1 in 1809. He worked 2 all his life 3 […]

He believed 4 […] His biggest success 5 was winning the Civil War. He was shot in

Washington where he lived / died 6 . His death 7 in 1865 was a real shock for the nation.

a. En ajoutant le suffixe -ful à un nom, on peut fabriquer un adjectif.

b. honourable (honorable) • peaceful (paisible) • respectful (digne de respect / respectable) •

adventurous (aventurier / qui aime l’aventure) • hopeful (plein d’espoir) + hopeless (désespéré,

qui a perdu tout espoir) • faithful (fidèle) + faithless (infidèle) • thoughtful (réfléchi) + thoughtless

(irréfléchi) • painful (douloureux) + painless (indolore) • famous (célèbre) • joyful (joyeux) •

skilful (habile)

> Le superlatif

the fastest • the most intelligent • biggest • the prettiest • the worst • the richest •

the most successful • the best • the most generous

Pour exprimer le superlatif de supériorité (= « le plus… »), on emploie :

– the + terminaison -est pour les adjectifs d’une syllabe et ceux de deux syllabes se

terminant par -y– most + adjectif pour les autres adjectifs.

– -y devient -iest s’il est précédé d’une consonne.

– une consonne finale qui suit une voyelle est doublée.

Par la préposition of ou in.

> Être ou avoir

a. – He was only five feet three tall : Il ne mesurait qu’un mètre soixante.

– There were many jobs : Il y avait beaucoup de boulots / d’emplois.

– He was not afraid : Il n’avait pas peur.

– He was lucky : Il a eu de la chance.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

MANUEL k P. 49-51

Nom Adjectif Participe passé Verbedeath • life • birth •

work • belief •

success

dead • successful lived • born •

worked

die • live • work •

believe • succeed

Adjectifs courts Adjectifs longsAdjectifs ayant

un superlatif irrégulierfast • big • pretty • rich intelligent • successful •

generous

bad • good

UNIT

4 HEROES

8 2 • UNIT 4

– He was 78 years old : Il avait 78 ans.

Toutes ces expressions contiennent le verbe be en anglais, mais sont traduites en français

par un autre verbe (le plus souvent « avoir »).

b. Ces verbes sont au prétérit car il s’agit de la biographie d’une personne décédée, on est

donc dans le révolu.

– Ishmael’s a peace-maker : verbe be– Ishmael’s book is entitled A Long Way Gone : génitif– He’s just read a book on the Himalayas : have contracté

> Script de l’enregistrement

a. Edmund Hillary’s commitment to sport, Human Rights and nature is incredible.

b. He’s the most generous person I’ve ever heard of.

c. He could have enjoyed a quiet life after his victory, but he’s chosen to get involved.

d. Indeed he’s used his fame and his money to build hospitals in Nepal.

e. And he’s said to be very humble, considering himself an ordinary man.

f. The Queen’s speech about his victory over Everest shows how impressed she was.

g. He’s such a national symbol that New Zealand has chosen to portray him on a banknote.

h. Well I consider him a hero who’s become a symbol of determination and willpower.

> Practice

a. the tallest • the most honest

b. the youngest • the best • the most important

c. the fastest • the bravest • the youngest

a. There are many / a lot of records held by Americans.

b. When he was twenty (years old) he wrote his first novel.

c. My hero has (got) brown hair.

d. Shackleton was never cold and never scared / frightened!

e. You are right, he was lucky not to have died / not to die.

Margaret Brown became famous as one of the lucky survivors of the Titanic tragedy and

was then nicknamed “The Unsinkable Molly”. She was born in Missouri in 1867. Later she

moved to Colorado where she met her husband James who worked for the silver mines.

He struck it immensely rich and the family went to live in Denver. Molly travelled around

the world. She was on her way home on the transatlantic liner Titanic when the ship hit an

iceberg and sank. During the disaster she helped victims and everybody acclaimed her

heroism. Back home she gave money to poor immigrants who were on board. She was an incredible woman who spoke her mind and joined many causes such as the rights of

women or the education of all children.

Terry Fox was both a Canadian humanitarian, an athlete and a cancer activist, certainly one

of Canada’s greatest heroes. He was born on July 28, 1958 in Winnipeg, Manitoba and spent

his childhood near Vancouver. Unfortunately he discovered he had bone cancer in 1977,

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

’s = is (be)’s = génitif (expression

de la possession)’s = has (have)

b • e • g a • f c • d • h

UNIT 4 • 8 3

when he was only 19 years old. He had to have his right leg cut off above the knee. He was

such a brave young man that in hospital, he decided to run across Canada and raise money

for cancer research. He called his long journey “the Marathon of Hope”. He wanted to get

attention and collect money. He actually managed to raise $1 from each Canadian citizen.

It took him 18 months, 5,000 kilometers (3,107 miles) to prepare his long race. Eventually,

on April 12, 1980, he left from St John’s, Newfoundland and managed to run 42 kilometers

(26 miles) every day through Quebec and Ontario. He stopped running on September 1,

1980 after 143 days and 5,373 kilometers (3,339 miles). Terry Fox died on June 28, 1981.

In 2005, he was the first Canadian to be portrayed on coins and the Terry Fox dollar was

issued to honour this great hero’s memory. Today, the Terry Fox Run is organized around

the world every year in order to raise money for cancer research.

YOUR TASK

Corrigés :

a.

b.

A. a. “My hero is a young surfer called Bethany Hamilton. She intended to become professional and was very talented. She was surfing with friends on Halloween morning

in sunny Hawaï when a 14-foot tiger shark bit and took off her left arm. Her courage

was tremendous: Not only did she swim to safety and save her life, but she went back

surfing a month later with only one arm. She turned a negative into a positive and she

was my age, only 14, when it happened. She inspired me to go on with my dream. I am her

biggest fan!”

B. a. Seuls figurent les mots porteurs. Les signes prennent la place du verbe être ou des

connecteurs logiques.

1.

2.

MANUEL k P. 52-53

Exprimer son admiration Structurer le discours Donner son opinion– such a lovely lady

– both beautiful and the most

generous person I’ve heard and

read about

– so good-looking

– I wish I could be as good as him.

– I think he’s awesome!

– the most courageous woman

– an amazing person

– she received many awards

– and

– also

– for example

– sadly

– to conclude

– that’s why

– He inspires me because

– For me, she is a symbol of

– She is a true inspiration

to me

Exprimer son admiration Structurer le discours Donner son opinion– he / she’s incredible

– he is a great guy

– he / she’s a tremendous hero

– what a genius!

– consequently

– later on

– that’s how

– thanks to him / her

– eventually

– in my opinion

– to my mind

UNIT

4 HEROES

8 4 • UNIT 4

> Script de l’enregistrement

Sebastian Clover sailed across the Atlantic solo when he was only 15 years old, in 2003.

He is the hero I have selected because he was the youngest person to cross the ocean

alone and that’s terrific, isn’t it? He left Tenerife and reached Antigua 24 days later. He

recalled his most fantastic moments were when he saw dolphins and whales swimming

near his little boat. Wow! But he also remembered that worst day when the weather was

bad and his mast nearly broke; he spent 20 long and anxious hours repairing. Gosh, that

must have been awful! During the whole crossing, he would dream of sleeping in a real bed

and eating a lot of chocolate, so would I! I definitely admire him because I love sailing and

I know how difficult and dangerous this sport is. I think he was both courageous and strong

to succeed in this awesome experience!

N. B. : avant la réalisation de la tâche, on invitera les élèves à écouter l’interview sur le site

compagnon, (U4–Dialogue: Great inspiration).

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante.

Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre

de points attribué à chaque critère.

Nom : Classe :

Respect des consignes (tous les points sont traités) 0 1 2 3

Temps de parole (l’élève a essayé de parler le plus longtemps possible) 0 1 2 3

Qualité de la langue orale– accentue des mots porteurs de sens

– veille à l’accentuation des mots longs

– veille à la correction des phonèmes

0 1 2 3 4 5

Savoir communiquer avec naturel – prestation audible

– limite les faux démarrages et les redites

– utilise des gap fillers

– recherche le contact visuel

0 1 2 3

Richesse de l’expression et du lexique– réutilise des acquis du cours

– varie les expressions

– prend des risques

0 1 2 3

Correction de la langue– évite les calques du français

– évite les phrases inintelligibles (mots oubliés, inventés...)

– évite les erreurs élémentaires et récurrentes

0 1 2 3

Total des points / 20

PRENDRE LA PAROLE EN CONTINU • 8 5

PRENDRE LA PAROLE EN CONTINU

CORRIGÉ

2. a. Mots accentués dans l’extrait a : greatest • hobby • soccer • absolutely • love •

sport • involved • long • time

Mots inaccentués dans l’extrait b : in • and • in • I • I • on • and • are • my

k Tous les mots d’une phrase ne sont pas accentués. On accentue les mots porteurs de

sens, c’est-à-dire les mots lexicaux (noms, verbes, adjectifs, adverbes, etc). Certains mots

d’une syllabe, appelés mots grammaticaux, sont inaccentués.

b. surprisingly • Canadian • really • hockey • very much • don’t enjoy • American

football • either

c. Les groupes de sens sont marqués | à l’intérieur d’une phrase et || à la fin d’une phrase.

I like to travel | and have visited many parts of Europe and North America ||. It’s fun to see

new places | and experience different cultures and languages ||. I like going to the movies |

and when I go | , I usually watch comedies or action movies ||.

3. Les groupes de sens sont marqués | à l’intérieur d’une phrase et || à la fin d’une

phrase. Les mots porteurs de sens sont en gras.

When I’m not watching soccer on TV | , I like to watch crime shows | like CSI: Las Vegas. ||

My other guilty pleasure is | video games ||. I’ve always loved playing console games |

with friends | or playing computer games | on my own. ||

A.

MANUEL k P. 54-55

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

8 6 • UNIT 5

City of glass

Comprendre à l’écrit : les descripteurs du CECRL

Niveau A2 Niveau B1

Grille d’auto-évaluation

Je peux lire des textes courts et simples : lettres personnelles

simples, cartes postales, prospectus,

menus, horaires et trouver un

renseignement spécifique dans des

documents de la vie quotidienne

courants et familiers.

Je peux comprendre des textes simples dont la langue est courante, des textes narratifs, des textes informatifs liés à la vie quotidienne. Je peux comprendre des lettres personnelles qui décrivent des

expériences et impressions.

Lire pour s’informer et discuter

Peut comprendre des textes courts

et simples, le message simple d’une

lettre ou d’une carte postale qui

lui est adressée ainsi que quelques

informations contenues dans une

annonce, un prospectus, un menu,

une notice sur des sujets qui lui

sont connus.

Peut identifier le sujet d’un texte,

d’une lettre ou d’un article de

journal.

Peut identifier la nature d’un texte.

Peut comprendre un texte court et

simple ou descriptif sur un sujet

lié au programme scolaire, à la vie

quotidienne ou à un fait divers.

Peut repérer et comprendre les

informations importantes contenues

dans un texte, une lettre ou un

article sur un sujet qui est familier.

Peut comprendre des règlements

et des instructions lorsqu’ils sont

énoncés clairement.

Peut comprendre un récit simple.

Peut comprendre un texte lié au

programme scolaire ou à un sujet

qui l’intéresse particulièrement

et repérer les informations

essentielles.

Peut comprendre rapidement les

informations principales contenues

dans une lettre, un prospectus, un

court document officiel.

Peut comprendre les points

principaux contenus dans un récit,

une lettre ou un article de presse

relatant des faits.

Peut prélever et réunir des

informations dans différentes

parties d’un texte ou plusieurs

textes pour accomplir une tâche

spécifique.

Peut comprendre les principaux

arguments d’un article de presse,

d’un texte narratif, ou d’un extrait

de roman contemporain avec l’aide

d’un dictionnaire si nécessaire.

UNIT 5 • 8 7

Nous avons souhaité parler de New York, car c’est un lieu d’échanges, à la fois sociaux et

culturels, par excellence. C’est en outre une ville extrêmement moderne pourtant marquée du

sceau du passé. Ses monuments emblématiques ainsi que bien sûr Ellis Island et les différentes

vagues d’immigration qui s’y sont succédé permettent d’aborder le passé et par là le thème de

la mémoire. Le titre même de l’unité s’est imposé comme un clin d’œil à l’ouvrage homonyme

de Paul Auster, paru en 1985, qui constitue le premier volet de The New York Trilogy.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Évaluer sa compréhension d’un document

écrit (un prospectus authentique sur la

Statue de la Liberté)

Mémoire • Échanges • Création

k monuments de New York (p. 60-61)

k immigration aux États-Unis (p. 62-63

et 66)

k paysages urbains (p. 64-65)

k histoire des origines de New York (p. 69)

k dérivation des mots (p. 67 et 71)

k adjectifs composés (p. 67)

k ordre des adjectifs dans la phrase (p. 67)

k Check your vocabulary (p. 64, 65 et 67)

k forme passive (p. 68)

k réalisation de la voyelle -o- (p. 67)

k différenciation des accents américain

et britannique (p. 67)

k exprimer le but

k exprimer désirs, souhaits et intentions

k exprimer la cause

k donner son opinion

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

X

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

8 8 • UNIT 5

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

Lire

Lire et prendre la paroleen continu

Lire et prendre la parole en interaction

Écrire

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

k Your task, prospectus (p. 70-71)

k Tune in, textes courts sur différents lieux connus de New York (p. 60-61)k The Ellis Island Experience, extrait d’un roman (p. 63)

k Scenes of New York City, extraits de romans (p. 64-65)k rendre compte d’un document sonore

(p. 61 et 62)

k rendre compte d’un texte (p. 63)

k The making of an immigrant, écrire une histoire à partir d’illustrations (p. 66)k décrire une photo tirée d’un film (p. 69)

k The Empire State Building (p. 61) k The history and role of Ellis Island (p. 62)k site compagnon, U5–Dialogue: Portrait

of a New Yorker

The Journey, reportage (p. 62)

Workbook

X

X

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

UNIT 5 • 8 9

TUNE IN!

Anticipation

On pourra procéder à un brainstorming sur New York de différentes manières.

k Noter « New York » au tableau et demander aux élèves de réagir.

Productions possibles : Although New York is one of the most famous cities in the United

States, it is not the capital. The capital is Washington D.C. New York is famous for its world-

famous monuments such as the Statue of Liberty, the Empire State Building... New York is also

well-known because of the terrorist attacks which occurred on September 11th, 2001. The Twin

Towers collapsed when two planes crashed into them, killing thousands of people. New York is

well-known because of its big financial district with Wall Street and the Stock Exchange.

k Ajouter « City » à « New York » et demander aux élèves de réagir.

Productions possibles : We say New York City because New York is located in the state of

New York. Its capital is Albany.

Demander aux élèves de situer cet État ainsi que la ville d’Albany sur la carte des États-Unis

dans leur manuel (rabat arrière).

k Montrer (au rétroprojecteur par exemple ou avec la caméra de table du labo multimédia)

une carte de New York avec les cinq boroughs afin que les élèves identifient Brooklyn, le

Bronx, le Queens, Staten Island et qu’ils visualisent que Manhattan est une île. Voici deux

adresses de sites où trouver des cartes :

www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Borough_(New_York_City)

www.students.ithaca.edu/%7Ekyeung1/week07/lab05/lab05.html

1. Which is which?

> Mise en œuvre possible

L’objectif étant de repérer les informations essentielles et d’inférer le sens des mots inconnus

à partir du contexte, de la dérivation et de la composition, ce travail pourra être mené en

binômes avec récapitulation collective. Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, on pourra former

cinq groupes et confier un monument à chaque groupe. À l’intérieur du groupe, les élèves

travailleront individuellement ou en binômes.

k Anticipation des difficultés : avant de commencer les activités de la p. 60, on s’assurera

que les noms des monuments sont prononcés correctement grâce à un exercice rapide de

matching (voir fiche page suivante, téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

k À l’issue des activités a. et b., on proposera aux élèves de faire une synthèse des

informations essentielles concernant chaque monument afin qu’ils les mémorisent. Un

tableau récapitulatif pourra être complété à la maison puis projeté en classe pour faciliter

la correction (voir fiche page suivante, téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

MANUEL k P. 60-61

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

9 0 • UNIT 5

Faites correspondre le mot écrit à sa transcription phonétique.a. Guggenheim Museum 1. \ju…"naItId "neISEns "hedkwO…tEz\b. Flatiron Building 2. \"kraIzlEr ou "kraIslEr "bIldIN\c. Times Square 3. \"gÁgEnhaIm mju…"zIEm\d. United Nations Headquarters 4. \"flœtaIEn "bIldIN\e. Chrysler Building 5. \taIms skw”Er\

Complétez ce tableau (toutes les cases ne pourront pas être pas remplies).

Corrigé proposé (keywords) :

a. 1. C: spire • crescent-shaped steps made of steel • car radiators

2. A: triangular • iron • front of a cruise ship

3. B: simple geometric form • absence of historical references • glass walls

4. E: a white ribbon curled around a cylinder, wider at the top than at the bottom

5. D: intersection • huge number of animated neon and flashy billboards

b. et c. Voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook page suivante.

1.

2.

Chrysler Building

Guggenheim Museum

UN Headquarters

Flatiron Building

WHO Who built it ?

WHEN When was it built?

WHAT MATERIAL

What is it made of?

WHAT SHAPE

What shape is it?

WHERE Where is it located?

HOW TALL

How tall is it?

UNIT 5 • 9 1

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 33-34)

1. The Chrysler Buildinga. surely • Art Deco • completed • symbol • style • crescent • tower • radiators • perfect •

enter

b.

1.

2.

Scale : 1 km

N E WJ E R S E Y

Hudson River

East River

B R O O K LY N

M A N H AT TA NBRO

AD

WAY

BROADW

AY

BR

OA

DW

AY

BR

OA

DW

AY

W. 14 ST.

W. 23 ST.

W. 34 ST.SE

VEN

TH A

VEN

UE

FIFT

H A

VEN

UE

FIFT

H A

VEN

UE

FIR

ST A

VEN

UE

LEX

ING

TON

AV

ENU

ELE

XIN

GTO

N A

VEN

UE

FIR

ST A

VEN

UE

W. 42 ST. E. 42 ST.

E. 43 ST.

E. 89 ST.

E. 23 ST.

E. 34 ST.

E. 14 ST.

E. HOUSTON ST.W. HOUSTON ST.

CENTRALPARK

The Guggenheim Museum

The Chrysler Building

Times Square

The Flatiron

The United Nations

Headquarters

Base + suffixe Nature grammaticale Sens prévisiblequick + ly adverbe rapidement

excite + ment nom enthousiasme

recogniz + able adjectif reconnaissable

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

9 2 • UNIT 5

c.

2. The Flatirona. Réponses libres.

b.

2. The Empire State Building

a. Productions possibles : It’s sunset. I can see the famous giant gorilla King Kong who is holding

the young woman he is in love with in his hand. He is at the top of a skyscraper since we can see

a city (probably New York) lying in the background. She looks tiny compared to him. He is looking

at her lovingly and she is staring back. He doesn’t look dangerous / harmful and she doesn’t look

frightened. She seems to be expecting something but I don’t know what.

b. Productions possibles : I think the recording will deal with the story of the film / movie King

Kong since it is set in New York and we are studying this city.

c. Corrigé : gorilla • strapping • guess • spire • designed • dock • urban • climber

d. Voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook ci-dessous.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 35 À 37)

I. 2. ninth • eightieth • floor • first • second

➼ PART 1

k 443 meters high k New York state, “the Empire State” k New York k United States

k tallest k high / skyscraper

Back in 1930, the chairman of General Motors Corporation hired architect William Lamb

to design the world’s tallest building and Lamb based his design on the simple shape of a

sharpened pencil.

1.

2.

3.

Composition Nature grammaticale Sens prévisiblesky + line nom horizon

sky + scraper nom gratte-ciel

the + tall + est adjectif au superlatif le plus haut, le plus grand

crescent + shaped adjectif composé en forme de croissant

car + radiators nom composé radiateurs (de voiture)

auto + maker nom composé constructeur automobile

Composition Nature grammaticale Sens prévisibleun + usual adjectif inhabituel, étrange

bare + leg + ed adjectif aux jambes dénudées

Type of monument Height Rank Origin of the nameskyscraper 443 meters

high

1st in the city

2nd tallest in the USA

9th tallest in the world

tallest building in “the

Empire State”

UNIT 5 • 9 3

➼ PART 2

business • money • office

empty • unoccupied

“the Empty State Building”

windy • covered in fog

top / spire designed for Zeppelins to dock there • impossible • because of windy conditions

➼ PART 3

bomber • Zeppelins • crashed • killing • elevator • operator • fell • survived

1945 • 79th-80th • 300 meters

➼ PART 4

climb • climbed • climber

gorilla (King Kong) • French climber (Alain Spiderman Robert)

climbed • reached • warning • nets • safety • devices

A French climber climbed up the Empire State Building without warning and without any

security device.

➼ PART 5

k 86 (th floor): observation deck k 1576: number of steps to reach the top k 10 (minutes):

record to climb up the steps k 73: number of elevators

athletic • jog • run up race • climb

You may go on top of the building and see the view / various coloured lights.

II. ➼ RECAP 1 AND 2

a) In 1930, the chairman of the car company General Motors hired an architect, William

Lamb, to design the world’s tallest building. It was nicknamed “the Empire State Building”

and had the shape of a sharpened pencil.

b) It should have be nicknamed “the Empty State Building” because many offices were

unoccupied when it opened.

➼ RECAP 3

One day, a bomber crashed into the Empire State Building and unfortunately 14 people were

killed in the accident. It’s unbelievable that the elevator operator survived after the elevator

fell 300 meters.

➼ RECAP 4

King Kong and Alain Robert have one thing in common: They have both climbed up the

building to reach the top using only their hands and feet, with no nets and no safety devices.

Unlike Alain Robert, King Kong is a fictitious character; Alain Robert is a real man!

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

Date First accident Consequences Final result1945 bomber crashed

into the 79th floor

– 3 crew members and 11 office

workers died

– the elevator fell 300 meters

– the elevator operator survived

the building was

reopened for business

the following Monday

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

9 4 • UNIT 5

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1What do a giant gorilla and a strapping Frenchman have in common? You can think of your

guess while I tell you a little bit about the Empire State Building. Listen and learn more about

the Empire State. Named for the state of New York, which is known as the Empire State,

this 443 metre high skyscraper is the tallest building in the city, the second tallest in the

United States after Chicago Sears Tower and the ninth tallest in the world. Back in 1930 the

chairman of General Motors Corporation hired architect William Lamb to design the world’s

tallest building and Lamb based his design on the simple shape of a sharpened pencil.

➼ Part 2On May 1st, 1931, the Empire State Building opened for business. For years, the Observation

Deck brought in more money than the office space though. Some people joked that it should

be called the “Empty State Building” because so many offices were unoccupied. The spire at

the top of the building was designed so that Zeppelins might dock there but because of windy

conditions, this idea was abandoned. The top of the building is sometimes covered in fog!

➼ Part 3And in 1945 a World War II B25 bomber actually crashed into the 79th floor, killing all three

crew members and eleven office workers. At that moment an elevator operator named Betty

Lou Oliver was on the 80th floor. Her elevator fell 300 metres while she was still inside!

Miraculously she survived and set a world record that still stands today. The building survived

too and was opened for business the following Monday.

➼ Part 4Have you guessed what the gorilla and the Frenchman have in common? Well… they both

climbed the exterior of the Empire State Building and reached the top using nothing more

than their hands and feet. The gorilla King Kong was pure Hollywood fantasy; the second

though, the Frenchman, was a real person and an urban climber named Alain Spiderman

Robert. In 1994 the Frenchman, without warning, started to climb on street level and

reached the top without the use of any nets or safety devices.

➼ Part 5When you visit this Art Déco beauty there are two much safer ways to reach the Observation

Deck which is on the 86th floor. If you are feeling athletic you can jog up 1,576 steps. Many

people actually do this during the annual run up race. Can you believe the fastest time for this

climb is just under 10 minutes! But if you are like me you can choose one of the 73 elevators

instead. However you get there, the view from this famous observation platform is spectacular,

day or night. At night you might notice the coloured lights at the top of the building which are

often a special colour to celebrate a holiday or other notable events. And of course the lights

are red, white and blue on July 4th.

UNIT 5 • 9 5

1. ELLIS ISLAND

1. Get ready

Corrigé :

c. sight • embodiment • thought • deportation • expectedly

d. close • inside

e. eventually • however

N. B. : l’illustration de cette page fait l’objet du transparent n° 4.

2. Listen and learn

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 37 À 39)

I. ➼ PART 1

dream • America

millions • arrived • island • dream • life • came • true • doomed • remain

➼ PART 2

place • disappointment • symbol • hope

Ellis Island is the place where all the people who wanted to enter the United States of America

to live the American Dream arrived. It could be a place of disappointement even if it was near

a symbol of hope.

She appears like a recurring thought, suddenly, unexpectedly, the embodiment of the American

Dream, so tantalizingly close and yet so far away for those who were confined here.

“She” refers to the Statue of Liberty, “embodiment of the American Dream”.

Ellis Island was a place of disappointment. The Statue of Liberty was the embodiment of the American Dream / hope.

➼ PART 3

a) k 60: number of years immigrants have arrived at Ellis Island k 12,000,000: number

of immigrants who have entered Ellis Island k 1,100: number of immigrants who arrived

in one day at Ellis Island (1907) k 1: one day (1907)

b) 1892 and 1907

1.

2.3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

MANUEL k P. 62-63

Number What? Where? Types of immigrants?millions arrived at Ellis Island America – those whose dream came true

– those who were doomed to stay there

Number of immigrants When? How long?– total: 12 million

– most massive arrival:

11,000 on one day

– first arrival: 1892

– most massive arrival:

1907

for 60 years

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

9 6 • UNIT 5

➼ PART 4

climbed • stairs • doctors • examined • decided • free • hospital • deportation

1954 • museum

They had to be examined by doctors.

1) They could be sent to the hospital to be held for treatment and possible deportation.

2) They could be free to go.

II. ➼ RECAP 1

Millions of people arrived at Ellis Island because they wished to achieve their American

Dream. On the one hand, some of them managed to have their dream come true. On the

other hand, for others, this dream remained unfulfilled.

➼ RECAP 2

Ellis Island sometimes represented disappointment because immigrants were confined there

and eventually deported. They were forbidden to enter the United States where they hoped to

start a new life. On the contrary, for sixty years, the Statue of Liberty has symbolized the hope

for freedom and a better life. Even if they were confined on Ellis Island, the immigrants still

considered the Statue of Liberty the embodiment of the American Dream.

➼ RECAP 3

Before, Ellis Island was an immigrant processing centre where people were examined by

doctors. They were either sent to hospital or sent back home when they were not allowed

to enter the USA. Nowadays, Ellis Island is a museum.

N. B. : les productions des élèves liées au Action! du Workbook constitueront la trace écrite

sur ce document audio.

Informations complémentairesIf the immigrant’s problem was curable, immigrants were sent to the island’s hospital. If it

was not, the steamship company that brought them would have to pay to send them back.

Those who were ill, too old, weak or unable to read in any language were sent back to Europe.

In 1911, for example, approximately two percent of those who came were deported. In a few

cases, families were even split up, hence the nickname: the “Isle of Tears”. Families were torn

apart / broken up / separated.

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1For most of the millions who arrived at Ellis Island, the dream of a new life in America

eventually came true. For some however, that dream was doomed to remain only a dream.

➼ Part 2M. A. (inaudible) takes us to a place of disappointment within sight of a towering symbol of

hope. She appears like a recurring thought, suddenly, unexpectedly, the embodiment of the

American Dream, so tantalizingly close and yet so far away for those who were confined here.

11.

12.

13.

UNIT 5 • 9 7

➼ Part 3She beckons the tired, the poor, the huddled masses of the world and for more than sixty

years beginning in 1892 they spilled onto the docks of Ellis Island, twelve million of them all

together. Once in 1907 more than eleven thousand arrived in one day.

➼ Part 4The immigrants climbed the steep stairs into the Great Hall. Doctors examined them and

decided who was free to go and who was sent to the south side of the island to the hospital

to be held for treatment and possible deportation. Off-limit to the public, it is this extraordinary

place we would like to show you. Ellis Island finally closed in 1954. The immigrant processing

centre was restored and is now a museum.

3. Watch a video

Voir p. 416-417 et 436.

4. The Ellis Island experience

> Mise en œuvre possible

On fera lire les différents paragraphes du texte p. 63 du manuel avant de faire remplir la fiche

de compréhension du Workbook (p. 40-41). Une fois celle-ci corrigée et le texte remis dans

l’ordre, on demandera aux élèves de récapituler ce qu’ils ont retenu en utilisant le Action!

du Workbook (p. 41-42). Pour faciliter les échanges on divisera la classe en groupes et on

attribuera

un paragraphe à chaque groupe. Tous les groupes réagiront et interviendront pour compléter

ou rectifier certaines informations.

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 1, piste 31.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 40 À 42)

➼ PARAGRAPH A

those: immigrants who failed • the others: immigrants who had gone through the medical

inspection • them: immigrants who had gone through the medical inspection • your: the

immigrant who is questioned

undergo = subir (clue: a medical exam)

flustered = bouleversé (clue: so flustered that they could not answer, allowed to sit and rest

and try again)

1.

2.

3.

Medical examination

Questioning Result

doctors registration desk • interpreter •

name • nationality • occupation •

read • write • prison • money •

going

could not answer • allowed to sit •

try again • immigrants detained for

further questioning

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

9 8 • UNIT 5

➼ PARAGRAPH B

busy + -est: superlative form. The word is an adjective. Meaning: le plus fréquenté, le plus actif.

landed = débarquaient • glimpse = aperçu

The travelling conditions were appalling, yet it was the only way for immigrants to fulfil the

American Dream.

Approfondissement possible: After so many dark days on board crowded ships, the Statue

of Liberty was the symbol of all the immigrants’ dreams / freedom to start out a new life / to

start from scratch. The USA represented the Promised Land, a land of plenty and enterprise.

The Statue of Liberty symbolized the Golden Door.

➼ PARAGRAPH C

aroused = éveillait (clue: suspicion) • further: plus ample (clue: further inspection)

➼ PARAGRAPH D

immigrants • crossed • Atlantic • steerage • crowded • uncomfortable • deck

➼ PARAGRAPH E

swift = quick • he would grab = il attrapait à chaque fois

➼ PARAGRAPH F

1) “... they were herded onto special ferryboats...”

2) “... the immigrants had numbered identity tags pinned to their clothing.”

3) “Officials hurried them along...”

It is the preterite. Infinitive: hurry. Meaning: pressai(en)t

II. ACTION!

1§ D • 2§ B • 3§ F • 4§ C • 5§ E • 6§ A

➼ PARAGRAPH A

a) ... you had to undergo a thorough medical exam.

b) ... you moved on to the registration desk.

c) ... you were allowed to sit and rest and try again.

d) ... you could be detained for further / additional examinations or questioning.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

1.

2.

Where? Number of immigrants Number of doctors Goals?inspection

hall

numerous: they

formed long lines

2 check diseases,

infections, physical

and mental

abnormalities

Illness Medical actsblinding disease • infections • contagious

and infectious diseases • symptoms

pull up • medical detentions • look

beneath • swift movement • grab eyelid

UNIT 5 • 9 9

➼ PARAGRAPHS B, C

The Statue of Liberty first symbolized freedom and many immigrants fled persecutions.

They also expected a better future and the Statue of Liberty represented numerous

opportunities. They could start a new life and give a better education to their children.

If some diseases were suspected after the first examination, the immigrants received a chalk

mark and had to go through further inspection and undergo a thorough medical exam.

➼ PARAGRAPH E

American authorities feared the newly-arrived could contaminate American citizens. They

were afraid of contagious diseases and infections. That’s why they decided to have some

immigrants detained, to separate them from the others to receive a specific treatment

which may enable them to be cured and enter the States.

➼ PARAGRAPH F

To my mind / To me, they were treated like cattle. I don’t think they deserved such inhuman

treatment. It’s really disturbing. I don’t see why they should be treated so badly / why

everything (money, past life...) should be checked so precisely.

I don’t agree with you, I can understand why they were treated this way because too many

immigrants wished to enter the States. The authorities tried to check as many details as

possible to avoid problems.

Informations complémentairesk Legal inspectionA legal inspector had about two minutes to ask you a series of twenty-nine questions. Here

are some of them:

– What’s your name?

– Where do you come from?

– Why did you come here?

– How much money do you have? Where did you get it? Let me see it.

– Do you have any friends here? Any relatives? Anybody to sponsor you, to come out here

and take care of you?

– Are you an anarchist?

– Who paid for your passage?

– Did you have a contract in Europe to work in America?

k The Great Hall known as the Main Registry Hall Once on Ellis Island, the immigrants climbed the stairs to the Great Hall for medical and legal

examinations. Doctors stood at the top of the stairs and watched the new arrivals for signs

of illness as they climbed the staircase leading to the Great Hall, where they would face a

barrage of questions and examinations. Doctors processed immigrants by the thousands.

They checked immigrants without their knowing, they tracked down diseases, because the

state feared they might be a burden on the economy and would bring in diseases, illiteracy,

radical ideas. They also wanted to select the strongest and the fittest workers. The US

needed a strong and healthy labour force. At that time this hall was covered by a network of

metal railings: Bars divided the floor area into alleys and passageways. And the immigrants

would have to stand there holding their children and their luggage and move down from one

medical examination to the next. The Great Hall was the large waiting room of Ellis Island.

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

1 0 0 • UNIT 5

Immigrants waited here for their interviews with legal inspectors after finishing their medical

exams. It was inhumane.

k The voyageThe passengers that had to come to Ellis travelled in steerage, that is to say the bottom part

of the steamship that is underneath the waterline. There were no windows, no ventilation,

the ceiling was very low (5 or 6 feet high), the passengers slept on triple bunk beds. And

the largest steamships could hold 1,500 to 2,000 passengers. Third-class passengers were

packed / crammed in steerage. It was an ordeal because the boat was overcrowded. They

travelled in appalling / dreadful / awful conditions. They could catch contagious diseases.

It took them two weeks to get to New York City.

Prolongements possibles :

k Un extrait de Titanic de James Cameron ou de America, America d’Elia Kazan (plus

particulièrement vers la fin du film, lorsque le héros arrive à Ellis Island) permettra aux

élèves de mieux visualiser les lieux et les événements évoqués.

k La photographie de la p. 62 du manuel pourra servir de synthèse à cette double page,

par le biais d’une prise de parole en continu, et permettra de vérifier les acquis des élèves.

Productions possibles : The immigrants are having their first glimpse of the Statue of

Liberty. They can be seen from behind. A small child is pointing at the Statue of Liberty in

the background. They are turning their backs to Europe and the old world. They are looking

forward to the future, to starting a new life in America. The young boy stands for the future

generations who will have a higher standard of living, better prospects. His parents may flee

poverty, may emigrate for economic, religious or political reasons. The Statue of Liberty

represents a shelter for the oppressed. These immigrants have not been to Ellis Island yet.

2. SCENES OF NEW YORK CITY

> Mises en œuvre possibles

➼ APPROCHE COLLECTIVE

On demandera aux élèves, en classe ou à la maison, de lire les textes et de compléter la fiche

de leur Workbook (p. 42 à 44). Ils feront ensuite un compte rendu des textes en s’appuyant

sur la rubrique Recap p. 64 du manuel. On leur demandera enfin d’étudier les documents

visuels de la p. 65 du manuel (en répondant aux questions et en s’aidant de la rubrique Help!)

et de les associer aux textes.

➼ APPROCHE COMMUNICATIVE

On pourra diviser la classe en six groupes (chaque groupe se chargeant d’un document,

soit écrit soit iconographique).

– Les groupes A, B et C travailleront sur les textes, en classe ou à la maison, complèteront

la fiche de compréhension du Workbook et répondront aux questions du Recap du manuel.

– Les groupes 1, 2 et 3 travailleront sur le tableau et les deux photos en s’appuyant sur le

Help!. Ils auront pour tâche de présenter ces documents au reste de la classe.

Un rapporteur sera choisi dans chaque groupe et il / elle fera une présentation orale de

une à deux minutes du document sur lequel son groupe aura travaillé.

MANUEL k P. 64-65

UNIT 5 • 1 0 1

Des élèves pourront être désignés pour prendre des notes et faire un compte rendu écrit

de la séance.

1. Understanding the text

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 42 À 44)

➼ TEXT A

The narrator is a child. “Momma said, just look!” (l. 1)

Central Park. Clue: “the park was still green”

k first snow / trees had lost their leaves

k the wind had blown away their leaves. So we can deduce it is winter time.

“You” refers to anybody. Meaning: on pouvait voir... / on voyait

cycling • skating

a) beautiful

b) It’s a positive vision.

c) The narrator is impressed by the park at this time of the year. She / He is excited /

thrilled / elated / exhilarated because it is a lovely day. She / He looks forward to going to

Central Park. She / He is eager to go out and walk in the park, or go skating. This text gives

a very positive image of a bustling park. The little girl / boy is fascinated by this lively and

hectic town. The description gives an impression of energy, space and teeming life.

I would use light colours as in a watercolour. I would use green, blue and white for the snow.

➼ TEXT B

Queens and Manhattan

we: the inhabitants of Brownsville city: New York

its: New York’s ours: the people who live in Brownsville

raw, remote, cheap + est (superlatives) k le plus défavorisé

– age: young – origins: immigrants – social background: poor

foreign • brilliant • unreal

➼ TEXT C

subway • frightened • get lost • stranger • bus-stop. The main topic of the text is urban

environment, especially the underground / subway and the feelings that such a life can arouse.

irrationnel • entrée

Peu importe que le métro soit bon marché ou rapide, il est, quoi qu’on en dise, effrayant.

Those who take the subway (“people entering the subway”) and those taking the bus

(“people waiting at the bus-stop”).

Informations complémentairesBrownsville is a neighbourhood of Brooklyn. It is located in eastern Brooklyn, New York.

Brownsville has a population over 65,000. Over half the population lives below the poverty

line and receives public assistance. Brownsville is predominantly African American and

West Indian including people from Jamaica, Guyana, Trinidad and Tobago, Puerto Rico,

Barbados, Haiti, and the Dominican Republic. The vast majority of households are rented.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

1 0 2 • UNIT 5

Prolongement possible : on pourra demander aux élèves de chercher eux-mêmes

des informations sur Brownsville sur le site de Wikipedia.

2. Recap

Productions possibles :

Text A: In this passage / excerpt a mother and her child may be looking at Central Park

through a window in a building nearby. It is the beginning of winter because the mother says

that it is “the first snow of the season”. Also, the tall trees have lost their leaves and yet what

is described is both colourful and beautiful. There are a lot of people who are busy in the park:

taxi drivers, skaters, cyclists and children who are visiting the zoo. The narrator, who is the

child, seems to enjoy the view and to be fascinated by what he / she sees.

Text B: The narrator is a young child of an immigrant. He / She is poor / poverty-stricken /

destitute. For him / her, New York is a “foreign city” because he / she doesn’t live in Manhattan;

he / she lives in a ghetto far from the skyscrapers / cut off from the city. He / She feels

excluded / rejected: “We were the end of the line.” He / She feels he / she is an outsider, he /

she is on the fringe of society. He / She belongs to the world of the have-nots, the underdogs who

are excluded from the consumer society, a world of wealth / affluence. The city attracts him /

her like a magnet. Skyscrapers fascinate him / her because they symbolize wealth and power.

He / She is probably envious of the life people live in Manhattan. He / She probably wishes he /

she could integrate into this society but he / she feels like a foreigner. He / She knows he /

she doesn’t belong in the city. He / She is aware of the gap between wealthy people and poor

immigrants. He / She is also aware that he / she is at the bottom of the social ladder.

Text C: According to this text, the New York subway is terrifying and scary because it is easy

to lose one’s way and being lost in New York City is a serious problem. It’s a grim vision of

the subway and urban life. People seem to be lonely and we feel pity for them. We can easily

understand why some of them prefer to take the bus because it is less frightening even if it is

not as cheap and as fast. This text gives a depressing, gloomy, scary and frightening image of

the subway.

3. Observe and speak

Productions possibles :

Picture 1: We are immediately struck by the woman in the centre of this painting. She looks

scared, worried, bewildered, miserable, desperate, gloomy, downhearted and dejected.

Behind her, there are two men (who may be following her). On the right, there is a turnpike

and the ceiling is very low, the scene may take place in a subway corridor. On the left, there

are men who seem to be phoning or hiding. All the people seem to be trapped in a prison-like

world, in a soulless landscape. They all look like ghosts. The world they live in is dehumanized,

cold and grey. Commuters seem to be isolated / lonely. They live in a world of concrete,

ugliness and solitude, in a narrow and monotonous world. All the commuters look alike, they

are wearing the same brown raincoat and carrying the same case. They seem to be lost in a

maze, trapped / imprisoned like rats in a cage. This painting is scary and oppressive; it gives

a depressing view of the New York City subway. It corresponds to text C.

UNIT 5 • 1 0 3

Picture 2: This photo was taken in Central Park; indeed, in the background, I can see some

buildings. In the foreground, some people are ice-skating. It is sunny although it is winter. The

trees have almost lost their leaves. It seems to be a lot of fun, I would like to go there. This

photograph converys a very positive vision of the city. It corresponds to text A.

Picture 3: This is a photo in black and white. It was taken in New York City, in Manhattan, as

in the middle, there’s the Empire State Building. This photo wasn’t taken recently because

there are no other skyscrapers on the photo whereas, on the map, the Empire State Building is

surrounded by other buildings. In the foreground there is a little girl who is peeping / peeking

through a hole between two boards. Maybe she lives in a ghetto, in Harlem and she isn’t

allowed to go to the other neighbourhood in Manhattan. She may feel excluded and lonely. She

seems tiny compared to the skyscraper in front of her. The wooden board symbolizes the social

divide / gap between the haves and the have-nots. It may also symbolize segregation which was

abolished in the sixties. This photo is very geometrical and doesn’t give a very positive image of

the city. It corresponds to text B.

3. THE MAKING OF AN IMMIGRANT

> Mises en œuvre possibles

k On pourra organiser la classe en groupes et distribuer à chacun d’eux un transparent

sur lequel écrire leur production. La correction sera menée en projetant ces productions

(au rétroprojecteur, au vidéoprojecteur ou sur le TNI). L’ensemble de la classe réagira alors

aux productions des différents groupes.

k Afin de faciliter l’expression écrite, on pourra proposer la fiche ci-dessous (téléchargeable

sur le site compagnon). Les mots extraits de cette fiche sont en gras dans les productions

possibles page suivante.

Organize your story using the following expressions and the vocabulary below.

For two weeks At the end of the day

On December 10, 1859 On the following day

During the day One week later

At noon After a few weeks

First Every month

Then All day long

MANUEL k P. 66

Drawing 1stressed \strest\scared \skeEd\ = frightened

moved: ému

cry = sob: pleurer

pack: faire ses bagages

leave

miss (example: I miss my

family: ma famille me

manque)

Drawing 2deck: pont

skyline: horizon

fog: brouillard

harbor, harbour (GB)

\"hA…rbEr\: port

shore: rivage

excited

make out: apercevoir

Drawing 3accommodation: logement

confused

lost

lonely

disembark \ÆdIsIm"bA…k\look for

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

1 0 4 • UNIT 5

Productions possibles :1. It was a heart-rending decision to make, but on December 10, 1859, Luigi decided to leave.

He couldn’t possibly go on living this way. With no regular job, it had become very difficult to

pay for the children’s studies. His wife, though heartbroken and moved, tried not to show her

sorrow and helped him to pack. Luigi was stressed and scared but he had made up his mind

even though he was sure to miss his family.

2. For two weeks he had been on board a ship as a steerage passenger in unhealthy living

conditions. Finally Luigi reached freedom in the harbour of this beautiful, gigantic city. He

was really excited when he made out the shore from the deck.

3. Luigi first felt confused, lost and lonely. How would he manage to look for a job and

accommodation in this city where he knew no one?

4. And yet on the following day, he found a job in a factory on an assembly line. Even if

the environment was bleak, Luigi was no longer desperate. He would be able to survive and

help his family.

5. Luigi had found lodgings in a cramped, messy garret. Because he was sleepless he could

not help staring at the picture frame with the photo of his family. And of course he felt lonely, nostalgic and homesick.

6. After a few weeks, Luigi was proud and glad to send the first bills / banknotes to his

relatives. He had eventually become the breadwinner now. He knew it was his duty to

support his family. He was the only one who could possibly give them money. So he only

kept a very small amount of his wages to pay his rent and his food.

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation2.

MANUEL k P. 67-69

Drawing 4assembly line \E"sembli\ \laIn\: chaîne de montage

factory = plant: usine

bleak: sinistre

tiny \"taIni\: minuscule

desperate \"despErEt\exhausted = very tired

be crushed \krØSt\: être

écrasé

Drawing 5garret \"gœrEt\: mansarde

picture frame: cadre à

photos

nightmare \"naItm”Er\: cauchemar

cramped \krœmpt\: à

l’étroit

messy

homesick

nostalgic

lonely

sleepless

stare at: regarder fixement

Drawing 6duty \"dju…ti\: devoir

relative \"relEtIv\: parent

breadwinner

bank bill: billet de banque

salary = wages

proud \praÁd\: fier

responsible

glad = very happy

support one’s family:

subvenir aux besoins de

sa famille

UK USa • b • d • e • h • j • k • m c • f • g • i • l

UNIT 5 • 1 0 5

> Build up your vocabulary

a.

b. Les suffixes -ght, -th et -ness sont ajoutés au mot noyau pour former un nom. Le suffixe

-en est ajouté pour former un verbe (et indiquer une transformation) tandis que le suffixe -ly

est ajouté pour former un adverbe.

a. crescent-shaped = nom + nom-ed • horse-drawn = nom + participe passé • barelegged =

adjectif + nom-ed • nationwide = nom + adjectif

b. Le premier mot détermine / qualifie le second.

c. – star-shaped • steel-made • a worldwide problem

– dégradé par les intempéries • balayé / recouvert par les eaux • les yeux grands ouverts /

écarquillés • qui a le mal du pays

a. Dans toutes ces phrases, c’est le premier adjectif qui exprime le point de vue subjectif

de l’énonciateur.

Quand on utilise plusieurs adjectifs devant un nom, on place en premier celui ou ceux qui

exprime(nt) le point de vue subjectif de l’énonciateur.

b. Ces mots sont invariables car ils sont ici employés comme adjectifs.

> La forme passive

k Les formes verbales en gras sont composées des éléments grammaticaux suivants :

auxiliaire BE + participe passé du verbe.

k L’auxiliaire BE est l’élément conjugué.

Dans l’énoncé a, on s’intéresse en premier lieu à celui qui a fait construire.

Dans l’énoncé b, on s’intéresse en premier lieu à l’objet construit.

L’agent est Donald Trump.

Il est introduit par la préposition by.

– L’agent est seulement mentionné dans l’énoncé a.– La Trump World Tower a été conçue par l’architecte polonaise Marta Rudzka.

On a beaucoup admiré ce bâtiment.

L’équivalent anglais d’une forme française en « on » est souvent une forme passive.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Nom Verbe Adjectif Adverbeheight heighten high highlylength lengthen long

width widen wide widely

tallness tall

strength strengthen strong stronglydepth deepen deep deeply

thickness thicken thick thickly

Présent Present perfect Modal will Prétérita. is divided

e. are concentrated

d. has been rehabilitated

e. have been constructed

c. will be rebuilt b. was destroyed

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

1 0 6 • UNIT 5

a. Dans cette forme verbale, on trouve un auxiliaire modal + be + participe passé du verbe.

b. Ce sont les éléments have + been qui expriment le passé.

– pour faire référence à un fait présent, la forme verbale se compose de : auxiliaire modal +

be + participe passé du verbe.– pour faire référence à un fait passé que l’on juge possible ou probable, la forme verbale

se compose de : auxiliaire modal + have + been + participe passé du verbe.

> Practice

a. The place where New York is located was discovered by Giovanni da Verrazano in 1524.

b. The area where New York is now situated was occupied by the Algonquins in the 16th century.

c. A trading post (named New Amsterdam) was established by the West Indian Company on

the island of Manhattan in 1624.

d. The island was bought by the settlement’s first governor for a small sum of money in 1626.

e. New Amsterdam was renamed New York by the English after they seized the city in 1664.

f. The city was taken by George Washington after the end of the hostilities with the English in

1783.

a. Central Park was created according to the plans drawn up by Frederick Law Olmsted and

Calvert Vaux.

b. The Chrysler Building was built in 1930. It was the tallest skyscraper in the world then.

c. Fake crowns of the Statue of Liberty can be bought on the ferryboat.

d. The Flatiron is known all over the world because of its strange shape.

e. Many neighbourhoods of New York like DUMBO (Down Under the Manhattan Brooklyn

Overpass) have been rehabilitated over the past few years.

f. Many movies / films are shot in New York because it is a romantic city.

We can see New York and we can recognize the United Nations Headquarters and the Empire State Building. The city might have been struck / hit by heavy rain / a twister / tornado. Now it is hit by a violent storm with heavy rain. The city will soon be submerged by a huge tidal wave and it will probably be completely flooded. People will be drowned

under this enormous wave. Most of the inhabitants may have been evacuated already but

some of them may have stayed in the city. Some skyscrapers will be knocked down by the

wave and will collapse. Some inhabitants will probably be injured and be drowned and they

will be rescued only if a hero(ine) is courageous enough to risk his / her life to organize help!

YOUR TASK

> Mise en œuvre

k L’activité 1 se fera en classe pour s’assurer que la démarche d’étude du prospectus,

en entier et en autonomie, est assimilée.

k Les élèves feront les activités 2, 3 et 4 chez eux.

k On leur demandera de remplir la grille page suivante (téléchargeable sur le site

compagnon) pour vérifier qu’ils ont fait leur travail de lecture.

k Cette grille pourra faire l’objet d’une évaluation de la compréhension écrite. Avec une

classe fragile, on demandera aux élèves de remplir la grille livre ouvert. Avec une classe

plus solide, on demandera le même travail, mais livre fermé et en 30 minutes.

4.

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 70-71

UNIT 5 • 1 0 7

Total des points : /20

CORRIGÉ

Project – idea associated with the monument?

– “The New Colossus”?

• what

• subject

– sculptor’s goal?

– financed by?

1

1222

Who…– first thought of a monument to liberty?

– sculpted it?

– designed its internal framework?

– decided to raise funds to build its pedestal?

1111

When…– was it erected in New York?

– was it declared a national monument?

– was the statue’s restoration completed

(explain the date)?

11

1Where…– was the Statue of Liberty first seen?

– is it situated (as many details as possible)?

11

How…– tall is the statue (torch included)?

– long is its nose?

– thick is the statue’s “skin”?

111

Project – idea associated with

the monument?

– The New Colossus?

• what

• subject

– sculptor’s goal?

– financed by?

– The idea associated with the monument is freedom.

– The New Colossus is a poem written by Emma

Lazarus in 1883 engraved on the pedestal of the

Statue of Liberty. It celebrates the immigrants

and the USA and deals with the reasons why they

emigrated.

– The sulptor designed a colossal statue to produce

an emotion in people’s heart / breast so that

they associate the enormous size with the idea

interpreted by the monument.

– The construction of the statue was financed by

private fund-raising.

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

1 0 8 • UNIT 5

Prolongements possibles :

On pourra proposer de courtes webquests sur chaque personnage célèbre mentionné

dans le prospectus.

• Auguste Bartholdi

www.inventors.about.com/library/inventors/blliberty.htm

– When was he born and when did he die? – What was his job?

– What feeling(s) did he want to show the United States? – What is he famous for?

• Gustave Eiffel

www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gustave_Eiffel

– When was he born and when did he die? – What was his occupation?

– What was his major achievement in France?

– How did he contribute to the building of the Statue of Liberty?

• Emma Lazarus

www.jwa.org/exhibits/wov/lazarus/

www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/The_New_Colossus

– When was she born and when did she die?

– What is her most famous poem? What is its subject? Quote a few lines.

• Joseph Pulitzer

www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Joseph_Pulitzer

www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pulitzer_Prize

– When was he born and when did he die? – Where did he come from? – What is he famous for?

Who…– first thought of a monument to

liberty?

– sculpted it?

– designed its internal framework?

– decided to raise funds to build its

pedestal?

– Laboulaye and Bartholdi first thought of creating

a monument to liberty.

– Bartholdi sculpted the statue.

– Eiffel designed its internal framework.

– Pulitzer decided on nationwide fund-raising for its

pedestal.

When…– was it erected in New York?

– was it declared a national

monument?

– was the statue’s restoration

completed (explain the date)?

– It was erected in New York in 1886.

– It was declared a national monument in 1924.

– The statue’s restoration was completed on July

4th, 1986 for the statue’s centennial celebration.

Where…– was the Statue of Liberty first

seen?

– is it situated (as many details as

possible)?

– It was first seen in Paris in 1880.

– It is situated on Liberty Island, which used to be

named Bedloe’s Island, on star-shaped Fort Wood.

How…– tall is the statue (torch included)?

– long is its nose?

– thick is the statue’s “skin”?

– The statue is 92.99 metres high from the ground

to the top of the torch.

– Its nose is 1.48 metre long.

– The skin is 2.37 millimetres thick.

WILD WILD WESTUNIT

6

UNIT 6 • 1 0 9

Wild Wild WestSouhaitant aborder les fondements historiques des États-Unis, nous avons choisi de nous

focaliser sur le périple de Lewis et Clark, qui constitue un point clé dans l’émergence et

la constitution du pays. Ces deux personnages permettent d’aborder quelques aspects

primordiaux de la civilisation américaine : la notion de Frontière et son influence sur les

mentalités, les relations entre « l’homme blanc » et les Indiens ainsi que le rôle joué par

les minorités religieuses, comme les Mormons par exemple. Enfin, cette unité permettra

bien évidemment de (re)voir quelques notions géographiques de base. Le titre de l’unité,

homonyme du film de Barry Sonnenfeld sorti en 1999, se veut évidemment humoristique.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à la compréhension écrite, voir p. 86.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Préparer un quiz afin de tester les

connaissances acquises par la classe

Mémoire • Échanges

k paysages, faune et flore de l’Ouest

américain (p. 72)

k histoire de la conquête de l’Ouest (p. 73

à 75)

k guerres indiennes, relations avec

« l’homme blanc » (p. 76 à 78)

k Les Mormons : trajet vers l’Utah (p. 82)

k le passé : prétérit simple et past perfect

(p. 80-81)

k prononciation de la terminaison -ed

(p. 79)

k prononciation de was et were (p. 79)

k lire des chiffres complexes (p. 79)

k accent de mots : suffixes -ion et -ian

(p. 79)

k s’appuyer sur les mots porteurs pour

comprendre un message oral (p. 74)

k se plaindre

k exprimer l’incapacité

k exprimer l’obligation

k exprimer la cause et la conséquence

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 1 0 • UNIT 6

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

TUNE IN!

> Mises en œuvre possibles

k Le professeur commencera par faire localiser les États de l’Ouest américain. Les élèves

pourront se référer à la carte des États-Unis sur le rabat arrière du manuel. Ils devront

faire la différence entre West, South-West, the Great Plains et the Middle West. Ce sera

aussi le moment de faire repérer the Rocky Mountains, the Cascade Range et Mount Rainier

(4 390 m).

k Après avoir rappelé le vocabulaire nécessaire : car plate / car number / number plate

(GB) / license plate (US), le professeur demandera ensuite aux élèves s’ils ont déjà vu

des plaques minéralogiques américaines et ce qu’elles ont de particulier. Ils répondront

MANUEL k P. 72

Prendre la parole en interaction

Lire et prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

kTune in (p. 72)

k How it all began (p. 73) k An Epic Journey West (p. 74-75)k Chief Joseph Speaks (p. 76-77)k The Mormon Trail (p. 82)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un texte

(p. 73 à 77)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un document

sonore (p. 74)

k une biographie (p. 77)

k un article de presse (p. 78)

k Who were they? (p. 74)

k site compagnon, U6–Dialogue: Cherry

Buffalo, a Black Feet

Lewis and Clark, documentaire (p. 75)

Workbook

XXX

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

X

X

X

UNIT 6 • 1 1 1

probablement qu’y figurent le nom de l’État, et une image symbolique de celui-ci (ainsi, un

cow-boy orne fréquemment les plaques du Texas, du Nevada, Rodeo State, et du Wyoming),

ou un paysage caractéristique de la région, comme Crater Lake pour l’Oregon ou le Mont

Rushmore pour le Dakota du Sud.

➼ VARIANTE 1 : PRISE DE PAROLE EN CONTINU AVEC PRISE DE NOTES– Après l’observation et la mémorisation des éléments clés de la page, un élève peut décrire

dans les grandes lignes l’une de ces plaques ; son voisin, ou les élèves de son groupe, ont

leurs livres fermés et doivent deviner de quel État il s’agit.

– On pourra lancer une recherche Internet sur les différents États mentionnés p. 72, leur

devise, leur symbole :

www.50states.com/

www.globalcomputing.com/states.html

Productions possibles :– Arizona: This plate is beautiful and makes me think of the desert because I can see a cactus

in the bottom left-hand corner and several little cacti in the background. There’s a yellow glow

over the mountain range. This probably shows a typical dry landscape in the South-West of the

USA where the sun is burning hot. In fact most of the state is desert.

– Washington: I can tell this state is by the ocean; indeed the plate is all blue and there is a

whale jumping out of the water. Indeed whales are swimming not far from the shores in Seattle

bay. The motto says “Endangered Wildlife” certainly because people try to protect them.

– Colorado: The plate is blue (for the sky) and white. There is a big mountain range covered

in snow. It must be the Rocky Mountains / Rockies. Right in the centre there is the American

national emblem: the bald eagle with spread wings.

N. B. : l’aigle mérite à lui seul une recherche.

The eagle represents freedom. It became the national emblem in 1782 when the great seal

of the USA was adopted. It shows an eagle bearing / with a shield on its breast. In his right

talon he is holding an olive branch, in his left a bundle of arrows, and in his beak he is carrying

a scroll inscribed with the motto: E pluribus Unum. The olive branch and arrows denote the

power of peace and war which is exclusively vested in Congress (compare this to the phrase

common today: “war and peace”). The thirteen arrows tightly aligned are a symbol of strength

in unity. An accurate translation of the motto is: “Out of many, one”.

– Idaho: This plate is less colourful than the others; it is brown, beige and dark-green. I can

see a man on the left grooming or planting a young tree. The Idaho state tree is the Western

white pine. The man seems to be dressed in a park ranger uniform. In the background there

are fir trees. Indeed forests are the greatest asset of the North-West states and cover 2/3

of Idaho. Lumber is one of its main resources.

– Utah: I love this number plate! There is a stony arch in the middle, on orange sandy ground.

It is characteristic of Arches National Park which preserves over 2,000 natural sandstone

arches, like the world-famous Delicate Arch, as well as many other unusual rock formations.

Delicate Arch has become the state symbol. This rock formation is surprising. I remember

similar landscapes from westerns. The sky is blue and there is either white dust or some

clouds on the skyline. Utah is a desert state and its most famous city, Salt Lake City, was

founded by the Mormons.

➼ VARIANTE 2 : PAIRWORKOn pourra organiser un travail en binômes grâce à la fiche page suivante, téléchargeable

sur le site compagnon.

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 1 2 • UNIT 6

A. More about western states

Before speaking, match these transcriptions with words from the grid below. Learn how to pronounce them correctly. a. \"aIdEÆhoÁ\ d. \"wA…SINtEn\ g. \ÆkœlI"fO…niE\b. \E"lImpiE\ e. \"O…rIgEn\ h. \"kreItEr\c. \"bOIzi\ f. \ÆsœkrE"mentoÁ\ i. \"seIlEm\

Ask your partner for the missing information to fill in this grid and answer your partner’s questions with the elements you know.

Get ready to recap what you have learnt about these four western states.

B. More about western states

Before speaking, match these transcriptions with words from the grid below. Learn how to pronounce them correctly. a. \mA…n"tœnE\ c. \ÆkA…lE"rœdoÁ\ e. \ÆœrI"zoÁnE\b. \"ju…tO…\, \"ju…tA…\ d. \"fi…nIks\ f. \sO…lt\

1.

2.

3.

1.

State nameEntered

the UnionState

nicknameFamous

monument / sceneryCapital city

California September 1850 Golden State San Francisco

Golden Gate Bridge

Sacramento

Idaho July 1890 Gem State Nez Perce National

Historical Park

Boise

Oregon February 1859 Beaver* State

* castor

Crater Lake Salem

Washington November 1889 Evergreen

State

– Seattle

– Space Needle

Olympia

State nameEntered

the UnionState

nicknameFamous

monument / sceneryCapital city

Utah January 1896 Beehive* State

* ruche

– Bryce Canyon

– Zion National Park

Salt Lake

City

Colorado August 1876 Centennial State Rocky Mountains Denver

Arizona February 1912 Grand Canyon

State

Grand Canyon Phoenix

Montana November 1889 Big Sky Country Glacier National

Park

Helena

State nameEntered

the UnionState

nicknameFamous

monument / sceneryCapital city

UtahColoradoArizonaMontana

UNIT 6 • 1 1 3

Ask your partner for the missing information to fill in this grid and answer your partner’s questions with the elements you know.

Get ready to recap what you have learnt about these four western states.

1. HOW IT ALL BEGAN

1. Get ready

Exploitation de l’image : We are immediately struck by the stagecoach and horses galloping

at full speed to escape a group of Indians. This is a typical scene from a western: The Indians

outnumber the Whites. The travellers are besieged by Indians on a dangerous journey. The

Indians use arrows and spears to kill the people in the stagecoach. This painting is striking

because it is full of movement, it conveys an impression of danger and isolation. This scene

is a typical western drama.

Informations complémentairesIn 1966 Norman Rockwell made his only appearance as an actor in a Hollywood movie.

Norman Rockwell played poker player “Busted Flush” in the 1966 remake of John Ford’s

classic hit Stagecoach. Rockwell painted twenty oil portraits, one preliminary and one final,

of each of the movies’ ten stars, as well as this image of the stagecoach on its perilous

journey to Cheyenne. The film relates the story of nine people aboard a stagecoach en route

to Cheyenne, Wyoming, during an Indian uprising. A group of unlikely travelling companions

find themselves on the same stagecoach to Cheyenne.

Productions possibles : The term “Wild West” immediately makes me think of the Conquest

of the West, westerns, Indians and the US cavalry, settlers going west in their waggons, the

Gold Rush and miners hunting for gold, trappers, fur-traders, cowboys and ranchers raising

cattle, Frontier heroes such as David Crockett or Buffalo Bill, sheriffs tracking outlaws, the

massacres of Indians.

2. Understanding the text

Voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook page suivante.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 73

State nameEntered

the UnionState

nicknameFamous

monument / sceneryCapital city

CaliforniaIdahoOregonWashington

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 1 4 • UNIT 6

3. Recap

Les élèves les plus solides se serviront des mots donnés dans le manuel, tandis que les plus

fragiles rempliront le résumé à trous proposé dans le Workbook p. 46

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 45-46)

> I. Understanding the text

➼ PART 1

– “a miner with a long beard and a hat panning gold in a creek” (l. 4)

– “a frontier town with horses tied to a hitching post in front of a saloon with swinging

doors” (l. 3)

– “a stagecoach pulled by a team of horses” (l. 2)

– “covered wagons, loaded with pioneers and all their belongings” (l. 5)

➼ PART 2

a) – settlement (l. 7) – settlers (l. 9)

b) – colonists (l. 12) – wilderness (l. 12)

c) expect; a verb; s’attendre à

d) travel

a) west • European • East coast • inland • America • New World • colonies

b) early 1800s

c) People: Europeans • settlers

Transport: covered waggons • stagecoach

d) “in search of land, natural resources like water, and animals to hunt” (l. 9)

“to start a new life” (l. 10)

“Colonists wanted to claim a piece of the wilderness before someone else did.” (l. 12)

“They wanted good fertile land that could be farmed and hunted.” (l. 12)

“Most people were lured to the West by the promise of land, the hope of finding gold or

the idea of a place where they could practise their religion without persecution.” (l. 14)

e) posters (broadsides) • advertisements • letters from family and friends

f) a geographical limit between a settled and developped territory and the wilderness

> II. ACTION!the Frontier

1 attracted 2 waves 3 magnet 4 looked for 5 gold 6 land 7 farm 8 settled 9 freedom

of religion

1.

2.

3.

1.2.

UNIT 6 • 1 1 5

2. AN EPIC JOURNEY WEST

A. Jefferson’s mission

UNDERSTANDING THE TEXT

> Mise en œuvre k Lecture individuelle en classe ou à la maison.

k Confrontation des résultats par binômes et prise de parole en continu d’un ou plusieurs

rapporteurs.

Productions possibles : President Thomas Jefferson had just bought a huge area of land

west of the Mississippi River. He chose Lewis and Clark to lead the expedition, explore that

area and find the most direct route to the Pacific. He thought it would make it easier to

transport goods from one side of the country to the other. The explorers also had to collect

information about plants, animals, climate and geographical features along the way.

B. The members of the expedition

1. WHO WERE THEY?

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1William Clark once called the expedition a fast enterprise; large, multi-faceted, planned

meticulously, it was the product of many minds, many hands, hopes, dreams and many

ambitions. Its planning reflected the restless intellect of President Thomas Jefferson, his

cabinet and some of the best scientific minds of the day. Once launched, the enterprise

depended on the sweat and toil of roughly 50 people, including one African American,

several men of both European and Native American descent and eventually one Native

American woman and her infant son.

➼ Part 2Lewis was just 29 years old, Clark 33, both single. Like the men they recruited, they were

brave, resourceful and tough. They were both army veterans, skilled hunters, experienced

backwards travellers and they were smart. Each, in his own way, possessed an avid

curiosity, a hunger for knowledge, a doggedness about chasing down the facts. They were

also funny, bawdy, psychological, fond of satire and occasional sarcasm. They must have

been good company.

➼ Part 3Lewis had more formal education both in childhood and as President Jefferson’s personal

secretary. Thanks to Jefferson he had training in a variety of scientific disciplines. He was

also a confident, practical doctor and understood the medicinal quality of plants. Clark was

the cartographer, the map-maker, the better boatman and apparently the more consistent

journalist. He had the more level head, the sunnier temperament and he led a longer,

happier life.

MANUEL k P. 74-75

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 1 6 • UNIT 6

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 46-47)

➼ PART 1

enterprise – planned – planning – product – mind – meticulous

expedition • enterprise • planned • large • planned • meticulously • product • minds •

hands • hopes • dreams • ambitions

expedition • enterprise • planned meticulously • product • ambitions • planning •

intellect • President • cabinet • scientific • African American • European • Native

American descent • European • Native American

Type of expedition: scientific enterprise

Who was at the origin?: President Jefferson

Members of the expedition: 50 people (explorers, one African American, several men of

both European and Native American descent, one Native American woman and her infant son)

➼ PART 2

Lewis: 29; Clark: 33

bachelors

resourceful • tough • veterans • hunters • travellers

clever

curiosity • knowledge

Réponse libre.

Lewis and Clark, the leaders of the expedition, were officers in the US Army, were smart

and experienced. They were enterprising and had a taste for adventure. They also both had

a friendly and humorous personality.

➼ PART 3

education • childhood • Jefferson’s secretary • training • scientific disciplines • confident •

doctor • medicinal • plants • cartographer • map-maker • boatman • journalist • level

head • sunnier temperament • longer, happier life

Recap : les élèves s’appuieront sur leurs notes dans le Workbook pour faire un compte rendu

de cette compréhension orale.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.Lewis Clark

Education – formal in childhood

– Jefferson’s personal secretary

Job – cartographer

– map-maker

– boatman

– journalist

Specialized in scientific discipline Personality – level-headed man,

– happy temperament

Job doctor

Other quality understood medicinal plants

UNIT 6 • 1 1 7

Grille d’évaluation de la production orale

2. FOCUS ON SACAGAWEA

> Mises en œuvre possibles

k Travail collectif de toute la classe sur l’ensemble du texte.

k Diviser la classe en deux moitiés et donner à chaque moitié une partie du texte seulement.

À l’intérieur du groupe, le travail peut se faire individuellement ou par binômes. Lors de la

prise de parole en continu du rapporteur, le reste de la classe prend des notes.

k La question 11 de la p. 49 du Workbook peut être utilisée pour une récapitulation ou un

contrôle des connaissances en début de cours.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 48-49)

➼ PART 1

Four: Sacagawea • Toussaint Charbonneau • Lewis • Clark

“the Shoshone Indians from the Rocky Mountains” (l. 1) • “Indians from the Plains” (l. 2)

Idaho: northwest of the USA, south of the Canadian border • North Dakota: a border state

with Canada

k 1788: Sacagawea’s date of birth k 12: age when she was kidnapped

k 16: age when she started the expedition k 1804: Lewis and Clark hired her husband

for the expedition k 6: she was 6 months pregnant

The expedition was viewed as peaceful because they had Sacagawea and her child with

them. She helped the explorers communicate with Native Americans.

Friendly / peaceful: because she was a woman, and she was carrying her baby with her.

Quotes: “because Sacagawea had her infant son with her”, “no woman ever accompanies

a war party” (l. 7)

Sacagawea was a Shoshone Indian born in about 1788, kidnapped at the age of 12 and

forced to marry a French trapper. She was part of the Lewis and Clark expedition because

she could establish contact with the native tribes. She took her baby son on the journey.

➼ PART 2

to Lewis and Clark

Sacagawea’s asset / advantage: She spoke American and two Native American languages.

Role in the expedition: interpreter, translator, guide

Why?: She was born and raised in the Shoshone tribe, lived with the Minitari and married

a Canadian trapper.

“foraged for roots, nuts and berries” (l. 13) • “taught Lewis and Clark the medicinal value

of native plants” (l. 15)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.7.

8.

Reprise des informations données dans le document 0 1 2 3 4

Récit au prétérit 0 1 2 3 4

Compte rendu clair et audible 0 1 2 3 4

Prononciation 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Total : / 20

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 1 8 • UNIT 6

clever • information about something that is written down

his admiration for her: “she is described as a smart and helpful woman” (l. 16) • “she saved

records and instruments from being lost” (l. 17)

1 As a young girl, more exactly at the age of twelve, she was kidnapped by another Indian

tribe from the Plains. 2 She was eventually sold to be married to a French Canadian fur

trapper. 3 She accompanied him on the Lewis and Clark expedition. She helped the Corps

of Discovery through unknown areas, especially the Rockies. 4 She was considered a

valuable help in the expedition. She was a guide, a translator, and negotiator for them

because she knew the land, the languages, customs and tribes. She was largely responsible

for the success of the whole expedition.

3. A WHO’S WHO GAME

Proposition de corrigé :

He was 33 and single / not married at the beginning of the expedition. He was one of the two

leaders, Mr Lewis’ friend, a skilled hunter, boatman, cartographer. He was a former soldier

and lived on the Eastern coast. I have chosen to speak about him because he is one of the

leaders / I think he was charismatic and resourceful.

N. B. : les élèves les plus faibles pourront s’aider du Action! p. 50 du Workbook.

C. The expedition

Voir p. 417-418 et 437-439.

3. CHIEF JOSEPH SPEAKS

> Mise en œuvre

Pour la lecture du texte de la p. 76, on pourra choisir :

– soit une démarche classique, toute la classe lisant le texte, en classe ou à la maison ;

– soit une mise en œuvre plus communicative en divisant la classe en trois groupes, chaque

groupe lisant une partie du texte.

1. Memory game

Ce premier contact avec le texte passera par la lecture et la mémorisation.

a. Les mots qui sont attendus sont :

– Part 1: Lewis and Clark, Nez Perce, gold, mountains, bloodshed, government, peace…

– Part 2: tired, killed, death, no food, sick, sad, fight...

– Part 3: live in peace, laws, brothers, equal rights, country, animal, race, men...

b. En plus des titres des trois parties, les élèves auront repéré Washington D.C., 1877 et 1879.

2. Understanding the text

On utilisera la fiche d’entraînement du Workbook pour guider la lecture des élèves et les

préparer à reformuler ce qu’ils ont appris.

9.10.

11.

MANUEL k P. 76-77

UNIT 6 • 1 1 9

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 50-52)

➼ PART 1

k “your”: White people k “our”: Indian (country) k “them”: Lewis and Clarkk “their”: Nez

Perce’s (country)

Lewis and Clark

made friends • agreed to let them pass • never to make war • promise

peacefully

this time / period of peace

a) “But” (l. 4) b) “men have found gold in the mountains”

a) war • trouble • bloodshed • avenged • killed b) make friends • never to make war •

live in peace

– helpful: “made friends” (l. 2), “agreed to let them pass through their country” (l. 2)

– faithful: “This promise the Nez Perce have never broken.” (l. 3)

– peaceful: “never to make war” (l. 3), “we lived quietly” (l. 4), “wishes to live at peace” (l. 10)

– reliable: “labored hard to avoid trouble” (l. 6)

➼ PART 2

Weather conditions: “cold” (l. 12), “perhaps they are freezing to death” (l. 18)

The Indians’ living conditions: “no blankets” (l. 13), “no food” (l. 17), “The little children

are freezing to death.” (l. 13)

Chief Joseph’s feelings: “tired” (l. 11), “my heart is sick and sad” (l. 20)

Chief Joseph’s decision: “I will fight no more against the white man.” (l. 22)

➼ PART 3

a) He is on a visit to Washington D.C. He is speaking to the American government

b) all

He uses the passive voice to underline that Indians are victims, what they have to undergo.

treat all men alike • the same laws • an even chance • all brothers

“All men were made by the same Great Spirit Chief.” (l. 26) • “The earth is the mother of

all people” (l. 26)

Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, on demandera à chaque groupe de préparer un résumé

oral de ce qu’il a lu dans sa partie du texte et qui répondra aux questions du manuel p. 77.

Un rapporteur désigné pourra faire la synthèse à l’oral. Chaque groupe écoutera les autres

avec attention et prendra des notes. Il pourra intervenir à tout moment pour demander des

explications et corriger si nécessaire.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

Compromise Hope Results– “and agreed to let them

pass through their country and

never to make war on white

men” (l. 2)

– “We gave up some of our

country to the white men” (l. 6)

– “thinking that then we

could have peace” (l. 7)

– “We were mistaken.” (l. 7)

– “The white men would

not let us alone.” (l. 7)

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 2 0 • UNIT 6

Si la synthèse est faite à l’écrit, le professeur pourra fournir aux élèves un transparent qui

sera (rétro)projeté et l’on corrigera collectivement. Cette synthèse pourra servir de base à

une trace écrite.

Corrigés du manuel :

a. Recap: Part 1– The first explorers were Lewis and Clark and their party.

– The Indians were friendly, peaceful and welcoming. They were faithful friends, kept their

promises and thought the Whites were trustworthy. We can imagine they were curious and

eager to meet the newcomers.

– The turning point in their relationship happened when gold prospectors arrived, invaded the

territory and scanned the area to find gold. Their greed for more land had no limit and they drove

the Indians away from their territory.

– The Indians tried to remain peaceful at all costs accepting any sacrifice imposed on them.

They desperately tried to keep their promise because they were as good as their word.

Besides they feared the Whites might retaliate if the Indians became violent. They did their

best to avoid war. But they were deceived, deluded.

b. Recap: Part 2– The Indians have just been defeated and have surrendered in the Bear Paw Mountains after a

last fight. Now their situation is appalling because they have been driven out of their lands. They

are needy / in dire straits. We can presume another truce was broken, driving the Indians into

battle. Unfortunately the Nez Perce are left starving and freezing to death. They are destitute

and the white man feels no compassion.

– Of course Chief Joseph feels betrayed, desperate, cheated, sick at heart and hopeless. He

can’t trust the white men any longer and knows his tribe is doomed. He has given up the struggle.

This is a very emotional speech meant to arouse sympathy and compassion. He focuses on the

fate of little children who live in dreadful conditions.

– Consequently he has decided to give up his lands and surrender / yield to the white man’s

power. He has to stop fighting and accept his enemy’s decision, come what may.

– We can draw a parallel between this sad testimony and the photo of the Nez Perce leader.

Indeed his sad and hopeless expression matches his words. This is a real photo of an Indian chief.

He has got earrings and necklaces, probably to show his high rank in the tribe. What strikes me

most is his sad expression. He looks both tired and desperate, sad / unhappy and hopeless.

c. Recap: Part 3– At that time the Indians were considered second-class citizens, “savages” who had fewer,

limited rights. There was this saying often heard in old western movies: “The only good Indian

is a dead Indian”, this excused any violence or murder.

– Chief Joseph dreams of being treated on an equal footing, of being given the same rights as

white men. He resents the white men’s attitude. Chief Joseph’s main claims are for justice and

equality for both Whites and Native Americans. He asks for legitimate dignity and respect. He

wishes the men of his tribe could be regarded as equals and could live in harmony with Nature

and other human beings. The loss of land entails the loss of religious and cultural values.

Exploitation de la gravure p. 76 :Cette image peut servir au contrôle des connaissances en début du cours suivant et donner

lieu à une prise de parole en continu sur la partie 2 du texte. Le professeur pourra noter au

tableau les amorces suivantes : weather? people? transport? situation? colours? / atmosphere?

UNIT 6 • 1 2 1

On peut aussi décider de (rétro)projeter la gravure et de fabriquer des caches qui serviront à

isoler des parties de l’image. On pourra ainsi guider l’observation de la classe. On montrera :

1) un groupe d’Indiens, 2) la moitié gauche du document, 3) le cavalier sur le cheval blanc,

4) le tableau en entier.

Productions possibles : This painting shows a group of people plodding through the snow.

Their march seems to be difficult because they are struggling through bad weather. A strong

wind is blowing in their faces and slowing them down. Even the horses are bending their heads.

The people at the front are Indians / Native Americans wearing leather clothes.

I think it shows a tribe moving away, with children and baggage in a cart. They are followed /

guarded by soldiers on horseback, dressed in blue and black uniforms. There is a long line of

soldiers and Indians. This could be a picture of an Indian deportation into a reservation. They

had to leave their lands for the white men and stay in restricted zones. It reminds us of the Trail

of Tears. American troops forced hundreds of Cherokee Indians to leave their homes in Georgia

and move to the “Indian Territory” of Oklahoma. In 1838, about 7,000 American troops moved

in and began the forced removal. Many Native Americans suffered from exposure, disease,

and starvation while en route to their destinations. The journey was hard, and many Cherokee

suffered or even died, for example 4,000 of the 15,000 relocated Cherokee. Many cried. That’s

why this journey is called the “Trail of Tears”.

3. Writing workshop

Cette production écrite se fera soit en classe soit à la maison, et soit individuellement soit

par équipe de deux rédacteurs.

k Faire ressortir les grandes parties de l’article à écrire, par exemple : Chief Joseph’s

identity – the Nez Perce tribe’s location in the US – meeting Lewis and Clark – gold

prospectors – fights and surrenders – cold, hunger, starvation – visit to Washington D.C.,

1879.

k Ramasser les articles pour les faire lire au reste de la classe. On peut imaginer soit de

redistribuer les articles en désordre à chacun, soit de les afficher, soit encore de former

des groupes de lecteurs (4 à 5 élèves) qui auront en charge de sélectionner le ou les deux

meilleurs articles. Chaque groupe ira voir un autre groupe et ensemble ils affineront leur

sélection pour qu’en fin de course il ne reste que deux ou trois favoris.

k Au rétroprojecteur, l’enseignant pourra faire une correction linguistique ciblée d’articles

sélectionnés.

k Tous les articles pourront aussi être évalués.

On trouvera un article très bien fait sur le site suivant, qui pourra servir de corrigé aux élèves :

www.powersource.com/gallery/people/joseph.html

Grille d’évaluation de la production écrite

Les événements clés sont traités 0 1 2 3 4 5

Lexique et structures 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Maîtrise des temps 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Total : / 20

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

Check your vocabulary

1 2 2 • UNIT 6

4. Reading aloud

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 52-53)

Les mots en italique correspondent aux formes réduites (inaccentuées).

Les mots en italique sont des prépositions, auxiliaires, pronoms personnels compléments.

La voyelle est réduite.

réduites

I am tired of fighting. Our chiefs are killed. It is cold and we have no blankets. The little

children are freezing to death. My people – some of them have run away to the hills and

have no blankets and no food. No one knows where they are – perhaps they are freezing to

death. Hear me my chiefs, my heart is sick and sad. From where the sun now stands I will

fight no more against the white men.

I am tired of fighting. Our chiefs are killed. It is cold and we have no blankets. The little

children are freezing to death. My people – some of them have run away to the hills and

have no blankets and no food. No one knows where they are – perhaps they are freezing to

death. Hear me my chiefs, my heart is sick and sad. From where the sun now stands I will

fight no more against the white men.

I am tired of fighting. Our chiefs are killed. It is cold and we have no blankets. The little

children are freezing to death. My people – some of them have run away to the hills and

have no blankets and no food. No one knows where they are – perhaps they are freezing to

death. Hear me my chiefs, my heart is sick and sad. From where the sun now stands I will

fight no more against the white men.

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique des p. 76-77 grâce

aux exercices suivants (fiche photocopiable disponible sur le site compagnon).

Retrouvez les adjectifs dont les lettres ont été mélangées.a. adsprteee b. vedediec c. leblirale

Retrouvez les adjectifs dérivés de ces noms.

À quelle personnes ces adjectifs correspondent le mieux ? Classez-les dans le tableau. Attention : certains mots peuvent aller dans plusieurs colonnes.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.

\i…\ \aI\ \I\

chiefs • freezing tired • fighting • white killed • little • hills • sick

a. greed = e. hope =

b. faith = f. need =

c. friend = g. trust =

d. despair = h. help =

UNIT 6 • 1 2 3

vengeful • accepting • furious • peaceful • successful • defeated • understanding •

interested • anxious • disregarded • confident • hostile

Traduisez ces phrases.a. Les Indiens mouraient de froid.

b. Ils n’étaient pas considérés avec respect.

c. Ils étaient fatigués de se battre.

d. Ils souffraient de la faim.

e. Ils voulaient éviter les ennuis.

CORRIGÉ

a. desperate b. deceived c. reliable

a. greedy c. friendly e. hopeless (accepter aussi hopeful) g. trustworthy

b. faithful d. desperate f. needy h. helpful

Gold prospectors: successful • interested • hostile

Nez Perce: accepting • furious • peaceful • defeated • anxious • disregarded

White farmers: vengeful • furious • successful • interested • confident • hostile

Lewis and Clark: peaceful • successful • understanding • interested

a. The Indians starved / were starving to death.

b. They were not considered / regarded with respect.

c. They were tired of fighting.

d. They suffered from hunger.

e. They wanted to avoid trouble.

4. THE WEST GAZETTE

Cette activité d’écriture pourra se faire en travail individuel ou en groupes.

> Mises en œuvre

1) Avec une classe assez solidek En classe entière, on procédera au choix des temps (prétérit et past perfect) ainsi qu’à

la mobilisation des connaissances, du lexique et des structures nécessaires, notamment

les marqueurs de temps :

– In Spring / Summer / Autumn (the Fall) / Winter / the 19th century / those days...

– One day...

– A few years later...

– After a while... (Au bout d’un moment)

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 78

Gold prospectors Nez Perce White farmers Lewis and Clark

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 2 4 • UNIT 6

– Meanwhile... (Pendant ce temps-là)

– Little by little... (Petit à petit)

– Eventually

– Finally / Lastly

k Faire écrire l’article individuellement ou en équipe de deux. Cette étape pourra se faire

en classe, à la maison ou en salle informatique.

k Ramasser les articles pour les faire lire au reste de la classe. On peut imaginer soit de

redistribuer les articles en désordre à chacun, soit de les afficher, soit encore de former

des groupes de lecteurs (4 à 5 élèves) qui auront en charge de sélectionner le ou les deux

meilleurs articles. Chaque groupe ira voir un autre groupe et ensemble ils affineront leur

sélection pour qu’en fin de course il ne reste que deux ou trois favoris.

k Au rétroprojecteur, l’enseignant pourra faire une correction linguistique ciblée d’articles

sélectionnés.

k Tous les articles pourront aussi être évalués.

Grille d’évaluation de la production écrite

2) Avec une classe fragilek En préalable à l’activité, le professeur demandera aux élèves d’observer les quatre

images de leur manuel en silence ou les (rétro)projettera dans l’ordre. Pour commencer,

on demandera ce que ces images évoquent. Elles doivent faire écho aux textes lus

précédemment. On acceptera de simples éléments ou des phrases courtes. Puis on pourra

enrichir l’expression pour la trace écrite en réactivant le lexique vu. On peut organiser le

travail sur les images de façon classique (toute la classe intervenant dans la description),

ou en groupes. Le professeur divisera la classe en 4 et chaque quart devra présenter un

tableau au reste de la classe.

Productions possibles :1. I think this shows Lewis and Clark’s arrival somewhere along the Missouri or Platte River. The

Whites are dressed as Europeans with broad-rimmed hats, long jackets, whereas the group of

Native Americans have animal pelts / skins. The two groups are facing one another but they

don’t seem to be hostile. This makes me think of Chief Joseph’s text, at the beginning when he

mentions...

2. This must be a party of gold prospectors. Indeed the man in the middle is panning gold in a

river. He looks like a ruffian, he hasn’t shaved for months. He looks very determined as well.

He is not alone; there are other gold prospectors in the river, all deep in the water, concentrated

on their findings. Beyond them, there are rough settlements on both banks of the river. We have

learnt that prospectors cut deep into Indian lands disregarding treaties and laws to find the

precious nuggets.

Respect des consignes (nombre de mots et cadre) 0 1 2 3

Récit pertinent et bien documenté 0 1 2 3 4 5

Mots de liaison 0 1 2

Maîtrise des temps 0 1 2 3

Richesse de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3

Total : / 20

UNIT 6 • 1 2 5

3. I can see a group of riders galloping in a desert. They look like regular cavalry soldiers of

the US army. They may be charging a group of enemies. Some have guns or rifles ready for

the shoot. It may show a battle scene during the Indian Wars.

4. This painting is quite spooky. There is a person on horseback, but I can’t tell if it’s a man or

a woman, but he or she looks tired and miserable. He or she belongs to a group of travelling /

fleeing people. On another horse there is a bag or a cover and a skinny dog is following. They

look cold to death walking on white ground, probably snow. This could be a group of Indians

going to a new reservation, leaving behind their homes and favourite hunting grounds.

k On passera ensuite à la rédaction de l’article proprement dite. Cet entraînement à

l’expression écrite sera à faire en devoir à la maison, en s’inspirant des images travaillées,

ou en classe. On renverra aux conseils p. 80 et 260-261 du manuel quant à l’usage

des temps du récit. Comme l’article est un récit à la première personne, il semble important

que les élèves incluent des sentiments, des émotions, des impressions.

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

\d\ followed • travelled

\t\ pushed • asked • stretched • helped • walked • cooked

\Id\ wanted • ended • loaded • decided • started • expected

a. prononciation faible \wEz\

a. ( ( ( ✓ ( c. ( ( ✓ ( e. ( ( ✓ (

b. ( ( ✓ ( d. ( ✓ ( f. ( ✓ (Les terminaisons -ian et -ion sont des suffixes contraignants, l’accent de mot tombe sur

la syllabe qui les précède.

> Build up your vocabulary

resist = fight back • avenge oneself = retaliate • defy = challenge • fight against =

struggle against • give up = yield • flee = escape • horrible = dreadful

buffalo • tribe • tepee • clash • warpath • slaughter • battle • defeat

1 heroes 2 see 3 describe 4 maps 5 pioneers 6 animals 7 plants 8 trade 9 journey 10 challenges 11 through 12 travelled 13 succeeded 14 shared 15 knowledge

> Le passé : prétérit et past perfect

a.

1.

2.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

MANUEL k P. 79-81

Forme affirmative Forme négative Forme interrogativeheard • learned • was (x 5)

• could • were • made •

started • travelled • took •

died

did not reach did some people want…?

UNIT

6 WILD WILD WEST

1 2 6 • UNIT 6

Ces trois formes sont au prétérit :

– affirmation = suffixe -ed ajouté au verbe régulier, ou verbe irrégulier ;

– négation et interrogation = did + base verbale.

b. – Verbes réguliers = learned (learn), started (start), travelled (travel), died (die).

– Verbes irréguliers = heard (hear), was (be), could (can), were (be), made (make), took

(take).

Concluez : pour une narration de faits passés, révolus on utilise le prétérit. Le prétérit simple sert à parler d’événements situés dans le passé et il exprime une rupture avec le présent.

a. Ces expressions sont des marqueurs de durée associés au prétérit.

b. – Les pionniers vécurent dans un chariot bâché pendant six mois.

– Dans les grandes plaines ils marchaient pendant des jours sans voir aucun arbre ou

aucune forêt.

a. had + participe passé

b.

Passé 2 Passé 1 = At the end of the day Moment présent

(had) milked

(had) fetched

(had) collected

c. avaient trait, étaient allés chercher, avaient ramassé

Concluez : le past perfect permet de parler d’événements antérieurs à un autre événement ex-

primé au prétérit. Il exprime donc un « retour en arrière » par rapport à un moment du passé.

> Practice

a. How long was the journey to Oregon?

b. What was the best time of the year to start the trip?

c. Why did some people want to travel all the way to Oregon?

d. What happened if you met Indians on the way?

e. How did the Indians make buffalo meat last a long time?

The US government encouraged people to settle in Oregon. Half a million people crossed

the Rocky Mountains, deserts and rivers to settle there. They had to leave the Mississippi

River in spring to arrive before the first snows. Approximately twenty thousand people died

along the way. They endured extreme weather, illness, and attacks by Native Americans.

The construction of the railroad brought an end to the waggon trains.

I’d like to tell you about Crazy Horse who was both a visionary Indian / Sioux chief and a

brilliant leader. He was considered a brave warrior by his tribe and a man of supreme courage

by his enemies. He devoted his whole life to fighting for freedom and defending the values

and traditions of the Lakota tribe. He was born in 1849, and was known to have stolen horses

from other tribes before the age of 13, which shows what a daredevil he was. From 1865 to

1868 he started fighting against white settlers in Wyoming because they were trespassing

on the tribe’s land. The major event of these years of battle was in 1867 when his warriors

destroyed W.J. Fetterman’s brigade at Fort Phil Kearny. Of course he became a real hero

when he led the charge against / attacked troops led by the famous General Custer in 1873.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

UNIT 6 • 1 2 7

Crazy Horse became the leader of the Indian resistance and worked on an alliance with

another Indian tribe, the Cheyenne in, 1876. Together they triumphed at Little Bighorn on June

17, 1876 which ended up with the destruction of Custer’s Seventh Cavalry eight days later

and with the General’s death. Unfortunately he could not win, but he was the last important

chief to surrender on May 6, 1877. In September 1877, he was arrested by General George

Crook. But he did not accept his fate easily and struggled / fought against the guards on the

way to jail. As a consequence, a soldier stabbed him in the back.

a. When the expedition was over, they had walked / covered 3,700 miles.

b. They had discovered 122 animals and 178 plants unknown at that time.

c. They had explored a huge territory and made detailed maps.

d. Jefferson was thrilled because they had fulfilled all the goals he had set for them.

YOUR TASK

> Mises en œuvre

N. B. : cette mise en œuvre s’inspire de l’article de F. Patard sur le site de l’académie de

Nancy-Metz concernant le défi lecture.

➼ VARIANTE 1

– Diviser la classe en deux moitiés : une équipe jury et une équipe de candidats. Inverser

les équipes au bout de quinze à vingt minutes.

– Chaque équipe possède sa feuille de questions préparées (en classe ou à la maison). Elle

dispose ou non du manuel, du cahier de notes et du Workbook selon le choix du professeur.

– La réponse doit être donnée tout de suite, à l’oral ou à l’écrit.

– L’équipe candidate peut choisir le niveau de difficulté souhaité (activité à 1, 2 ou 3 points).

– Le professeur peut fixer le nombre de questions minimum à poser.

– Les échanges doivent se faire uniquement en anglais.

– L’équipe jury attribue les points au fur et à mesure des questions.

➼ VARIANTE 2

– Former des équipes de quatre (deux jurys, deux candidats) et suivre les mêmes modalités

que ci-dessus.

– Le professeur passe de groupe en groupe pour vérifier que les échanges se font bien en

anglais et que le jury comptabilise bien les points.

Corrigés :

Exemple 1. 1b • 2b • 3c

Exemple 2. 1d • 2a • 3e • 4c • 5b

Exemple 3. ACROSS: 1) Missouri 3) emigrant 7) leader 9) jail 10) persecution 11) mob

DOWN: 2) settlement 4) Utah 5) trail 6) Wyoming 8) wagon

4.

MANUEL k P. 82-83

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 2 8 • UNIT 7

Robot dreamsNous avons choisi ce thème des robots car il permet d’aborder et / ou de rebrasser le

vocabulaire lié à l’ensemble des avancées technologiques actuelles, ce qui sera notamment

très utile aux élèves se destinant à une filière STI. Ce sujet ouvre en outre la voie à une

réflexion sur les rapports entre hommes et robots et au-delà sur la conception d’une société

de plus en plus mécanisée, voire robotisée.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à la compréhension écrite, voir p. 86.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Lire des articles concernant des robots,

en sélectionner un et justifier son choix

Mémoire • Échanges • Lien social •

Création

k les adjectifs composés en -ed et -ing(p. 91) k la composition des mots : antonymes (p. 91) k les robots et leur fonctionnement

k les différentes tâches effectuées par

les robots dans notre société : tâches

ménagères et tâches à haut risque...

k les rapports humains-robots

k la science-fiction

k Check your vocabulary (p. 86 et 87)

k les pronoms relatifs (p. 92)

k repérage des syllabes accentuées (p. 91)

k réalisation des lettres -o-, -our, -ea- et

-or (p. 91)

k comparer

k exprimer désirs et rêves

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

MANUEL k P. 84

UNIT 7 • 1 2 9

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

TUNE IN!Révision du lexique nécessaire : En préalable à cette activité, on pourra faire réaliser aux

élèves un vocabulary network lié au vocabulaire des tâches ménagères pour introduire le

maximum de mots dont ils auront besoin.

people:

–

–

objects used: chores / housework verbs ( activities):

– –

– –

– –

Lire

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

k That’s Sci-fi!, article de presse (p. 85) k A Prophet, extraits de roman (p. 88 à 90)

k Humans and Robots, illustration (p. 87) k A Prophet, extraits de roman (p. 88 à 90)k Your task, trois articles (p. 94-95)

k Tune in, photographie (p. 84)k faire le compte rendu oral d’un texte

(p. 85, 89 et 90)

k May I help you?, cartoon (p. 86)k faire le compte rendu oral d’un document

sonore (p. 86)

k un court rapport (p. 89)

k la suite d’un résumé de film (p. 93)

Feel and touch (p. 86)

Modern Times, extrait du film

de Charlie Chaplin (p. 85)

Workbook

X

X

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

XX

X

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 3 0 • UNIT 7

> Mises en œuvre possibles

k Travail individuel ou en binôme : on demandera aux élèves de répondre aux questions

en s’appuyant sur le Help!, puis de faire un compte rendu à la classe.

k Une moitié de classe (A) pourra garder le livre ouvert et décrire à l’autre groupe (B) la photo.

Les élèves du groupe B dessineront au fur et à mesure, puis compareront leur dessin à la photo.

Cela permettra aux élèves de rebrasser le lexique vu précédemment et de localiser les objets

dans l’espace. Ils pourront s’aider pour cela de la p. 281 du manuel (« Commenter un document

visuel »).

k Ce document visuel est reproduit sur le transparent n° 5.

1. React to this picture (questions a. et b.)

Productions possibles : – The scene is set in a kitchen. A young woman is leaning on a kitchen counter, doing nothing.

She is idle, resting / having a rest. She stares at something we cannot see. Her eyes are blank.

She looks bored. She doesn’t seem interested in doing the housework. In the background we

can see a sink and cupboards which are spick-and-span. Everything is sparkling in this kitchen,

thanks to the robots. It’s state of the art equipment.

– The robots are doing all the household chores / the housework. Some of them are dusting,

some are washing up / doing the dishes, some are cleaning / wiping the cupboards with a

sponge. One is hoovering the floor, one is watering the plant and a pair of robots is sweeping the

floor collecting the dirt with a dustpan. One robot plays the part of a maid because he is waiting

on the woman / is bringing her a drink on a tray. The robots look like toys and astronauts. They

seem to be wearing a space suit. They look modern.

2. Give your opinion (question c.)

Productions possibles : These robots are useful for busy people because they are labour-

saving / time-saving. They alleviate our workload. They make housework less tedious. People

can relax. They do not waste time on dull, uninteresting tasks. When people are overwhelmed

with work, they do not have to worry about cleaning the house. Robots are more reliable than

human beings and some housekeepers, because they are programmed to do the work and are

never ill, they never complain.

I think this scene is a dream. It’s quite unrealistic. These robots may exist one day / in a near

future but they may be too expensive. Only big firms may be able to buy these robots, not a

family.

I think this photo is quite humorous because one robot should be sufficient to do all the chores.

There’s no need to have all these robots!

Name: House fairies

Catchphrase: I need somebody’s help!

MANUEL k P. 85

UNIT 7 • 1 3 1

1. THAT’S SCI-FI!> Mises en œuvre possibles

Le repérage des informations essentielles pourra donner lieu à un travail individuel à la maison.

Les élèves pourront rapidement confronter leurs réponses avant une reprise collective. Le Go

further portant sur l’implicite pourra être traité en classe, en binômes par exemple, puis être

suivi d’une reprise avec toute la classe. Pour réagir aux propos de leurs camarades les élèves

s’aideront de la fiche d’évaluation de la prise de parole en interaction p. 181 du manuel.

1. Understanding the text

Réponses :

a. – iRobot Corporation • 1990 • Boston

– Helen Greiner

– Science-fiction

b. – Genghis, Ariel, My Real Baby, the Pyramid Rover

– Mars, underwater, Egypt (the Great Pyramid)

– 2002

– Genghis is used to work on / explore Mars. Ariel is used to detect mines underwater. My

Real Baby is a doll. The Pyramid Rover was used to climb the Great Pyramid and to enter a

chamber no one had ever opened.

c. – vacuum / hoover, wash floors, clean gutters

– “Three million” refers to the number of robots called Roomba that are used in American

homes and “40” refers to the percentage of revenue of the firm that comes from defense

contracts signed with the army.

d. The journalist is referring to robots that will be created in the future.

e. – Greiner wants to help the disabled and the elderly / old people (remind them to take their

medication, help find their glasses, check to see if they’re okay).

– The family will worry less because robots will take care of the ill or old person.

2. Go further

Productions possibles :a. Hoovering and washing are dull activities. They can be tiring for old people. Cleaning gutters

may be a dirty job. Detecting mines and opening a new chamber in a pyramid or exploring Mars

can be dangerous. Helping to find glasses is a dull activity but it’s not tiring. Reminding someone

to take medication is neither tiring nor dangerous nor dirty but it can be boring sometimes.

Checking on someone’s health is reassuring.

b. The scientists will use Genghis and the Pyramid Rover. The military will use Ariel. Everybody can

use Roomba, Scooba and Looj and My Real Baby. Specific robots will be used by the elderly and

the disabled.

3. Watch a video

Voir p. 419-420 et 440-441.

MANUEL k P. 86

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 3 2 • UNIT 7

2. MAY I HELP YOU?> Mise en œuvre commune des p. 86 et 87

Ce cartoon peut bien évidemment être étudié tout seul, mais on peut également l’exploiter

en parallèle avec le document de la p. 87 (Humans and robots). On divisera alors la classe

en deux groupes et l’on donnera à chaque groupe un document à étudier.

Les élèves répondront aux questions de l’activité 1 Observe and speak de chaque document

et présenteront à l’autre groupe un compte rendu de leur étude. Les plus fragiles pourront

traiter le cartoon p. 86 et s’aideront de la rubrique correspondante dans le Workbook (p. 54).

Les élèves des deux groupes utiliseront ensuite la rubrique Action! du Workbook (p. 56-57)

qui constitue une aide à l’expression permettant de faire la comparaison et la synthèse des

deux documents.

> Mise en œuvre de la p. 86

k On pourra procéder à une anticipation grâce à une approche morcelée.

– On (rétro)projettera le cartoon en dissimulant le robot et la légende et en demandant aux

élèves de réagir (on écrira au tableau who? ou tout autre déclencheur de parole : Whom do

you expect...).

Productions possibles : It’s a big firm / corporation. There should be a receptionist. We

should see a woman because most of the time women are hired as receptionists in firms.

I expect to see a secretary. The secretary is the person who welcomes / greets the people

who want to meet the boss / the manager. She can be in an office next to her manager’s

office. The receptionist tells the manager that the client he is working with has arrived for the

appointment.

– On révélera ensuite le cartoon dans son intégralité et on demandera aux élèves de réagir.

Productions possibles : I expected a woman as a receptionist but I can see a robot instead.

The human secretary has been replaced by a robot. That’s weird! I was surprised to see a

robot because a machine has no soul and I don’t think a machine could be good at social

contact, or replace human beings.

I was sure it was something unusual because the two characters in the background look

puzzled.

k On pourra également analyser le document dans son entier et faire travailler les questions

du Observe and speak individuellement ou en binômes avant de demander une prise de parole

devant la classe pour rendre compte du document.

1. Observe and speak

Productions possibles :a. The scene takes place in an office or maybe in a hall, at the entrance of a firm.

b. The presence of a robot strikes me because it is unexpected and unusual. I expected to see a

real person especially since being a receptionist implies having social contacts.

c. The robot doesn’t look like a human being at all because he has wires on his head. He looks like

a human being because he has a big smile. He looks friendly and his wires look like curly hair.

d. The boss may be speaking. He says he tried to hire humans but they were unpleasant. They

didn’t respect the clients, they were rude to them so he decided to fire them. And instead of

UNIT 7 • 1 3 3

hiring humans, he decided to hire robots because they were nicer than human beings, well-

behaved, welcoming, friendly, polite. They were not grumpy.

e. The two characters in the background may be spying on the robot (the new receptionist).

They must be curious to see how he deals with the job. They may be jealous because he

was hired for the job and not them. They may be envious bcause the robot’s job is not as

exhausting as theirs.

One of the two characters may be the person speaking, the boss. He’s checking to see if

everything is all right with this new, unusual clerk. He wants to see if the robot is doing well / if

he has no problems / if he is nice enough. He wants to be sure he has made the right decision/

choice.

2. Go further

On incitera les élèves à échanger leurs opinions et leurs réactions sur le message du dessin

humoristique au cours d’une discussion. Pour évaluer leurs camarades, les élèves pourront

s’appuyer sur la fiche concernant la prise de parole en interaction p. 181 du manuel.

Ces questions pourront donner lieu à un travail individuel, en binômes ou en groupes si la

classe le permet.

Il faut insister pour que les élèves expriment une opinion personnelle (cela leur permettra

de rebrasser les structures de l’opinion, en gras ci-dessous).

Productions possibles :a. In my view the cartoonist may want to denounce the predominant role played by robots in

our society. Working conditions are getting tougher and tougher, I mean, if people are not

competitive enough, robots replace them on the spot. Robots can work long hours without

complaining, without asking for a salary or a rise. Robots are submissive and never rebel

against any decision. In other words, they are obedient, contrary to some people who go on

strike and have many demands, always ask for more.

I don’t agree with you. I feel the cartoonist wants to warn workers against the dangers of

becoming too demanding. By requiring rises, fewer working hours, ideal working conditions,

they may choose to follow a dangerous path. Bosses may want to get rid of them and to use

robots instead, because robots are submissive, obedient and they never complain.

In my opinion, the cartoonist just wants to emphasize the fast development of new technology.

To me, the cartoonist wants to say that managers want to replace men by robots because

they do not have to pay them. So it is a way of saving money.

To sum up, I’d say the cartoonist foresees hardships for workers who can easily be

dismissed / be made redundant. He seems to say that the future in store for workers is

rather dark / gloomy. Unskilled, illiterate people will be laid off. Although the cartoon is

humorous, it is not very optimistic / it’s pessimistic for human beings.

b. I cannot deny that robots’ presence is more and more prevailing in industry but I don’t

understand why the cartoonist shows us a robot as a clerk. I really think it’s science-fiction:

Robots are mainly used to accomplish dull / boring, dangerous, tiring and dirty tasks. As far as

interesting jobs are concerned, I don’t think that they will be able to replace men. In other words,

I know it is impossible to see robots make decisions, initiate awareness campaigns, have social

relationships, invent up-to-date products, negotiate with people, plan long-term projects as they

cannot think. All the jobs requiring psychology cannot be carried out by robots. Do you see what

I mean? To me a human brain cannot be replaced so easily. To sum up I’d say I can’t imagine

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

Check your vocabulary

1 3 4 • UNIT 7

robots as a threat. Robots are only an empty shell. They have no soul, no feelings, no thoughts.

They only represent helping hands for humans.

I don’t believe they can reach independence, autonomy yet.

I disagree with you. I don’t see why they shouldn’t replace men in the near future, as long as

a scientist discovers a programme that enables robots to adapt to different situations.

Don’t you think that it’s not so easy?

N. B. : cette partie sera synthétisée grâce à l’exercice Action!, p. 56-57 du Workbook, et

pourra servir de trace écrite. Les élèves plus solides pourront faire leur compte rendu écrit

eux-mêmes.

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique de la rubrique Help!

grâce à l’exercice suivant.

Traduisez ces phrases. Les mots en gras se trouvent dans le Help!, p. 86.Il veut se débarrasser de cet employé de bureau.

Ces gens sont envieux, curieux et jaloux.

Ils viennent d’embaucher une personne très obéissante.

Certains prévoient que de nombreux travailleurs se révolteront contre leurs patrons.

Il nous a avertis du danger, mais nous n’avons pas écouté.

CORRIGÉ

He wants to get rid of this / that clerk.

These / Those people are envious, curious and jealous.

They have just hired a very obedient person.

Some people foresee that many workers will rebel against their bosses.

He warned us against the danger but we didn’t listen to him.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 54)

I. Observe and speakThe scene is set in an office and I’m immediately struck by the presence of a robot working as a receptionist / clerk. The robot replaces a human being. Indeed it has

wires on its head. It looks happy and friendly. The two characters at the door seem to

spy on the robot. They may want to have the robot’s job. The caption suggests a robot is replacing human beings because the machine does a better job than them, so they may

be envious / jealous / scared too.

II. Go furtherThe cartoonist seems to foresee a dark future and wants to warn workers about the

dangers of hiring robots. Managers will get rid of / fire / dismiss men and will use

machines instead, because they are convinced they won’t rebel against them. Contrary

to workers who are disobedient, machines are obedient, they never complain so the

companies will hire them.

1.2.3.4.5.

1.2.3.4.5.

1.

UNIT 7 • 1 3 5

I find this cartoon worrying and shocking because it shows that human beings can be victims

of unemployment because they can be replaced by robots / they have defects. I don’t think it

is science-fiction because robots are more and more elaborate / sophisticated. I understand

why robots could be used by managers instead of men because robots never rebel against

them. They don’t think that working conditions are painful or difficult!

I find this cartoon amusing because I know it is impossible to replace men, as robots cannot

be creative. I think it is science-fiction because robots cannot plan a project.

I don’t find this cartoon amusing. I find it scary.

3. Feel and touch

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Jason: Hello everybody! Welcome to your favourite programme “Into the Future”. I’m Jason

McKinley live from London where an exhibition about robots is taking place. Today I’m

interviewing Robin Duffle, the famous scientist about the latest discoveries in robotics.

➼ Part 2Jason: Hello Mrs Duffle. Tell me more about this project you’ve been working on for several

years now. Are robots becoming more and more humanlike? I’ve been told a robot called

Marvel has a sense of touch just like ours.

Mrs Duffle: As you may know, today’s robots still have trouble doing very simple things such

as tying shoelaces or grabbing small objects. In fact they are as clumsy as a six-year-old, just

because their sense of touch is not good enough. That’s why we’ve decided to give Marvel a

chance.

Jason: That sounds interesting! What have you done?

➼ Part 3Mrs Duffle: We have created an artificial surface that looks like skin to improve Marvel’s

sense of touch. This skin is thin enough to wrap around the robot’s fingers. Once its hands

are covered in the new material, Marvel can detect pressure and temperature, and he will

be able to take on complicated jobs.

Jason: Can’t believe it!

Mrs Duffle: Well there’s a chance the new skin will be better than human skin because

it may be able to detect if the environment is light or dark or if it’s noisy. This may really

improve how robots work in the real world.

Jason: Unbelievable! That was worth listening to. Thanks for everything Mrs Duffle. See you

tomorrow for a new visit to Robotland with a new guest.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 54-56)

a) thin – artificial – complicated

b) scientist – robotics

\mE"tIEriEl\ material (tissus)

\"temprEtSEr\ temperature

\skIn\ skin

\rœp\ wrap (envelopper)

\"s∏…rfIs\ surface

2.

2.

3.

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 3 6 • UNIT 7

➼ PART 1

k Jason McKinley is a journalist / a reporter. k Robin Duffle is a scientist.

favourite • programme • London • exhibition • robots • taking • place • discoveries •

robotics

➼ PART 2

robots • becoming • humanlike

He has a sense of touch that is like ours, that is to say human.

➼ PART 3

skin • thin • wrap • fingers • covered • detect • pressure • temperature • complicated •

jobs

There’s a chance the new skin will be better than human skin because it may be able to

detect if the environment is light or dark or if it’s noisy.

> ACTION!

➼ RECAP PART 1 (INTRODUCTION)

The two people are Jason McKinley, a journalist and Robin Duffle, a famous scientist. They are at the London Robot Exhibition about robots. Jason McKinley is interviewing

Robin Duffle about her latest discoveries in the programme Into the Future.

➼ RECAP PART 2 (COMPARISON)

Today’s robots.Some can be compared to humans / human beings because they have a sense of touch which is equivalent to a human sense of touch.Robin Duffle has been working on this project for several years.

She and other scientists have created a robot called Marvel.

➼ RECAP PART 3 (REAL PROGRESS)

If the robots’ hands / fingers are wrapped / covered with an artificial surface / a new material / a thin skin, the robots will be able to detect pressure and temperature.Finally they will be able to take on complicated jobs.It’s a possible improvement because this thin skin may be better than human skin.

They will soon be able to detect if the environment is light or dark or if it’s noisy.

Consequently their work will be improved in the real world.

4.5.

6.

7.8.

9.

10.

11.

What are they speaking about? Where?

robots • discoveries • robotics London • exhibition

New material? Bodypart ? How? What for?

thin skin fingers wrap • covered detect pressure, temperature •

do complicated jobs

MANUEL k P. 87

UNIT 7 • 1 3 7

3. HUMANS AND ROBOTSN. B. : cette illustration a également été utilisée par le groupe Queen en couverture de son

album News of the World, sorti en 1977.

> Mises en œuvre possibles

k Anticipation (approche morcelée) : on pourra (rétro)projeter l’illustration en cachant

le robot et en demandant aux élèves de décrire la scène et d’émettre des hypothèses sur

ce qui s’est passé.

Productions possibles : A man has been wounded, he is lying unconscious. He seems to

be dead. He has a gaping wound. He may have been shot, or stabbed. He may have been

wounded in a war, in a terrorist attack, injured in a car accident…

k Découverte et analyse du document dans son entier : travail sur les questions du

Observe and speak individuellement ou en binômes. Prise de parole devant la classe pour

rendre compte du document et confronter les différents points de vue.

1. Observe and speak

Productions possibles :a. I am struck by the huge robot. He looks like a giant and he looks powerful. He is oversized

and compared to him, the human that he is holding in his hand is belittled / tiny. He looks

defenceless / weak / powerless. The man looks like a puppet in his hand.

b. To me the robot has just wounded / killed the man, because I can see blood on the man’s

clothes. He may have been the robot’s master / owner. However I don’t know how he killed

him. He may have held him too tight. He might / must have taken power over his master and

he may have decided to get rid of him. It may have been an accident.

It seems to me he has tears in his eyes. He seems upset / bewildered at what he has done.

In my opinion, he hasn’t killed the man on purpose. However he feels responsible for the

crime he has committed. He seems to feel guilty. The robot is really humanized.

I don’t see it that way. I don’t think he has killed this man. He is upset because he has found a

dead body (the man may have been someone he knew) but he doesn’t know who the murderer

is. He is so upset that he is on the verge of crying.

c. The cartoonist used a low-angle shot so that the robot looks very impressive, powerful and

scary. The viewer feels threatened too.

d. This illustration reminds me of King Kong. A parallel can be drawn between King Kong (the huge

gorilla) and this robot. He also held a tiny, defenseless human being in his hand. He was also

humanized because he had fallen in love with this young, beautiful woman and because this love

was impossible. Only humans can experience love, and only humans can be murderers.

The artist also expresses here our fear of machines, of the future. He hints at the fact that

human values may be threatened by progress and technological advances. He may want to

defend man against technology. Machines may take over from us / take our place.

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

Check your vocabulary

1 3 8 • UNIT 7

2. Compare

On organisera ici un travail de groupe. Le résumé dans le Workbook (question a., p. 56)

s’adresse aux élèves plus fragiles. Les plus solides traiteront la question b. La correction

pourra se faire à l’aide d’un transparent rétroprojeté ou d’un tableau numérique interactif.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 56-57)

a. The two documents deal with the relationships between robots and human beings.

In the cartoon men hire robots and use them as machines to do the harassing, boring

work. Robots are submissive / obedient and never rebel because they have no feelings /

conscience.

In the illustration, the robot has taken power over from men. On the one hand, the robot is

scary because he is huge and powerful. That’s why he could kill a man, so he is dangerous.

The man in the robot’s hand seems defenceless and can be compared to a puppet.On the other hand, we realize the robot is humanized in the illustration, because he has

tears in his eyes and feels upset about what he has done. He probably feels guilty too.

b. Productions possibles :In both documents we can see disturbing / frightening visions of the relationships between robots and human beings.

The most striking document is the second one because the robot has taken power over men and the consequences are terrible for men.

The most striking document is the first one because although it is humorous, the cartoonist conveys a threatening message to men who could be fired because robots could easily replace them.

The message conveyed in these documents is unrealistic / incredible / unconvincing /

threatening.

Currently robots are not elaborate, so there’s no need to worry.

The message conveyed in these documents is puzzling. It made me think of the important part played by robots in our society.

Le lexique pourra être mémorisé grâce à la fiche suivante (les mots en gras se trouvent

dans la rubrique Help! de la p. 87).

Traduisez les phrases suivantes.a. Il était si bouleversé que les larmes lui montaient aux yeux.

b. Il est blessé (deux mots) et ressemble à une marionnette sans défense.

c. Il se sent coupable et responsable de cette situation.

d. Ce puissant robot est effrayant et dangereux.

e. Ce robot a pris le pouvoir sur les hommes.

f. Il l’a blessé. L’a-t-il fait exprès ?

MANUEL k P. 88-89

UNIT 7 • 1 3 9

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE

a. He was so upset that there were tears in his eyes.

b. He is wounded / harmed and looks like a defenceless puppet.

c. He feels guilty and responsible for the situation.

d. This powerful robot is scary and dangerous.

e. This robot has taken power over men.

f. He has wounded / harmed / injured him. Has he done it on purpose?

4. A PROPHET (PART 1)N.B. : l’enregistrement de ce texte se trouve sur le CD classe n° 1, piste 42.

Informations complémentaires Isaac Asimov (1920-1992) was a Russian-born American writer and professor of

biochemistry, best known for his works of science-fiction and for his popular science books.

Asimov was one of the most prolific writers of all time, having written or edited more than

500 books. He is also regarded as a master of the science-fiction genre all over the world.

Asimov’s most famous work is the Foundation series. His other major series are the Galactic

Empire series and the Robot series.

> Mises en œuvre possibles

k Les élèves pourront préparer les questions de compréhension sur le texte (Understanding

the text) et repérer les informations essentielles à la maison.

k On pourra procéder à la correction des questions a. et b. du Recap de façon collective.

k On divisera ensuite la classe en plusieurs groupes pour traiter les questions restantes

du Recap, car elles portent sur l’implicite du texte.

– Le groupe A traitera la question c.– Le groupe B fera la question d. en s’aidant du Help! (élèves plus fragiles).

– Le groupe C répondra à la question e. en s’aidant du Help! et des Prompts p. 89.

1. Get ready

Productions possibles :a. I expect to find the words tough, flames, risky and hostile.

b. The text will deal with robots working in a hostile environment, doing tough jobs. Humans

are no longer taking risks since robots replace them and are doing risky tasks. They replace

firemen in the fight against fire. It will help save human lives.

2. Understanding the text

a. The characters present in the scene are Dr Susan Calvin, a robotics expert, Linda Rash, a new

employee at US Robots, and Elvex, a robot.

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 4 0 • UNIT 7

b. – “They” refers to the robots Elvex saw. “Some” refers to a certain category of robots.

– “They are working, Dr Calvin. I see some who are mining in the depths of the earth,

and some who are laboring in heat and radiation. I see some who are laboring in factories

and some who are working undersea.” (l. 6)

c. Dr Calvin asks these two questions.

d. The phrases in bold letters reveal that Elvex is very young (he must have been built recently).

He has little experience of the outside world since he has not left the testing station yet.

That’s why we can conclude that Elvex is clear-sighted. Though he has seen very little, he

knows a lot about his fellow robots. So Elvex must be very careful and observe a lot.

e. – The activities mentioned in the text are mining and laboring in heat and radiation.

– They are working in the depths of the earth, in factories and undersea.

I would say these activities are harassing / tough, dull, dangerous / risky, dirty and boring.

f. The robots are “bowed down with toil and affliction, weary of responsibility and care” and

they need “rest”.

3. Recap

Productions possibles :a. We learn that Elvex is a newly-built robot because he is only ten days old. He has been

constructed recently and he is very young. Elvex hasn’t left the testing station yet, so some

things in his system can still be fixed. He hasn’t got much experience about life and the

outside world, and yet Elvex knows a lot already, especially about his fellow robots.

b. In Elvex’s dream, robots are working in hostile environments: undersea, in the depths of

the earth. They are doing tough, dangerous, risky jobs such as mining and they are doing

dull tasks because they work in factories. Consequently they are bowed down with toil and

affliction. They labour a lot and feel depressed. They are weary of responsibility and care.

They have a lot of responsibilities and they have much to take care of. No wonder they should

be exhausted. They are hard-working, painstaking so they need to have some rest. The robots

are oppressed and subservient to men.

c. Elvex is a clear-sighted robot who realizes that robots are exploited. That’s why he exposes /

denounces / questions the way robots are treated. He complains about their working conditions.

As he realizes robots must protect their lives, we can say Elvex is caring.

He could become a leader guiding the robots’ rebellion.

d. clear-sighted • denounces / exposes • complains • protect • caring • leader • rebellion

e. Dr Calvin is the expert, so she is responsible for Elvex. She is the one who has to check on Elvex

to see if everything is all right. Therefore she investigates what Linda Rash reported. She wants to

know what Elvex dreamt of exactly. She wants to discover if Elvex is dangerous or not. She asks

questions to see if Elvex knows a lot about the robots’ working conditions. Her questions reveal that

she is clever: She knows how to get the useful information. She is worried / anxious, concerned,

alarmed at hearing Elvex. She fears that sooner or later Elvex may feel superior to human beings.

She feels that Elvex knows too much already and could start a rebellion. She dreads his reaction.

She may decide to destroy Elvex. She may decide to send him to jail. She may change his

programme / system so that he can no longer dream.

MANUEL k P. 90

UNIT 7 • 1 4 1

4. Creative writing

Les élèves pourront faire cette rédaction à la maison en s’aidant des p. 222-224 de leur

manuel. Voici une proposition de corrigé.

February 25th, 2009

Dear Sir,

I obeyed your orders, I questioned the newly-built robot called Elvex whose registration number

is 226708. He answered all my questions and I’m afraid I must report an alarming problem.

Although Elvex hasn’t left the testing station yet, he seems to be a clear-sighted robot and

knows a lot about the robots’ working conditions. He keeps dreaming about his fellow-robots

labouring in hostile, risky environments. He clearly exposed the robots’ living conditions as

awful.

That’s why I’m really worried about his future reactions. I fear that he may urge the other robots

to rebel against us. He sounded as if he had human feelings because he said the robots needed

rest. I feel he could be a potential leader.

What shall I do? / What do you advise me to do? I think we have to make a quick decision

before it’s too late and we have trouble with him and the other robots.

Dr Calvin

4. A PROPHET (PART 2)N.B. : l’enregistrement de ce texte se trouve sur le CD classe n° 1, piste 44.

> Mises en œuvre possibles

k Travail individuel ou en binômes sur l’illustration, puis sur le texte.

k Dans le cadre d’une classe très hétérogène les élèves les plus solides pourront traiter

l’illustration à l’aide du transparent n° 6 sur lequel figure également une partie de la fresque

de Michel-Ange. Ils pourront anticiper la suite de l’histoire à partir de ces deux œuvres.

Ils devront faire un compte rendu oral de l’illustration au reste de la classe et écouter ce

que dira l’autre groupe pour voir si leurs hypothèses ont été confirmées et dire pourquoi ils

avaient tort ou raison.

Productions possibles :This photo reminds me of the famous fresco painted by Michelangelo in the Sistine Chapel in

Rome. It represents a biblical scene, God and Adam and their forefingers touching to symbolize

light, the life that God gave to man. God is the creator of mankind. We can draw a parallel

between the fresco and this photo.

The two artificial hands were created by man. But man’s creations might challenge man’s

power one day. Man may be overtaken by his own creations. Robots may feel equal to men

one day.

Elvex may be associated with God, and the other robot is one of the robots who are exploited

by human beings. All the robots may be ready to defy / stand up against / overthrow man.

Men may be enslaved, overwhelmed by robots. The text deals with the showdown / clash

between man and Elvex, the plot between Elvex and the other robots against man.

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 4 2 • UNIT 7

5. Understanding the text

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 57-58)

I. Understanding the text

Linda Rash asks this question.

Dr Calvin answers this question.

“Its” refers to the gun Dr Calvin removed from her pocket.

“That” refers to the fact that Elvex must or must not be destroyed. “My” refers to Dr Calvin.

“It” refers to Dr Calvin’s decision.

“They” refers to human beings.

“Man” refers to a leader / Elvex.

a) Elvex says “Let my people go!”

b) “My people” refers to the robots.

c) « Laissez partir mon peuple ! » « Libérez mon peuple ! »

Elvex will play the role of the guide to freedom. If we refer to the Bible, he embodies the

leader / prophet who is going to set his people free. Elvex rebels against oppression and

slavery. He can’t stand / He resents being a slave. He questions man’s authority because

he wants a world of justice and equality for all.

Elvex says that he was the man.

N. B. : la rubrique Action! du Workbook p. 58 reprend les questions b. c. et d. du manuel.

Productions possibles :b. Elvex dreams of changing the world he lives in. He dreams of setting the robots free. He

hopes to abolish slavery. He hopes to put an end to the robots’ exploitation. He wants the

robots to be free. He wishes he could help his fellow robots to be free. He would be a leader.

c. They are discussing if Elvex can challenge / defy / threaten the human race.

Dr Calvin is old and experienced. That’s why she thinks he can become dangerous and

uncontrollable. With the other robots, he could rule over / dominate the world. She fears a

showdown between men and robots in the long term. On the contrary Linda is fascinated /

impressed and is worried about Elvex because it’s a major / an important discovery.

d. In the end, Linda Rash might set Elvex free and hide him so that she can work on his system

and improve his programme to turn him into a real man. Then he would no longer side with

the other robots. Like the other human beings, he would exploit the robots and make them

work for his own profit / benefit.

In the end, Dr Calvin may kill Elvex with her electron gun for fear he may become disobedient

and threaten men’s authority.

k Après que les élèves aient émis des hypothèses sur la fin du texte, on pourra leur fournir

la dernière phrase de l’auteur : “And Susan Calvin at once raised her electron gun and fired,

and Elvex was no more.” On leur demandera alors de réagir librement.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Object Owner Capacity Target For Againstgun Dr Calvin neutralize with

one burst of its

electrons

robotic cranium

positronic brain

paths

Dr Calvin Linda Rash

Check your vocabulary

UNIT 7 • 1 4 3

Productions possibles : I can understand her reaction. First she is frightened because she is experienced and responsible

for Elvex so if anything happened she would be considered guilty. Then Elvex can really be

dangerous for human beings because he is very clever and has already understood that robots

are exploited by men and he could lead a rebellion against men.

I don’t agree with you. / I don’t see things that way. I find it awful that she can get rid of Elvex

so easily. I think she should have carried out a more thorough investigation / a more detailed

investigation to understand what had really happened. She should have tried to examine his

system before killing him.

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique des p. 88 à 90

du manuel grâce à la fiche suivante (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

Complétez cette grille avec les mots correspondant aux définitions ci-dessous.1 6

2

3

4

5

Trouvez les synonymes ou antonymes des mots suivants.a. anxious = f. inferior to ≠

b. expose = g. obedient ≠

c. rule over = h. controllable ≠

d. hypnotized = i. imprison ≠

e. defy = j. submit to ≠

Complétez ces phrases avec les mots qui conviennent.a. He was enough to anticipate what was going to happen in the near

future.

b. Though she did not want to about her employee, she had to report

her to the boss after all the mistakes she had made.

c. Because he behaved as a he was held responsible for the whole

situation and condemned.

d. She was really by all he had already learnt in such a short time.

e. She realized he was enough to incite all the other robots to rebel.

1.

2.

3.

Across1. someone who has too much

work is …

2. someone who is forced into

doing things is …

3. someone who is careful,

industrious is …

4. someone who takes care of

people is …

5. someone who doesn’t respect

rules or orders is …

Down6. being in a position of being

blamed for loss, mistakes, etc.

means being …

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 4 4 • UNIT 7

CORRIGÉ

Across: 1. overworked 2. oppressed 3. painstaking 4. caring 5. disobedient

Down: 6. responsible

a. worried b. denounce c. dominate d. fascinated e. challenge f. superior to g. disobedient

h. uncontrollable i. set free j. rebel against

a. clear-sighted b. complain c. leader d. impressed e. clever

LANGUAGE AT WORK> Improve your pronunciation

> Build up your vocabulary

– A robotic arm which can lift weight is a weight-lifting robotic arm.

– A robot that works hard is a hard-working robot.

– An android which is the size of a human is a human-sized android.

– A device which helps us save time is a time-saving device.

– A robot which is powered by battery is a battery-powered robot.

– A doll whose heart beats is a heart-beating doll.

– A device whose shape is round is a round-shaped device.

– A vacuum cleaner which moves slowly is a slow-moving vacuum cleaner.

– A device which is led by sensors is a sensor-led device.

invulnerable • unreliable • useless • insensitive • invisible • untiring • unusual •

unpleasant • disobedient • powerless

> Les pronoms relatifs

1. OBSERVEZ.

Les sujets des formes verbales soulignées sont les pronoms relatifs which, that et who.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

MANUEL k P. 91-93

Première syllabe Deuxième syllabe Troisième syllabe Quatrième syllabe

dangerous

factories

different

decision

determined

appeared

eventually

fascination

radiation

responsibility

\E\ (banana) \∏…\ (bird) \Å\ (dog)

radiation • electron •

protect • station • labour •

captor • sensor

working • research •

earth • earlier • words

robot

UNIT 7 • 1 4 5

Les pronoms relatifs which, that et who remplacent a machine, a robot et the scientist. On

appelle ces groupes nominaux des antécédents parce que le pronom relatif les remplace

et qu’ils sont placés avant ce pronom.

Dans l’énoncé a, l’antécédent désigne un non-humain (a machine). Dans l’énoncé b,

l’antécédent désigne un non-humain (a robot). Dans l’énoncé c, l’antécédent désigne un

humain (the scientist).

Lorsque l’antécédent fait référence à un humain, on emploie who.

Lorsque l’antécédent fait référence à un non-humain, on emploie that ou which.

Dans l’énoncé d, le pronom relatif est where. Il sert à préciser le lieu.

Dans l’énoncé e, le pronom relatif est whose. Il permet d’établir un lien de possession entre

robot et dream. Ici, l’équivalent français de whose est « dont ».

k Déduisez– On utilise des pronoms relatifs pour remplacer des groupes nominaux et pour relier deux propositions dans une même phrase.

– Lorsque le pronom relatif est sujet, on utilise who pour remplacer un nom désignant un

humain.

– Lorsque le pronom relatif est sujet, on utilise that ou which pour remplacer un nom

désignant un non-humain.

2. OBSERVEZ.

– Le pronom relatif est sujet du verbe dans l’énoncé c.

– Le pronom relatif est complément du verbe dans l’énoncé a.

– Le pronom relatif « zéro » est utilisé dans les énoncés b et d.

– Le pronom relatif « zéro » est complément dans ces deux énoncés.

k Déduisez– Lorsque le pronom relatif est sujet du verbe, il ne peut pas être supprimé.

– Lorsque le pronom relatif est complément du verbe, il peut être supprimé.

3. COMPAREZ.

a. De plus en plus de robots remplacent les travailleurs, ce qui est inquiétant.

b. Ce qu’Asimov prédit est impossible.

k Déduisez– Le relatif what sert à annoncer quelque chose que l’on va ensuite préciser.

– Le relatif which sert à reprendre la proposition qui précède.

> Practice a. The robotics expert has created an amazing robot which / that looks very much like him.

b. The scientist who designed a robot thinks he is God.

c. This robot works on batteries which / that can be replaced easily.

d. I’ve seen a robot which / that has very sensitive sensors and almost feels emotions.

e. I’ve just read an article on robots used in Cambodia which / that can find and destroy

landmines.

f. The visitors who spent all afternoon playing with robots were astonished.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

MANUEL k P. 94-95

UNIT

7 ROBOT DREAMS

1 4 6 • UNIT 7

a. The robots which / that / Ø the army owns often intervene in dangerous places.

b. The miniature robots which / that / Ø doctors tested are really reliable.

c. The android which / that / Ø I saw will talk in the very near future.

d. The autonomy of the robot which / that / Ø I bought lasts twenty-four hours.

e. The humanoid which / that / Ø was presented yesterday in Tokyo offers incredible resources.

a. The man who decided to create Frankenstein was a doctor. He wanted to give birth to a

perfect human being who would surpass any other being. In order to give life to this creature

he used body parts that / which he found in cemeteries or mortuaries, where he spent most

of his nights.

The creature, whose name was Frankenstein, turned out to be ugly, so ugly that his master

felt disgusted and ran away from it.

The monster, who had feelings, resented his situation. He wanted to make friends with people,

who kept rejecting him, because they were frightened by him. Frankenstein was ravaged by

sadness and wished to take revenge on his master, who had left him alone.

b. On pourra donner ce travail à faire à la maison et l’évaluer.

YOUR TASK

> Mise en œuvre

k Travail à faire en classe – Les élèves liront les consignes 1, 2 et 3 p. 94 en classe et s’assureront qu’ils comprennent

bien ce qui leur est demandé.

– Les élèves feront l’activité 2 b. en classe et appliqueront cette méthode de lecture aux

trois articles qui leur sont proposés.

k Travail à la maison– Les élèves liront les trois articles et rempliront une fiche récapitulative sur chacun des

robots, ce qui permettra de vérifier que la lecture a été faite et que l’article a été compris.

– Les élèves choisiront le robot qu’ils trouvent le plus utile, le plus étonnant ou le plus

innovant. Ils devront justifier ce choix.

– Ils pourront expliquer ce choix par oral (ce qui pourra entraîner une discussion entre les

élèves) ou par écrit.

– On pourra leur donner une semaine pour réaliser ce travail.

– On pourra évaluer la compréhension en ramassant et en notant les trois fiches de la page

suivante (téléchargeables sur le site compagnon). On attribuera des points aux différentes

rubriques proposées.

2.

3.

UNIT 7 • 1 4 7

NEW ROBOT PUPPET “HAS A HEART”

Name

Potential users

Designer’s name

Physical description

Physical reactions

Emotions / feelings

Main characteristic

RESEARCH SEEKS TO REPLACE SERVICE DOGS WITH ROBOTS

Disadvantages of service dogs

–

– –

Name of robot’s designer

Potential users

First device created

How does this device work?

How does the robot work? – –

ANDROIDS TO LIFT GRANDMA

What?

Potential users?

Robot’s skills? – –

Designer’s name?

Where?

Height and weight? – –

Specific characteristics – –

MANUEL k P. 96-97

1 4 8 • COMPRENDRE UN TEXTE

COMPRENDRE UN TEXTE

CORRIGÉ

2. Faites les premiers repérages.a. Ce document est un extrait de roman.

b. Les personnages sont Harry et les trois Dursley : les parents (Uncle Vernon et son

épouse) et leur enfant Dudley. Il y a aussi le reporter à la télévision qui mentionne le

personnage de Black, un prisonnier extrêmement dangereux qui s’est évadé.

c. La scène se situe dans la cuisine des Dursley au moment du petit déjeuner.

d. table • television • present • fixed • continually • large • moustache • sign • enter •

public • armed • dangerous • special • immediately

e. Les Dursley sont en train de prendre leur petit déjeuner en regardant la télévision que

Dudley a reçu en cadeau pour fêter son retour à la maison. En effet, il ne cessait de se plaindre

de la trop grande distance qui séparait la télévision du réfrigérateur. C’est l’anniversaire d’Harry

mais personne ne se soucie de lui. Il se sert à manger tout en regardant les informations. On

annonce qu’un prisonnier armé et dangereux vient de s’évader.

3. Inférez le sens des mots inconnus.a. loud + -ly = bruyamment (tout haut) • beef + -y = costaud

b. brand + new= flambant neuve • half + way = au milieu

c. – un cadeau pour fêter son retour à la maison pour les vacances

– convict : prisonnier (indice : escaped) • warn : prévenu (indices : public, armed, dangerous,

hotline, should be reported)

2. Repérez la structure de cette entrée d’un dictionnaire bilingue.1c • 2a • 3d • 4b

3. Combien de sens a le mot screen ?Le mot screen a trois sens en tant que nom : paravent, écran et crible (tamis), et trois en tant

que verbe : masquer, projeter et passer au crible.

4. À quoi correspondent ces abréviations ?n : nom • vt : verbe transitif • fig : au figuré • sb : somebody • sth : something • cpd :

compound word • med : médical

5. Lisez ces phrases.a. nom • verbe • verbe conjugué • participe passé du verbe

b. – Il est collé / scotché à son écran. / Il ne peut se détacher de son écran.

– Elle portait un chapeau pour protéger / abriter son visage de / contre la pluie.

– Ils ont passé au crible tous les candidats / postulants à l’emploi.

– Ce patient a subi un test de dépistage de maladies contagieuses.

6. À votre tour !– N’utilisez que de l’essence sans plomb.

– Il était semblable à un éléphant dans un magasin de porcelaine.

– Elle a fini par se rendre / Finalement, elle s’est rendue à la bibliothèque pour emprunter

des bandes dessinées.

A.

B.

TRUE BRITSUNIT

8

UNIT 8 • 1 4 9

True Brits

Comprendre à l’oral : les descripteurs du CECRL

Niveau A2 Niveau B1

Grille d’auto-évaluation

Je peux comprendre un message simple et clair me concernant,

concernant ma famille, mon

environnement proche, mon travail.

Je peux comprendre un message

contenant des mots et des

expressions sur des sujets

familiers.

Je peux comprendre les éléments principaux d’une émission de

télévision ou de radio sur des

sujets d’actualité ou sur des sujets

concernant la vie quotidienne si on

me parle lentement et en articulant.

Je peux comprendre des informations

factuelles si le message est court

et si la personne s’exprime dans un

anglais standard.

Comprendre des émissions de radio et enregistrements

Peut repérer l’information

essentielle d’un passage court

sur un sujet courant. Les locuteurs

doivent parler lentement et

articuler.

Peut comprendre les informations

essentielles d’un document

authentique, sur des sujets familiers

et si le locuteur s’exprime dans

un anglais standard et parle assez

lentement.

Comprendre en tant qu’auditeur

Pas de descripteurs. Peut suivre un exposé court

et structuré sur un sujet familier

et dont l’anglais est standard.

Comprendre une interaction entre locuteurs natifs

Peut identifier le sujet de la

discussion à condition que les

locuteurs parlent lentement et

articulent.

Peut suivre les points essentiels d’une

longue discussion si les locuteurs

s’expriment dans un anglais standard

et articulent.

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 5 0 • UNIT 8

Il nous a semblé tout à fait indispensable de désamorcer certains stéréotypes attachés au

Royaume-Uni et à ses habitants. Parallèlement, nous avons trouvé intéressant de familiariser

les élèves avec d’autres aspects emblématiques de la culture britannique qu’ils ne connaissent

pas forcément, qu’il s’agisse d’œuvres (tableau de Constable, poème de Wordsworth), d’une

région (le Lake District) ou de codes sociaux (table manners, stiff upper lip). L’objectif étant bien

entendu de consolider leurs connaissances du pays.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Prendre la parole en continu à propos

d’un symbole britannique à choisir

Mémoire • Lien social • Création

k symboles, clichés et stéréotypes

(p. 102-103)

k nourriture et plats typiques (p. 104)

k codes sociaux, politesse (p. 105)

k paysages, relief, nature (p. 106-107)

k détermination du nom (p. 110-111)

k prononciation des noms de plats

(p. 104) et de lieux (p. 106-107)

k s’appuyer sur les mots porteurs pour

comprendre le sens d’un message oral

(p. 103, 104 et 113)

k prononciation du th (p. 109)

k tongue twisters (p. 109)

k comparer / opposer

k permettre /interdire

k exprimer la cause et le but

k exprimer l’accord et le désaccord

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

UNIT 8 • 1 5 1

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Lire

Manuel

k Listen: reactions to a cartoon (p. 102)k Listen: reactions to paintings (p. 103)k A radio programme on cooking (p. 104) k The Daffodils (p. 107)

k site compagnon, U8–Dialogue: A street

survey

Marco’s Great British Feast (p. 104)

k The perfect Brit, clichés et représentations collectives (p. 102) k Food, glorious food, plats et recettes britanniques (p. 104)k Do’s and don’ts, codes sociaux (p. 105)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un document

sonore (p. 102-104)

k National symbols, stéréotypes et symboles nationaux (p. 103) k jeu de rôles : incarner un guide de musée

(p. 103)

k jeu de rôles : raconter une réunion

à laquelle on a assisté (p. 108)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un texte

(p. 108)

k les légendes d’un cartoon (p. 102)

k un texte sur les codes sociaux français

(p. 105)

k Experience the Lake District, extrait

de guide touristique (p. 106)

k The Daffodils, extrait du poème de

Wordsworth (p. 107)

k I don’t understand!, extrait de roman

(p. 108)

Workbook

XXX

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

X

X

X

X

X

MANUEL k P. 102

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 5 2 • UNIT 8

TUNE IN!

L’étude de cette page peut se préparer avec l’aide du Workbook, p 59. Au préalable,

le professeur pourra montrer la carte des îles Britanniques disponible sur le rabat avant

du manuel, au cas où les élèves auraient une vision floue de ces notions géographiques.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 59)

The two islands are called the British Isles. The biggest one is Great Britain. The British Isles

are composed of the United Kingdom and the Republic of Ireland.

Great Britain includes England, Scotland and Wales.

England is situated in the South East of Great Britain. It is the smallest entity of the British

Isles.

The United Kingdom is composed of Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

Prolongements possibles :

k Nous engageons vivement les élèves à visiter le site de l’école Woodlands, dans le

Kent, qui propose une mine d’informations (cartes, rappels historiques simples, blasons,

symboles nationaux, historique des devises anglaises, écossaises et galloises, drapeaux…).

Concernant les îles Britanniques, il faut se rendre directement à l’adresse suivante :

www.woodlands-junior.kent.sch.uk/customs/questions/britain.html

k Les élèves pourront préparer des mini exposés sur tous ces sujets à partir de recherches

faites à la maison ou en salle informatique.

Informations complémentairesIl est important que les élèves prennent conscience des différentes entités constituant le

Royaume-Uni pour éviter de froisser les susceptibilités lorsqu’ils se rendront outre-Manche.

Ils devraient ainsi savoir que le nom complet du Royaume-Uni est the United Kingdom of

Great Britain and Northern Ireland depuis 1922 (le Pays de Galles fait partie de l’Union depuis

1536, l’Écosse depuis 1707 et l’Irlande depuis 1801). Le drapeau s’appelle d’ailleurs the

Union Jack et est constitué par une superposition des croix de saint Georges, saint Patrick

et saint Andrew, les saints patrons du Pays de Galles, de l’Écosse et de l’Irlande. L’Angleterre

constitue le plus grand pays de l’Union : 130 410 km2 (sur un total de 244 023 km2) et

abrite environ 84 % de la population. Depuis 1707, la capitale du Royaume-Uni est Londres

où siègent la plupart des institutions. L’anglais est la langue commune à tous les habitants,

même si de nombreux habitants parlent écossais ou gallois.

1. The perfect Brit

> Mise en œuvre

k Ce visuel est reproduit sur le transparent n° 7.

k Une fois toutes ces notions géographiques fixées, l’enseignant demandera aux élèves

d’observer attentivement le cartoon, puis de fermer leur manuel et de dire ce dont ils

se souviennent. On pourra noter les questions suivantes au tableau : how many? who?

nationalities? jobs? weather?

UNIT 8 • 1 5 3

k Pour une classe plus fragile qui aurait des lacunes lexicales, on peut distribuer une fiche

avec différents noms de métier et demander aux élèves de souligner ceux qui apparaissent

sur le dessin. Si nécessaire, on procédera de la même manière pour les adjectifs.

k Après avoir rouvert le manuel, le professeur encouragera les réactions. Il pourra ainsi

demander oralement ou noter au tableau : Right? Wrong? Opinion? Any reaction? On incitera

les élèves à utiliser les adjectifs listés en question b et les expressions du Help!

k Pour une classe en difficulté il faudra, peut-être, passer par une étape lexicale intermédiaire

d’association des adjectifs avec leur contraire (humble ≠ arrogant, generous ≠ stingy…).

Productions possibles :Different types of Britons are portrayed / caricatured.

– The cartoon says the Royal family is humble. But the drawing represents haughty people.

They seem to be full of themselves / think much of themselves. They don’t look humble at

all: They are not smiling, they are pulling faces, they look bored and aloof. I think they look

haughty / contemptuous / superior / arrogant, posh and snobbish.

– The drawing shows people holding an umbrella because it is raining, yet it says “Welcoming

as the weather”, so it’s quite the opposite. British weather is generally considered awful, rainy

and very wet. “It’s raining cats and dogs” or “It’s pouring” are commonly used.

– It is funny because the cartoon says the perfect Brit should be as polite as a punk, but

punks are not polite at all / anything but polite. They are seen as rude, violent, boisterous

people who can’t behave.

– English food is said to / thought to / believed to be inedible, tasteless; people have no

culinary talents. I’ve heard about / tasted boiled mutton with mint sauce, for example.

– The Union Jack, in the middle, may suggest / imply that people are jingoistic (a jingo is a

person who combines excessive patriotism with contempt for other countries).

– British judges are portrayed as drunkards. We immediately recognize them because they

wear wigs.

– The Horse Guards are never relaxed, they have to keep standing for hours without showing

any emotions or feelings. They are as stiff as wood.

– Scottish people are believed to be misers / tight-fisted people.

– Welsh people are said to speak a dialect, which is very hard to understand, almost

incomprehensible.

To sum up this drawing is humorous / ironic / satirical. It is based on a contrast between

the caption and the drawing. It makes fun of the most famous British clichés / prejudices.

2. Creative writing

> Mise en œuvre

On pourra diviser la classe en deux groupes ou en binômes. Chaque groupe ou élève du

binôme serait chargé de trouver entre 5 et 10 stéréotypes soit sur les Français, soit sur les

Britanniques. Lors de la mise en commun des informations, les groupes décideront de lister

les clichés du plus fréquent au moins répandu, ou du plus farfelu au plus réaliste. Le site de

l’école Woodlands regorge également d’idées sur ces clichés :

www.woodlands-junior.kent.sch.uk/customs/questions/stereotypes.htm

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 5 4 • UNIT 8

Productions possibles :

* Les mots en gras peuvent être notés au tableau pour servir d’amorces.

On peut prolonger ce travail en groupes par un atelier d’écriture (et d’illustration le cas échéant).

Les deux meilleurs textes seront mis en regard et serviront de trace écrite commune à la classe.

3. Listen

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Tania: To me this cartoon is not amusing at all. Well... I mean it is based on stereotypes

only. Well… Let’s take the example of the Queen: She is viewed as arrogant, aloof, unable

to share feelings. And we all know this is not the truth!

➼ Part 2She has to follow a very strict protocol and cannot behave as she likes. I remember all the

big hype after Princess Diana’s sudden death. All she wanted was to protect the young

princes from the media and she ended up being accused of being too distant! I don’t think

it’s fair! It seems to me this cartoon gives a negative image of British people. Foreign people

are convinced that the Scots are stingy or English cooking is disgusting. I’m fed up with all

these clichés! I didn’t even smile once! It’s a tourist’s vision of Great Britain.

➼ Part 3Ruth: I don’t agree with you! This cartoon is hilarious. This is how irony works! Caricature is

an essential ingredient to make people laugh! Things have to be exaggerated and provoking

to make people react. And honestly, you can’t deny there are some true aspects in this

cartoon, can you?

French stereotypes British Stereotypes

– They are seen as very chatty.*– They use their hands a lot when they speak.

– They like dressing-up well and spend a lot of

money on clothes, they love fashion shows.

– In the countryside men wear the same

clothes all year round: a beret, a striped

T-shirt...

– Their staple diet is bread and cheese.

– They often eat frogs’ legs and garlic.

– They always kiss one another’s cheeks

to say hello.

– They don’t like working much and spend

a lot of time sitting at cafés discussing the

world.

– Food is more of a national treasure than

anything else in the world.

– They are viewed as heavy beer drinkers.

– Tea with milk is just like water to them.

– Most football fans are hooligans

– They are said to be difficult to get on with

because they can’t communicate with others.

– They are light-skinned and easily sun-burnt. Yet they love sitting in the sun because they

don’t get any.

– The Royals spend fortunes everyday

and have no idea how “normal” people live.

– Food is a sad story, half fast food, half

boiled, tasteless dishes.

– National hobbies are cricket and gardening.

UNIT 8 • 1 5 5

➼ Part 4I mean the royal family are not funny on any level and are a bunch of upper-class snobs.

Besides they live at public expense! Look, I love the rain, but you can’t say we live in a very

sunny country and Welsh is also very difficult to understand... When it comes to being sober,

I think there is still progress to be made! Don’t you think so? What about binge drinking at

weekends? We’ve heard all this many times, but I quite like this tongue-in-cheek message.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 60-61)

➼ PART 1

cartoon • not amusing

share • stereotypes • feelings

a) the Queen b) arrogant • aloof • unable to share feelings

Tania doesn’t think the cartoon is amusing at all. She blames the cartoon for being too

stereotyped and biased. She doesn’t think the Queen is arrogant, aloof, and unable to share

her feelings.

➼ PART 2

follow • protocol • death • protect • media • accused • distant

a) British • Scots • English

b) Scots = stingy: negative

English (cooking) = disgusting: negative

She is fed up with prejudices, with clichés. She can’t smile when she sees such a cartoon.

She doesn’t find it funny. She thinks it conveys too many negative stereotypes.

Stressed words: negative • image • fed up • cliché • smile • tourist’s vision

Tania blames this cartoon for being based on prejudices. She criticizes the cartoonist for

being biased. She resents the cartoonist’s biased vision.

➼ PART 3

don’t agree

hilarious • provoking • exaggerated • react

Ruth has a positive point of view because she thinks “this cartoon is hilarious.” She thinks

this because it is provocative and exaggerated, it makes people react. She thinks it is true

up to a point.

➼ PART 4

k Royal Family k upper-class k rain • not very sunny k Welsh k difficult to understand

k sober • binge drinking • progress

a) “I like this tongue-in-check message.”

b) « J’apprécie ce message ironique. »

1.2.3.4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.11.12.

13.

14.

Incident Goal Interpretation

Princess Diana’s death protect the princes from

the media

the Queen was viewed

as distant

MANUEL k P. 103

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 5 6 • UNIT 8

> ACTION!

➼ RECAP PARTS 1 AND 2

Tania doesn’t find the cartoon amusing because she thinks it is biased. She defends the Queen

because she doesn’t think she is insensitive. She supports the Queen’s attitude after Princess

Diana’s death because all she wanted was to protect the young princes from the media, though

it was interpreted in a negative way. She was said to be distant and aloof. Tania protests against

the vision of Great Britain which is full of clichés, stereotypes and prejudices against British

people. She’s fed up with clichés / stereotyped visions. She concludes by saying that she

doesn’t find it fair!

➼ RECAP PARTS 3 AND 4

Contrary to / Unlike Tania, Ruth thinks / finds that the cartoon is hilarious because it is

exaggerated. Because the cartoon is provocative, she is certain that people will react to it.

In her opinion the aspects viewed in the cartoon are true. She gives several examples which

she considers are not just clichés, such as Welsh as a difficult language, or binge drinking at

weekends. Even if all this has been heard many times, she thinks the tongue-in-cheek message

is effective.

1. NATIONAL SYMBOLS

1. Get ready

> Mise en œuvre possible

k Le professeur demandera aux élèves de relever dans le texte les noms de nationalité

et leur fera remarquer la présence d’un mot français. Ceci devrait les aider à identifier le

point de vue adopté ici. Ensuite, il fera classer les images associées au mot English en deux

colonnes :

Les élèves réagiront ; il se peut que tous ne connaissent pas la maladie de la vache folle et

que ce ne soit pas un symbole prépondérant à leurs yeux. Il faudra les encourager à trouver

d’autres symboles de l’Angleterre qui leur semblent plus évidents : Big Ben, les taxis londoniens,

Buckingham Palace, par exemple.

k Après avoir lu le texte de Stephen Clarke, l’enseignant pourra diviser la classe en 3 groupes

chargés de trouver d’autres symboles britanniques. Le groupe 1 s’attachera aux lieux et

monuments ; le 2 aux personnes célèbres, réelles ou imaginaires ; le 3 aux objets typiques.

Le travail de recherche peut se faire à la maison. Là encore, le site de l’école Woodlands est

très riche. En classe, après quelques minutes de réflexion, on demandera une récapitulation

collective. Après chaque prise de parole, le reste de la classe réagira et complétera, si

nécessaire.

Positive points Negative points

UNIT 8 • 1 5 7

Productions possibles :a. The point of view given here is a French one. When people think of England, or the UK,

most of them quote the Queen or David Beckham as people who embody the nation.

b. I don’t agree with the narrator because the Rolling Stones are not as famous as the Beatles.

For me, another strong symbol is Big Ben which represents London. What comes to mind first is

a cup of tea with milk.

Prolongement possible : on peut imaginer une activité de Follow-up où la classe devra

écrire un texte similaire sur les symboles de la France comme la tour Eiffel, Molière,

Amélie Poulain, le vin rouge, la haute couture… et les classer en points positifs ou négatifs.

2. Observe and listen

> Mise en œuvre possible :

a. k On pourra diviser la classe en deux moitiés et donner un tableau à étudier à chaque

groupe. À l’intérieur de chaque groupe, les élèves pourront travailler seuls ou en binômes.

Un rapporteur, ou plusieurs, sera / seront désigné(s) et prendra / prendront la parole en

continu. Le reste de la classe prendra des notes et complètera ce qui a été dit.

k Avec une classe fragile, on peut imaginer une anticipation phonologique consistant

à faire reconnaître les mots retranscrits en phonétique puis à les faire répéter : \"rIvEr\ •

\fi…ld\ • \strÅN\ • \"mÅnEk\ • \drO…\ • \kA…t\ • \hO…s\ • \"kÅtIdZ\.

Productions possibles :– The first painting represents a countryside scene. There is a cart drawn by a horse, a river...

all this makes me think of a quiet and peaceful place / of the good old days when there was

no car, no rush, no pollution. It conveys an impression of peace, tradition. It’s picturesque.

Britain is famous for its landscape.

– The second painting is impressive: King Henry VIII is standing proudly in a palace. He looks

authoritative, imposing, stern, domineering, powerful and mighty. I think the painter wanted to

glorify the king and the British monarchy. He was a very strong leader who shaped the history

of his country. The Royals are vivid images of Britain even today.

Informations complémentaires :k The Hay Wain (conservé à la National Gallery) représente un paysage du Suffolk,

Flatford Mill sur la rivière Stour, cher à John Constable.

k Henry VIII montre le célèbre monarque en costume d’apparat dans le palais de Whitehall.

b. Pour la compréhension orale, les élèves pourront utiliser la fiche d’entraînement du Workbook,

p. 62-63, et le Action! pour récapituler ce qu’ils ont appris des symboles nationaux.

Places and monuments People Objects

– Big Ben

– Buckingham Palace

– Windsor Castle

– London Tower

– Westminster

– Oxford & Cambridge

– Stratford

– the Beatles

– Queen Victoria

– Oliver Twist

– Robin Hood

– Sherlock Holmes

– Sean Connery

– Peter Pan

– double-decker buses

– London cabs

– Rolls-Royces

– fish and chips

– London underground

– Christmas pudding

– sheep

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 5 8 • UNIT 8

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Tania: To me, Henry VIII symbolizes England.

Ruth: What do you mean, this portrait symbolizes England? Come off it! This is just another

cliché about England! Who cares about monarchy nowadays? Tell me... What role does the

monarch play? Honestly... The Prime Minister and the government rule the country, not the

monarch! They make the important decisions, they discuss international problems and so

on with other world leaders. So down with monarchy and its privileges! I tell you what...

I’m glad the monarch has to pay taxes like any other British citizen. And anyway that’s what

they should do: They’re British citizens just like you and me!

➼ Part 2Tania: Er... I see your point. Fair enough! Look, Ruth! Look at this painting then... Constable’s

painting. Don’t you think it conveys true English values: simplicity, authenticity, love of Nature...

Ruth: You must be joking! What about London and its modern architecture: the Gherkin,

the Tate Modern? This is twenty-first-century England, not Constable’s painting! Again this

painting is just a stereotype of England; something you can only see on Christmas cards.

I can’t believe it Tania! How can you possibly imagine England like this? Of course rural

England still exists, but I don’t think the countryside best represents modern England.

Tania: You’re always contradicting me!

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 62-63)

➼ GET READY

symbolizes • cliché • monarchy • government • international • privileges

1 Head of State 2 monarch 3 rule 4 duties 5 role 6 taxes 7 citizen

➼ PART 1

a) k monarchy k the Prime Minister and the government rule the country.

Ruth thinks that monarchy is old-fashioned nowadays because the monarch doesn’t play

any significant political role as far as important decisions or international problems are

concerned. The monarch cannot be compared to a world leader such as Barack Obama.

The Prime Minister is the person in charge of political issues. The monarch is just a symbol.

angry

➼ PART 2

true • modern • simplicity • authenticity • architecture

the Gherkin, the Tate Modern • 21st century • Constable • Christmas

Stereotypes: simplicity • authenticity • countryside • rural England

Reality: modern architecture • modern England

Of course rural England still exists but I don’t think the countryside best represents modern

England.

1.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.2.

3.

4.

5.6.7.

8.

UNIT 8 • 1 5 9

> ACTION!

➼ PART 1

Tania is fed up with the monarchy because she thinks it is old-fashioned. She thinks

monarchs are just puppets because they do not play any significant political role. She

thinks monarchs are useless as far as important political decisions are concerned. Only the

Prime Minister and the government rule the country. The monarchy is just another cliché

about Great Britain. To her, all British citizens should be equally treated. So she finds it fair

that the Queen should pay taxes like any other British citizen.

➼ PART 2

Tania and Ruth are discussing the stereotyped representation of England. They disagree

with each other. Their vision is contradictory. On the one hand, Tania thinks that Constable’s

painting that represents rural England best conveys what England’s values really are:

simplicity, authenticity. On the other hand Ruth thinks that this vision is old-fashioned, that

London architecture is very modern and best represents her country. According to Tania, love

of Nature is an important value. To Ruth it doesn’t represent 21st-century England.

3. Recap

Avant de mettre en place le jeu de rôles, on pourra faire une première synthèse des tableaux.

Productions possibles : The portrait of Henry VIII glorifies England because he represents

England’s power. The portrait shows that England is a domineering nation. The dagger

conveys the idea that England is ready to fight to defend its territory if it is attacked by

enemies. Henri VIII embodies a powerful nation because the King looks impressive and

imposing. The other painting by Constable symbolizes England’s peaceful countryside.

This vision shows that England is a rural country / England before the Industrial Revolution.

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k On demandera aux élèves de scénariser leur prise de parole en jouant le rôle d’un guide

de musée qui présente soit un des deux tableaux, soit les deux tableaux à des touristes.

k Ce Recap peut également prendre la forme d’un jeu de Vrai / Faux. Séparer la classe

en groupes. Les élèves de chaque groupe font part d’informations sur le tableau qu’ils ont

étudié, mais y glissent aussi quelques erreurs que le reste de la classe devra déceler.

Productions possibles : So, ladies and gentlemen, we are now standing in front of Holbein’s

most famous portrait of King Henry VIII, painted in Hampton Court in 1537. The king was at the

height of his power and wanted a representation of his might and power. Yes, I agree with you

Madam, he looks proud! Don’t forget that England was one of the richest and strongest countries

in Europe. Another good question Sir! Indeed he probably wanted to look more powerful than his

rivals Charles Quint and François I. Some say this is the symbol of British monarchy at its height.

I would say this is an old-fashioned picture of a long-gone institution. Nowadays what role does the

monarch really play? Honestly... The Prime Minister and the government rule the country, not the

monarch! They make the important decisions, they discuss international problems and so on with

other world leaders. You may think I am a radical... Let’s move on to this beautiful painting by...

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique des p. 102 et 103

grâce à la fiche suivante (fiche téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

MANUEL k P. 104

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

Check your vocabulary

1 6 0 • UNIT 8

Retrouvez les synonymes ou les opposés de ces mots.a. quiet = c. elegant = e. artificial ≠

b. despise = d. powerless ≠ f. polite ≠

Retrouvez les mots dont voici la transcription phonétique.a. \ÆdÅmI"nIErIN\ c. \Im"bœrEst\ e. \"œrEgEnt\b. \"O…fEl\ d. \"kINdEm\ f. \"glO…rIfaI\

Traduisez ces phrases en anglais.a. On dit des Écossais qu’ils sont avares.

b. La reine incarne la monarchie britannique.

c. Ce tableau donne l’impression que la campagne est paisible.

d. Les Britanniques sont souvent considérés comme de mauvais cuisiniers.

e. Le Royaume-Uni est composé de deux parties : la Grande Bretagne et l’Irlande du Nord.

CORRIGÉ

a. quiet = peaceful c. elegant = stylish e. artificial ≠ natural

b. despise = show contempt d. powerless ≠ powerful f. polite ≠ rude

a. domineering c. embarrassed e. arrogant

b. awful d. kingdom f. glorify

a. Scottish people are said to be stingy.

b. The Queen embodies the British monarchy.

c. This painting conveys the impression that the countryside is peaceful.

d. The British are often considered bad cooks.

e. The United Kingdom is composed of two parts: Great Btritain and Northern Ireland.

2. FOOD, GLORIOUS FOOD

1. Guessing game

> Mises en œuvre :

1. PREMIÈRE VARIANTE

k On commencera par faire lire en silence puis à haute voix les mots du Help! (voire à les

faire écouter) pour s’assurer de leur compréhension et de leur prononciation.

k Ensuite on demandera à la classe de décrire les photos. Attention, nous conseillons de ne

pas donner les noms des plats tout de suite pour laisser la porte ouverte à des suppositions

et des réactions.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

UNIT 8 • 1 6 1

k Les élèves choisiront une image et diront ce qu’elle leur inspire, sans en indiquer le

numéro. Le reste de la classe devra trouver de quelle photo il s’agit. On incitera les élèves

à donner leur opinion et à dire si cela leur semble appétissant (ou pas). L’enseignant

pourra noter au tableau cette amorce : Yummy or yukky? en l’expliquant et en l’étoffant

éventuellement avec : It looks good. It’s worth trying. It’s disgusting / revolting / special.

It makes my mouth water. Have a go / a try. No thank you. It tastes sweet / salty / spicy...

k Le professeur notera les meilleures productions au tableau et suggérera des expressions

pour enrichir les phrases.

Productions possibles :– Picture 1: This photo shows a delicious dessert made of apples and served with either cream,

custard or vanilla ice cream. I wish I could have some today at the canteen, fat chance!

– Picture 2: There are a cup and a tea pot in the photo. It all looks good / scrumptious. You

can serve the drink with a little cake called a scone which is cut in half. People put butter and

raspberry jam on them, and sometimes even cream. It may be very fattening but so yummy!

– Picture 3: This is the traditional British fast food. It is composed of fish in batter and chips.

I have had it before and it is excellent, you’d be surprised.

– Picture 4: This dish is composed of slices of meat with what looks like potatoes or doughnuts.

I think the meat is either beef or pork. It could be a main dish. There are green vegetables as

well, such as peas and broccoli.

– Picture 5: It looks like an Indian dish with an orange creamy sauce and rice. I think it can be

served hot or mild. It looks interesting.

– Picture 6: This looks like a dessert or some ice cream. I think it’s vanilla with strawberry and

cream. I have never tried this before, but I could.

– Picture 7: Traditional English breakfasts are a real meal composed of bacon and eggs,

sometimes baby sausages, mushrooms and baked beans, yuk! You’re not hungry anymore

after that.

– Picture 8: I can see a plate with some cheese and wholemeal bread. Is it a snack? There is

some fruit and salad as well. It looks really good.

k Enfin, le professeur donnera les noms des plats et la classe tentera de les associer aux

images.

1. apple pie 2. cream tea 3. fish and chips 4. roast beef and Yorkshire pudding = roast dinner =

traditional Sunday dish 5. chicken tikka massala (It has become a British national dish.) 6. trifle

7. cooked breakfast 8. ploughman’s lunch

2. SECONDE VARIANTE

Le professeur peut diviser la classe en deux groupes ou en binômes. Le groupe ou l’élève 1

s’occupera des images 1 à 4 et le groupe ou l’élève 2 des images 5 à 8. Les élèves devront

décrire les plats dans le désordre pour que leurs camarades devinent duquel il s’agit. On

peut aussi leur distribuer la grille suivante (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

Pair work

1 6 2 • UNIT 8

Write: fill in this grid in silence.

Speak and make your friend guess which dish you are describing. Don’t mention either its number or its name if you know it.

EXAMPLE: “In this dish there is / are... I think it is quite sweet, and served for...”

Listen to your friend and guess which dish your friend is talking about.

Together with your friend can you match these names with the photos?

cream tea = ploughman’s lunch = chicken tikka massala =

apple pie = trifle = cooked breakfast =

fish and chips = roast beef & Yorkshire pudding =

2. Yummy! Yucky!

Les élèves connaissent-ils la Marmite \"mA…maIt\ ? C’est peu probable, il ne faut donc pas

hésiter à les renvoyer au site. Mais avant, ils peuvent émettre des suppositions en regardant

simplement la photo du manuel. Le professeur pourra utiliser ces prompts, suivant le niveau

de la classe :

– classe faible : I think, I suppose, perhaps, maybe it is, it looks like…

– classe plus solide : It must be, It can’t be, It may / might be...

Il faut encourager les réactions et les commentaires du reste de la classe.

Productions possibles : It could be a sort of spread, maybe some jam, but the colour is

strange though. I don’t know any fruit of that colour.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Picture Food items I can see Sort of food? Kind of meal?

n° ......

● sweet

● savoury

● spicy

● fast food ● breakfast

● main course ● dessert

● tea time

n° ......

● sweet

● savoury

● spicy

● fast food ● breakfast

● main course ● dessert

● tea time

n° ......

● sweet

● savoury

● spicy

● fast food ● breakfast

● main course ● dessert

● tea time

n° ......

● sweet

● savoury

● spicy

● fast food ● breakfast

● main course ● dessert

● tea time

Description A Description B Description C Description D

= dish number ...... = dish number ...... = dish number ...... = dish number ......

UNIT 8 • 1 6 3

Maybe it is the English Nutella, a kind of chocolate paste.

I don’t agree with you because the name doesn’t refer to anything sweet. Marmite makes me

think of a soup, or a cream for sauces.

Informations complémentairesNée en 1902, la Marmite est une marque britannique de pâte à tartiner à base de levures,

substances végétales naturelles et très riches en vitamine B1. La Marmite peut se

consommer étalée sur des toasts, ou encore servir de base à des sandwiches. Marmite

est un indénombrable en anglais : I hate / love Marmite.

3. Listen

La compréhension orale se fera à l’aide de la fiche d’entraînement du Workbook, p. 63-64.

La recette évoquée ici est celle du trifle.

> Script de l’enregistrement

Matthew: This recipe is worth it! It serves 6 to 8 people. Well Linda, you’ve prepared all the

ingredients, haven’t you?

Linda: Of course! Everything is ready!

Matthew: Look it’s very easy! First I break the sponge cakes in pieces, like this, so the

pieces aren’t crushed and I spread a little raspberry jam on each piece. Then I put them

into a large glass bowl and sprinkle the raspberries and sherry over them. Linda, would you

mind giving everything a good stir to soak up the sherry?

Linda: No problem Matthew... as long as I find the spoon... Where is it? Ah, here it is!

Matthew: Well done, Linda! How about making the custard now! While you heat half a pint

(that’s 275ml) of double cream in this small saucepan, I blend the egg yolks, sugar and

cornflour together thoroughly in a basin. Linda, when the cream is hot, pour it over the egg

mixture, stirring the whole time. That’s it! Don’t go too fast, don’t slow down so it’s well

blended.

Linda: OK!

Matthew: Now I return the custard to the saucepan and stir over a very low heat until thick.

Then I remove it and allow it to cool. Linda? Could you peel the bananas and slice them

thinly please? Thank you. Sprinkle them in amongst the raspberries. And now look, I pour

the custard over the sponge cakes.

Linda: What about the remaining half pint of cream?

Matthew: I whip it up and spread it over the top. And finally I decorate it with the flaked

almonds. The only thing to do now is cover and chill it for 3 or 4 hours before serving!

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 63-64)

F • E • B • D • A • G • C

n° 6

1.2.

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

Check your vocabulary

1 6 4 • UNIT 8

4. Recap

Lors du récapitulatif oral, les élèves devront classer les plats du plus appétissant au moins

appétissant et justifier leur choix. Ils pourront s’aider de la rubrique Action!, p. 64 du Workbook.

Productions possibles : I think I’d love to taste the trifle because I’ve got a sweet tooth and

it’s nearly teatime.

I don’t fancy the roast beef because I’ve heard it is over-cooked in Britain and I love my meat

rare. The puddings look delicious. I’d like to try exotic dishes because they must be spicy.

Prolongements possibles :

Does it ring a bell? Read this recipe.

Mince 1lb (450gr) of lamb meat. Chop or dice 1 onion, 1 carrot, 10 mushrooms, then cook them

in oil for a couple of minutes. Add 1 tablespoon of flour, then some ketchup or some stock. Bring

to the boil, stirring constantly. Put in the meat. Spoon the mixture into a baking dish.

Peel 2 ½ lb (1.1kg) potatoes, and boil them. Drain them and mash with hot milk and butter.

Pour on top of the meat mixture in the dish. Bake in the oven for 35-40mn until bubbling

(heat 180°C).

a. What French dish does it remind you of?

b. Which of the following names correspond to the recipe?

Steak and kidney pie Mince meat Mixed potato salad Sweet bread Shepherd’s pie

Corrigé: les élèves découvriront la recette du Sherperd’s pie ou Cottage pie qui fait penser à

notre hachis parmentier, à l’exception des viandes utilisées : du mouton dans le plat anglais

et du bœuf haché en France.

On pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique étudié p. 104 grâce aux exercices suivants

(fiche téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

Classez ces mots dans le tableau suivant la prononciation de la /des voyelle(s) en gras.beans • chicken • rice • pie • cream • chips • Marmite • beef • pudding

Barrez l’intrus dans ces listes.a. apple pie • trifle • ice cream • shepherd’s pie • cherry cake

b. ketchup • cream • custard • jam • honey

c. mutton • veal • sheep • pork • beef

d. broccoli • green peas • salad • carrots • leek

e. stiring • cycling • boiling • pouring • baking

Trouvez les mots qui correspondent à ces définitions.a. You only eat the roots from this plant. It can be mashed, boiled, fried, eaten cold or hot.

b. The leaves of this plant from India are boiled to make a famous British hot drink.

c. A small, soft and round bread-like cake made of flour and sugar, and eaten at teatime.

d. A seed or grain grown in wet tropical places and eaten as basic food in India and Asia.

e. This sweet spread is made of fruits. When made with oranges it is called “marmalade”.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

\i…\ comme sea \I\ comme fish \aI\ comme my

MANUEL k P. 105

UNIT 8 • 1 6 5

CORRIGÉ

a. shepherd’s pie b. ketchup c. sheep d. carrots e. cycling

a. potato b. tea c. scone d. rice e. jam

5. Watch a video

Voir p. 420-421 et 442-443.

3. DO’S AND DON’TS

1. Basic social codes

> Mise en œuvre possible :

k On pourra commencer la séance par une anticipation sur les codes sociaux en France.

On demandera aux élèves ce qui est considéré comme poli ou impoli chez nous. Le professeur

pourra noter au tableau comme titre : When in Rome, do as the Romans do, et proposer la liste

suivante :

– saying “tu” to your boss or a person you don’t know well

– speaking with your mouth full of food

– arriving 10 minutes late when you are invited to dinner

– holding the door open for a person following you

– refusing to shake hands when someone new is introduced to you

– speaking of politics with someone you don’t know well

– putting your hands on the table when eating lunch

Avec une classe faible, il est conseillé de guider les élèves pour qu’ils utilisent correctement

les auxiliaires modaux : You should / should not / must / mustn’t / can / can’t…

k Puis l’enseignant demandera à la classe de lire en silence le tableau et de dire ensuite ce

qui convient de faire dans chacune des quatre situations proposées. Les élèves reconnaîtront

certains codes.

Productions possibles :1. In Britain, when you are waiting for the bus you should stand in line behind the people who

have arrived first, and wait for your turn to get on. It is considered very improper to group in a

circle with your friends and jump on the bus as quickly as possible.

2. When you meet someone for the first time, it is very rude to hug him / her, kiss on the cheeks

or slap him / her on the back to show you are happy to see him / her. Quite the opposite, you are

expected to shake hands only when first introduced and say “hello”, or “good morning” at other

times.

1.

2.3.

\i…\ comme sea \I\ comme fish \aI\ comme my

beans • cream • beef chicken • chips • pudding rice • pie • Marmite

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 6 6 • UNIT 8

3. When people win a game, they should not boast and look superior. On the contrary, fair

play and modesty are well-regarded. That’s why a good player would say: “I was just lucky,

and my team was helpful.”

4. If you are walking in a corridor, keeping right is a must to avoid blocking the way of people

walking in the other direction. You would never see people walking at random and sliding from

left to right to avoid others in the opposite direction.

2. Table manners

Le professeur pourra distribuer la fiche du Workbook (p. 64-65) avec les deux tableaux

nécessaires au pair work et l’utiliser en activité de lecture.

3. Stiff upper lip

Corrigé des questions du manuel :

b. succumb to the evidence of fear • terror, anger, grief

c. “Control yourself!” • “Keep smiling!” • “Be strong!” • “Carry on with your job!” • “Hide

your feelings!”

d. rester impassible, garder son flegme

Pour une classe qui éprouverait des difficultés à lire ce texte, on peut proposer la fiche

suivante.

a. Find a part of the human face.

b. What adjectives are associated with it?

– Read the word “upper” from right to left: find the suffix and underline the root (racine).

– Given the context tick the correct translation for the word “stiff”.

● mince ● strict ● immobile ● impassible

c. What is your face like when you “keep a stiff upper lip”?

● smiling ● irritated ● expressionless ● scared

d. Pick out situations when people experience negative feelings.

e. List the attitudes linked with “keeping a stiff upper lip”.

Recapa. Explain in your own words what “keep a stiff upper lip” means / is. Use the following

words.

courageous • self-control • master • overcome (vaincre) • resist • show no signs •

reveal • strong

b. List the situations when you should “keep a stiff upper lip”. Use the following words.

confronted with • dramatic • be frightened • be cross / furious with • upset • miserable

UNIT 8 • 1 6 7

CORRIGÉ

a. lipb. upper and stiff

– suffix: -er + root: up (upper means supérieur)

– impassible

c. expressionless

d. They are frightened. They are afraid of taking risks. They feel it is dangerous.

e. They don’t show emotions. They hide the fact that they are terrified or angry or miserable

or disappointed. Their faces betray no emotions. They always keep a stiff upper lip.

➼ RECAP

Productions possibles : a. They show no signs of weakness. They do not want to reveal that they are panic-stricken,

scared to death, furious or sad. They want to master their emotions and feelings. They only

display self-control. They want to prove to themselves and others that they are courageous

in any circumstances. It’s a way of overcoming weaknesses or emotions.

b. When I’m confronted with a dramatic situation such as an accident, I should try to be

calm and dial 999 so that the person can be rescued as quickly as possible.

When I feel upset because someone has made fun of me, I should try not to show I have

been hurt because there’s no point in being cross with this person. I’d better ignore him /

her in the future.

When I feel frightened because I’m alone, I should try to keep a stiff upper lip to give the

impression that I’m not an easy prey.

Informations complémentaires (photo p. 105)This black and white photo was taken just after Neville Chamberlain decided to make war

on Germany (September 3, 1939). “Your” is underlined because this poster brings a message

of hope and determination to the nation. The victory depends on people’s resistance to

the enemy, their willpower, and fighting spirit. Cheerfulness reminds us of the expression

“keeping a stiff upper lip”. In times of war, people’s characters will be tested. In spite of

the war, the bombings, the Blitz, people should remain hopeful, optimistic, shouldn’t feel

discouraged. The directions to the nearest shelters can be seen at the bottom of the wall.

It will lead them to Victory, the word Victory is in big capital letters.

The word victory reminds us of the speech by Winston Churchill : “I have nothing to offer but

blood, toil, tears and sweat. We have before us many long months of struggle and suffering.

You ask what is our policy? I will say it is to wage war by sea, land and air, with all our might,

with all our strength that God can give us. That is our policy. You ask what is our aim? I can

answer in one word: victory. Victory at all costs! Victory in spite of all terror! Victory however

long and hard the road may be.”

MANUEL k P. 106-107

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 6 8 • UNIT 8

4. EXPERIENCE THE LAKE DISTRICT

> Mise en œuvre

Avant même que les élèves ne lisent individuellement le texte, extrait d’un guide touristique,

le professeur annoncera que celui-ci donnera lieu à un quiz.

2. Guessing game

Productions possibles : It can’t be the first photo because although we see that the mountains are not very high,

the vegetation is dry and it looks like a desert.

It can’t be the second photo because we can see high, snowy peaks in this photo and I don’t

think there is snow in the Lake District.

It must be the third photo because we can see a lake, and the mountains are not very high.

It looks peaceful and I’m sure it’s a nice place to go hiking.

3. Key information

Corrigé :

a. area = 885 square miles • highest peak = 3,210 feet (equivalent in French = 978,40 m) •

number of lakes = 16

b. – On April 15, 1802 Wordsworth and his sister saw beautiful daffodils.

– In 1951 the Lake District National Park was created.

– In 1804 Wordsworth wrote his most famous poem The Daffodils.

c. Hiking and boating (sailing) are mentioned in the text. Tourism is the main economic

activity in the region.

Prolongement possible : une fois ces informations essentielles repérées, un élève pourra

faire une prise de parole en continu et rendre compte de cet extrait de guide touristique.

4. The Daffodils

Productions possibles : a. The biggest photo, the one on the left, best matches the stanza I’ve just listened to / I’ve

been listening to.

b. The narrator is in the Lake District.

He’s probably gone for a walk in the mountains as lines 1 and 2 suggest “wandered, high o’er

vales and hills”. He’s near a lake and under trees (“beside the lake, beneath the trees”).

It must be Spring because he can see flowers and daffodils grow in April in England.

The narrator feels “lonely” at the beginning of the stanza but after discovering the flowers,

he seems soothed and delighted because the image conveyed by the daffodils is an image

of lightness and cheerfulness and life “fluttering and dancing”.

Prolongement possible : cette strophe pourra être apprise par cœur et récitée en classe.

MANUEL k P. 108

UNIT 8 • 1 6 9

5. Quiz

Pour cette activité on pourra diviser la classe en deux. Les élèves prépareront des questions

qu’ils poseront aux membres de l’autre groupe qui devront répondre livre fermé. On pourra

attribuer un, deux ou trois points selon la difficulté de la question. L’équipe qui aura le plus de

points sera déclarée gagnante. Pour ce mini défi lecture, les réponses se feront uniquement

en anglais.

Productions possibles : – Who wrote the famous poem The Daffodils?

– What is the main economic activity in the Lake District?

– Where is the Lake District located?

– Why is it called the Lake District?

– When was a national park created in the Lake District?

– Can you quote the first line of the poem?

– Can you remember another line from the poem?

– Can you remember the name of one county that is part of the park?

– How many major lakes are there?

– Can you name another famous English poet?

– Who was Wordsworth with when he saw these beautiful daffodils?

5. I DON’T UNDERSTAND!

> Mise en œuvre

Avant de faire lire le texte, le professeur pourra demander aux élèves ce que le titre du

texte et l’image leur suggèrent. Ils devraient sans difficulté évoquer les difficultés de

compréhension, de communication, notamment entre anglophones et non anglophones.

Exploitation de la photo : An executive wearing a black striped suit is answering the phone.

This man is headless, has no identity. He is a non-person, maybe because he is ruthless,

adamant, has no feelings, no compassion, is cold, aloof, and considers people are at his beck

and call. He uses people like pawns or puppets, people may be revolted by his attitude and

have difficulty communicating with such a boss.

La fiche d’aide à la compréhension du texte dans le Workbook pourra être travaillée soit à la

maison, soit en classe. Afin de récapituler ce qui a été compris, on s’appuiera sur le Action!

du Workbook, p. 66, et sur le vocabulaire du Help!

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 2, piste 8.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 65-66)

I. Understanding the text

The narrator is a young Englishman, a London marketing agent, Paul West, 27, starting

a new job in Paris.

Paul, the narrator who is British, Bernard and Jean-Marie, his French colleagues

k I = Paul West • them = the French colleagues

k them = French colleagues • my = Paul’s (name)

1.

2.

3.

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

Check your vocabulary

1 7 0 • UNIT 8

k I = Paul West • I = Paul West (as a rock star)

k we = British / English-speaking people

k “You’re very young”

k “I’m not criticizing”

k “I’m Bernard”

k “I’m responsible for the communication”

k “I’m looking forward to working with you.”

a) He thinks they are talking Hungarian (“… some people were allowed to speak Hungarian?”,

l. 10)

b) “Bernard of Budapest” (l. 11)

“I don’t speak any Central European languages” ( l. 15)

a) “Bernard of Budapest carried on in the same incomprehensible vein for a couple of

minutes...” (l. 11)

b) amazed • shocked • contemptuous • puzzled

Comment se fait-il ? • Attends une seconde !

ironic • critical: “How come some people were allowed to speak Hungarian?” (l. 9) +

“started to enunciate something which, to judge by the look of acute constipation on his

face, was of great importance.” (l. 12) + “It’s English, Jim, but not as we know it.” (l. 16)

II. Action!

2. ROLE PLAY

Productions possibles : Hello, I just thought I could give you a quick call to tell you about

the most hilarious meeting I’ve just had with my collègues français Bernard, Jean-Marie and

the others. Yes, I’m fine, I just wonder how we are going to work together. You see they all

think they can speak English well, but I thought they were speaking Hungarian, no kidding!

I am not making fun of them, well, not really. Wait until they ask me to speak French. They

were so embarrassed when they realized I could not understand them. It was pathetic...

yes, they had difficulty introducing themselves. Everybody was so ill-at-ease. They really

should attend English lectures, otherwise we won’t be able to work together. I hope the

company will pay for that!

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique étudié p. 108 grâce

à l’exercice suivant (fiche téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

Traduisez les phrases suivantes. Tous les mots en gras sont dans le Help!, p. 108.Paul West est intrigué par ses collègues français. Il se demande s’ils parlent une langue

d’Europe centrale.

Lors de la réunion il est abasourdi.Il se moque de leur épouvantable prononciation.

Il se moque d’eux, les trouve nuls.

Ils ont beaucoup de mal à parler anglais.

Ils sont pris de panique, mal à l’aise, très embarrassés.

Es-tu bon en langues ?

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.3.4.5.6.7.

MANUEL k P. 109-111

UNIT 8 • 1 7 1

CORRIGÉ

Paul West is puzzled by his French colleagues. He’s wondering if they are speaking a Central

European language.

During the meeting he is astounded.

He makes fun of / laughs at their awful / dreadful pronunciation.

He makes fun of / laughs at them and find them pathetic.

They have difficulty speaking English.

Thet are panic-stricken, ill-at-ease, very embarrassed.

Are you good at languages?

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

th se prononce comme dans that \D\ quand il est en début de mot (+ dans les mots

grammaticaux) ou quand il est au milieu d’un mot (sauf dans les mots d’origine grecque),

et il se prononce comme dans thanks \T\ en fin de mot.

N.B. : les tongue twisters proposés dans l’exercice 2 pourront servir de warm up, de mise

en bouche en début de cours. La pratique des tongue twisters facilite en effet la prise de

parole en continu.

> La détermination du nom : a, the, « l’article zéro » = Ø

a. Le premier groupe souligné (tea) renvoie à une généralité et à un indénombrable. Le

deuxième groupe (a national drink) renvoie à un élément parmi d’autres et à un dénombrable.

b. Le groupe souligné (Chips with vinegar) renvoie à un ensemble et à un dénombrable.

c. Le groupe souligné (a bridge) renvoie à un élément parmi d’autres et à un dénombrable.

On emploie a / an pour désigner un élément parmi d’autres.

Pour parler de quelque chose « en général », on emploie l’article zéro (Ø) si le nom est un

dénombrable au pluriel, ou si le nom est un indénombrable au singulier.

On emploie a devant les consonnes, sauf « h » non prononcé comme dans hour. (Autres

mots commençant par un h non prononcé : heir, honour, honest et leurs composés.)

Devant unique, on utilise l’article indéfini a, parce que, dans sa forme orale, unique commence

par une consonne (\j\).Explication plus détaillée : le mot unique se transcrit \ju…"nIk\. Même si \j\ ressemble au son

« i », c’est une consonne, que l’on trouve également au début du mot yes, ou, en français,

au début du mot yeux ou encore dans le mot pied (prononciation différente de celle de

pillé). On a également cette dualité « consonne / voyelle » avec les sons proches du « ou » :

consonne dans won \wØn\ et dans le mot français oui (\wi\), voyelle dans good \gÁd\ et

dans le mot français oubli \Ábli\.On emploie an devant les autres mots commençant par une voyelle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

UNIT

8 TRUE BRITS

1 7 2 • UNIT 8

Remarque générale sur le choix entre a et an, et sur le choix entre \Di…\ et \DE\ pour the : ce qui

détermine ce choix, c’est la prononciation (la forme orale), et non la forme écrite ; il arrive qu’un

mot commence dans sa forme écrite par une voyelle mais dans sa forme orale par une consonne

(exemples : unique, one k a unique situation, a one-eyed man), et inversement (hour \aÁEr\).

Sherlock Holmes est détective.

À la différence du français, on emploie l’article indéfini (a / an) lorsqu’on indique la catégorie

à laquelle appartient quelque chose ou quelqu’un, donc devant les noms de métier.

a. Pour les premier et deuxième groupes de mots soulignés (the name + the bell), on emploie

the, car ces mots sont définis par ce qui suit. Pour le troisième groupe de mots soulignés (the

Houses of Parliament), on emploie the, car le mot fait référence à un élément connu de tous.

b. Pour le premier groupe souligné (the chime), on emploie the, car le mot est défini par ce

qui suit. Pour le deuxième groupe de mots soulignés (the sound), on emploie the, car le mot

est défini par le contexte. Pour le troisième groupe de mots soulignés (the New Year), on

emploie the, car le mot fait référence à un élément connu de tous.

c. Pour le premier groupe de mots soulignés (the clock), on emploie the, car le mot est défini par

le contexte. Idem pour le deuxième groupe de mots soulignés (the time).

d. Pour le groupe de mots the Millenium Bridge, on emploie the, car le mot fait référence à

un élément particulier et bien défini qui est connu de tous.

Les noms de pays au singulier s’emploient sans article. Les noms de pays au pluriel sont

précédés de l’article défini the.

> Practice

a. Ø Pubs • Ø People • Ø friends • Ø Pub food • Ø restaurant food • the bar • Ø Beer •

a popular drink

b. The people • a festival

c. an island • the sea

d. Ø milk • Ø cream • Ø butter • Ø cheese • Ø apples • Ø cider • a popular drink

Ø Miniskirts • the British designer • Ø Miniskirts • Ø controversy • Ø car crashes •

the symbol • Ø London • the pop culture capital • the world

Ø Scotland’s capital • The heart of Edinburgh • the castle • the kings of Ø Scotland •

Ø centuries • a busy cultural life • an International festival • Ø Musicians • Ø actors •

Ø singers • the world • Ø Australia • Ø Canada • Ø Japan • the United States •

the Netherlands • the city • the evening • the opera house • the theatres • the concert

halls • the cafés • the pubs • Ø small groups • Ø poetry

a. Brick Lane is a famous street in Great Britain. Immigrants coming from Bangladesh and

India settled there.

b. Monica Ali is a novelist, she wrote a novel about that area.

c. Londoners go to Brick Lane to eat a curry / have a curry.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 112-113

UNIT 8 • 1 7 3

YOUR TASK

> Mise en œuvre

k On lira en classe la p. 112 et on expliquera la démarche à suivre aux élèves.

L’entraînement sur l’icône du Globe p. 112 peut se faire au lycée en salle informatique

ou multimédia (en binômes par exemple) afin de s’assurer que les élèves ont bien compris

ce qui leur est demandé.

S’il n’y a aucun moyen informatique au lycée, les élèves devront faire cette première étape

au CDI ou chez eux. On vérifiera que les consignes ont été bien comprises.

k Les élèves pourront s’entraîner chez eux grâce au site compagnon et évaluer leur

compréhension orale en écoutant le fichier MP3 (U8–Dialogue: A street survey).

k On pourra renforcer les opérations mentales mobilisées en compréhension orale en

travaillant la double page « Comprendre un document oral », p.138-139.

k Une fois le choix du symbole national fait, les élèves prépareront chez eux ou au CDI

leur prestation orale en s’appuyant sur les rubriques du tableau de la p. 112.

k On organisera ensuite une séance d’évaluation de la tâche.

– Si l’on dispose d’un labo, les élèves pourront s’enregistrer et le professeur pourra

récupérer tous les fichiers. Il choisira ceux qui lui semblent les plus intéressants pour les

faire évaluer par la classe, qui devra commenter les différentes prestations.

– Dans le cadre de la classe, plusieurs élèves présenteront leur travail. Le reste de la classe

devra écouter, remplir la fiche ci-dessous pour chaque prestation, commenter et enfin

évaluer chaque prestation.

La prise de notes pourra se faire à l’aide de la grille proposée dans le manuel, puis être projetée,

corrigée et complétée par la classe entière. Ces notes pourront servir de trace écrite.

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche finale : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante.

Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de

points attribué à chaque critère.

Nom : Classe :

Respect du temps de parole demandé (deux minutes) 0 1 2 3 4

Exposé audible 0 1

Qualité de la prononciation 0 1 2 3 4

Contenu clair, structuré, bien documenté 0 1 2 3 4 5

Utilisation des gap fillers 0 1 2

Réactions aux questions des camarades 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points / 20

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 7 4 • UNIT 9

Destination LiverpoolNous avons choisi Liverpool car cette ville est rarement traitée dans les manuels d’anglais.

Or, son patrimoine est extrêmement riche et permet d’aborder différents aspects de l’histoire

et de la culture britanniques : la musique des Beatles, le racisme dans les stades de football,

ou encore le commerce triangulaire des esclaves sur lequel la richesse de Liverpool fut

fondée au XVIIIe siècle.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à la compréhension orale, voir p. 149.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Évaluation de la compréhension orale

à partir d’un podcast de musée

Mémoire • Échanges • Lien social •

Création

k lieux publics dans une ville, directions,

signalétique routière, monuments (p. 114-

115)

k musique, célébrité (p. 116)

k racisme, comportement dans un stade

(p. 117)

k transport maritime, commerce, marchandises (p. 118-119)k esclavage, contrainte (p. 120)

k obligation / interdiction / absence

d’obligation (p. 122)

k capacité / permission (p. 122)

k réalisation des voyelles -o-, -oo- et -i- (p. 121)k suffixe contraignant -ous (p. 121)k s’appuyer sur les mots porteurs pour

comprendre un message oral (p. 115 à 119)

k exprimer la cause, la conséquence, le but

k dire ce qu’on n’aime pas

k faire des reproches

k exprimer son admiration

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

UNIT 9 • 1 7 5

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Lire et prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Manuel

k un dialogue (p. 115, 116 et 119)k un témoignage (p. 115 et 117)k site compagnon, U9–Dialogue: A slave ship: The Enterprise k Your task (p. 124-125)

Dear White Fella, publicité (p. 117)

k Liverpool, Capital of Culture (p. 115)

k The Fab Four, Liverpool et les Beatles (p. 116)k I wanna see a game, poème (p. 117)

k Liverpool and the Slave Trade, histoire du commerce transatlantique (p. 118-119)

The Middle Passage, illustrations sur

l’esclavage (p. 120)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un texte

(p. 115 à 119)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un document

sonore (p. 115 à 119)

k participer à un jeu de rôles (p. 116 et 117)

k lire un poème à haute voix (p. 117)

k un script pour un spot radiophonique

(p. 117)

k un texte à partir d’images (p. 120)

Workbook

XX

XX

X

Fichesphotocopiables

XX

X

X

X

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 7 6 • UNIT 9

TUNE IN!

1. The capital of the North

Vérifier l’emplacement géographique de Liverpool sur la carte du manuel permettra de

réactiver des notions (the United Kingdom, Ø Great Britain, Ø England) ainsi que des

localisations (in the north…).

On pourra également demander aux élèves ce qu’ils connaissent de Liverpool (football club…).

2. Understanding the text

N. B. : les élèves utiliseront la photographie pour deviner le sens de harbour dans la question c.

Corrigé

a. remarkable • modern • cosmopolitan • forward-thinking

b. – 1208: the birth of the city

– its growth to become one of the world’s famous port cities / the second city of the Empire

– after WW1: from its economic downturn to its current renaissance

– 2008: a new chapter, the European Capital of Culture for a year

c. port • maritime • waterfront

d. Cette phase de récapitulation pourra donner lieu à une prise de parole en continu.

e. Cette phase orale pourra être suivie d’une production écrite individuelle ou en binômes, qui

pourra être projetée (rétroprojecteur ou vidéoprojecteur), corrigée et enrichie collectivement.

Productions possibles : Liverpool was selected to be Capital of Culture 2008 because

this city, located in the north of England, is a major harbour on the Irish Sea and has a rich

historical heritage. It is famous for sports, music, the arts and its maritime life. It was founded

in the 13th century, and has developed economically ever since. Today the city is a favourite

destination and attracts thousands of tourists every year.

3. At the tourist information desk

> Mise en œuvre :

a. On s’assurera que l’ensemble de la classe a repéré le Tourist Information Centre (en bas à

gauche du plan, à côté du numéro 08). Le professeur ou un élève indiquera son emplacement

au reste de la classe. On demandera ensuite d’utiliser la troisième colonne du Help!

k Première variante : avec la classe entière, divisée en deux. Le premier groupe donne

les bonnes directions à l’autre moitié qui suit sur le livre et peut faire répéter et / ou

demander des précisions.

k Deuxième variante : ce travail se fera par binômes. À tour de rôle, un élève indique

l’itinéraire à emprunter tandis que son camarade suit sur son livre jusqu’à parvenir au bon

endroit. On pourra vérifier en faisant passer 4 groupes.

b. Le professeur fera écouter l’enregistrement plusieurs fois en prenant soin de faire les pauses

nécessaires. Sur leur Workbook, les élèves traceront le chemin suivi par les deux touristes.

À noter que le plan de Liverpool est reproduit sur le transparent n° 8, ce qui permet une

correction collective des deux activités.

MANUEL k P. 114-115

UNIT 9 • 1 7 7

> Script de l’enregistrement

Clerck: Good morning Sir, what can I do for you?

Tourist 1: Hi! I’m afraid I’ve got lost. I’d like to go to The Cavern Club but I’m not sure about

the way.

Clerck: Alright, we’re here: Maritime Museum and you want to go there: The Cavern Club.

You could walk there, it’s not very far.

Tourist 1: Sure!

Clerck: Actually, if you’re a Beatles fan, you’re not very far from The Beatles Story, it’s really

worth visiting.

Tourist 1: Oh, I’ve been there already.

Tourist 2: Sorry to interrupt, I heard you mention The Beatles Story, am I far from there?

Clerck: Not at all, make a right immediately after leaving the Desk, walk straight ahead and

turn right again into Gower Street.

Tourist 2: Thanks very much.

Clerck: Now, back to you: To go to The Cavern Club, you’ll have to take Hartley Quay, turn

left, then turn right into James Street, that leads to Lord Street, then turn left into North

John Street and on your right is Matthew Street.

Tourist 1: Thank you very much!

Tourist 2: Excuse me. I was thinking about going to St. George’s Hall after The Beatles

Story.

Clerck: Oh, that’s quite a distance! You could take the Merseyrail or a taxi.

Tourist 2: Oh, no, I’d rather walk.

Clerck: Once you are at The Beatles Story, you will head East, leave Gower St, cross

Wapping Avenue, take Paradise Street on your left, then turn right into Hanover Street. You

could stop at the Neptune Theatre on your way. It is worth the detour.

Tourist 2: Really? OK, I could do that.

Clerck: Then keep going down Ranelagh Street, turn left in Lime Street and continue along

the street. There you are: on your right, you’ll have the Empire Theatre and the Odeon Cinema

and on your left St. George’s Hall.

Tourist 2: This is very helpful, thanks a lot! Goodbye!

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 7 8 • UNIT 9

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 67)

4. A testimony

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1I am an exiled Liverpudlian. I left the city in 1986, aged eighteen, and have returned only

infrequently ever since. The Liverpool I grew up in was harsh, with limited opportunities

and unemployment was very high. The place was untidy and litter was commonplace.

I was fortunate enough to gain a place at university, and this proved to be my escape route.

If I hadn’t escaped, I would probably have been trapped there for life – as indeed has

happened to my own parents and I am sure to many of my peers.

➼ Part 2In the early days after leaving, I remember my visits were particularly depressing, the inbound

train passing through suburbs containing row upon row of identical, two-up, two-down

terraced houses. My own grandparents lived in such a house, and I remember the toilet was

outside until the house was modernised in 1982. Their situation was by no means unique.

I made the same train journey up there in mid-2008, and saw the same streets and the same

houses, and the same litter. By all appearances, time had stood still.

Tourist 1 Tourist 2

UNIT 9 • 1 7 9

➼ Part 3But time hasn’t stood still. Liverpool has long been notorious for its violence. On my last

visit I picked up the local paper and read of four fatal shooting incidents on the first three

pages! Even at this time, there is an ongoing court case of an eighteen-year-old accused

of shooting dead an eleven-year-old boy. These events contribute significantly to how many

people perceive Liverpool, and certainly I would be very unlikely to volunteer my place of

birth in a conversation. I am also relieved that my accent has become much reduced in the

years since I left.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 68-69)

➼ PART 1

exiled • Liverpudlian • 1986 • eighteen • returned • infrequently

limited • unemployment • untidy • litter • fortunate • place • university • escape

➼ PART 2

depressing

b) row upon row • identical • two-up • two-down • same

➼ PART 3

4: shooting incidents • 3: first pages • 18: shooting • 11: dead

The example of an 18-year-old accused of shooting dead an 11-year-old contributes

to giving Liverpool a negative / tarnished image.

I am relieved that my accent has become much reduced in the years since I left.

> ACTION!Peter left Liverpool in 1986 when he had a place in university / went to university. His visits were infrequent because he still saw litter and unemployment everywhere.

Today in the newspapers, you can read about shooting incidents that give a tarnished image of Liverpool. Peter feels relieved he has got rid of his accent, because he felt ashamed of his hometown.

Approfondissement possible : Peter gives a very negative vision of Liverpool, he portrays a

grim reality. He gives a gloomy, unflattering vision of Liverpool. This town was notorious for

its slums in the nineteenth and first half of the twentieth centuries. Going to university was

a way out of poverty; he used to live in a poor community. People used to live in dilapidated,

shabby, squalid houses. They lived in cramped conditions. That’s why he longed to flee a

world of misery and want.

1.

2.3.

4.5.6.

7.8.

9.

1.2.3.

4.

Economic situation Living conditions Turning point in Peter’s life

limited • unemployment untidy • litter fortunate • place • university • escape

Whose? Characteristics Date of renovation

his grandparents’ house no indoor toilet • modernised 1982

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 8 0 • UNIT 9

1. THE FAB FOUR

1. Get ready

a. On insistera sur le fait que l’on recherche des prénoms et on donnera le temps nécessaire

aux élèves pour relever les quatre prénoms des Beatles qui se trouvent dans le texte 2,

ligne 7 (John, Paul, George and Ringo).

b. Productions possibles : I can see four men painted on a bus, their faces more precisely.

They look young and have 60s hairstyles. They must be the Beatles: John, Paul, George and

Ringo.Liverpool is their native town. The Beatles’ fans are making a pilgrimage to Liverpool

to see the musicians’ birthplace. This bus must be taking them to Penny Lane, the Cavern…

2. Past and present

> Mise en œuvre possible :

a. Diviser la classe en deux, attribuer à chaque groupe un texte et la fiche correspondante

dans le Workbook (p. 69 à 71). En cas de classe hétérogène, confier le premier texte aux

élèves plus fragiles.

b. On s’aidera de la fiche Action! du Workbook et on demandera aux élèves de trouver des

titres correspondant aux deux textes en s’appuyant sur le vocabulaire vu.

Titres possibles :

Text 1: An Amazing Concert / An Extraordinary Event!

Text 2: The Myth Remains / Success over the Years

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 69-71)

➼ PART 1

I: the narrator • a Beatles’ fan • a witness of the scene

that: such an atmosphere • such reactions • such a show

The public was waiting for the Beatles.

“The four lads” refer to the group.

k place: the theatre (l. 8) k city: Britain’s second city (l. 13)

k balcon: balcony (l. 8) k fauteuils d’orchestre: stalls (l. 7)

k scène: stage (l. 4) k rangées: rows (l. 8)

terrific (l. 2) • on and on (l. 2) • screams (l. 3) • frantic (l. 3)

secouristes: First Aid men (l. 6)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.6.7.

MANUEL k P. 116

Who is here to control the public? Number of victims Action

First Aid men (l. 6) • police officers (l. 6) “Many female fans fainted,

and up to thirty were

evacuated” (l. 9)

patrolled (l. 7)

UNIT 9 • 1 8 1

amazing • extraordinary • incredible • eventful • unusual

they were carried away by their emotions

➼ PART 2

k 1961: first year when the Beatles played in the Cavern Club k 1963: last year when

they played in the Cavern k 275: number of gigs played by the Beatles in the Cavern

k 40: forty years later

k Name of the club: the Cavern k Type of equipment: a sound system k Type of music: the “Mersey beat” / pop music

k stardom: suffix = -dom + root = star = célébrité

k unparalleled: prefix = un- + suffix = -ed + root = parallel = inégalé / sans égal

Mathew Street (l. 12) • Abbey Rd Oyster Bar (l. 15) • Abbey Rd shop (l. 15) • Lucy in the

Sky with Diamonds café (l. 16) • Lennon bar (l. 17)

“Abbey Road” and “Lucy in the Sky with Diamonds” must be / are two of their songs.

The Cavern Club has been restored as it was before.

> ACTION!

➼ PART 1

This concert was crazy and amazing!It provoked extreme and enthusiastic reactions among the fans.

For example some women were hysterical, shouted and fainted.

➼ PART 2

The Beatles’ success started in 1961 when they were spotted in the Cavern Club.

Their influence was / marked the development of the Mersey beat and they have remained popular in Liverpool. Their myth has persisted and a lot of shops make money from their names.

3. Top of the Pops

a. L’entraînement à la compréhension orale pourra être précédé d’une recherche sur les Beatles :

www.thebeatles.com/core/home/

La classe sera divisée en groupes et chaque groupe se verra confié un point de recherche

précis :

– Formation of the band / careers

– New band: hairstyles / looks

– Different periods

Prolongement possible : on pourra, si on le désire, faire lire l’article intitulé On this day

(July 1964) Beatlemania arrives in the US, disponible sur le site de BBC News (www.news.

bbc.co.uk).

8.

9.10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.16.

Type of reaction Consequences

fainted (l. 9) • shouting their love (l. 10) were evacuated (l. 9)

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 8 2 • UNIT 9

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Journalist: Welcome to Music Fans! Today in the studio I have with me Julie Brown who has

just written a book on the Beatles. Why this passion for the Beatles?

Julie Brown: I think they changed the world for generations to come.

Journalist: How did everything begin?

Julie Brown: It all began in March 1957 in Liverpool. John Lennon was attending Quarry

Bank Grammar School in Liverpool. There he formed his own band. Lennon heard Paul

McCartney play the guitar in July 1957, and decided to add him to the group. Eight months

later, McCartney suggested a new member...

Journalist: George Harrisson?

Julie Brown: Exactly! He had made friends with Harrison on the morning bus ride to the

Liverpool Institute. When George Harrison joined the band in 1958 he was only 14. He was

a brilliant guitarist. They finally became The Beatles, a catchy name.

➼ Part 2Journalist: Did they immediately become stars?

Julie Brown: No, they first played in and around Liverpool. Then they started out in

Hamburg, in Germany, and became true showmen. In February 1961, they made their first

appearance at The Cavern Club in Liverpool and from 1961 to 1962, the Beatles made 292

appearances at the club!

➼ Part 3Journalist: Then Brian Epstein helped them, didn’t he?

Julie Brown: You’re right. Brian Epstein was a record store owner in Liverpool. He heard about

them and went to watch them perform one night. He was immediately enthusiastic. He loved

their energy. He then became their manager. The only member of the band he didn’t like was

their drummer. Epstein asked Ringo Starr to replace him and completed the band.

➼ Part 4Journalist: What explains their success?

Julie Brown: Their new look was also a big hit: Their suits and hairstyle were unusual, the

Beatles were unconventional. Besides, they were charming, humorous and creative. They

hopped, sang and played and people loved it! Although their songs were simple, the public

found them touching and the tunes were very catchy. Beatlemania spread all over the world.

➼ Part 5Journalist: Did they experience tensions?

Julie Brown: Yes, indeed. Tensions appeared gradually. Finally, the growing tensions put an

end to the band. Their end officially came on December 29th 1970.

Journalist: What happened afterwards?

Julie Brown: The four men embarked on solo careers. John became famous for his political

activism, fought for peace between nations. Later, in December 1980, he was murdered in

Manhattan. Paul enjoyed a successful career and continues to produce albums.

Journalist: Well, thank you very much Julie, we feel we know more about the Beatles now!

UNIT 9 • 1 8 3

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 71-73)

➼ PART 1

The interviewee is a Beatles’ specialist. Keywords: written a book.

– March 1957 – July 1957 – 1958

– John – Paul – George Harrison

guitar

John Lennon formed the band.

John heard him play the guitar and added him to the band.

Paul McCartney suggested a new recruit.

He asked Harrison to join the group.

John (Lennon) met Paul (McCartney) at school.

McCartney had made friends with Harrison on the morning bus ride to the Liverpool Institute.

They all met when they were at school and, after John founded his band, he added Paul and

then Harrison. They became the Beatles.

➼ PART 2

– Liverpool – Hamburg, Germany – Cavern Club

– February 1961 – 1962

“292” corresponds to the number of their appearances at the Cavern Club. They started playing in Hamburg but made their first appearance at the Cavern Club in Liverpool.

➼ PART 3

Keywords in the journalist’s question: Brian Epstein • helped • them

record • owner • watch • enthusiastic • energy • manager • drummer • replace

Brian Epstein was a record store owner and was immediately impressed by the Beatles.

He was struck by their energy and charisma.

Ringo Starr became the drummer of the band.

The Beatles were very successful.

➼ PART 4

k the Beatles’ appearance: new look • unusual • suits and hairstyle

k their personality: unconventional • charming • humorous • creative

– hopped – sang – played

simple, touching, catchy songs

The Beatlemania was the success they had with the audience who loved their new look,

their personalities and songs.

➼ PART 5

\E"fISEli\ officially • \E"pIEr\ appear • \"A…ftEwEdz\ afterwards

1.2.3.4.5.

6.

7.

8.9.10.11.

12.13.14.

15.

16.17.18.

19.20.

End of the group Reasons John PaulDecember 29th 1970 tensions – famous for political activism

– fought for peace

– murdered in Manhattan

– successful career

– continues to

produce albums

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 8 4 • UNIT 9

Tensions appeared and put an end to the band in 1970. Then, they started solo careers but

John was murdered after fighting for peace and only Paul continues to produce albums.

b. Le professeur renverra les élèves à la rubrique Action! au bas de la p. 73 du Workbook

et reverra avec eux la démarche à suivre pour réussir leur enregistrement.

k On insistera sur la nécessité de ne préparer que des notes (et non pas des phrases

complètes pour ne pas avoir la tentation de lire pendant l’enregistrement) et d’adopter

un ton vivant et enthousiaste.

k L’enregistrement se fera en salle multimédia ou à la maison (sur clé USB).

k Les élèves pourront endosser un rôle. On leur proposera différentes possibilités en

leur demandant de se présenter au début de leur enregistrement :

– a singer who discovered the Beatles a long time ago and can speak of their musical

influence

– a fan who has liked their music for a long time

– a teenager who found his parents’ records and discovered the Beatles

– someone who went to Liverpool, visited the Beatles’ museum and knows about their career

k Les élèves devront faire toutes les révisions nécessaires pour développer leur expression,

en revoyant notamment leurs notes sur les deux textes de Past and present.

k Le professeur pourra revoir avec eux les grands points à inclure dans leur présentation

en reprenant les questions du manuel :

– Beginning of their career (Cavern Club) and further development (Brian Epstein)

– Success

– Fans’ reactions during concerts

– Style and influence

– End of the “story” / separation

– The singers’ lives afterwards

k Leur conclusion devra inclure leur opinion en tant que fan en respectant la nature de leur

rôle.

Critères d’évaluation (proposition de barème)

Prolongement possible : une chanson des Beatles pourra être étudiée (Help, Strawberry

Field, Eleanor Rigby…).

21.

Exposé structuré, cohérent 0 1 2 3

Ton convaincant et enthousiaste / expression du jugement 0 1 2 3

Réutilisation des acquis du cours 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Prononciation 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Total : / 20

UNIT 9 • 1 8 5

2. SHOW RACISM THE RED CARD

1. Listen to a football fan

> Mise en œuvre

k En anticipation à l’écoute, on peut aussi utiliser la photo en bas de page, ce qui permettra

d’introduire le lexique nécessaire à l’étude du poème et à la compréhension orale. Les élèves

ne manqueront pas de faire le lien entre red card et le carton rouge que brandit l’arbitre pour

exclure un joueur ayant commis une faute grave.

Productions possibles : These football fans are holding red cards that say “Show Racism the

Red Card”. In other words, racism is forbidden, racial hatred and prejudices cannot be tolerated.

These football fans are denouncing racism, intolerance, racial abuse, monkey chants, racial jeers

in the stadium. They can’t stand spectators hurling abuse at players. They want to fight against

bigotry, jingoism (extreme chauvinism) and exclusion. They are committed to promoting tolerance.

k On pourra demander aux élèves s’ils connaissent les mouvements Show Racism the Red

Card ou Kick Racism out of Football. On pourra trouver des informations complémentaires

sur les sites : www.theredcard.org, www.srtrc.org et www.liverpoolfc.org.

k À l’aide de la fiche d’entraînement du Workbook les élèves repéreront les indices clés

et pourront comprendre le témoignage de ce supporter.

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Journalist: Good evening, Mr Winterbottom you’re on the air!

Fan: Good evening, I’m calling because I totally agree with Liverpool Football Club’s policy

against racism in football. I love football but I was so shocked in 2000, when Emile Heskey

suffered a torrent of racist abuse, monkey noises and spitting from a section of Yugoslavia

supporters while playing for England in Barcelona; and it does happen again and again…

➼ Part 2Journalist: What sort of racist acts have you personally witnessed?

Fan: Well you know, I’ve seen those jerks, usually in groups, who think players are inferior

because they are a different colour, or from another country or part of the world; they feel

they are safe and all-powerful; they keep on threatening, abusing or insulting or making

gestures. No need to tell you the words, of course.

➼ Part 3Journalist: I understand that racism is against the law, so surely the police and stewards

can take action…

Fan: That’s right, and they do. But it’s not enough! Fans and people in the stadium must feel

concerned and watch out as well. Do you remember this player, John Barnes? He was a target

for racist fans when he first joined Liverpool; he has called for all fans – particularly white

fans – to make a stand if they hear racist abuse from supporters whether they’re watching

Liverpool home or away. That’s what I mean.

➼ Part 4Journalist: And what should happen to anyone found guilty of racist behaviour at the match?

Fan: They should be ejected from the ground, arrested or even have their season ticket

taken off them for life. That sounds pretty radical, but it’s the only way!

MANUEL k P. 117

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 8 6 • UNIT 9

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 74-75)

2. The main topic is racism.

condemns • racism • abuse • cause • offence • report • telephone • incident • place

k abuse k offence k steward

– you = people going to matches – we = Liverpool Football Club

report (any act of racial abuse or behaviour) to the nearest steward or telephone free on

the Anti-Racism Incident Line

They condemn racism and ask supporters for help.

➼ PART 1

2 voices: supporter and journalist

agree

shocked • abuse • monkey • noises • spitting • Barcelona • England

Racist acts: abuse • noises • spitting Countries: Spain • England

He was a victim of racist abuse.

➼ PART 2

k inferior k threaten k abuse k gesture

k being different: colour k verbal violence: abusing, insulting

“they are safe and all-powerful”

➼ PART 3

Barnes started playing for Liverpool and was abused. Some fans were racist, but Barnes

kept his temper. He never reacted publicly to the taunts but proved his worth with talent

and dignity. Barnes was one of the first Blacks to play for the English national team. He

broke the colour barrier quietly.

Incident: suffered from racist abuse Reactions: called for white fans to stand against racism

➼ PART 4

k ejected k ground

be expelled from the stadium • be put in prison • be banned from stadiums for ever

Approfondissement possible : The supporter is calling the radio station to tell people he

sides with / he supports Liverpool Football Club’s stand against racism. He has witnessed

racist acts in and around the stadium and feels people should fight against discrimination

and help the stewards. He recalls how shocked he was in 2000 when a player E. Herskey

was a victim of prejudice. Never ever should this happen again. Indeed, racist supporters

should be forbidden from either spitting, throwing abuse or making rude gestures because a

player doesn’t match their ideal physical appearance or ethnic origin. He voices his opinion

that such people are a disgrace to sport and football. Radical measures should be taken,

such as expelling the guilty ones from the stadium and taking their season tickets off them

for ever, if need be. Yet legal action is not enough as long as supporters themselves don’t

stand by the authorities and make racists feel like outsiders. Indeed, everybody should try

and curb racist extremists by having a positive attitude and reporting unlawful behaviour.

I. 3.

4.5.6.

7.

8.9.10.11.12.

13.

14.15.

16.

17.

18.19.

UNIT 9 • 1 8 7

2. Understanding the poem

> Mise en œuvre : le professeur pourra utiliser la fiche du Workbook pour guider les élèves.

Puis lors du récapitulatif il demandera de répondre aux cinq questions du livre. À noter que le

texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 2, piste 15.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 76)

k I = the poet, a football supporter k We = supporters

I want to see

– 20,000: number of fans in a stadium – 1: a single comment – 90: minutes before violence

starts

k crowd k think

racist • hassle • harm • monkey chanting

Violence and racism in football are useless and stupid. They spoil the game.

Productions possibles : a. I can see it’s a poem because the end of the lines rhyme / have the same sound: like “basis”

and “racist” or “understood” and “good”. The lines all start with capital letters, even in the

middle of a sentence. It’s free verse.

b. I think “wanna” is colloquial; it corresponds to “I want to”. Just the same, “cos” is familiar for

“because”. I think “not one comment that’s said is racist” would be “there is not any comment

which is said to be racist” in standard English.

c. The target of the poem are young football fans. The author himself is certainly a football fan.

He wants the young supporters to share his views on “good games”. He wants to denounce

violence and racism, to promote tolerance, to make people aware of an acute problem, a

widespread phenomenon. He dreams of a better world and wants people to evolve and get rid of

their prejudice.

d. That is certainly the reason why he uses substandard English, to make himself understood,

to speak the same language as young football fans. Indeed youngsters often use those

familiar expressions in songs as well.

e. A “good game” is a football match devoid of any violence or aggression. The poet thinks a

match is a kind of friendly or brotherly meeting where thousands of people share in the positive

mood of the physical contest. Racism, violence, discrimination, prejudice, insults, foul language

or abuse are out of place in the arena. Therefore a “good game” is 90 minutes of sheer

pleasure, fun and support for a town, a city or a country’s team.

3. Invent a radio spot

> Mise en œuvre :

k Cette tâche intermédiaire peut être préparée à la maison ou en classe. On demandera

aux élèves de préparer un script d’émission de radio, c’est-à-dire une prise de parole en

continu sous forme de mots clés, par exemple.

k Le vocabulaire donné dans le Help! en bas de page devra être réutilisé.

k Le professeur pourra se servir du Action! du Workbook (p. 76) qui suggère les points à

inclure dans la prestation.

1.2.3.

4.5.6.

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 8 8 • UNIT 9

Critères d’évaluation (proposition de barème)

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 76)

A football fan must go by the rules and accept football as a game between well-meaning

groups. He or she must behave as a supporter, not a street fighter.

During a match Liverpool vs OM, a group of supporters from the west stand stood up and

started abusing some players because they disagreed with...

Liverpool Football Club policy on racism is very clear and simple: No excuse for racism and

violence which are forbidden and strongly punished.

Supporters must go by the rules / learn tolerance / behave; they can’t throw abuse / insult other fans or players.Stewards are allowed to arrest people / expel hooligans / take season tickets off supporters / call the police in.The police are there to make supporters respect the rules / to make them abide by the law.Possible sanctions are: being expelled from the stadium / being fined / having their season

ticket taken away / being arrested.

– No racist in our midst! – Friendly fans and football’s fun!

– Free football from fanatic foes! – Cheer and clap, good football’s back!

– I wanna see a game I won’t be ashamed of! – Respect’s out! Watch out!

– Racists give way, fair play today! – It’s cool to go by the rule!

4. Watch a video

Voir p. 421-422 et 444-446.

Le vocabulaire de cette page pourra être fixé à l’aide de la fiche suivante (téléchargeable

sur le site compagnon).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Exposé clair et audible 0 1 2 3

Spot intéressant, convaincant et original 0 1 2 3

Richesse de l’articulation du discours / Richesse de la langue et des structures

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Prononciation 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Total : / 20

Check your vocabulary

UNIT 9 • 1 8 9

Retrouvez les synonymes de ces mots.a. cheer = c. insult (verb) = e. colloquial =

b. be careful = d. impolite = f. despise =

Complétez le tableau avec des mots de la même famille ; utilisez un dictionnaire si besoin.

Trouvez les mots correspondant à ces définitions.

a. the action of greeting a friend and often inviting him / her to your house /

home =

b. a big group of people gathered =

c. in football it lasts 90 minutes, but in rugby it is only 80 minutes =

d. a piece of paper you have to show the steward when entering the stadium =

e. a person who likes a team and encourages it in the stadium =

CORRIGÉ

a. encourage b. watch out c. abuse d. rude e. familiar f. show contempt for

a. welcome b. crowd c. match / game d. ticket e. supporter

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Verbes Noms Adjectifsprotect protection protective

threaten

respectful

hatred

support

convinced

pride

Verbes Noms Adjectifsthreaten threat threateningrespect respect respectful

hate hatred hatefulsupport support / supporter supportive

convince conviction convinced

pride pride proud

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 9 0 • UNIT 9

3. LIVERPOOL AND THE SLAVE TRADE

L’objectif culturel de cette double page est de comprendre comment fonctionnait le

commerce triangulaire, quelles étaient les étapes du voyage et d’où venaient les profits

qu’il engendrait.

1. The Transatlantic Slave Trade

> Mise en œuvre :

k Exploitation de la carte : la carte p. 118 pourra servir de sensibilisation au thème du texte

et permettra de visualiser les déplacements des navires du commerce transatlantique. Avec une

classe faible il faudra peut-être amener les noms de lieux comme western Africa, the Caribbeans,

the West Indies… Ce sera l’occasion de revoir l’absence de détermination devant les noms de

continents et la plupart des noms de pays. Voici quelques mots utiles à fournir au départ : head

for, be bound for, cross, empty / fill the bulk of a ship, a cargo load.

Productions possibles : Ships left Europe bound for western Africa. They intended to

buy black slaves from traders who were meeting them on the coast. This first trip was the

shortest. Then, once the captain had a cargo load of slaves, he headed for the Caribbeans

where they were sold. For the last crossing back home, the bulk of the ship was filled with

precious goods from America much needed in Europe.

a. On pourra diviser la classe en trois. Chaque groupe lira une partie du texte avec l’aide de

la fiche d’entraînement du Workbook correspondante. Ce travail pourra se faire en classe

ou à la maison.

k On choisira un rapporteur pour chaque texte et le reste de la classe prendra des notes

qui permettront de renseigner la rubrique Action! du Workbook.

k Chaque partie du Action! pourra servir de synthèse partielle, si on veut fractionner la

récapitulation.

k Si la synthèse est faite à l’écrit, le professeur pourra fournir aux élèves un transparent

qui sera (rétro)projeté et l’on corrigera collectivement. Cette synthèse pourra servir de

base à une trace écrite.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 77-78)

➼ PART 1

Europe • America 2. in America 3. k slavery k colonists

un système structuré à grande échelle 5. k slavery k slaves

1.

4.6.

MANUEL k P. 118-119

Who needed workers?

What for?Where did the

workforce come from?

Production?What characterized

this agriculture?

the Europeans to exploit the

American colonies

from Africa – cotton, coffee, tobacco

– needed a large workforce,

but was very profitable

UNIT 9 • 1 9 1

➼ PART 2

– successful – sweetened – owner

vast personal fortunes • wealth • invest • banking • profits • benefited

slave owners • people from the working class

iron • coal • banking

tobacco • coffee • chocolate • sugar

people from the working class

The British economy was changed: “changed • increased • demand”

Colonists sold their tobacco or cotton crops to European traders.

More and more people in Europe wanted coffee or sugar.

Planters planted more cotton to make up for the demand.

A cheap labour force was more and more needed.

➼ PART 3

k 1699: date when the slave ship Liverpool Merchant sailed to West Africa

k 1740: date when Liverpool merchants led the British slave trade

k 1.5 million: number of Africans Liverpool was responsible for transporting

k 10 per cent: percent of slaves transported through Liverpool

suffix = -ly + root = cheap = à moindre coût, de façon peu onéreuse

k lead k bring

impliqués

a slave ship • from Liverpool to West Africa

b. Corrigé :

Part 1– Europe, Africa and America were involved in the trade.

– Three groups of people are mentioned: the Europeans, slaves (human beings treated as

property) and European colonists in the Americas.

– Cotton, coffee, tobacco, sugar were grown in the colonies and required a lot of field hands.

– These crops were highly profitable because the workers were not paid for their hard work.

Part 2– amass vast fortunes, wealth, grand houses, profits, benefited

– Bankers decided to invest the slave trade money in the iron or coal industry, and build big

houses.

– People could buy coloured cotton, tobacco, coffee, chocolate, sugar.

– Slaves helped colonists grow new products that were cheap. These goods were sold in

Europe for a good profit. The money from sugar and tobacco was spent on buying new slaves

who could grow more sugar to be sold in Europe and match the growing demand.

7.8.9.10.11.

12.13.

14.

15.

16.17.18.19.

Reasons for the expansion of Liverpool Who took part in the trade?– located in Britain’s new industrial

heartland

– a harbour on the Atlantic

– the city’s merchants

– citizens

– mayors

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 9 2 • UNIT 9

Part 3– It was the first slave ship to sail from Liverpool to West Africa.

– In October1699 the Liverpool Merchant left the Mersey River, in Liverpool.

1.5 million Africans were transported into slavery by Liverpool slave ships.

In the 1740s, Liverpool was the leader of the British slave trade.

– Liverpool became one of the main trading cities because of its location in Britain: It was a

harbour on the Irish Sea (international trade) and at the same time national trade with the

inland was made easy by the many rivers and canals connected to the city.

– “Nearly all the principal merchants and citizens of Liverpool, including many of the mayors,

were involved.” (l. 51)

c. On encouragera la classe à utiliser le Help! et à se servir du Action! du Workbook pour

préparer la prise de parole en continu qui récapitule le texte. Les élèves peuvent se reporter

à la p. 54 du manuel (« Prendre la parole en continu ») où ils trouveront une liste de gap fillers.

Approfondissement possible : The Transatlantic Slave Trade was a well-organised and highly

profitable business. Colonists from America could grow new products which would sell well in

Europe, such as cotton, coffee, sugar or tobacco. Yet these crops needed many field hands

to grow. Therefore African slaves were brought to the New World to work for free, and this

enabled plantation owners to become immensely rich. Indeed the slave owners managed to

export these exotic crops to Europe and cash in vast profits while their spending on manpower

remained reasonable. By and by, the European working class came to enjoy these plantation

goods and rely on their regular arrival in Britain. The more they bought, the more slaves arrived

in the colonies to enlarge the plantation fields. A whole system was born; Liverpool (or Nantes

in France) was a leading city in Europe for the trade. Thousands of African slaves travelled on

Liverpool ships and many well-known citizens took part in this ghastly human bondage.

2. The Essex, a slave ship from Liverpool

a. En anticipation à l’écoute, on demandera à la classe de décrire le tableau de la p. 119.

Ce sera peut-être le moment de réactiver la description d’image ; si besoin, les élèves

s’aideront des p. 281-282 du manuel (« Commenter un document visuel »). Attention à bien

préciser qu’on utilise le pronom personnel she pour les navires.

Productions possibles : This painting was completed at the turn of the 19th century and

shows a sailing ship in the middle. I can see the Union Jack both at the front / on the first

mast / on top of the foremast (mât de misaine) and at the rear / behind the third sail / on

the mizzenmast (mât d’artimon); so it must be a British ship. I can guess she is a slave ship

but the cargo is not visible. There are other boats around, probably heading for the harbour.

Besides, there are houses and walls behind the main ship and I presume it is the city of

Liverpool. She is about to unload her trading goods from the colonies / her hull must be full

of sugar and tobacco bags. Yet there can’t be any slaves on board because I’ve read that no

African slave ever travelled to Europe; they were meant to work in the colonies.

Cette tâche intermédiaire est le dernier entraînement de l’unité avant la tâche finale. Les

élèves écouteront l’interview et pourront travailler avec la fiche du Workbook qui les aidera

à comprendre les étapes du voyage de ce bâtiment négrier.

UNIT 9 • 1 9 3

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Journalist: So Mr Potter, you have found an incredible document in your father’s attic.

Mr Potter: Indeed. My ancestor’s ship’s log. Captain Peter Potter entered the ship’s

routine, destination, trading accounts, everything that happened on board The Essex.

➼ Part 2Journalist: Could you give us some details?

Mr Potter: Well, I’m afraid to say The Essex was a slave ship built in Liverpool in 1770.

Journalist: Oh really? What exactly do you know about this ship?

Mr Potter: She left Liverpool on June 13th 1783, with 33 sailors and a big cargo for trading

with African chiefs: mainly coloured beads, razors and tea. On July 16th, a month later, she

stopped at Cape Verde islands for water and fresh food. She arrived at Bassa Cove, on the

west coast of Africa on August 18th. They stayed there for 7 months...

Journalist: Gosh, that’s a long time!

Mr Potter: Yes, trading with the African chiefs was very slow. Eventually the ship left Africa

on March 25th 1784 with 330 slaves on board.

➼ Part 3Journalist: How long did the passage last?

Mr Potter: The passage took 51 days. Unfortunately 48 Africans died during that horrible

crossing. They stayed in the Caribbean 70 days, about 2 months and a half, and left for

Europe on July 15th.

➼ Part 4Journalist: What happened to the slaves afterwards? Do we have any information?

Mr Potter: Oh yes, everything is carefully registered in the ship’s log. Apparently the

auction took place on July 12th and they sold badly because they were not in good health.

Anyway there was enough money to make a substantial profit and to get sugar and ivory

back home to England.

Journalist: When did she arrive in Liverpool?

Mr Potter: She was towed into the docks on September 1st 1784, one year and 47 days later.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 79-80)

➼ PART 1

descendant of the Captain of The Essex, Peter Potter 2. in his father’s attic

➼ PART 2

Liverpool. Built in 1770 4. June 1783 5. the number of sailors

cargo • chief • coloured • beads • razors • tea • July 16th • 1 month later • water •

food • August 18th • 7 months

Products from England: beads • tea • razors Stop over at the Cape Verde: what for?: for water and fresh food After leaving Africa: left on March 1784 with 330 slaves on board, and the passage took

51 days

1.

3.6.

7.

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 9 4 • UNIT 9

➼ PARTS 3 AND 4

k 51: number of days the passage took k 2.5: months they stayed in the Caribbean

k 48: number of Africans who died k July 12th: the day when the auction took

k 70: number of days they stayed place

in the Caribbean k July 15th: the day when they left for Europe

not in good health

Departure date from Africa: July 15th Number of slaves on board: 330

Number of days at sea: 1 year and 47 days What happened to some slaves: 48 died

Number of days in the Caribbean: 70 days Departure date for Britain: July 15th

Anyway there was enough money to make a substantial profit and get sugar and ivory back

home to England.

b. On s’appuiera sur le Action! du Workbook pour aider les élèves à reformuler leurs notes.

Corrigé :

– The trip took the ship from Europe to Africa, with one stop for water and food on the way. She

stayed 7 months anchored along the western coast of Africa for the trading of slaves. Then she

left for the Caribbeans. But 48 slaves died during the horrible passage and nearly all the others

arrived in bad health. They were sold and the money used for trading sugar. The round trip took

The Essex back to Europe one year and 47 days later with a new, highly profitable cargo.

– She left Liverpool on June 13th 1783 with 33 sailors led by Captain Peter Potter.

– The sailors had a big cargo of coloured beads, razors and tea to exchange for slaves, once

in Africa.

– She arrived on the west coast of Africa on August 18th and stayed there for 7 months.

The ship left Africa on March 25th 1784 with 330 slaves on board.

– The ship arrived in the Caribbeans 51 days later / in mid-April. Of the 330 slaves taken

in Africa, 48 had died during the crossing, so there were 282 slaves on board.

– She left for Europe on July 15th with sugar and ivory.

4. THE MIDDLE PASSAGE

1. Observe these pictures

> Mise en œuvre :

Le professeur demandera aux élèves d’observer les trois images dans leurs manuels ou les

(rétro)projettera l’une après l’autre.

a. On ne demandera que les premières impressions. Puis on pourra enrichir l’expression pour

la trace écrite en utilisant le Help! de la page.

Le travail pourra se faire en divisant la classe en trois groupes, chacun se concentrant sur

une image. Un rapporteur présentera ensuite les impressions de son groupe au reste de la

classe qui prendra des notes.

8.

9.10.

11.

MANUEL k P. 120

UNIT 9 • 1 9 5

b. L’association picture / aspect of the slave trade se fera également avec l’aide du Help!

L’expression on board aura été vue lors de l’étude des p. 118-119 ou sera donné par

le professeur ; forced march et transport below deck seront repérés dans le Help!

c. On reprendra ici les éléments fournis en b. en étoffant ce qui deviendra la trace écrite.

d. On insistera sur la nécessité d’exprimer une opinion personnelle et de la justifier.

Productions possibles :Picture 1. We can see a ship at sea. The corpse of a black man is floating in the water on the

left. Maybe the other two black spots in the water are other corpses. The scene looks peaceful

but then you see the corpses, it’s shocking! This corresponds to the Middle Passage, on board

ship from Africa to America. To me, this picture is the worst because of the presence of the

corpses in the ocean. Something terrible must have happened, maybe they were killed by

traders.

Picture 2. Strong, muscular black slaves, men and women, are standing, chained and wearing

shackles. They look resigned. On the left, a white man, a trader, is standing with an arm / a rifle

in his hand. He looks mean. The scene is cruel and is probably set in Africa: It’s a forced march

before boarding the ship. This picture is the most revolting: The slaves look big and strong but

have been captured and are chained and treated like prisoners to be dragged away from Africa.

It’s the end of freedom for them.

Picture 3. Slaves are lying on bunk beds: they are chained even at night. They have no living

space to move. This illustrates the transport below deck on board ship. This picture shocks me

most because the slaves are presented like merchandise / goods on shelves. It’s inhumane!

Prolongement possible : on pourra rapprocher l’image 1 du tableau de Turner, The Slave

Ship, et montrer les correspondances entre les deux œuvres.

2. Writing workshop

> Mise en œuvre :

k Cet entraînement à l’expression écrite pourra donner lieu à un travail individuel en

classe ou à la maison. On peut aussi envisager un travail en binômes ou en groupes.

k On pourra exiger que tous les mots du Help! soient réemployés et soulignés dans la

production écrite.

k On pourra subdiviser la production écrite en trois parties :

– in Africa: chains and shackles / attitudes

– on board ship to America: conditions and traders’ attitudes

– what happened to the slaves during the Passage

Prolongement possible : le vocabulaire pourra être fixé à l’aide de la fiche suivante

(téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

Check your vocabulary

1 9 6 • UNIT 9

Ces mots ressemblent au français. Lesquels sont des mots transparents ? Lesquels sont des faux amis ? Classez-les dans le tableau et donnez la traduction des faux amis.capture • port • cruel • passage • profitable • chain • consume • sensitive

Fabriquez des noms composés en prenant un mot dans chaque colonne.

a. d.

b. e.

c. f.

Complétez avec les mots appropriés.

The majestic three-mast The Enterprise set from Liverpool in Spring 1798.

Her sailors travelled in bad conditions: They slept on below .

Her Captain, John Ravenger, was a man who treated his men harshly:

He often used his to punish them when they did not .

Any sailor who challenged him was in a cell and lived with

on his wrists and on his feet to prevent him from escaping.

CORRIGÉ

a. heartland b. workforce c. handcuffs d. warehouse e. waterfront f. seaman

The majestic three-mast The Enterprise set sail from Liverpool in Spring 1798. Her sailors

travelled in bad conditions: They slept on bunk beds below deck. Her Captain, John

Ravenger, was a cruel man who treated his men harshly: He often used his whip to punish

them when they did not obey. Any sailor who challenged him was locked in a cell and lived

with handcuffs on his wrists and shackles on his feet to prevent him from escaping.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.3.

mots transparents faux amis

heart • work • hand • ware • water • sea cuffs • land • house • force • man • front

mots transparents faux amiscapture • port • cruel • profitable •

chain

passage = traversée • consume = consommer •

sensitive = sensible

UNIT 9 • 1 9 7

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

\Å\ : dock • shop \∏…\ : world • work \EÁ\ : cope • growth • role • sold

\Ø\ : flood \u…\ : boom • Liverpool • troop \Á\ : look

\I\ : ship • river • famine \∏…\ : first \aI\ : tide

Les terminaisons -ous sont réduites en \Es\ (et l’accent se place sur la syllabe qui précède).

On utilisera le site compagnon pour le respect des groupes de sens et des mots accentués.

> Build up your vocabulary

Town: boom town • migrant group • shipbuilding • warehouse • townspeople • exhibition tour

Seaside: quayside • seaman • dock reconstruction

Slavery: shipping line • tradesman • lifeboat

Ils sont tous constitués de deux noms séparés ou attachés. Le dernier nom est le nom

principal. Le premier nom ajoute une précision et est en général accentué.

> Obligation / interdiction / absence d’obligation

Obligation : a et d Interdiction : c Absence d’obligation : bk Ces modaux sont invariables et sont suivis de la base verbale du verbe.

Obligation : have to Interdiction : is forbidden to Absence d’obligation : don’t have to

a. une opinion personnelle de l’énonciateur b. une simple constatation

Passé : a. had to (obligation) b. were forbidden to (interdiction) c. didn’t have to (absence

d’obligation)

Avenir : d. will have to (obligation)

– Obligation : have to – Absence d’obligation : not have to – Interdiction : be forbidden to

> Capacité / permission

> Practice

a. Présent : phrase 1. Passé : phrases 3 et 4. Avenir : phrase 2.

Obligation : phrases 2 et 3. Interdiction : phrase 4. Permission : phrase 1.

1 must 2 can’t 3 needn’t 4 will be able to 5 can 6 must

1.

2.

3.

5.

6.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

MANUEL k P. 121-123

Capacité PermissionPrésent can (sing) can (clap)

Passé were never able to could (wear)

Avenir will be able to will be allowed to

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

1 9 8 • UNIT 9

a. 1 had to 2 had to 3 couldn’t

b. 1 had to 2 could 3 could 4 didn’t have to 5 had to 6 could

Cette activité réactivera toutes les formes, modales et équivalentes, vues auparavant pour

l’expression de l’autorisation, la permission et l’interdiction et fera l’objet d’un travail à

la maison. On renverra les élèves à la p. 213 pour la bonne mise en forme du dialogue.

Au préalable, le professeur pourra demander à la classe de prendre connaissance du

document à droite General Information et de repérer les rubriques qui correspondent aux

questions du dialogue.

YOUR TASK

ENTRAÎNEZ-VOUS

> Script de l’enregistrement

Everybody has heard about the tragedy of the Titanic. But how much do you really know

about it? Titanic, then the largest ship in the world, left Southampton for New York on

Wednesday 10 April 1912. On board were 922 passengers, later rising to 1,316 after stops

at Cherbourg and Queenstown, Ireland. With her crew of 892 she carried 2,208 people

in all. Her 20 lifeboats could only carry about half of the people on board. At 11.40 p.m.

on the night of Sunday 14 April she struck an iceberg to the south-east of Newfoundland,

which fatally damaged the hull. The ship sank over two and a half hours later with the

loss of over 1,500 lives. Titanic was registered in Liverpool and so carried the city’s name

on her stern, but she sailed from Southampton, and never visited Liverpool. Besides, the

Titanic had strong links with her home port. Did you know? Captain Smith of the Titanic

lived in Waterloo, near Liverpool, for 40 years, before moving to Southampton in 1908.

The eight heroic musicians in the Titanic’s band were recruited by music agents of Liverpool.

Fred Clarke, as well as all the other musicians, famously kept playing while the Titanic sank.

The Liverpool-based Cunard liner Carpathia rescued all 705 survivors of the Titanic disaster.

J. Bruce Ismay, chairman of the White Star Line, had fine houses in Liverpool and on the

Wirral. He escaped from the Titanic by climbing into one of the last lifeboats to be lowered,

but only after helping many other passengers into boats. Fred Fleet, the Titanic’s lookout

who spotted the iceberg, was originally from Liverpool. He always said that if he had been

supplied with binoculars, the ship might have been saved.

Corrigé :

b. a3 • b2 • c5 • d4 • e12 • f6 • g9 • h8 • i7 • j10 • k11 • l1

b. 10 (April) 1912 • 922 • 1,316 • 892 • 2,208 • 20 • 11.40 (p.m.) • 14 (April) • 1,500 •

40 • 1908 • 705

c. 1. Nombre de passagers à Southampton : 922 5. Nombre de passagers au total : 1,316

2. Nombre de canots : 20 6. Nombre de victimes : over 1,500

3. Heure : 11.40 p.m. 7. Nombre de membres d’équipage : 892

4. Date du départ : Wednesday 10 April 1912 8. Date de la tragédie : Sunday 14 April

a. captain • musician • chairman • lookout

b. captain: Edward Smith • musician: Fred Clarke • chairman: Bruce Ismay • lookout: Fred Fleet

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k 124-125

UNIT 9 • 1 9 9

1. Right 2. 8 3. Wrong (he had lived in Waterloo, near Liverpool, for 40 years, before moving

to Southampton in 1908). 4. 705 5. Southampton

LES ÉTAPES À SUIVRE

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1John Murden: Hello. My name’s John Murden and I’m curator of Liverpool history at the

Liverpool National Museum. I’m going to tell you something about “Magical History Tour:

The Story of Liverpool”, the special exhibition at Merseyside Maritime Museum that has

been put together to celebrate the 800th birthday of Liverpool’s foundation.

➼ Part 2Liz Stewart: Hi there, I’m Liz Stewart, I’m curator of archaeology for the Museum of

Liverpool. I’m just going to tell you a little bit about this first section of the gallery, “Life before

Liverpool”. This is where we really start to explore the very early history of Liverpool because

although we’re celebrating our 800th anniversary this year [sic 2007] since the Liverpool

Charter or “Letters Patent”, there were actually people living around the Mersey for around

9,000 years. The Mersey itself, or the Pool of Liverpool, was formed around 8,000 years ago

as the ice receded after the last Ice Age. That pool, and the one over on the Wirral, started to

become the key areas where people started to settle in the Prehistoric period.

➼ Part 3John Murden: The star attraction here is the actual 1207 charter that founded Liverpool,

signed by King John on 28th August 1207. King John planned Liverpool as a place from which

troops and supplies could leave England to invade Ireland. The new town had seven streets

laid out near the old pool. It provided John with both a safe harbour and a source of income

from his tenants.

➼ Part 4Increasing trade in the 1690s and early 1700s meant that the old tidal Pool of Liverpool was

struggling to cope with increasing amounts of trade and shipping. He converted the Pool

into a dock with quaysides and a river gate. Completed in 1715, the dock made it possible

for ships to load and unload whatever the state of the tide, and was the first commercial

wet dock anywhere in the world.

Of course one of the most important things that underpinned much of Liverpool’s growth

at this time was its significant role in the transatlantic slave trade. You can find out about

some of this in Magical History Tour and in the new International Slavery Museum, also at

the Maritime Museum.

➼ Part 5Some of the displays around the dock reconstruction explain how Liverpool became a

boom town in the 18th and 19th century. There’s exhibits that look at Liverpool’s role in

the development of the railways and the canals, in the development of dock technology, in

shipping lines and in shipbuilding. There’s also a reconstruction of an 18th century shop

with some of the things that were made, bought and sold in Liverpool, from matches in the

matchmaking factories that were important in Liverpool, to the importation of tobacco and

sugar and Liverpool’s role in the development of banking, insurance and finance.

4.

UNIT

9 DESTINATION LIVERPOOL

2 0 0 • UNIT 9

➼ Part 6Liverpool grew from a town of around 77,000 people in 1801 to a bustling city of almost

700,000 people in 1901. It explores some of the impacts that this tremendous growth had in

terms of health, in terms of jobs and in terms of education and in terms of housing. This sec-

tion of the exhibition also looks at the experience of some of the people who flooded into this

booming city in the 19th century. It looks at the experience of the Irish, the most significant

migrant group to settle in 19th century Liverpool; what they experienced in terms of escaping

famine and arriving in Liverpool. How many came as part of a journey to the New World but

remained, forming strong communities that would have a significant impact upon the city’s

accent, culture, politics and religious beliefs. The exhibition also looks at the other communi-

ties who arrived in Liverpool at this time and made it one of the most multicultural cities in Bri-

tain by 1900. The role that Liverpool ships played on the emigration routes to America meant

that millions of migrants passed through the city. Some came from Africa, some came from

Russia and China. Others came from closer to home, from Wales and from Scotland and from

the Lancashire area. This made Liverpool a truly world city because escaping famine, persecu-

tion or in search of work, many diverse communities chose to make Liverpool their home.

> Fiche d’évaluation de la tâche d’écoute (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon)

Family name, first name:

Class: Date:

1 Tick the correct answer.a. Where does the exhibition take place? • the Merseyside Maritime Museum

• the International Slavery Museum • the Museum of Liverpool

b. This exhibition celebrates: the 2008 capital of culture • the annual city

festival • the 800th birthday of the city • the 600th birthday of the city

1

1

/ 2

2 a. What period of time is Liz Stewart speaking about?

b. How long have people lived around the Mersey?

1

1

/ 2

3 Find information about the charter (charte).a. When exactly was it written?

b. Who signed it?

c. What was the city used as?

d. How many streets were there?

1

1

2

1

/ 5

4 a. What problem was the city confronted with?

b. What was renovated? the cathedral • the docks • the market place

c. When was the work finished?

d. What other trade helped the city develop?

1

1

1

1

/ 4

UNIT 9 • 2 0 1

Total : / 40 points

Corrigé :

a. the Merseyside Maritime Museum b. the 800th birthday of the city

a. Life before Liverpool / the very early history of Liverpool. b. There were actually people

living around the Mersey for around 9,000 years.

a. 1207 b. King John c. a place from which troops and supplies could leave England to

invade Ireland d. seven streets

a. The population of the city was increasing and shipping developped very fast.

b. the docks c. in 1715 d. the Transatlantic Slave Trade

a. – 18th century – 19th century b. – the railways – the canals c. – matches – tobacco –

sugar d. – dock technology – shipping lines – shipbuilding

a. inhabitants in 1801 = 77,000, in 1901 = 700,000 b. Ireland c. 19th century

d. escaping famine / on their way to the New World e. – accent – culture – politics –

religious beliefs f. – Africa – Russia and China – Wales, Scotland, Lancashire

g. – escaping famine – persecution – in search of work

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

5 a. What centuries are mentioned? – –

b. Name two means of transportation which helped the city grow.

– –

c. Pick out three objects made or sold in Liverpool.

– – –

d. What economic sectors developed fast?

– – –

2

2

3

3

/ 10

6 Find information about:a. the number of inhabitants in 1801 = in 1901 =

b. the country of origin of a major group of immigrants:

c. the century they migrated to Liverpool:

d. the reason for emigrating:

e. the impact they had on the city:

– –

– –

f. Where did the other waves (vagues) of immigrants come from? Name:

– one continent:

– two countries:

– three areas in the UK:

– – –

g. Reasons for emigrating:

– – –

2

1

1

1

4

5

3

/ 17

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 0 2 • UNIT 10

Life is artNous avons choisi de travailler le Pop Art car les élèves sont en général très sensibles à

cette forme d’art, dont les thèmes font partie de leur quotidien, sans même qu’ils en aient

conscience. Ces œuvres sont faciles d’accès et permettent de déclencher la parole. Grâce

à cette approche artistique, certains élèves que l’on n’entend jamais s’expriment enfin

en classe.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à la compréhension orale, voir p. 149.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Choisir le meilleur audioguide et justifier

son choix

Mémoire • Création

k la société de consommation

k le vocabulaire lié à l’art (techniques,

couleurs)

k la description physique (p. 127, 132, 133) k exprimer ses réactions et sentiments

k la modalité épistémique : must, may /

might, can’t

k l’accentuation de mots (p. 133)

k les suffixes contraignants : -ion / -ic

(p. 133)

k les groupes de souffle (p. 133)

k exprimer le but

k aimer / ne pas aimer

k comparer

k préférer

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

MANUEL k P. 126

UNIT 10 • 2 0 3

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

TUNE IN!

1. Listen and draw

– Cette première activité permettra de revoir en contexte toutes les prépositions nécessaires à

la localisation dans l’espace. Les élèves pourront se référer à la p. 281 du manuel (« Commenter

un document visuel »).

– On pourra également utiliser le transparent n° 9 sur lequel est reproduite l’œuvre en

question de Wesselmann.

> Script de l’enregistrement

One of the main elements in this painting is the fridge which is on the left, next to the sink.

On the fridge there are three bottles of soda all in a row.

In the background, through the window, we can see a very high tower standing among other

buildings on a hill.

On the window-sill there is a plant and two enormous oranges.

Écouter

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Lire

Écrire

Manuel

k Listen and draw (p. 126)

k Listen to an art fan (p. 127)k The Swinging Sixties (p. 130)

k An audio guide of Sixteen Jackies (p. 130)k Your Task (p. 136-137)

k site compagnon, U10–Dialogue: In a museum shop

k Tune in, A. Warhol, E. Ruscha (p. 126)k Supermarket Lady, D. Hanson (p. 127)k Big Splash, D. Hockney (p. 129)

k Eddie Diptych, R. Lichtenstein (p. 132)

k President Elect, J. Rosenquist (p. 130)k Sixteen Jackies, A. Warhol (p. 131)

Mountains o’ Things, T. Chapman (p. 128-129)

M-Maybe, A. Warhol (p. 135)

Workbook

XXXX

X

Fichesphotocopiables

XX

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 0 4 • UNIT 10

In front of the sink we can see a table which is covered with all sorts of food ready to be eaten.

In the foreground we can see a huge yoghurt, and in the bottom right-hand corner a very

big tin of sliced pineapple.

On the left, next to the yoghurt, there is a hot dog and behind it, pancakes with honey on them.

A loaf of bread which has been opened can be seen between the pancakes and the tin of

pineapple.

Completely on the left there is a piece of bacon and behind it a carton of milk, a glass and

some fruit.

On the far side of the table (beyond the pancakes), we can see cereals in a big cardboard

box, and also different sorts of cereals, all in small boxes, and a red pot in between.

There is some coffee in a coffee-pot on the cooker.

2. Observe and speak

> Mise en œuvre possible : diviser la classe en deux, chaque moitié étudiant une peinture.

À l’intérieur de chaque groupe les élèves pourront travailler individuellement ou en binômes.

Si l’activité a été préparée à la maison, on pourra passer tout de suite à la confrontation des

réponses et à la reprise collective. Pendant qu’un ou plusieurs rapporteurs prennent la parole, on

fixera des tâches d’écoute ciblées aux autres élèves (lexique, phonologie, grammaire, contenus).

L’exercice proposé dans le Workbook (p. 82) permettra de faire une synthèse des deux

peintures, du mouvement du Pop Art et de ses objectifs.

N. B. : le nom Ruscha se prononce « Rooshay ». On peut l’écouter sur Internet à l’adresse

suivante www.forvo.com/word/ed_ruscha/

Productions possibles :k Five Coke Bottles, Andy Warhol

Coke is a dominant feature of America / is the most popular and biggest-selling soft drink in

history, the best-known trademark in the world. It has become the official drink of the USA.

It is now the cultural icon of the USA.

We are struck by the row of five Coca-Cola bottles. The bottles all look similar / identical.

They embody mass consumption / the consumer society. This object of our everyday life

is immediately recognizable / is part of a mass culture. Moreover the brand stands out in

red. This everyday life object embodies the American way of life. Coke has thus become an

aspect of the American Dream. Anybody can afford a Coke. It also suggests uniformity, the

standardization of tastes and monotony. The Coca-Cola label is famous / universal. The

design is simplistic and yet it is eye-catching.

k Standard Station, Edward Ruscha

We are struck by the dominant red colour, the corporate name “Standard”, the red pumps,

the white building in the background. The gas station stands against a blue sky. The painting is

very geometrical. This painting symbolizes the incursion of corporate signs into the American

landscape. The blue sky reminds us of California and of Los Angeles in particular. L. A. is a world

of parking lots, wide roads and gas stations. The artist focuses on a banal gas station.

Informations complémentairesRuscha took photographs of gas stations on the legendary Route 66 highway which

connects Oklahoma to Los Angeles. The view of the road has an economic aspect.

This painting gives an impression of a cold and dehumanized world.

MANUEL k P. 127

UNIT 10 • 2 0 5

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 82)

II. Observe and speak a) Pop Art is a visual art movement from the 1960s and 1970s. Pop Art is short for Popular Art.

It used everyday objects, consumer products as well as popular images used in advertising

and product packaging and the media. Images of Pop Art were familiar, recognizable and

included such things as gas stations and Coke bottles. Pop artists, such as Andy Warhol,

said they wanted to portray America as it was. They used bright colours to present mass consumption products.

b) Coke is the most popular soft drink in the USA. It has become a symbol of America.

Warhol painted bottles of Coke because they are symbols of the American way of life and

our consumer society. It also suggests uniformity and standardization. It is cheap and

everybody can afford a Coke. This explains the success of this product. However, it also

means monotony and the standardization of tastes.

Informations complémentaires Sur le site du musée Andy Warhol de Pittsburgh, on trouvera une mine d’informations

et de documents sur le Pop Art à utiliser en classe. Citons notamment :

– un PowerPoint remarquable qui peut être téléchargé à l’adresse suivante :

www.edu.warhol.org/20c_ppt.html et faire l’objet d’un travail au vidéoprojecteur

ou en salle multimédia ;

– une chronologie interactive : www.edu.warhol.org/20c_timeline.html

1. SUPERMARKET LADY

1. Over to you

> Mise en œuvre

k Ce travail pourra être préparé à la maison. De retour en classe les élèves pourront

confronter rapidement leurs réponses en binômes. Une prise de parole en continu pourra

ensuite avoir lieu et être suivie d’une reprise collective.

k Si nécessaire, les élèves les plus fragiles traiteront la question a., tandis que les plus

solides s’attaqueront à la question b. qui est plus abstraite.

k L’analyse pourra être complétée en écoutant l’enregistrement rattaché à la question 2 (Listen to an art fan).

Productions possibles :a. What I find the most striking / incredible / impressive / unpleasant is that… What strikes

me most is…

The sculpture is in the middle of a room in an art gallery. It is surprising to see a hyper realistic

sculpture. This woman looks real.

She is a plump housewife pushing her trolley in a supermarket. She is in her thirties or forties /

is middle-aged. She is wearing a tight blue skirt and a pink T-shirt. She is still in her rollers.

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 0 6 • UNIT 10

Her trolley is full to the brim. This woman seems to be overfed / to overeat. The trolley is

full of big cartons, cans, bottles, we can even recognize the brands of the products she has

bought.

b. It is a mirror of our consumer society. This woman embodies the American way of life, a

society based on consumption. The artist uses objects from our everyday life. He certainly

wants to denounce overconsumption. People are brainwashed into buying more and more.

TV commercials urge us to buy more and more.

The artist denounces / exposes our consumer society. He wants to make us aware of an

ugly reality. We are shopaholics. This sculpture warns us about the dangers of our consumer

society. It is a satire of today’s society.

2. Listen to an art fan

> Mise en œuvre

On procédera à une écoute avec prise de notes. Dans la mesure où de nombreux éléments

sont connus, il ne nous a pas paru nécessaire de fournir ici une fiche détaillée d’aide à

l’écoute.

La grille proposée dans le Workbook pourra être rapidement remplie.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 83)

> Script de l’enregistrement

Journalist: What was your initial reaction to the sculpture and why?

Julia: The first time I saw it I was shocked. I thought: “How gross!” What’s the point of

showing a plump woman pushing her shopping cart? I thought it was real. Then I realized it

was a sculpture. I wondered why Duane Hanson modelled a rather fat American housewife.

When you come to think of it this work of art is both realistic and cruel.

Journalist: What makes you think it is both realistic and cruel?

FeelingsDescription

of the womanWhy?

First shocked, it’s gross – plump woman pushing

her shopping cart

– fat American

housewife

realistic and cruel

Afterwards – shocking and revolting

– realistic and cruel

– ugly scene

– a mirror of our

consumer society

– typical housewife

– cart full to the brim

– makes people aware

of the danger of

consumer society

– doesn’t want to look

like this woman in a few

years

Check your vocabulary

UNIT 10 • 2 0 7

Julia: It’s realistic because it is an everyday scene, a very commonplace situation. This

woman is a typical housewife in her rollers, her tight skirt, and with her cigarette. Her cart

is full to the brim: cans, bottles, bags. She’s bought loads of food, and piles of junk food.

She’s just bought all this food to feed her family. We can actually read all the brand names.

It is also cruel because this scene is really ugly, but that’s what we can see every time we

go to the supermarket. It’s a mirror of our consumer society. Consumers want to buy more

and more. The artist is very clever. It is so shocking, so revolting, it makes you aware of our

consumer society and all its drawbacks. And honestly I don’t want to look like this woman

in a few years.

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique de la rubrique Help!

grâce à l’exercice suivant.

Traduisez les phrases suivantes. Tous les mots en gras sont dans le Help!, p. 127.

Cette sculpture est une critique acerbe de notre société de consommation.

Elle montre les défauts de notre société de consommation.

Cette femme est laide.

La pile de produits est écœurante / dégoûtante.

Pour dénoncer les défauts de notre société, l’artiste a exagéré certains points.

L’artiste dénonce une société où les gens ont des caddies pleins à ras bord. Il veut que

les gens soient conscients de cette situation.

CORRIGÉ

The / This sculpture is a harsh criticism of our consumer society.

It shows the drawbacks of our consumer society.

The / This woman is ugly.

The stack of products is gross.

To denounce the drawbacks of our society, the artist exaggerated a few points.

The artist denounces a society in which people have shopping carts / trolleys that are full

to the brim. He wants people to be aware of this situation.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

MANUEL k P. 128-129

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 0 8 • UNIT 10

2. I WANT MORE

1. Get ready

Productions possibles : It’s ugly! Very kitschy! The statue is tiny compared to the bank notes.

The woman is sitting on a pile of money. Does she really have a huge fortune, or does she

dream of making big money? She wishes she won the lottery / married a millionaire / earned

a lot of money / inherited a fortune.

The song may be about a person dreaming of a better future, a woman who has lost a lot of

money gambling or on the stock exchange. It represents the American Dream. The narrator

may be an immigrant who is attracted to the States and dreams of new and better opportunities.

2. Understanding the lyrics

> Mise en œuvre

k La chanson pourra être traitée en entier et collectivement. k Dans la mesure où cette chanson se compose de deux parties qui s’opposent mais se

répondent, le texte pourra aussi être divisé en deux. Un groupe s’occupera des strophes

1, 2 et 3. L’autre moitié de la classe traitera les strophes 4, 5 et 6, que l’on réservera aux

élèves les plus solides. Chaque groupe remplira la partie correspondante du Workbook et

prendra des notes sur la partie qu’il n’a pas étudiée. La synthèse (Action!) sera faite par

toute la classe.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 83 À 85)

I. Understanding the lyrics

➼ PART 1 (stanzas 1, 2 and 3)

I guess I’ll never have the life I’ve always wanted.

“Always” and “want” are opposed to “I’ll never have” (l. 2).

I’ll have a boss. + I’ll always obey my employer’s orders.

They refer to the future.

k “A life of ease” (l. 5) k “I’m in my grave” (l. 4)

“life of ease” (l. 5) • “mountains oh mountains o’ things” (l. 6-7) • “big expensive car” (l. 8) •

“drag my furs” (l. 9) • “have a maid” (l. 10) • “Champagne and caviar” (l. 18)

envy (l. 12) + greed (l. 13)

k “you”: Prince Charming

k “me”: a worker + the narrator

k “we”: the have-nots + needy people + unprivileged people

“know what money’s worth” (l. 22)

“mountains o’nothing” (l. 24) # “mountains o’ things” (l. 7)

1.2.3.4.

5.6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

UNIT 10 • 2 0 9

➼ PART 2 (stanzas 3, 4 and 5)

rich

k “they”: people with morals

k “my”: the narrator

k “you”: the narrator (the rich / wealthy man)

“you”: the consumer society.

“it”: the narrator’s funeral / burial

II. ACTION!

➼ RECAP 1 (stanzas 1, 2 and 3)

The narrator is probably a needy person. She may be poor, underpaid, badly off, even

destitute.

She belongs to the working-class, the have-nots, the underprivileged. She feels excluded

from the world of wealth and affluence. She must be in dire straits.

She dreams of becoming rich / wealthy /well-off, of belonging to the upper class, of living

in a mansion. She wishes she could enjoy wealth, material comfort, a high standard of

living / have better living conditions. She wishes she were able to afford luxurious things

such as caviar and champagne, more consumer goods. She wishes someone could wait

upon her. She wishes her dreams came true, were fulfilled.

She can’t bear / put up with her life any longer. She craves for a new life, a higher social

status. She wants to escape poverty, a life of misery. She feels bitter, trapped, hopeless

and frustrated. She longs to have a better future.

Approfondissement possible : The first narrator must belong to the working class; indeed

he / she is an employee. In the first stanza, the narrator voices his / her bitterness, his / her

resentment. He / She wishes he / she could become his / her own boss to be able to make

his / her own schedule. He / She may be sick and tired of being at someone’s beck and call.

The narrator’s dreams will never come true; he / she won’t be able to achieve his / her life-

long dream. He / She might not even be able to retire and enjoy some well-deserved holidays

(“I’ll be working till I’m in my grave”). No wonder he / she is bitter! We notice that his / her

dreams were very materialistic and that he / she aimed at impressing others. If he / she had

been well-off, he / she would have boasted to make other people envy him / her. In the last

paragraph, we understand that the narrator contends that fate has been unfair to him / her

because, more than anybody else, he / she knows the worth of these material rewards. This

narrator doesn’t only speak in his / her name, he / she is a spokesperson for all the hard-

working people who are poorly-paid and who will never manage to fulfil their dreams.

➼ RECAP 2 (stanzas 4, 5 and 6)

A wealthy person speaks in this part, he / she belongs to the upper class, has made a

fortune / big money.

11.

12.

13.14.15.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Material life Solitude– all those material things (l. 29)

– Consume more than you need (l. 32)

– queen (l. 35)

– all my mountains o’ things (l. 39)

– lonely (l. 36)

– I feel lonely (l. 40)

– my sadness and loneliness (l. 48)

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 1 0 • UNIT 10

He / She lives in a consumer society where people are brainwashed, are told to keep buying.

He / She lives in a material world where people throw away things very easily. He / She lives

in a world with no spiritual values. Consumerism dominates / prevails, money rules the world.

Despite all his / her possessions and his / her social status, he / she feels lonely and

miserable.

Approfondissement possible : The second narrator might be a company manager or a

factory director. At any rate, he / she must have been other people’s boss and not a very

kind, flexible and understanding boss, since the word “exploiting” is used. He / She doesn’t

seem to be remorseful or to have pangs of conscience.

Nevertheless, he / she listens half-heartedly to religious people who remind him / her that

being very rich is a sin and that God’s Kingdom belongs to poor people. They advise him /

her to give away his / her fortune; they might not be utterly disinterested.

Lines 33, 34, 35: In our consumer society, people consume more and more; either they

become richer (queen) but they take the risk of losing their souls because they have a

material life and not a spiritual life or they become poorer and get into debt (“pauper”)

and they live in their dreams.

As the saying goes, money can’t buy happiness and indeed, this person doesn’t seem fulfilled.

He / She feels lonely / lonesome (“keep my sadness and loneliness at bay”); maybe even

more so as he / she is growing older. In the past, he / she may have befriended some people

but he / she may have taken advantage of them to achieve some professional goal (“good

people are only my stepping stones”) so these friendships didn’t last. Because he / she

treated people unfairly and ruthlessly, he / she has enemies that he / she dreads (“keep all

my enemies away”).

The lyrics of this song are quite depressing. Both narrators are bitter and sad. The first one

wishes he / she had become his / her own boss in order to enjoy more freedom and to earn

more money. He / She doesn’t mention any personal achievement that might have made

his / her life worth living for. The second one had money, but he / she earned it in a morally

questionable way so that, as he / she is growing older, he / she finds himself / herself lonely.

3. Recap

Voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook, ci-dessus et page précédente.

4. Go further

a. Voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook, ci-dessus et page précédente.

b. Productions possibles :– It is better to be poor than to be rich with no friends.

– Money doesn’t make you happy.

– Money doesn’t create happiness when you gain it by exploiting others.

– The narrator prefers being poor (and to keep dreaming) to losing his / her soul.

Prolongements possibles :

– Si l’on dispose de la chanson de Tracy Chapman, on pourra la faire chanter en karaoké.

– Ce texte peut être mis en parallèle avec le poème de Edwin-Arlington Robinson, intitulé

Richard Cory, mis en musique par Simon and Garfunkel sur l’album Sounds of Silence (1966).

Ce poème reprend les mêmes thèmes que ceux évoqués dans les trois dernières strophes.

5.

6.

MANUEL k P. 129

MANUEL k P. 130-131

UNIT 10 • 2 1 1

3. BIG SPLASH

> Mise en œuvre

Les questions a. et b. peuvent être traitées en même temps.

Productions possibles :a. b. We are immediately struck by a luxurious house and a huge swimming-pool. We can also

notice palm trees in the background, which suggests that the scene takes place in a very hot

area. It could be California, Florida, or even Arizona or New Mexico. It is a cloudless, sunny

day. It must be midday when the sun is highest in the sky judging from the shadow under the

chair. The dominant colours are blue, white and yellow. These colours are very cold. They

suggest a very artificial lifestyle. This painting reminds me of some famous stars’ houses in

Malibu or in American TV series.

c. The folding chair suggests a film producer lives in this house. The atmosphere is eerie / weird

because no human being is around. It conveys the idea that the owner of the house may feel

lonely / lonesome. Somebody has just dived from the diving board. However, the water is still.

There is no motion / movement. The empty chair makes us think the person has vanished, he or

she may have committed suicide. This painting may represent the artificial world of Hollywood.

It may also represent a world of leisure, a Golden Age, a symbol of the American Dream, of

material happiness, of wealth. The house and the pool are emblems of the Californian lifestyle.

d. This house is certainly the house the first narrator dreams of, the type of houses he / she sees

in glossy magazines. The second narrator might live in this house and suffer from solitude /

loneliness. He / She might crave for company.

e. Réponse libre.

4. FAME

1. President Elect

N. B. : on trouvera une excellente analyse de ce tableau sur le site suivant : www.blackdogonline.com/media/books/pdf/pop_art_book_spreads.pdf

Productions possibles : President Elect can be divided into three parts with, from left to right,

are a close-up of John F. Kennedy’s face / a portrait from an election poster, a woman’s hands

holding a slice of cake, and a portion of an automobile.

Informations complémentairesIn President Elect, Rosenquist uses ads for Swans Down Devil’s Food Mix from 1954 and a

Chevrolet car advertisement, and juxtaposes them.

Kennedy was the first presidential candidate to use the power of the media to political ends.

The consumer products selected represent American symbols of affluence, technological

success and middle class standards of living – the typical promises of politicians.

The artist wants to warn us about a growing emphasis on marketing, consumerism and

packaging. As Rosenquist explains, “The face was from Kennedy’s campaign poster. I was

very interested at that time in people who advertised themselves. What did they put on an

advertisement of themselves? So that was his face. And his promise was half a Chevrolet

and a piece of stale cake.”

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 1 2 • UNIT 10

2. The Swinging Sixties

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 85-86)

➼ PART 1

k 1961 and 1969

k America and the Soviet Union

k the Cold War

a) Jackie is the President’s wife, the First Lady.

b) glamorous and young

optimism and vitality

a) JFK • election • expression • sworn in • US President • 1961 • welcomed • fresh air •

glamorous young wife • optimism • vitality • promised • beat • Soviet Union • Space Race •

Neil Armstrong • land • moon • Cold War • safer • free world • segregation • abolished

b)

➼ PART 2

➼ PART 3

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.

7.

Historical period Key dates Changes expected

– 1960s

– Cold War

– 1961: election of JFK, US

President

– 1964: segregation is abolished

– 1969: Neil Armstrong landed

on the moon

– promised fresh air, optimism,

vitality

– safer, freer world

– beating the Soviet Union

in the Space Race

Characteristics Consequences

– dynamic: “nearly half of America’s

population was under 18 years old”

– consumer society = rich

could participate in mass culture

How many? Role played Impact

95% of homes had TV brought images of war,

poverty, racism

incredible change in the

way people reacted to

political decisions

Who? For Againstindividual Americans

became activist leaders

advocated peace, justice,

freedom, equality

rebelled against the

involvement of US troops

in the Vietnam War

UNIT 10 • 2 1 3

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Journalist: Why the Swinging Sixties?

A history teacher: Well... I’ll try to answer this question as best I can. First I think John

Kennedy’s election has much to do with this expression. When he was sworn in as US

President in January 1961, he was welcomed as a breath of fresh air. He and his glamorous

young wife, Jackie, seemed to sum up the optimism and vitality of the new decade. He

promised America could beat the Soviet Union in the Space Race. Remember Neil Armstrong

landed on the moon in 1969. America was in the middle of the Cold War. And Kennedy

promised a safer, freer world. Don’t forget that segregation was abolished in the USA in 1964.

➼ Part 2Journalist: Why was America so dynamic? What were the other important factors?

A history teacher: First in 1960, nearly half of America’s population was under 18 years

old. And secondly, this generation was also rich and could take part in mass culture with

all its characteristics: movies, television, radio, advertising, toys, forms of art, photography,

games, etc.

➼ Part 3Journalist: What about television? Did it have an impact on people’s lives?

A history teacher: It certainly did. The other striking phenomenon of the Swinging Sixties

was TV. Colour TV arrived in the early 60s. By the end of the decade, 95% of homes had at

least one TV, bringing newly visible images of war, poverty and racism. And of course, it was

not surprising to see an incredible change in the way people acted and reacted to political

decisions, for example.

Journalist: What exactly do you mean by this?

A history teacher: Political activism built up so quickly during the ’60s, and many individual

Americans became activist leaders. They called for peace, justice, freedom and equality,

and many people rebelled against the involvement of American troops in the Vietnam War,

for example.

b. et c. Voir « Informations complémentaires » p. 211.

3. Kennedy’s assassination

a. President Kennedy was killed in Dallas on November 22, 1963. The USA was in shock.

b. et c. Voir corrigé de la fiche du Workbook ci-dessous.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 86-87)

➼ PART 1

1. Event Role played Device used InterpretationJFK’s

assassination

event largely

covered by

the media

– silkscreens of all the

personalities of his day

– repetition of the same

image

the assassination was

covered by the media all

over the world = big hype

around the event

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 1 4 • UNIT 10

➼ PART 2

Type of photograph: news photographs that appeared in the media. Photographs were taken

from Life Magazine.

4: The couple drove through the city.

2: Lyndon Baines Johnson took the oath and became President.

1: They landed at the airport.

3: Jackie Kennedy attended a ceremony in Washington.

standing stunned • grieving • in mourning • she is beaming

➼ PARTS 3 AND 4

\Ti…m\ = theme • \"aIkÅn\ = icon • \"hO…ntId\ = haunted • \"trœdZIk\ = tragic

combines • important • themes • Warhol • work • fascinated • stars • public figures •

mass media • people

Warhol painted stars to show the influence of the media on people.

time • death

happy • smiling • grieving

Warhol was also haunted by time and death. Time passes and stars are also mortal.

> Script de l’enregistrement

Part 1Andy Warhol created Sixteen Jackies in response to the November 1963 assassination of

President John F. Kennedy. This event was largely covered by the media and struck many

people around the world. Warhol painted many public figures. He made silkscreens of all the

personalities of his day. The repetition of the same image clearly suggests Jackie Kennedy was

famous all over the world and that the images of the assassination could be seen everywhere

on newspapers and TV screens.

Part 2The portrait is divided into four parts. The four images of Jacqueline Kennedy were

enlargements of news photographs that appeared in the media. These photographs were

taken from Life Magazine. From top to bottom you can see four important scenes:

– First Jackie is leaving the plane after their arrival in Dallas.

– Then we have a close-up of the First Lady. She is standing stunned beside L.B. Johnson

while he takes the oath just after John Kennedy’s death.

– Later we can see a widow grieving and in mourning at the Capitol in Washington, D.C.

– Finally she is beaming in the limousine before the assassination.

Part 3Sixteen Jackies combines a number of important themes in Warhol’s work. He was fascinated

by stars, public figures and American icons. That’s why he was interested in the mass media

and their impact on people.

Part 4He was also haunted by time and death. This painting tells a tragic story. Before her husband’s

death, Jackie was a happy and smiling young woman. After the assassination she was a grieving

widow. Time passes and stars are also mortal.

2.

3.

4.

5.6.

7.8.9.10.

MANUEL k P. 132

UNIT 10 • 2 1 5

Prolongement possible : Choose an icon representative of your country or our times. Then create

an original Pop Art repetitive portrait of the icon you have chosen.

5. PLEASE

Observe and speak

Cette question pourra être traitée collectivement. Productions possibles : This painting reminds us of a comic strip because of the speech

balloon / bubble at the top. The composition is also characteristic of this painter. He uses

flat primary colours (red, yellow and green), dark lines and thick outlines (as in classic comic

strips). The young girl who may be in her late twenties or thirties is fair-haired / has blond

curly hair. She is wearing red lipstick. She looks sad and miserable. A black-haired woman,

who looks more mature / older, is speaking to her / is comforting her / cheering her up.

It’s a close-up shot of a mother and her daughter.

Informations complémentairesRoy Lichtenstein often used “Ben-day dots”. The Ben-day dots printing process, named

after illustrator and printer Benjamin Day, is similar to Pointillism. Depending on the effect,

colour and optical illusion needed, small coloured dots are closely-spaced, widely-spaced

or overlapping.

La classe pourra être divisée en deux moitiés, qui chacune traitera une partie du tableau.

Productions possibles : a. – On the left-hand side we are given the girl’s stream of consciousness, her interior

monologue: “I tried to see things from Mom and Dad’s viewpoint.”

– She is thinking about her boyfriend, she is trying to forget him, to put this affair out of her

mind. However, she can’t, she is still in love with him, she can’t help thinking about him.

She wishes they were still together. She feels lost and lonely, desperate, down-hearted and

depressed.

– She has just split up with her boyfriend.

b. – On the right-hand side the daughter doesn’t feel like eating, she’d rather be alone. She

wishes her mother could leave her alone. The mother wants to cheer her up because she is

worried about her daughter’s health.

– The mother is worried about her daughter and tries to comfort her / cheer her up whereas

the girl wants to be left alone.

a. The girl must have been dumped, or she may have dumped her boyfriend. They may have

quarrelled, and decided to split up.

b. Cette question donnera lieu à un roleplay. On laissera aux élèves quelques minutes pour

préparer leur dialogue. On vérifiera qu’ils n’ont bien que des notes sous les yeux et non des

phrases complètes.

Productions possibles : “You should forget this boy. He is not worth it! You’d better forget him. Go out, see your

friends, meet people, do what you like.”

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 133-135

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 1 6 • UNIT 10

“I feel drained, I can’t go out, I have no energy left. I don’t want to go out. Don’t you understand

that I need some time to get over all this?”

“Of course we do, darling. But you need some fresh air and new faces.”

“Oh, please, give me a break!”

The girl leaves the room and slams the door.

c. The girl may forget Eddie and fall in love with somebody else. They may also make it up and

be happy ever after.

This is a very familiar situation / a real-life situation / a classic and romantic situation. It is

an everyday life / ordinary crisis. It is quite humorous to read these words, to see this kind

of situation represented in a painting. It is a parody of romantic love stories.

Les élèves pourront faire des montages qu’ils présenteront à la classe et qui seront commentés.

Prolongements possibles :

k Une fois le tableau étudié, on pourra demander aux élèves de préparer une prise de

parole en continu : You are a museum guide and you explain this painting.

k On pourra demander aux élèves de dessiner / créer un portrait à la manière de Roy

Lichtenstein. Le logiciel suivant leur sera très utile : www.photofiltre.com

k Les élèves les plus motivés pourront découvrir un document PowerPoint sur Roy Lichtenstein

à cette adresse : www.teachnet-uk.org.uk/2006 Projects/Art-Presentations/Presentations/ Une fois sur cette page, cliquer à droite sur l’onglet PowerPoint, puis en bas de la page sur The

Work of Roy Lichtenstein.

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

Accentuation sur la première syllabe : photograph • public • figure • icon • contrast (nom) •

popular

Accentuation sur la deuxième syllabe : success • ideal

a. Tous ces mots ont un suffixe commun : -ion et s’accentuent donc sur la syllabe qui précède

ce suffixe.

b. Tous ces mots ont un suffixe commun : -ic et s’accentuent donc sur la syllabe qui précède

ce suffixe.

> Build up your vocabulary

The man is bald, pot-bellied, plump, stout, bearded, sloppy and slouching.

The woman is slim = slender, skinny, tall, attractive, smart = elegant, fashionable, made-up

and long-haired.

4.

5.

1.

2.

1.

2.

Techniques used Colours

identical • contrast • repetition • replicate •

blurred • silkscreen painting

bright • vivid • garish • gaudy

UNIT 10 • 2 1 7

> Le quasi-certain, le possible et l’impossible : must, may / might, can’t

Must n’exprime pas la quasi-certitude dans les énoncés b et d.

Les deux valeurs de must sont la quasi-certitude et l’obligation.

Valeur de can’t dans la 1re phrase : impossibilité, dans la 2e phrase : impossibilité.

a.

b. – The house is empty. The owner is certainly outside. La maison est vide. Le propriétaire

est sûrement dehors.

– There are palm trees in their garden – perhaps they live in Malibu. Il y a des palmiers dans

leur jardin. Ils habitent peut-être à Malibu.

– The girl looks quite young. She is certainly in her twenties. La fille a l’air assez jeune. Elle a

sûrement / certainement entre vingt et trente ans.

– Perhaps she will change her mind and call him. Elle va peut-être changer d’avis et l’appeler.

– The girl has not spoken a word for days. Her parents are certainly worried. La fille n’a pas

parlé depuis des jours. Ses parents doivent être inquiets.

– Perhaps they will make it up one day, but I doubt it. Ils pourraient se réconcilier un jour,

mais j’en doute.

a.

b. On utilise :

– le modal + base verbale pour parler d’un fait situé dans le présent ou l’avenir

– le modal + be + V-ING pour parler d’une action qui se déroule au moment où l’on parle

– le modal + have + participe passé pour parler d’un fait situé dans le passé.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Quasi-certain Possible / peu probable

– The house is empty. The owner must be

outside.

– The girl looks quite young – she must be

in her twenties.

– The girl has not spoken a word for days.

Her parents must be worried.

– There are palm trees in their garden –

they may live in Malibu.

– She may change her mind and call him.

– They might make it up one day, but I

doubt it.

Porte sur le passé Porte sur le présent Porte sur l’avenir

• She doesn’t want to call

Eddy – they must have quarrelled.

• There is nobody at home –

they may have gone shopping.

• He’s such a nice person

– he can’t have said such

horrible things.

• The artist may want to warn

us against overconsumption.

• She doesn’t want to see him

anymore – she must be fed up

with him.

• She may be dreaming.

• She may find another solution soon.

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 1 8 • UNIT 10

> Practice

a. Elle est sans doute fâchée. k must

b. Elle écoutera peut-être ses conseils. k may

c. Elle ne sait pas trop si elle va lui téléphoner. k may / might

d. Elle va peut-être lui téléphoner. k may

e. Il se peut qu’il achète ce tableau. k may

f. Ce tableau ne peut pas être à la Tate Modern, il est trop ancien. k can’t

g. Ce tableau est sûrement au Museum of Modern Art. k must

a. He must be lonely.

b. Her parents must be supportive.

c. Her parents may manage to cheer her up.

d. The woman may be in her forties.

e. He may be abroad.

f. They may know the truth.

g. They must know the truth.

h. He may tell her the whole truth.

a. Il doit être cinéaste.

b. Elle a dû blesser ses sentiments.

c. Il va peut-être lui écrire pour /et s’excuser.

d. Il a peut-être eu une aventure / liaison avec une autre femme.

e. Elle pourrait lui pardonner. / Il se pourrait qu’elle lui pardonne.

Cet exercice pourra être traité à l’écrit ou à l’oral.

Productions possibles : a. The painter is Roy Lichtenstein. This painting is charcacteristic of his style. It looks like a

comic strip with the bubble at the top. The composition is also characteristic of this painter:

He uses flat primary colours, dark lines and thick outlines.

b. The girl may be in an appartment / flat / a loft in Manhattan. There are stairs in the left-

hand corner of the painting. She may be in Manhattan since we can see skyscrapers in the

background. She is obviously thinking about her boyfriend / lover. She is expecting him and

he must be late. He hasn’t turned up. She wonders why he is late.

c. She is wearing gloves because it may be cold / freezing outside. She may also be going to

a party and has to be well-dressed / dressed up. She is also wearing a white raincoat over a

blue low-necked dress / T-shirt.

d. She may be in her late twenties or thirties. She may belong to the upper middle-class since

she lives in a loft in Manhattan. She looks worried / anxious.

e. The man she is waiting for must be an actor or a film director, or a photographer since she

mentions the studio.

f. The man may have been delayed, may have had an accident, may be stuck in a traffic jam,

may still be working because he may be dreadfully / desperately overworked and behind in

his work.

g. He may turn up in a few minutes and apologize / he may call her to tell her he will come

soon or to tell her he is through with her, that he is fed up with her and wants to break up /

finish with her.

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 136-137

UNIT 10 • 2 1 9

YOUR TASK

1. Avant l’écoute

On complétera la grille qui sera (rétro)projetée (disponible sur le site compagnon).

2. Pendant l’écoute

Il s’agit de procéder à une écoute avec prise de notes en parallèle. Avant d’écouter les

audioguides sur Duane Hanson, on fournira le mot suivant : burden et sa signification :

fardeau. Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, on pourra distribuer aux élèves les fiches

récapitulatives suivantes.

Audio guides 1 2 3 4

1. Introduction – nature (painting, sculpture, drawing, date, name of the artist,

art movement)

– dominant theme(s)

2. Striking elements– who? famous? unknown?

– probable job / occupation

– age

– looks

– clothes

– accessories

3. Techniques used by the artist– repetition, contrast, collage

– dominant colours

4. Interpretation– what do the different elements symbolise?

– links with other Pop Art works of art?

– what are the goals of the artist?

– impressions given

5. Overall impressions– informative

– convincing ≠ unconvincing

– well-organized

– complete

– shallow = superficial

– accurate

UNIT

10 LIFE IS ART

2 2 0 • UNIT 10

1. TEN MARILYN

2. TEN MARILYN

3. YOUNG WOMAN SHOPPER

4. YOUNG WOMAN SHOPPER

DateFascination for?Technique usedGoalMain characteristics

Interpretation– Repetition– The black and white portrait

Made of?CharacteristicsWho?Goals?

Impressions Duane Hanson wanted to give?

DateFascination for?Origin of the portraitWhy was Marilyn chosen?Technique usedGoalMain characteristics

Interpretation– Repetition– The black and white portrait

Made of?CharacteristicsWho?Goals?

Impressions Duane Hanson wanted to give?

UNIT 10 • 2 2 1

3. Après l’écoute

On travaillera sur les critères retenus en confrontant les points de vue et en exigeant

toujours une justification du choix.

> Script de l’enregistrement

Ten Marilyn, audio guide 11. Ten Marilyn was painted in 1967. Warhol was fascinated by movie stars such as Marilyn

Monroe. Warhol painted a contemporary figure, a Hollywood icon, a sex symbol. He replicated

the picture several times. The multiple portrait is a comment on our consumer society. We

can’t help noticing the bright, garish colours. We are mesmerized by the portraits. Marilyn

is reduced to her essential features: namely her dyed hair, her heavy make-up, her full and

sensual mouth. The woman is striking because she is reduced to essential features. The

repetition suggests the actress is famous all over the world, is to be seen everywhere, is

omnipresent. It is a clear reference to the star system. The artist is also clearly obsessed by

time and death. One portrait is blurred. The last one is in black and white. The painter also

conveys the impression of a mask, which is perhaps a death mask.

Ten Marilyn, audio guide 22. Ten Marilyn was painted in 1967. Warhol was fascinated by stars such as James Dean

or Michael Jackson. Warhol is best known for his portraits of Marilyn Monroe. He chose

a publicity photo from 1953 and silkscreening to make multiple portaits of the star. He

transformed an ordinary publicity photo into a myth. He painted a contemporary figure, a

Hollywood icon, a sex symbol. He replicated the picture several times. It is meant to make

it impossible for the viewer to feel any emotion. Warhol considered emotion contrary to

art. Marilyn looks lifeless, and doesn’t seem to have any feelings. The multiple portrait is

a comment on our consumer society. We can’t help noticing the bright, garish colours.

Marilyn is striking because she is reduced to her essential features: namely her dyed hair,

her heavy make-up, her full and sensual mouth. The repetition suggests the actress is

famous all over the world, is to be seen everywhere, is omnipresent. It is a clear reference

to the star system. Warhol glorifies the star, and at the same time ridicules the star system

and its mass media consumption. He hints that the viewers are fascinated by appearances

only, that people are turned into consumer goods. The artist is also clearly obsessed by

time and death. One portrait is blurred, and the last is in black and white. The painter also

conveys the impression of a mask, which is perhaps a death mask. It underlines the passing

of time and that stars are also mortal. Pop Art is the art that focused on modern myths.

Young Woman Shopper, audio guide 13. This is a life-size sculpture made of synthetic resin. Duane Hanson added human hair,

dressed the model in real clothes, and gave it real bags to carry. The artist portrays ordinary

Americans. He chose to sculpt average citizens, working-class or middle-class people such as

tourists or shoppers. He wanted to portray real America. People are frozen in their activities.

The sculpture is so realistic that the woman can be mistaken for a living person. The artist

wants to show the effects which the consumer society and lifestyle have on people. When

describing this sculpture Duane Hanson said: “I like the physical burdens this woman carries.

She is weighed down by all her shopping bags and purchases, and she has almost become a

bag herself. She carries physical burdens – the burdens of life, of everyday living.” With her

sad eyes and worn clothes, this woman looks lonely, isolated, and resigned.

2 2 2 • COMPRENDRE UN DOCUMENT ORAL

Young Woman Shopper, audio guide 24. This is a life-size sculpture made of synthetic resin. Duane Hanson added human hair,

dressed the model in real clothes and gave it real bags to carry. The artist portrays ordinary

Americans. People are frozen in their activities. The sculpture is so realistic that the woman

can be mistaken for a living person. When describing this sculpture, Duane Hanson said:

“I like the physical burdens this woman carries. She is weighed down by all her shopping

bags and purchases, and she has almost become a bag herself. She carries physical

burdens – the burdens of life, of everyday living.” With her sad eyes and worn clothes, this

woman looks lonely, isolated, and resigned. We are shown slices of real life. For Duane

Hanson, men live lives of quiet desperation. The sculptor focuses on the resignation and

despair of ordinary lives.

COMPRENDRE UN DOCUMENT ORAL

CORRIGÉ

1. Anticipez avant l’écoute.a. L’enregistrement n° 1 va parler de la victoire de cyclistes anglais aux Jeux olympiques de

Pékin. Cet enregistrement va parler de sport, de cyclisme, des Jeux olympiques de Pékin.

b. Réponse libre.

c. des informations à la radio • une remise de médaille ou de récompense

2. Jouez au détective.a. On entend une musique joyeuse dans un cadre public, des cris de joie, des applaudissements

et des sifflets.

b. Il y a trois voix adultes, une voix féminine et deux voix masculines.

c. Elles traduisent des sentiments de joie. La première voix est également solennelle.

d. L’accent britannique domine, notamment chez la jeune femme.

e. La scène se passe en Angleterre, au moment d’une remise de prix. Les personnes présentes

sont les membres de l’équipe féminine de cyclisme, même si une seule d’entre elles prend

la parole. Sont également présents le présentateur de la cérémonie et la personne qui annonce

le nom du gagnant et remet le trophée.

3. Affinez votre compréhension.a. team • gold • silver • bronze • medallist • honour • sporting • heroes • bikes • strong •

successful

b.

c. Victoria Pendleton a dû gagner la médaille d’or aux Jeux olympiques.

d. we, us = the cycling team • they = the support team

e. Elle parle au nom de toute l’équipe de cyclisme et les remercie pour la récompense

qui leur a été attribuée. Elle se dit honorée d’être en présence de tous ces champions.

Elle tient aussi à remercier toute l’équipe qui les soutient et leur permet de remporter des

succès.

A.

MANUEL k P. 138-139

Cycling Athletes Rewards Competitionsteam • bikes sporting • heroes gold • silver • bronze •

medallist

honour • strong •

successful

COMPRENDRE UN DOCUMENT ORAL • 2 2 3

> Script de l’enregistrement

Presenter: Mr Hanson, put your glasses on and tell us the results.

Mr Hanson: The team of the year is... the British Olympic cycling team!

Music, cheers, applause

Presenter: I…’ll hold it for you if you want…

V. Pendleton: Oh well…

Presenter: You can say a few words…

V. Pendleton: Thank you very much, I think I am speaking on behalf of, you know, the whole

Olympic team, the gold medallist, the silver medallist, the bronze medallist and also everyone

who did fantastically well in the Manchester World Championship. It’s an honour to be here

among so many sporting heroes and champions… um… But it’s not only for us and those who

ride our bikes, but everyone behind us as I’ve mentioned. Our support team is very strong and

they give us as much as we do to make us as successful as we are. So I’d like to say thank

you to those guys as well, I’m sure the rest of the team will agree.

Presenter: Victoria Pendleton and the Olympic cycling team!

1. Repérez des chiffres.c. Voir mots en gras dans le script ci-dessous.

> Script de l’enregistrement

The resident population of the UK was 60,975,000 in mid-2007. England is the most populous

part of the UK, with 49 million inhabitants. Almost one third of England’s people live in the

southeast, around London. 5 million people live in Scotland. 75 percent of the population in

Scotland is concentrated in the lowland area where Glasgow and Edinburgh are located. Wales,

with 2.9 million people, is also mountainous. Since 1997, the government has been pursuing

a policy of devolution, leading in 1999 to an elected Scottish parliament and Welsh assembly.

In 2000, Londoners elected their first mayor and assembly. The 2001 census counted more

than 2.5 million Asians (mostly Indians and Pakistanis) and 1.1 million Blacks (from Africa and

the Caribbean). The life expectancy is 78. The literacy rate is 99 percent.

2. Repérez les mots utilisés.Voir mots en gras dans le script ci-dessous.

> Script de l’enregistrement

1. There are so many traffic jams. 7. You’ve just missed him.

2. Their father is abroad. 8. You’re an angel.

3. They’re on holiday. 9. Your glasses are in the kitchen.

4. He has just left. 10. Who’s that man over there?

5. He is so funny. 11. Whose idea is it?

6. His sense of humour is wonderful. 12. Who’s just phoned?

3. Repérez le ton de voix utilisé. 1c • 2a • 3d • 4b • 5f • 6e

B.

2 2 4 • COMPRENDRE UN DOCUMENT ORAL

> Script de l’enregistrement

1. What on earth is going on here? Behave yourself for God’s sake!

2. Oh, did you have to be so rude with her? She is an old person you know.

3. He’s such a poor actor. He doesn’t even learn his part and he looks like an idiot.

4. Well I never thought he could be qualified! Him, of all people...

5. How nice of you, I’m thrilled.

6. Too bad, it’s a pity you can’t stay. Everybody says it’s going to be fun.

4. Repérez les liaisons. a. When I was a child, we used to move a lot throughout the country. After moving to a new

town, we would immediately go to the library to get membership and as many books as we

could.

b. After that, we would do nothing but read all day long and we enjoyed listening to my

mother reading to us in the evening. That’s how I got a passion for books and all kinds of

literature.

> Script de l’enregistrement

My parents did not have the benefit of college. They didn’t get to go to college. They were

from a very rural part of the Middle West. College to them was always a dream. For us, it

was always a requirement. We knew – because they told us – we’d go to college. And they

worked very hard to pay for it, and to provide it for all four kids. And I was the first member

of my family to graduate from college, and to get a degree in physics, and to start teaching.

And my parents were very proud. To me, that’s the American Dream, for one generation to

keep building the dream for later generations.

C.

A WORLD OF GEEKSUNIT

11

UNIT 11 • 2 2 5

A world of geeksS’exprimer à l’oral en interaction : les descripteurs du CECRL

Niveau A2 Niveau B1

Grille d’auto-évaluation

Je suis capable d’interagir avec

assez d’aisance dans des situations structurées et de courtes conversations à condition que

l’interlocuteur m’aide le cas échéant.

Je suis capable de faire face à des

échanges courants simples.Je peux poser des questions, répondre à des questions et échanger

des idées et des renseignements

sur des sujets familiers dans des

situations prévisibles de la vie

quotidienne (travail, loisirs…).

Je suis capable de comprendre

suffisamment pour alimenter la

conversation.

Je peux développer une argumentation claire en élargissant et confirmant mes points de vue par des arguments et exemples pertinents (sujets

d’actualité, de débat…).

Je peux prendre part sans préparation à une conversation

sur des sujets familiers, d’intérêt

personnel ou qui concernent la vie

quotidienne.

Je peux intervenir pour vérifier et confirmer le détail d’une information.

Je peux engager, soutenir et clore

une conversation en tête à tête sur

des sujets familiers ou d’intérêt

personnel.

Cohérence du discours / contenu

Discours peu développé, les

connecteurs logiques utilisés sont

simples : « et », « mais », et « parce

que ».

Produit un discours simple, clair et

cohérent. Peut enchaîner quelques

points et donner des explications,

présenter des arguments.

Interaction Peut répondre à des questions

simples, peut suivre une

conversation simple sans pouvoir

l’alimenter.

Peut comprendre son interlocuteur,

soutenir une conversation (la

commencer, la poursuivre, la clore)

sur des sujets familiers.

Peut répéter une partie de ce que

quelqu’un a dit pour confirmer la

compréhension ou rebondir sur les

arguments.

Peut faire de brefs commentaires

sur les points de vue des autres

pendant une discussion.

Adaptation au contexte

Peut communiquer lors d’un échange

simple et direct sur des sujets familiers.

Sait utiliser des formules de politesse

pour entrer en contact avec l’autre.

Aisance à l’oral

Peut se faire comprendre dans une

brève intervention, les pauses

et les faux démarrages sont

acceptés.

Peut parler relativement longtemps

avec un débit assez régulier malgré

quelques problèmes de formulation

avec des pauses.

Peut continuer à parler sans aide.

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

2 2 6 • UNIT 11

Afin d’ouvrir la partie du manuel consacrée à l’expression orale en interaction, nous avons

choisi un thème à propos duquel les élèves ne manqueront pas de trouver facilement des

arguments et sur lequel ils auront forcément un avis. En outre, il nous semblait impossible

de traiter les points « Échanges » et « Lien social » du programme sans aborder le domaine

des ordinateurs, des téléphones portables et autres jeux vidéo.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Participer à un débat sur les nouvelles

technologies

Échanges • Lien social

k actions quotidiennes liées aux

technologies : Internet, ordinateur

et téléphone portable (p. 144)

k avantages et inconvénients du téléphone portable (p. 146-147)k addiction à l’ordinateur (p. 145) et aux jeux vidéo (p. 148-149)

k la forme V-ing (p. 152-153)

k les sons \i…\ et \I\ (p. 151)

k l’accentuation des mots à suffixe contraignant -ian, -ion, -ic,-ity et -ible (p. 151)k dictée (p. 151)

k donner son opinion / argumenter

k convaincre

k donner des conseils

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

Niveau A2 Niveau B1

Phonologie Prononciation en général

suffisamment claire pour être

comprise malgré un net accent

français, mais l’interlocuteur devra

parfois faire répéter.

Prononciation clairement

intelligible même si un accent

étranger est quelquefois perceptible

et si des erreurs de prononciation

surviennent occasionnellement.

Correction grammaticale

Utilise des structures simples

correctement, mais fait encore des

erreurs élémentaires qui ne gênent

pas le sens.

Peut se servir avec une correction

suffisante d’un répertoire

de tournures et expressions

fréquemment utilisées et associées

à des situations plutôt prévisibles.

UNIT 11 • 2 2 7

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser

la tâche finale. Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et

que les exercices Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

Lire

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Écouter

Manuel

k Are you a geek?, quiz (p.144) k Cellphone mania, articles de presse

(p.146)k Computer kids, article de presse

(p.148)

k discuter des résultats du quiz Are you a geek? (p. 144)k commenter un document iconographique

(p. 145, 146, 147, 148, 149 et 150)

k débattre des avantages et inconvénients des téléphones portables (p. 147)k role play (p. 147) k débattre de l’addiction aux jeux vidéos (p. 149)k échanger des points de vue sur un

cartoon (p. 150)

k Your task (p.154)

k présenter les résultats du quiz Are you

a geek? (p. 144)

k commenter un document iconographique

(p. 145, 147, 148, 149 et 150)

k faire le compte rendu d’un article (p. 147)

k décrire et commenter un cartoon (p. 153)

k Growing up online (p. 149)

k site compagnon, U11–Dialogue:

A techie chef

Workbook

X

X

X

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

MANUEL k P. 144

2 2 8 • UNIT 11

TUNE IN!

1. Are you a geek?

Cette activité sera menée rapidement.

k On insistera sur la bonne prononciation du mot geek et on demandera aux élèves de le

traduire ou de l’expliquer en anglais. On pourra proposer les définitions suivantes :

– A person who is interested in technology, especially computing and new media. The word

“geek” is a slang term, noting individuals as “a peculiar or otherwise odd person, especially

one who is perceived to be overly obsessed with one or more things including those of

intellectuality, electronics”.

– A computer expert or enthusiast (a term of pride as self-reference, but often considered

offensive when used by outsiders).

k Puis on laissera le temps nécessaire aux élèves pour répondre individuellement aux

questions du quiz sur leur cahier ou une feuille de brouillon.

2. Confront your results

> Mises en œuvre possibles : nous vous suggérons ici un travail en groupes (les groupes

étant constitués selon le désir du professeur) plutôt qu’en binômes, car les échanges seront

plus riches.

a. Les membres de chaque groupe se consultent et confrontent leurs résultats, puis un élève

de chaque groupe joue le rôle de rapporteur pour rendre compte d’au moins trois résultats

révélateurs de son groupe (en utilisant la première série d’amorces données dans le manuel).

Productions possibles : In my group, only one of us doesn’t own a computer but we all have

a mobile phone.

Three students out of five spend more than two hours a day on their computer.

We spend about two hours a day checking e-mails or chatting on the computer.

To me, it’s amazing to see how many hours we spend chatting on our mobiles!

b. À tour de rôle, chaque rapporteur prend la parole et le reste de la classe réagit aux conclusions

des uns et des autres en utilisant la seconde série d’amorces.

La trace écrite sera construite à partir des énoncés produits par les élèves.

Productions possibles : In the class, thirty-two students out of thirty-six have a cellphone. We

use it at night or in the evening to talk with our friends. We use it at the weekend when we go

out to ask our parents to come and pick us up after a party. We also use our cellphones to listen

to music and to wake us up in the morning, as an alarm clock.

In my group, everybody has a computer at home. X plays video games five hours a day. She

spends too much time on her computer. We come back from school at 5 p.m. and we go to bed

at 10.30 p.m. so, on average, we have 5 hours a day when we are not at school. If we spend

five hours on the computer, we don’t have time to do our homework or to eat. So we have bad

marks at school and we eat junk food in front of the computer.

Video games are time-consuming, when we start playing, we can’t stop. Video games are

addictive. Some people are addicted to video games, but not everybody, because X only plays

on weekends. It is true that these games are captivating.

MANUEL k P. 145

UNIT 11 • 2 2 9

Prolongement possible : on pourra enfin procéder à un travail de mémorisation du lexique

de base en demandant aux élèves de fermer leur livre et de traduire, à l’écrit ou à l’oral, les

phrases suivantes.

1. J’ai mon propre ordinateur.

2. J’utilise mon ordinateur pour chercher des informations.

3. As-tu un téléphone portable ? (pour « téléphone portable », demander un mot britannique

et un mot américain)

4. J’envoie souvent des messages à mes amis.

Corrigé

1. I have my own computer.

2. I use my computer to search information.

3. Do you have a mobile / mobile phone (GB), cellphone / cell / cellular phone (US).

4. I often send messages / text messages to my friends. / I often text my friends.

1. THE HIKER

N. B. : ce document iconographique est reproduit sur le transparent n° 10 et est accompagné

d’une fiche d’exploitation.

1. Get ready

Si ce travail n’est pas préparé à la maison, on pourra laisser aux élèves un temps de réflexion

pour trouver des arguments. Ils pourront s’appuyer sur la p. 88 du Workbook.

On pourra organiser la classe en trois groupes :

– the do-nothing type of vacation

– sports-orientated people

– cultural / educational holidays

Pour préparer à la tâche finale, on encouragera les élèves à confronter leurs points de vue

en reprenant les structures de l’accord et du désaccord. Si nécessaire, les renvoyer aux

expressions de la p. 154 du manuel qui seront utiles au débat.

Productions possibles : I’m not sports-orientated, I love sunbathing, bathing, lying in the

sun on a beach. I love blue skies, palm trees, blue waters, deckchairs, swimming-pools,

reading a book by a swimming-pool and getting tanned.

I enjoy hiking, hill-walking, mountaineering, walking along deserted trails, breathing some

fresh air, being away from it all. Being on holiday means physical exercise and life in the open,

camping, rock-climbing.

I prefer visiting a country, going sightseeing, seeing monuments with my own eyes, visiting

museums, meeting the natives, discovering exotic places, new customs.

Les différents arguments seront synthétisés au tableau et constitueront la trace écrite.

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

2 3 0 • UNIT 11

2. Observe and speak

a. On invitera les élèves à travailler individuellement et à ne prendre que des notes en trace

écrite, pas des phrases entières. Ils utiliseront le Help! ainsi que le tableau proposé dans le

Workbook p. 88. Ce travail peut aussi être préparé à la maison.

Attention, beaucoup d’élèves prendront cette illustration au premier degré et en concluront

que cet homme a besoin de s’isoler pour étudier dans le calme.

Productions possibles : The cartoon is based on a contrast between the man and his

surroundings. He should enjoy the peace and quiet of the place, enjoy nature, have a rest, a real

break from work and his office. He should relax / unwind. On holiday, people usually want to

escape the routine of their daily life, to have a change from home. He should be lying in the grass

and looking at the magnificent landscape behind him. It looks so peaceful. And yet he is turning

his back on the beautiful scenery and is typing on his computer while hiking. He has carried all the

necessary equipment in his backpack, which must have been very heavy: his laptop, his webcam,

his headphones... He looks ridiculous. This situation is absurd / preposterous. The cartoonist

underlines that this man is a computer addict. Instead of enjoying nature, he is engrossed in

working on his computer. This man is a geek, a computer nerd. With his headphones on, he can’t

hear the bird singing next to him. He is pathetic and hopeless. He needs a cold-turkey treatment as

soon as possible. He will certainly suffer from withdrawal symptoms.

b. et c. Ces deux questions pourront être traitées en même temps.

k On reprendra préalablement les quatre exemples donnés dans la bulle des amorces et

on les fera compléter par quelques élèves en insistant sur la forme be + ing lorsqu’elle est

nécessaire et sur la forme négative.

Productions possibles : This hiker shouldn’t carry his laptop in the mountains / when he

goes hiking. This geek should listen to the birds. He’d better look at the landscape. He should

be walking and enjoying nature.

k On demandera ici aux élèves de trouver au moins trois conseils à donner au randonneur.

Ceci peut se faire collectivement.

k On pourra également mettre en place un jeu de rôles : The man is talking to a friend who

disapproves of his behaviour and gives him advice.

Productions possibles : Are you nuts / crazy / mad? This is incredible! You had better stop

immediately and enjoy nature and fresh air. I’m sure you can do without your computer for a

few days.

You are addicted to your work or games on your laptop. You should have a break.

If I were you, I would breathe and look around instead of doing something you can do at

home. Stop this immediately!

k Enfin, on demandera aux élèves de trouver un titre à ce cartoon.

Productions possibles : A computer nerd – Logged on in nature – Preposterous behaviour –

What a shame!

MANUEL k P. 146-147

UNIT 11 • 2 3 1

2. CELLPHONE MANIA

Anticipation

k Les illustrations de la p. 136 pourront donner lieu à un entraînement à la prise de parole

en continu et à un jeu Just a minute inspiré de l’Académie de Caen (Débats Citoyens, Quelques

activités d’entraînement possibles). On divisera la classe en deux moitiés et on attribuera une

image à chaque groupe. À l’intérieur du groupe, les élèves travailleront individuellement ou par

binômes. Un rapporteur prendra la parole et le reste du groupe complètera éventuellement

ce qui a été dit. On demandera aux rapporteurs de parler pendant une minute sans s’arrêter.

Il / Elle peut hésiter et employer des gap fillers, mais ne doit pas se répéter. Un time-keeper

vérifiera que toutes ces règles sont suivies. Si un élève ne parvient pas à tenir le temps

demandé ou à respecter les règles, on recommencera avec un autre rapporteur.

k On pourra demander à des élèves de prendre des notes, qui pourront ensuite être

(rétro)projetées pour être corrigées et enrichies par la classe entière.

Productions possibles : – First picture: The girl’s eyes and mouth are replaced by mobile phones. That may mean

that she cannot speak and see by herself anymore. She is addicted to her phone, she can’t

do without it. She and her friends don’t communicate directly anymore, only on / through the

phone. She has no eyes, no brain, she has become a non-person, she is no longer a human

being, she has lost her freedom / is alienated.

– Second picture: The wall has got eyes watching the shadow of a teenager / girl. These eyes

might symbolize parents or friends always knowing where you are, thanks to the mobile phone.

The eyes are threatening. This reminds me of George Orwell’s Big Brother: It is an authoritarian

regime, a dictatorship. Big Brother is watching citizens all the time and tracking them. It reminds

me of the Thought police who arrest Winston in the book. With this device, nothing can go

unnoticed, people can’t escape / flee. This seems to be an eye detector that could prevent

everyone from doing what they want freely. People have no private life, no inner life.

1. Understanding the articles

Le professeur divisera la classe en deux groupes et demandera à chaque groupe de lire un

texte puis de recopier la grille de la p. 147 sur leur cahier ou une feuille de brouillon et, bien

sûr, de la remplir.

Productions possibles :

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

2 3 2 • UNIT 11

2. Pros and cons

k À partir de cette synthèse, on pourra demander un compte rendu oral au rapporteur de

chaque groupe.

Productions possibles : – Text A: Our article deals with a cellphone device which offers a virtual girlfriend for / to

men who have difficulty finding the right girl for them / are tired of looking for the right girl.

This device allows you to take her wherever you want. The virtual girlfriend is always available,

agrees with everything you do, loves being pampered, can speak different foreign languages.

The designer praises the advantages of such a device.

– Text B: Our article deals with a device that allows / enables parents to follow their children

thanks to the Internet or programs in their cellphones. With this device, parents can follow

their children on their way to school or to a friend’s. One mother has mixed feelings about it.

On the one hand she feels reassured, but on the other hand she fears she might infringe upon

her daughter’s freedom. Parents will know the exact location of their children and are warned

A virtual girlfriend Surveillance

Specificity of this cellphone

offers a virtual girlfriend – Cellphones are tracked by

satellite and enable parents

to watch their children thanks

to the Internet.

– Parents can program

their children’s phones with

boundaries not to be crossed.

Potential buyers and users

irritated men, tired of finding the right

girlfriend

anxious parents

Advantages of this new device

– She goes wherever you go.

– You can take her wherever you want.

– She loves to be given virtual flowers /

doesn’t need to be given real flowers

or chocolates.

– If you travel, she can translate six

languages.

– She lives in a virtual world.

– You can practise before having a real

girlfriend.

– Parents can monitor their

children’s location.

– Make sure your children

arrive safely at school or at

friends’.

– Parents get text messages /

are warned if their children are

not within the right perimeter

anymore.

Problems caused by this device

– People can think it’s for losers.

– You don’t have a real girlfriend.

– Parents can be too intrusive

in their children’s lives.

– It’s like Big Brother.

– Children are tracked.

– (It might not always work.)

Your opinion on this device

totally ludicrous / pathetic / funny /

original

disrespectful / useless

UNIT 11 • 2 3 3

if their children are not in the right place. It reminds us of Big Brother. Besides, a kid might be

fed up and want to get rid of this chain.

k La discussion sur les avantages et les inconvénients donnera lieu à un travail en groupes

ou en binômes. Un rapporteur (ou plusieurs) sera choisi dans chaque groupe et les éléments

de réponses seront synthétisés par les élèves soit dans leur cahier, soit au fur et à mesure

dans la grille fournie page précédente (rétroprojetée à l’aide d’un transparent ou reproduite

au tableau).

k On peut aussi mettre en place une activité proposée par l’Académie de Caen et intitulée

Circular debate. On fixe un nombre impair d’élèves (5 par exemple) dans chaque groupe et

chaque élève avance un argument qui est immédiatement contredit par l’élève qui a parlé

avant lui.

k Enfin, on peut organiser un Yes-but game. Deux rangées d’élèves A et B se font face.

L’élève A avance un argument et retourne à la fin de la file des A. L’élève B qui lui fait face doit

avancer un argument contraire et va lui aussi à la fin de la file des B. L’équipe gagnante est

celle qui a trouvé le plus d’arguments lorsque le jeu est déclaré terminé par le professeur (dès

que celui-ci sent que les élèves sont à court d’idées).

k Quel que soit le type de débat, on encouragera les élèves à utiliser les expressions de

communication de la p. 144 et on utilisera la p. 89 du Workbook pour enrichir l’expression.

Productions possibles : – Debate text A: “I believe it’s a shame! Boys don’t need to have a virtual girlfriend, it’s ludicrous, they’d better

chat real ones up! This is absurd / nonsense / rubbish! No way!”

“Exactly, this is pathetic: Teenagers had better be nice to their girlfriends and try to understand

them.”

“Why don’t they find real girlfriends and learn how to deal with them?”

“I see your point but, on the other hand, it can be useful to get good ideas for your future

girlfriend.”

“You must be joking! If I were the girlfriend of a boy who uses this device, I wouldn’t let him

use it: It would be the device or me!”

“I believe that some very shy people may find it handy / reassuring, it could give them more

confidence afterwards in real life.”

– Debate text B: “Parents had better try to talk more to their children.”

“It is alarming! Some parents feel the need to have this kind of device instead of trusting their

own children.”

“I totally disagree, they can trust them but still want to use modern technology for security /

safety reasons. What’s more, parents always worry and want to know where their kids are.”

3. Role play

a. L’analyse de cette image pourra donner lieu à une prise de parole en continu en début de

cours par exemple.

Productions possibles : The boy with a flashy and colourful shirt has a mobile phone around

his neck. It’s locked around his neck with a chain that could symbolize his attachment to the

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

MANUEL k P. 148-149

2 3 4 • UNIT 11

phone, maybe his dependence. He probably cannot live without it. He’s like a dog with his

lead: never out of reach and constantly attached to his phone. He can be contacted at any

time even in the middle of the night. His phone must be on all day long. He is the symbol of

an addict. It’s humorous but effective. We can’t see his face, and the photographer did it on

purpose, because many people can identify with him.

b. Le professeur partagera la classe en deux groupes. Chacun préparera des arguments pour :

– un(e) ami(e) qui veut un(e) petit(e) ami(e) virtuel(le) ;

– des parents intéressés par le nouveau type de surveillance décrit dans le texte B.

Les amorces proposées dans le Workbook p. 89 (question 2 b.) ainsi que le vocabulaire

du Help! p. 147 du manuel aideront les élèves à enrichir leur expression.

Productions possibles :– To your friend who wants a virtual girlfriend or boyfriendCome off it! You can’t possibly compare a real girlfriend and a virtual one. It’s a total waste of

money!

If you choose a virtual girlfriend, you will practise before having a real one.

Do you see yourself with a virtual programme, talking to it and pretending it’s your girlfriend?

It’s just a substitute, you can’t live in a world of fantasy!

How can you imagine it’s the same thing as building a relationship and having a real girlfriend?

Have you ever thought about the loss of time / fun it could be?

Why don’t you try it for a while and see what you think about it?

Why don’t you get out more often and try to find yourself a real boyfriend and build a relationship?

Such a device is risky if you spend too much time on it. There is a real lack of warmth, it’s not

a real relationship.

Be careful, you can become cut off from the real world instead of facing reality.

– To parents who want to adopt cellphone surveillanceYou always are on my back, trying to trace me wherever I go!

I understand you want to feel reassured because you’re afraid of losing me but I will feel

watched and tracked.

I know it’s for my safety and your peace of mind and you think this is for my own good but

I am reliable.

But I think it’s too disrespectful. This will limit my freedom and you will be spying on me!

Don’t you think that it could be easier to trust me and not prevent me from going where I want

when I want?

What about my freedom and sense of responsibility?

Stop worrying and imagining the worst!

3. TURN IT OFF!

Anticipation

On utilisera l’image de la p. 148 du manuel en anticipation.

Productions possibles : The boy in the foreground is fascinated by the game he is playing.

He is computer-addicted. He is glued to the screen. He is hooked on computer games. He is

the perfect image of a couch potato. He is sitting comfortably in a huge green armchair. He

can’t spend much time outside. He can download all the software programmes he wants and

UNIT 11 • 2 3 5

may have no contact with the outside world. He lives in a virtual world which has replaced the

real one. He may be computer-dependent. It may have consequences on his health, he may

become overweight, obese if he doesn’t do any exercise / practise any sport. The two boys

are not playing with each other, but with computers. Their computers may isolate children

from one another, from their brothers and sisters, from their parents.

1. Understanding the text

a. Corrigé proposé :

– Amsterdam: a clinic in Amsterdam (l. 4)

– Utrecht: Tim, 21, is from Utrecht (l. 15)

– Britain: Two teenagers from Britain will be treated in the clinic (l. 6)

– America and Asia: Where other sufferers come from (l. 7)

– China and South Korea: Two countries where people are particularly passionate about

computer games (l. 21)

b. Pour classer les expressions, on pourra les noter en deux colonnes au tableau d’après les

réponses des élèves, puis donner une minute de préparation pour la recherche d’un titre

approprié pour chaque colonne.

Corrigé proposé :

c. Pour la recherche d’informations concernant Tim, on pourra demander à plusieurs élèves

de répondre dans l’ordre aux items, puis à un autre élève de reprendre le tout en Recap

et d’en faire une phrase.

Productions possibles : Tim is a 21-year-old Dutchman and is obese, he weighs more than

31 stone. His parents are worried about him and frightened of him. His only hobby is to play

computer games.

2. Follow-up work

a. Productions possibles :– Could you live without video games?

– How many hours a day do you play?

– Don’t you miss your friends if you don’t see them?

– What is the most important thing for you: hanging out with your friends or playing video

games?

– Do you think you lead a normal life?

– Do you see yourself as an addict?

Addiction and its consequences / Isolation due to video games

Forgetting the computer / Treatment

– some have given up school (l. 10)

– don’t speak to their parents (l. 10)

– whose lives have been taken over by

an addiction (l. 8)

– no friends (l. 10)

– parachuting trip (l. 12)

– meditation, fitness training and group

therapy (l. 13)

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

2 3 6 • UNIT 11

b. Corrigé : shy • withdrawn • self-centred • ill-at-ease • awkward • immature

Ces adjectifs pourront faire l’objet d’une mémorisation avant d’être utilisés dans des phrases.

c. Productions possibles : In their everyday lives, these teenagers don’t even care about their

relationships anymore; some drop out of school, others become withdrawn and don’t have

friends at all or don’t speak to their parents anymore. Even their comfort doesn’t matter

anymore: They don’t tidy up their rooms and they may eat junk food. They probably don’t

care about their appearance and dress sloppily. Their health must be jeopardized: Their eyes

must ache after spending hours in front of a screen and they must suffer from headaches.

No physical exercise may endanger their health / could have consequences on their health.

Such addicts are likely to have heart diseases particularly if they keep putting on weight. They

are so self-centred that they are not interested in anything else. They must be furious / mad

if someone interrupts their game.

d. Les propositions de solutions pourront se travailler d’abord individuellement, puis en

confrontant ses idées à celles des autres élèves du même groupe ou du reste de la classe.

Productions possibles : I reckon that parents could try to reduce the number of hours their

children spend in front of the computer. They should force themselves and exercise a little.

Even if it’s difficult, why don’t they go away for a weekend with their family? Yoga might be

a good solution for them. It would compel them to focus on what is really important. They

should do some physical training / practise a sport. If I were them, I’d go on a diet / I’d stop

eating junk food / I’d start going out with some friends.

3. Discuss

Les amorces fournies p. 90 du Workbook ainsi que le vocabulaire du Help! et les amorces

p. 149 du manuel constitueront une aide précieuse dans le cadre de ce premier mini débat.

Celui-ci donnera lieu à un travail écrit ou oral.

k Travail écrit : on pourra diviser la classe en deux et demander à chaque groupe de trouver

un maximum d’arguments. La production d’un élève pourra être (rétro)projetée, corrigée et

enrichie collectivement.

k Travail oral : les mises en œuvre décrites p. 233 pourront être réutilisées ici (Circular

debate, Yes-but game).

Productions possibles :– Yes, computer games can be addictive“Recent studies suggest / prove / show that spending too much time playing computer

games can really become an addiction. Today we know that it can become an addiction

like alcohol or drugs or other illegal substances. Just imagine the damage! It’s a distracting

activity, worse than watching TV! If you spend too many hours playing, then you will become

more and more obsessed. Playing too much on your computer may become addictive if

nobody is there to stop you and your mood can change but don’t you think that an addiction

is something serious and, as such, can be harmful?”

“Indeed, it may be unhealthy because you don’t go out so much, see your friends or do any

other activity.”

“You’re right, what’s more, teenagers who have no limits can become addicted like junkies:

They need to continue the game and they just can’t stop!”

“It can be dangerous for your psychological and emotional health and lead to health disorders.

You can become moody and the consequences for your social life can be huge / dramatic!”

UNIT 11 • 2 3 7

– No, computer games aren’t addictive“It can become addictive but only if you exaggerate and spend all your time playing.”

“I see your point but ‘gamers’ are not like junkies, it’s not a drug! Don’t you think that people

exaggerate when they say it’s like taking drugs? It’s entertaining first of all, you can have fun

whenever you want, even if your friends are not around. On the other hand, it can develop

your imagination and certain skills or reflexes.”

“I totally believe that it depends on how long you play. If you know when to stop, it’s funny and it

can increase your imagination. Youngsters / Young people can really enjoy themselves / have

a great time thanks to computer games. They can take pleasure in playing and discovering new

adventures and new graphics corresponding to new worlds!”

4. Growing up online

Productions possibles (exploitation de l’image) :It’s a close-up shot of a teenager’s face. What immediately catches the eye are the purple and the

green colours. Our attention is also focused on the eyes. The teenager’s eyes look like a screen:

They are square. He / She is expressionless. The atmosphere is spooky. This person is glued to

the screen. The light is artificial. His / Her nose looks weird because it has lost its shape. This

makes the teenager look dehumanised. It may suggest she / he is addicted to the screen and has

lost contact with the real world. It may also mean that computer addicts are alienated.

> Script de l’enregistrement

➼ Part 1Journalist: Why are Facebook or social networking sites so popular?

Doctor: It is fun to meet people in cyberspace, to communicate with other people who have

the same interests throughout the world. Humans need to communicate. Computers also

offer us a form of escape and diversion, which can be healthy to a certain extent.

Journalist: Where are the dangers then?

Doctor: Some online users may begin living artificial lives. They can create their own virtual

world. They can have different personalities online. Teenagers who are shy and insecure

can hide their appearance, and assume a completely different personality. They don’t feel

inhibited. It raises their self-confidence. Actually the computer has become an outlet for

self-expression.

➼ Part 2Journalist: What about parents? Do they have any control?

Doctor: Online teenagers are out of their reach. They can’t control who their kids are talking

with, what they are saying or doing, what photos or videos they are showing to other peole,

what websites they’re visiting. There is no parental control. Kids have relationships that are

totally invisible to parents. They live in a world that is hidden from their parents.

➼ Part 3Journalist: How do parents react to this?

Doctor: They fear for their kids’ safety.

Journalist: You mean who’s at the other end?

Doctor: Absolutely, they wonder if this person is normal, or if the person their children are

chatting with is a psychopath or a potential murderer. Some parents don’t know their kids

have an online personality. Nobody watches what they do. So some of them think they can

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

2 3 8 • UNIT 11

do whatever they want, show any photo or video of themselves and their friends. Some can

be shocking and some parents wonder if wicked people can’t have access to these photos

and do their kids harm. Some kids are addicted to the Internet, because they no longer feel

complete without computer interaction and their online personalities.

Journalist: Thank you very much.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 90-91)

➼ PART 1

Question 1: networking • popular Question 2: dangers

meet • communicate • interests • escape • diversion • artificial • create • virtual •

insecure • self-confidence

It is fun to meet people in cyberspace and to communicate with other people who have the same interests throughout the world.

Computers offer a form of escape and diversion.

Some users may begin living / live artificial lives and create virtual worlds and have

different personalities online.

Teenagers who are insecure can assume a completely different person.

Computers have become indispensable for shy people because it raises their self-confidence.

➼ PART 2

control

out of reach • parental

➼ PART 3

a. fear • safety

b. psychopath • a potential murderer

c. Some parents fear for their children’s safety.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.6.7.

8.

9.

Advantages of these sites Drawbacks of these sites

meet • communicate • interests •

escape • diversion • self-confidence

artificial • create • virtual • insecure

Activities online – are talking

– showing photos or videos

– visiting websites

Relationships with parents – are out of reach (of their parents)

– totally invisible relationships with their parents

Activities Consequences– have an online personality

– show photos

– show videos

– nobody’s watching what they’re doing

they think they can do whatever they want

MANUEL k P. 150

UNIT 11 • 2 3 9

4. TECH I.T. EASY

1. Observe and speak

> Mise en œuvre

Ce travail peut être préparé à la maison ou donné en classe entière. Si l’on opte pour un

travail de groupe :

– diviser la classe en quatre groupes qui se concentreront chacun sur un cartoon

– demander ensuite à au moins deux rapporteurs dans chaque groupe de faire un compte

rendu oral et d’analyser les intentions du dessinateur

– demander éventuellement aux élèves qui écoutent de prendre des notes et de les

reformuler au style indirect. On invitera les élèves à utiliser les amorces suivantes : You said

that… You told us that… You mentioned that… May I ask you why you said that… You made a

good point when you said that…

– charger certains élèves de remplir une grille, une partie remplira la colonne similarities

tandis que l’autre complètera la colonne differences.

N.B. : les structures du but seront introduites et / ou rebrassées : The cartoonist’s goal is

to inform the viewer / to sensitize us to / to alert us to / to make us aware of / to warn the

public about the dangers of...

Productions possibles :– Cartoon 1: The first character mentions to the other one that he’s trying to overcome

his computer addiction by having a CD-ROM put as a patch on his shoulder. This victim of

computers is aware of his addiction and wants to get rid of it. He must quit playing video games

or surfing on the Internet for his health. In the first cartoon, the cartoonist aims at making fun of

players by comparing them to heavy smokers who need to quit their bad habit. He also wants

to alert us to the dangers of computers / to the fact that computers have deeply transformed

people’s lives / to a serious issue: computer-addiction.

– Cartoon 2: In the second cartoon, the artist’s goal is to highlight the intrusion of computers

in our everyday life. It has an impact on people’s love life. The mother adapts a new version of

a classic like Romeo and Juliet, she gives her boy an updated version of the story. Nowadays

a lot of people meet online in a chat room and develop a relationship. Finally, technology and

more precisely the computer is at the origin and the end of the relationship: It’s totally virtual

and even a classic like Romeo and Juliet could be transformed to meet modern standards.

The artist certainly wants to make fun of love relationships on the Internet. Romantic stories

no longer exist, because our lives are dominated by machines.

– Cartoon 3: As for the third cartoon, the artist underlines the invasion of the mobile phone

in our daily lives. The man is running away from his phone which seems to bounce after him.

The man looks scared and yells: He only wants a few minutes of peace and quiet. He is fed

up. He can’t stand being disturbed all the time. His mobile phone keeps ringing and drives

him mad. Mobile phones infringe upon our privacy. The cartoonist underlines / emphasizes /

points out / stresses the man wants to be left alone. The artist wants to warn us about a real

danger, mobile phones have become a new scourge.

– Cartoon 4: A young boy is sitting in his room reading a book. His room is filled with

state-of-the art equipment, all the modern appliances we can think of. Instead of joining

chat rooms, browsing on the web, being glued to his screen, he’d rather read a book. He is

engrossed in his reading. He is different from many of his peers. It is quite unusual / odd to

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

MANUEL k P. 151-153

2 4 0 • UNIT 11

see a teenager neglect his computer. He is not addicted to his computer although there are

many temptations. The cartoonist may suggest that some kids can resist temptation and stick

to more traditional pastimes. The balloon may refer to what his friends tell him when they

make fun of him.

2. Your point of view

Productions possibles : To me, cartoon 2 is the most critical because it involves a mother

and her child and it represents the next generation that could stop reading and just be obsessed

by e-mails or new forms of communication.

I believe that cartoon 3 is the funniest. It’s preposterous: The man is chased by his own mobile!

He has no control over his life.

The least true-to-life is the first cartoon because nobody would do this but it’s also funny

because it’s so ridiculous!

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

a. tech"nician • co"nnection • a"ddiction • elec"tronic • elec"tricity • com"patible •

compati"bility • se"curity

b. Pour les mots se terminant par -ian, -ion, -ic, -ible et -ity, l’accent principal tombe sur la

syllabe qui précède le suffixe.

a. Bill Gates started programming at age 13.

b. He left Harvard to devote all his energy to a company he had begun with Paul Allen. He believed

that a computer would be a valuable tool in every home and developed software for personal

computers.

c. It was the beginning of a revolution in communication technology, which has radically changed

the way we live.

1.

2.

3.

Similarities Differences

– the invasion of technologies in our lives

– the desire to fight against these addictions

for the characters in the first, third and

fourth cartoons

– The first character, like the third and

fourth characters, admit they are hooked

on their computer or cellphone and want

to get rid of them whereas the mother

in the second cartoon is keeping up with

modern technology.

\i…\ \I\screen • disease • peaceful • geek •

beep • breathe • decent

chip • responsible • print • bit • kid •

ridiculous • video • device • listen

UNIT 11 • 2 4 1

> Build up your vocabulary

a. keyboard = dessin n° 3 (accepter également le clavier des n° 2 et 4) b. mouse = n° 5

c. laptop = n° 4 d. desktop = n° 2 e. screen = n° 1 (accepter également l’écran des n° 2

et 4) f. click = n° 5 g. plug in = n° 2 et 4 h. scroll = n° 5.

I spend a lot of time surfing on the Internet. Sometimes, I log in my password to read my

e-mails. I can browse everywhere because I have a wireless connection. It is also fast thanks

to the broadband connection. Sometimes, I download some videos. It’s awful when my

computer crashes.

> La forme V-ing

Ces mots en -ing sont formés à partir d’un verbe.

a. Books est un nom et reading un gérondif (forme V-ing) ; tous deux sont compléments

d’objet du verbe loves.

b. He can’t stand life without his cellphone.

Ces prépositions sont suivies d’un gérondif / de V-ing.

Ces quatre verbes expriment un goût. k Après des verbes exprimant un goût, on utilise un gérondif / une forme V-ing.

Le premier verbe souligné est au présent simple et le second à l’impératif. Les marqueurs de temps sont a few days ago et tonight after work.Dans la première phrase, l’énonciateur se situe après l’action désignée par le verbe en gras,

alors que dans la deuxième, il se situe avant l’action.

k Après remember, si l’action reste à faire, on utilise un infinitif. Si l’action est déjà réalisée, on utilise un gérondif.

> Practice

a. I can’t stand seeing him skipping meals to play on his computer.

b. If you go on / keep spending so much time in front of your computer, you’ll have a headache.

c. I love designing games for children / children’s games.

d. Instead of going out with her friends, she browses on the Internet every night.

e. Having a computer in your bedroom stops / prevents / keeps you from doing your homework.

f. I’m looking forward to having an MP3 player.

Cette activité pourra faire l’objet d’un travail écrit. On s’assurera au préalable que les

élèves ont bien repéré le nom de Calvin dans le vocabulaire donné en aide et bien compris

qu’il s’agit du nom du petit garçon. On leur demandera également de réviser tout ce qui a

été fait dans Language at work.

Productions possibles : This is a Calvin and Hobbes cartoon drawn by Bill Watterson in 1988.

First, Calvin and Hobbes are watching TV, they seem to be enjoying themselves. Calvin loves

spending his time in front of TV, even during the weekend. When his father arrives, he stops

them from watching TV. He can’t stand seeing his son spending all his free time like the rest of

his generation in front of a screen; he is fed up with seeing them glued to a screen instead of

playing outside, exercising and enjoying the beautiful day they have. That’s why he throws them

out. Once they are out, Calvin and Hobbes seem to agree but in fact they go to Susie’s, a friend

of Calvin’s, to watch TV with her. What is funny here is that when Calvin is out, we imagine he’s

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

MANUEL k P. 154-155

2 4 2 • UNIT 11

going to have fun like a little boy of his age but finally he just meets his friend to keep watching

TV. They look forward to watching more and more programmes. They are so used to watching

TV passively that the little girl even mentions Calvin has to hurry up because it’s a commercial,

as if it were vital! They can’t help being attracted to TV and spending a lot of time in front of it

whereas they could spend time playing, cycling or just chatting together.

YOUR TASK

> AVANT DE VOUS LANCER

Les expressions fournies ici auront déjà été vues et utilisées dans les Prepare your task

(p. 144, 145, 147 et 149). On demandera aux élèves de les relire (en insistant sur la bonne

accentuation) et de les apprendre par cœur. À noter que p. 181, les élèves trouveront

également des structures leur permettant notamment d’interrompre leur interlocuteur

ou de demander des éclaircissements.

Ce travail d’expression de l’opinion pourra être préparé à la maison. On pourra faire

travailler les élèves en binômes et mettre en place l’activité intitulée « Argument /Contre

argument » sur le site de l’Académie de Caen : « Chaque élève écrit un argument, remet sa

feuille à son homologue qui doit alors proposer trois contre arguments. Ils échangent leurs

feuilles et chacun doit proposer un nouvel argument pour chacun de ceux avancés. »

Productions possibles :– Cellphone: “I agree with the quote, I like to feel reassured and know that I could contact

my parents if I had a problem.”

“On the other hand, if my parents want me to call them wherever I am, that means they don’t

trust me!”

– mp3 player: “I don’t understand this sort of prejudice. My mp3 is a good thing for me: I can

listen to music whenever I want and this isn’t harmful.”

“I couldn’t agree more with that quote: Sometimes my friends aren’t even listening to what

I’m saying, they are hooked on their phone or mp3!”

– Texting: “In my opinion, texting doesn’t take too long, you are not cut off from the world!”

“Instead of texting, they could enjoy the holidays and do other more entertaining things!”

– New technologies: “I believe new technologies are helping people to communicate better.

They enable us to get in touch with people quicker and from anywhere. It’s a real revolution!”

“Teenagers had better go out more and stop living in a virtual world with virtual relationships!”

> Mise en œuvre possible :k On formera des groupes de quatre élèves. Chacun choisira son rôle et un sujet, puis

préparera ses arguments et ses exemples.

k Le professeur choisira également un time-keeper dont le rôle consistera à surveiller le

temps de parole de chacun et à redistribuer la parole si nécessaire.

k On fera lire les règles du débat en classe pour s’assurer qu’elles soient vues par tous et

l’on présentera à cette occasion la grille d’évaluation du manuel p. 181.

k Pendant qu’un élève s’exprime, les autres pourront prendre des notes qui seront pré-

sentées par la suite à l’écrit ou à l’oral et évaluer leurs pairs conjointement au professeur.

k Le professeur demandera aux groupes de tourner.

k On pourra disposer les élèves en suivant le schéma de la page suivante :

1.

2.

3.

UNIT 11 • 2 4 3

Productions possibles :– PARENTSNO“You know, that could sound surprising but my kids really don’t exaggerate with new

technologies. They have mobile phones but don’t use them too often and the Internet is not

an obsession for them.”

“I couldn’t agree more: My kids enjoy playing with video games and they don’t spend too

much time playing, they just have fun!”

YES“As far as I’m concerned, if we’re talking about mobile phones, I believe they use it far too

much. All day long, they’re hooked to them! And video games… my son has changed, he has

become moody and doesn’t want to do anything else!”

“You’re right, the phone has become an obsession. My daughter can’t help checking her text

messages all the time!”

– CHILDRENNO“My parents gave me my first mobile phone. They said they felt reassured to know where I was

and I don’t think it means they don’t trust me.”

“I believe playing video games is what got me interested in graphics and I have so much fun

playing with friends! I’m not isolated at all.”

YES“I disagree: My mother is always calling me! If I switch my phone off, she becomes nervous.

It’s as if she were spying on me! I had to explain to her I switch if off when I’m at school / for

classes.”

“You must be joking! My parents don’t trust me, they think I live in a world of fantasy because

I play video games and they’re worried about my social life. I’m reliable!”

– PSYCHOLOGISTSNO“That all depends on what you’re talking about: The Internet can be a very good tool for curious

teenagers and so can video games if they improve their skills and imagination. Video games can

develop creative and imaginative minds.”

YES“On the other hand, teenagers who have no limits can become addicted to their phones or

their computers and this can become harmful and cause damage for their health and their

mood. It can become a real and serious addiction!”

“Parents should be more cautious with their children and limit their access to the Internet.

They don’t realize how harmful this can be.”

Time-keeper

Elèves qui

prennent des

notes et évaluent

Elèves qui

prennent des

notes et évaluent

Parents Children

Psychologists Video game designers

UNIT

11 A WORLD OF GEEKS

2 4 4 • UNIT 11

– VIDEO GAME DESIGNERSNO“As a teenager, the first video games I discovered helped me develop my imagination, they

improved my skills: My reflexes have become highly developed.”

“We always try to imagine new graphics so that kids take pleasure in discovering new

adventures and graphics! And parents play too!”

YES“In my opinion, some designers are not careful enough. My company tries to respect a certain

quality of graphics and is against violence.”

“That’s why we try not to be distracting. Our goal is to see them having fun!”

MOTHER EARTHUNIT

12

UNIT 12 • 2 4 5

Mother EarthL’ensemble de cette unité est fondé sur des documents visuels très frappants et facilement

décodables qui devraient permettre de déclencher facilement la parole. Le thème choisi,

la défense de l’environnement, sera familier aux élèves voire leur tiendra à cœur. Ce sujet

d’actualité fait désormais partie intégrante du « Lien social » qui se tisse, notamment entre

les pays industrialisés et ceux du Sud.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à l’expression orale en interaction,

voir p. 225-226.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Choisir la publicité la plus efficace

et défendre son choix

Échanges • Lien social • Création

k environnement et pollution

k Check your vocabulary (Help! p. 157)

k Check your vocabulary (Help! p. 158)

k Improve your pronunciation (p. 164)

k Build up your vocabulary (p. 164)

k « faire faire » et « laisser faire » (p. 162)

k verbes + prépositions (p. 162)

k réalisation des voyelles -a, -ea et -o

(p. 164)

k accentuation de mots (p. 164)

k association graphie / phonie : dictée

(p. 164)

k exprimer le but

k aimer / ne pas aimer

k comparer

k préférer

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

XX

UNIT

12 MOTHER EARTH

MANUEL k P. 156-157

2 4 6 • UNIT 12

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

TUNE IN!

1. Danger ahead

> Mises en œuvre possibles

Le professeur pourra traiter les trois documents à la fois ou choisir le(s) cartoon(s) à traiter

avec toute la classe.

On pourra aussi diviser la classe en trois groupes. Chaque groupe se verra confié un

document à travailler à l’aide des questions p. 156 et de la colonne correspondante du Help!

p. 157. Au sein de chaque groupe, le travail se fera, au choix du professeur, individuellement

ou à deux. Chaque binôme comprendra alors un rapporteur qui prendra la parole devant la

classe entière. On pourra charger un élève de prendre des notes sur transparent, puis

(rétro)projeter ces notes, les corriger et les enrichir. Elles pourront servir de trace écrite finale.

1.

2.

Lire

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Écouter

Voir et écouter (vidéo)

Manuel

k Poison in the well, chanson (p. 158)

k Turning green, articles (p. 160)

k Tune in!, cartoons (p. 156-157) k Turn the song into a dialogue, jeu de rôles

(p. 158)

k Your task (p. 165-167)

k Analyser une publicité et défendre son choix (p. 159)k Commenter une campagne publicitaire (p. 165)

Penguin, analyse de cartoon (p. 163)

k site compagnon, U12–Dialogue: Save our

planet

Two commercials (p. 157)

k It all comes back to you (WWF)

k What does your car say about you?

(Greenpeace)

Workbook

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

UNIT 12 • 2 4 7

a. Productions possibles :– Cartoon 1: The first cartoon deals with the plundering of the Earth / of the Earth’s resources.

Men are holding hammers and are hammering at the Earth. The Earth is compared to a piggy

bank which greedy men are trying to break to get all its treasures. These men are smiling /

grinning. They are wearing suits that remind us of CEOs, executives in big firms who are

unaware of the consequences of their acts. Each man may symbolize a continent / countries

looking for gold, oil, diamonds, gas, or raw materials to feed their industries. They are involved

in a global race for raw materials. This cartoon is pessimistic, and alarming. It hints that one

day the piggy bank will be empty and we will have exhausted the resources of the planet. The

pig looks dumbfounded, its eyes are wide open and its ears folded. It may suggest that the

Earth is paralysed, powerless in the face of man’s madness. The Earth is a treasure-trove ready

for the taking. But man’s greed, carelessness and selfishness will lead to a disaster. Men are

responsible for the destruction of the planet. The whole world is responsible.

Title: The piggy bank

– Cartoon 2: We are immediately struck by a skinny little boy who meets a polar bear. The

boy may be from Africa and meets a bear who is supposed to live at the North / South pole.

The cartoon is based on a discrepancy between Africa and the poles. It warns us about the

dangers of global warming. Nature’s balance has been upset. The earth is cracked / parched,

it has become a desert, which implies that there is a shortage of water / a severe drought.

People try to escape drought and move from one continent to another. The polar bear is

threatened with extinction, wildlife is endangered. Humanity is on the verge of extinction.

The whole world is at stake. It is a strange encounter. The man and the animal are the

only survivors. It is a very pessimistic vision, an apocalyptic vision. Man is confronted with

extinction. In my opinion it is not realistic / it is over-exaggerated.

Title: Strange encounter

– Cartoon 3: Man’s evolution is represented in the cartoon. The different stages are clear:

the fish, the dinosaur, the monkey, the Neanderthal man, then the Homo sapiens. Man has

dominated / tamed the planet. The man in red trousers looks bewildered. He is the only man

left, the only survivor of a civilization. The traces of this civilization are a truck sinking into the

sea, with an oil drill, rockets / nuclear missiles, a gas station, a plant releasing / belching

black fumes into the air and a building. The wheel of the truck symbolizes nuclear waste, toxic

waste dumped into the sea. Exhaust pipes symbolize cars that pollute the air. The island has

become a wasteland. The Earth has become a rubbish dump / a dumping site. It’s scary,

alarmist.

Title: Look at this mess!

b. La comparaison entre les trois documents sera l’occasion de rebrasser les structures

de la comparaison, de la préférence et de l’opinion.

Productions possibles : The three cartoons raise topical / environmental issues / crucial

problems. They all focus on the danger of pollution. They are striking / provocative / thought-

provoking.

Prolongement possible : pour vérifier l’acquisition du lexique du Help! p. 157, on pourra

proposer la fiche suivante (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

UNIT

12 MOTHER EARTH

Check your vocabulary

2 4 8 • UNIT 12

Traduisez les phrases suivantes. Tous les mots en gras sont dans le Help!, p. 157.

Beaucoup de gens ont pris conscience du réchauffement climatique.

Avons-nous épuisé les ressources de la Terre ?

Les gaz à effet de serre, les marées noires et les fumées d’usine menacent la planète.

Nous nous rendons compte que nous sommes tous responsables de la pollution et que

nous sommes tous impliqués dans la lutte contre le réchauffement climatique.

De nombreuses espèces (species) animales sont mises en danger par le réchauffement climatique.

De nombreuses personnes risquent (may) de mourir de faim à cause de la sécheresse.

La planète ne peut pas être transformée en décharge.

L’artiste veut avertir le lecteur des dangers des déchets nucléaires.

Ces dessins sont réalistes, mais effrayants. Je préfère celui-ci car il est plein d’humour.

CORRIGÉ

Many people have become aware of global warming.

Have we used up the Earth’s resources?

Greenhouse gases, oil spills and factory fumes threaten our planet.

We realize that we are all responsible for pollution and that we are all involved in the fight

against global warming.

Many animal species are endangered / threatened by global warming.

Many people may die because / as a result of drought

The planet / Earth can’t be turned into a rubbish dump.

The artist wants to warn the reader about the dangers of nuclear waste.

These drawings are realistic, but scary. I prefer this one because it is humorous.

2. Watch a video

Voir p. 423-424 et 447.

3. Oral account

Voir p. 447.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.2.3.4.

5.6.7.8.9.

MANUEL k P. 158-159

UNIT 12 • 2 4 9

1. ALERT

1. Get ready

> Mise en œuvre possible : la lecture des deux articles du Workbook (p. 92) pourra

se faire à la maison, si le professeur le souhaite. La synthèse des textes pourra être menée

à l’aide de la grille fournie dans le Workbook (p. 93).

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 93)

2. Understanding the text

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 93-94)

Narrator: stanzas 1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10

The authorities: stanzas 2, 4, 6, 11

➼ STANZAS 1 AND 2

k What’s happening?: “what’s going on?” (l. 6)

k Is anyone responsible?: “Who’s to blame?” (l. 6)

k There is no water: “dry as paper” (l. 4)

1.

2.

Causes Consequences– Lack of safe water and sanitation

(1.2 billion people in the world don’t have

access to safe drinking water; 2.4 billion

lack proper sanitation facilities.)

– Between 1990 and 1995, global water

consumption rose six-fold due to industrial

demand + changes in our diet.

– The world’s single largest cause of illness.

In 2002: 42% of households had unsafe

water and lacked of basic sanitation facilities.

– The toll on children is high. About 4,500

children die each day. Others are often ill

and can’t work or get a proper education.

The young and the old are vulnerable / the

victims.

– The poor: In sub-Saharan Africa, 36% of

the population can have access to hygienic

sanitation.

– Urban-rural disparities: In 2002, 37% of

people in the country had access to basic

toilets, against 81% of people in cities. In

particular Latin America and the Caribbean.

– Women have to fetch water, consequently

they have no time for other work. Girls can’t

be educated.

– Water shortages: Nearly 1.8 million kids

die every year of diarrhoel disease.

UNIT

12 MOTHER EARTH

2 5 0 • UNIT 12

k we are all equal: “just the same as you” (l. 8)

k without being informed: “in the dark without a clue” (l. 7)

➼ STANZA 3

k pollution: poison • untidy • spill

k a small quantity: a drop

This stanza is repeated 3 times.

➼ STANZA 5

knew • they let us just drink on

Approfondissement possible : The narrator relates a personal experience. One day someone

discovered there was no water. He wondered what was happening / what the problem was.

He was surprised, puzzled. He asked his neighbour what was going on. Nobody knew. They

asked the authorities who replied that there had been a minor incident, but the inhabitants

shouldn’t worry. They used an understatement (a figure of speech in which a person

deliberately makes a situation seem less important or serious than it is). The narrator is ironic

and sarcastic. The authorities denied the truth, they said it was just a drop. The narrator

denounces the hypocrisy of the authorities / big companies who knew the water supply had

been contaminated, that it was a mass poisoning. The narrator accuses them of lying, of

manslaughter. He wants to report a crime. He asks them to acknowledge the truth. They kept

people uninformed, and did it on purpose.

➼ STANZAS 6, 7 AND 8

“in a week” (l. 23) • “the week is over” (l. 24) • “it’s grown into years” (l. 25)

➼ STANZA 9

fight (l. 31) / fought (l. 32)

bear + able (suffix) = supportable

Who can help me now? + We are condemned. (see: lost, l. 32)

Approfondissement possible : The authorities promised they would take measures / steps.

They promised they would cope with the problem and that it wouldn’t take long. However they

didn’t keep their promises. They tried to reassure the population, to comfort them. But they

didn’t do anything, although everybody was concerned that women and children were the

victims / casualties. The narrator is trapped / defenceless / powerless / weak against the

authorities. He is helpless / hopeless / crushed by powerful people. He is fed up to the back

teeth. / He can’t stand their lies anymore. Their answers are stereotyped. The population has

been deluded / deceived for ages. People are puppets in the hands of unscrupulous people,

of hypocrites. This is a committed song. It denounces the situation in developing countries

or in countries where people are sacrificed to economic profits. No country is mentioned,

no name is given, it can happen anywhere in the world.

3.

4.

5.

6.7.

8.9.10.

Promise Reality Victims– “they’ll have it cleaned up

in a week” (l. 23)

– “since I was told that I

should be calm / there’s

nothing to fear” (l. 26-27)

– “But the week is over” (l. 24)

– “and now it’s grown into

years” (l.25)

– “But I drank that water

for years, my wife and my

children!” (l. 28-29)

Check your vocabulary

UNIT 12 • 2 5 1

Prolongement possible : pour vérifier l’acquisition du lexique du Help! p. 158, on pourra

proposer la fiche suivante (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon).

Traduisez les phrases suivantes, tous les mots en gras sont dans le Help! p. 158.

Quelle est l’étendue des dégâts ?

La pénurie d’eau menace l’humanité.

Vont-ils bientôt s’attaquer à ce problème ?

Ils sont sans scrupules, racontent des mensonges et veulent tromper la population.

Ils sont coupables, car ils n’admettent pas la vérité.

Ils ne tiendront jamais leurs promesses.

Le narrateur est perplexe, révolté, car il se sent pris au piège.

Les gens faibles sont trompés et en ont assez de tous ces mensonges.

Le narrateur dénonce l’hypocrisie des autorités.

CORRIGÉ

What is the extent of the damage?

The water shortage threatens / endangers mankind.

Are they going to cope with / tackle this problem soon?

They are unscrupulous, tell lies, and want to deceive the population.

They are guilty, because they deny the truth.

They will never keep their promises.

The narrator is puzzled, revolted, because he feels trapped.

Weak people are deceived / deluded and fed up with all these lies.

The narrator denounces the hypocrisy of the authorities.

3. Turn the song into a dialogue

Ce jeu de rôles pourra être préparé en classe ou à la maison. Il permettra de rebrasser

en contexte les acquis du cours ainsi que le lexique étudié. Les élèves s’appuieront sur

les traces écrites du cours. Les plus faibles pourront se préparer avec la rubrique Action!

du Workbook p. 94-95.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

UNIT

12 MOTHER EARTH

2 5 2 • UNIT 12

4. Choose the best illustration

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 95-96)

➼ PICTURE A

a) This document is an advertisement.

b) – We are immediately struck by the man standing in the middle of the picture behind

a black and dirty wall. He is blindfolded, he is looking down, he is wearing a white T-shirt.

His hands are chained behind his back. He has been sentenced to death and is going to /

about to be shot dead by the death squad. We are witnessing his final moment.

– It is a full shot.

N. B. : pour trouver le plan utilisé les élèves se réfèreront à la p. 261 du manuel.

– The scene is seen through the eyes of the soldiers who are ready to shoot / pull the trigger.

a) governments • the lack of sanitation • industrialists

b) Victims of the sanitation problems

Approfondissement possible : The gloved hands are not holding pistols but glasses of

water. The lack of water and sanitation is a major cause of illness and death. Young people

in particular die from unsafe water and basic sanitation facilities, particularly in developing

countries. Young people are hard hit because they do not have access to safe drinking water.

a) – Make people aware of widespread sanitation problems.

– The goal is to alert the public, the authorities that many people die or could die if nothing

is done.

– The goal is to sensitize the authorities and make them take drastic measures / steps to

fight this problem.

b) Pessimistic message. The man is sentenced to death.

The picture is in black and white to suggest death / that the man is doomed. He is wearing

a white T-shirt to underline he is an innocent victim.

It is a very forceful ad because an innocent and young victim is sentenced to death, although

he hasn’t committed any crime. The advertisers resort to a shock tactic to alert us, to warn us

about an acute problem.

➼ PICTURE B

a) This document is an advertisement.

b) The sewer is lying in the middle of the picture and looks huge / enormous.Sewage is important / dominates the scene / is flowing in the middle of a city.The river looks dirty / filthy / polluted.The city is densely populated / overpopulated / in a developed or Western country / huge / sprawling.a) chemicals • waste disposal • industries that dump toxic waste anywhere

b) The city looks like a rubbish dump / a dumping site / an open air sewer.

a) The WWF wants to influence the public opinion / denounce the indifference of industrialists,

their lack of concern. Their only goal is to make money. The WWF wants to protest against the

impact of industrialization on the environment. It conveys the impression of a squalid and filthy

river, a world of grime and darkness.

b) The message is pessimistic, the population seems powerless. We are all concerned by

waste disposal, it endangers people’s health / lives. Industrialists who pollute our rivers

with chemicals should be prosecuted.

Réponse libre.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 160-161

UNIT 12 • 2 5 3

2. TURNING GREEN

Cette double page sera traitée très rapidement par une classe solide. Une classe fragile

s’appuiera sur les images p. 161 pour trouver les mots manquants.

1. Read and guess

Corrigé :

Text 1. Word = paper k illustration C

Text 2. Word 1 = meat Word 2 = bovine k illustration A

Text 3. Word 1 = drive Word 2 = driver k illustration D

Text 4. Word 1= plastic Word 2 = bag k illustration B

Prolongements possibles

1) Après la lecture des articles, on pourra demander à chaque groupe de faire la synthèse des

arguments qu’il vient de lire. Le rapporteur de chaque groupe procédera à une courte prise de

parole pour rendre compte de chaque texte. La synthèse pourra être faite par chaque groupe

sur un transparent qui sera (rétro)projeté.

2) Grâce à la fiche suivante, on pourra demander à chaque groupe de repérer dans chaque

article des mots qui seront ensuite réutilisés dans le role play.

Situation today Solution ConsequencesArticle 1 900 million trees turned into

paper every year.

Buy more

recycled paper.

– Save water and

energy.

– Trees help fight

against pollution.

Article 2 – Hamburgers more

responsible for global

warming than cattle.

– Meat industry = 18% of

greenhouse gas emissions

due to digestion of cattle.

– Meat production will double

k more energy used.

Become

a vegetarian.

Carbon footprint can

be reduced by up

to almost 1.4 ton of

carbon dioxide per year.

Article 3 80% of people drive to work

alone.

– Car pool.

– Walk.

– Bike.

– Bus.

– Fewer vehicle trips

every morning.

– Gas saved.

– Reduction of pollution.

Article 4 – 500 billion plastic bags

distributed every year.

– 3% are recycled.

– Greenhouse gases in

landfills.

BYOB = bring

your own bag.

Reduce pollution.

UNIT

12 MOTHER EARTH

Words to remember

2 5 4 • UNIT 12

Find the English equivalent of (in the order of the text) :

CORRIGÉ

2. Role play

Le jeu de rôles permettra de réutiliser de façon personnelle et vivante tout ce qui a été vu

précédemment. Les élèves pourront s’appuyer sur des photos p. 161 pour nourrir le débat.

Ils pourront également s’inspirer du document audio Save our planet téléchargeable sur le

site compagnon. Ils pourront ainsi aller plus loin et proposer d’autres solutions, dont voici

quelques exemples :

– Check your tyres can improve gas mileage.

– Consume less, share more, live simply.

– Have your house insulated, change your lightbulbs.

– Hang up your clothes on a clothes line to dry them rather than load them in a dryer.

Text 1

consommation:

transformer en:

économiser:

de plus:

Text 2

dans l’ensemble:

chiffre:

dû à:

habitude:

nocif / nuisible:

empreinte écologique:

jusqu’à:

Text 3

règle:

inciter qqn à:

voyage:

banlieusard:

Text 4

de plus:

tissu:

épicerie:

Text 1 consumption

turn into

save

furthermore

Text 2 on the whole

figure

due to

habit

harmful

carbon footprint

up to

Text 3 rule

urge sb to

trip

commuter

Text 4 moreover

cloth

grocery store

MANUEL k P. 162-164

UNIT 12 • 2 5 5

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> « Faire faire » et « laisser faire »

– Sujet des verbes encadrés : this ad est sujet de makes et the authorities est sujet de let.

Sujet des verbes soulignés : me est sujet de laugh et people est sujet de drink

Le pronom utilisé dans la phrase a (me) est à la forme complément.

– Le verbe utilisé pour signifier le déclenchement d’une action est make.

Le verbe utilisé comme équivalent de « laisser faire » est let.

k Déduisez : Make / Let + nom ou pronom + base verbale.

c. Make indique ici une contrainte exercée par le gouvernement sur la société pétrolière.

– Quel énoncé indique qui nettoiera ? 1– Quel énoncé met l’accent sur la transformation subie ? 2

– L’entreprise fera contrôler la qualité de l’eau (mais on ne dit pas qui s’en chargera).

Cleaned est un participe passé.

k Déduisez : la structure employée est have + nom ou pronom + participe passé.

> Verbes + prépositions

Les problèmes auxquels nous devons faire face sont énormes.

Nous sommes témoins de changements climatiques spectaculaires.

Le dessinateur veut que nous regardions l’état de la planète et que nous réagissions.

Qu’est-ce qui explique le réchauffement climatique ?

Pour s’attaquer au problème de la pollution les pays industrialisés doivent réduire leur

consommation de pétrole.

Approuvez-vous la campagne « Utilisez / Prenez votre propre sac » ?

Nous espérons tous un avenir meilleur.

Pourquoi les gouvernements n’écoutent-ils pas plus souvent les écologistes ?

k Déduisez : en anglais ces verbes s’utilisent avec une préposition, alors qu’en français

ils se construisent sans préposition.

Nous devons tous prendre part au combat contre le réchauffement climatique.

De quoi les écologistes se préoccupent-ils ?

Vous souciez-vous suffisamment de l’état de la planète pour vous impliquer dans sa

sauvegarde ?

k Déduisez : en anglais comme en français ces verbes sont suivis d’une préposition.

N. B. : on pourra demander aux élèves d’apprendre par cœur la construction des verbes

utilisés dans ces phrases.

> Practice

a. Environmentalists want to make consumers shut off their computers after each work

session.

b. The new boss won’t let us leave our offices without making sure our computers, printers,

desklights are turned off. The goal is to make us save energy and reduce gas emissions.

c. Environmentalists suggest drivers should have their tyres regularly checked and properly

inflated to reduce their gas consumption.

d. The price of oil makes people walk or bike or ride public transport to go to work.

e. To consume less energy my parents will have our house properly insulated.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

UNIT

12 MOTHER EARTH

2 5 6 • UNIT 12

a. The goal of this ad is to make the viewer / spectator react.

b. This article made me think and change my habits.

c. My grandmother had all the bulbs in her house changed.

d. This picture made me aware of the dangers of pollution.

e. You should have your house insulated.

Cette activité pourra donner lieu à un travail oral (prise de parole en continu) ou écrit,

il pourra être fait à la maison ou en classe, individuellement ou en groupe.

Productions possibles : We are struck by / We can see a penguin standing on an island in

the middle of the ocean. Instead of walking on the ice and living at the North / South pole,

the penguin is alone on a tropical island. It seems to be the only survivor left. It looks helpless

and hopeless. The cartoon is both pessimistic and humorous. The cartoonist wants the viewer

to realize that many species are endangered and will soon become extinct. The goal is to

make us aware that some species will soon be wiped off the surface of the Earth. We can’t

let people destroy the environment. The artist wants us to be concerned about the state of

the planet. It is a very gloomy vision of the world. The problem is acute. Citizens must make

governments react and take measures to cope with this problem.

> Improve your pronunciation

impact (nom), mais impact (verbe)

threat et measure comme dans bed \e\ • earth comme dans bird \∏…\.

advertiser • advertising • advertisement

La voyelle de leur première syllabe est prononcée comme la première voyelle de banana.

a. Different kinds of pollution threaten our planet’s future.

b. If measures are not taken to control pollution, our existence is threatened.

c. Many species are endangered and will soon become extinct. All sorts of animal species

are being wiped off the surface of the Earth or at least badly endangered.

d. Industrialized countries are responsible for climate changes.

e. Droughts, storms and hurricanes are more frequent and severe. Humans are to blame

and must take action.

f. Nowadays, we’re damaging the planet, depleting its resources, upsetting nature’s balance.

Our exploitation of resources is reckless.

> Build up your vocabulary

a. We are immediately struck by the Earth that has been turned into a garbage can. The

cartoonist’s goal is to make us aware of the enormous amount of waste we produce every

day. The problem of waste disposal is acute because litter is dumped everywhere, and is

polluting rivers and oceans. Our waste should be recycled or burnt. The message is clear:

Our blue planet is threatened with extinction because man has destroyed the environment.

We should all fight for the protection of the Earth.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

\eI\ \eE\ \A…\ \E\ \O…\ \œ\hurricane

(plutôt US)

aware disaster global • hurricane (plutôt UK) •

alert • about

warn impact

MANUEL k P. 165-167

UNIT 12 • 2 5 7

b. We will soon be confronted with an energy crisis. The world’s demand for energy – oil, coal, gas – is rising. More renewable sources of energy, like wind, solar and hydro power,

will be used in the next two decades. Governments want to develop public transport and

clean energy sources to reduce oil consumption and the greenhouse effect.

YOUR TASK

1. Entraînez-vous en analysant cette publicité.

Cette publicité pourra faire l’objet d’un travail individuel ou en groupe avant une reprise

collective devant toute la classe. Elle permettra de revoir les expressions du but.

Sur le site Internet d’Encams (l’entreprise chargée des campagnes de Keep Britain Tidy,

www.encams.org), on pourra trouver des compléments d’information utiles comme celui-ci :

“In 2005, a survey by Keep Britain Tidy revealed that smoking-related litter was found in 79%

of sites across England and it had increased by a staggering 20% over the last four years.”

Productions possibles :The arrows correspond to: 1: slogan • 2: motto • 3: logo of the campaign group.

The advertisers target smokers who drop their litter/ cigarette butts / ends in the street,

encourage smokers to be more responsible about the way they dispose of their cigarette

butts. They target people who pay no attention / respect to the environment / who pollute

the environment because they are not concerned / responsible citizens / they are careless.

The goal / aim / purpose of this ad is to denounce / expose / condemn / criticize smokers

who have a selfish attitude. The advertisers want to draw the public’s attention to the litter

problem. They wish to make people aware that daily habits / gestures can pollute our

environment. They intend to alert the public / to sensitize people to what they do.

They encourage smokers to use cigarette bins and personal ashtrays.

> Mise en œuvre de la tâche

k Les élèves pourront s’aider de la p. 54 du manuel (« Enrichissez votre prise de parole »)

pour enrichir leur prise de parole, donner leur opinion, utiliser des gap fillers, vérifier qu’on

les a bien compris...

k P. 181 du manuel (« Prendre part à une conversation »), les élèves trouveront des structures

leur permettant d’exprimer leur accord ou leur désaccord, d’interrompre leur interlocuteur, de

demander des éclaircissements...

k On pourra former des groupes de 8 élèves et organiser 4 débats de 10 minutes environ

avant de permuter les élèves et les rôles.

k Disposition de la classe :Time-keeper

Reste de la classeÉlèves qui

débattent

Élèves qui

débattentReste de la classe

UNIT

12 MOTHER EARTH

2 5 8 • UNIT 12

Pendant qu’un groupe de 8 élèves débat, on confiera aux autres diverses tâches :

– écouter et repérer les erreurs de lexique, prononciation, grammaire ;

– commenter ce qui est dit (voir structures utiles p. 55 du manuel) ;

– faire office de secrétaires de séance en prenant des notes qui pourront ensuite servir de

base à un compte rendu oral ou écrit ;

– faire office de time-keeper, c’est-à-dire distribuer la parole de la manière la plus équitable

qui soit.

Une fois toutes les équipes entendues, on pourra prononcer le vainqueur.

Productions possibles :– Ad n° 1: Tarzan is going to crash, to land in a wasteland. All the trees have been logged.

Tarzan is going to kill himself because of deforestation / logging. It is very humorous and

at the same time it is a very gloomy vision of the future. The sky is dark: It suggests the end of

the world. It is a mixture of gloom and humour. We are doomed, but let’s laugh. The advertisers

resorted to humour and a shock tactic to alert us, to sensitize us to the state of the planet.

They want to shock us into awareness.

– Ad n° 2: In the foreground of this ad, we can notice a teenager lying on the beach. In the

background, two other people can be seen in the sea. They seem to be as young as the first

teenager. The clues / hints that show us that they’re on the beach are the sand and the sea.

The beach is littered with garbage, cans and bottles. What immediately catches our attention is

the garbage on the beach as well as the numerous / huge number of seagulls. They look as if

they are searching for food or as if they want to attack the teenager who is sunbathing. This ad

is symbolic because it asserts that humans, by threatening nature / upsetting nature’s balance,

are threatening themselves. They’re on the brink of disaster. The target of this ad is teenagers.

The advertisers chose to show the teenager’s back only in order to convey the message that it

could be any teenager. Everyone can identify with him. Every young person lying on the beach or

not has to be concerned and get committed to the protection of our planet. The caption with the

words “you’re rubbish” is a pun. They want to drive the message home. It’s a manner of saying:

“You’re responsible for the state of the planet, you are worthless, inconsiderate.” The goal of

the ad is to make people feel responsible for the state of the planet. If mankind upsets Nature,

Nature will retaliate. Man may also be threatened with extinction. The seagulls refer to / draw

a parallel between this ad and the movie Birds, by Alfred Hitchcock. It is scary and disturbing

because it looks as if the birds are about to attack the teenager.

– Ad n° 3: Our attention is immediately caught by a man looking at himself in a mirror and

frowning. We can’t help noticing his cracked skull. This is a very powerful visual device to

suggest that our planet is threatened with drought, with global warming. This young man,

maybe a yuppie, is obviously concerned with his appearance and wrinkles, and getting old.

He doesn’t care about the state of the planet, he is blind, he doesn’t worry about what is

happening in the rest of the world. He is not facing the problem, he is turning his back on the

problem of global warming. He may also be turning his back on the problem of developing

countries. He has blinkers, has a short-sighted, a short-term vision of the world. He is

unaware of reality, of what is going on. He is selfish / self-centred, trapped in consumption.

He is shallow. This ad is forceful, disgusting, it gives us the creeps. For some people the ad

is funny because the advertisers used a very smart / clever device. But it is grim humour.

For others it bothers them. It makes them feel uneasy, the ad gives them the creeps, makes

their hair stand on end, they find it scary / frightening / shocking / revolting / gross. This

UNIT 12 • 2 5 9

ad is clearly an indictment of our selfishness, of consumers who are only worried by their

looks and appearances. The man stands for the average consumer in the developed world.

The advertisers call on us to join the fight against global warming.

– Ad n° 4: This striking image is a clear reference to floods, storms, hurricanes; it may also

be a reference to Katrina. It looks as if the environment were talking to us. The advertisers

resort to a visual device to make us aware of the link between floods, hurricanes and global

warming. They have resorted to a shock tactic to make us aware of the impending disaster /

an acute problem / the threat / the danger / the impact of global warming on our planet.

They want to alert us / sensitize us / shock us into awareness. The message conveyed is

clear: It’s high time we acted. We are on the brink of disaster, if we don’t act now we are

doomed. We are all concerned. They want to frighten us into acting / reacting. They want

to urge us to do something.

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 6 0 • UNIT 13

All the world’s a stageNotre objectif dans cette unité a été double :

– faire connaître aux élèves des textes classiques de la littérature britannique ;

– permettre de mettre en scène les scènes étudiées.

En effet, le théâtre est un merveilleux moyen de mettre en place des règles de phonologie

en contexte, d’apprendre un texte par cœur, d’exprimer des sentiments et des émotions

en anglais et enfin d’acquérir des qualités de communication qui pourront être réinvesties

en expression orale.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à l’expression orale en interaction,

voir p. 225-226.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Jouer une scène étudiée en classe

Mémoire • Création

k vocabulaire du théâtre (p. 168) k surprise (p. 170 à 172)

k sentiments négatifs : mépris, colère,

reproche (p. 170 à 174)

k préjugés (p. 170 à 172)

k statut social (p. 170 à 172)

k style indirect (p. 176-177)

k lecture guidée de textes (mots porteurs

de sens, mots en relief, liaisons consonne-

voyelle, schémas intonatifs, accents de

mots, tons de voix)

k ordonner

k regretter, reprocher, se plaindre

k refuser

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

X

UNIT 13 • 2 6 1

MANUEL k P. 168

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

TUNE IN!

1. On stage!

Corrigé :

– giving a play at a theatre: performance

– person in a play: actor

– person who gives instructions to actors and actresses: stage director

– practice before playing in public: rehearsal

– accessories used on stage: props

– people who come to watch a play: spectators / audience

– all the actors in a play: cast

– clothes actors and actresses wear: costumes

– story of a play: plot

– place in which a play takes place: setting

Lire et prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

k A suitable boy, Oscar Wilde (p. 170 et 172) k The right decision, Jane Austen (p. 174) k lecture à haute voix (p. 170, 172, 174)

k rendre compte d’un texte (p. 171, 173, 174)

k role play (p. 168 et 173)

k réagir à un document iconographique

(p. 169)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un texte

(p. 171, 173, 174)

k site compagnon, U13–Your task (3),(4), A suitable boy et Your task (5),The right decision

k Shakespeare in a Supermarket, reportage

(p. 173)

Workbook

XXX

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 6 2 • UNIT 13

> Mise en œuvre :On pourra opter pour une variante plus ludique avec la grille de mots croisés ci-dessous

(disponible en version photocopiable sur le site compagnon).

In your book (p. 158), read the review of A Midsummer Night’s Dream, a play by Shakespeare written in 1595, which contains five of the words in the puzzle. It will help you fill in the crossword below.

ACROSS 2. all the actors in a play

5. platform on which actors appear

6. giving a play at a theatre

8. person who gives

instructions to actors

and actresses

DOWN

1. practice before playing in public

2. clothes actors wear

3. person in a play

4. place / environment in which a play takes place

6. what an actor says or does

7. objects or pieces of furniture used in a play

Corrigé : ACROSS 2. cast 5. stage 6. performance 8. director

DOWN 1. rehearsal 2. costumes 3. character 4. setting 6. part 7. props

2. A quarrel

> Mise en œuvre :

k On laissera 5 à 10 minutes à la classe pour préparer un dialogue.

k Un ou plusieurs groupes joueront leur dialogue, le reste de la classe prendra des notes

et évaluera la prestation. Un groupe pourra s’occuper de la prononciation, un autre de la

grammaire, un autre du lexique.

k La classe commentera la prestation à l’aide de la p. 55 du manuel (« Réagissez à la prise

de parole de quelqu’un »).

Critères d’évaluation : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le professeur sera

bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de points attribué à

chaque critère.

1

2 3

4

5 6

7

8

Voix audible 0 1 2

Présence sur scène (occupe l’espace, exprime des sentiments) 0 1 2 3 4

Interaction avec le partenaire 0 1 2 3 4

Texte cohérent, intéressant, original 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3

Prononciation 0 1 2 3

Total des points / 20

UNIT 13 • 2 6 3

1. WEDLOCK

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Découverte et exploitation du document dans son intégralité ou approche morcelée :

ne montrer que les deux mains et faire émettre des hypothèses.

k Les élèves pourront préparer le document en classe ou à la maison à l’aide de la

fiche du Workbook p. 97-98 qui les aidera à décoder l’affiche et leur fournira les outils

nécessaires à l’expression orale.

Productions possibles :a. We are immediately struck by / Our attention is immediately drawn by the chain around two

hands, the padlock in the middle standing out against the white background, and the word

“forced” written in big red capital letters.

b. At first we may think marriage is a sacred link, but the word “forced” and the sentence

“you have the right to choose” tell a different story. A bride and a bridegroom are going to get

married or may have just been married since we can see a white shirt at the top of the poster.

They have been forced, it may have been an arranged marriage. They may have been forced

by their parents. The padlock reminds us of prisoners who are unable to escape. These two

people did not marry out of love, did not fall in love.

c. The dominant colours are white and red. White is a clear reference to the wedding ceremony.

Red may symbolize pain, suffering. It may also be used to attract our attention, to make us read

and react.

d. This poster was published in Great Britain by the Forced Marriage Unit. This campaign poster

was printed to illustrate the issue of forced marriage because forced marriages have led to

suicides and murders. The targets are South Asians in Britain. It is to prevent people from

yielding / submitting to force, to warn them that they can get support and if they are trapped

in such a situation, to warn people that Great Britain is a country where basic Human Rights

are enforced.

e. Réponse libre.

Informations complémentairesBritain’s Forced Marriage Unit, established in 2005, receives around 5,000 calls and deals with

about 300 cases each year – figures that officials fear are just the tip of a very large iceberg.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 97-98)

Two hands are not entwined, they are close, but the fingers do not touch. There is no feeling,

no sign of affection.

The padlock is to be seen in the middle of the poster.

The background is white, as well as the bridegroom’s shirt which is to be seen in the top

right-hand corner.

The slogan is written in big red capital letters at the bottom of the poster.

We also notice a sentence, a phone number and an address at the very bottom.

1. The two hands stand for people who were forced to marry the partner their parents

chose for them. They stand for all the people who were obliged / compelled to marry

against their will, all the people who are obedient and submissive. We can’t see these

people’s faces so that the people who are concerned can easily identify with them.

I.

II.

MANUEL k P. 169

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 6 4 • UNIT 13

2. The padlock and the chain symbolize: prison • the lack of freedom • arranged marriages •

a trap • powerlessness • torture • oppression.

3. The parents are certainly responsible for this arranged marriage. It may also symbolize

the pressure of a whole community.

1. This poster was published in Great Britain by Britain’s Forced Marriage Unit.

2. campaign poster • was printed • illustrate forced marriages • because • suicides and

murders

3. The targets: South Asians in Britain.

to prevent people from marrying against their will, to urge them to get support, to warn

about danger, to show that Great Britain = country where basic Human Rights are enforced

4. Réponse libre.

Réponse libre.

2. A SUITABLE BOY (PART 1)

Exploitation de l’image : We are immediately struck by the imposing lady who is wearing

a fur coat, a string of pearls, earrings, and a hat. She looks stern / haughty / severe /

impressive / authoritative / aloof / curt. She is quite tall to reinforce the idea that she is

in full command of the scene. The young girl standing next to her may be her daughter. She

looks meek, submissive and obedient. The two women are both looking in the same direction.

The woman does not look satisfied at all. She looks quite scornful / contemptuous. Judging

from the background we may think this woman belongs to the upper class or the aristocracy.

The room looks big and luxurious, is overlooking a park. She may live in a mansion or a castle.

A waiter / butler can be seen standing in the background.

1. Understanding the text

> Mise en œuvre : le schéma de l’activité Action! (Workbook p. 99) pourra être distribué

sur un transparent qui sera rempli par un élève. Ses réponses seront (rétro)projetées

et serviront à une prise de parole en continu, puis à la construction de la trace écrite.

Ce type de schéma et de prises de notes pourra être réutilisé sur d’autres supports

et permet de s’assurer que l’élève ne prend la parole qu’à partir de notes.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 98-99)

1. Lady Bracknell, Gwendolen and Jack are present in the scene.

Lady Bracknell speaks most.

2. When Gwendolen tells her mother she is engaged to Mr Worthing, Lady Bracknell interviews

him. The mother wants to see / determine if Jack could be a suitable son-in-law / is an eligible

young man. She has a set of questions, and notes down all the answers he gives. She inquires

into his family background and seems to be pleased with the answers he gives at the beginning.

3. mamma \mE"mA…\ (UK)

It is a formal and upper class term.

III.

IV.

I.

MANUEL k P. 170-171

UNIT 13 • 2 6 5

4.

Approfondissement possible : The daughter announces she is getting engaged to Jack.

The mother is amazed / astonished / taken aback, because she does not know Jack and

has not given her consent yet. Her daughter is not allowed to choose the husband she

wants. She has to abide by the rules her parents have set.

5. Do you smoke? • How old are you? • What is your income?

6. Positive. “I am glad to hear it. A man should always have an occupation of some kind.”

(l. 20) + “That is satisfactory.” (l. 27)

News

Reaction

Goal of the interview

Key questions

Result of the interview so far:positive or negative?

2. Recap

On pourra greffer ici les questions du manuel.

Productions possibles :a. She is looking for a son-in-law who belongs to the same social class / to the upper class or the

aristocracy, who is wealthy / well-off / who has enough income / who has good prospects.

She tries to determine if his social position / status is good enough for her precious daughter.

II.

Gwendolen: engaged to Mr Worthing

Mother: amazed • objects to Gwendolen’s decision •

parents must decide • cross / angry

To make sure / check Jack is suitable •

inquire into Jack’s family background

i f

Wants to know if he smokes, how old he is,

what his income is / if his income is sufficient

Lady Bracknell: satisfied • his answers please her •

has no objections so far

News Reactionsengaged to Mr Worthing disapproval • surprise • indignation

Pardon me • not engaged • I, or your father • will inform you

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 6 6 • UNIT 13

b. Jack belongs to the same world as Lady Bracknell.

c. Jack gains her approval because he corresponds to the ideal husband she is looking for.

He has not disappointed her so far.

d. The parents in the cartoon have a lot in common with Lady Bracknell. The man has just

proposed to the daughter and to have the parents’ consent he has brought a huge box full

of / filled with pounds / banknotes. The parents look astonished and impressed by the huge

amount of money they see / the young man’s fortune. This wealth makes them change their

minds. They may have objected to their daughter’s choice, now they approve of this union.

They don’t care about / take into account their daughter’s feelings. Money is their only

value / concern.

3. You are the stage director

a. Corrigé :

GWENDOLEN: I am engaged to Mr Worthing, mamma. (Gwendolen announced loudly / defiantly.)

LADY BRACKNELL: Pardon me, you are not engaged to anyone. (She answered drily.) When you

do become engaged to someone, I, or your father will inform you of the fact. (She added

curtly / impatiently.) And now I have a few questions to put to you, Mr Worthing. (She

declared firmly.) While I am making these inquiries, you, Gwendolen, will wait for me below

in the carriage. (She ordered loudly / harshly.)

GWENDOLEN: Mamma! (She declared reproachfully.)

LADY BRACKNELL: In the carriage, Gwendolen! Gwendolen, the carriage! (She ordered loudly.)

GWENDOLEN: Yes, mamma. (She replied politely / shyly.)

LADY BRACKNELL: You can take a seat, Mr Worthing. (She declared curtly.)

JACK: Thank you, Lady Bracknell, I prefer standing. (He replied hesitatingly.)

LADY BRACKNELL: I feel bound to tell you that you are not down on my list of eligible young

men, although I have the same list as the dear Duchess of Bolton has. We work together,

in fact. However, I am quite ready to enter your name, should your answers be what a really

affectionate mother requires. (She asserted solemnly.) Do you smoke? (She asked curiously.)

JACK: Well, yes, I must admit I smoke. (He answered simply / replied calmly.)

LADY BRACKNELL: I am glad to hear it. A man should always have an occupation of some kind.

(She declared, relieved.) How old are you? (She asked curtly.)

JACK: Twenty-nine. (He answered / replied calmly / honestly.)

LADY BRACKNELL: What is your income? (She asked directly.)

JACK: Between seven and eight thousand a year. (He answered / replied calmly / honestly.)

LADY BRACKNELL: In land, or in investments? (She asked curiously.)

JACK: In investments, chiefly. (He replied sincerely.)

LADY BRACKNELL: That is satisfactory. (She announced, relieved.)

c. Le mime permet de travailler toute la gestuelle, l’occupation de l’espace. Cette étape

est nécessaire avant toute mise en scène. Le mime peut être travaillé à la maison.

4. How to pronounce

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 3, piste 4 (ainsi que sur le site compagnon,

U13–Your task (3)).

UNIT 13 • 2 6 7

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 99-100)

k Syllabes accentuéesGwendolen: I am engaged to Mr Worthing, mamma.

k Mot(s) mis en reliefLady Bracknell: Pardon me, you are not engaged to anyone. When you do become engaged

to someone, I, or your father will inform you of the fact. And now I have a few questions to

put to you, Mr Worthing.

k Mots porteurs de sensWhile I am making these inquiries, you, Gwendolen, will wait for me below in the carriage.

k Intonation Gwendolen: Mamma! 5k Voyelle de la syllabe accentuéeLady Bracknell: In the carriage, Gwendolen!

k Intonation Gwendolen: Yes, mamma. 5k Les groupes de souffle (nous avons utilisé ici une double barre en fin de phrase)

Lady Bracknell: I feel bound to tell you | that you are not down on my list of eligible young

men| , although I have the same list as the dear Duchess of Bolton has || . We work together,

in fact || . However| , I am quite ready to enter your name | , should your answers be | what

a really affectionate mother requires || .

k Intonation Lady Bracknell: Do you smoke? 3 (interrogation fermée)

Jack: Well, yes, I must admit I smoke. 5 (déclaration positive)

k Liaisons consonne-voyelle entenduesLady Bracknell: I am glad to hear it. A man should always have an occupation of some kind.

How old are you?

Jack: Twenty-nine.

Lady Bracknell: What is your income?

Lady Bracknell: In land, or in investments?

k Syllabes accentuéesJack: In investments, chiefly.

Lady Bracknell: That is satisfactory.

Critères d’évaluation : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le professeur sera

bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de points attribué à

chaque critère.

Voix claire et audible 0 1 2

Implication personnelle, ton juste 0 1 2 3

Intonation 0 1 2 3

Réalisation des liaisons consonne-voyelle 0 1 2 3 4

Accentuation des mots porteurs de sens 0 1 2 3 4

Prononciation correcte 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points /20

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 6 8 • UNIT 13

3. A SUITABLE BOY (PARTS 2 AND 3)

1. Understanding the text

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 100-101)

1. parents (l. 3)

2. lose (l. 4, 6, 9, 15) • found (l. 16, 17, 19)

3. Mr Thomas Cardew (l. 18) • Worthing is a place in Sussex (l. 20).

4.

5.

6. Jack: May I ask you then what you would advise me to do? I need hardly say I would do

anything in the world to ensure Gwendolen’s happiness.

Lady Bracknell: I would strongly advise you, Mr Worthing, to try and acquire some relations

as soon as possible, and to make a definite effort to produce at any rate one parent, of

either sex, before the season is quite over.

Jack: Well, I don’t see how I could possibly manage to do that. I can produce the hand-bag

at any moment. It is in my dressing-room at home. I really think that should satisfy you,

Lady Bracknell.

Lady Bracknell: Me, sir! What has it to do with me? You can hardly imagine that I and Lord

Bracknell would dream of allowing our only daughter – a girl brought up with the utmost care

– to marry into a cloak-room, and form an alliance with a parcel? Good morning, Mr Worthing!

Les mots clés sont en gras dans le texte ci-dessous.

Approfondissement possible : Jack explains he has no idea who his parents are, because he

was found in a hand-bag in Victoria station. He was adopted by Mr Cardew. Lady Bracknell

is stunned, shocked, outraged and indignant. She makes fun of Jack’s origins, she looks down

on him. She is very haughty and scornful. She is obviously prejudiced against people who

are below / beneath her and do not belong to the same social class. She is stand-offish and

snobbish. She has no compassion for him, she is heartless and callous. She doesn’t think

much of an orphan who was adopted. The only thing that matters is his social status. That’s

why she rejects Jack’s offer, she disapproves of such a marriage. Even if Jack is ready to do

his best / utmost to make Gwendolen happy, Lady Bracknell does not care.

I.

II.

MANUEL k P. 172-173

Parents Name given by? Reasons– “... lost my parents. It would

be nearer the truth to say that

my parents seem to have lost

me…” (l. 15)

– “I don’t actually know who I

am by birth. I was... well, I was

found.” (l. 16)

“Mr Thomas Cardew [...]

gave me the name of

Worthing,” (l. 18)

“... because he happened

to have a first-class ticket

for Worthing in his pocket

at the time.” (l. 19)

In what? Where exactly? Reactions“In a hand-bag.” (l. 24) “In the cloak-room at Victoria

Station. It was given to him in

mistake for his own.” (l. 30)

– “A hand-bag?” (l. 25)

– “I confess I feel somewhat

bewildered by what you have

just told me.” (l. 33)

UNIT 13 • 2 6 9

Information complémentaire

The season (l. 39) is the London Season, i.e. a series of social events (Royal Ascot, etc.)

held every year in or near London and attended by people from the highest social class.

2. Recap

Les questions a. et b. seront traitées à l’aide du Workbook (rubrique Action!).

Productions possibles : c. Jack must be disappointed, feel miserable, hopeless, at a loss. He must be devastated, he may

also feel humiliated. He answered honestly, was straightforward and outspoken: That’s why he

may resent being humiliated by Lady Bracknell. He is romantic and idealistic, but he only met

disdain. He realizes how snobbish Lady Bracknell is.

d. A really affectionate mother may want to know if Jack is really in love with her daughter

Gwendolen, what he likes, what his pastimes are. She may want to know what books he likes,

what sports he practises, she may want to know more about him and his father Mr Cardew.

The order in which she asks her questions is puzzling and reveals what her main concerns are.

She asks questions about secondary matters and comes to more serious matters afterwards.

3. Defi ne the tone

Corrigé : a. sincerely b. hopefully c. contemptuously d. impatiently e. proudly f. angrily

4. Role play

Réponses libres ; les élèves s’appuieront sur leurs notes dans le Workbook et leurs réponses

aux questions du manuel.

Critères d’évaluation : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le professeur sera

bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de points attribué à

chaque critère.

EXPRESSION ORALE EN CONTINUClair et audible 0 1 2

Reprise des informations données dans le texte 0 1 2 3 4

Richesse du lexique et des structures 0 1 2 3 4 5

Prononciation 0 1 2 3 4 5

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points / 20

INTERACTIONQuestions posées correctement 0 1 2 3 4 5

Total des points / 5

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 7 0 • UNIT 13

5. How to pronounce

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 3 piste 6 (ainsi que sur le site compagnon,

U13–Your task (4)).

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 102-103)

• Syllabes accentuéesLady Bracknell: Now to minor matters. Are your parents living?

Jack: I have lost both my parents.

• Groupes de souffle (nous avons utilisé ici une double barre en fin de phrase)

Lady Bracknell: To lose one parent, Mr Worthing, | may be regarded as a misfortune; |

to lose both looks like carelessness || . Who was your father? ||

Jack: I am afraid I really don’t know. || The fact is, | Lady Bracknell, | I said | I had lost my

parents || . It would be nearer the truth | to say that my parents seem to have lost me... ||

I don’t actually know who I am by birth. || I was... | well, | I was found. ||

• Mots porteurs de sensJack: The late Mr Thomas Cardew, an old gentleman of a very charitable and kindly disposition,

found me, and gave me the name of Worthing, because he happened to have a first-class ticket

for Worthing in his pocket at the time. Worthing is a place in Sussex. It is a seaside resort.

Lady Bracknell: Where did the charitable gentleman who had a first-class ticket for this

seaside resort find you?

• IntonationJack: In a hand-bag. 5 (déclaration positive) Lady Bracknell: A hand-bag? 3 (surprise)

• Prononciation des voyelles Jack: Yes, Lady \eI\ Bracknell \œ\. I was \E\ in a hand \œ\-bag \œ\ – a somewhat large \A…\, black \œ\ leather hand-bag, with handles \œ\ to it – an \E\ ordinary \E\ hand-bag in fact \œ\.• Syllabe accentuéeLady Bracknell: In what locality did this Mr James, or Thomas, Cardew come across this

ordinary hand-bag? Les mots soulignés ont en commun le schwa, forme réduite.

• Syllabe accentuée et liaison consonne-voyelleJack: Yes. The Brighton line.

Lady Bracknell: The line is immaterial. Mr Worthing, I confess I feel somewhat bewildered by

what you have just told me.

• Mots mis en reliefJack: May I ask you then what you would advise me to do? I need hardly say I would do

anything in the world to ensure Gwendolen’s happiness.

Lady Bracknell: I would strongly advise you, Mr Worthing, to try and acquire some relations

as soon as possible, and to make a definite effort to produce at any rate one parent, of either

sex, before the season is quite over.

Jack: Well, I don’t see how I could possibly manage to do that. I can produce the hand-bag

at any moment. It is in my dressing-room at home. I really think that should satisfy you,

Lady Bracknell.

• IntonationLady Bracknell: Me, sir! 5• Mots mis en relief What has it to do with me? You can hardly imagine that I and Lord Bracknell would dream

of allowing our only daughter – a girl brought up with the utmost care – to marry into a

cloak-room, and form an alliance with a parcel? Good morning, Mr Worthing!

III.

UNIT 13 • 2 7 1

Critères d’évaluation : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le professeur sera

bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de points attribué

à chaque critère.

6. You are the stage director

> Mise en œuvre possible :

k On pourra fournir quelques suggestions de mise en scène :

– en entrant, Lady Bracknell prend le temps de regarder Jack de haut en bas, de le toiser

et de se montrer surprise ;

– avant que Jack ne prenne la parole après le départ de Gwendolen, Lady Bracknell peut

à nouveau le toiser et Jack peut baisser les yeux ;

– lorsque Jack préfère ne pas s’asseoir, Lady Bracknell peut poser son sac sans un mot

et le forcer à s’asseoir en lui tendant une chaise pour accentuer le comique ;

– elle peut regarder Jack droit dans les yeux ;

– lorsqu’elle dit That is satisfactory, elle peut marquer un temps d’arrêt : That is / satisfactory ;

– lorsque Jack raconte comment il a été trouvé, il peut jouer avec une chaise pour montrer

son embarras. Lorsqu’il dit I was found, il peut regarder le public ;

– la chaise peut être soulevée lorsqu’il dit : In a hand-bag et tomber lorsque Lady Bracknell

répond : A hand-bag?

– à la fin de la scène, Lady Bracknell doit être très calme et très dure, quitter la pièce

majestueusement sans un regard pour Jack.

k Pour l’activité de lecture à haute voix, on pourra appliquer les mêmes critères d’évaluation

que précédemment.

Prolongement possible :

More about Oscar WildeVisit the following website to collect information about Oscar Wilde:

www.//encarta.msn.com/text_761573798___2/Oscar_Wilde.html

a) When and where was he born?

b) Where was he educated (name of the two universities)?

c) Give examples of his eccentricity (clothes, environment).

d) What was the turning point in his life?

e) What is he famous for? Give the title of a famous novel, and his most famous poem.

f) When and where did he die?

7. Watch a video

Voir p. 425-426 et 448-449.

Voix claire et audible 0 1 2

Implication personnelle, ton juste 0 1 2 3

Intonation 0 1 2 3

Réalisation des liaisons consonne-voyelle 0 1 2 3 4

Accentuation des mots porteurs de sens 0 1 2 3 4

Prononciation correcte 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points /20

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 7 2 • UNIT 13

4. THE RIGHT DECISION

1. Understanding the text

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 103)

1. we = Mrs Bennet and Mr Collins • you = Mr Bennet • he + his = Mr Collins • her = Lizzy

2. “You must come and make Lizzy marry Mr Collins” (l. 2)

3. ‘‘Come here, child,’’ cried her father as she appeared. ‘‘I have sent for you on an affair

of importance. I understand that Mr Collins has made you an offer of marriage. Is it true?’’

Elizabeth replied that it was. ‘‘Very well – and this offer of marriage you have refused?’’

‘‘I have, Sir.’’

‘‘Very well. We now come to the point. Your mother insists upon your accepting it. Is it not

so, Mrs Bennet?’’

‘‘Yes, or I will never see her again.’’

‘‘An unhappy alternative is before you, Elizabeth. From this day you must be a stranger to

one of your parents. Your mother will never see you again if you do not marry Mr Collins,

and I will never see you again if you do.’’

When Mrs Bennet learnt that her daughter had just refused Mr Collins’s proposal, she

was amazed / outraged / aghast and disappointed. She didn’t expect her daughter to

refuse such an offer. Her dreams were shattered, because she expected her daughter to

be submissive, obedient and docile. She immediately went to see Mr Bennet to make Lizzy

change her mind, to make her obey, to oblige / compel / force her to marry Mr Collins /

to use his authority / to be the go-between and support her. However Mr Bennet does

not side with his wife, but his daughter. He does not want to interfere with his daughter’s

decision. He wants her to be independent. He respects her decision, he refuses to impose

a decision on her. Unlike Mrs Bennet he respects her / Lizzy’s choice, he is understanding

and tolerant. He knows his daughter is independent, mature enough to defend her own

interests. He cares about her feelings, whereas Mrs Bennet wants to marry off her daughter

and does not take her feelings into account.

2. Recap

Les élèves s’appuieront sur leurs notes du Workbook (cf. réponse ci-dessus).

Prolongements possibles :

k What are Mrs Bennet’s feelings at the end of the scene?

Productions possibles : She must be mad at her husband because he did not side with her /

support her. She is outraged at her daughter’s decision. She never thought Lizzy could challenge

her authority. She must be desperate and drained. She certainly resents her husband’s

decision. Both her husband and her daughter have offended and ridiculed her.

k Role play

– Mrs Bennet meets her best friend and tells her what has just happened.

– Lizzy narrates the scene to one of her sisters.

I.

II.

MANUEL k P. 174

UNIT 13 • 2 7 3

3. How to pronounce

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 3 piste 8 (ainsi que sur le site compagnon,

U13–Your task (5)).

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 104)

k Mots porteurs de sens‘‘Oh! Mr Bennet, you are wanted immediately; we are all in an uproar. You must come and

make Lizzy marry Mr Collins, for she vows she will not have him, and if you do not make

haste he will change his mind and not have her.’’

k Prononciationfrom \frEm\ entered \"entErd\k Syllabe accentuéeopinion. (-ion est un suffixe contraignant, et l’accent tombe sur la syllabe qui le précède)

k La voyelle -arang \œ\ and \E\ Elizabeth \E\ was \E\ library \E\k Son en commun et liaisons consonne-voyelleLes mots soulignés ont en commun le schwa, forme réduite.

‘‘Come here, child,’’ cried her father as she appeared. ‘‘I have sent for you on an affair of

importance. I understand that Mr Collins has made you an offer of marriage. Is it true?’’

Elizabeth replied that it was. ‘‘Very well – and this offer of marriage you have refused?’’

‘‘I have, Sir.’’

k Mots porteurs de sens et liaisons consonne-voyelle‘‘Very well. We now come to the point. Your mother insists upon your accepting it. Is it not

so, Mrs. Bennet?’’

‘‘Yes, or I will never see her again.’’

k Mots mis en relief‘‘An unhappy alternative is before you, Elizabeth. From this day you must be a stranger to

one of your parents. Your mother will never see you again if you do not marry Mr Collins,

and I will never see you again if you do.’’

Critères d’évaluation : on pourra reprendre la grille de la p. 267.

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

a. You are engaged! (surprise)

b. Oh! You are engaged to Jack! (ironie / mépris)

c. Don’t tell me you are engaged to Jack! (colère)

a. Lizzy has just refused a marriage proposal. Lizzy, et non sa sœur, vient de refuser une

demande en mariage.

b. Lizzy has just refused a marriage proposal. Lizzy vient à l’instant de refuser une demande

en mariage.

c. Lizzy has just refused a marriage proposal. Lizzy vient de refuser une demande en mariage

et personne ne s’y attendait.

d. Lizzy has just refused a marriage proposal. Lizzy a refusé une demande en mariage.

1.

2.

MANUEL k P. 175-177

UNIT

13 ALL THE WORLD’S A STAGE

2 7 4 • UNIT 13

> Build up your vocabulary

a. “Oh! Mr Bennet, you are wanted immediately,” Mrs Bennet shouted. (8)b. “I will never see her again,” Mrs Bennet threatened. (2)c. “What would you advise me to do?” Jack pleaded. (4)d. “I was… well, I was found,” Jack stammered. (1)e. “What is your income?” Lady Bracknell inquired. (3)f. “Between seven and eight thousand a year,” Jack explained. (5)g. “Lizzy declares she will not have Mr Collins,” Mrs Bennet complained. (7)h. “Come here, child,” Mr Bennet asked. (6)

> Le style indirect

Les paroles rapportées sont introduites par that ou Ø.

Lorsque l’on rapporte les paroles de quelqu’un, certains pronoms représentant des personnes

doivent être modifiés (dans l’ordre, your devient his, I devient she, you devient he, me devient her).

Lorsque l’on rapporte une question au style indirect on rétablit l’ordre de la phrase affirmative (il n’y a pas d’inversion sujet-auxiliaire, ni d’auxiliaire do / does / did, ni de point d’interrogation). Pour rapporter au style indirect une Yes / No question, on utilise if (whether dans un style recherché).

a. Lorsque le verbe introducteur est au prétérit on doit opérer les changements suivants :

– le présent devient un prétérit. Ainsi will devient would.

– le prétérit qui désigne une action antérieure au moment où l’on parle devient un past perfect. – un ordre, un conseil sera introduit par un verbe introducteur (tell, order, advise, urge…).

b. Les adverbes de lieu et de temps peuvent être modifiés :

– tomorrow k the following week

– before next week k before the following week / coming week

On en profitera pour revoir d’autres modifications possibles :

He said, “I will stay here until tomorrow.” (« Je vais rester ici jusqu’à demain. ») k He said

that he would stay there until the day after.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Anger Happiness Worrycrossly • furiously cheerfully • hopefully •

gladly

anxiously • hopelessly •

miserably • nervously •

sadly • desperately

Adverbes Adjectifs Nomskindly kind kindnessimpatiently impatient impatiencescornfully scornful scornquietly quiet quiet / quietnessangrily angry angermiserably miserable misery

UNIT 13 • 2 7 5

Autres changements de ce type :

– yesterday k the day before

– last week / month / year k the week / month / year before

– ago k before

> Practice

a. Gwendolen asked why she had to go into the carriage.

b. Lady Bracknell asked if she / Gwendolen had told her father she was engaged.

c. Lady Bracknell asked if she / Gwendolen was joking.

d. Gwendolen asked how her mother / Lady Bracknell knew Jack had been found.

e. Gwendolen asked if there was a solution.

LIZZY: “I will never marry Mr Collins. I was very polite but Mr Collins was too ridiculous and

self-centred.”

MRS BENNET: “That’s incredible! That’s amazing! How could you refuse such a proposal?

Mr Collins is quite wealthy.”

LIZZY: “I will never marry such an awful man!”

MRS BENNET: “Stop arguing and listen to me. Girls are not supposed to argue and have to

obey their parents. I will immediately speak to your father about it.”

Mr Bennet explained he had sent for Lizzy on an affair of importance. He added that he

understood that Mr Collins had made her an offer of marriage and asked if it was true.

Lizzy replied that it was.

Mr Bennet answered that it was very well and asked if she had refused this / that offer

of marriage.

Lizzy answered / told him she had.

Mr Bennet added they now came to the point. He added Lizzy’s mother insisted upon her

accepting it and asked Mrs Bennet if it was so / if it was true / if it was correct.

Mrs Bennet replied she insisted upon Lizzy accepting this offer or she would never see her

again.

Mr Bennet replied that an unhappy alternative was before her / Elizabeth. From that day

she must be a stranger to one of her parents. He explained that her mother would never

see her again if she did not marry Mr Collins, and he would never see her again if she did.

Calvin told his father that he had decided he wanted to be a millionaire when he grew up.

The father replied / answered that Calvin would have to work pretty hard to get a million

dollars. Calvin protested and declared that he wouldn’t, but his father would. The father was

astonished and Calvin explained that he just wanted to inherit his father’s fortune / money.

YOUR TASK

> Mise en œuvre :

k La préparation de la scène à jouer se fera en dehors du temps scolaire.

k Le travail phonologique se fera grâce au modèle fourni sur le site compagnon.

k Les élèves courageux pourront jouer la scène d’Oscar Wilde dans son entier.

k La grille d’évaluation pourra être confiée aux élèves qui commenteront chaque

prestation (voir manuel p. 55) et conseilleront leurs camarades (voir p. 179, 4).

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 178-179

2 7 6 • PRENDRE PART À UNE CONVERSATION

Grille d’évaluation de la performance : on pourra utiliser la grille p. 267.

Corrigés

a. Pardon me, you are not engaged to anyone.

What has it to do with me?

b. In the cloak-room at Victoria Station. \Et\ = forme réduite

I was in a hand-bag. \wEz\ = forme réduite

What would you advise me to do? \tE\ = forme réduite

We would never dream of allowing our only daughter to marry you. \Ev\ and \tE\ = formes

réduites

c. I must admit I smoke.

What is your income?

In land, or in investments?

d. A man should always have an occupation of some kind.

e. An old gentleman of a very | charitable and kindly disposition | found me |, and gave

me the name of Worthing, because | he happened to have a first-class ticket for Worthing |

in his pocket at the time.

PRENDRE PART À UNE CONVERSATION

CORRIGÉ

2. Classez les arguments de ces quatre adolescents en deux colonnes « pour » et « contre ».

3. Répérez les tournures utilisées.– exprimer son accord ou son désaccord : I quite agree with you • I don’t agree at all

– donner son opinion à tour de rôle : It’s OK to…, but…

– demander des explications : What do you mean exactly?

– interrompre quelqu’un : Hang on

– manifester sa surprise ou son agacement : Are you kidding?

> Script de l’enregistrement

Tracy: I think it’s wrong to give rewards.

Jason: What do you mean exactly?

Tracy: Well, teenagers should tell adults because they think they have seen something bad,

and because they want to help, not because there is a reward.

Mark: Are you kidding? This is mad! I would never inform on a friend.

1.

A.

MANUEL k P. 180-181

Pour Contre– If a kid doesn’t go to school or breaks

the school rules [...] I would tell the adults

and take the reward. (Jason)

– It’s OK to reward informers (Mark)

– It’s wrong to give rewards. (Tracy)

– Reward or no reward, I would be too

scared to tell anybody. (Linda)

– I wouldn’t inform on a friend. (Mark)

PRENDRE PART À UNE CONVERSATION • 2 7 7

Jason: I don’t agree at all. If a kid doesn’t go to school, it’s wrong. He should be punished.

Linda: Wait a minute, I’d be too scared to tell anyone!

Jason: So Mark, what would you do instead?

Mark: Well, actually, I would talk with the person and try to make him or her change.

Linda: I quite agree with you...

Jason: But you are wrong! I would tell the adults I know and take the reward.

Linda: Hang on, what if the pupil is mad at you later on and takes his or her revenge?

2. Préparez cinq arguments (pour ou contre) et discutez-en avec vos camarades.B.

Pour Contrea. – I would like to experience the freedom

of being on my own.

– I hate being tied to an object.

– It’s impossible because I need to keep in

touch with my parents in case they need me.

– I can’t possibly imagine not keeping in

touch with my friends, even for a week.

b. – I know good from bad so I let anybody

have access to my Facebook page.

– I don’t want anybody to have access

to private information about me.

– I think privacy is important.

c. – It could help me go to bed earlier

and sleep.

– It could help me concentrate on my

homework.

– It could stop me spending hours chatting

with unknown people.

– I don’t want my parents to interfere

with my private life. I’m old enough to be

independent.

– I need my access to the Internet to do my

homework even at 11 p.m.

d. – When we are all dressed the same

way, we go unnoticed.

– Not only to prevent racketing but also

to diminish social differences.

– I don’t think it helps. Criminals want to

rob us of our MP3 players or up-to-date

cellphones, smart phones.

– They are not really interested in clothes.

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 7 8 • UNIT 14

A mind to murder

S’exprimer à l’écrit : les descripteurs du CECRL

Grille d’auto-évaluation

Production écrite générale

Écriture créative

Niveau A2

Je peux écrire des textes courts et simples : lettres personnelles

simples, cartes postales,

messages et notes sur des sujets

courants et familiers, formulaires.

Peut écrire une série d’expressions et de phrases

reliées par des connecteurs

simples (et, mais, parce que).

Peut écrire une suite de phrases et d’expressions simples sur

sa famille, ses conditions de vie,

des loisirs, le travail actuel ou le

dernier en date. Peut écrire des

biographies imaginaires et

des poèmes courts et simples

sur les gens.

Peut écrire sur les aspects

quotidiens de son environnement :

les gens, les lieux, le travail ou les

études, avec des phrases reliées

entre elles. (niveau A2+)

Peut faire une description brève et élémentaire d’un événement,

d’activités passées et

d’expériences personnelles.

Niveau B1

Je peux écrire un texte simple et cohérent sur des sujets

familiers ou qui m’intéressent

personnellement. Je peux écrire

des lettres personnelles

pour décrire expériences et

impressions.

Peut écrire des textes articulés

sur des sujets variés dans son

domaine, dont les éléments sont

connectés / reliés.

Peut écrire des descriptions simples et directes sur divers

sujets familiers.

Peut faire le compte rendu d’expériences en décrivant ses

sentiments et ses réactions dans

un texte simple et articulé.

Peut faire la description d’un événement, d’un voyage récent,

réel ou imaginé.

Peut raconter une histoire.

UNIT 14 • 2 7 9

L’objectif poursuivi dans cette unité est de rendre les élèves acteurs de leur enseignement

en leur demandant de trouver la solution d’énigmes policières (Tune in, The Wembly

Kidnapping), de remettre un texte dans l’ordre (Scream) ou d’écrire une histoire à partir

d’illustrations. Vu le succès actuel des différentes séries policières à la télévision, il y a fort

à parier que ce thème les motive. Enfin, cela leur permettra de découvrir deux grands noms

de ce genre littéraire : Sir Arthur Conan Doyle et Mary Higgins Clark.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Compétence sociolinguistique

Structures de communication

Manuel

Écrire un épisode d’une histoire policière

à partir d’illustrations

Mémoire • Lien social • Création

k l’investigation policière

k la criminalité

k la tension et le suspense

k les verbes de mouvement (p. 193) k la dérivation des mots (p. 193)k Check your vocabulary (p. 186-187)

k l’interrogation (p. 194) k le prétérit (récit)

k rôle du suffixe -er dans l’accentuation

des mots (p. 193)

k les codes de la conversation

téléphonique (p. 191)

k émettre des hypothèses (p. 191)

k interroger (p. 195)

k exprimer cause et conséquence

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

X

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 8 0 • UNIT 14

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

Lire

Prendre la paroleen continu

Prendre la parole en interaction

Écrire

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

k Tune in!, bande dessinée (p. 186) k Scream, extrait de roman policier (p. 188-189) k The Wembly Kidnapping, énigme policière

(p. 190-191)

k Heart of Darkness, extrait de roman policier (p. 192)

k décrire une atmosphère mystérieuse

(p. 187)

k faire le compte rendu d’un texte (p. 187

à 191)

k résoudre une énigme (p. 191)

k reconstituer une enquête (p. 195)

k jeu de rôles : mener un interrogatoire

(p. 195)

k un court dialogue (p. 187) k un témoignage (p. 187)

k un court dialogue téléphonique (p. 191)k un épisode d’une histoire policière à

partir d’illustrations (Your task, p. 196-197)

k It sounds intriguing (p. 187)k site compagnon, U14–Dialogue: Blue Beard strikes back

Suspicion, extrait d’un film d’Alfred Hitchcock

(p. 191)

Workbook

X

X

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

X

X

UNIT 14 • 2 8 1

TUNE IN!

1. Case study

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, on pourra (grâce à un scan ou une photocopie)

commencer par montrer le texte dans le désordre et garder les images dans l’ordre. On

pourra aussi faire l’inverse. Les élèves devront lire le texte et réordonner le récit, puis

répondre aux questions p. 187.

k On pourrait aussi commencer par donner à une moitié de la classe les images dans

l’ordre, à l’autre les textes dans le désordre. Ceux qui ont les images les décrivent à l’autre

groupe. Les élèves doivent lever le doigt dès qu’ils savent de quelle image il s’agit.

k On peut aussi tout simplement faire découvrir le texte et les images dans l’ordre et

procéder à un travail individuel ou en binômes sur les questions a, b, c et d, suivi d’un

compte rendu oral à la classe. La question e pourra être soumise à la classe entière.

Productions possibles : b. The story is about a young man, James Trudd, who killed his Uncle Tobias. He arranged things

so that the police thought his Uncle Tobias committed suicide.

c. James Trudd shot his uncle in the head at four o’clock. He ramaged through his papers. James

left his uncle slumped across his desk. He was probably in his office writing letters.

d. On organisera un travail en binômes ou en groupes. Les élèves utiliseront la colonne clues

de la rubrique Help! ainsi que les amorces proposées pour expliquer comment l’inspecteur

Key a résolu l’affaire.

Plusieurs versions devraient être suggérés et on poussera les élèves à réagir et à interroger

leur camarade pour avoir des compléments d’information. Ils utiliseront l’aide à l’expression

de la fiche « Prendre part à une conversation » (p. 180-181). Les productions des élèves

feront l’objet d’une trace écrite.

Productions possibles :– He could guess James was the murderer as Uncle Tobias couldn’t have posted the letter

after 4:30, which is the approximate time of his death. He should have posted the letter

before killing himself, and then his letter would have been collected at 4:30. Yet the time

when the mail is supposed to be collected is 8:30 in the morning on the following day. It is

always printed / stamped on the envelope.

– Judging from the handwriting on the envelope, Inspector Key came to the conclusion that

Uncle Tobias didn’t write the letter. He compared James’s and Tobias’s handwritings and he

realized that James’s handwriting corresponded to the one on the envelope.

– Judging from Uncle Tobias’s handwriting, Inspector Key concluded that he was right-handed

so someone put the gun in his left hand. The inspector could see that the weapon was in

Uncle Tobias’s left hand so he couldn’t have shot himself in the head.

– Solving the mystery wasn’t difficult since James did not wear gloves and left his fingerprints

on the weapon, on the envelope...

– Following James’s track was easy as the saliva on the envelope was analysed and James’s

DNA was certainly found.

– After investigating, Inspector Key found the train times in the basket so he assumed that

James had come by train to murder his uncle.

MANUEL k P. 186-187

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 8 2 • UNIT 14

e. On demandera enfin aux élèves de bien expliquer les motivations du meurtrier.

Productions possibles : Uncle Tobias wanted to disinherit his nephew after he was told James

disobeyed him and married Helen secretly, a marriage Uncle Tobias disapproved of / objected to.

James was mad at his uncle after reading that he wanted to change his will to disinherit him. James

didn’t accept the fact he was no longer Uncle Tobias’s heir. He is greedy for money and wants to

lead an easy life with his new bride. That’s the reason why James decided to shoot his uncle.

2. It sounds intriguing

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 105)

Sounds not heard: the howling of a dog • a child weeping (= crying) • rain falling

1. tyres crunching • 2. sudden braking • 3. echoing footsteps • 4. a body bumping into

a car • 5. people yelling at each other • 6. gun shooting • 7. people running • 8. blood

dripping on plastic

b. On incitera les élèves à justifier leur choix à l’aide d’un exemple clair.

Productions possibles : The atmosphere is tense and gloomy because I can hear echoing footsteps so I think the

scene may take place in a car park / parking lot and it must be badly lit.

I can hear tyres crunching so I understand something is going to happen, something

threatening.It’s scary because I can hear people yelling at each other but I don’t really understand what

they are talking about and why they are arguing.

The atmosphere is frightening and creepy because I can hear gun shooting but I don’t know

whether someone died or not.

It’s weird because I can hear something dripping on plastic so I realize it must be blood /

someone must be bleeding and it’s disturbing.

3. Writing workshop

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Les élèves trouveront une aide à l’expression écrite pour rédiger ce dialogue p. 225 du

manuel et p. 105 du Workbook.

k Pour réaliser cette activité, on divisera la classe en plusieurs groupes et on distribuera

à chaque groupe un transparent sur lequel les élèves écriront leur dialogue.

k La correction se fera au rétroprojecteur : on étudiera les propositions de chacun des

groupes et on concentrera l’attention de toute la classe sur une production écrite.

Productions possibles : POLICE OFFICER: “What did you see on that night?”

WITNESS: “At first I didn’t see much... I heard tyres crunching and a sudden braking so I thought

someone may have been knocked over.”

POLICE OFFICER: “What did you do then?”

1.

Check your vocabulary

UNIT 14 • 2 8 3

WITNESS: “Well... I decided to check on what happened. As I was going towards the place

where the car stopped, I could hear echoing footsteps, someone walking calmly, so I thought

no one was hurt. Everything seemed under control!”

POLICE OFFICER: “Did you see someone at that moment?”

WITNESS: “Well... No, I was about to go back to my car when suddenly I heard people yelling

at each other. They sounded really furious. I felt something very dangerous was going on

so I decided to hide. Immediately after, I heard people running and something bumping into

a car body. I realized someone was hiding behind the same car as me. That’s when I first

saw someone. He looked really cross. And then I heard gun shooting. I was afraid of being

wounded!”

POLICE OFFICER: “What did the man next to you do then?”

WITNESS: “Not much, because the other person got into his car and left and I heard blood

dripping on plastic (he was carrying a plastic bag). He was wounded but I did not have time

to help him because he jumped into his car and drove away at full speed!”

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique des p. 186-187

grâce aux exercices suivants (fiche photocopiable disponible sur le site compagnon).

Complétez ces phrases avec les mots qui conviennent.

a. Criminal Investigation Services rely more and more on that can

be found in saliva, hair, nails than on left on objects to discover a

murderer.

b. The person who can testify to a suspect’s innocence because they were spending time

together when the murder was committed is called an .

c. More and more detectives are hired by desperate families to find the

of a missing relative.

d. In order to be able to a criminal case, inspectors have to be

unbiased and cold-blooded.

Faites correspondre ces adjectifs avec leur définition à l’aide de la grille.a. creepy 1. unusual, unfamiliar

b. gloomy 2. ghostly

c. scary 3. producing a nervous apprehension

d. frightening 4. partially or totally dark

e. strange 5. causing terror

f. spooky 6. alarming

1.

2.

a b c d e f

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 8 4 • UNIT 14

CORRIGÉ

a. DNA • fingerprints b. alibi c. track d. investigate

1. SCREAM

1. Get ready

Productions possibles : The young woman looks terrified / panic-stricken. She’s holding her

head in her hands. She is staring at something / someone. The text may be about someone

who has seen / heard something / someone horrible, awful, something / someone she has

never seen / heard before, an extraordinary, unusual person / event / sound. She looks as if

she has just seen something weird and scary. She may wonder what is going to happen. It’s a

black and white photo.

2. Jigsaw reading

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Travail de préparation individuel à la maison : remise dans l’ordre du texte à l’aide des

images.

k Travail en classe : on divisera la classe en plusieurs groupes. Le rapporteur d’un groupe

proposera sa réponse qui sera discutée par les élèves des autres groupes qui confronteront

cette remise en ordre du texte à la leur. Ils utiliseront la double page « Prendre part à une

conversation » (p. 180-181) pour réagir à la version suggérée par leur camarade.

k Si l’on a accès à un TNI, les différents paragraphes seront manipulés en fonction des

suggestions et des remarques des élèves.

k À noter que ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 3, piste 12.

Réponses : A D C B G F E

3. Understanding the text

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile, on ne poursuivra pas davantage l’étude du texte.

k Si la classe est plus solide, on demandera aux élèves de remplir la fiche du Workbook

que l’on corrigera ensuite.

k Si la classe est hétérogène, on pourra demander aux élèves les plus solides de remplir

la fiche et d’en faire un compte rendu oral au reste de la classe.

1.

2.

MANUEL k P. 188-189

a b c d e f

3 4 5 6 1 2

UNIT 14 • 2 8 5

k Pour une classe éprouvant des difficultés à se concentrer sur un texte long, on divisera

la classe en deux groupes qui rempliront seulement une partie de la fiche. On fera une mise

en commun au cours de la phase de récapitulation.

k Le texte remis dans l’ordre (téléchargeable sur le site compagnon) pourra être photocopié

et distribué.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 105-106)

➼ PART 1

k I: Helen Stoner k you: Detective Sherlock Holmes

“allied” • “how subtle are the links which bind two souls”

The scene was set at night.

“wild” • “the wind was howling outside, and the rain was beating and splashing” •

“the gale”

“whistle”• “clanging” The clanging is associated with a mass of metal which had fallen.

“sprang from her bed” • “wrapped a shawl” • “rushed into the corridor” • “opened my door” •

“ran down the passage”

She didn’t know what would happen next. • She was scared to open the door.

a. The suffix is “-ard”. The root is “drunk”: saoûl(e).

b. k groping: tâtonnant / à tâtons k figure: silhouette

k swaying: se balançant k to and fro: d’avant en arrière

➼ PART 2

a.

b.

The speckled band could be a snake because of the whistle that could be heard.

4. Recap

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k On divisera à nouveau la classe en plusieurs groupes et chaque groupe se concentrera

sur une partie, un aspect du texte dont il rendra compte au reste de la classe.

1.2.3.4.

5.6.

7.8.

9.

10.

Helen’s sister’s sufferings Helen’s sister’s words Origin of the sound– knees give way

– fell to the ground

– writhed as one in terrible pain

– limbs dreadfully convulsed

– It was the band!

– The speckled band!

– doctor’s room

Who arrived? What for? What happened to Helen?– stepfather – poured brandy

– sent for medical aid

– sank and died

– never recovered

consciousness

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 8 6 • UNIT 14

k Les élèves seront invités à poser des questions pour obtenir des éclaircissements sur

certains aspects du texte qu’ils auront moins compris / approfondis.

k Les productions des élèves constitueront la trace écrite.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 106-107)

➼ RECAP 1 (ATMOSPHERE)

The scene is set at night. It’s pitch dark so the atmosphere is scary, gloomy and threatening.

Moreover the weather conditions are wild and awful since the wind is howling and the rain is

splashing against the windows. There’s an unusual, violent gale outside and consequently the

atmosphere is disturbing. As some weird noises and sounds can be heard such as a whistle

or clanging, the atmosphere is more and more tense and frightening. It’s even creepy / spooky

as the sounds remain unidentified / the noises cannot be recognized.

The reader feels puzzled because it is impossible to identify / recognize the strange noises.

The reader fears / dreads that something terrible / dreadful may happen to Helen and his

sister. Consequently the reader feels anxious.

➼ RECAP 2 (HELEN STONER)

Helen is really nervous and scared to death because of her sister’s terrible scream. She

knows something dreadful has happened, though she doesn’t know what. She doesn’t

know what she is going to discover and yet she rushes to her sister’s bedroom. Although

she is really frightened, she runs to help her sister and she is very upset when she sees

her sister’s state. However supportive she may have been, she couldn’t help her sister.

When she sees her sister collapse / faint she is really protective and caring with her. She

is absolutely terrified by her sister’s words and gesture towards the doctor’s room because

she doesn’t really understand what she wanted to tell her.

➼ RECAP 3 (HELEN’S TWIN SISTER)

Helen’s sister can be associated with a ghost / zombie because her face is pale / white

and her hands are groping for help. She behaves like a drunkard as she sways to and fro.

She doesn’t seem to be in good health because she writhes as if she suffered terribly. She

seems to be on the verge of collapsing because her body sways, her limbs are convulsed

and her knees seem to give way. She looks like somebody about to die since she falls to the

ground.

She reveals to her sister what she saw (a speckled band) and the place (the doctor’s room)

where something suspicious may come from.

➼ SUMMARY 4 (TECHNIQUE USED)

In order to create suspense the writer sets up a spooky / gloomy atmosphere. The scene

takes place at night: The weather is wild and threatening. Helen (the main character) is

nervous and terrified, that’s why the reader fears that something dreadful (= terrible) may

take place. Because Helen’s sister looks like a ghost and mentions “a speckled band” that

could be a snake, the reader feels frightened / worried about what may happen. Besides,

Helen’s sister dies at the end of the text so the reader is anxious about Helen’s future.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

UNIT 14 • 2 8 7

2. SOLVE IT!

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Tous les élèves feront le travail d’anticipation (Get ready) qui permettra de mettre en

place le lexique lié à l’enlèvement.

k On pourra ensuite former des binômes ou des groupes pour traiter les questions de

l’activité 2. Cette phase d’élucidation sera suivie de comptes rendus oraux. Lors de la

confrontation des hypothèses, on incitera les élèves à réagir aux solutions proposées par

leurs camarades, à les confirmer ou les infirmer. La question d sera traitée collectivement.

k Les élèves devraient se rendre compte qu’Eric n’ayant vu que le dos de son agresseur,

il ne peut avoir remarqué qu’il portait un cardigan et que c’est bien lui (et non la police) qui

a fourni cet élément comme indice. Il y a tout lieu de penser qu’il a menti. Mais on prendra

en compte toutes les hypothèses données par les élèves si elles sont argumentées.

k À noter que ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n°3, piste 13.

1. Get ready

Productions possibles : – To me the word “kidnapping” suggests someone is kept prisoner. Criminals kidnapped this

person to ask the family for a ransom (most of the time money, banknotes, bills). The person

has chains and is gagged so that (s)he cannot escape / run away, scream or speak…

– Réponse libre.

– On that photograph, the man is running away from a danger. He may be running away from

the police. He may have committed a crime, mugged someone, robbed a jewellery. He looks

scared, he is looking to see who is chasing him, if he can escape, he has time to hide. He

may also have witnessed a crime and does not want to be caught by the criminals. He may

manage to outrun his aggressors, they will lose track of him and he will go home safe and

sound. He may also be killed, and the criminals will get rid of the only witness.

Quelle que soit l’approche choisie, il faudra s’assurer que les élèves comprennent bien un

certain nombre de mots du texte comme drop site, cardigan, vicinity, garbage, nearby. On

pourra anticiper les difficultés liées au lexique grâce à l’activité suivante.

Match each word with its definition.1. drop site a. nearness, neighbourhood

2. cardigan b. rubbish, things you put in the dustbin

3. garbage c. not far of 4. vicinity d. predetermined location for the deposit of illicit goods

5. nearby e. collarless woollen jacket that buttons up the front

2. Understanding the text

Productions possibles :b. – The kidnapping must have taken place on Tuesday since Wink Wembly had been missing

since Tuesday. Jonas Wembly (Wink’s father) was called by a lone kidnapper on the following

day and asked for a ransom.

MANUEL k P. 190-191

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 8 8 • UNIT 14

– Eric (Jonas Wembly’s younger son) was asked to bring the money (half a million dollars in

unmarked banknotes / bills) in a duffel bag to a nearby park. He had to follow a specific route

from the mansion where he lived. He was required to park in a downtown lot and to follow an

alley to the drop site at midnight. He was attacked halfway through the alley.

– Eric was knocked / hit on the head. But he was not knocked out. However he could only

see his aggressor’s back, although the action took place near / by a street lamp. That’s why

his description was vague.

c. – Both suspects (Petey Bordon and Amie Acker) were arrested in the vicinity. One of them

(Petey Bordon) was found two blocks from the attack.

– Petey Bordon was carrying a knife. That’s one of the reasons why he was kept prisoner.

Amie Acker was wearing a moth-eaten cardigan but he said he had picked it out just before the

policemen arrested him, which corresponded to Eric’s description of his aggressor’s appearance.

– Petey Bordon ran away as soon as he saw the patrol car, that’s why he was arrested. Then

the police officers realized that he had committed misdemeanours and that he was on parole.

Petey Bordon explained to the police that he ran away because he was carrying a knife

(though he was not allowed to) and was afraid of being arrested. Amie Acker is homeless and

he was wearing a cardigan, which is suspect for the policemen.

d. According to Eric Wembly, he could never see his aggressor’s face. He only saw his back so

his description cannot be precise. Yet he could mention a few details; for example that his

aggressor was tall, that he was wearing white sneakers, blue jeans and a dark cardigan.

e. – The clues given by Eric were the duffel bag, the white sneakers, the blue jeans, the dark

cardigan and the fact that the suspect is tall. The clues found by the police were suspects

arrested in the vicinity, one of them committed misdemeanours and was carrying a knife, the

other is homeless. Both had no alibi.

– The suspect must be Eric because he said he could only see his aggressor’s back and yet

he mentions a dark cardigan in his description which suggests he could see the buttons on

the sweater. He contradicted himself and that’s what the chief inspector noticed so he knew

that Eric Wembly lied and may have arranged the kidnapping with his brother to take money

from their father.

The suspect must be Petey Bordon because he was carrying a knife to protect himself. Moreover

he is a criminal with a record and is used to committing misdemeanours. He may have shifted to

more serious problems this time.

It can’t be Petey Bordon because he was carrying a knife and he would have used it during

the attack.

I’ve changed my mind. Now I think it’s Petey Bordon because he is on parole so he has

already been to prison maybe for a kidnapping.

3. Writing workshop

a. On acceptera les réponses en français pour cette activité de repérage et de réflexion sur la

langue.

Réponses :

– Le segment de phrase qui est au style direct est : “I know we should have called the police.”

On l’identifie facilement puisqu’il est entre guillemets.

– « reconnut Eric Wembly alors qu’il soignait la bosse à l’arrière de son crâne. » En français,

on place le verbe qui introduit le style indirect avant le sujet. En anglais, c’est l’inverse.

UNIT 14 • 2 8 9

b. et c. On incitera les élèves à utiliser un maximum de verbes introducteurs et d’adverbes.

On divisera la classe en plusieurs groupes à qui on distribuera un transparent sur lequel les

élèves rédigeront leur dialogue.

On fera ensuite une correction collective au (rétro)projecteur pour chaque dialogue proposé.

Productions possibles :Wink Wembly has been missing since last Tuesday. It’s Wednesday, the phone rings and Jonas,

who is furious, answers the phone...

“Wink? Is it you? Where on earth have you been since...,” Jonas Wembly said.

“I’m the one who gives orders now. Get it?” the kidnapper warned impatiently.

Jonas Wembly was perplexed.

“Who’s speaking?” he asked drily.

“Shut up!” the kidnapper replied rudely. “Your son, Wink, has been kidnapped. You’ll have to

do exactly what I’m telling you to do and you’d better not call the police... if not...” he said

threateningly.

Jonas Wembly realized it was serious and started listening carefully.

“I want half a million dollars in unmarked bills for midnight,” he yelled.

“It’s too short...” Jonas Wembly told the kidnapper.

“I want your son Eric to take the money in a duffel bag to Meredith Park. He will drive from

your mansion to a downtown lot near the Town Hall where he’ll park. Then he’ll walk through

the main alley in the park and hide the bag in the small roundabout,” he ordered loudly.

“OK!”Jonas said.

“And remember, don’t call the police!” the kidnapper repeated impatiently.

4. Watch a video

Voir p. 427-428 et 450-453.

3. HEART OF DARKNESS

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k On pourra commencer par anticiper le contenu du texte à partir de la photo du manuel.

Les élèves pourront utiliser le vocabulaire donné p. 187 (activité 2).

Productions possibles : It’s twilight. The scene is set in winter because the trees have no

leaves. The house / mansion / manor looks old and the atmosphere is strange because a

window is open in a room with the light on and a curtain is blowing through the window. A

burglar may have just come into / left the mansion and may have stolen money or valuable

paintings... It looks creepy / spooky / gloomy / scary…

k On demandera ensuite aux élèves de remplir la fiche de compréhension du Workbook.

k On divisera la classe en deux groupes et on demandera à chacun de se concentrer sur

un aspect du texte : l’atmosphère et l’héroïne (Trish), ses actions, ses sentiments et ses

pensées. Chaque groupe rendra compte au reste de la classe de son travail en s’aidant

la rubrique Action! du Workbook (p. 109). Les élèves s’interrogeront mutuellement pour

obtenir des éclaircissements ou compléter ce que leurs camarades ont dit. Ils pourront

s’appuyer sur la fiche « Prendre part à une conversation » p. 180-181.

k À noter que ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n°3, piste 14.

MANUEL k P. 192

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 9 0 • UNIT 14

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 108-109)

I. UNDERSTANDING THE TEXT

a) The light she had left on | in the hall | was off.

b) In one room the light is on. In all the other rooms the light is off.c) The woman realized that the light she had left turned on was off now.

“That”refers to the fuse that had blown in the kitchen in the afternoon.

a) “It” refers to the twins’ bedroom.

b) “There was no cry coming from the twins’ bedroom now.”

– I: Trish – them: the twins – it: the door

a) “Suddenly she stopped. It’s not just the hall light. I left the door to their room open so I

could hear them if they woke up. The night-light in the room should be showing. The door’s

closed.”

b) She realizes that unusual, weird things take place in the mansion. She no longer thinks a

fuse has blown again.

II. ➼ RECAP 1 (ATMOSPHERE)

The hall light was turned off though she is convinced she had left it on. She is sure that she

heard a cry. She is sure that she left the twins’ bedroom door open (in case she could hear a

cry) and now the door is closed. So now the house is all dark and silent and gloomy. Because

she noticed all these disturbing, unusual elements, the atmosphere is tense end even scary.

➼ RECAP 2 (THE WOMAN)

Trish is suspicious because she remembers that she left the hall light on and it’s off now.

She wonders if another fuse blew. Then she is puzzled and she doubts whether she heard

a cry coming from the twins’ bedroom or not. Yet she is convinced that something weird,

unusual happens in the mansion so she is on the alert. She goes up to the twins’ bedroom

to check on them. She is anxious when she sees the twins’ bedroom door is closed. She

realizes she couldn’t have heard a cry if the bedroom door was closed and she knows she

left it open. Now she is panic-stricken. She’s anxious about the twins.

Understanding the text

a. Voir corrigé du Workbook ci-dessus.

b. On interrogera un élève qui donnera un résumé du texte dans l’ordre chronologique.

Productions possibles : First in the afternoon the light in the kitchen went off because a fuse

had blown. That’s why Trish first thought another fuse had blown when she noticed the light hall

she had left on was off now. Then she heard a cry and thought probably one of the twins had cried

during her sleep. Consequently she decided to go up to see if everything was all right / to check

on them. Suddenly she realized the bedroom door she had left open was closed now. However she

was positive she had left it open because she couldn’t have heard any cry if it was closed!

1.

2.

3.4.

5.6.

Whose house is it?(full name if possible)

How old is it? What has just taken place downstairs?

Who is upstairs?

It’s the Frawleys’ house. It’s two

centuries old.

A party has just

happened downstairs.

Twin girls are

sleeping upstairs.

UNIT 14 • 2 9 1

c. On demandera aux élèves de lire les cinq fins proposées et de choisir celle qui est logique

selon eux. Ils devront justifier leur réponse puis réagir aux suggestions de leurs camarades

à l’aide de la fiche « Prendre part à une converesation » p. 180-181. La bonne réponse est E.

Productions possibles : To my mind it can’t be D because only Trish was mentioned in the text and in this ending

there are two characters (“we, us”).

That’s quite right. I suppose it’s B because Trish was so panic-stricken when she realized the

bedroom door was closed that I’m convinced she started screaming. I’m persuaded someone

entered the house, turned the hall light off, scared one of the twins and closed the door.

I don’t agree with you. I think it’s C because Trish heard a cry already and in this ending the

word “sound” is mentioned.

I don’t see it that way. In my opinion it’s not C because in this ending someone was supposed

to be with Trish, to have left and to come back now and no one was mentioned in the text.

Secondly the sound is not a cry but something thudding at the door.

Certainly not! Don’t forget that the link word “suddenly” has been used twice in the text

already. So I think it’s E. Trish heard a sound already and the heroine in the ending hears a

sound too. Trish was panic-stricken and anxious and now she is frightened. Tension has built

up and reached its climax.

I think you’re wrong because she identified the sound as soft footsteps. However in the text it

is said that the steps creaked under Trish’s feet so how can footsteps be soft in such an old

house!

That’s all very well but don’t you think that it’s A? She didn’t expect someone to come tonight

but this person eventually turned up and this explains all the weird incidents that happened.

I’ve changed my mind. I think it’s A...

d. The sound of darkness • A stranger in the night • How intriguing!

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

Le suffixe -er ne modifie pas la place de l’accent dans le mot auquel il est rajouté. C’est un

suffixe neutre.

> Build up your vocabulary

1.

MANUEL k P. 193-195

Nom Verbe Adjectif Adverbewilderness wild wildly

dread dread dreadful dreadfully

probability probable probably

suddenness sudden suddenly

closeness close closely

loudness loud loudly

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 9 2 • UNIT 14

As no one turned up at the meeting point, he headed to the nearest bus stop to ride back

to town. While he was hastening = hurrying, he heard a plane hum over him. Suddenly

the plane whizzed past him and he fell down. He realized he was being chased. He was so

scared that he started running away. Luckily enough, the plane bumped into a van and

exploded and many pieces blew away in the air.

a. J’empruntai le couloir à la hâte. J’entrai / Je pénétrai dans le couloir précipitamment.

b. Comme je courais dans le couloir, la porte de la chambre de ma sœur pivota lentement

sur ses gonds.

c. Je sortis précipitamment, appelant mon beau-père à grands cris.

d. Il s’enfuyait avec le sac.

a5 • b6 • c7 • d4 • e1 • f3 • g8 • h2

> L’interrogationCes énoncés sont tous à la forme interrogative.

Complétez : en anglais, les constructions interrogatives utilisent obligatoirement un auxiliaire (sauf pour Who et What sujets).

Quand la question commence par un mot interrogatif on a l’ordre : mot interrogatif +

auxiliaire + sujet + verbe.

question a réponse c • question b réponse e • question c réponse a • question d réponse d •

question e réponse b

Les énoncés a, b et d sont au prétérit simple ; les énoncés c et e sont au présent simple.

Déduisez : quand le mot interrogatif est sujet, il n’y a pas d’auxiliaire do / does / did ni au

présent simple ni au prétérit simple. La construction est celle de la phrase affirmative.

Complétez : si le verbe se construit avec une préposition, cette préposition est habituellement

placée à la fin de la question.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Mot interrogatif sujet Mot interrogatif complément

a • d • e b • c

Who is the victim? m. identité

Whose gun is it? e. possesseur

When did you last meet the victim? d. moment / date

What time did you leave the flat? n. heure

Where did you go after leaving the flat? g. lieu

Why could the victim have been murdered? h. raison

How is the victim’s wife? c. santé

How was the victim killed? k. moyen / manière

What’s the kidnapper like? f. description

How old is the victim? a. âge

How many bullets were shot at the victim? b. nombre

How much money was kept in the safe? i. quantité

How far was the murderer from his victim? l. distance

How often did you meet the victim? o. fréquence

How long will it take to have the test results? j. durée

UNIT 14 • 2 9 3

> Practice

a. Did you hear unusual noises last night?

b. How much money has been stolen?

c. What time did his wife leave the flat?

d. When were the photos taken by the detective?

e. Do you know why he left her?

f. Did the victim go to work yesterday morning?

Proposition de corrigé THE INSPECTOR: You saw a suspect. What was he like?THE WITNESS: He was quite tall.

THE INSPECTOR: How old was he?THE WITNESS: About thirty.

THE INSPECTOR: What was his hair like?THE WITNESS: It was dark, short and curly.

THE INSPECTOR: Did he have a beard?THE WITNESS: No, he didn’t. He had a moustache.

THE INSPECTOR: What was the time? / What time was it?THE WITNESS: It was around ten.

THE INSPECTOR: What were you doing outside at ten?THE WITNESS: I was walking my dog.

THE INSPECTOR: Have you already seen the suspect in the district?THE WITNESS: No, never. It’s the first time.

Productions possibles :Kate Todd’s roleWhat’s your name? How long have you been flatmates?

How old are you? What were you doing at 10 p.m.?

Are you married or single? How often do you...?

What’s your job? Where were you at 10 p.m.?

Where do you work? When did you last see Mr Boffin?

How are you related to the victim? When did you come back home?

Who broke up? Where is the cinema located?

When did you break up with him? How long was the film?

Why did he / you break up? Where did you eat out?

How long have you known him? Were you alone?

Miss Rose’s roleMy name is Miss Rose. I’m thirty-two years old.

I’m single. He met a girl and fell in love with her...

I’m a florist. I run a shop on High Street / Her name is Miss White.

two blocks away. I was at home on my own.

I’m Mr Boffin’s / Colin’s flatmate. I watched TV until 11 p.m. I went to bed

We’ve been flatmates for two years. because I start work very early in the morning.

Colin used to be my boyfriend.

He broke up.

1.

2.

3.

UNIT

14 A MIND TO MURDER

2 9 4 • UNIT 14

Mr Brain’s roleMy name is Brian Brain. I work for a research laboratory. It isn’t the

I’m twenty-nine years old. same laboratory as Colin’s.

I’m single. I went to the cinema last night.

I have no girlfriend. It’s not very far from here.

Colin and I have been friends for I was alone.

two years. I didn’t go back home before midnight

We have been flatmates for a year. because I had a drink in a bar after the film

I’m a chemist. which finished at 10.30 p.m.

Mr Test’s roleMy name is Ted Test. We have been flatmates for eight years.

I’m thirty. I’m a chemist.

I’m single but I have a girlfriend, I work in the same laboratory as Colin.

Miss Blue, who lives next door. I wasn’t alone.

We have known each other for a very I spent the night with my girlfriend.

long time. We have been friends since We ate out, went to the cinema and then went

we were teenagers. to Miss Blue’s flat.

Kate Todd’s suppositionsIt can’t be Mr Test because he had an alibi. He must have been seen in the restaurant. They

have known each other for too long.

It may be Mr Brain because he works for a research laboratory so it was easy for him to get

digitalin. He may have wanted to get rid of him and apply for his job in the future.

I’m sure it’s Miss Rose because she was jealous and couldn’t bear the separation. She never

forgave him.

It must be Mr Test because he works with Mr Boffin and they must be rivals. His alibi is

Miss Blue but she cannot be trusted because she is his girlfriend.

YOUR TASK

> Mise en œuvre :

k Travail en classe : on lira les consignes de la p. 196 en classe pour s’assurer qu’elles

sont bien assimilées.

k Travail à faire à la maison : les élèves rédigeront un épisode d’histoire policière de 200 mots

chez eux. Ils auront une semaine ou dix jours pour réaliser leur tâche qui pourra figurer dans le

journal du lycée, s’il en existe un.

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le

professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de

points attribué à chaque critère.

En dessous de 10, l’élève atteint le niveau A2 et au-dessus le niveau B1 ; au-dessus de 16 le

niveau B2 est en cours d’acquisition.

MANUEL k P. 196-197

UNIT 14 • 2 9 5

Nom : Classe :

Respect des consignes (tous les points sont traités) 0 1 2

Respect du lecteur– alinéas

– paragraphes / sauts de lignes

– présentation propre

0 1 2 3

Respect des codes de l’histoire policière– rôles bien identifiables (détective, victime, gangsters)

– intrigue plausible

– création du suspense, d’une situation tendue

0 1 2 3 4

Organisation / cohérence (structure / enchaînements) 0 1 2 3

Richesse de l’expression et du lexique– réutilisation des acquis du cours

– prise de risque0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue– orthographe

– calques du français

– phrases inintelligibles

– erreurs élémentaires et récurrentes

0 1 2 3 4

Total des points / 20

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

2 9 6 • UNIT 15

Over the rainbowDans cette unité, notre objectif a été triple :

– apporter des connaissances sur les différentes composantes de la population sud-africaine ;

– montrer la réalité du régime de l’apartheid et donner un coup de projecteur sur un personnage

célèbre qui s’est battu pour la cause des Noirs : Nelson Mandela ;

– souligner les problèmes actuels auxquels est confrontée l’Afrique du Sud.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à l’expression écrite, voir p. 278.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Rédiger une frise chronologique

sur l’histoire de l’Afrique du Sud

Mémoire • Échanges • Lien social

k l’apartheid, régime d’exclusion (p. 200,

201 et 204)

k la lutte contre le racisme et les

inégalités sociales (p. 200 à 204)

k la lutte contre le sida (p. 202 à 204)

k les chiffres longs et les statistiques

(p. 205 et 207)

k le present perfect (p. 206-207)

k accentuer les mots porteurs de sens

(p. 205)

k la capacité et l’interdiction

k la cause et la conséquence

k le reproche

k le but

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

UNIT 15 • 2 9 7

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

Lire

Prendre la paroleen continu

Prendre la parole en interaction

Écrire

Écouter

Écouter et regarder (vidéo)

Manuel

k Faces of South Africa, extrait d’un site Internet (p. 198-199) k The fight, extrait de roman (p. 200) k Nelson Mandela, extrait de biographie (p. 201) k We are together, article de journal

(p. 202-203)

k Soweto today, article de journal (p. 204)

k rendre compte d’un article (p. 199 et 202)

k rendre compte d’un texte (p. 200)

k aller à l’implicite (p. 200 et 201)

k faire le portrait d’un personnage célèbre

(p. 201)

k étudier une affiche (p. 200)

k étudier un cartoon (p. 209)

k ses souvenirs (p. 200)

k une biographie (p. 201)

k le résumé d’un article (p. 203)

k un article pour une encyclopédie (p. 204)

k More information, reportage (p. 201)

k site compagnon, U15–Dialogue:

Testimony

Goodbye Bafana, extrait du film de Bille August

(p. 200)

Workbook

X

X

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

X

X

X

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

2 9 8 • UNIT 15

TUNE IN!

1. Fast facts

> Mise en œuvre possible :

k Dans le cadre d’une classe solide, les élèves pourront traiter le texte et ses questions

en entier.

k Dans le cadre d’une classe plus fragile, on pourra diviser la classe en quatre groupes

et attribuer à chaque groupe une partie du texte et les questions correspondantes dans

le manuel aux questions a, b, c et d.

– Groupe A : de la ligne 1 à 5 – Groupe C : de la ligne 21 à 24

– Groupe B : de la ligne 6 à 20 – Groupe D : de la ligne 25 à la fin

Les élèves les plus fragiles seront chargés des parties les moins difficiles.

Les informations pourront être synthétisées à l’aide de tableaux de ce type. Ces tableaux

(disponibles sur le site compagnon) pourront être projetés et remplis au fur et à mesure

que chaque rapporteur de groupe prendra la parole.

SOUTH AFRICA’S POPULATION

SOUTH AFRICA’S HISTORY

MANUEL k P. 198-199

Total population in millionsMajor ethnic groups:– Proportion of Blacks in the entire population– Percentage of the other ethnic groups

Origin of South Africa’s Whites: – Origins, name given, characteristics– Origin and language

The Coloureds:– Origin of the Coloureds – Symbol of …?

The Indian population:– Origin of the Indian population– Types of jobs today

Name given to the white domination / Type of regime?

Duration of this dominationYear in which this domination endedReasons why the system was dismantled / abolishedFirst democratically elected president

UNIT 15 • 2 9 9

CORRIGÉ

SOUTH AFRICA’S POPULATION

SOUTH AFRICA’S HISTORY

Total population in millions Nearly 43 million people

Major ethnic groups:– Proportion of Blacks in the entire population– Percentage of the other ethnic groups

four major ethnic groups

– Blacks: 75.2 percent of the population

– Whites :13.6 percent

– Coloureds: 8.6 percent

– Indians: about 2.6 percent of the population

Origin of South Africa’s Whites:– Origins, name given, characteristics– Origin and language

– Afrikaners (descendants of Dutch, French, and German

settlers who formed unique cultural traditions and their

own language: Afrikaans)

– “English speakers” (mostly the descendants of

immigrants from the United Kingdom)

The Coloureds:– Origin of the Coloureds – Symbol of …?

– The Coloureds are South Africa’s people of mixed

racial ancestry. Made up of descendants of former

slaves, blacks, and whites.

– Many Coloureds proudly assert that they are living

proof that South Africa’s different races can get along.

The Indian population:– Origin of the Indian population– Types of jobs today

– Indians, mostly the descendants of South Asian

immigrants. South Africa’s Indian community is largely

descended from indentured laborers brought to South

Africa by the British to work on sugar plantations.

– South African Indians today are found in all walks of

life, including the president’s cabinet, the law courts,

and corporate executive suites.

Name given to the white domination / Type of regime?

The white minority ruled South Africa as colonialists and

then through apartheid, a system of government that

entrenched white privileges and reserved political power

for whites.

Duration of this domination 300 years

Year in which this domination ended

The system was abandoned peacefully in 1994.

Reasons why the system was dismantled / abolished

A long, sometimes bitter struggle by black political

and labour movements. Whites and Blacks negotiated

a constitution based on individual rights, and all South

Africans participated in the election of a democratic

government.

First democratically elected president

Nelson Mandela was elected the first president

of a democratic South Africa.

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 0 0 • UNIT 15

2. South Africa at a glance

Corrigé :

– the name of the capital city: Pretoria; two other famous cities: Johannesburg and Cape Town

– Dutch origin: Bloemfontein, Pietersburg, Mosselbaai; British origin: Cape Town, Port

Elizabeth, Port Nolloth, Kimberley, George; African origin: Umtata, Mbabane, Maseru

– the name of a national park: Kruger National Park

– the name of a desert: Kalahari Desert

3. Recap

Productions possibles :a. The South African population is composed of Blacks, Whites, Coloureds and Asians. People are

of mixed origins. South Africa is an ethnic mosaic. The Rainbow Nation refers to the diverse mix

of people, cultures and religions living together in one country. Archbishop Desmond Tutu is said

to have coined the phrase at the end of the apartheid regime in South Africa.

b. Black, gold and green, which were first incorporated into South African national flags in the

19th century, also feature prominently in the flags of the liberation movements, particularly

the African National Congress (ANC), the Pan-African Congress (PAC) and Inkatha. These

colours can thus be said to broadly represent the country’s black population.

Blue, white, red and green reflect the British and Dutch (later Boer) influence, as shown in

the earliest flags flown in South Africa, and also featured prominently in the old South African

national flag (1928-1994) and thus represent the white population of South Africa.

The green pall (the Y-shape) is commonly interpreted to mean the unification of the various

ethnic groups and the moving forward into a new united South Africa (www.flagspot.net/

flags/za.html - col).

Informations complémentairesk At the end of the 17th century, French, German and Dutch Protestants emigrated to the

Cape of Good Hope, a Dutch territory on the route to Java. They quickly drove native Africans

off their lands. Then the British conquered the colony in 1806. But the early settlers called

Boers rebelled against their domination. In 1910 the four united provinces of Transvaal,

Orange, Natal and the Cape formed the South African Union which became a republic in

1961, when it withdrew from the Commonwealth.

k Apartheid is an Afrikaans word (Afrikaans is the language spoken by Afrikaners). In

Afrikaans it means separate evolution, and is a formal system of racial segregation which

started in 1913 and was reinforced in 1948. For non-Whites, it implied:

– No voting rights and no political representation.

– No relations with Whites except at work.

– Townships (such as Soweto) for Blacks and Coloureds who were excluded from white

towns from 1955 onwards.

– Passbooks which were necessary to work in white areas.

– Blacks were stripped of their citizenship, legally becoming citizens of one of ten tribally

based self-governing homelands or bantustans (Bophuthatswana, Ciskei, Transkei,

Vendaland…).

– Social and economic discrimination.

UNIT 15 • 3 0 1

1. THE FIGHT

1. Watch a video

Voir p. 429-430 et 454-455.

Le role play proposé ici permettra de rebrasser le cours précédent et de vérifier l’apprentissage

de la trace écrite. Il donnera lieu soit à un travail écrit, soit à une prise de parole en continu.

Productions possibles : We had just come back from Robben Island. We were walking down a

street, when my grandmother and my mother stopped in front of a greengrocer’s. They went in.

I was with my father. Suddenly a noise could be heard. We saw police vans coming at full speed.

All of a sudden they stopped and checked a black woman’s passbook. As she didn’t have her

papers, they brutally arrested her. She clung to her baby, but the policemen ruthlessly threw it

on the ground. She was yelling, screaming out of fear. Another woman picked up the baby and

saved it. The woman was taken to prison. Afterwards, I was shocked. I couldn’t do anything.

I was lying on the sofa when my parents came into the room. They both explained what

apartheid meant. I couldn’t help being outraged and feeling compassion for these innocent

people. This scene was a turning point in my life. For the first time I was confronted with an

unfair world where Blacks were treated differently.

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante.

Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre

de points attribué à chaque critère.

2. Soweto riots

> Mise en œuvre possible : on pourra diviser la classe en deux groupes. Aux élèves les

plus fragiles on donnera l’encadré à lire. Aux plus solides on confiera le travail sur l’affiche

(disponible sur le transparent n° 15).

Exploitation de l’illustration : k On pourra inviter les élèves à aller sur le site suivant pour répondre à une série de questions:

www.soweto.co.za/html/p_hector.htm

– Who was Hector Pieterson?

– When was he killed?

– What has Hector Pieterson become a symbol of?

– What impact did this photo have on the international community?

– What is the name given to the Soweto riots in this article?

– How did the riots begin?

– What did people demonstrate against?

– Who inspired this movement?

MANUEL k P. 200

Respect des consignes 0 1

Moments importants du récit traités 0 1 2 3 4

Expression des sentiments du narrateur 0 1 2 3 4 5

Richesse de la langue (lexique et structures) 0 1 2 3 4 5

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4 5

Total des points / 20

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 0 2 • UNIT 15

– What were the slogans?

– What were they singing?

– How did the police react?

– What impact did it have on the rest of the country?

k On demandera d’expliciter l’expression “Youth action for democratic education and

elections”.

k Cette recherche donnera lieu à une prise de parole en continu. Ceux qui auront

lu l’encadré Soweto riots pourront juger de la pertinence de ce qui est dit et pourront

compléter, si nécessaire.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 112)

k 1976: beginning of the youth rebellion k 400: number of casualties, death toll

k 1980s: end of the rebellion

k two languages: Afrikaans, English k two groups of people: Blacks, Whites

In June 1976 the schoolchildren protested against the supremacy of English / the state’s

decision to introduce Afrikaans in all African schools / that they must be taught Afrikaans,

which was regarded as the language of the oppressor. Many young people were inspired by

the ideas of Steve Biko and the Black Consciousness Movement. This system, called “gutter

education”, was designed to train African people to accept a subservient role in society.

“Blacks are not dutsbins” is one of the demonstrators’ slogans. The peaceful demonstration

turned to riots and many children died. The riots extended to the rest of South Africa and

many people died claiming their rights. The riots lasted until the mid-1980s.

3. A time of fi re

À noter que ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 3, piste 16.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 112-113)

1. k “she”: Grace k “they”: schoolchildren

Grace

They are in their teens, maybe their early teens. Clues: “schoolchildren” (l. 3) and the little

girl who was killed next to Grace was “about eight years old” (l. 18).

Blacks have the right to have a good education. + Blacks are not servants. + Blacks should

have the same education as Whites.

1.

2.

3.

I.

2.

3.

4.

5.Violence Victims

Who? police schoolchildren

What? – “the police saw the schoolchildren marching,

and then the trouble started.” (l. 9)

– “aimed their guns and began to shoot with real

bullets, killing whoever was in the way.” (l. 11)

– “The police shot tear gas too” (l. 13)

– “More police came in great steel tanks, and

more in helicopters, firing from above.” (l. 15)

– “had marched” (l. 2)

– “were protesting” (l. 3)

– carried a banner (l. 6)

– “People were screaming,

bleeding, falling.” (l. 15)

UNIT 15 • 3 0 3

marching / protesting (l. 2-3)

“Dumi was one of those arrested.” (l. 25)

determined • rebellious • resolute “he would go on fighting even if they killed him.” (l. 27)

1. From 1976 to the mid-eighties young people demonstrated against the government decision

to teach them Afrikaans instead of English. They complained about this unfair decision. But

the police crushed the riots. As a consequence, the number of casualties was high, many

people were killed, arrested or deported.

Grace is the narrator. She witnessed the scene. Schoolchildren protested against the

supremacy of English. They demanded equal rights, a better education, that they should

be treated on an equal footing, that they should not be discriminated against. The police

resorted to arms and violence. Police trucks invaded the area and started shooting at

the demonstrators to crush the riot. It looks as if it were a war. The whole scene gives an

impression of violence. Violence is deliberate, shocking. It was all the more shocking since

the young girl was killed, although she was harmless / helpless / weak / defenceless /

powerless. The police seem heartless / merciless / pitiless / ruthless. It was so awful /

appalling / dreadful, that Blacks retaliated / hit back. They did not have any sophisticated

equipment. It was David versus Goliath. Violence spread to the rest of the country. The death

toll was quite high. Dumi was arrested, was ill-treated, but he came back home determined

to keep fighting against an unfair system; he had become more radical. The goal of the whole

text is to make the reader side with the victims, innocent civilians. The narrator wants to

arouse pity and compassion for the children, to make us feel indignant and outraged. The goal

is also to condemn the government’s attitude during the riots, to show that Blacks were the

victims of sheer violence and hatred.

Prolongement possible : on invitera les élèves à lire le livre de Beverly Naidoo, ouvrage

destiné à la jeunesse qui est tout à fait à leur portée. Ce sera un excellent entraînement

à la lecture d’un texte long et non coupé.

2. NELSON MANDELA

1. Get ready

On procèdera ici à un rapide brainstorming.

2. Understanding the text

À noter que ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n°3, piste 18.

6.7.

8.9.

II.

2.

MANUEL k P. 201

Police Demonstrators’ reaction Results“kept

shooting”

(l. 23)

“People became fighting mad,

throwing stones at the police,

burning down schools and

government offices.” (l. 20)

– “Smoke and flames were everywhere. ”

(l. 22)

– “hundreds were dead.” (l. 23)

– “Hundreds were hurt and hundreds were

arrested.” (l. 24)

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 0 4 • UNIT 15

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 113-114)

a) Buti Mandela was named Nelson.

b) 7 years old • at school (on the first day of school) • by an English teacher (l. 6)

smart. It means clever (synonyms: bright, brilliant, brainy).

“He liked learning new things” (l. 9)

honest • determined • brave • rebellious • resolute • wilful

– threatened (l. 14) – unfairness (l. 16) – inequality (l. 16)

“He stood firm for what he believed was fair and right” (l. 15)

He went to Johannesburg. unfairness • inequality

3. Recap

Cette activité et la question 4b pourront être traitées en même temps (voir productions

possibles ci-dessous).

4. Going further

Productions possibles :a. Mandela resented being given an English name. It was humiliating. It meant he had to lose his

African identity. He was denied any personality, was considered a non-entity.

He knew Whites were despising Blacks but, on arriving in Johannesburg, he felt shock /

indignation / horror, because Blacks were being discriminated against / were treated as

second-class citizens.

b. The incident at the missionary college revealed Mandela was resolute / wilful / rebellious. He

spoke his mind and stood up against the principal. He defied / challenged his authority. His

attitude involves / implies / entails moral courage / strength / willpower. Although the principal

threatened to expel him, he stuck to his decision. He was ready to face the consequences of

his decision. This incident foreshadows his resistance in the fight against apartheid. To disobey

unjust laws was a moral imperative. That’s why he served a 27-year sentence.

Prolongement possible : le vocabulaire de la toolbox pourra être mémorisé grâce à la fiche

page suivante (disponible sur le site Internet).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Where? Incident What about? Decision Consequencesmissionary college

of African scholars

protest for better food he quit the

council

he was expelled

Check your vocabulary

UNIT 15 • 3 0 5

Traduisez les phrases suivantes.

Nelson Mandela était engagé dans la lutte contre l’apartheid.

Toute sa vie, il fut courageux, déterminé, volontaire, audacieux et rebelle.

Il fut désobéissant.

Son attitude était provocante.

CORRIGÉ

Nelson Mandela was committed to / involved in the fight against apartheid.

All his life, he was courageous, determined, resolute, bold and rebellious.

He was disobedient.

His attitude was provocative.

5. More information

> Script de l’enregistrement

MANDELA CELEBRATES 90TH BIRTHDAY

Guess who is turning 90 years old today? Here is a clue: “Happy birthday… Mr Nelson

Mandela.” Some kids singing Happy Birthday to Nelson Mandela, elder statesman, Nobel

prize-winner and South Africa’s first democratically elected leader. Here is NPR Ofeibea

Quist-Arcton.

Nelson Mandela and many others spent decades in prison. They dedicated their lives to

the anti-apartheid struggle and fought for liberation and equality in a free democratic and

non-racial South Africa. The first time many heard Mandela’s voice, it was in court in the

1960s. He was on trial, charged with treason. In this crackling vintage recording, Mandela

defended his actions to end white minority rule.

“It is an ideal which I hope to live for and to see realized. But, My Lord, if needs be, it is an

ideal for which I am prepared to die.”

Nelson Mandela was found guilty in 1964 and began serving arguably the most celebrated

life-sentence in history.

“Free, free, free Nelson Mandela.”

27 years later, on February 11th 1990, Mandela was a free man released from jail. In 1994

he was elected South Africa’s first black President heading a multi-racial government.

“I, Nelson Rolihlahla Mandela do hereby swear to be faithful to the Republic of South Africa,

so help me God.”

Praise singers, presidents and paupers celebrated the inauguration of Nelson Mandela. After

five years as President he handed over the reins of power. But Mandela kept working at the

grand old age of 86, after dedicating himself to children, education and a new struggle: the

fight against HIV / AIDS.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 0 6 • UNIT 15

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 114-115)

statesman \"steItsmEn\ • democratically \ÆdemE"krœtIkEli\ • decade \"dekeId\ •

equality \I"kwÅlEti\

k South Africa k Nelson Mandela k 90 years old k Nobel prize

Réponse libre.

In 1944 Mandela joined the resistance against apartheid. Twenty years later he was arrested

and taken to court. At the end of the trial, he was found guilty and sentenced to life

imprisonment. He served his sentence on Robben Island. He was released from jail in 1990.

Three voices: the journalist, singers, Mandela

– February 11th 1990: Mandela was released from jail

– 1994: Mandela was elected first black President of South Africa

HIV = AIDS

k 5: his term as President k 86: he handed over the reins of power

– HIV / AIDS – education – children

Prolongement possible : on pourra travailler sur le script après élucidation du document

audio, grâce à l’activité suivante.

Trouvez dans le script les équivalents des mots suivants (dans l’ordre du texte).1. indice 4. lutte 7. condamnation à perpétuité

2. homme d’État 5. procès 8. relâché

3. consacrèrent leur vie à 6. coupable 9. il ne cessa de travailler

Corrigé : 1. clue 2. statesman 3. dedicated their lives to 4. struggle 5. trial 6. guilty 7. life-sentence 8. released 9. he kept working

6. Writing workshop

Productions possibles : Mandela was born on July 1918. He was the leader of the ANC and

fought against apartheid. He was arrested and taken to jail where he served a 27-year sentence

on Robben Island. He became a symbol of freedom and equality. Apartheid was abolished in

South Africa in 1992. A year later Mandela and F.W. De Klerk, the white President, who officially

announced the end of apartheid, were awarded the Nobel Peace Prize. A year later in 1994

Mandela became the first democratically elected President of South Africa. Since he resigned

in 1999 Mandela has devoted his time and energy to fighting against AIDS.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Who? Role and award Goal in life ConsequenceMandela South African statesman

Nobel Peace Prize

struggle against apartheid

fought for liberation and

equality

he was imprisoned

When? Sentence Reaction– 1960s

– 1964

life sentence ideal for which he is ready

to die

UNIT 15 • 3 0 7

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante.

Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre

de points attribué à chaque critère.

3. WE ARE TOGETHER

1. Get ready

Corrigés :

a. HIV/AIDS pandemic: “Every day the HIV/AIDS pandemic kills 8,000 people, and in their

neighboring population, the infection rate is nearly 40%.”

b.

c. The figures given are huge and alarming. They underline that AIDS is a widespread phenomenon,

that it is a scourge that is plaguing South Africa. I am shocked, outraged, I didn’t know so many

lives were threatened. AIDS is taking its toll and the number of victims is colossal. The problem

South Africa has to cope with is daunting. HIV/AIDS is a demographic time bomb; the potential

damage it can cause to South Africa, its society and economy, is incalculable.

Informations complémentaires

• Sur le site suivant vous trouverez beaucoup d’informations très précieuses :

www.csa.za.org/filemanager/download/18/ Managing the impact of HIV/ ...

• South Africa has the fastest growing HIV/AIDS epidemic in the world, with more people

infected than in any other country in the world. Over four million people, about one in every

eight adults, are HIV+. At least 20% of adults are infected.

HIV/AIDS is spreading dramatically in South Africa because of:

– the legacy of apartheid and the migrant labour system;

– the disruption of family and communal life;

– a good transport infrastructure and high mobility (allowing the spread of HIV into new

communities);

– high levels of poverty and income inequality;

MANUEL k P. 202-203

Les dates clés sont traitées 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lexique et structures 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Total des points / 20

What?How many children?

How old? Founder? Goals?

The Agape

Orphanage

30 orphans (after

having lost their

parents to AIDS)

aged 7 to

16 years

Gogo Zodwa

Mqadi, a social

worker

– took them in and

gave them a safe haven

– prevent them

from wandering

the landscape alone

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 0 8 • UNIT 15

– very high levels of other STDs;

– the low status of women;

– social norms which accept or encourage high numbers of sexual partners;

– resistance to the use of condoms.

2. Understanding the text

> Mise en œuvre possible

k Le texte peut être travaillé en entier par la classe entière.

k On peut aussi envisager que les élèves lisent tout le texte, mais n’étudient en détail

qu’un de ses aspects. Cela permettra de traiter le texte beaucoup plus rapidement. On

désignera un rapporteur ou plusieurs rapporteurs par groupe, la reprise sera collective

et des notes seront prises par les autres groupes sur les parties non étudiées. Elles seront

synthétisées à l’aide d’un tableau semblable à celui proposé ci-dessous.

k Le groupe d’élèves les plus fragiles pourra être le groupe 1, car les questions sont les

plus factuelles, même si elles sont disséminées dans la partie 1.

k À noter que ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n°3, piste 21.

GROUP 1

a. The Agape orphanage

b. Gogo

Origin of the word “Agape is a Greek word meaning unconditional love” (l. 4)

Where in KwaZulu-Natal

“Agape is half-an-hour inland from Durban, in a Zulu area called

Valley of a Thousand Hills. Agape is in fact on the edge of the

white neighbourhood of Waterfall, an affluent village” (l. 13)

When Gogo set it up in the late 1990s.

Job, origin, personality

social worker

“Gogo is a big woman with a big personality. She has a huge, throaty

laugh, wears a fur hat even in summer and explodes with charm.” (l. 2)

“she beams” (l. 4)

Goals “A lot of people she was dealing with were HIV-positive and their main

concern was what would happen to their children when they passed

away. So she said, ‘I’ll look after them.’” (l. 20)

Problems met

“Agape had problems in the early days with local residents not

wanting it there” (l. 17)

“She found a piece of land with some shipping containers, with no

windows or anything and had 60 kids in there on mattresses. It was

a real struggle.” (l. 24)

UNIT 15 • 3 0 9

Approfondissement possible : Gogo is a generous, warm-hearted, loving person. She is

friendly and welcoming. She seems to be radiant and she certainly has a strong personality.

She can be admired because she fought against deep-rooted prejudices, people who were

hostile to HIV patients. She rescued children who had lost their families, who felt emotionally

devastated and lonely. They were vulnerable and she thought it was her duty to get a shelter,

food, clothes and to defend them. She knew orphans would be destitute and in dire straits.

She was their saviour. The place she found was derelict, dilapidated and shabby. But she

managed to give these children a proper place they could live in. She helped them overcome

hardship and loss.

GROUP 2

a. Paul’s portrait

b. Paul’s project

Approfondissement possible : Paul wanted to have a few months off and a unique opportunity

to mix with local people / to have contacts / to communicate. He needed a challenge, to stay

somewhere long enough to meet people, to develop relationships, to understand the inhabitants

and their local customs. He needed a constructive / educational / enriching / satisfying

experience. He wanted to broaden his horizons. Once he had been there he wanted to do more,

he was even more committed to helping them. He did his best to help them overcome their

difficulties.

Age in his early twenties

Studies “the end of his first year [at university]” (l. 10)

Nationality British (but no clue is given in the article)

How did he get to know about Agape?

“I came across this volunteer project on the internet. Agape.

It was really random.” (l. 12)

How long did he stay there?

“I knew I wanted to spend three months in one place” (l. 11)

What were his goals?

“he wanted to go travelling […] and do something a little bit

different” (l. 10)

What influence did this experience have on him?

“has clearly changed [Paul Taylor’s] life, and not just in

terms of his career.” (l. 6)

“They’re remarkable kids because whatever situation they’re

in, however difficult it is, they always see the positive. They

have enough reasons in their life to be really down, but they

never were. It made a big impact on me.” (l. 7)

“They’re so endearing, so loveable! I never imagined I would

have so much fun, just with the kids.” (l. 32)

What problems was he confronted with?

“So, scraping together £6,000 from family, credit cards and

Theatrecares, an AIDS charity, Taylor went back to Agape.” (l. 38)

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 1 0 • UNIT 15

GROUP 3

Prolongement possible : à la suite de ce texte, on pourra visionner la bande annonce du

film We Are Together : www.youtube.com/watch?v=LpX4JGn4PzU

3. Writing workshop

Productions possibles : Agape is an orphanage founded by Gogo, a social worker. This

generous woman wanted to welcome children who had lost their parents to AIDS. She is

devoted to helping them survive. Paul Taylor, a student, came to Agape by chance and was

deeply impressed by the kids’ energy and enthusiasm. He came back a few months later to

shoot a film there. Unfortunately the orphanage burnt down. Gogo decided to record a CD

with traditional Zulu songs. One day Alicia Keyes, a pop star, heard them and the children

went to New York City to give a concert. The film and the concert helped them raise enough

money to rebuild the orphanage.

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante.

Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre

de points attribué à chaque critère.

Tous les points de l’article sont traités 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lexique et structures 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4

Mots de liaison 0 1 2

Total des points / 20

a. What happened to the orphanage?

main house at the orphanage burnt down

b. What were the consequences?

“After the [fundraising] trip to the UK was cancelled, […] Gogo

instigated plan B: ‘To finish [recording a CD of traditional Zulu

songs] and hope somebody somewhere will hear them.’” (l. 46)

c. Who helped them?

“Alicia Keyes, the pop star, and co-founder of Keep a Child

Alive, the charity that provides anti-retroviral drugs for people

with HIV/AIDS” (l. 54)

d. What were the results?

“In the summer of 2005, the charity contacted Agape, inviting

the children to perform in a fundraising concert in New York

with Paul Simon and Alicia Keyes. The concert raised £60,000.

The film has also raised £150,000 to help Agape rebuild after

the fire.” (l. 56)

UNIT 15 • 3 1 1

4. SOWETO TODAY

> Mise en œuvre possible

k La classe pourra être divisée en deux : une moitié lira le texte, tandis que l’autre traitera

le document iconographique.

k La reprise sera faite en classe entière par un ou plusieurs rapporteurs dans chaque groupe.

k L’écriture du résumé permettra de vérifier que tout le monde s’est bien écouté et compris.

k À noter que ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n°3, piste 22.

Exploitation de la photo : At first sight it gives the impression that it is a Third-World or a

developing country. We are struck by a dirt road lined with shacks and corrugated iron roofs.

We are immediately struck by this slum / shanty town. The ground is littered with sand, a

bath tub and cardboard. It looks messy. The area looks shabby and dilapidated. The barrels /

plastic containers outside the houses reveal that the inhabitants have no running water and no

modern conveniences. They are deprived of modern conveniences / of basic necessities. The

inhabitants’ standard of living is low, they live in appalling / dreadful / awful conditions. They

are in dire straits. They must live below the poverty line. They are needy / destitute. People are

crammed in small rooms. The woman is doing her laundry outside, clothes are already hanging

outside. The grandparents may be looking after their grandchild who is playing next to them.

1. Understanding the text

Corrigé :

– city names: Soweto • Johannesburg

– dates and figures: 100: Soweto was created 100 years ago • 10,000: number of black

residents under the apartheid system • 3,500,000: total population of Soweto today • next 100 years: promising future • October 12, 2004: date on which the article was published

2. Writing workshop

Ce paragraphe pourra être rédigé individuellement ou en binômes, en classe ou à la maison.

Productions possibles : Soweto is an acronym for “South Western Townships”. It is an urban

area near Johannesburg, South Africa. During the apartheid regime, Soweto was a segregated

residential settlement for Blacks, located outside the white city. Blacks and Coloureds were

excluded from white towns from 1955 onwards. Soweto became famous in 1976, when riots

broke out over the government’s decision to enforce education in Afrikaans rather than English.

Today, Soweto is a black-dominated city. Although great progress has been made, many people

still live without electricity or running water, are still faced with dire poverty. Townships are poor

areas where people live below the poverty line but where the future seems bright.

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante.

Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre

de points attribué à chaque critère.

MANUEL k P. 204

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 1 2 • UNIT 15

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

a. laws • huge • gulf • ideal • equality • mountain • climb • equal • journey

b. Now the government is chosen by all South African people, black and white, and

there are no more apartheid laws. But changing “the way things are” is much harder than just changing the laws. There is a huge gulf between rich and poor, between

“haves” and “have-nots” and we must never forget to strive for the ideal of equality

for all. We still have an enormous mountain to climb if every child is to have an equal chance. The journey continues...

> Build up your vocabulary

There are four times as many Whites as Indian / Asian people. Whites represent one tenth

of the population.

There are as many Coloureds as Whites.

Zulus make up 21 percent of the population.

There are fewer Xhosas than Zulus / more Zulus than Xhosas.

Zulus represent nearly a quarter of the population.

African people represent three quarters of the population.

a. Since the fall of apartheid the economic situation has improved and race relations have

evolved in South Africa. However, the country still faces two major issues: poverty and the

rise of HIV. The country faces a human catastrophe as HIV spreads at a phenomenal rate.

b. Hundreds of thousands of people still live under the poverty line in townships without electricity or running water. The unemployment rate is still very high. There is a huge gap

between the haves and the have-nots. The government also have to cope with an alarming

crime rate: murders, rapes, assaults. South Africans are still optimistic because they believe

they will one day bridge the gap between the rich and the poor, eradicate deep-rooted

prejudices and overcome most of their difficulties.

> The present perfect

1.

1.

2.

1.

MANUEL k P. 205-207

Les points clés sont traités 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Lexique et structures 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Correction de la langue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Total des points / 20

Renseignent sur le présent Renvoient à un moment coupé du présenta f g h i b c d e

UNIT 15 • 3 1 3

– Le present perfect sert à exprimer un lien entre passé et présent.– Le prétérit sert à parler d’un fait, d’une période coupée du présent.

a. Mandela est maintenant devenu une légende.

b. Nelson Mandela est né dans le Transkei en 1918.

c. Il resta en prison pendant 27 ans.

d. 46664 était le numéro de matricule de Mandela quand il était emprisonné à Robben Island.

e. En 1990 il fut finalement libéré. Quatre ans après il fut élu président de la République.

f. Les choses ont beaucoup changé depuis 1994.

g. La situation en Afrique du Sud s’est maintenant améliorée.

h. Beaucoup de personnes se sont impliquées dans la lutte contre le sida ces dernières

années.

i. Je viens de voir une photo du concert donné pour l’anniversaire de Nelson Mandela.

k Déduisez : selon le contexte, le passé composé français peut se traduire en anglais

par un present perfect ou un prétérit.

ever : déjà (contexte interrogatif ou négatif) • never : jamais • already : déjà (contexte

affirmatif) • not yet : pas encore

k Déduisez : le present perfect s’emploie avec never, already et not… yet. La date n’est

pas mentionnée. L’énonciateur s’intéresse uniquement au résultat au moment présent.

– Depuis combien de temps l’Afrique du Sud est-elle une démocratie ? – C’est une

démocratie depuis 1994 / depuis l’élection de Mandela / depuis les élections de 1994.

– Depuis combien de temps se bat-t-il contre le sida ? – Il se bat maintenant depuis

plusieurs années.

k Le français « depuis » + une indication de temps a deux équivalents en anglais :

– for + indication de la durée d’une période

– since + indication du point de départ d’une période

Pour demander « depuis combien de temps » on utilise how long + present perfect.

Mandela fut / resta en prison (pendant) environ vingt-sept années. for = pendant

L’Afrique du Sud est une démocratie depuis environ vingt ans. for = depuis

> Practice

a. La situation s’est améliorée ces dernières années. [renseignement sur le présent, passé

composé]

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

Present perfect PrétéritFormes verbales – has become

– have changed

– has improved

– have been involved

– I’ve seen

– was born

– stayed

– was (imprisoned, released, elected)

Marqueurs de temps

– now

– since 1994

– now

– over the last few years

– just

– for 27 years

– when he was imprisoned

– in 1990

– four years later

UNIT

15 OVER THE RAINBOW

3 1 4 • UNIT 15

b. Avant 1994, les deux communautés étaient séparées. [événement coupé du présent,

imparfait]

c. Steve Biko mourut dans sa cellule de prison en 1977. [événement coupé du présent,

passé simple]

d. Donald Woods, un journaliste blanc, dénonça les tentatives du gouvernement pour étouffer

le scandale. [événement coupé du présent, passé simple]

e. Il fut alors obligé de quitter son pays. [événement coupé du présent, passé simple]

f. La tribu des San habite dans le désert du Kalahari depuis plus de deux mille ans.

[renseignement sur le présent, présent]

g. Johannesburg est la capitale économique et industrielle de l’Afrique du Sud depuis plus

d’un siècle. [renseignement sur le présent, présent]

h. Certains Sud-Africains ne se sont pas encore débarrassés de tous leurs préjugés.

[renseignement sur le présent, passé composé]

a. Spending on education has greatly increased over the last ten years.

b. The world’s first heart transplant was performed by Dr. Chris Barnard in Cape Town on

3 December 1967. Now more than 50,000 have been performed worldwide.

c. Mahatma Gandhi lived in South Africa from 1893 to 1914.

d. Alan Paton’s book, Cry, the Beloved Country, was published in 1948. It became a massive

success and made people aware of apartheid abroad.

e. I have never read a novel by a South African author.

Productions possibles :The number of radio listeners has slightly increased since 1994 / Mandela was elected.

The literacy rate has also risen, it has reached almost 100%. It is around / about 100%.

The number of people who own their homes has slightly increased too. It is just above / over 80%.

The number of households having access to electricity has significantly / sharply increased.

It now reaches 80%.

The number of people having access to running water has also increased. It is just under /

below 80%.

YOUR TASK

N. B. : sur le site www.constitutionalcourt.org.za/text/art/people/works/0111.html on

trouvera un tableau remarquable de Sipho Ndlovu qui permet de synthétiser toute l’histoire

de l’Afrique du Sud. Il pourra être montré aux élèves à qui l’on demandera d’y retrouver les

principaux événements historiques listés p. 208.

LES ÉTAPES À SUIVRE

Le cartoon de la p. 209 pourra être traité par toute la classe (travail individuel ou en

binômes) avant de se lancer dans la réalisation de la frise chronologique. On désignera

alors un rapporteur qui procédera à une prise de parole en continu tandis que le reste

de la classe enrichira sa production.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 208-209

UNIT 15 • 3 1 5

Productions possibles : This is a very satirical cartoon. It lists / denounces / exposes all the

problems South Africa has been confronted with since the dismantling of apartheid. Assault

and muggings are commonplace. Theft is a common feature of the post-apartheid era. It is also

characterized by a culture of drunkenness (intoxicated pedestrians = drunk). Poverty is another

scourge (beggars stand at the traffic lights). Many people live below the poverty line, are in dire

straits. The unemployment rate is very high. Corruption is rampant (school exam papers being

sold). Gang warfare also plagues the country (taxi war in progress). Drug dealing is alarming.

People do not abide by the laws and use their mobiles while driving. Soccer fans can also get

mad, can’t be controlled. Through the use of road signs, the artist wants to sensitize the reader

to the situation in South Africa today. It is a very pessimistic and gloomy vision of a country that

has to cope with huge problems / massive socio-economic problems. It still has

to overcome high levels of poverty and crime.

RÉALISATION DE LA FRISE

> Mise en œuvre possible

k La frise pourra être réalisée en groupes, le travail se fera en dehors du temps scolaire

et les élèves se répartiront les recherches.

k Vous trouverez sur les sites indiqués ci-dessous différents modèles de frise, ce qui

pourra donner des idées de présentation aux élèves.

www.teach-nology.com/web_tools/materials/bigtimeline/

www.microsoft.com/education/createtimeline.mspx

www.microsoft.com/education/timelinesword.mspx

k On pourra préciser aux élèves les consignes suivantes :

– Choose the period of time that your timeline will cover, being sure to include your earliest

and latest dates.

– Decide what units of time you will use (days, months, years, decades, centuries, etc.)

to divide your timeline into segments.

– Calculate the number of segments that your timeline will have.

– Draw a line and divide it into the number of equal segments that you think you will need.

– If you are feeling creative, you can add pictures to enhance the timeline.

– You can have a vertical timeline or a horizontal timeline.

– It can be a wall timeline or a computer timeline.

Critères d’évaluation de la tâche : à titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante.

Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre

de points attribué à chaque critère.

Événements clés traités 0 1 2 3

Ajout de textes 0 1 2 3 4 5

Ajout de photos 0 1 2

Qualité de la présentation 0 1 2

Texte original (pas un copier-coller d’Internet) 0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue (prétérit et present perfect) 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points / 20

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 1 6 • UNIT 16

Jamaican colours of LondonGrâce à cette unité nous avons souhaité placer dans une perspective historique le Notting

Hill Carnival, qui, aujourd’hui, est devenu le plus grand festival de rue d’Europe. Loin d’être

un épiphénomène, cette manifestation puise ses racines dans l’histoire de l’immigration

jamaïcaine en Angleterre et, à travers elle, dans la notion même de Commonwealth,

à laquelle les élèves seront sensibilisés en douceur. Aborder les flux migratoires nous

semblait en outre indispensable afin de traiter le concept de « Lien social » inscrit au

programme.

N. B. : pour les descripteurs du CECRL se rapportant à l’expression écrite, voir p. 278.

Tâche finale

Objectifs culturels

Lexique

Grammaire

Phonologie

Structures de communication

Manuel

Écrire un prospectus sur le carnaval

de Notting Hill

Mémoire • Échanges • Lien social

k la ville de Londres, ses momuments

(p. 210), sa population (p. 211)

k chiffres et pourcentages (p. 212)

k relief, climat et économie de la Jamaïque

(p. 212)

k immigration : rêves et réalités

(p. 213, 214-215, 219)

k fête et musique (p. 216)

k l’infinitif avec to (p. 218-219)

k réalisation de la voyelle écrite -i- (p. 217)

k réduction des voyelles (p. 217)

k formes réduites (p. 217)

k comparer (p. 211)

k exprimer désirs et souhaits (p. 213 et 215)

k exprimer l’intention (p. 213 et 215)

Workbook Fichesphotocopiables

UNIT 16 • 3 1 7

Activités langagières dominantes

N. B. : les titres en gras indiquent les documents à étudier afin de réaliser la tâche finale.

Nous vous rappelons que les Help! sont enregistrés sur le CD classe et que les exercices

Improve your pronunciation sont téléchargeables sur le site compagnon.

TUNE IN!

1. Get ready

k La première question donnera lieu à un brainstorming. Les élèves seront invités

à mentionner des monuments ou des endroits dont ils ont entendu parler ou qu’ils

connaissent. Le professeur illustrera ce que certains élèves disent en montrant des photos

des monuments et endroits de Londres les plus célèbres.

k Dans le cas d’une classe fragile, des aides lexicales pourront être écrites au tableau,

données sous forme de photocopies ou (rétro)projetées.

Amorces : the word makes me think of… • it reminds me of…

Lexique : well-known = famous for • busy = lively • exciting = thrilling • picturesque: pittoresque

• amazing: étonnant • impressive: impressionnant • traditional ≠ trendy, fashionable

MANUEL k P. 210

Lire et prendre la parole en interaction

Prendre la paroleen continu

Écrire

Écouter

Manuel

k Tune in (p. 210)

k Multicultural London, articles (p. 211)k More about Jamaica, page Internet (p. 212)k The Windrush child, poème (p. 213)

k Mother Country, article de presse (p. 214)k un plan du métro de Londres (p. 216)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un texte

(p. 213 et 215)

k faire le compte rendu oral d’un

document sonore (p. 216)

k quelques lignes sur Londres (p. 210)

k une lettre (p. 215)

k un paragraphe de fiction (p. 219)

k un prospectus touristique (p. 220-221)

k Notting Hill Carnival, document authentique BBC (p. 216)k site compagnon, U16–Dialogue:

A Jamaican in Paris

Workbook

X

XXX

X

Fichesphotocopiables

X

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 1 8 • UNIT 16

2. React to this photograph

N. B. : la photo de la sculpture Giant Swimmer est disponible sur le transparent n° 16.

a. Deux approches sont possibles ici :

k Découverte collective : la classe peut découvrir le document dans son ensemble et

réagir immédiatement, puis étudier la photo.

k Image morcelée : on peut aussi morceler l’image. À l’aide d’un cache en papier, couvrir

la pelouse et le second plan et ne montrer au (rétro)projecteur que la statue. Les élèves

pourront alors émettre des hypothèses : What can you see? What do you think it is? Where

do you think it is? On enlèvera ensuite le cache et les élèves pourront découvrir le restant

de l’image. On exploitera alors à chaud leurs réactions.

Productions possibles : What is this? It’s strange / weird, intriguing, puzzling. There is a

huge statue buried in the earth. It represents a swimmer. We can only see half of his body.

We immediately notice his arm, this athlete is muscular. He is wearing a blue swimming-

costume and goggles. He is breathing. It looks as if the lawn were / was a swimming-pool

or the sea. It is quite unexpected to see such statues on lawns. It is clever/ smart. The artist

wanted to take us by surprise. We want to have a closer look. It took me some time to realize

what it was.

b. Cette question pourra être traitée collectivement.

Productions possibles : It takes place in London, the river is the Thames. The photographer

was on the Embankment. In the background we can see the Tower of London, some modern

buildings in the City and the Gherkin.

Informations complémentairesThe Gherkin, as it is commonly referred to by Londoners, is immediately recognizable

because of its conical shape and stunning exterior of harlequin-patterned glass. It is one

of the most distinctive buildings on London’s skyline. It was designed by Norman Foster.

The Gherkin has been described as “structurally and aesthetically one of the most innovative

skyscrapers ever built”.

c. Pour répondre à cette question, on pourra donner aux élèves quelques minutes pour

réfléchir, trouver des éléments de réponse. Ceci pourra donner lieu soit à un travail

individuel soit à un travail en binôme. On invitera les élèves à utiliser la boîte Help!

Un élève pourra ensuite prendre la parole et les autres complèteront. On fera la synthèse

à l’aide de la trace écrite.

Productions possibles : This photo is unusual. It suggests that London is worth visiting. It is

worth discovering and exploring. It is a modern city. Going to London is exciting / thrilling. It is

trendy and fashionable. There are always new things to discover.

3. Follow-up work

Cette activité permettra d’aborder la production écrite tout en douceur.

UNIT 16 • 3 1 9

1. MULTICULTURAL LONDON

Au préalable, on s’assurera que les élèves peuvent consulter une carte de l’Angleterre,

de Londres (avec les différents quartiers) et du monde anglophone afin qu’ils soient

en mesure de situer les lieux mentionnés dans les différents articles.

Site pour les quartiers de Londres : www.londonhotels.it/plan-londres.html

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Approche magistrale On demandera à l’ensemble de la classe de lire les deux textes A et B du manuel.

On proposera ensuite de remplir la fiche de compréhension écrite du Workbook (p. 116-117)

en lien avec les deux textes. Cette fiche fera l’objet d’un travail individuel en classe ou à la

maison.

Une fois la fiche remplie en entier par l’ensemble de la classe, on pourra demander

aux élèves de répondre aux questions du manuel p. 211. Pour prendre la parole, les élèves

s’appuieront sur le tableau récapitulatif et les amorces de phrases fournies (cf. corrigé

de la fiche ci-dessous). Les phrases produites pourront constituer la trace écrite.

k Approche plus communicativeUn travail en binômes ou en groupes est ici suggéré (les groupes étant constitués selon

la volonté du professeur) pour :

– favoriser l’écoute des élèves entre eux (les membres d’un groupe doivent écouter leurs

camarades pour obtenir les informations concernant le texte qu’ils n’ont pas lu),

– développer les échanges entre les élèves (les membres d’un groupe peuvent poser

des questions à leurs camarades pour obtenir des informations complémentaires sur

des points éventuellement restés obscurs).

➼ MISE EN PLACE DU TRAVAIL DE GROUPE

On divise la classe en deux groupes A et B.

Chaque groupe lit un texte et remplit la fiche de compréhension écrite correspondante.

On désigne un rapporteur pour chaque groupe.

Le rapporteur du groupe A prend la parole. Les autres élèves du groupe complètent

les informations manquantes.

Pendant ce temps, le groupe B prend des notes.

Après chaque texte, on procède à une reprise collective suivie d’une synthèse partielle

et d’une trace écrite.

➼ REPRISE COLLECTIVE (approche et exploitation possibles)

Texte A Une fois le travail de repérage effectué à l’aide de la fiche, on peut utiliser un transparent

représentant le « camembert » et demander à un élève de le commenter. Ce rapporteur

(volontaire ou désigné) fait une courte prise de parole en continu. Le reste du groupe

A intervient pour apporter des précisions ou compléter ce qui a été dit par le représentant

du groupe. Il est important que tous les membres se sentent sollicités et actifs.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

MANUEL k P. 211

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 2 0 • UNIT 16

On incite les élèves du groupe B à prendre des notes (sous forme de mots clés) et à poser

des questions pour obtenir des précisions, des éclaircissements, faire répéter ce qui

n’a pas été compris.

La trace écrite est construite à l’aide des énoncés produits par les élèves du groupe A

(qui ont sous les yeux leur fiche complétée et ont préparé le Recap du texte A p. 117 ;

cf. le corrigé de la fiche ci-dessous).

Texte BLe groupe A pose ensuite des questions sur le texte B. Pour les aider, on note des mots clés

au tableau ou sur transparent (rétro)projeté : past tense • who? • how? • when? • reasons

for immigrating • where in London? • jobs?

Productions possibles :– Who were the Caribbean immigrants? – Where did they live in London?

– How did they go to London? – Why did they emigrate?

– When did they come to London? – What jobs did they do in London?

Les élèves du groupe B répondent aux questions avec les informations collectées dans

la fiche remplie. On insistera pour que les réponses soient les plus complètes possibles.

La trace écrite sera construite à partir des productions des élèves.

➼ SYNTHÈSE SUR LES DEUX DOCUMENTS

Dans le cas d’une classe fragile, cette synthèse pourra être semi-guidée.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 116-117)

I. Understanding the texts1. k first: initial (l. 1) k structure: fabric (l. 9)

k movement of people in mass: wave (l. 1) k more than: over (l. 12)

k consisted in: was made up of (l. 3) k different: diverse (l. 13)

k escaping/running away: fleeing (l. 4)

“One” refers to “wave of immigrants” (l. 1).

k 270: nationalities in London (l. 9) k 250: languages (l. 12)

k 40%: ethnic groups (l. 11) k 15: MPs (l. 14)

2.

3.

1.

2.

A.

2.

3.

4.Origins Types of job

Reasons for emigrating

First immigration wave

came from the British Empire

(Commonwealth countries) in

the Caribbean and the Indian

subcontinent (l. 1-3)

work on Britain’s

buses and in

factories (l. 3)

Second immigration wave

came from Africa, Europe

and the Middle East: Somalis,

Afghans, Kurds (l. 4-5)

fled / escaped

violence (l. 4)

UNIT 16 • 3 2 1

Approfondissement possible : The population of London is multicultural since 270 nationalities

are represented in the city and a quarter of its population is made up of people whose origins

are not British but Asian, Black African and Black Caribbean. There are as many Black Africans

as Black Caribbeans (5%). The Chinese represent only 1%. There are twice as many Indian,

Bangladeshi and Pakistani people as Black African people for example. Most immigrants came

from former British colonies. Yet some of them came to England after fleeing violence in their

countries. That’s why 250 languages are spoken in London. Three quarters (76%) of the London

population are white and include many different nationalities. This explains why 15 MPs are from

ethnic minorities at Westminster (the House of Commons).

1.

devastated (l. 8) • reconstruction badly needed (l. 9) • labour in short supply (l. 10)

served with the Allied Forces (l. 14)

they really wanted to

II. Action!

(À titre de modèle nous ne traitons ici que le Recap du text B.)

West Indians (people from the Caribbean islands: Jamaica, Trinidad and Barbados) left

their native countries aboard the Empire Windrush in 1948. They were the first large group

of immigrants to come to the UK, which marked a turning point in the history of modern

England. They arrived at Tilbury Dock on the north bank of the Thames. They immigrated

because England offered all sorts of opportunities.They wanted to work for the Mother

Country that they had served with the Allied Forces during the Second World War. As England

was devastated (especially its infrastructure) after the Second World War, labour force was

needed to help rebuild the country. They worked mainly for London Transport as bus drivers

or for the National Health Service as nurses for example. Most of them finally stayed and

settled in England especially in the South of London (Clapham, Brixton and Notting Hill) where

their family joined them and where they set up homes.

B.

2.3.4.5.

DateThe name of the ship

Who was on board?

Where did they arrive?

Where were they from?

1948 Empire Windrush – immigrants

– first large group

to come to the UK

Tilbury Dock

(north bank of

the Thames)

West Indies (Caribbean

islands: Jamaica,

Trinidad, Barbados)

Verbs Jobs Places mentioned– stayed and settled

– set up homes

– worked

– London Transport (bus drivers…)

– National Health Service (nurses…)

– South of London

(Clapham, Brixton)

– Notting Hill

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 2 2 • UNIT 16

2. MORE ABOUT JAMAICA

A webpage

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Approche magistraleIl serait souhaitable de distribuer ou de montrer (transparent rétroprojeté) une carte

permettant de situer la Jamaïque. Site où trouver des cartes : www.maps.com

Les élèves liront le texte p. 212 et rempliront la fiche d’aide du Workbook (la correction

pourra être collective).

On pourra demander aux élèves de rédiger dix questions sur la Jamaïque qui seront corrigées

collectivement. Cette activité pourra faire l’objet d’un travail à la maison qui sera corrigé au

cours suivant.

Productions possibles :– When did Christopher Colombus land on Jamaica?/ When was the island discovered?

– Who first inhabited the island?

– Who seized the island in 1655?

– When was Jamaica granted independence?

– What percentage of the population is of African descent?

– What are Jamaica’s main economic resources?

– How many people live in Jamaica?

– What is the average life expectancy?

– What is the official language in Jamaica?

– What is the Jamaican motto?

k Approche communicative

A. EXPLOITATION D’UNE CARTE GÉOGRAPHIQUE

On pourra montrer au (rétro)projecteur un transparent représentant une carte de la Jamaïque

et une carte de la Jamaïque et des Caraïbes. La classe est divisée en deux groupes. À l’aide

des mots clés suivants, les élèves préparent des questions qu’ils poseront à l’autre groupe.

Groupe 1 : capital • mountains • peak • airport • port • towns

Groupe 2 : countries • islands • near • sea • ocean climate

Productions possibles :What is the capital of Jamaica? k Kingston is the capital of Jamaica.

Are there mountains in Jamaica? k There are the Blue Mountains for example.

Where is the highest peak? k The highest peak is located in the Blue Mountains.

How many airports are there? k There are three airports.

Is there a port ? k Yes, there is. Kingston is an important port.

Where are most of the Jamaican towns located? k They are located on the coast / seaside /

shore.

What are the nearest islands? k The nearest islands are Cuba, Puerto Rico, Hispanola.

Where are they located? k Cuba is north of Jamaica. The Dominican Republic is east of Jamaica.

What countries are near Jamaica? k Cuba, the Dominican Republic, Haiti, Puerto Rico,

Mexico, the USA are near Jamaica.

1.

2.

1.

MANUEL k P. 212

UNIT 16 • 3 2 3

What is the Jamaican climate? k It is a tropical climate, so it attracts tourists. It is hot and

rainy and there may be hurricanes that can devastate the country.

What sea surrounds Jamaica? k The Caribbean Sea surrounds Jamaica.

What is the nearest ocean? k The nearest ocean is the Atlantic Ocean.

On veillera à l’accentuation des mots porteurs de sens.

Afin de solliciter la mémorisation des informations, on peut ensuite éteindre le

(rétro)projecteur et demander aux élèves de récapituler ce dont ils se souviennent.

Ces éléments serviront de base à la trace écrite.

Productions possibles : Jamaica is located in the Caribbean Sea near Cuba. It is a mountainous

island, its highest peak being in the Blue Mountains. Most of the towns are located on the coast

and Kingston is a very important port. Jamaica’s climate is tropical, that is to say hot and rainy

and many hurricanes can devastate the island. However, this climate is very attractive for tourists

who can land on Jamaica’s three airports.

B. EXPLOITATION DU SITE INTERNET NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 118)

k 1494: Columbus landed in Jamaica.

k 90%: the population of African descent

k 1655: The British seized the island.

k 1962: The British government granted Jamaica independence.

k System of money used in a country: currency = devise

k The value of all goods and services produced by a nation in a given year: Gross Domestic

Product (GDP) = Produit Intérieur Brut (PIB)

k The number of years that an individual is expected to live: life expectancy = espérance

de vie

k Dialect spoken by people in the West Indies: creole = créole, patois

a) k mountainous (root = mountain) k growth (root = grow)

k earner (root = earn) k literacy (root = literate)

k reliance (root = rely)

b) k montagneux k croissance

k secteur bénéficiaire k fait de savoir lire et écrire

k dépendance

a) k unpredictably k uneven k deforestation

b) k imprévisible k irrégulier k déforestation

k died out: disparaître k granting independence: garantir l’indépendence

k motto: slogan

island • deforestation • seized • agriculture • tourism • rum • Caribbean • Creole •

cocaine

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 2 4 • UNIT 16

3. WINDRUSH CHILD

1. Get ready

Productions possibles : The picture is taken from the rear of a ship since we can see a trail

of foam. In the background we can see land so we may imagine it is Jamaica, the country the

Caribbeans left in 1948. We may imagine the parents on board the ship going to England.

They certainly had mixed feelings. They must have been sad to leave their country and family.

At the same time they must have been excited because of all the opportunities offered to

them in the new country such as a well-paid job for example.

2. Understanding the text

> Mises en œuvre possibles :

k Approche magistraleToute la classe lira le poème en entier et remplira la fiche de compréhension du Workbook

(p. 119-120) en entier.

k Approche communicativeAu cours de la phase de récapitulation, la classe sera divisée en trois groupes,

chacun des groupes prenant en charge une partie du texte.

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 3, piste 27.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 119-120)

“You” refers to Windrush child.

The child is with his / her parents: “beside you / Windrush child / your Windrush mum and

dad” (l. 10)

palm trees • seabirds • blue water rolling • mango

They think of the yard where they told their child stories.

They think of the mornings when they had mangoes for breakfast.

The parents are speaking.

The grandmother is speaking.

The child is advised to be honest, obedient and faithful, to do the right things: “walk good

walk good” (l. 24)

learning • fly • kite • dreams • English • sky • snow

kite (l. 36). It’s associated with the word “dreams”.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

MANUEL k P. 213

Past Futurestorytime yard • mango mornings •

doors closing

new beginnings • doors opening •

midsummer light

UNIT 16 • 3 2 5

➼ RECAP PART 1

The parents must feel nostalgic and miserable because they know they will miss their

country / they will be homesick since they are attached to their family. They will have to cut

off almost all the links with the past and their native country. They dread feeling uprooted and

the arrival in a new country. They must feel anxious / must be nervous / worried as settling in

England is a tremendous change / a turning point / a landmark in their lives. They may dread

the future. They wonder if they will be successful in their new lives or if they will fail. They must

feel hopeful too. They are eager to discover their new country with all its opportunities. They

are eager to achieve their dreams. They dream of integrating into British society / of adapting

to their new environment.

➼ RECAP PART 2

The child’s grandmother was present at the farewell scene. She advised the child not to forget

to write to her, to be faithful, obedient and honest. These last recommendations will guide him

in his life, it will play the same role as a beacon (a guiding and signaling device). They will lead

him / her throughout his / her life. She / He will follow her last recommendations. The child

will be faithful to his / her past and ancestors. And at the same time she / he will try hard

to be honest / righteous.

➼ RECAP PART 3

The child is supposed to cling to her / his traditions and at the same time she / he will have

to build the future. She / He will belong to both worlds. The child must achieve / aims to

fulfil her / his dreams. England was seen as a country where everything was possible / as a

land of opportunity. In England opportunities would be limitless, provided the child was good,

open-minded and hard-working.

3. Diary

En fonction du personnage choisi, les élèves pourront s’appuyer sur les Recap 1, 2 ou 3

du Workbook.

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 2 6 • UNIT 16

4. THE MOTHER COUNTRY

1. Get ready

a. et b. Les élèves écouteront deux extraits audio, God Save the Queen/ King et Rule, Britannia

(CD classe n° 3, piste 29), et on les laissera réagir. Certains reconnaîtront l’hymne anglais

et quelques paroles. On pourra leur demander d’anticiper le sujet du texte et ils pourront

ainsi dire : It is (the national anthem) “God Save the Queen/ King”, so the text may be about

the Queen/ King or about England.

En écoutant le refrain de Rule, Britannia, ils repéreront sans doute les quelques mots

qui se répètent : rule, waves, never, slaves.

Productions possibles : British people ruled the seas because they were very good sailors.

Britain had a lot of colonies in the past. Britain had an Empire in the 19th century. British

people/Britons will never be slaves to other nations. British people were very proud of what

they achieved / of their nation. they are independent.

Informations complémentairesThe national anthem is God Save the Queen or God Save the King. It is played whenever the

Queen makes a public appearance. The anthem originated in a patriotic song first performed

in 1745. It became known as the national anthem from the beginning of the 19th century.

Rule, Britannia is a British patriotic song, originating from the poem Rule, Britannia by James

Thomson and set to music by Thomas Arne in 1740. First heard in London in 1745, it achieved

instant popularity. Thomson was a Scottish poet and playwright who spent most of his adult

life in England and hoped to make his fortune at Court. He had an interest in helping foster a

British identity, including and transcending the older English and Scottish identities.

Après écoute, les élèves pourront aussi affiner leur hypothèse de départ : The text may deal

with England and its links with its (former) colonies.

c. Productions possibles :– It is a first-person narrative. Since the author of the text in called Andrea Levy, we can say

she is the narrator.

– The other characters mentioned are her parents, other immigrants, school pupils including

a new American girl.

– The date mentioned is 1948 and the countries (the names of which / whose names are

repeated) are Jamaica and England.

– It is an autobiography because the narrator relates her family’s story and some personal

memories from her teenagehood.

d. Productions possibles : The black and white photo shows black people waiting behind

barriers. They may be West Indian/ African immigrants from British colonies arriving in

England and waiting to go through the Customs to have their passports checked / to see

if they were allowed in.

MANUEL k P. 214-215

UNIT 16 • 3 2 7

2. Understanding the text

> Mises en œuvre :

k Approche magistraleOn fera lire l’ensemble du texte par la classe à l’aide de la fiche de compréhension du Workbook

(p. 121-123) et on procédera à des synthèses partielles avec toute la classe après l’étude de

chaque partie.

k Autre approche possibleOn divisera la classe en trois groupes et on désignera un rapporteur par groupe

qui récapitulera l’essentiel de chacune des parties en s’appuyant sur les questions

contenues dans le Recap p. 215 du manuel.

Les autres groupes prendront des notes et interviendront pour demander des compléments

d’information.

N. B. : ce texte est enregistré sur le CD classe n° 3, piste 28.

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 121-122)

This country refers to England.

Jamaica • England

a) He sailed to England on a ship called the Empire Windrush (l. 2). / He took a boat. /

He went to England by boat.

b) There were 492 passengers (l. 4) aboard.

One of the first people to travel to a new country or area and begin living or farming there.

“no jobs, no prospects” (l. 7)

“he knew himself to be a British citizen.” (l. 17) • “He travelled on a British passport.” (l. 18) • “they sang God Save the King and Rule Britannia.” (l. 22)

“They” refers to the Jamaicans that boarded the Empire Windrush in 1948 (the Windrush

Generation), the “pioneers” that is to say the first immigrants who set foot in England.

“They believed Britain was a green and pleasant land - if not the centre of the world, then

certainly the centre of a great and important Empire that spanned the globe, linking all sorts

of countries into a family of nations.” (l. 22)

a) But

b) “They” refers to the Windrush Generation, the first Jamaican immigrants to arrive in England

in 1948 after the war.

c) The whole paragraph may refer to the hardships, the difficulties the Windrush Generation

will meet with when they settle in England.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Exclusion Immigration

Racism Living conditions

Impact

Past job Job and place of work in GBa trained teacher had to sew • worked in sweat-shops

atelier

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 2 8 • UNIT 16

“Them” refers to the narrator’s schoolfriends. “It” refers to Jamaica.

3. Recap

Les élèves les plus faibles pourront s’aider de la rubrique Action!, p. 122-123 du Workbook.

Productions possibles :

Part 1a. The father left Jamaica / his native country because if he had stayed there he would have

been unemployed / he would have been jobless / he would have found no job and his

children would have had no future. As there were no opportunities in his native country,

he decided to leave for England. If he had not left his native country, he would have had to

face economic difficulties. He left Jamaica because he expected to fulfil his dreams. He

wanted to achieve success for himself and his family. Before leaving Jamaica he dreamt of

improving his standard of living in England. He emigrated for economic reasons. He hoped

for a better future / better opportunities / a higher standard of living. He dreamt of making

more money, of escaping poverty. He wanted to improve his living conditions. He was looking

towards to the future. He believed that he could start from scratch. He was attracted by the

new opportunities he could have in England.

b. First of all, he saw his future country as a powerful / mighty and ruling / dominating nation.

England symbolized power and wealth. At that time the British Empire was made up of

countries from all over the world. Secondly he pictured his future country as a welcoming /

greeting country capable of integrating all sorts of people coming from completely different

cultural, ethnic backgrounds. He thought his future country would welcome him.

c. He expected to find a job easily because he saw England as a rich country compared

to Jamaica. He expected his future country to provide him with a job and a decent house

because he saw England as his Mother Country, a protective / motherly country ready

to help / support him. Since the Mother Country was a rich country, he hoped to find a job

immediately. Moreover he went to England in order to help rebuild the country after the Blitz

(the bombing of London by the German army during the Second World War) destroyed many

neighbourhoods / districts in London; that’s why he expected to be greeted.

Titres suggérés : The land of plenty • The Promised Land • Dreaming of a brighter future •

A land of opportunity • The dream

12.13.

14.

Indifference Disdain / Contempt / Scorn

Physical detail The other pupils’ reaction to her Adjectives associated with her

white friendly • curious • talkative lovely • great • wonderful

UNIT 16 • 3 2 9

Part 2a. The parents were confronted with/had to face several difficulties because they were

foreigners. People were racist so they faced exclusion. Because people were distrustful,

they were victims of exclusion. First, the father could not have decent living conditions

because he was black. He was prevented from renting a room in a dilapidated district.

So he was discriminated against because of the colour of his skin. So was the mother who

must have been refused a job as a trained teacher since she had to work in a sweat-shop,

probably for low wages. She was overworked and underpaid. They were looked down upon

because of their skin colour. They were considered second-rate citizens.

b. Other people who were foreigners and immigrants were discriminated against too. They were

victims of racism and xenophobia as many other foreigners and immigrants. Czechs, Poles

and Greeks were segregated too. They may have been accused of taking jobs that should

have been reserved for British people only. They must have been rejected just because they

were different.

Titres suggérés : Disillusion • Disappointement • Facing reality

Part 3a. The narrator realized that none of the pupils at school was interested in her / that she was

not popular at all. The other schoolgirls were indifferent to her country. They didn’t feel like

discovering the customs of her country. She also realized that they looked down upon her,

that they probably considered her an inferior being. She must have become aware of what

racism / xenophobia were, particularly because / especially since the pupils had a different

behaviour to the new American girl. She could not possibly make friends with any of them.

The pupils must have thought a Jamaican girl was not as interesting as an American girl.

b. She must have been miserable, frustrated, disappointed because she had a positive vision

of England. She was certainly disillusioned as she had imagined England as a welcoming

country. Obviously she must have felt left out / rejected. As nobody talked to her, she must

have felt completely isolated and very lonely.

c. Since no one was interested in the Jamaican culture, tradition, customs and food, she must

have thought all she liked was worth nothing. Consequently she must have felt ashamed of

being Jamaican and not British. That’s why she said she felt embarrassed that her parents

were not British.

Titres suggérés : Facing hardships • The difficulties of a teenager to integrate into a new

country • The end of the dream

4. Summary

Corrigé : 1 opportunities 2 fulfil 3 better-paid 4 improve 5 standard of living 6 foreigner 7 despised 8 racism 9 xenophobia 10 awful / dreadful 11 lonely 12 excluded / rejected

5. Creative writing

On pourra renvoyer les élèves à la p. 224 du manuel (« Rédiger une lettre »).

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 3 0 • UNIT 16

Productions possibles :May 25th, 1948

12 Crescent Road

LONDON SW1 28BG

Dear Grandma/all,

At last we arrived in Kent after a long, tiring trip across the Atlantic Ocean. I’m really glad

I’ve set foot on the firm ground again! The sea was rough because of a terrible storm and most

of the other passengers felt sick. Mum too!

As soon as we joined London, Mum and Dad started to look for a place where to live... We

were really disappointed!

London suffered badly from the Blitz and many buildings and houses are completely

destroyed. That’s why it’s very difficult now to find a nice place to live in. Many areas in London

need to be rebuilt.

What’s more I was stunned when I realized English people seem to be reluctant to rent a

room to coloured people. I was very upset because I cannot forget how helpful Jamaicans were

during the war.

At school, I feel completely excluded. Nobody thinks it is worth knowing Jamaica. To them,

the United States is the country to discover! I really feel miserable. There are so many things I

would like to show them. I know what racism means now!

And of course, I miss the sun, the palm trees and the whole atmosphere is quite bleak here. It

seems it never stops raining here and it’s so cold. One of the first things I did was to buy a raincoat.

I wish I could eat our tasty mangoes! It will take long I’m sure before I can feel the pleasant smell

of all the flowers and plants growing in our marvellous island again. I’m a bit nostalgic but don’t

worry you know what I’m like... I’ll do my best to integrate into my class.

Tomorrow Dad will go to an interview with the director of the local post office. He was told

they were offering jobs there. They need young men like him to help start afresh.

So things are not so disquieting as they look! When he starts earning money, it will be easier

to find better housing and to adapt to the English society.

I hope to hear from you soon.

Lots of love XXX

Andrea

Grille d’évaluation de la production écrite

Prolongement possible : on pourra faciliter la mémorisation du lexique de cette double page

grâce à la fiche suivante (disponible en version photocopiable sur le site compagnon).

Maîtrise de l’orthographe et des codes de présentation de la lettre : date, adresse, formule de politesse en début et fin de lettre

0 1 2 3 4

Étendue, maîtrise et précision du vocabulaire 0 1 2 3 4

Sait s’appuyer sur les documents étudiés et réutiliser les acquis du cours 0 1 2 3 4

Correction grammaticale 0 1 2 3 4

Organisation de la lettre 0 1 2 3 4

Total des points /20

Check your vocabulary

UNIT 16 • 3 3 1

Traduisez les phrases suivantes. Les mots soulignés sont dans la boîte Help! de votre manuel, p. 215.

a. Le père d’Andrea voulait réaliser ses rêves.

b. Il rêvait d’un emploi mieux payé.

c. Il voulait améliorer son niveau de vie, avoir de meilleures conditions de vie.

d. Il était attiré par les nombreuses possibilités / offres en Angleterre.

e. Il s’attendait à être accueilli, à s’intégrer facilement à la société britannique.

f. En Angleterre, il fut confronté au racisme. Il fut déçu, perdit ses illusions.

g. Ils furent malheureux, car ils étaient méprisés, étaient considérés comme des étrangers.

Ils vivaient dans des conditions épouvantables.

h. Andrea se sentait seule, isolée, rejetée par ses camarades.

i. La jeune Américaine était populaire, tout le monde voulait être son amie.

j. Les autres éléves pensaient que la Jamaïque et ses coutumes ne valaient pas la peine

d’être connues.

Classez les mots suivants dans le tableau selon qu’ils sont accentués sur la première, la seconde ou la troisième syllabe. condition • disappointed • miserable • disillusioned • disdain • customs • excluded •

integrate • dreadful • ashamed

CORRIGÉ

a. Andrea’s father wanted to fulfil his dreams.

b. He dreamt of a better-paid job.

c. He wanted to improve his standard of living, have better living conditions.

d. He was attracted by the numerous opportunities in England.

e. He expected to be welcomed, to integrate into the British society easily.

f. In England he was confronted with racism. He was disappointed and disillusioned.

g. They were miserable because they were looked down on / despised, considered

foreigners. They lived in awful / dreadful conditions.

h. Andrea felt lonely, isolated / left out and rejected / excluded by her school friends.

i. The young American girl was popular, everybody wanted to be her friend.

j. The other students thought Jamaica and its customs weren’t worth being known.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1re syllabe 2e syllabe 3e syllabe

1re syllabe 2e syllabe 3e syllabemiserable • customs •

integrate • dreadful

condition • disdain •

excluded • ashamed

disappointed • disillusioned

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 3 2 • UNIT 16

5. NOTTING HILL CARNIVAL

1. Find your way

Cette activité pourra être menée en binômes ou l’échange pourra se faire par moitié de classe.

2. Get ready

Productions possibles :

a. It’s bright and colourful. They look cheerful. They seem to be enjoying themselves. It seems

to be lively. They’re dancing. The spectators standing along the streets are taking photos.

b. carnival • festival • celebrate • involve • band • riot • multiculturalism

3. Listen

> Script de l'enregistrement

➼ Part 1The biggest street festival in Europe: the Notting Hill Carnival. Every year, hundreds of

thousands of people head to Notting Hill in West London to dance, sing, eat, and celebrate

multiculturalism. Multiculturalism: the mix of people from different races, religions, traditions,

and languages. The carnival owes its creation to Trinidadian immigrants. The carnival was

created thanks to people who came to Britain from Trinidad.

➼ Part 2In the late 1940s and the 1950s, there was mass immigration to the United Kingdom:

the arrival of people from many different cultures. Some people in the UK didn’t like the

changes that were happening and this led to riots.

➼ Part 3Corinne Skinnycarter remembers helping her friend Claudia Jones helping to start the carnival.

We hear the word function. A function is a social event of some kind. “We must get together,

we must get together. That was the whole idea. She thought that the best way to get a lot of

West Indians together, is to have a function. As it happened, this function turned out to be a

carnival.” Now, let’s listen to Claire Holder, who’s been involved with organizing the Carnival.

“The Carnival is a wonderful show. It’s about the positive promotion of black culture, of black

traditions, to promote our culture. The Carnival is steel band and costumes, without a doubt.

Without costumes and steel bands there’s no carnival.” And this musician involved with the

carnival says the steel band and the costumes are important elements, important parts of

the Carnival. A steel band is a group of musicians who play steel drums and the Carnival does

officially kick-off, it begins with the National Steel Band Competition.

➼ Part 4Another tradition associated with the Carnival is something called Soca. To find out what it

is, let’s listen to Tony. He’ll use the word fusion which is a mix or combination of different

things. We’ll also hear the words Calypso and Soul which are both types of music. “I’m Tony

from Soca Saga Boys. Soca is really a fusion with Calypso and Soul, which is S.O. from the

Soul, the C.A. is from the Calypso. Soca is a happy music. If you want to have a nice time

and you really want to get in the groove, you need to listen to Soca”. Costumes, the special

clothes, which people wear are also a very important part of the Carnival. They are usually

MANUEL k P. 216

UNIT 16 • 3 3 3

bright and colourful, full of colour and sometimes heavy. Like for this girl who says after

wearing her outfit or costume for a while she gets exhausted. “When I wear it I feel quite

exhausted after a while because it’s really heavy.”

CORRIGÉ DE LA FICHE DU WORKBOOK (P. 124-125)

I. Listen and understand

biggest • street • traditions • different

k Europe k Britain, Trinidad

k hundreds, thousands k Notting Hill, West London k dance, sing, eat, celebrate

1940s, 1950s

West Indian and Trinidadian immigrants

mass • immigration • arrival • changes • after • together • areas

decided • wanted • bring • people • together • help • people • understand

3 female voices

helping • function • Carnival • promote • Black • culture • costumes • important • steel band

steel • drum

3 voices: 1 male voice and 2 female voices

II. ACTION!

➼ RECAP PART 1

Every year in West London, in Notting Hill, there is the biggest street festival in Europe

during which people from different cultures sing and dance. It was created by immigrants

from Trinidad who settled in London to celebrate multiculturalism.

➼ RECAP PART 2

In the UK after WWII there were many immigrants who entered the UK, and some people in

the UK didn’t like the changes. This caused violent protests / riots. Consequently people in

West London where many immigrants had settled decided to create a big street festival during

which people could dance, sing and eat. The goal was to bring people together and help them

understand each other.

➼ RECAP PART 3

The Carnival is a social event that must get people together and promote black culture

and black traditions. The two main elements in the Carnival are steel bands and colourful

costumes. A steel band is a group of musicians who play steel drums and compete.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

SizeNumber

of peoplePlace Actions Goals Origin

the biggest hundreds of

thousands

Britain, West London,

Notting Hill street

dance, sing,

eat

celebrate

traditions

Trinidad

Name of a music instrument Types of musicdrum Calypso • Soul • Soca

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 3 4 • UNIT 16

LANGUAGE AT WORK

> Improve your pronunciation

b.

Les voyelles soulignées correspondent toutes au son \E\ (appelé « schwa »).

b. Les mots entre parenthèses appartiennent aux catégories grammaticales suivantes :

prépositions, pronoms personnels, verbes et connecteurs grammaticaux. Ils correspondent

tous à des formes réduites.

> Build up your vocabulary

b. huge • bring • faced with • unemployment • dream of • bring together • event • take

place • success • parade • attract • the last weekend of August • bright • float

foreigners = étrangers • bad housing = taudis • hostility = hostilité • colour = couleur •

skin = peau • sweat-shops = ateliers clandestins • disadvantage = inconvénient •

coloured = de couleur

Immigrants leave their native countries to settle in a foreign land. They have to adapt to their

new country, learn its language and customs. They have to find a job and a house. They may

work in factories, sweat-shops, hotels or restaurants. They are often paid low wages, are

overworked and underpaid. They are considered a cheap labour force. They may also face

hostility, racism and exclusion.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 217-219

➼ RECAP PART 4

The other important element in the Carnival is music, Soca which is a fusion / combination

of Calypso and Soul musics and a happy music.

4. Oral account

Pour préparer la prise de parole en continu, les élèves pourront s’appuyer sur les Recap

proposés dans la rubrique Action! du Workbook (p. 125) et les amorces du manuel (p. 216).

Productions possibles : The recording deals with the origins of the Carnival. The Carnival

was created in 1964 by immigrants from Trinidad after violent protests and riots took place in

London. They had to face exclusion and racism due to the mass immigration in the 1940s and

1950s so they wanted to create a street festival to get people together, to celebrate different

cultures, races and religions. During the Carnival people wear costumes, sing, dance, play Soca

music and steel bands compete.

\ai\ time \i\ fish

empire • pioneers • decided • time •

plight • signs

ship • history • citizen • slip-in • fit-in •

Britain • hostility• skin • disadvantage

UNIT 16 • 3 3 5

> L’infi nitif avec to

– Ces verbes sont suivis d’un infinitif complet. Ils sont tournés vers l’avenir et expriment l’idée

de projet.

– “…and decided to chance his arm in the Mother Country.” (l. 8)

“They didn’t want to know about the sun, the sugar cane and the rum punch. They didn’t want

to try our rice and peas.” (l. 39)

– La phrase c appartient à la langue courante.

– “My mum, a trained teacher in Jamaica, had to sew to make a living here.” (l. 32)

2. a. 1. b.

– Verbe + groupe nominal + to + BV.

– Les groupes nominaux en a, b et d sont sujets du verbe qui suit.

– Le pronom utilisé en c est sous la forme complément.

– Les immigrants venus des Antilles voulaient que leur famille les rejoigne rapidement.

Ils espéraient que leurs enfants auraient de meilleures perspectives d’avenir.

Ils espéraient qu’ils auraient de meilleures perspectives d’avenir.

Les organisateurs voudraient que tous les spectateurs profitent de l’atmosphère du Carnaval.

En français ces verbes ont à leur suite une construction en « que ». N'imitez pas cette

construction en anglais : n’utilisez pas that. Utilisez le verbe avec to.

> Practice

a. The Windrush Generation expected the English / English people to greet them.

b. Jamaican immigrants would have liked / would like their children to integrate into British

society.

c. Newly-arrived Jamaicans wanted English people to treat them fairly.

d. They expected the authorities to help them find better accomodations.

e. Andrea’s father would have liked / would like his new bride to come over to England.

a. Andrea’s father intended to leave his native country to start a new life.

b. Andrea’s uncle decided to try his luck in England.

c. Andrea expected to make a lot of new friends in her new country.

d. If I go to London next summer, I’d like to see the Notting Hill Carnival.

e. Many Jamaicans planned to settle in London.

a. Look at this float!

b. Don’t forget your umbrella!

c. Take your mobile to call your friends in case you get lost.

d. Let’s hurry up, the parade is starting / is going to / is about to start.

These children would like to be able to study at university when they’re older. / They plan to study...

They intend to have a well-paid job to escape the ordeals they have been confronted with.

They expect to have a brighter future than their parents without being forced to leave their

own country.

They probably want to be part of the future development of their country.

They want to be given the same opportunities as children in developed countries.

They wish they could use a computer and all the new technologies to work and to play.

They dream of travelling all over the world to discover other countries.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

UNIT

16 JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDON

3 3 6 • UNIT 16

YOUR TASK

> Travail possible en classe

– On pourra faire les activités p. 220.

– On pourra lire les consignes p. 221 pour s’assurer qu’elles sont comprises des élèves.

> Travail à la maison

On demandera aux élèves de s’organiser pour rendre leur brochure au bout de deux semaines.

> Évaluation de la tâche

À titre indicatif, nous proposons la grille suivante. Le professeur sera bien sûr libre d’élaborer

sa propre grille ou de faire évoluer le nombre de points attibué à chaque critère.

Nom : Classe :

En dessous de 10 : A2

Au-dessus de 10 : B1

Au-dessus de 16 : B2 en cours d’acquisition

MANUEL k P. 220-221

Respect des consignes(tous les points sont traités)

0 1 2 3

Prospectus attrayant :– mise en pages

– illustration appropriée au contexte

– inventivité

– présentation propre et claire

0 1 2 3 4

Production personnelle(le travail n’est pas un copier-coller d’Internet)

0 1 2 3

Organisation(structure / enchaînements)

0 1 2

Richesse de l’expression et du lexique– réutilisation des acquis du cours

– prise de risque

0 1 2 3 4

Correction de la langue– orthographe

– calques du français

– phrases inintelligibles

– erreurs élémentaires et récurrentes

0 1 2 3 4

Total des points / 20

RÉDIGER UN TEXTE • 3 3 7

RÉDIGER UN TEXTE

CORRIGÉ

2. Pour chaque sujet identifiez le type de rédaction attendu.a. rédiger un e-mail donc un texte bref

b. rédiger un texte de type argumentatif

3. Repérez les mots clés du sujet b.spend • holidays • desert • island • why / why not

4. Notez les idées, le lexique et les structures qui se rapportent aux mots clés du sujet a.music • favourite songs • excited • lights • huge concert • interpret • live

It’s the first time I’ve been... • I enjoyed... • Next time... • Although I was... • I managed to...

2. From: Samuel

To: Tom

Object: Amazing concert!

Hi Tom!

Guess what happened to me last night! I went to a concert. I arrived early and I saw the leader

of the band : Hugh Curtis! All the people that were queueing with me started screaming and

calling out to him. Everybody got excited because he kindly signed autographs. And although

I was really impressed, I managed to ask him for one. Next time I see you I will show it to you!

The concert was great! It’s the first time I’ve been to such a huge concert: There were 35,000

people. I enjoyed everything, the music, the way my favourite songs were interpreted, the lights

which were beautiful, the atmosphere which was electric. There’s nothing like a live concert!

More tomorrow! See you! Samuel

2. Identifiez la situation.a. street (coming home from school) + house in the woods • December night • a teenager

and two men

b. mad • desperate • panic-stricken

c. En rentrant de l’école, un(e) adolescent(e) est kidnappé(e) par deux hommes qui le / la

séquestrent dans une maison dans les bois. Ils l’attachent à une chaise et le / la laisse seul(e).

Soudain, il / elle réalise que son téléphone portable est dans sa poche. Il / Elle parvient à

envoyer un message à ses parents. Quelques heures plus tard, la police le / la libère.

3. Repérez ces éléments.a. was coming • kidnapped • screamed • punched • called • was • took • locked •

tied • left • seemed • was • realized • was • managed • heard • were • was

Tous ces verbes sont au prétérit (le temps du récit au passé), sauf le premier qui est au

prétérit en BE + -ING (qui permet de marquer un repère dans le temps).

b. big • strong • hooded • with dark clothes

c. Mots de liaison : suddenly • but • then • all of a sudden • and • finally • at last

Marqueurs de temps : on a December night • a few hours later

4. Observez comment on peut étoffer un récit.Pour étoffer un récit, on peut notamment ajouter des compléments ou des propositions relatives

(de temps, de lieu), des adjectifs qualificatifs, des propositions infinitives, des adverbes.

A.

B.

C.

MANUEL k P. 222-223

3 3 8 • RÉDIGER UNE LETTRE

6. À votre tour !In the middle of the night, I heard a noise. I decided to get up. I saw a shadow, but nothing else.

I felt a blow on my head. The next morning, I woke up; nothing had changed in the house. Yet

I wasn’t lying in my bed... I was sure I hadn’t had a nightmare because I would have been lying in

my bed. I was really getting worried when I realized I could feel a bump on my head! I felt relieved.

This proved I wasn’t going crazy! What on earth had happened the previous night? I was really

puzzled. I tried to calm down and to piece together all the clues I found and I started to imagine

a story about the events that had taken place the night before. A burglar must have broken into

the house and when he had heard me move, he had decided to hit me and escape. So things

should be missing such as my brand new laptop or my fashionable mobile. I ran to my bedroom

to check if they were still there. My laptop was on my desk and my mobile in my trouser pocket.

Nothing had been stolen. He may have been so scared of being caught that he had decided to

escape without stealing anything. But how had he got into the house? I still don’t know.

RÉDIGER UNE LETTRE

CORRIGÉ

Repérez la structure de cette lettre.a2 • b1 • c5 • d3 • e4

Repérez le destinataire de cette lettre.Il s’agit d’amis (indices : Dear all • Come and visit • Are you all well?)

Utilisez la bonne formule.– Situation formelle : Dear Sir/Madam, • Dear Mr Rogers, • Sincerely yours,

– Situation informelle : My darling Betty,

Écrivez un mot d’excuse.b. – Formule d’introduction : Dear Mrs Barnes,

– Formules d’excuse : I’m so sorry • I do apologize

– Excuse donnée : I had to go to hospital for a visit.

– Formule de conclusion : Thank you very much in advance.

c. Dear Kate,

Just a quick note to tell you I’m really sorry I couldn’t attend your birthday party yesterday. My dog

got knocked down by a car and I had to take it to the vet. Luckily enough, it’s nothing very serious

but his leg is hurt.

See you soon,

Bill

Hi,

I am so sorry I couldn’t come to your birthday party. Please, forgive me, but I was in bed with

the flu and couldn’t get up. I’ll get in touch with you as soon as I’m better.

Love,

Sue

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 224

RÉDIGER UN DIALOGUE • 3 3 9

Dear Dan,

I made it! You know I have always dreamt of going to Australia! I’ve managed to fulfil my

dream! It’s extraordinary here for a European. The landscapes are so unusual with wild

animals I have never seen before, such as the emu. The family I’m staying with are welcoming

and very friendly. They say I sound like a native speaker! But obviously, you won’t be surprised

to hear that what I enjoy most in this country is surfing! The waves are huge: There are many

beautiful spots and still more to discover. I get up very early to make the most of it in this

wonderful country. It’s a shame you are not with me this time.

Bye for now,

Karen

38, rue du Jardin

64000 PAU

May 24th, 2009

Dear Mr and Mrs Coleson,

I am writing this letter to thank you for having me to stay for a week. I’m very grateful I’ll be

able to spend a week with David and discover more about England.

David told me you wanted to make sure everything would be fine during my stay. No need to

worry! I’m not fussy at all.

I don’t mind sharing David’s room; on the contrary, I think we’ll have fun! David probably told

you I’m not an early riser when I’m on holiday. I know he is not either, but I promise we’ll be

ready on time when a family outing is planned! It’s so kind of you to take us to London to visit

Mme Tussaud’s or the new Rock Circus Museum.

I like any type of food and I enjoy tasting new dishes. To be frank, there’s just one fruit I’m not

very keen on and that’s pineapple.

Anyway I’m sure I will never forget my holiday with David in England. We’ve been looking forward

to it for so long now! It’s a great opportunity to see each other again. Nothing can spoil my

holiday with you!

Sincerely yours,

Théo

RÉDIGER UN DIALOGUE

CORRIGÉ

Identifiez la situation.a. Les personnages présents sont Rob et Ashley.

b. Il s’agit d’une situation informelle.

c. Rob attend un coup de fil de sa petite amie, Ashley, qui doit lui rendre visite. Elle lui apprend

qu’elle n’est pas près d’arriver, ce qui agace Rob qui lui reproche d’être partie trop tard. Ashley

ne comprend pas cette réaction.

Repérez les éléments suivants dans le texte.a. Des guillemets sont utilisés pour marquer le changement de locuteur.

b. Verbes introducteurs : said • replied • asked • snapped.

c. Adverbes utilisés : immediately • cheerfully • impatiently.

d. Exemples de langue orale : still got far • where exactly • Er... • I’ve • you’d • didn’t you?

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 225

3 4 0 • RÉDIGER UN DIALOGUE

Apprenez à utiliser les adverbes qui conviennent.– “I couldn’t care less!” she said rudely.

– “Can I help you?” she said kindly.

– “Don’t ever do it again!” he said furiously.

– “I just adore him,” she said passionately.

– “You let me down again!” he said sadly.

Variez les verbes.1 asked 2 shouted 3 replied 4 explained 5 declared 6 told 7 answered

À votre tour !“What on earth are you doing?” Jon asked. “It’s my favourite series and you know it. I don’t

want to miss it!” he explained calmly.

“Why don’t you go out and play football or anything else? A little exercise never harms,”

he suggested kindly.

“I wish I could be harmful sometimes!” Garfield thought furiously.

“Don’t you fancy a little exercise!” Garfield thought ironically.

4.

5.

6.

Évaluations diagnostiques et sommatives

(fi ches photocopiables, corrigés et grilles CECRL)

Fiches d’évaluation diagnostique

Spoken production p. 342-345

Reading p. 346-347

Listening p. 348

Speaking interaction p. 349

Writing p. 350-352

Corrigés et grilles CECRL p. 353-360

Fiches d’évaluation sommative

Spoken production p. 361-362

Reading p. 363-366

Listening p. 367

Speaking interaction p. 368

Writing p. 369

Corrigés et grilles CECRL p. 370-382

3 4 2 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 1 •

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 1 • SPOKEN PRODUCTION

À partir des informations données dans les bulles, vous devrez présenter le person-nage (description physique, pays d’origine, étapes marquantes de sa vie…).

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostique

• Avant de commencer, observez les vignettes, lisez bien les renseignements et mobilisez le lexique et les expressions que vous connaissez. Pensez à utiliser les verbes aux temps et formes qui conviennent.

• Pendant l’épreuve, cherchez à garder la parole le plus longtemps possible. Vous pouvez ajouter des informations, donner votre opinion, faire des liens avec des livres, des bandes dessinées ou des fi lms qui mettent en scène ce personnage. Vous pouvez hésiter.

• Attention, vous ne devez rien écrire.

➊ 1899:December 12th Brooklyn, N.Y

➌ School: Expelled (age 14)

➎ 1923 - 1931: Chicago Corruption, casino, prostitution, extorsion

➏ Enemy:Eliot Ness (detective)

➍ Leaderof the Five Points Gang, New York

➐ 1932 - 1947: Alcatraz, San Francisco

➋ Parents:from Italy (8 children)

➑ 1947: January 25th (age 48)

AL CAPONE (Scarface)

Sujet A

Cette consigne sera valable pour les 5 fiches d'évaluation diagnostique de prise de parole en continu (p. 342-345).

L'élève ne traitera qu'un seul des 5 sujets.

© U

nderw

ood &

Underw

ood /

Corb

isFic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES 2 - 3• 3 4 3

FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 2 - 3 • SPOKEN PRODUCTION

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostique

➊ 1853: May 1st Princeton,

Missouri

➋ 1866 - 1867: parents

– farmers (6 children)

➍ Jobs: a waitress,

a cook, a dance-hall girl,

a nurse, army scout

➌ Jane, head of family: Piedmont,

Wyoming

➎ 1876: Bill Hickok ‘Buffalo Bill’s friend’

➏ 1881: buy a ranch west of

Miles City, Montana

➐ 1893: artist in Buffalo Bill’s Show

CALAMITY JANE (Martha Jane Canary)

Sujet B

Sujet C

➊ Name: bow, arrow

➋ Nationality

SIR ROBIN OF LOXLEY (Robin Hood)

➌ Residence: Sherwood

Forest, Nottinghamshire

➍ Good at: archery,

poaching (braconner)

➎ Female companion:

Lady Marian, aristocrat

➑ 1903: August 1st (age 51)

➏ Friends: Robin’s Merry Men – Friar Tuck,

Little John, Alan-a-Dale

➐ Enemies: Prince John, The Sheriff of

Nottingham, Guy of Gisborne

tyranny injustice steal people’s property

tax poor people➑ Philosophy: rob the rich to feed

the poor

© H

.R.

Locke

/ C

orb

is -

© M

org

an C

reek /

Warn

er

Bro

s /

The K

obal C

olle

cti

on

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 4 4 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 4•

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 4 • SPOKEN PRODUCTION

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostique

➌ Age 9: plane crash in the Himalayas

➎ Ten days: walk to Katmandu

Lara: only survivor

Lara: age 18

➍ Mother

➏ Father ➐ Job: archealogist – discoveries (secrets of civilization, treasures)

➋ Parents: Lord Richard Croft and Lady Amelia de Mornay Father’s job: archeo-logist

➑ Tomb Raider: star Angelina Jolie

LARA CROFT

Sujet D

➊ 1996: video game no. 1, Lara Croft

© A

P /

Sip

a P

ress

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 5 • 3 4 5

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 5 • SPOKEN PRODUCTION

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostique

➊ Name: slimy (visqueux)

➌ Family: early life with Grand-mother

➎ Country: Middle-Earth

➏ Residence: under the mountains, island / lake, dark places

➍ Evil power: treachery, violence

➐ Specifi c characteristics: specifi c grammar ➙ use the fi rst person plural specifi c pronunciation ➙ hiss, ex: “my preciouss” specifi c noise ➙ when swallowing like riddles

➋ Origins/race: Hobbit

➑ Enemies: Bilbo Baggins, Frodo Baggins, Samwise Gamgee

GOLLUM

Sujet E

Now: nobody

© N

ew

Lin

e C

inem

a /

The K

obal C

olle

cti

on

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 4 6 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 6 •

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 6 • READING

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostiqueNom de l’élève : ............................................... Classe : ........

Lisez le texte puis répondez aux questions en français.

Then one day, about a week after he arrived, a strange thing happened. Jonathan

was standing by his window. He was shaving in front of a little mirror from his

travelling bag.Suddenly he heard a quiet voice in his ear say: “Good morning.” Jonathan jumped

with fear and cut himself on the neck. The count was standing next to him. Jonathan

looked in the mirror again, but he could only see himself.“Why can’t I see him in the mirror?” he thought.He turned again, and saw a strange, hungry look in Dracula’s eyes. The count

was watching the small stream of blood coming out of the cut on Jonathan’s neck.

Without thinking, Jonathan lifted his hand to the blood. As he did that, he touched

the little silver cross around his neck. The count’s face changed. His eyes shone

red and he began to shake. Then, without a word, he picked the mirror and threw

it out of the window. There was a long silence, then Jonathan heard the crash of

broken glass on the rocks far below. The count turned angrily:“I will not have mirrors in my house,” he shouted. Then, seconds later, he said

more softly: “Try not to cut yourself. It is more dangerous in this country than you

think.” When the count left the room, Jonathan looked out of the window at his

broken mirror. The ground was a long way down. For the fi rst time he realized

that he wanted to leave. He wanted to go home. “But will he give me permission to

leave?” he thought. “Am I really his guest? Or am I, perhaps, his prisoner?”Bram Stoecker, Dracula, Penguin Readers, level 3, 2000

Observez cet extrait attentivement. Pouvez-vous identifier la nature du document ? Cochez la bonne réponse.Est-ce l’extrait ❑ d’un article de presse ? ❑ d’une lettre ?

❑ d’un roman ? ❑ d’une pièce de théâtre ?

a. Sur papier libre, notez les noms des personnages et leur situation sociale (profession ou titre), lorsque cela est spécifié dans le texte.

b. Quelle est leur relation dans l’histoire ? Citez un mot clé.

Quand se passe la scène ? Justifiez à l’aide d’un élément du texte.

Où se passe la scène ? a. Dans quelle pièce ? Donnez un indice tiré du texte.

b. Dans quel lieu selon vous ? Justifiez à l’aide d’un indice.

1.

2.

3.

4.

/1

/3

/2

/1

/2

/2

5

10

15

20

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 6• 3 4 7

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 6 • READING

Relisez le texte de la ligne 1 à 7 et dites : a. ce que fait l’un des personnages au début de la scène :

b. ce qui lui arrive : c. qui provoque l’incident : d. les deux sentiments qui dominent :

Sur quoi se fixe l’attention de l’un des personnages ?

Relisez le texte de la ligne 8 à 16 et trouvez les mots qui appartiennent aux champs lexicaux suivants : parties du corps, mouvements, sons et voix. Classez-les dans un tableau.

Faites la synthèse des informations contenues dans le texte. Résumez en quelques lignes ce que vous avez compris de ce passage.

Observez les mots angrily (ligne 14) et softly (ligne 16) et complétez le tableau :

angrily softly

Indiquez leur catégorie grammaticale (noms, verbes, adjectifs, adverbes)

Trouvez le mot racine

Donnez le sens prévisible

Que pouvez-vous en déduire sur le caractère d’un des personnages ?

Relisez le dernier paragraphe et répondez aux questions.

a. Comment réagit l’autre personnage ? Citez une phrase du texte.

b. De quoi prend-il conscience ? Citez un mot clé tiré du texte.

a. Un mot a beaucoup d’importance dans le récit. Lequel ? Comment le repérez-vous ?

b. Trouvez deux indices qui prouvent que Dracula est un vampire.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

/2

/2

/2

/2

/1

/3

/4

/3

/2

/2

/2

/2

/2

Total des points /40

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 4 8 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 7 •

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 7 • LISTENING

/1

/4

/2

/2

/1,5

/2,5

/2

/1

/1

/3

De quel type de document s’agit-il ? Cochez la bonne réponse.❑ un flash d’information ❑ un jeu radiophonique

❑ une interview à la radio ❑ une publicité

Complétez la carte d’identité de l’homme qui parle.

Nom et prénom : Nationalité :

Âge : Profession :

Quel est le sujet de la conversation?

Concentrez-vous sur le ton de chaque personne et indiquez le sentiment qu’il traduit : a. Homme : ❑ colère ❑ surprise ❑ embarras ❑ mépris

b. Femme : ❑ peur ❑ surprise ❑ joie ❑ tristesse

Repérez le nom des trois super héros cités :

a. b. c.

En quoi le héros préféré de la personne interviewée est-il différent des autres super héros ? Relevez cinq caractéristiques significatives. a. b. c. d. e.

Quel est l’unique but de ce super héros dans la vie ?

a. À quel âge l’homme a-t-il découvert ce super héros ?

b. Comment ?

Pourquoi ce héros peut-il devenir un modèle pour un enfant ?

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostiqueNom de l’élève : ............................................... Classe : ........

Écoutez l’enregistrement trois fois puis répondez aux questions en français.

Total des points /20

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES 8 - 11 • 3 4 9

FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 8 - 11 • SPEAKING INTERACTION

Vous avez reçu 30 euros

en cadeau : comment les dépensez-vous ?

On vous a offert deux places de cinéma. Quel film et quelle séance choisissez-vous ?

Sujet A

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostique

Sujet B

Sujet C

Vous décidez de vous inscrire sur un forum. Quelle autre identité ou avatar choisissez-vous ? Pourquoi ?

Sujet D

AVATAR14:05 18:45

Robin Hood13:05 15:45

Twilight14:30 16:45

SHERLOCK HOLMES14:05 16:05

THE

HULK

Lord

of the

Rings

FrankensteinSupermanStrange Tales

Dracula returns!twilight

Pendant 3 minutes, échangez avec un camarade sur le sujet que vous aurez choisi. Utilisez la comparaison et la préférence pour vous justifier et étayer votre argumentation. Vous pouvez vous aider des illustrations ou suggérer autre chose.

Vous êtes invité(e) à une soirée déguisée ; le thème est ‘goodies and baddies’. Attention, tout le monde doit avoir un costume différent. Quel costume choisis-sez-vous ? Pourquoi ?

Cette consigne sera valable pour les 4 sujets d'évaluation

diagnostique de prise de parole en interaction. L'élève ne

traitera qu'un seul des 4 sujets.

VIDEO GAME

VIDEO GAME

CounterStrike

Lara Croft

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 5 0 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 12 •

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 12 • WRITING

Évaluation diagnostiqueÉvaluation diagnostiqueNom de l’élève : ............................................... Classe : ........

Voici un devoir rédigé par un élève. Le sujet était “Write about a film you have seen recently. Express likes, dislikes, cause and opinion.”

Yesterday I went to see Avatar because all my friends told me it was great. I enjoyed

it very much: I love special eff ects. I think the use of new fi lm techniques and 3D

is eff ective and the visuals are amazing. It is full of adventure and the heroes are

very realistic. In my opinion it is the biggest and best movie ever! My girl friend was

not so impressed; she hated it. The story was boring and disappointing. She couldn’t

stand the music.

Soulignez les mots que l’élève a utilisés pour traiter le sujet et reportez-les ci-dessous.

Likes

Dislikes

Cause

Opinion

Vous avez lu une bande dessinée de super héros (Spiderman, The Hulk, Superman, …) et vous voulez la raconter à un ami qui ne l’a pas lue. Quels mots anglais allez-vous utiliser ? Complétez les fiches.

1.

2.

/4

/5

Who? (people)

Where?

What?

Super hero?

Who for?

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 12 • 3 5 1

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 12 • WRITING

Sur papier libre, recopiez les énoncés suivants en séparant les mots et les phrases. Rétablissez la ponctuation et les majuscules.

a. CaptainAmericaisasymboloffreedomandpatriotismhefoughtagainstthenazisandwon

b. IjustloveSpidermanwhocanclimbskyscrapersheissoathleticandclever

c. Wonderwomanhasamagiclassoandunbreakablebraceletswhichhelpherfightvillainss-

hecanrunveryfastisverystrongshecanfly

Utilisez une seule fois chacun des mots de liaison ci-dessous pour ne former qu’un seul énoncé. Vous pouvez changer l’ordre des énoncés si nécessaire.

who, that’s why, when, because

a. The nuclear physicist was working for the government / he was exposed to gamma

rays.

b. Bruce Banner was exposed to gamma radiation / he gets mad he turns into The

Hulk.

c. The Hulk is a superhero / is big, green-skinned and invincible.

d. The Hulk can resist all attacks / his skin is very thick and bullet-proof.

Dans le devoir suivant figurent huit erreurs que le professeur a soulignées. Corrigez-les et réécrivez la phrase correcte sur la ligne prévue à cet effet.

Superman is born on planet Krypton.

He’s dad sent him off to Earth as a young children.

He lived as a man normal.

He is name Clark Kent.

He worked as a newspaper reporter with others journalists.

When the evil Lex Luthor planned to destroy the world, Superman was the only one

which could stop him.

Lex Luthor wanted that Superman die.

3.

4.

5.

/3

/4

/4

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 5 2 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 12 •

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE k 12 • WRITING

Écrivez, sur papier libre, le récit correspondant à ces six images. Utilisez les temps du passé. (80 à 120 mots)

6./20

Total des points /40

/20

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉ INTRODUCTION À L'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE• 3 5 3

CORRIGÉ INTRODUCTION À L'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

> Proposition de corrigéPour préparer les élèves à l’évaluation diagnostique, le professeur traitera cette page qui permettra de travailler le champ lexical des bons et des méchants.

Listes non exhaustives de héros : Goodies ➙ Superman, Wonderwoman, Spiderman, Flash

Gordon, The Men in Black, Batman, Lara Croft, Tintin, Popeye, Iron Man, Aragorn / Frodo /

Legolas / Gandalf / Arwen / Eowyn / Galadriel / Sam Wise, Luke Skywalker / Han Solo /

Queen Armidala / Princess Leia, Indiana Jones, Robin Hood, Tarzan, Zorro, Harry Potter /

Hermione / Dumbledore, Buffy, Captain Jack Sparrow / Elizabeth

Baddies ➙ Darth Vader / The Emperor / Darth Maul, Lord Farquaad (Shrek), Skeletor,The

Joker / The Riddler / Catwoman / The Penguin, Cruella De Vil, Hannibal Lecter, Snow

White’s Evil Queen, Count Dracula, Professor Snape, Queen of Hearts (Alice in Wonderland),

Davy Jones (Pirates of the Caribbean), Gollum / Saruman / Orc / Nazgul, The Silver

Surfer / Dr Doom Saruman / The All Seeing Eye / An Orc

Productions possibles : As for me / I think Harry Potter is a real goodie because he fights

evil. He is fearless and determined; nothing can make him change his mind. Besides he has

got superpowers which make him (all the more) invulnerable.

I love Cruella De Vil because she is the ultimate baddie: she is selfish, cruel and wicked. She

has no consideration for the Little and the Weak. Her own pleasure comes first.

Personnages photo (de g. à d.) : Iron Man, Thing, Superman, The Incredible Hulk, Human Torch.

Commencer par demander à la classe quels héros ils reconnaissent et d’où ils proviennent.

Productions possibles : Superman was born on the alien planet Krypton. His parents sent

him to Earth to survive and he landed in the United States. A couple named the Kents adopted

and named him Clark Kent. As Clark grows up on Earth, he and his adoptive parents discove-

red he had superhuman powers. The Kents taught Clark to use these powers to help others

and fight crime.

Iron Man is a superhero from comic books. He suffered severe heart injury during a kid-

napping; his captors wanted him to build a massively destructive weapon but he created a

powered suit of armor to save his life and escape. He later decided to use the suit to protect

the world as Iron Man. He can fight crime with his metal suit full of technological devices.

Thing and Human Torch come from the comics The Fantastic Four. The heroes have super-

powers. Mr. Fantastic, a scientific genius, is the leader of the group; he can stretch his body

into incredible length and shapes; the Invisible Woman can become invisible; the Human Torch

can surround himself with flames and fly; and the monstrous Thing has superhuman strength

because of his stone-like flesh.

The Hulk is a character from comic books. Bruce Banner, a physicist, invented a gamma bomb.

During a test he is exposed to radiations and transforms into The Hulk, a giant green monster.

He changes each time he is angry or scared. The madder The Hulk is the stronger The Hulk gets.

Le professeur organisera les groupes dans la classe pour que les élèves interrogent leurs

camarades. Il les engagera à utiliser le vocabulaire et les amorces suivantes.

Costumes: Description ➙ armour (or), tough skin, disguise, leggings, close fitting, tight ≠

baggy, look ≠ look like + adjectif

Accessories ➙ cape, belt, mask, gloves, wig, helmet, shield

Choice ➙ strong, powerful, super human, hillarious, far from reality, colourful,

eccentric

Reaction: Likes ➙ be fond of + V-ing, enjoy + V-ing, fabulous!, terrific!, awesome!

Dislikes ➙ hate, can’t stand, uncomfortable, heavy, horrid, ridiculous

Preferences ➙ favourite, prefer + V-ing, had rather + V, different from,

I’d choose, … is nicer than, … is more …

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 14-15

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

3 5 4 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

SPOKEN PRODUCTION> Proposition de corrigé : fi ches d'évaluation diagnostique 1 à 5(prise de parole en continu)

Ceci est un exemple de production possible (sujet A : Al Capone).This is Al Capone, also called Scarface.

In this photograph, he has a round face with black eyes and black hair, he is a little bald. He

looks fat. He is wearing a dark suit and a tie. This is surprising because he doesn’t look nasty

or mean or bad and yet he is one of the most famous baddies of the twentieth century.

He was born on December 12th 1899 in Brooklyn, New York, but his parents were Italians.

He had 7 brothers and sisters, so it was a large family. I can imagine they were not rich. He

was not a good pupil and left school when he was expelled at the age of 14. He became the

leader of the Five Points Gang in New York. Then, from 1923 to 1931 he moved to Chicago

where he became the most famous gangster ever, public enemy number 1. He was involved

in illegal activities which concerned corruption, casinos, prostitution and extorsion. The

police were very active: they asked Eliot Ness to try his best to catch him. This is the story of

the film The Untouchables by Brian de Palma with Robert de Niro and Kevin Costner. He was

found guilty in 1932, convicted and sent to prison. He spent the rest of his life in Alcatraz,

the famous Rock in San Francisco Bay and died there in 1947. He was only 48 years old.

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRLCompétence Composante évaluée Points PaliersRéalisation de l’exercice et traitement du sujet

Respect de la consigne01

Discours cohérent et organisé

Chronologie respectée

Discours sous forme d’une succession de points

Utilisation de mots de liaison simples (and, but, because,

so…)

01 2 3

A2A2A2

Production d’un discours cohérent et logique

Utilisation d’énoncés complexes (propositions relatives,

subordonnées en when, where...)

B1B1

Capacité à communiquer

Auditoire souvent ignoré

Discours compréhensible malgré des maladresses

Énoncés courts

Nombreuses pauses

01 2 3 4

A2A2A2A2

Auditoire pris en compte

Discours facilement compréhensible

Énoncés longs et complexes

Quelques pauses et hésitations

B1B1B1B1

Contenu Nombre d’informations données restreint et peu précis 0 1 2

A2

Informations nombreuses, pertinentes et détaillées B1

Phonologie Discours compréhensible malgré de nombreuses erreurs

de prononciation, d’accentuation de mot et d’intonation

0 12 3 4

A2

Discours aisément compréhensible car les erreurs de

prononciation, d’accent de mot et d’intonation sont rares

B1

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE kP. 342-345FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 342-345

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 5 5

Lexique Vocabulaire adéquat mais limité

Impossibilité de compenser les manques0 1 2 3

A2A2

Vocabulaire pertinent, riche et varié

Recours à des périphrases si le vocabulaire manque

B1B1

Grammaire Utilisation de structures simples

Erreurs élémentaires très nombreuses 0 1 23

A2A2

Utilisation de structures complexes

Erreurs grammaticales occasionnelles qui ne gênent pas

la compréhension

B1B1

Total des points /20

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 6 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 7 à 10 points : A2

➼ De 11 à 15 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

READING> Proposition de corrigé : fi che d'évaluation diagnostique 6 (compréhension de l'écrit)Ceci est une proposition de corrigé. Le correcteur acceptera toutes les réponses qu’il juge pertinentes.

roman (1 point) a. Dracula – count – Jonathan (3 points) b. un invité – guest (2 points) matin – good morning (1 point) a. chambre – by his window / the room (2 points) b. château – my house / the rocks far below (2 points) a. Jonathan se rase (devant son miroir) (2 points) b. il se coupe (2 points) c. l’entrée dans la pièce/ l’arrivée de Dracula (2 points) d. la surprise et la peur (1 point par bonne réponse) (un mince filet de) sang (1 point) Parties du corps : eyes, (blood), neck, hand, face, Mouvements : coming out, lifted, touched, changed, shake, picked, threw out, turned, Sons et voix : word, heard, crash, shouted, said (de 0 à 4 mots = 0 point – de 5 à 9 mots = 1 point – de 10 à 14 mots = 2 points – plus de

14 mots = 3 points) En touchant la croix accrochée à son cou, Jonathan provoque une réaction physique

et violente du comte qui jette le miroir par la fenêtre. (4 points) angrily = adverbe, mot racine = angry, sens prévisible = en colère/ vivement

softly = adverbe, mot racine = soft, sens prévisible = doucement

(0,5 point par bonne réponse) Le comte a un caractère imprévisible / changeant / instable. Il est dangereux et violent.

(2 points)

1.2.3.4.

5.

6.7.

8.

9.

10.

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 346-347

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

3 5 6 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

a. Il veut partir – he wanted to leave / he wanted to go home (2 points) b. Il est enfermé/ prisonnier – prisoner (2 points) a. mirror: il est répété 6 fois. (2 points) b. Il est attiré par le sang et la croix le terrifie. – blood /cross (2 points)

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 2 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 13 à 20 points : A2

➼ De 21 à 30 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRLCompétences Composante évaluée Questions PaliersIdentifier Identifier la nature du document 1 A2

Repérer Repérer les noms et pronoms désignant le même

personnage

Repérer la relation entre les personnages

Repérer les lieux

Repérer les mots répétés

Repérer les mots clés

Repérer les indices temporels

2a

2b4a, 4b

125a 3

A2

A2A2A2A2A2

Repérer les mots clés 5b B1Mettre en relation

Classer les éléments par champs lexicaux 7 En route vers B1

Déduire le sens et le rôle des mots

Déduire le sens des mots par connaissance des

procédés de dérivation

9 B1

Traiter l’information

Identifier l’idée essentielle

Établir le lien entre répétition et sens

Synthétiser l’information (faire un résumé)

5c, 6 11a-b, 12a

8

B1B1B1

Percevoir l’implicite

Interpréter l’attitude et les sentiments d’un

personnage

Percevoir les causes et les buts implicites

5d, 10

12b

B1

B1

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 7 points : A2

➼ De 7 à 12 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

11.

12.

Total des points /40

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 5 7

LISTENING> Script de l’enregistrement et proposition de corrigé : fi che d'évalua-tion diagnostique 7 (compréhension de l'oral)Journalist: What’s your name, your full name?

William Anderson: William Anderson.

Journalist: So William, could you introduce yourself, give us your name, your age?

W.A.: My name is William Anderson, I’m 44 years old, I’m a journalist.

Journalist: OK, and your nationality is …

W.A.: I’m from the United States.

Journalist: All right. We’ve asked William who has inspired him in his life. So who’s inspired

you in your life, William?

W.A.: Well, it’s certainly embarrassing, but I would have to say, I was inspired most by Batman.

Journalist: Batman?

W.A.: Batman!

Journalist: Really?

W.A.: The superhero. You’re looking at me like …

Journalist: [Big laugh] Well he’s a hero of course, he’s a super hero.

W.A.: Well he was a hero to me when I was young and this is when inspiring people come

into our lives when we are young.

Journalist: How old were you when you discovered Batman?

W.A.: I must have been about 6 or 7 when I first started reading the Batman comics. I was

drawn to him instinctively I think because he, unlike other superheroes, doesn’t have any

superpowers: bullets do not bounce off of him, he cannot fly, he doesn’t have a super suit

like Iron Man and he’s often being injured, but he’s just a man, a man who is motivated to

fight crime because of what’s happened to him in his own past.

Journalist: OK, that was the whole heroic aspect of Batman.

W.A: Superman just woke up and was powerful and could fly because he was in a different

world than his own, which gave him his powers. It is easy to be a superhero when you’ve

already got all these powers. I think that you could apply that to any field. If it’s not crime-

fighting perhaps it could be helping people, healing, you could be a doctor, anything …

Journalist: Thank you.

Ceci est une proposition de corrigé. Accepter toute réponse pertinente. Interview à la radio (1 point) William Anderson, américain, 44, journaliste (1 point par bonne réponse) Ce qui a inspiré M. Anderson – Batman seulement (2 points) a. embarras b. surprise (1 point par bonne réponse) a. Batman b. Superman c. Iron man (0,5 point par bonne réponse) a. Il n’a pas de supers pouvoirs. b. Les balles l’atteignent / il peut mourir.

c. Il ne peut pas voler. d. Il n’a pas de super armure. e. Il est souvent blessé.

(0,5 point par bonne réponse) Sa motivation est de combattre le crime / les criminels. (2 points) a. 6 ou 7 ans b. En lisant des B.D. de Batman (1 point par bonne réponse) Ce super héros offre un modèle / un principe de vie qu’il peut appliquer à d’autres

domaines (soigner les gens, devenir médecin, aider les autres…) (3 points)

1.2.3.4.5.6.

7.8.9.

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 348

Total des points /20

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

3 5 8 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRLCompétences Composante évaluée Questions PaliersIdentifier Identifier la nature du document

Identifier le sujet d’une conversation

· si réponse : Batman

· si réponse : personne qui vous a inspiré

dans votre vie

13

A2A2A2B1

Repérer Repérer le nom, prénom, âge et nationalité

Repérer le nom des personnages

Repérer l’âge de la découverte

Repérer comment s’est fait la découverte

258a8b

A2A2A2A2

Mettre en relation Associer une intonation à sa valeur 4 B1

Traiter l’information Faire la synthèse : retenir l’essentiel

Mémoriser (mettre en mémoire à court terme

des éléments d’information)

Repérer les arguments

6, 7, 96

9

B1B1

B1

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 7 points : A2

➼ De 7 à 12 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

SPEAKING INTERACTION> Grille d’évaluation du CECRL : fi ches d'évaluation diagnostique 8 à 11 (prise de parole en interaction)

Compétences Composante évaluée Points PaliersInteraction Peut lancer, poursuivre et clore un bref échange

Peut poursuivre un échange, a parfois besoin d’aide 0 1 2 34

A2A2

Prend l’initiative, mène l’échange et répond de façon

pertinente en étoffant ses réponses

Capacité à négocier pour aboutir à un choix en fin

d’échange

B1

B1

Capacité à communiquer

Auditoire souvent ignoré

Discours compréhensible malgré des maladresses

Énoncés courts

Nombreuses pauses0 1 2 3 4

A2A2A2A2

Auditoire pris en compte

Discours facilement compréhensible

Énoncés longs et complexes

Quelques pauses et hésitations

B1B1B1B1

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 349

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 5 9

Phonologie Discours compréhensible malgré de nombreuses erreurs

de prononciation, d’accentuation de mot et d’intonation

0 1 2 3 4

A2

Discours aisément compréhensible car les erreurs de

prononciation, d’accent de mot et d’intonation sont rares

B1

Lexique Vocabulaire adéquat mais limité

Impossibilité de compenser les manques

01 2 34

A2A2

Vocabulaire pertinent, riche et varié

Recours à des périphrases si le vocabulaire manque

B1B1

Grammaire Utilisation de structures simples

Erreurs élémentaires très nombreuses01 234

A2A2

Utilisation de structures complexes

Erreurs grammaticales occasionnelles qui ne gênent pas

la compréhension

B1B1

Total des points /20

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 6 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 7 à 10 points : A2

➼ De 11 à 15 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

WRITING> Proposition de corrigé : fi che d'évaluation 12, exercices 1 à 5 (expression écrite)

Ceci est une proposition de corrigé pour les exercices 1 à 5. Likes: it was great, enjoyed, love Dislikes: she hated it, she couldn’t stand

Cause: because all my friends Opinion: I think, in my opinion

(0,5 par expression trouvée) Who? noms propres de superheroes, victims, goodies, baddies, detective, journalist,

soldier, gangster

Where? city, the USA, New York, foreign planets, galaxy, space, skyscraper

What? jump, run, fly, crawl, climb, save, rescue, attack, protect

Who for? victims, human beings, children, citizens, beautiful girl

What for? the planet, Earth, freedom, security, friends

(0,5 point par mot juste - 5 points maximum) a. Captain America is a symbol of freedom and patriotism. He fought against the Nazis and

won.

b. I just love Spiderman who can climb skyscrapers. He is so athletic and clever.

c. Wonder Woman has a magic lasso and unbreakable bracelets which help her fight

villains. She can run very fast, is very strong. She can fly as well.

(1 point par phrase correcte) a. The nuclear physicist was working for the government when he was exposed to gamma rays.

b. Bruce Banner was exposed to gamma radiation that’s why he turns into The Hulk when

he gets mad.

1.

2.

3.

4.

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 350-352

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION DIAGNOSTIQUE

3 6 0 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

c. The Hulk is a superhero who is big, green-skinned and invincible.

d. The Hulk can resist all attacks because his skin is very thick and bullet-proof. (1 point par phrase correcte trouvée)

Superman was born on planet Krypton.

His dad sent him off to Earth as a young child.

He lived as a normal man .

He was named Clark Kent.

He worked as a newspaper reporter with other journalists.

When the evil Lex Luthor planned to destroy the world, Superman was the only one who

could stop him.

Lex Luthor wanted Superman to die. (0,5 point par erreur corrigée)

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRL : fi che d'évaluation 12, exercice 6Compétence Composante évaluée Points PaliersRéalisation de l’exercice et traitement du sujet

Respect de la consigne

Présentation

Écriture et soin

0 1 2

Récit cohérent et organisé

Chronologie du récit respectée

Description sous forme d’une succession de points

Utilisation de mots de liaison simples (and, but, because)

0123 4 5

A2

Texte articulé

Utilisation d’énoncés complexes (propositions relatives,

subordonnées en when, whereas...)

B1

Lexique Vocabulaire limité qui permet de rédiger un court récit 0 1 2 3 45

A2

Lexique riche et varié qui permet de raconter l’histoire B1

Grammaire Utilisation de structures simples

Erreurs élémentaires encore systématiques

012345

A2

Correction grammaticale suffisante

Erreurs occasionnelles ne gênant pas la compréhension

B1

Prise de risque Idées

Richesse de l’expression

0 12 3

Total des pointsMoins de 20 mots : A2 en cours d’acquisition De 21 à 39 mots : A2De 40 à 59 mots : B1 en cours d’acquisition De 60 à 80 mots : B1

/20

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à12 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 13 à 20 points : A2

➼ De 21 à 30 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

5.

Total des points (exercices 1 à 6) /40

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 13 • 3 6 1

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 13 • SPOKEN PRODUCTION

Évaluation sommativeÉvaluation sommative

Sujet A

À partir des informations données sur les fiches, vous devrez présenter ce personnage (description physique, pays d’origine, étapes marquantes de sa vie…).

• Avant de commencer, observez les vignettes, lisez bien les renseignements et mobilisez le lexique et les expressions que vous connaissez. Pensez à utiliser les verbes aux temps et formes qui conviennent.

• Pendant l’épreuve, cherchez à garder la parole le plus longtemps possible. Vous pouvez ajouter des informations, donner votre opinion, faire des liens avec des livres, des bandes dessinées ou des fi lms qui mettent en scène ce personnage. Vous pouvez hésiter.

• Attention, vous ne devez rien écrire.

Florence Nightingale – “The lady with the lamp”

➊ Birth: May 12, 1820 in Florence, Italy

➋ Parents: rich, educated English family

➌ 1845: decision to become a nurse ➙ parents’

strong objection

➍ 1851: 4 months of training in Germany

➎ 1853: superintendent of the Institute for the

Care of Sick Gentlewomen, London

➏ 1853 – 1856: crimean /kraI"mIEn/ War,

(in Turkey today) newspaper: horrible conditions in military

hospitals (crowded, dirty, Cholera = main cause

of death) travels to the Crimea; leads a team

of 38 nurses very brave, works day and night; looks after

injured soldiers nickname: “The lady with the lamp”

➐ 1860: starts the fi rst modern school for nurses

at St. Thomas’ Hospital, London (new techniques of

nursing) ➙ founder of themodern nursing

➑ Distinctions: the Royal Red Cross awarded

by Queen Victoria, 1883. The fi rst woman to be

awarded the Order of Merit, 1907

➒ Death: August 13, 1910 (age = 90)

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

© B

ett

mann /

Corb

is

3 6 2 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 14•

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 14 • SPOKEN PRODUCTION

Évaluation sommativeÉvaluation sommative

Sujet B

À partir des informations données sur les fiches, vous devrez présenter ce personnage (description physique, pays d’origine, étapes marquantes de sa vie…).

• Avant de commencer, observez les vignettes, lisez bien les renseignements et mobilisez le lexique et les expressions que vous connaissez. Pensez à utiliser les verbes aux temps et formes qui conviennent.

• Pendant l’épreuve, cherchez à garder la parole le plus longtemps possible. Vous pouvez ajouter des informations, donner votre opinion, faire des liens avec des livres, des bandes dessinées ou des fi lms qui mettent en scène ce personnage. Vous pouvez hésiter.

• Attention, vous ne devez rien écrire.

Clara Barton – “Angel of the Battlefi eld”

➊ Birth: December 25, 1821, Oxford,

Massachusetts, USA

➋ Family: parents, middle-class farmers and

horse breeders; aunt, nurse and midwife (sage-

femme)➍ 1854: independent woman; job = copyist in the

U.S. Patent Offi ce, Washington, D.C.

➍ 1861– 1865: American Civil War

newspaper: fi rst battles, bad conditions in

military hospitals (medical supplies needed)

organization of help for the soldiers

➎ 1862: in an army ambulance with food and

medicine permission to go to battlefi elds and frontline

nickname: “Angel of the Battlefi eld”

➏ 1864 – 1865: in charge of all hospitals at the

front President Lincoln’s decision – Barton at the

head of the search for missing men in the Union

Army➐ Involvement: Women’s suffrage movement

Slavery abolition and Black Civil Rights

➑ 1881: creation and President of the American

Red Cross➒ Death: April 12, 1912, Maryland

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

© B

ett

mann /

Corb

is

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 15 • 3 6 3

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 15 • READING

Évaluation sommativeÉvaluation sommative

Lisez le texte puis répondez aux questions en français.

She thought she would never be tired of watching those ponies coming by, but after a while1 she began to look at the women and children on their backs. The women and children came riding behind the Indian men. Little naked brown Indians, no bigger than Mary and Laura, were riding the pretty ponies. The ponies did not have to wear bridles or saddles2, and the little Indians did not have to wear clothes. All their skin was out in the fresh air and the sunshine. Their straight black hair blew in the wind and their black eyes sparkled3 with joy. They sat on their ponies stiff and still4 like grown-up Indians.Laura looked and looked at the Indian children, and they looked at her. She had a naughty wish to be a little Indian girl. Of course she did not really mean it. She only wanted to be bare-naked in the wind and the sunshine, and riding one of those gay little ponies. The Indian children’s mothers were riding ponies, too. Leather fringes5 dangled about their legs, and blankets were wrapped around their bodies, but the only thing on their heads was their black smooth hair. Their faces were brown and placid. (...)It was dinner-time and no one thought of dinner. Indian ponies were still going by, carrying bundles6 of skins and tent poles and dangling baskets and cooking pots. There were a few more women and a few more naked Indian children. Then the very last pony went by. But Pa and Ma and Laura and Mary still stayed in the doorway, looking, till that long line of Indians slowly pulled itself over the western edge of the world. And nothing was left but silence and emptiness. All the world seemed very quiet and lonely.

1. un moment 2. brides et selles 3. pétillaient 4. raides et immobiles 5. frange en cuir 6. baluchons Laura Ingalls Wilder, The Little House on the Prairie, 1935

Observez cet extrait attentivement. Pouvez-vous identifier la nature du document ?Est-ce l’extrait ❑ d’un article de presse ? ❑ d’une lettre ?

❑ d’un roman ? ❑ d’une pièce de théâtre ?

Relevez les noms des personnages et classez-les en deux groupes dans un tableau. Donnez un titre à chaque groupe.

À quel moment de la journée se passe la scène ? Justifiez à l’aide du texte.

Où se situe chaque groupe ? Citez une ou plusieurs expressions tirées du texte.

1.

2.

3.

4.

/1

/4

/1

/2

5

10

15

20

Sujet A

Nom de l’élève : ............................................... Classe : ........

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 15 • READING

Relisez le texte de la ligne 1 à 8 et répondez aux questions.a. À travers les yeux de qui cette scène est-elle décrite ?

b. Quel est l’âge probable de cette héroïne ?

c. Que fait chaque groupe ? Justifiez vos réponses avec un élément du texte.

d. Sur papier libre, relevez les mots qui appartiennent aux champs lexicaux de la description physique et du mode de vie.e. “They sat on their ponies stiff and still like grown-up Indians.” (l. 7-8) Quelle attitude cette phrase souligne-t-elle ?

f. Que découvre l’héroïne dans ce passage sur la façon de vivre de ce groupe ? Expliquez avec vos propres mots.

Relisez le texte de la ligne 9 à 15 et répondez aux questions.a. Quels souhaits exprime l’héroïne ? Classez-les par ordre de préférence.

b. Pouvez-vous deviner le sens de naughty (ligne 10) d’après le contexte ? ❑ réaliste ❑ malsain ❑ espiègle ❑ morbide

c. Relevez deux mots se référant aux éléments naturels ou à la météo ?

d. Que souhaite l’héroïne et pourquoi ?

Relisez le texte de la ligne 16 à la fin et répondez aux questions. a. Relevez les noms d’objets usuels : b. Trouvez un lieu / une direction : c. À votre avis que fait ce groupe de personnes et pourquoi (émettez des hypothèses) ?

d. Quels sentiments dominent à la fin du texte ? Citez trois mots clés.

e. Pourquoi ? Émettez des hypothèses et expliquez avec vos propres mots.

5.

6.

7.

/1

/1

/2

/2

/2

/4

/2

/1

/2

/2

/2

/1

/3

/3

/4

Total des points /40

3 6 4 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 15 •

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 16• 3 6 5

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 16 • READING

Évaluation sommativeÉvaluation sommative

Lisez le texte deux fois ainsi que l’ensemble des questions puis répondez-y.

Sunday, June 28, 1896 After Mass today, the boat engines suddenly stopped. “What is it?” “Is something the matter?” “Is something wrong with the boat?” All kinds of stories started up, but then someone shouted, “America!”I grabbed Jozeph’s hand. We hurried up the stairs and crowded onto the deck. Far off, I saw a jagged line. Land! It was America. I hugged Jozeph and started to cry. I spotted Leon, and he grinned and nodded.Soon the Statue of Liberty came into view. We pushed against the rail to get a glimpse. Mothers and fathers lifted their babies and small children so they could see. There were cheers and laughter and more crying. People crossed themselves and prayed.Leon pushed his way over to us and lifted Jozeph to his shoulders. The Statue of Liberty looked sad and lonesome. She reminded me of a saint, and I don’t know why, but I was suddenly fi lled with sadness too. I could not take my eyes off her mournful face. What kind of place is this America, I wondered as our ship fl oated past a harbor. Tall buildings loomed in front of us.

Then the moment was gone, and it was rush, rush, rush. Ship offi cers strode up and down the decks, barking orders and directions. “Hurry up! Quickly! Run! Over here! Over there! Men here! Women there! Children with the mothers!” Identifi cation tags were pinned onto our clothing, and we were herded onto a smaller boat and transported to a great inspection hall.At the hall, a stern and sour inspector checked our papers. [...]In another hall we were poked and prodded1 and interrogated. Our eyelids were pulled up, our chests and backs thumped, our legs and fi ngers, hair and scalp examined. They even measured the beating of our hearts.Then the dreaded chalk mark! When a doctor found something suspicious – redness of the eyes, or lameness, or a cough – he marked a letter on the foreigner’s coat. Oh, the wail that went up each time a coat was chalked.To our great relief, there was no chalk mark for Jozeph, Leon or me. Now we are sitting, waiting to answer more questions to see if we will make suitable Americans.

1. (ici) auscultés

Susan Campbell Bartoletti, A Coal Miner’s Bride, The Diary of Anetka Kaminska, 1896 (2000)

5

10

15

20

25

Sujet B

a. Who are the main characters? Name them when possible.

b. In your opinion, how are they related to each other?

What is their status?

1.

2.

Nom de l’élève : ............................................... Classe : ........

/1,5

/1

/0,5

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 6 6 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 16•

a. Where are they at the beginning of the text? b. Where are they going?

a. Why was it a special day? Quote one key sentence.

b. What were the main characters’ feelings at that moment? Tick the correct answers and justify them by quoting two verbs from the text.❑ sadness ❑ anger ❑ joy ❑ pain ❑ emotion

What monument did they see first?a. How did people react? Quote three keywords.

b. “People crossed themselves and prayed.” (l.10) On a separate sheet of paper, explain why in your own words. (10 words)c. Then, explain people’s feelings at that moment. (30 words)

a. What struck the narrator? Quote three adjectives.

b. On a separate sheet of paper, explain how the narrator felt at that moment. (20 words)

True or false? Write your answer into the box and justify by quoting from the text.❑ Men and women were separated.

❑ People were given uniforms.

❑ The boats were crowded.

“[People were] transported to a great inspection hall.” (l. 20) a. What is the name of this building? b. What was it? c. Where is it located?

What did these people have to go through? What for? On a separate sheet of paper, explain in your own words and include keywords from the text. (20 words)

a. When did a person receive a chalk mark? Quote the key phrase.

b. Explain what happened in your own words.

“Oh, the wail that went up each time a coat was chalked.” (l. 26-27) What happened to some people? Why? How did they react? (20 words)

a. What happened to the main characters? Rephrase in your own words. (10 words)b. How did they feel? Quote one key element from the text.

3.

4.

5.6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 16 • READING

Total des points /40

/0,5

/0,5

/1

/2

/0,5

/0,75

/2

/4

/0,75

/3

/1

/1

/1

/1

/1

/1

/4

/1

/4

/4

/2

/1

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 17 • 3 6 7

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 17 • LISTENING

/1

/2

/1

/1,5

/3

/1

/1

/2

/1

/2

/1

/1

/2,5

Life in France and Englanda. What can’t Marie find in France?

b. What solution did she find?

c. What groups of people does she mention?

d. Consequence for Marie?

What are the three advantages London has for Marie?

First differencea. What French habits (= habitudes) struck her? Quote two key verbs.

b. Where in particular?

c. What do British people do? When?

Second differencea. What?

b. Two major differences:

c. “No one bats an eyelid”: tick the correct definition. ❑ People make remarks ❑ People are indifferent

❑ People laugh at you ❑ People don’t show any reaction

Third differencea. What?

b. Why? Fill in the grid with keywords only.

The French The British

- -

- -

- -

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Évaluation sommativeÉvaluation sommative

Listen to the conversation and find as much information as possible.

Nom de l’élève : ............................................... Classe : ........

Total des points /20

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 6 8 • FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES 18 - 19 •

FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 18 - 19 • SPEAKING INTERACTION

Identifiez le problème soulevé par ces documents. Discutez-en avec un autre élève en donnant votre opinion, en défendant votre point de vue et en illustrant vos propos par des exemples concrets.

Sujet A

Évaluation sommativeÉvaluation sommative

• Temps de préparation individuel : 5 minutes

• Vous n’aurez droit qu’à des notes.

• Temps de parole : 1 à 2 minutes

•

Sujet B

Campagne WWF, réalisation de l’agence Ogilvy & Mather Kyiv, Ukraine

Dessin satirique de Kirk Walters paru dans

The Toledo Blade, Ohio, 2009

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

© B

urn

/ W

WF /

Ogilv

y &

Math

er

Kyi

v, U

kra

ine

© T

he T

ole

do B

lade, O

hio

/ ©

Kir

k W

alters

, 2

00

9

• FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 20 •3 6 9

FICHE D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE k 20 • WRITING

Évaluation sommativeÉvaluation sommative

You write an e-mail to your British friends to thank them for taking you to the Notting Hill Carnival. Don’t forget to:

- tell them what you enjoyed most and why. - invite them next year to a festival in your area. (40 words)

After three weeks in South Africa you post a note on your blog. You want to tell your friends where you went, what you saw, describe some experiences, give your impres-sions and feelings about the country and the people you met.

(120 - 150 words)

Imagine a story based on this cartoon. Don’t forget to include what happened before this scene (incidents, rela-tionships) and what may happen afterwards.

(120 - 150 words)

1.

2.

3.

Nom de l’élève : ............................................... Classe : ........

Jean-Jacques Sempé, planche tirée de l’album

Rien n’est simple, Éditions Denoël, 1962F

iche p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

© S

em

pé e

t Edit

ions

Denoël,

196

2, 2

00

2

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

3 7 0 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

SPOKEN PRODUCTION> Proposition de corrigé : évaluation sommative du manuel (prise de parole en continu) Ceci est une proposition de corrigé enregistrée au format MP3 et téléchargeable sur le site compagnon. Margaret Tobin, nicknamed Maggie, was born on July the 18th 1867 in Hannibal, Missouri.

Her parents were poor Irish immigrants. In 1885, she found a job in a department store in

Leadville, Colorado. There she met a young engineer called James Brown. They got married

on September the 1st 1886. A year later, their son Lawrence Palmer was born and in 1889,

they had a daughter named Catherine Ellen Brown. In 1893, James Brown became very rich

because he discovered gold, silver and copper in the mine where he worked. The family

moved to Denver, Colorado and bought a new house. Maggie had time and money to learn

languages and music. She did a lot of sight-seeing around the world.

On her way back to America, she survived the Titanic disaster on April the 15th 1912. She

got the nickname ‘Unsinkable Mrs. Brown’ because she was very brave and helped raise

money for the victims. She died on October the 26th 1932 at the age of 65.

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRL : fi ches d'évaluation sommative 13 - 14 (prise de parole en continu)

Compétence Composante évaluée Points PaliersRéalisation de l’exercice et traitement du sujet

Respect de la consigne01

Discours cohérent et organisé

Chronologie respectée

Discours sous forme d’une succession de points

Utilisation de mots de liaison simples (and, but, because,

so…)

01 23

A2A2A2

Production d’un discours cohérent et logique

Utilisation d’énoncés complexes (propositions relatives,

subordonnées en when, where...)

B1B1

Capacité à communiquer

Auditoire souvent ignoré

Discours compréhensible malgré des maladresses

Énoncés courts

Pauses et faux démarrages systématiques

0 12 34

A2A2A2A2

Auditoire pris en compte

Discours facilement compréhensible

Énoncés longs et complexes

Quelques pauses et hésitations

B1B1B1B1

Contenu Nombre d’informations données restreint et peu précis 0 1 2

A2

B1Informations nombreuses, pertinentes et détaillées

MANUEL k P. 56-57

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 362-363

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 7 1

Phonologie Discours compréhensible malgré de nombreuses erreurs

de prononciation, d’accentuation de mot et d’intonation01234

A2

Discours aisément compréhensible car les erreurs de

prononciation, d’accent de mot et d’intonation sont rares

B1

Lexique Vocabulaire adéquat mais limité

Impossibilité de compenser les manques0123

A2A2

Vocabulaire pertinent, riche et varié

Recours à des périphrases si le vocabulaire manque

B1B1

Grammaire Utilisation de structures simples

Erreurs élémentaires très nombreuses 0123

A2A2

Utilisation de structures complexes

Erreurs grammaticales occasionnelles ne gênant pas la

compréhension

B1B1

Total des points /20

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 6 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 7 à 10 points : A2

➼ De 11 à 15 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

READING> Proposition de corrigé : évaluation sommative du manuel (compréhension de l'écrit)Le correcteur acceptera toutes les réponses qu’il juge pertinentes.

Characters present in the scene Characters mentioned in the sceneName and age

Babcia – (elderly woman)

The narrator – (in her twenties)

Tata – (middle-aged)

Stanley Gawrych – (in his late thirties)

Relation the grandmother

her granddaughter

the narrator’s father

the narrator’s future husband

Country Poland America

(0,25 point par bonne réponse pour la catégorie Name and age et Relation – 0,5 point par bonne réponse pour la catégorie Country)

From? The father How? In a letter (0,5 point par bonne réponse) a. “Tata isn’t coming home.” (l. 1) ; “He wants us to come to America!” (l. 1-2)

“Mr. Gawrych has agreed to marry me.” (l. 5) (1 point par bonne réponse) b. Instead of coming back to Poland, the father has decided to stay in America and

make his daughter come. Besides, she will marry a man the father has met in the USA.

(4 points) a. Job: a coal miner (1 point) b. “… Mr. Stanley Gawrych who wants a young bride from the old country.” (l. 2-3) (1 point) c. Mr. Gawrych wants to marry a young Polish girl. (2 points)

2.3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 98-99

1.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

3 7 2 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

The narrator’s five qualities are: young, strong, fit for marriage, good family training, and

[knows] how to take care of a house and a husband. (0,5 point par bonne réponse pour ‘young’ et ‘strong’, 1 point par bonne réponse pour les trois autres)

An agreement was concluded between the narrator’s father and Stanley Gawrych.

(1 point par bonne réponse) Stanley Gawrych will pay for the narrator’s passage to America; in exchange she will be

obliged to marry him although she does not know him or love him. (4 points) a. “I don’t want to be a coal miner’s bride.” (l. 7-8) ;“I don’t want to go to America.” (l. 12-13)

“I don’t want to marry a man I do not love.” (l. 13)

Accepter aussi : “How could Tata have done such a terrible thing? (l. 7)

(1 point par bonne réponse) b. The narrator is both shocked/stunned at the news and revolted because her father

took an important decision without asking for her advice. (2,5 points par sentiment) a. “gasped” (l. 11), “I had shocked my grandmother” (l. 11). (1,5 point par bonne réponse) b. “It is a father’s duty to find his daughter a good husband.” (l. 9) “What does a young girl

know about love?” (l. 14) Accepter aussi : “My father arranged my marriage, and your grandfather arranged your

mother’s marriage. This is the way things are done.” (l. 14-15) (1,5 point par bonne réponse)

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 6 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 7 à 19 points : A2

➼ De 20 à 32 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 32 à 40 points : B1

> Proposition de corrigé : fi che d'évaluation sommative 15(compréhension de l'écrit)

Extrait d’un roman (1 point) Groupe 1 : Indians / the tribe (women, children, Indians) Groupe 2 : Family / Laura’s family (Laura, Mary, Pa, Ma)

(1 point par nom de groupe et 1 point par groupe de personnages) Le soir (“dinner-time”, l. 14) (1 point) Groupe 1 : Indians – dehors : “in the fresh air/ sunshine/ in the wind ” (l. 6-7) Groupe 2 : Family – devant la maison : “in the doorway” (l. 19-20)

(1 point pour les 2 lieux et 1 point pour les expressions) a. Laura (1 point)

b. Des enfants (no bigger than Mary and Laura) (1 point) c. Groupe 1 : ils regardent le spectacle / ce qui se passe “watching”

(1 point pour les 2 actions) Groupe 2 : ils sont à cheval “riding” (1 point pour les 2 justifications)

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.2.

3.4.

5.

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 363-364

Total des points /40

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 7 3

d. Description physique: naked – brown – straight black hair – skin was out in the fresh air

Mode de vie: did not have to wear clothes

(de 0 à 1 mot/expression = 0 point – de 2 à 4 expressions = 0,5 point – 5 expressions = 1 point –citation correcte = 1 point)

e. La fierté (2 points) f. Les hommes voyagent à cheval en premier, suivis par leur famille. Les enfants sont

presque nus et paraissent fiers et libres. Ils ne subissent pas de contrainte sociale et vivent

près de la nature: (The women and children came riding behind the Indian men... the little

Indians did not have to wear clothes) (de 0 à 4 points) a. Se promener nue exposée au vent et au soleil. Être une petite Indienne.

(1 point par bonne réponse) b. Espiègle (1 point) c. Wind, sunshine (1 point par bonne réponse) d. Laura semble fascinée et envieuse de la vie des enfants indiens, qui n’ont pas d’habits.

Ils ont l’air libres et près de la nature. Ils sont aussi traités comme des adultes très tôt.

(de 0 à 2 points) a. Bundles of skins, tent poles, baskets, cooking pots

(0 à 1 mot/expression = 0 point – 2 ou 3 expressions = 1 point – 4 expressions = 2 points) b. West (western edge of the world)

c. Hypothèses: Ils sont nomades. Ils quittent la région. Ils partent en voyage, en migra-

tion saisonnière ; ils viennent d’être battus dans une bataille et s’enfuient pour s’installer

ailleurs. (de 0 à 3 points) d. Le vide (emptiness), le calme (quiet / silence), la solitude (lonely).

(1 point par sentiment avec sa justification) e. Les Indiens quittent la région. Ils sont déplacés de force car ils sont dépossédés de leurs

territoires par l’installation des colons soutenus par l’armée. Les parents et les enfants

compatissent avec ces gens qui souffrent. (de 0 à 4 points)

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 12 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 13 à 20 points : A2

➼ De 21 à 30 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

> Proposition de corrigé : fi che d'évaluation sommative 16 (compréhension de l'écrit)

a. The main characters are the narrator (a woman), Jozeph and Leon. (0,5 point par réponse) b. The narrator might be Leon’s wife and Jozeph might be their son.

(1 point, accepter toute autre réponse possible) They are immigrants. (0,5 point) a. At the beginning of the text, they are on a boat. (0,5 point) b. They are going to America. (0,5 point)

6.

7.

1.

2.3.

Total des points /40

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 365-366

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

3 7 4 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

a. It was a special day because they finally arrived in New York. (l. 6) “Land! It was

America.” (1 point) b. The main characters felt joy and emotion at that moment. “I hugged Jozeph and started to

cry. I spotted Leon, and he grinned and nodded.” (l. 6-7) (2 points) The monument they saw first was the Statue of Liberty. (0,5 point) a. People were moved. “cheers, laughter, crying” (0,25 point par mot trouvé) b. They wanted to thank God because they had finally fulfilled their dreams and

achieved their goal. (2 points)

c. People were glad because they had reached the land of plenty, the land of

opportunity. They were deeply moved because they had left everything behind them (native

country, family) to start from scratch. (4 points) a. The narrator was struck by the “sad, lonesome, mournful” face of the Statue

of Liberty. (0,25 point par mot trouvé) b. The narrator felt sad/miserable and worried because she wondered what was

in store for her, what America was like. (3 points) a. T (l. 18) “Men here! Women there!” (1 point) b. F (l. 19-20) “Identification tags were pinned onto our clothing” (1 point) c. T (l. 19) “we were herded onto a smaller boat” (1 point) a. Ellis Island. (1 point) b. It was the Immigration Processing Centre. (1 point) c. It is located on Ellis Island, an island opposite Liberty Island. (1 point) In order to become American citizens, these people had to go through both a legal

inspection: (their “papers” were “checked”), and a medical examination: (their

“eyelids were pulled up”, their “chests and backs thumped”, their “legs and fingers,

hair and scalp examined. They even measured the beating of [their] hearts”.) (4 points) a. A person received a chalk mark “When a doctor found something suspicious”. (l. 25)

(1 point) b. Each time the doctors thought that a person was sick/had health problems, they put a

chalk mark on their clothes. Consequently this person was sent to a hospital where he/she

had to undergo further medical exams or receive medical treatment. (4 points) Some people wailed/moaned because they knew that as the doctors found

“redness of the eyes, or lameness, or a cough”, they would be sent back to their

native country. (4 points) a. The main characters were healthy so they were allowed to enter the country. (2 points) b. They felt relieved. (l. 28) “To our great relief, there was no chalk mark for Jozeph,

Leon or me”. (1 point)

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 12 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 13 à 20 points : A2

➼ De 21 à 30 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

4.

5.6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Total des points /40

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 7 5

MANUEL k P. 140-141 LISTENING> Script de l’enregistrement et proposition de corrigé : évaluation sommative du manuel (compréhension de l'oral)Interviewer: Could you introduce yourself and tell us where you live?

Marie Macklin: Hello, my name is Marie Macklin, I’m 21 and I was born in London. I’ve

lived in London half my life, and in Somerset, near Bath. I lived in London till I was nine and

then I moved to Somerset and I’ve lived there ever since. I live in the countryside in Somer-

set and we have a big house. It’s in the southwest of England.

Interviewer: What about your parents?

Marie Macklin: We grow vegetables and fruit and we have several orchards. And we also

keep sheep. They mainly eat the grass and we sell the lambs as well. I also have six cats

and one dog. And yeap! that’s a big, pink house. There’s a city near where I live called Wells

and that’s where I went to school. It’s a music school so I was able to sing a lot and also I

played the viola so I did that in a few orchestras and also in balls.

Interviewer: What is the nearest city? What is special about it?

Marie Macklin: Wells also has a lovely cathedral and I sang there a lot as well as a

chorister ... I sang there every day and we had about two or three services a week in the

cathedral. Wells is in fact the smallest city in Europe, so they say, and also near where I live

there’s a city called Glastonbury which is famous for the Glastonbury Festival which takes

place every summer in June and I usually go.

Ceci est une proposition de corrigé. a. Marie (0,5 point) b. Macklin (0,5 point) c. She is 21 years old. (0,5 point) d. She was born in London. (0,5 point) e. She lived in London until she was 9 (and then she moved to Somerset). (2 points) f. She lives in Somerset with her parents. She lives in a big, pink house. She lives in the countryside. She lives in the southwest of England. (8 points) g. She has six cats and one dog. (2 points) a. Her parents have orchards and sheep. They have fruit and vegetables too. (2 points) b. They must be farmers. They raise sheep. (3 points) a. She went to school in Wells. (2 points) b. She went to a music school. (3 points) c. She studied singing and she learned how to play the viola. (3 points) a. In her free time she sang in choirs./She was a chorister. (2 points) b. She sang in a cathedral. (3 points) c. She practised every day. (3 points) a. Wells – Glastonbury (1 point par bonne réponse) b. Wells is the smallest city in Europe. (1,5 point) Glastonbury is famous for its festival which takes place every year in June. (1,5 point)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Total des points /40

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

3 7 6 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

> Script de l’enregistrement et proposition de corrigé : fi che d’évaluation sommative 17 (compréhension de l'oral)Interviewer: What do you most miss about England?

Marie: And yeah! What do I most miss about England? I miss tea... I miss a good cup of

tea! The tea bags here aren’t the same as there. I had to bring them all over from home.

And I also miss my family and friends, of course. Lots of my friends from school now live

in London and I can see them more easily when I’m there, so I miss them. And also I only

live... my family’s home is only two hours from London so... it’s easy to see my family when

I’m in England as well.

Interviewer: What other things do you miss about England?

Marie: Other things I miss about England? I miss London. I love London as a city. There’s

always loads to do and I always miss the singing opportunities in London as well, and also

the choirs. There are so many choirs in London I can sing with. So I miss that.

Interviewer: How different are British people from French people?

Marie: My first impression was the French greet each other a lot more. They acknowledge

each other a lot more than the English do. When you go into the shops in Paris, everyone

says “Bonjour !”, “Au revoir !”, in England it’s not the same and also French people kiss

each other whereas the English don’t really do that unless they are very close friends.

Interviewer: Did any other aspects strike you?

Marie: The English however, seem to have a more varied style than the French. In England

you can wear whatever you like and no one bats an eyelid, especially where I lived last year

in Camden. And the French appreciate and enjoy food more, I think. Yes, the French enjoy

cooking and using more quality ingredients, whereas the British are a lot more inclined to

just... I don’t know... they don’t have time and get the cheaper option... I don’t know. They

don’t really enjoy food as much as the French do, I think.

Ceci est une proposition de corrigé. a. She can’t find tea bags. (1 point) b. She decided to bring them all over from England. (2 points) c. She mentions her friends and family. (0,5 point par bonne réponse) d. She misses them because she is in France and far away from them. (1,5 point) There are loads to do in London. She misses the singing opportunities.

She misses the choirs she can sing with. (3 points) a. greet each other a lot – kiss each other a lot (0,5 point par bonne réponse) b. They greet each other in shops. (1 point) c. British people kiss when they are close friends. (2 points) a. She talks about clothes. (1 point) b. The English have a more varied style. They can wear whatever they like. (2 points) c. “No one bats an eyelid”: People don’t show any reaction. (1 point) a. She talks about cooking. English people are inclined to cook less. (1 point) b. The French: they enjoy food and cooking; they buy more quality ingredients.

The British: they don’t have time; they get the cheaper option; they don’t enjoy food as

much as the French do. (2,5 points)

1.

2.

3.

4

5.

Total des points /20

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 367

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 7 7

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 5 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 5 à 9 points : A2

➼ De 10 à 14 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

SPEAKING INTERACTION> Proposition de corrigé : évaluation sommative du manuel (prise de parole en interaction)

a. To my mind ... / In my opinion ... / I feel ...

b. In other words ... / To sum up, I’d say ...

c. I quite agree with you on this point. / That’s quite right. / Absolutely!

d. I disagree with you. / I don’t see it that way. / Certainly not!

e. Can you repeat what you said, please? / Sorry, I didn’t get that. / What exactly do you mean?

f. For instance ... / Let me give you an example. / In other words, ...

g. Sorry to interrupt you, but ... / Can I just say something?

Productions possibles How weird! This is weird! The guy looks cute but his two hands are disgusting! It is scary,

frightening and really strange.

Dans le cadre d’une classe fragile ou si un groupe d’élèves est plus fragile, on pourra leur

fournir cette aide lexicale et les inciter à trouver les adjectifs qui correspondent le mieux à

leurs réactions.

a. intriguing threatening = menacing unusual

frightening = scary disgusting surprising

peculiar: bizarre / curieux gloomy: sombre amusing

mysterious odd = strange provoking

disturbing impressive: impressionnant oppressive

b. Productions possibles The two hairy hands make the man look half-human half-animal. He looks both prehistoric and

modern. The mixture of the two attracts our attention and makes us feel ill at ease. When we

notice the logo we realize this is an awareness campaign against deforestation. Deforestation

has an impact on animals and species. Many species are endangered and on the verge of

extinction. The goal of the advertisers is to alert us and sensitize us to the state of the planet.

The advertisers resort to a visual device to make us aware of the link between our daily acts

and deforestation. They have resorted to a shock tactic to make us aware of the impending

disaster, of an acute problem, of the threat / danger, of the impact of deforestation of the

rain forest on some species and mankind.

They want to alert us / sensitize us, shock us into awareness. The message conveyed is

clear: it’s high time we acted. We are on the brink of disaster, if we don’t act now we are

doomed. We are all concerned. They want to frighten us into acting and reacting. Man’s life is

at stake.

Écouter l’enregistrement sur le site compagnon.

1.

2.

3.

MANUEL k P. 182-183

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

3 7 8 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

> Proposition de corrigé Une proposition de corrigé pour les deux sujets est à écouter sur le site compagnon.

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRL : fi ches d'évaluation sommative 18 - 19(prise de parole en interaction)

Compétences Composante évaluées Points Paliers

Interaction Peut lancer, poursuivre et clore un bref échange

Peut poursuivre un échange, a parfois besoin d’aide

Prend l’initiative, mène l’échange et répond de façon

pertinente en étoffant ses réponses

Capacité à négocier pour aboutir à un choix en fin

d’échange

01 23 4

A2A2B1

B1

Capacité à communiquer

Auditoire souvent ignoré

Discours compréhensible malgré des maladresses

Énoncés courts

Nombreuses pauses

Auditoire pris en compte

Discours facilement compréhensible

Énoncés longs et complexes

Quelques pauses et hésitations

012 34

A2A2A2A2B1B1B1B1

Phonologie Discours compréhensible malgré de nombreuses erreurs

de prononciation, d’accentuation de mot et d’intonation

Discours aisément compréhensible car les erreurs de

prononciation, d’accent de mot et d’intonation sont rares

01234

A2

B1

Lexique Vocabulaire adéquat mais limité

Impossibilité de compenser les manques

Vocabulaire pertinent, riche et varié

Recours à des périphrases si le vocabulaire manque

01234

A2A2B1B1

Grammaire Utilisation de structures simples

Erreurs élémentaires très nombreuses

Utilisation de structures complexes

Erreurs grammaticales occasionnelles qui ne gênent pas

la compréhension

01234

A2A2B1B1

Total des points /20

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ Moins de 6 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 7 et 10 points : A2

➼ De 11 et 15 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 368

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 7 9

WRITING> Proposition de corrigé : évaluation sommative du manuel (expression écrite)

Ceci est une proposition de corrigé. Email Hi,

Sorry to disturb you, but I’ve lost all my notes on South Africa. I’ve looked everywhere but

I can’t find them. Would you mind lending me your notes? I promise I won’t keep them;

I’ll photocopy them and return them as soon as possible. Can I come and pick them up

tonight?

Thanks a lot,

Bye for now, Karen Ann

Appalling concert Last night I went to a rotten concert. The theatre was crowded, people kept screaming

because the singers were late and we were kept waiting. Then several mikes broke down

and nobody could hear anything. We started shouting and some spectators got very angry.

I was so fed up with the whole thing that I left. What a waste of money!

a. My New Year’s resolutions In January I made up my mind. I decided I would be more active, I would start jogging twice

a week. To make sure I will stick to my schedule I will run with two of my friends.

Who wants to join us?

b. Invictus I’ve just seen Invictus, Clint Eastwood’s latest film. Awesome! It relates a true story. To

unite a country torn by Apartheid Mandela gave a mission to the Springboks: to win the

1995 Rugby World Cup. The film is full of emotion. Morgan Freeman’s performance is tre-

mendous. It’s one of the best sports films of the decade. Go and see it!

I was sleeping when the phone rang in the middle of the night. I was scared to death!

I jumped out of bed, ran to the living-room and I imagined the worst. Who could wake us up

at such an hour? What had happened? I picked up the phone anxiously. I suddenly heard

the voice of Lisa, my American friend. She was overjoyed and wanted to tell the world she

was getting married. She asked me to be her bridesmaid. I congratulated her warmly and

promised to come over for the wedding. I managed to speak English even if I felt so sleepy.

The door closed and Pamela realized she was a prisoner. She had been invited to spend

a few days in the Duke’s castle. The Duke admired her very much because she was a

famous opera singer. She knew he was in love with her. Pamela felt panic-stricken. How

could she escape? Had the Duke kidnapped her to persuade her to marry him? She would

never agree to marry a man she didn’t love, even though he had a huge fortune. Suddenly,

she heard a noise. Two men were fighting outside the room: Erik, her childhood friend and

the Duke. Suddenly she heard a scream. The Duke was dead. Pamela ran into her friend’s

arms.

An old woman was walking in the park pushing her cart which was full of bags. She sat on a bench next to me and we started talking. She was eighty, her hair was white, she

looked very tired. She told me the story of her life. At twenty she was an actress and

married to a very rich man. Fifteen years later he fell in love with another woman and

she got divorced. She found a job, worked for many years. Then she lost her job and was

homeless. She didn’t want me to give her any money. She said she didn’t need much.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

MANUEL k P. 226-227

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

3 8 0 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

> Proposition de corrigé : fi che d'évaluation sommative 20 (expression écrite)

Ceci est une proposition de corrigé pour la fiche d'évaluation sommative 20 distribuée par le professeur.

Hi everybody,

Thank you ever so much for taking me to the Notting Hill Carnival last August! It was so kind

of you to make me discover Caribbean culture. I was fascinated by the beautiful costumes.

They were so colourful. I’m very fond of drums and music and I had a great time. What

about coming to Paris next year in July to see many artists during the Solidays?

I’m looking forward to hearing from you soon.

Love, Kevin

I had a wonderful time in South Africa where I spent three weeks. I visited Soweto, a black

township outside Johannesburg. I even stayed in a bed and breakfast there. It was small

and very clean, the people were very friendly and welcoming. We talked for hours about the

apartheid regime and the Soweto riots. The owners were teenagers at that time and de-

monstrated against the government decision to force students to learn Afrikaans at school.

They described the fights where many people died or were arrested. They advised us to

visit Hector Pieterson’s museum, which we did. A large museum stands two blocks away

from where Hector Pieterson was shot to death. Fortunately things have changed since the

dismantling of Apartheid. We also went to Robben Island where Mandela was imprisoned

for so many years. It was really moving. Then, we explored Kruger National Park, amazing!

The landscapes were breathtaking, the wild animals were numerous and impressive. This

was real Africa! We also admired the bushmen’s rock paintings. Awesome! Unforgettable!

Mr Bennet had been married to Mrs Bennet for about forty years. Mr Bennet had been ma-

dly in love first. However, over the years he realized he couldn’t stand his wife nagging him

all the time. She kept him waiting for hours, she wanted him to obey instantly: “You’re at my

beck and call” was her favourite expression. She was very demanding but never thanked

him. He was very patient and quiet, never dared to contradict Mrs Bennet.

Mrs Bennet wished she had married a man she could admire, she also dreamt of being free.

One day they went to the seaside. They were standing on the edge of a cliff. They were both

thinking of the quickest way of getting rid of each other. The husband felt like pushing his

wife off the cliff, he looked forward to seeing her corpse lying on the bottom rocks. The wife

knew she might be pushed, but she was smart and set a trap. As soon as she heard her

husband running, she stood still. When he got very near she knelt down. Her husband hit

the rocks and died instantly. However, the old lady had not seen there was a witness lying

behind the bush. The husband had foreseen everything. He died knowing his horrible wife

would rot in prison.

1.

2.

3.

FICHIER PÉDAGOGIQUE k P. 369

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL• 3 8 1

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRL (exercice 1)

Compétences Composante évaluée Points Paliers Réalisation de l’exercice et traitement du sujet

Respect de la consigne

Présentation

Écriture et soin

012

Respect de la forme de l’e-mail

Formule d’introduction

Formule de closure

01 2

Contenu du mail

Formule de remerciements

Expression de l’intérêt

Justification de cet intérêt

Invitation pour l’année prochaine

0 1 2 34

Texte cohérent et organisé

Succession de points

Utilisation de mots de liaison simples (and, but, because)

Texte articulé

Utilisation d’énoncés complexes (propositions relatives,

subordonnées en when, whereas...)

0 1 2

A2 A2

B1B1

Lexique Vocabulaire limité

Lexique riche et varié

01 23 4

A2B1

Grammaire Utilisation de structures simples

Erreurs élémentaires encore systématiques

Correction grammaticale suffisante

Erreurs occasionnelles ne gênant pas la compréhension

01 23 4

A2A2B1B1

Prise de risque Richesse de l’expression 0 1 2

Total des points /20

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ Moins de 6 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 7 et 10 points : A2

➼ De 11 et 15 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ Au-delà : B1

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL – FICHES D'ÉVALUATION SOMMATIVE

3 8 2 • CORRIGÉS ET GRILLES CECRL

> Grille d’évaluation du CECRL (exercices 2 et 3)Compétences Composante évaluée Points Paliers

Réalisation de l’exercice et traitement du sujet

Respect de la consigne

Présentation

Écriture et soin

012

Récit cohérent et organisé

Chronologie du récit respectée

Description sous forme d’une succession de points

Utilisation de mots de liaison simples (and, but,

because)

01234 5

A2 A2 A2

Texte articulé

Utilisation d’énoncés complexes (propositions

relatives, subordonnées en when, whereas...)

B1B1

Lexique Vocabulaire limité permettant de rédiger un court

récit

Lexique riche et varié permettant de raconter

l’histoire

01234 5

A2

B1

Grammaire Utilisation de structures simples

Erreurs élémentaires encore systématiques

Correction grammaticale suffisante

Erreurs occasionnelles ne gênant pas

la compréhension

0 12 3 4 5

A2A2B1B1

Prise de risque Idées

Richesse de l’expression

0 1 23

Total des points (pour chaque exercice) /20

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 20 mots : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 21 à 40 mots : A2

➼ De 41 à 70 mots : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 71 à 120 mots : B1

> Critères de répartition en niveaux de compétences ➼ De 0 à 10 points : A2 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 10 à 20 points : A2

➼ De 20 à 35 points : B1 en cours d’acquisition

➼ De 35 à 45 points : B1

➼ Au-delà : en route pour B2

Total des points (exercices 1 à 3) /60

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

Reading corner(fi ches photocopiables)

MANUEL k P. 228-231

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 1 • READING CORNER

3 8 4 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 1 • READING CORNER

This is my land

➼ READ PART 1 (FROM THE BEGINNING TO LINE 46)

Who is the main character?

What period of time in American history does the story refer to?● Civil War ● American Revolution ● Vietnam War ● Conquest of the West

Locate on the map the region where the main character is going.

On a separate sheet of paper, match each drawing with quotations from the text

1.

2.

3.

4.

➼ READ PART 2 (FROM LINE 47 TO 81)

The incident: Fill in the blanks with keywords only.Origins?

Who? How many members? Where? The white man’s reaction?

The native American’s reaction and feelings?

Mary’s reaction?

5.

b. c. d.a.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 1 • READING CORNER• 3 8 5

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 1 • READING CORNER

The decision a. What does he decide? Quote.

b. Who is hired (engagé)? How much will he be paid? What is he hired for? Give a quotation for each answer.

➼ READ PART 3 (FROM LINE 82 TO THE END)

What has happened? Quote keywords from the text.

ObjectsThe victims

Family The man

–

–

There are six mistakes in the following summary. On a separate sheet of paper, underline them and write down the correct phrases or sentences.The man had been wounded in the head. He wasn’t bleeding much. Henry tore the Indian’s

trousers to stop the blood and tried to comfort him. Both the wife and Henry lifted the Indian

onto the horse and rushed to the doctor’s.

The main character’s evolution:

What was his vision of Native Americans at the beginning of the story from line 1 to 10? Quote keywords only.

What are the main character’s feelings towards the Indians at the end of the story? Quote keywords only.

The end of the story: Match the adjectives with either the white man or the Indian.guilty • • remorseful

resentful • The white man • compassionate

distant • • helpful

ungrateful • The Indian • adamant (inflexible)

caring • • cold

considerate • • unforgiving

indifferent •

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

MANUEL k P. 232

3 8 6 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 2 • READING CORNER

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 2 • READING CORNER

Ations Lisez ces mots à haute voix. Quel son ont-ils en commun ?

meet • feel • each • scream • these

a. Quel suffixe les mots suivants ont-ils en commun ? Entourez la voyelle de la syllabe accentuée (utilisez un dictionnaire si nécessaire).

salutation • consideration • conversation • communication • altercation • reconciliation

• cooperation • civilization • exaggeration

b. Concluez.Le suffixe - indique la place de l’accent. L’accent tombe sur la syllabe qui

le .

Entourez la voyelle de la syllabe accentuée dans ces mots (utilisez un dictionnaire si nécessaire).understand • argue • wonderful • apologize

Lisez le poème à haute voix en marquant bien les liaisons consonnes-voyelles.

a. À la fin de chaque vers l’intonation est-elle montante o ou descendante a ? If we meet and I say, “Hi,”

That’s a salutation.

If you ask me how I feel,

That’s consideration.

If we stop and talk a while,

That’s a conversation.

If we understand each other,

That’s communication.

If we argue, scream and fight,

b. Qu’en déduisez-vous ? – Lorsqu’un message n’est pas terminé, l’intonation reste .

– Lorsqu’un message est terminé, l’intonation est .

– Dans une yes / no question l’intonation est .

Récitez le poème à haute voix par groupes de deux. Le premier élève apprendra les vers 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, ainsi que les deux derniers. Le second dira les réponses, de manière à ce que le poème soit lu comme une conversation entre deux personnes.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

That’s an altercation.

If later we apologize,

That’s reconciliation.

If we help each other home,

That’s cooperation.

And all these actions added up

Make civilization.

(And if I say this is a wonderful poem,

Is that exaggeration?)

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

MANUEL k P. 233-234

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 3 • READING CORNER

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 3• READING CORNER• 3 8 7

The landlady

➼ FACTS

Where are Billy and the woman?

What are they doing? Pick out words related to this activity.

What does the reader learn about the woman? Quote elements from the text.a. Occupation:

b. Physical appearance (2 elements): –

c. Elements underlining the woman is polite and welcoming:

d. Pets: How many? What?

Find the age of:Billy: Christopher Mulholland: . Gregory Temple:

Pick out phrases related to Mr Mulholland’s, Mr Temple’s and Billy’s physical appea-rance. On a separate sheet of paper, write them down in a table.

What do these three men have in common?

Pick out two sentences revealing what the two names remind Billy of.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

3 8 8 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 3 • READING CORNER

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 3 • READING CORNER

➼ INTRIGUING ELEMENTS

The text has been divided into three parts. On a separate sheet of paper, draw a table as shown below and list the puzzling elements in each part. Then give a possible explanation for each of them.

Puzzling elements Possible explanationPart 1from the beginning to “… corri-

dors of a hospital.” (l.10)

- -

Part 2from “Mr Mulholland” to “like a

baby’s.” (l. 32)

- -

Part 3from “There was a pause...”

(l.33) to the end.

- -

➼ YOUR CONCLUSIONS

The guests and the pets

What happened to the pets?

What happened to the two guests?

What clues led you to this conclusion?

“I stuff all my little pets.” (l.53) What does the word “all” refer to?

What will happen to Billy?

The landlady

Who is the landlady? Complete the following sentences:

Apparently the woman is

In reality she is

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

MANUEL k P. 235-237

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 4 • READING CORNER

Father Find the narrator’s name and probable age group.

List the characters present at the beginning and at the end of the text.

List all the other characters mentioned in the text.

Beginning:

End:

In what country does the scene take place? Tick the correct answer.● India ● Ireland ● South Africa ● New Zealand

a. What does the narrator’s father do? Quote one or two keywords.

b. What social class does the narrator belong to?● working class ● middle class ● upper class

Justify with three elements from the text.

The black man: Which drawing best corresponds to the description given in the text?

Justify with keywords from the text.

What has the black man come for? Quote two key sentences.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 4 • READING CORNER• 3 8 9

a. b. c.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 4 • READING CORNER

3 9 0 • FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE 4 • READING CORNER

From line 24 to line 33: Where does the narrator go? What for? How does the narrator’s father react?

Where? What for? Reaction of the narrator’s father?

–

–

–

Among the following adjectives, tick the three adjectives that best apply to the father when he deals with the black man.● understanding ● indifferent ● contemptuous ● helpful

● sympathetic ● polite ● dismissive

Justify each adjective with a quotation from the text.

The evolution of the narrator towards his / her father. a. Compare his / her feelings at the beginning of the story and at the end. Quote.

Feelings at the beginning Feelings at the end

b. What are the reasons for his / her change in attitude?

7.

8.

9.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

MANUEL k P. 238-239

MANUEL k P. 240-241

Wuthering Heights Where and when does the scene take place?

What lines are repeated?

a. Who is speaking?

b. Who is the narrator speaking to?

c. Where is the narrator exactly?

What do the following quotations have in common? What do they express? Fill in the missing headings.

When I needed to possess you (l. 6)

Let me grab your soul away (l. 32 and 34)

Too long I roamed in the night (l. 23)

It gets lonely

On the other side from you

I pine a lot, I find the lot

Falls through without you (l. 16-19)

I hated you, I loved you too (l. 7)

My only master (l. 22)

The living dead Après avoir lu le texte, complétez ce résumé.

Épuisé, Lockwood mais est agité. Soudain, il se réveille en

sursaut au bruit d’un branchage . Dans un demi-

sommeil, il tente en passant la main .

À sa grande surprise, s’empare de

la sienne, et la voix plaintive de le presse

de . Pour de cette apparition,

Lockwood frotte le poignet du spectre sur le tranchant de

la vitre brisée jusqu’à ce que du lit.

sa proie. Lockwood

livres. Mais les livres et Lockwood se met .

À ce cri, Heathcliff où Lockwood, terrorisé, .

Heathcliff commence et . Mais le fantôme

pas.

1.

2.

3.

FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES 5 - 6 • READING CORNER• 3 9 1

FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES k 5 - 6 • READING CORNERFic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS DE LA FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 1MANUEL k P. 228-231

3 9 2 • CORRIGÉS READING CORNER

CORRIGÉS DE LA FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 1

This is my land The main character is Henry Page, a settler.

The story refers to the period of the Conquest of the

West.

the Middle West (see map opposite)

a. “... set off with their wagon train across the wide

prairies of the Middle West.” (l. 1)

b. “You put down a marker post every hour and you could

have as much land as you could mark off in twenty-four

hours.” (l. 15)

+ “... he had managed to mark off the whole valley.” (l. 21)

c. “... he got an axe and a saw, a sack of nails, and a hammer. He set to work to clear a

space by the river and built himself a small log cabin.” (l. 25)

d. “... Henry set to work to build a really nice house, with a garden and stables and a barn.

He began to farm the land and the soil was good. […] He sowed corn...” (l. 39-41)

Origins? “... fish hadn’t been coming down the river...” (l. 48); “something must be

blocking” (l. 48)

Who? an Indian family

How many members? Five members (man, wife and three children)

Where? the waterfall / where the river ran into the valley / where the river was narrow

The white man’s reaction? “my land” / “my fish” (l. 57) / spoken to them like all the other

Whites ; “frowned” (l. 61) + “You go...” (l. 63)

The native American’s reaction and feeling? “my people’s land” (l. 60); hatred

Mary’s reaction? “We are all alone out here,” (l. 69)

a. “Henry went into Black River Bend and bought two more Winchesters and a large amount

of ammunition.” (l. 71)

b. A “trapper” (l. 76), “Luke” (l. 79) is hired.

He will be paid “ten dollars” (l. 74) to “move’em on” (l. 76).

ObjectsThe victims

Family The man

– “a blazing tent” (l. 83)

– “the fishing net was ripped

into pieces.” (l. 83)

– “woman stood” (l. 84)

– “children huddled around

her” (l. 84)

– “the man’s body” (l. 86)

– “the fallen Indian” (l. 88)

– “had a gaping wound”

(l. 88)

– “not dead, though he

had lost much blood”

(l. 89)

The man had been wounded in the head. k “in his side” (l. 88)

He wasn’t bleeding much. k “had lost much blood” (l. 89)

Henry tore the Indian’s trousers to stop the blood k “the sleeve from his own shirt” (l. 90)

and tried to comfort him. k “to stop the bleeding” (l. 91)

Both the wife and Henry lifted the Indian onto the horse k “he lifted the man” (l. 93)

and rushed to the doctor’s. k “towards his house” (l. 94)

1.2.

3.4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

MANUEL k P. 232

CORRIGÉS READING CORNER• 3 9 3

CORRIGÉS DES FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES k 1 - 2

What was his vision of native Americans at the beginning of the story from line 1 to 10? Quote keywords only.

What are the main character’s feelings towards the Indians at the end of the story? Quote keywords only.

– “thin and unhappy” (l. 5)

– “living on scraps of food” (l. 6)

– “working for the white settlers / worst

jobs” (l. 6)

– “spending what little money they got on

cheap whisky / drunk” (l. 7)

– “poor, ignorant savages” (l. 9)

– “ashamed” (l. 87)

– “shaking like a leaf” (l. 92)

– “tried his best to be friendly” (l. 101)

The white man: guilty • caring • considerate • remorseful • compassionate • helpful

The Indian: resentful • distant • ungrateful • indifferent • adamant • cold • unforgiving

Ations Ces mots ont en commun le son \i…\. a. Ces mots ont en commun le suffixe -ion.

salutation • consideration • conversation • communication • altercation • reconciliation •

cooperation • civilization • exaggeration

b. Le suffixe -ion indique la place de l’accent. L’accent tombe sur la syllabe qui précède le

suffixe.

understand • argue • wonderful • apologize

If we meet and say, “Hi,” If later we apologize,

That’s a salutation. That’s reconciliation.

If you ask me how I feel, If we help each other home,

That’s consideration. That’s cooperation.

If we stop and talk a while, And all these actions added up

That’s a conversation. Make civilization.

If we understand each other, (And if I say this is a wonderful poem,

That’s communication. Is that exaggeration?)

If we argue, scream and fight,

That’s an altercation.

a. If we meet and I say, “Hi, o If later we apologize, o

That’s a salutation. a That’s reconciliation. a

If you ask me how I feel, o If we help each other home, o

That’s consideration. a That’s cooperation. a

If we stop and talk a while, o And all these actions added up o

That’s a conversation. a Make civilization. a

If we understand each other, o (And if I say this is a wonderful poem, o

That’s communication. a Is that exaggeration?) o

If we argue, scream and fight, o

That’s an altercation. a

b. – Lorsqu’un message n’est pas terminé, l’intonation reste montante.

– Lorsqu’un message est terminé, l’intonation est descendante.

– Dans une yes / no question l’intonation est montante.

9.

10.

1.2.

3.4.

5.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS DE LA FICHE PHOTOCOPIABLE k 3MANUEL k P. 233-234

3 9 4 • CORRIGÉS READING CORNER

The landlady

A. FACTS

Billy and the woman are sitting in the living room, in the Bed and Breakfast run by the lady.

They are drinking tea. “She placed his teacup on the table in front of him.” (l. 1-2) “Billy

started sipping his tea.” (l. 4) “watching him over the rim of her teacup.” (l. 6-7) “Billy

picked up his teacup and took another sip of tea; then he set it down again gently in its

saucer.” (l. 33-34) “Will you have another cup of tea?” (l. 54)

a. She is the landlady: “Billy set down his cup […], and stared at his landlady.” (l.18)

b. She is a little woman: “stared with deep admiration at the little woman beside him on the

sofa” (l.51). She has got white hands : “... she put out one of her white hands ...” (l.19)

c. The woman is polite and welcoming. “She placed his teacup on the table in front of him.”

(l. 1-2) “She smiled back at him, and then she put out one of her white hands and patted him

comfortingly on the knee. ‘How old are you, my dear?’ she asked.” (l. 18-20)

“... inclining her head slightly to the left, she looked up at him out of the corners of her eyes

and gave him another gentle little smile.” (l. 64-65)

d. She has got two pets: a parrot (“‘That parrot,’ he said at last.” (l. 37)) and a dachshund

(“‘And you have met my little Basil as well?’ She nodded towards the dachshund curled up so

comfortably in front of the fire.” (l. 44-45))

Billy is seventeen. Christopher Mulholland is seventeen too. Gregory Temple is twenty-eight.

Pick out phrases related to Mr Mulholland’s, Mr Temple’s and Billy’s physical appearance.

Mr Mulholland: “But I think he was a trifle shorter than you are, in fact I’m sure he was, ...”

(l. 23); “... and his teeth weren’t quite so white.” (l. 24)

Mr Temple: “Mr Temple, of course, was a little older, ...”(l. 28); “There wasn’t a blemish on

his body.” (l. 30); “His skin was just like a baby’s.” (l. 32)

Billy: “You have the most beautiful teeth ...” (l. 24); “They’re not as good as they look, ...” (l.

26); “They’ve got simply masses of fillings in them at the back.” (l. 26-27)

The three men are quite young. They look tall and they are probably handsome.

“He was still puzzling his head about the two names.” (l. 13)

“He was positive now that he had seen them in the newspapers – in the headlines.” (l. 14-15)

B. INTRIGUING ELEMENTS

Puzzling elements Possible explanationPart 1from the beginning

to “… corridors of a

hospital.” (l. 10)

- “... he caught a whiff of a

peculiar smell [...] Or was it the

corridors of a hospital?” (l. 9-10)

- The smell that emanates from the

landlady must be the smell of the

products she uses to stuff animals.

Part 2from

“Mr Mulholland”

(l. 11) to “like a

baby’s.” (l. 32)

- “He was still puzzling his head

about the two names. […] he had

seen them in the newspapers – in

the headlines.” (l. 13)

- “They’re on the fourth floor, both

of them together.” (l. 17)

- “Oh, it’s the perfect age!” (l. 22)

- “There wasn’t a blemish on his

body.” (l. 30)

- Billy has already seen the two names

in the newspapers because they must

have been reported missing and the

news has hit the headlines.

- The two young men are still in the

B&B because they are kept prisoners.

- The landlady is keen on young men.

- She must have seen the young man

naked to comment on his skin.

1.2.

3.

4.5.

6.7.

8.Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS READING CORNER• 3 9 5

CORRIGÉS DES FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES k 3 - 4

Part 3from “There was a

pause ...” (l. 33) to

the end.

- “I did.” (l. 42)

- “I stuff all my little pets myself

when they pass away.”(l. 53)

- “The tea tasted faintly of bitter

almonds, ...” (l. 55)

- She is a taxidermist.

- She stuffs all the pets she likes

when they die (including the young

men) so they can keep her company.

- She must have poisoned the tea.

She may have used arsenic.

C. YOUR CONCLUSIONS

The pets have been stuffed by the landlady.

The guests must have been stuffed too after being poisoned by the landlady.

There was a strange smell emanating from the landlady that Billy associated with the smell

of the corridors of a hospital. It might be the smell of the products used to kill animals.

The landlady said Mr Temple’s skin was perfect, without any blemish, like a baby’s skin,

which suggests she has seen him naked. Probably when she stuffed him.

Billy’s tea had a strange taste. The landlady must have poisoned his tea - as she had done

with Mr Mulholland’s and Mr Temple’s teas - to kill him. Then she could stuff the three

young men easily.

“all” refers to the pets and the three young men. She compares the young men to her

favourite animals.

Billy must already have been poisoned. The landlady will probably stuff him as she has done

with her pets and other guests.

Apparently the woman is a nice, friendly lady who is caring and careful. She is welcoming

and polite, and looks after her guests very well.

In reality she is a taxidermist and above all a serial killer, a poisoner and a murderer!

> Prolongements possiblesRole play: Billy Weaver is reported missing by his family. Inspector Blake has investigated

the case and is convinced the landlady is guilty. He interrogates her to make her confess

her crimes. Play out the scene in front of the class.

Newspaper article: The landlady has just been arrested. You are a journalist and write an

article to report her crimes and the investigation. (120-150 words)

Father The narrator’s name is Kristien (l. 25) and she is a child who must be about ten.

Characters present at the beginning and at the end of the text.Beginning: the narrator • a black man in rags and tatters • Mother • Anna

End: the narrator • her father • the black man

Other characters mentioned in the text: the black man’s baas (master) •

the servants • Blacks • the police

South Africa.

a. The narrator’s father is a magistrate: “the magistrate”, “courtroom”, “a trial” (l. 1)

b. upper class: “the magistrate” (l. 1), “while he was playing golf” (l. 6), “for the servants” (l. 19)

Drawing c.: “in such rags and tatters” / “could see parts of his bare body right through

them” / “his baggy trousers tied to his thin waist with string” / “the front fastened with an

inadequate safety pin” (l. 7-9)

9.10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

1.2.

3.4.

5.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

MANUEL k P. 235-237

CORRIGÉS DES FICHES PHOTOCOPIABLES k 4 - 5 - 6

3 9 6 • CORRIGÉS READING CORNER

He has come to ask for justice, to be defended against his cruel master.

“his baas, he said, had beaten him” (l. 15)

“he wanted justice” (l. 16)

Where? What for? Reaction of the narrator’s father?

– the garage (l. 24)

– the house (l. 26)

– the bedroom

(l. 28)

– “to tell him about

the man” (l. 24)

– to remind her father

about the man’s

presence (l. 29)

– tried to shake the narrator off (l. 25)

– ignored the man / walked right past

the man (l. 26)

– was ready to dismiss the narrator (l. 29)

Indifferent: “he walked right past the man” (l. 26)

Contemptuous: “making no attempt to hide his displeasure” (l. 34)

Dismissive: “This is their business, not mine.” (l. 39) / “Now go away.” (l. 43)

a. Feelings at the beginning: “immensely proud” (l. 4)

Feelings at the end: angry: “I don’t understand you! I shouted” (l. 45); sad / upset: “tears”

(l. 46); disgusted / sick: “vomited in the toilets” (l. 48)

b. The narrator has realized that his / her father is an insensitive, indifferent man who is

prejudiced against Blacks, blind to the plight of Blacks. She is disgusted, outraged and

upset by her father’s attitude.

Wuthering Heights The scene takes place out on the moors at night / nightfall.

“Heathcliff, it’s me, Cathy, I’ve come home. I’m so cold, let me in your window” (l. 12-15,

27-30, 36-39)

a. Cathy is speaking. b. She’s talking to Heathcliff, her lover.

c. The narrator is outside on the moors. She has come back to Wuthering Heights.

Possession: When I needed to possess you (l. 6); Let me grab your soul away (l. 32 and 34)

Separation: Too long I roamed in the night (l. 23); It gets lonely; On the other side from

you; I pine a lot, I find the lot ; Falls through without you (l. 16-19)

Feelings / Passion: I hated you, I loved you too (l. 7); My only master (l. 22)

The living deadÉpuisé, Lockwood essaye de dormir mais est agité. Soudain, il se réveille en sursaut au bruit

d’un branchage qui l’importune / le dérange / vient cogner à sa fenêtre. Dans un demi-

sommeil, il tente d’attraper le branchage en passant la main à travers la fenêtre. À sa grande

surprise, une main aux doigts glacés s’empare de la sienne, et la voix plaintive de Catherine Linton le presse de la laisser rentrer. Pour se débarrasser de cette apparition, Lockwood

frotte le poignet du spectre d’avant en arrière sur le tranchant de la vitre brisée jusqu’à ce

que le sang se mette à couler sur les draps du lit. La main du spectre relâche sa proie.

Lockwood fait un rempart avec des livres. Mais les livres sont renversés / s’écroulent et

Lockwood se met à crier. À ce cri, Heathcliff se précipite dans la chambre où Lockwood,

terrorisé, essaye de le rassurer. Heathcliff commence à l’interroger et supplie le fantôme de Catherine de rentrer. Mais le fantôme ne répond pas.

6.

7.

8.

9.

1.2.

3.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

MANUEL k P. 238-239

MANUEL k P. 240-241

Art project(corrigé)

CORRIGÉS ART PROJECT

3 9 8 • CORRIGÉS

Seasons in New YorkPour traiter cette double page et aboutir à la mini-tâche, un travail en groupes (2 ou plus)

est préconisé. Les différents groupes se concentrent sur un seul tableau et répondent aux

questions 1) a. b. c. en s’aidant de la rubrique Help!

Un rapporteur dans chaque groupe prendra la parole pour faire une synthèse du travail.

Puis un débat pourra être organisé entre les élèves pour aborder la question 2, A calendar

(mini-tâche).

a. In the first painting, the scene takes place in Central Park, in New York during the summer.

Although the park is crowded, the atmosphere is peaceful. People look relaxed and light-

hearted. They are smartly-dressed and they must have gone for a walk because the weather

is sunny/fine. Some people are sitting on a bench, talking. Some are strolling along the

paths. Others are in horse carriages, driving around the whole park. The colours are bright

and this creates a sense of cheerfulness.

b. This/these painting(s) remind(s) me of paintings by Renoir or Monet.

c. Indeed, both painters painted scenes of everyday life. The scenes they painted could be

set in natural or urban landscapes. Moreover in this/these painting(s) we can recognize the

technique used by Renoir or Monet. Both painters relied on sketchiness/sketchy outlines and

patchiness to convey the experience of the rapid movement or variety in a scene. In order to

avoid the smooth finish of traditional painting, they used broad brushstrokes which produced

a blurred effect and conveyed a sense of liveliness.

If I had to choose a painting, I would choose the painting by Robert Henri because in my

opinion, it best represents New York City at the turn of the 20th century.

At that time the city was developing and becoming the tallest city in the world.

In this canvas the height is suggested through the numerous vertical lines of the huge buil-

dings and of the street lamp that is right in the middle.

I don’t agree with you. To me, the most representative painting of New York is Central Park

because Central Park is an icon of New York.

Er ... um ... Central Park is still an icon, even in the twenty-first century!

Don’t forget that New York is the city that never sleeps! Activity best symbolizes this city,

especially at the turn of the twentieth century.

I agree with you. I feel that although there is a snowstorm, people are still on the move and

keep working. They are plodding through the snow and yet they seem to be active and busy,

which is the best definition of New York.

The broad brushstrokes probably help create this sense of movement. That’s why I prefer the

second painting by Robert Henri.

1.

2.

MANUEL k P. 242-243

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ART PROJECT

CORRIGÉS • 3 9 9

A city of steel > Mise en œuvre Travail en groupes : chaque groupe traitera un aspect du document question a., b., c.

Travail en groupe classe : une mise en commun sera réalisée à partir de la prise de parole

du rapporteur de chaque groupe.

> Prolongement recommandé On renverra les élèves aux sites suivants pour un travail plus approfondi sur l’architecture

des gratte-ciels : http://inventors.about.com/library/inventors/blskyscapers.htm et

http://www.madehow.com/Volume-6/Skyscraper.html

On donnera ce travail à faire à la maison, au CDI ou au labo multimédia, s’il y en a un dans l’éta-

blissement. Ce travail de recherche servira à réaliser la mini-tâche de la page 245 du manuel.

a. This document is a photograph taken by Charles C. Ebbets in the USA, in 1932, a few

years after the 1929 financial crisis/during the Great Depression. The construction site

which was photographed was the one of the Rockefeller Centre in New York City.

On the photo, we can see several blue-collar workers who are sitting on a steel beam at

the top of a skyscraper. The photo must have been taken during the workers’ break, at lunch

time because we can see their lunch boxes. Their feet are dangling in the void/emptiness and below them we can recognize Central Park so we know the picture was snapped in New

York City. They are resting and look really relaxed (they are chatting and smoking).They do

not seem to be afraid of heights/they do not feel dizzy at all.

b. We know that after the 1929 financial crash, many workers were unemployed/jobless.

Some wealthy businessmen like Rockefeller decided to invest their money in construction sites in order to boost the American economy. Skilled workers who were not afraid of heights were hired to build skyscrapers. They were not reluctant to risk their lives provided

they had a job and a little money to support their families. At that time employers were totally

regardless of safety rules; that’s why it is not surprising that the workers in the photo should

wear no safety harnesses. Blue-collar workers were ready to work for very low wages as

long as they had a job. Although the working conditions were often strenuous/difficult/hard, workers were eager to have a job.

c. To me/As far as I’m concerned, I think the photographer wanted to glorify the economic

power of the USA despite the 1929 crash. He relied on a high angle-shot to show how tall

and high the New York skyscrapers were. The blurred background underlined/emphasized

the towering aspect of the skyscraper. The whole effect gave/conveyed an impression of

power. The effect produced conveyed the impression that skyscrapers (like the economy)

were soaring.

> Mise en œuvre Avant d’écouter l’enregistrement les élèves répondront à la question b.

> Corrigé b. dynamism – canvases – fractured – kaleidoscope – stained – glass

Les élèves écouteront l’enregistrement plusieurs fois et relèveront les dates, les noms

propres dans un premier temps puis tous les mots porteurs de sens qu’ils entendront.

Ils utiliseront les éléments repérés pour pouvoir traiter la correction 3, Oral account, à l’aide

des amorces de phrases proposées dans le manuel (correction ci-après).

> Script de l’enregistrement – Now what famous monument of New York can you recognize in this painting?

– Brooklyn Bridge, of course!

1.

2.

MANUEL k P. 244-245

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ART PROJECT

4 0 0 • CORRIGÉS

– And Joseph Stella (who was born in Italy in 1877 and died in 1946) named his painting,

which is part of a series of five related canvases, dating from 1920-1922: The Voice of the

City of New York Interpreted: The Bridge.

– Why “The Voice of the City of New York”?

– Well ... because to Joseph Stella, Brooklyn Bridge best represented New York. The main

part of the painting focuses on this architectural modern icon with its famous Gothic

arches, its maze of cables and wires, its pedestrian walkway and in the background the

breathtaking prospect of Manhattan skyscrapers. To Joseph Stella the conventions of tra-

ditional painting seemed powerless / failed to convey the dynamism of modernity, techno-

logy, machines and life in the city. That’s why he converted to Futurism, an Italian artistic

movement in the beginning of the 20th century, which relied on fractured, colourful and

abstract fragments to capture the complexities and energy of the machine age. Hence the

technique used by Joseph Stella when he depicted the monument through a large variety of

shapes and colours that remind us of a kaleidoscope or a stained-glass window to suggest

the richness and diversity of New York.

Joseph Stella was born in Italy in 1877 and he died in 1946. The painting dates back to the

beginning of the twentieth century. We do not know exactly when it was painted because

it was part of a series of five-related canvases. This period corresponds to the time when

the Futurist movement developed. Like the members of the Futurist movement, Joseph

Stella glorified the dynamism of modernity, technology, machines and the city. He believed

the conventions of traditional painting failed to capture the complexities and energy of

the machine age. That is why the canvas includes an architectural modern icon (Brooklyn

Bridge) with its Gothic arches, its maze of cables and wires and its pedestrian walkways. Jo-

seph Stella was convinced that by using fractured, colourful and abstract fragments, which

remind us of a kaleidoscope or a stained-glass window, he could convey the richness and

diversity of New York City.

> Mise en œuvre Cette activité de synthèse à l’écrit pourra être réalisée à la maison ou en classe en groupes.

Les élèves s’aideront des recherches qu’ils auront effectuées sur l’architecture de New York.

> Proposition de corrigé At the beginning of the twentieth century, New York City was famous all over the world

because its architecture — embodied by its skyscrapers — glorified the American indus-

trial, financial, economic and cultural power as we realized when we studied the photo by

Charles C. Ebbets. Indeed, the building of skyscrapers was made possible thanks to several

important technological advances. First in the 1850s, safe elevators were invented, which

enabled architects to design high towers. In the 1880s, engineers invented mass-produced

steel (an alloy / mixture / blend of iron and carbon) inexpensively. Therefore it was now

possible to build a steel structure / frame / skeleton of vertical columns and horizontal

beams so the outside walls did not support the weight of the whole building. The walls no

longer needed to be thick. Architects resorted to glass, aluminium or stainless steel, marble

or granite for the exterior walls. Consequently tall skyscrapers could be constructed. Finally

reinforced concrete was an important component of skyscrapers because it helped resist

tremendous wind forces that could cause motion and discomfort for the people living or

working in skyscrapers. Several other innovations like central heating or the telephone

helped transform the American skylines at the turn of the twentieth century. Joseph Stella’s

way of painting and subjects symbolize this modernity.

3.

4.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ART PROJECT

CORRIGÉS • 4 0 1

Neighbourhoods Le professeur fera observer le tableau Little Italy de Red Grooms pendant 30 secondes

puis la classe fermera les livres. On peut s’attendre à ce que les élèves mentionnent :

a. Les personages : a fat woman, a naked woman, a bear, a lady with a pram/ a mother,

a passer-by…

Les objets : a car, a restaurant sign, a trash can, a pot of flowers, birds…

b. La météo : a blue sky, some clouds, a hot summer's day

c. La localisation: in the foreground / background, on the right / left, in the middle /

centre…

On engagera les élèves à faire des prises de parole en continu dès que possible.

> Productions possibles In this painting the weather is fine; it certainly is a hot summer's day and the sky is all

blue but for a few clouds. The characters are wearing summer clothes and I can even see

a naked woman at her window in the top left-hand corner. On the opposite side, there is

a weird woman (or is it a man?) wearing a hairnet. In the foreground a lady is crossing the

street with her pram. She is just stepping on the pavement / sidewalk.

a. Colours: red, yellow and orange

b. Impression of: vitality, crowds, movement, dynamism, chaos

c. Activities: relax, look at, overlook, watch, gaze, stare at, cross the street, walk, go for a

walk, walk a dog / a child, stroll, drive a car, shop / go shopping

d. Little Italy, Manhattan

> Productions possiblesWhat strikes me first when I look at this painting are the bright colours. Red, yellow and

orange are the dominant shades. This reinforces my first impression of vitality and move-

ment: indeed, the people are busy walking, driving or shopping. There is a crowd in the

centre and the street is bustling with life. The oversized lady on the right and the bear

crossing the street emphasize the chaos of the scene. The dense traffic makes me think of

a frantic Italian traffic jam. I must admit I didn’t immediately think of New York when I dis-

covered the painting. Yet the fire escapes on the façades/sides of the building are typical

of downtown Manhattan. Just the same, there is a yellow cab right in the middle.

Naïve and realistic (lack of proportion or perspective, bright contrasting colours, childlike

simplicity, scenes with animals…)

a. How true to life! It’s so much like a photograph! It’s so realistic! It can’t be a painting! It must be an old photograph!This painting is strikingly realistic. The car parked on the left looks like an oldie from the

sixties. How typical of a view of New York to show a Coca Cola billboard!

Yet I think it is a dehumanized world of concrete which doesn’t appeal to me because I

would rather live in the countryside.

b. Estes is a photo-realist because his painting is both very realistic and looks like a pho-

tograph. Indeed, I can clearly see the shadows of the buildings contrasting with the bright

street. The scene is true to life; every detail is shown, from the huge billboards, the skys-

crapers, the shop windows, the traffic lights to the different shades of the street tarmac…

He portrays a typical New York street. The viewer immediately recognizes the city. It is very

close to reality because this urban scene looks very familiar.

c. Le professeur fera recopier le passage sur papier libre. Il demandera aux élèves de pro-

céder comme pour les autres lectures oralisées du manuel.

1.

2.

3.

4.

MANUEL k P. 246-247

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ART PROJECT

4 0 2 • CORRIGÉS

- Marquer les pauses de respiration.

- Souligner les mots porteurs.

- Faire apparaître les liaisons entre les mots porteurs et les formes faibles.

Prepare your task

> Productions possibles You are now in front of Red Grooms’ famous painting entitled Little Italy. This colourful

painting enlightens the whole room with its joyful New York summer street.

As for Red Grooms, he is a prolific, contemporary artist whose work appeals to all sorts of

art fans. He was born in Nashville, Tennessee in 1937, and began his artistic career while

at school. In 1957 Grooms moved to New York City to be near his favourite subject-matter.

The vibrant colour of his hair earned him the name “Red”. His first major work, The City

of Chicago, was a large, colourful, satirical view of city life, and it was a tremendous hit

with the public. It earned him a cover article in Look magazine, in 1967. During the 1970s,

Grooms painted the Big Apple again and again. He tried to make the viewers feel the sights,

sounds, smells and shapes of America’s biggest cosmopolitan city.

Let’s go back to Little Italy; indeed, have a close look … Do you notice this merry crowd

of ethnic diversity. Don’t you feel dizzy? You are looking down onto a city street from a

very exaggerated perspective. Buildings seem to tilt in towards the street with angled fire

escapes dangling dangerously over a street filled with cars and people. Everything is out of

proportion, from the enormous character on the right-hand side to the giant blue dog in the

middle of the zebra crossing. What a fantastic painting!

5.

- How does Estes // find the subject matter // for his paintings? � /���������������������������������������������������������i/

- He just wanders around //and looks at things //. He takes a lot of pictures // if something /�/ � /a�/ � � � � �

strikes him // and he thinks it’s interesting //. And he really didn’t want to do things // just out /ai/ � � /i:/ � � of his mind //, to make up things //. /ai/ �

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ART PROJECT

CORRIGÉS • 4 0 3

The city that never sleeps > Mise en œuvreTravail par pairwork ou par groupe sur le tableau. Un rapporteur par groupe est désigné. Un

rapporteur prend la parole, on procède ensuite à une reprise collective. Selon le niveau de

la classe, les élèves les plus solides pourront construire seuls leur trace écrite, les élèves

les plus fragiles pourront compléter le texte à trous fourni p. 248 dans le manuel.

> Guidage possible du travail de groupe What elements immediately strike you? Why?

What are your first reactions to the painting?

What time of day is it?

What angle shot is used by the painter and why? What is the effect on the viewer?

What buildings were chosen? What are they symbolic of?

Do you like this painting? Why? Why not?

Imagine that this painting is a book cover… What kind of story would it illustrate?

What kind of music would you associate with painting? Why?

This painting shows two skyscrapers at night. It relies on geometric design. This painting

looks dark, gloomy and fascinating at the same time. The low-angle shot was chosen to

convey an impression of height and power, to reinforce the vertical lines of the compo-

sition. The viewer feels tiny compared to the huge and imposing skyscrapers that are

reaching for the sky. The only ray of light comes from the moon. The world of concrete

represented here looks cold and inhuman. No human presence can be noticed. The skys-

crapers may represent the economic power of big corporations. People live and work in a

metallic and deserted world. It conveys the impression that streets are canyons and that

people are overpowered.

> Prolongement possible Le travail de recherche sur Georgia O’Keefe qui peut donner lieu à une prise de parole en

continu d’un élève: http://www.okeeffemuseum.org e et http://www.lkwdpl.org/wihohio/

okee-geo.htm

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: Hello Potter. Potter Guifford, you’re an art expert on Hopper. Nighthawks is your

favourite painting by Hopper. Tell us why.

Potter Guiffrod: I love this painting because the scene takes place late at night in New

York. The light attracts our eyes. The bar becomes a focal point because the streets around

are deserted and empty. These people are looking for some comfort. The bar becomes a

shelter for lonely people. Light is important. The painting is based on a contrast between a

dark street and a brightly-lit café.

Journalist: Who are the people represented?

Potter Guifford: Four characters are in a café: a red-haired woman, aged about thirty, wea-

ring a bright-red dress; two men are wearing dark suits and hats. They are silently having a

late-night drink. Neither of the three patrons is talking. They don’t seem to be talking to one

another. The street looks deserted. Darkness surrounds them. The bar is the only sign of

life. The painting conveys the impression they aIl look dejected and gloomy.

Journalist: Is solitude the dominant theme?

Potter Guifford: Yes, definitely. They all seem to be lost in their dreams, to be very lone-

some. We are struck by silence and desolation. The atmosphere is stifling, everything is

lifeless. Only the woman seems to be alive. The characters are cut off from one another.

1.

2.

MANUEL k P. 248-249

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS ART PROJECT

4 0 4 • CORRIGÉS

They are strangers, they are worlds apart. Obviously they don’t communicate. These people

want to escape their monotonous life.

Journalist: Who can these people be?

Potter Guifford: Well, it all depends on your imagination. The woman is heavily made-up

and looks like a hooker: she is hot.

This scene reminds me of “The Big Sleep”, with Humphrey Bogart. The man may be a de-

tective, or a spy. The woman may attract him and then trap him.

Or we can imagine she may have been jilted by her lover.

Or the couple may be in love.

Or the woman may have sneaked out to see her lover. She may want to discuss something

with him in an anonymous place.

Or they may have been to a boring party and may have left earlier.

Anyway, the customers try to find a refuge, are trying to escape the sadness and melan-

choly of city life.

Journalist: Thank you, that was fascinating.

Ce travail de recherche sur Hopper aura le double avantage de faire connaître l’artiste et de

faire découvrir plusieurs tableaux du peintre. Il pourra donner lieu à un travail, soit au labo-

ratoire multimédia, soit à un travail à la maison avec prise de notes, prise de parole devant

la classe et pause récapitulative. Les élèves se serviront des notes prises pour rédiger la

biographie de Hopper (4 Write a biography).

Cette activité de synthèse à l’écrit pourra être réalisée à la maison ou en classe, individuel-

lement ou en groupes.

> Proposition de corrigéEdward Hopper (1882-1967) was a realist who portrayed America, common America.

Hopper’s subjects were the city, the small town and the countryside. He mainly focused on

people’s everyday life. That’s why he painted hotel rooms, bars, offices and restaurants. In

all these anonymous places he captured silent moments. Many of these places are quiet

and empty. What dominates is a sense of isolation. In the 1930’s and 1940’s he insisted on

the lack of communication, the solitude of people who live in big cities.

Your task at the end of this project

> Proposition de corrigéMy favourite painting is Room in New York. This scene is portrayed through the eyes of a

passer-by who is glancing at the window. The scene takes place at dusk.

It represents a middle-class couple seen from the outside. It is an everyday scene.

First, we are struck by the contrast between the warm colours and the cold atmosphere

conveyed by the painter. The husband and the wife are sitting on either side of the table,

which suggests they are worlds apart.

The man is reading the newspaper. He doesn’t care a damn about his wife, pays no atten-

tion to her. He is cut off from her, and is indifferent to her.

The woman is pretending to play the piano, because she wants to attract his attention.

She looks bored, frustrated and gloomy. She is waiting for a sign from her husband.

It underlines the boredom of her life. These people are strangers; they don’t communicate.

The characters have no special features; their faces are blurred. They could represent an

average couple. The passer- by can easily identify with these characters.

3.

4.

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

Renforcement lexical(corrigé)

CORRIGÉS RENFORCEMENT LEXICAL

4 0 6 • CORRIGÉS

Unit 1 - Song of myselfActivities: hum, rehearse, write, play, record

Places: concert, studio, bar, ball, disco, opera

People: orchestra, composer, singer, conductor, drummer, guitar player, cello player,

saxophonist, pianist, trumpet player

Creations: lyrics, song, melody, tune, chorus, line, stanza, score

Autres réponses possibles: Activities: play an instrument, read music, sing, sing a song, a tune, sing in a choir, compose,

write lyrics, play alone, play in an orchestra, play in a band, play live, record a CD,

give a performance, give a concert, audience

Places: Concert Hall, street, home, recording studio, on stage

People: a violinist, a group leader, a performer, a composer, a guitarist, a fiddler

Creations: album, musical, song

Unit 2 - Hall of Fame1. heavy 2. upset 3. deep 4. dreadful 5. noisy 6. savoury 7. slim 8. confident

Unit 3 - Make a Wishoptimistic ≠ pessimistic hopeful ≠ hopeless, desperate exciting ≠ boring, dull

generous ≠ stingy idealistic ≠ realistic strong ≠ weak

broad-minded ≠ narrow-minded

Unit 4 - HeroesPhysical description Personalitystrong���muscular, athletic brave���daring, adventurous, fearless

nice���good-looking, handsome, attractive active���energetic, enterprising

Life Involvementdangerous���risky, eventful generous���devoted, caring, selfless

sad���miserable, dreadful concerned���committed, determined, dedicated

lucky���successful, fortunate

Unit 5 - City of Glass Dreams of an immigrant

opportunity – determined – achieve – park – future – emigrate – integrate into – fulfil –

foreigner – hopeful

Arrival at Ellis Island maze – soulless – flashy billboards – hustle and bustle – hectic – dehumanized – get lost –

gloomy – passport – anonymous – depressing – dizzy

Sightseeing, museum monument – culture – visit – museums – tourism – harbour - audio-guide – ticket – wheel-

chair access – queuing – heritage – entertainment

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS RENFORCEMENT LEXICAL

CORRIGÉS• 4 0 7

Unit 6 - Wild Wild Westgive a chronology: after that (ensuite), suddenly (soudain), later on (puis/plus tard), then (puis/alors)

express cause: because (parce que), thanks to (grâce à)

introduce examples: for example (par exemple), such as (tel que)

express opposition: but (mais), on the contrary (au contraire), whereas (alors que/tandis que)

conclude: so (donc/ainsi), eventually (plus tard/finalement), at last (enfin)

begin: to start with (tout d'abord), first of all (d'abord/ tout d'abord)

express consequence: that’s why (c'est pourquoi), therefore (donc/par conséquent),

consequently (donc/par conséquent)

add new elements: also (aussi), besides (de plus/en outre/d'ailleurs)

Unit 7 - Robot Dreamsa. Elvex felt miserable when he realized robots worked too much.

➙ Elvex felt miserable when he realized robots were overworked .

b. Human beings can be really weak when confronted with a robot with no soul.➙ Human beings can be really weak when confronted with a soulless robot.

c. Robots can be very useful when your house is in a mess.

➙ Robots can be very useful when your house is all messy.

d. Dr Calvin must have feared Elvex’s reactions when she realized he acted as a human being.

➙Dr Calvin must have felt fearful about Elvex’s reactions when she realized he acted as a

human being.

Unit 8 - True Brits1. amazed at/by 2. worried about, surprised at/by, confused at/ by 3. shocked at/ by the prices in the shop windows 4. interested in, satisfied with, excited by 5. scared of, tired of

Unit 9 - Destination Liverpool1. liner 2. tobacco 3. concert 4. passenger

5. supporter 6. referee 7. audience 8. enslavement

Merseyside Maritime Museum: liner, passenger

International Slavery Museum: tobacco, enslavement

Liverpool Football Club: supporter, referee

The Beatles Story: concert, audience

Unit 10 - Life is ArtVerbe Nom

criticize

standardize

consume

recognize

possess

criticism

standardization

consumption

recognition

possession

Nom Adjectif

geometry

luxury

need

wealth

reality

success

geometrical

luxurious

needy

wealthy

realistic

successful

Adjectif Verbe

resigned

revolting

resign

revolt

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

CORRIGÉS RENFORCEMENT LEXICAL

4 0 8 • CORRIGÉS

Unit 11 - A world of geeks a. addicted to = hooked on, glued to b. harmless ≠ harmful, noxious, hazardous

c. isolated = remote, distant, far d. sociable ≠ unsociable, lonely, ill at ease, shy

e. noisy = calm, quiet, silent f. preposterous = irrelevant, absurd, nonsensical, foolish

Unit 12 - Mother Earth oil spill - oil supply - oil shortage rubbish dump nuclear waste

water supply - water shortage mass murder

Unit 13 - All The world’s a stage1. obedient 2. submissive 3. authoritative 4. inquisitive 5. careful/careless

6. cautious 7. hesitant 8. contemptuous 9. scornful 10. aristocratic

Unit 14 - A mind to murderCrime Investigation Defence

weapon - aggressor - blood

- blackmailer - stab

shadow - sleuth - description - mug shot -

fingerprints - testimony - DNA - track

court - witness

- alibi - lawyer

Unit 15 - Over the Rainbow Steve Biko was one of South Africa’s most famous political activists. He dedicated all his life to

fighting against apartheid, poverty and unemployment. While he was at medical school Biko

started denouncing the injustice of the apartheid regime. He couldn’t stand social and economic

discrimination because it was unfair. He realized that Blacks living in townships, that is to say

very poor neighbourhoods, were treated as second-class citizens. He believed he lived in a dic-tatorship because Afrikaners were ready to crush any rebellion or demonstration brutally. One

day he was caught, imprisoned, was tortured in detention and died during his interrogation. His

death was a violation of Human Rights.

Unit 16 - Jamaican Colours of London1. Contraires: enthusiastic ≠ disillusioned happy ≠ miserable

ususual ≠ common

lifeless ≠ lively employment ≠ unemployed2. Équivalents: enormous = huge

awful = dreadful/ appalling

intriguing = puzzling/ weird

isolated = left out surprising = unexpected welcome = greet big = tall, high, huge, large, enormous, gigantic…

beautiful = colourful, striking, gorgeous, wonderful, fantastic…

good =great, exciting, pleasant, enjoyable, memorable… Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

- ©

Hati

er

2010

Exploitation du DVD-Rom

Exploitation du DVD-Rom● Le DVD-Rom contient une partie VIDEOUn menu donne

Un sous-menu donne accès à la version de votre choix

accès aux documents.

�

�

(avec ou sans sous-titres en anglais).

Certains documents sont chapitrés (en 2 ou 3 séquences). Vous pouvez vous repérer facilement grâce au numéro en haut à droite de l’image.

Pour passer d’une séquence à l’autre, appuyez sur la touche « saut de chapitre » de votre télécommande �.

● Et une partie ROM

1 télé-réalité4 reportage5 documentaire6 documentaire7 fi ction8 émission culinaire9 publicité12 publicités13 reportage14 fi ction15 fi ction

NB. Les corrigés des fi ches se trouvent dans la partie Rom du DVD et sur le site de la collection.

�

Sommaire

LdP.indd 368 09/07/09 15:36

4 1 0 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

Meeting point 2de •LIVRET DVD

IntroductionLes 12 documents authentiques sont en lien étroit avec les thèmes des unités du manuel et peu-vent aussi servir de base à des projets pédagogiques distincts, mettant en place les activités langagières décrites dans le Cadre Européen (CECRL).

1. La vidéo : un support de travail motivant, exigeant, incontournable

La vidéo fait partie intégrante de la vie des adolescents de nos jours et devient un support privilégié. Les documents authentiques ont aussi l’avantage de montrer une réalité culturelle et de l’illustrer de façon vivante.

Avec la vidéo, les élèves s’habituent à rechercher l’essentiel du message, à bâtir du sens en s’appuyant sur les éléments connus, sur les images, le contexte, les mots-clés. Ils établissent des liens entre paroles et images. La vidéo permet de développer des stratégies d’écoute, facilement transférables à d’autres supports. En outre, la vidéo permet de travailler les expres-sions du visage, les gestes, le non-verbal, si importants dans la communication.

La séance vidéo est parfois perçue comme une « séance télé » par nos élèves. C’est aussi un média très fugitif, ce qui peut poser des problèmes de mémorisation, dès que le document est un peu long : nous avons donc choisi des extraits assez courts accompagnés de fi ches pour guider l’élève.

2. Les différentes phases de travail

Les fi ches proposées servent à l’entraînement et sont construites sur le schéma suivant : une phase d’anticipation lorsque cela est nécessaire, le repérage des éléments-clés puis le classe-ment de ces éléments, afi n de construire ainsi le sens.

- Activités d’anticipation : l’anticipation peut être phonologique : lire des transcriptions phonéti-ques, les associer aux mots écrits, etc. – ou lexicale, à partir d’un document iconographique.

- Visionnage et découverte du document : le découpage en séquences (matérialisées par les petits numéros en haut à droite de l’écran) permet de fractionner l’approche et de collecter les informations par étapes successives.

Le document peut être vu une fois dans son entier pour permettre un premier repérage.

On peut aussi adopter des approches très variées : visionnage muet (images sans le son) ou écou-te de la bande-son (son sans images) ; visionnage ciblé (on divise la classe en groupes et chaque groupe se voit confi er une tâche bien précise ; un rapporteur présente ce qui a été compris, vu et entendu ; les autres élèves du même groupe complètent ou enrichissent ; le reste de la classe prend des notes) ; arrêt sur images (l’étude d’images fi xes extraites des documents permet de mieux analyser les attitudes des personnages et d’accéder ainsi à l’implicite).- Version sous-titrée en anglais : elle pourra dans certains cas être utilisée pour des passages jugés diffi ciles. De manière générale cependant, les sous-titres ne peuvent venir qu’en dernier lieu, lorsque l’élève a déjà fait l’effort de s’appuyer sur les images, sur les mots porteurs de sens, sur le non-verbal, et lorsqu’il a épuisé toutes ses stratégies d’écoute. - Exploitation du script : le script peut être distribué après l’élucidation. Il permet de travailler la langue, mettre en place un travail phonologique précis, donner lieu à une lecture à haute voix ou à une mise en scène.

Nous vous souhaitons de bonnes séances vidéo !Les auteurs

Sans titre-1 369 18/07/09 15:12:03

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 1 1

4 1 2 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

UNIT

1 Meeting point 2de •

Poor Little Rich Girls

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT :

DURÉE : SOURCE :DATE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : Song of myself

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

(Classical music)VOICE-OVER:

SUSIE MONEY:

(=sports car)

JULES CUNNINGHAM: nada

(Modern music)

VOICE-OVER:

JULES: VOICE-OVER: JULES: SPEEDY (SINGING): JULES:

VOICE-OVER: SUSIE: JULES: SUSIE: JULES:

SEQUENCE 2

(Text on screen: The Swap)JULES (LAUGHING): SUSIE:

JULES:

LdP.indd 370 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 1 3

VOICE-OVER:

SUSIE’S DAD: SUSIE:

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

Fiche 1 Understanding the video

LdP.indd 371 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 1 4 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

UNIT

4 Meeting point 2de •

Mountain Gorillas

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : DURÉE : SOURCE : DATE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : Heroes,

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

REPORTER:

SEQUENCE 2

SEQUENCE 3

LdP.indd 372 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 1 5

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

National Geographic

Gorillas in the Mist

Dian Fossey Gorilla Fund

Heroesheroes

earthkeepers

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

1.

2. Fiche 1« Understanding the video »

3.

4. Fiche 2 Language at work

LdP.indd 373 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 1 6 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

UNIT

5 Meeting point 2de •

The Journey

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : The Journey: The Greek American Dream

DURÉE : SOURCE : DATE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : City of Glass

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

GEORGE TSELOS (ELLIS ISLAND ARCHIVIST):

SEQUENCE 2

ALEXANDER KITROEFF (HISTORIAN):

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

LdP.indd 374 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 1 7

UNIT

6

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

Fiche 1 Understanding the video

1.

2.

Imagine how the immigrants felt when they fi rst discovered New York and its multi-ethnic population.

Lewis and Clark

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : DURÉE : SOURCE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : Wild Wild West,

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

NARRATOR:

SEQUENCE 2

LdP.indd 375 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 1 8 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

Meeting point 2de •

SEQUENCE 3

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

webquest

National Geographic

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

Fiche 1 Understanding the video

1.

2.

3.

4. Fiche 2 Language at work past perfect

LdP.indd 376 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 1 9

UNIT

7 Meeting point 2de •

Modern Times

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : Modern Times

DURÉE : DATE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : Robot dreams,

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

THE BOSS TO A FACTORY WORKER :(TO A WORKER PLAYED BY CHAPLIN :

SEQUENCE 2

THE VOICE ON THE RECORD:

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

taylorism fordismDistinguish the blue collar from the white

LdP.indd 377 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 2 0 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

UNIT

8

Meeting point 2de •

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

Fiche 1 Understanding the video

1.

Recap

2.

Marco’s Great British Feast

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : DURÉE : SOURCE :DATE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : True Brits,

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

MARCO PIERRE WHITE:

NARRATOR (VOICE-OVER): MARCO: NARRATOR: MARCO:

NARRATOR: MARCO: MAN DINER (TASTING :

LdP.indd 378 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 2 1

MARCO (TALKING TO YOUNG COOKS):WOMAN DINER (TASTING): MARCO: NARRATOR:

MARCO:

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

Lifestyle

Raising the fl ag on Iwo Jima

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

Fiche 1 Understanding the video

1.

2.

Dear White Fella

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT :DURÉE : SOURCE : DATE : LIENS AVEC LE MANUEL : Destination Liverpool,

OBJECTIFS :

UNIT

9

LdP.indd 379 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 2 2 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

Meeting point 2de •

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

NARRATOR, VOICE-OVER:

SEQUENCE 2

Text on screen:

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

–

–

– Pomp and Circumstances Othello

Marches Pride, pomp and circumstance of glorious war

Orange mécanique A clockwork Orangegraduations

–

Show Racism the Red Card

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

1. Understanding the video Fiche 1

2.

3. Act it Out Fiche 2

LdP.indd 380 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 2 3

Two commercials

Commercial 1 It all comes back to you

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : DURÉE : SOURCE :

DATE : LIENS AVEC LE MANUEL : Mother Earth

OBJECTIFS : cartoons

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

It all comes back to you. www.connect2earth.org

Commercial 2 What does your car say about you?

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : DURÉE : SOURCE : DATE : LIENS AVEC LE MANUEL & OBJECTIFS :

UNIT

12 Meeting point 2de •

LdP.indd 381 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 2 4 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

Meeting point 2de •

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

SEQUENCE 2

The city gas guzzler. What does your car say about you? Greenpeace - greenpeace.org.uk

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

Keep Britain Tidy Campaigns

Global warming

An unconvenient truth About the fi lm Watch the trailer

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

Fiche 1 Understanding the video

LdP.indd 382 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 2 5

Shakespeare in a Supermarket

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT :

DURÉE : SOURCE : DATE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : All the world’s a stage

OBJECTIFS : a performance

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

REPORTER:

ACTRESS IN WEDDING DRESS: ACTOR (CHRIS) (WHISPERING): ACTRESS IN WEDDING DRESS: ACTOR (CHRIS) IN SAINSBURY’ STAFF’S CLOTHES: ACTRESS IN WEDDING DRESS: ACTOR (CHRIS): ACTRESS: ACTOR (CHRIS): (BUMPING INTO A SHOPPER) ACTRESS: ACTOR (CHRIS): REPORTER:

SEQUENCE 2

TEATRO VIVO’S SPOKESMAN:

ACTRESS:

REPORTER:

WOMAN CUSTOMER: REPORTER: OTHER WOMAN: ACTOR (CHRIS): ACTRESS:

UNIT

13 Meeting point 2de •

LdP.indd 383 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 2 6 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

Meeting point 2de •

ACTOR (CHRIS):

REPORTER:

ACTOR (CHRIS): ACTRESS:

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

“My mistress’ eyes are nothing like the sun”

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

1. Fiche 1 Understanding the video

2.

Regardez le reportage dans son entier puis complétez le résumé suivant.

LdP.indd 384 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 2 7

Suspicion

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : Suspicion

DURÉE : DATE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : A mind to murder,

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1 (Text on screen)

plan

SEQUENCE 2

JOHNNIE (TO HIS WIFE LINA :LINA (TO HER HUSBAND JOHNNIE):JOHNNIE: LINA:

JOHNNIE: LINA: JOHNNIE: LINA: JOHNNIE:

LINA:

SEQUENCE 3

BEAKY (TO LINA AND JOHNNIE):

(Lina forms the word DOUBT with Scrabble letters.)

BEAKY: (TO JOHNNIE)

JOHNNIE: BEAKY:

JOHNNIE:

UNIT

14 Meeting point 2de •

LdP.indd 385 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 2 8 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

Meeting point 2de •

BEAKY: (Lina forms the word MUD.)

JOHNNIE: (Lina forms the word MUDDER.)

BEAKY: (TO LINA) (TO JOHNNIE) (Lina forms the word MURDER.)

JOHNNIE: BEAKY:

JOHNNIE: BEAKY: (Lina imagines the scene of the crime. It suddently dawns on her that her husband may be a potential murderer.)

BEAKY: JOHNNIE: BEAKY: In Lina’s vision, Johnnie pushes Beaky off the cliffs. Beaky falls. Hysterical laughter is heard. Lina faints.)

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

1.

2.

3.

Recap Fiche 1 Understanding the video

4. the quarrelFiche 2 Act it Out

LdP.indd 386 09/07/09 15:36

EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM • 4 2 9

Goodbye Bafana

• INFORMATIONS SUR LE DOCUMENT

DOCUMENT : Goodbye Bafana

DURÉE : LIEN AVEC LE MANUEL : Over the Rainbow

OBJECTIFS :

• SCRIPT DE LA VIDÉO

SEQUENCE 1

(In the street)

POLICEMAN (TO BLACK WOMEN :

OTHER POLICEMEN (TO BLACK MEN):THE BOY: THE FATHER: POLICEMAN: BLACK WOMAN: POLICEMAN: (He hits the woman on her head and drags her towards the police van.)

(A man who is trying to free the woman is also beaten up by the police. Another woman runs away carrying a baby in her arms. A policeman throws her to the ground. She falls down, with her baby.)

POLICEMAN:WOMAN (SCREAMING):(The policeman arrests her and takes her back to the van, leaving the baby on the pavement.)

THE FATHER: POLICEMAN: OTHER BLACK WOMAN:THE FATHER (TO HIS DAUGHTER):

SEQUENCE 2

(The parents are grilling lobster in the garden.)THE MOTHER: THE FATHER: (The father walks to the living room.)THE FATHER: NATASHA: THE FATHER: NATASHA: THE FATHER:

NATASHA: we

UNIT

15 Meeting point 2de •

LdP.indd 387 09/07/09 15:3609/07/09 15:36

4 3 0 • EXPLOITATION DU DVD-ROM

Meeting point 2de •

THE FATHER: NATASHA: THE FATHER: NATASHA: THE FATHER: THE MOTHER:

• INFORMATIONS COMPLÉMENTAIRES

passeshomelands

• MISE EN ŒUVRE

Fiche 1 Understanding the video

1.

2.

Recap

3.

townships

4.

LdP.indd 388 09/07/09 15:36

U1 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • POOR LITTLE RICH GIRLS • 4 3 1

I. Watch Sequence 1.

Complete the following grid.

Susie Money

Jules (Julia) Cunningham

Age

Social background

Family / friends

Pets

Houses– where?

– type of area

– living conditions

– view

Activities / hobbies

Cars

Music associated with them

Personality

1.

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video POOR LITTLE RICH GIRLSU1©

Édit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

/ Im

ages

: ©

ITN

Concentrate on the way Jules presents the surroundings of the place where she lives.

Does she sound ❍ angry? ❍ nostalgic? ❍ ironic? ❍ cheerful?

II. Watch Sequence 2. What are the rules of the swap for the two girls?

a) Pick out as many words as you can and organize your notes in the following grid.

Activities Financial situation

b) What will be forbidden for both of them?

Recap.

The fair-haired girl is... / She has...

The dark-haired girl is.../ She has...

The poor girl wants to swap lives with a rich girl because...

The rich girl wants to swap lives with a poor girl because...

It will/won’t be difficult because...

III. What about you? Would you like to take part in such a programme? Why or why not?

2.

1.

2.

4 3 2 • U1 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • POOR LITTLE RICH GIRLS

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • POOR LITTLE RICH GIRLSU1

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

/ Im

ages

: ©

ITN

I. Watch Sequence 1.

Listen and pick out the following elements.

a) The name of a country:

b) A continent:

c) A group of people:

d) Words related to landscape (paysage):

What characterizes this region of the world? Pick out keywords or a sentence.

Match each word with its phonetic transcription.

a) rainforest b) alive c) bamboo d) region e) half

1- \E"laIv\ 2- \Æbœm"bu…\ 3- \"reInfÅrIst\ 4- \hA…f\ 5- \"ri…dZEn\

What do these figures and words correspond to?

a) 21: b) 700:

c) “half of them”:

What does the name Agasha mean?

Sum up what you have learnt in this part.

II. Watch Sequence 2.

Who or what does the camera focus on?

Listen and pick out the following elements.

a) a number:

b) time references: -

- -

c) the names of groups of people - -

- -

Compare the attitude to gorillas in the past and in the present.

a) In the past…

b) In the present...

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

U4 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • MOUNTAIN GORILLAS • 4 3 3

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video MOUNTAIN GORILLASU4©

Édit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

Useful words

Virunga volcanoes (chaîne de montagnes

au Rwanda) – silverback (dos argenté =

mâle dominant) – Agasha = name of a

male gorilla

Useful words

poacher (braconnier) – target (cibler)

4 3 4 • U4 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • MOUNTAIN GORILLAS

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • MOUNTAIN GORILLASU4

The wall.

a) Who built it?

b) What is it for?

Concentrate on what the man is saying to the reporter.

a) Who is he?

b) List all the things that have changed in these people’s lives:

Concentrate on the last sentence of Sequence 2.

a) Listen and re-order this sentence:

b) Rephrase orally what this sentence means. You can use the following words in your answer:

man, protect, tourist attraction, generate, money/ income, impact, contributed to, improve

III. Watch Sequence 3.

Pick out keywords concerning the situation today, then organize your notes.

Dangers

Progress

Look at the photos and name the two groups of people.

a) b)

Pick out keywords referring to these two groups. Write them below each photo.

With the help of the words you have just found, list the 3 rules that must be observed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Focus on the keywords. Is the conclusion optimistic or pessimistic?

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

/ Im

ages

: ©

ITN

man has helped Nature is giving

a helping hand to man in Rwanda and now Nature in turn

U4

U4 • FICHE VIDÉO 2 • MOUNTAIN GORILLAS • 4 3 5

k FICHE 2 • Langage at work MOUNTAIN GORILLAS

I. Grammaire Les déterminants ont été supprimés du script. Complétez les espaces blancs avec

the ou a/an lorsque c’est nécessaire. Attention aux majuscules en tête de phrases.

Hidden high in mist-shrouded hills of Rwanda’s wilderness, one of world’s

most precious creatures is making comeback. We make long journey

up towering slopes of Virunga volcanoes with a small group of tourists.

We’re tightly controlled: conservation lies at heart of this African success

story. This is place where Nature, now, comes first. Deep in rainforest,

we’re suddenly stopped in our tracks… and there, in bamboo, our first glimpse of

gorillas. This family of 21 is led by silverback “Agasha”. His name means

‘special’, and he is, for there are only 700 mountain gorillas alive in world today,

and half of them live in this region.

These babies are testament to huge efforts to ensure gorillas’

future. Before, many were targeted by poachers, but in past decade,

gorilla numbers in Rwanda have grown by more than 10%. And this is why these

communities, once their enemies, are now their protectors. They guard them from

poachers and they’ve also built walls to safeguard rainforests.

“These gorillas are making our lives much better”, village leader tells me.

money generated has built new roads, schools, and clinics. In Rwanda,

man has helped Nature and now Nature in turn is giving helping

hand to man.

It’s truly mesmerizing to get this close to one of world’s most endangered species.

When you think of challenges that these amazing creatures have had to overcome,

the threats from poachers and destruction to their habitat, it is amazing

that their numbers are now on increase. And that’s thanks to huge

conservation efforts that are being made here in Rwanda.

Ever curious, this baby catches his reflection in our camera lens. ITV News camera

man Andy Rex suddenly finds himself centre of attention, as baby comes in

for a closer look. Our group is closely watched by guides to make sure animals

are never stressed by our presence; we’re only allowed up to one hour and always keep our

distance. On our journey back, guides told me how important village’s support

and protection for gorillas has been; without it, they would never stand a chance. In this

land of thousand hills gorillas’ existence will always be fragile. But for now, at

least, there is hope for their future. © ITN, 2008.

II. Vocabulaire À l’aide du script ci-dessus, trouvez les équivalents anglais des termes suivants.

a) voyage : h) espèce en voie de disparition :

b) aperçu :

c) étonnant : d) défi : i) en augmentation :

e) surmonter :

f) menace : j) ils n’ont aucune chance :

g) au moins :

1.

2.

3.

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

I. Watch Sequence 1. Concentrate on the beginning of the sequence.

a) Is the music ❍ dramatic? ❍ solemn? ❍ monotonous? ❍ slow?

❍ cheerful? ❍ catching? ❍ melancholic?

b) What are these immigrants doing?

Pick out information.

a) Five nationalities of immigrants: (1) (2)

(3) (4) (5)

b) A figure:

c) Dates of the immigration period. From: To:

d) Two percentages: ;

e) Pick out as many stressed words as you can.

f) Organize your notes in the following grid.

Dominant feeling (Quote keywords.)

Why?Conditions of admission

What had they

heard about?

Types

of inspection

1)

2)

1)

2)

II. Watch Sequence 2.

What about the music in this sequence?

Name the city and make a list of the different parts and famous monument you can see.

Pick out as many stressed words as you can and complete the grid below.

People’s background

In the past

After the arrival

– Type of city:

– Different groups met:

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4 3 6 • U5 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • THE JOURNEY

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video THE JOURNEYU5

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

I. Get ready.a) Before watching the sequence, make sure you know the pronunciation of:

\"p∏…tSIs\ purchase (= buy) – \lu…Æi…zI"œnE\ Louisiana – \"terItErI\ territory

b) Find the nouns derived from the following roots: expand k

acquire k add k

c) Observe the following word: northern. How is it built? Can you guess its meaning?

d) Can you produce three other words that are built the same?

- -

e) Name this geometrical form:

II. Watch Sequence 1. Watch the sequence without the soundtrack. Sum up what you have seen orally.

a) Whose portrait did you see?

b) What did you read on the screen?

c) Who was the treaty signed with? d) When?

e) Focus on the last image. Where did this scene take place?

Now listen and complete your notes.

a) price: b) surface:

c) from: to:

III. Watch Sequence 2.

Work in 3 groups. Pick out keywords. Then organize your notes.

Group n°1 will concentrate on the soldiers, the portraits, the landscapes and the wildlife.

The expedition was led by …

The goal was to …

They had to …

Group n°2 will pick out the following information:

A date: A figure:

Two names:

The names of three rivers:

1.

2.

U6 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • LEWIS AND CLARK • 4 3 7

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video LEWIS AND CLARKU6©

Édit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

Useful word

\ru…t\ route

4 3 8 • U6 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • LEWIS AND CLARK

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • LEWIS AND CLARKU6

Group n°3 will concentrate on the Indian woman.

She was: Her tribe:

What role did she play?

What has she become?

IV. Watch Sequence 3.

Work in 3 groups.

Group n°1 will concentrate on the landscape and what is written on the screen.

Landscape:

Sentence written on the screen:

Group n°2 will draw the itinerary on the map and give two dates.

Group n°3 will concentrate on the black and white images at the end.

Who are these people?

How do you recognize them?

What do these images correspond to?

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

30 °

40 °

80 °100 °120 °

500 km0

Ro

ck

y

Mo

un

ta

in

s

Mississippi Missouri

Missouri

Yellowstone

Arkansas Tenn

essee

Rio G

rande

Columbia

Snake

Lake Superior

Lake

Mic

higa

n

Lake Huron

Lake ErieL.Ontario

PACIFIC

OCEAN

ATLANTIC

OCEAN

Ohio

Colo

rado

Gulf of Mexico

Mis

siss

ippi

Departure (month/year):

Return (month/year):

Mettez les verbes entre parenthèses à la forme verbale qui convient.

When Thomas Jefferson (elect) President in 1800 he (advocate)

the western expansion of the young republic. With a stroke

of a pen he (accomplish) the task. In 1803 the United States

(purchase) the Louisiana territory from France for 15 million dollars.

America nearly (double) in size with the acquisition of this vast area,

about eight hundred twenty-eight thousand square miles stretching from the Mississippi

Valley to the Rocky Mountains. But what (be) out there? To answer

that question, Congress, at Jefferson’s request, (authorize)

an expedition to explore America’s newest addition.

In May 1804, the corps of discovery, a group of about 40 soldiers and officers

(lead) by Meriwether Lewis and William Clark, (depart)

their camp on the Mississippi River to begin their historic journey.

Their mission (be) to find the so-called Northwest passage, a water

route across the continent to the Pacific Ocean and document their findings. Their route

(take) them to the headwaters of the Missouri River across

the Continental Divide and down the mountains by several rivers including the Snake and

the Columbia.

Along the way, they (catalogue) many new plants and animals,

(draw) detailed maps, and (make)

contact with several Indian tribes. Among the Native Americans they (encounter)

, (be) Sacagawea, a Shoshone Indian

woman, who (join) the expedition as an interpreter. Her knowledge

of the land, firm determination and good relations to other Native Americans (make)

her indispensable. As the expedition’s only woman member she

(become) an early legend of the West.

In November 1805 the expedition finally (reach) what is now

Oregon’s Pacific Coast. Clark (write) in his journal: “Ocean in view,

O, the joy!”

In September 1806, after more than two years exploring the West, the Lewis and Clark

expedition (return) to St. Louis and (hail)

a great success. Not only had they accomplished their mission, but they also (bring)

about the opening of the West to settlers and, as

Jefferson (hope) , to American ideals.

1.

2.

3.

U6 • FICHE VIDÉO 2 • LEWIS AND CLARK • 4 3 9

k FICHE 2 • Langage at work LEWIS AND CLARKU6©

Édit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

I. Watch Sequence 1.

Focus on places and people.

a) Where does the scene take place?

b) Who are the characters present in the scene?

Focus on the music and the working conditions.

a) Is it ❍ relaxing? ❍ rhythmic? ❍ nostalgic? ❍ metallic? ❍ monotonous?

(several possible answers)

b) What does the music suggest about the working conditions?

c) What are the consequences for the worker?

d) Before and after having a break, what does the worker have to do?

e) What do you notice about the music?

f) What does he need a break for?

Focus on this still, then answer the following questions.

a) What device does the boss use to speak to

the worker? What can you deduce?

b) How does the boss react? What does he tell

the worker? What about the tone of his voice?

c) What is most important for the boss?

Focus on the end of the scene.

a) What does the worker do?

b) What about the music?

1.

2.

3.

4.

4 4 0 • U7 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • MODERN TIMES

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video MODERN TIMESU7

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

/ P

hoto

gra

mm

e :

© R

OY E

XP

OR

T S

.A.S

.

Useful words

assembly line (chaîne de montage) – conveyor belt

(tapis roulant) – clock in / clock out (pointer) – tighten

nuts (visser les écrous) – wrench (clé à écrous)

U7 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • MODERN TIMES • 4 4 1

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • MODERN TIMESU7

Recap.

Working conditions: time – rhythm – speed – robot – machine // fast – mechanical –

dull – boring – tiring – repetitive – dehumanized – inhuman // waste a minute

Humain relationships: obedient – submissive – efficient – afraid – bossy – intrusive –

harsh on – strict – tense – aggressive // spy on – watch over – tell sb off – order sb to

+ V – argue – produce – make profits – keep working

Comical aspects: file his nails – argue – waste time – rebel (verb) – rest – relax //

provocative – cheeky // baggy pants – oversized shoes

II. Sequence 2.

Get ready. Make sure you know how to read and write these words.

\ÆeErEÁdaI¬nœmIk\ = \kO…rn\

\ÆbO…l¬beEINz\ (roulements à bille) = \¬waIpEr\

Watch the video without the soundtrack.

a) Where does the scene take place?

b) Concentrate on the boss. What is his attitude?

c) Concentrate on the machine. Imagine what it is used for.

d) What type of music will you hear? ❍ dramatic? ❍ relaxing? ❍ triumphant? ❍ romantic?

Watch the video (image + sound) and check your answers.

a) What’s the name of the machine? What was this machine created for?

b) Pick out as many keywords as you can and organize your notes in the grid below.

Devices presented Advantages / What for? (to... / not to...)

Automaton soup plate with air blower

Revolving plate with the automatic food pusher

Corn feeder

Sterilized mouth-wiper

Recap.

What was the machine created for? save – eliminate – increase – be better than –

be the best – be faster – produce (verb) – speed up – boost

What is denounced in these two extracts? competitive – use – increase – disregard –

slave – working conditions – industry – happiness – factory – criticism – Taylorism –

Fordism – capitalism

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

Useful word

Mr Billows

I. Watch the video without the soundtrack.

Visual elements.

a) Concentrate on the man who is interviewed. What is his job?

b) Make a list of the natural elements you can see.

c) In what country was the video shot?

Have a guess.

a) In your opinion, what is the document about?

b) What kind of music do you expect at the end?

II. Watch the whole video.

Check your answers.

a) Note down as many keywords as you can.

b) Tick the correct statement.

❍ The man wants to buy new land for his sheep and cattle.

❍ The man wants to open a new restaurant in the countryside.

❍ The man wants to create dishes inspired by Britain.

❍ The man wants to protect birds against hunters.

Focus on this still.a) Who can you see? What does

he look like?

b) What is the impact of this shot

on the viewer?

1.

2.

1.

2.

4 4 2 • U8 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • MARCO'S GREAT BRITISH FEAST

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video MARCO'S GREAT BRITISH FEASTU8

© ITN

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

U8 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • MARCO'S GREAT BRITISH FEAST • 4 4 3

U8 k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • MARCO'S GREAT BRITISH FEAST

What is the man doing?

a) What national symbol do you recognize?

b) Use the following words to describe the last

shots: cliffs of Dover - flag - territory – conquer.

Focus your attention on the music at the end of the scene.

a) Is it ❍ relaxing? ❍ solemn? ❍ dramatic? ❍ sad? ❍ cheerful?

b) Why was this particular music chosen?

Explain the man’s attitude. You can use the following words: victorious – triumphant –

win – achieve – assert – supremacy.

What are the different shots used for? (See your Textbook, p. 250-251.)

Full shots Medium shots Extreme close-up shots

III. Recap.

The man who is.... is talking about... / He wants to... / He would like to... / His goal is to...

The document narrates...

At the end of the sequence the music conveys the idea that...

The shots are... / They show... / The full shots represent... / The extreme close-up shots

show... / The low-angle shot presents... as... because... The final shot symbolizes...

3.

4.

5.

6.

© ITN

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

U9

4 4 4 • U9 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • DEAR WHITE FELLA

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video DEAR WHITE FELLA

I. Listen to the soundtrack only.

Listen to Sequence 1.

a) What words are repeated? – –

b) What ethnic group does the narrator belong to?

c) Pick out the stressed words you hear. (1) (2)

(3) (4) (5)

(6) (7)

d) Classify these words in the following grid.

Listen to Sequence 2.

a) Who does “you” refer to?

b) List the elements from the first sequence which are repeated here.

c) Match each element with the corresponding colour.

Listen again to the end.

a) Which words are stressed? /

b) How does the narrator react?

c) Explain his reaction at the end.

1.

2.

3.

Stages of life Feelings and health

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

When you…

born

You…

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • DEAR WHITE FELLAU9

U9 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • DEAR WHITE FELLA• 4 4 5

II. Watch the whole video (image + sound).

Concentrate on the visual elements.

a) Work in 3 groups. Concentrate in one aspect of the video only and fill in the grid.

Group 1 – People Group 2 – Places Group 3 – Actions

b) Report orally to the other groups.

The message

a) What colours can you see on the screen?

b) What shots (plans) are used for the babies?

What strikes you?

c) What is the message of the ad?

d) Who is the target of the campaign?

1.

2.

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

U9

4 4 6 • U9 • FICHE VIDÉO 2 • DEAR WHITE FELLA

I. Work on the script.

Read the script.

Dear white fella, couple things you should know: when I born, I black; when I grow up,

I black; when I cold, I black; when I go in the sun, I black; when I scared, I black; when

I sick, I black and when I die, I still black.

You white fella, when you born, you pink; when you grow up, you white; when you cold,

you blue; when you go in the sun, you red; when you scared, you yellow; when you sick,

you green and when you die, you grey. And you have the cheek to call me coloured!

Rewrite the underlined elements in standard English.

Find the equivalent of “et vous avez le culot de ...”

II. Listen again to the soundtrack.

a) Read this word aloud: \sk”Ed\.

b) Underline the stressed syllables: YELLOW – COLOURED

c) How are these words pronounced? Tick the right sound.

/Å/ dog /O…/ horse /EÁ/ boat /Ø/ love

couple

know

born

grow

coloured

III. Over to you.

On the following text, note down where you will breathe (use this sign: / ). After each pause, decide if the intonation rises (3) or falls (5).

Dear white fella, couple things you should know: when I born, I black; when I grow up,

I black; when I cold, I black; when I go in the sun, I black; when I scared, I black; when

I sick, I black and when I die, I still black.

You white fella, when you born, you pink; when you grow up, you white; when you cold,

you blue; when you go in the sun, you red; when you scared, you yellow; when you sick,

you green and when you die, you grey. And you have the cheek to call me coloured!

Read aloud to the class.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

k FICHE 2 • Act it out! DEAR WHITE FELLA

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

U12 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • TWO COMMERCIALS • 4 4 7

I. Commercial 1

Watch the video. Sum up what you have seen orally with the help of these words:

dressing-gown (robe de chambre) – drink out of a bottle – throw into the street – hit

(frapper) – a dog on a leash – drag (traîner) – scream (hurler) – press the bell (sonner à la

porte) – pull an arrow (tirer une flèche) – stagger (chanceler) – run over sb (renverser qqn).

What slogan can you read at the end?

3. Focus on the still. Who is the target of this video?

4. What are the goals of this video?

What was your reaction when you first saw the document?

What is the tone of this video? ❍ nostalgic ❍ dramatic ❍ humorous ❍ tragic.

Do you find it effective? Why? Why not?

II. Commercial 2 Watch Sequence 1.

a) Sum up what you have seen with the help of these words.

big corporation / firm / colleague / look down on sb (mépriser qqn) – avoid sb – spit into sth

(cracher) – behind sb’s back – / being excluded – elevator / lift – stick, stuck, stuck (coller).

b) Can you guess why this man is excluded?

Watch Sequence 2.

a) What do you discover?

b) What are the goals of this video?

c) Is it effective? Why? Why not?

Which of the two campaigns do you prefer? Why?

1.

2.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video TWO COMMERCIALSU12

✂

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

/ P

hoto

gra

mm

e :

© W

WF

4 4 8 • U13 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • SHAKESPEARE IN A SUPERMARKET

I. Get ready.

Observe this poster and answer the following questions.

a) Where does it take place? What

elements strikes you?

b) Concentrate on the man:

describe his clothes and attitude.

c) What is he doing in this place?

What's happening? List all the

clues you can find on the poster.

d) What do you think he is holding in his hand? Does it remind you of a famous play?

II. Watch Sequence 1 without the soundtrack.

Focus on places and people. Where does the scene take place?

a) What strikes you?

b) Imagine what the young woman is doing here?

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video SHAKESPEARE IN A SUPERMARKETU13

© T

im S

utt

on &

Teatr

o V

ivo

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

Useful words

aisle – can – row (rangée) – give a performance –

audience – knee-breeches (haut-de-chausses) –

stockings (bas) – ruff (collerette) – buckles (boucles)

U13 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • SHAKESPEARE IN A SUPERMARKET • 4 4 9

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • SHAKESPEARE IN A SUPERMARKETU13

III. Watch Sequence 1 (image + soundtrack).

a) Focus on the voice-over (the reporter). Pick out as many keywords as you can.

b) Now organize your notes.

Who? Where? What? Impact?

IV. Watch Sequence 2.

Listen to the man who is being interviewed. His words have been jumbled. Reorder them.

Concentrate on people’s faces. What are their reactions? Complete the following grid.

Faces Reactions

First:

Then:

V. Recap.

The report is about... / deals with... It shows...

The reporter says... The man who is interviewed... / The actors...

At the beginning the customers are... / At the end they are...

To conclude we can say this experience is... because...

strange – unusual – daring – pleasant – entertaining – successful – disturbing

1.

2.

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

we just want it to take over a space

or art of any type to take place where they wouldn’t expect any kind of theatre

where people come every day

and just give them a bit of excitement

4 5 0 • U14 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • SUSPICION

I. Watch Sequence 1 – Get ready. Make sure you can read these phonetic transcriptions, then write the corresponding

words underneath.

\ÆIntE"fIE\ \"bIznEs\ \ski…m\ \gEÁ Tru…\

II. Watch Sequence 2 without the soundtrack. Who are the two characters present in the scene? How are they related to each other?

Where are they?

From what you see, what social background do they belong to? How do you know?

Concentrate on the actors’ faces. Describe each character’s feelings and imagine what is going on.

The woman The man

III. Watch Sequence 2 (image + soundtrack). Pick out as many stressed words as you can. Organize your notes.

a) What’s the main topic? b) What does he expect the woman to do?

❍ love

❍ children’s education

❍ holidays

❍ business

Recap Sequence 2.

The woman:surprised – shocked – worried – ill-at-ease – embarrassed - submissive – scared

She is... because... / She suggests that he…

The man:irritated – determined – threatening – worrying - authoritative

follow – harass – put pressure on

He is... because... / He blames her for... / He doesn’t want...

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video SUSPICIONU14

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

U14 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • SUSPICION • 4 5 1

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • SUSPICIONU14

IV. Watch Sequence 3 (sound + image).

Concentrate on the characters.

a) Who are the characters present in the scene? How are they related to each other?

+ + =

b) Where are they? What time is it?

What are they doing?

a) The two men:

b) The woman and the big man:

Concentrate on the woman. What is specific about her attitude?

List 4 important words found in the game.

(1) (3)

(2) (4)

Concentrate on the two men’s conversation. They are talking about:❍ going to the casino ❍ travelling ❍ buying a new car ❍ discovering new areas

❍ giving up their real estate project

Concentrate on the type of music you can hear.

a) Is it ❍ cheerful? ❍ traditional? ❍ solemn? ❍ dramatic?

b) Why is it used?

Focus on the close-up of the woman’s face. What does she suddenly realize?

The woman’s vision. What does it correspond to?

❍ Images of the past. ❍ An interior monologue. ❍ A nightmare she had the night before.

What does the woman do at the end of the sequence? Explain her reaction.

Recap Sequence 3.

The woman:quiet – thoughtful – silent – careful – panic-stricken – stunned

She looks.... / She is... / She wonders if... / She fears that... / She is convinced that...

The men:project – scheme – weather conditions – need to go – early in the morning –

responsibilities – give up – call sth off (mettre un terme à)

He wants to persuade... / He tries to convince... / He wants to make sure... / His friend

doesn’t understand... / He complains about...

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

I. Préparation

Écoutez attentivement la Sequence 2 et répondez aux questions suivantes.

Soulignez le(s) mot(s) mis en relief.

JOHNNIE: Hey kid, what right have you to interfere in my affairs?

Comment se prononcent was et were dans ce passage ?

LINA: But I wasn’t really... I... Well, I was only... k

JOHNNIE: You were only what? k

Dans le passage ci-dessous, indiquez les moments où vous allez respirer à l’aide d’une barre ( / ).

LINA: Well, I was only trying to tell Beaky that he shouldn’t leave everything to you

because if something went wrong, he should take a little responsibility too. It’s not

as if you were both experienced businessmen.

Soulignez le(s) mot(s) mis en relief.

JOHNNIE: What the devil do you know about business?

Comment se prononce was dans cette phrase ?

LINA: Oh! Very little. I... I was only... : ❍ \wÅz\ – ❍ \wEz\

Soulignez la voyelle de la syllabe accentuée. Indiquez l’intonation montante ou descendante (3 ou 5).

JOHNNIE: Suppose Beaky was taking you seriously, it’d ruin all our scheme. You realize that?

Comment se prononce was dans cette phrase ?

LINA: Yes, but what if it wasn’t any good? : ❍ \wÅz\ – ❍ \wEz\

Dans le passage suivant, soulignez les mots accentués.

JOHNNIE: That’s my business, not yours. If I say it’s good, it’s good. I’m going through with

this deal. I don’t want any interference from you or anyone else. Is that clear?

Indiquez l’intonation montante ou descendante dans la réponse de Lina. (3 ou )

LINA: Yes. That’s clear.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

4 5 2 • U14 • FICHE VIDÉO 2 • SUSPICION

k FICHE 2 • Act it Out! (The quarrel, sequence 2) SUSPICIONU14

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

U14 • FICHE VIDÉO 2 • SUSPICION • 4 5 3

k FICHE 2 • Act it Out! (The quarrel, sequence 2) • SUSPICIONU14

II. À vous de jouer ! (See Textbook, p. 168-169)

JOHNNIE: Hey kid, what right have you to interfere in my affairs?

LINA: But I wasn’t really... I... Well, I was only...

JOHNNIE: You were only what?

LINA: Well, I was only trying to tell Beaky that he shouldn’t leave everything to

you because if something went wrong, he should take a little responsibility

too. It’s not as if you were both experienced businessmen.

JOHNNIE: What the devil do you know about business?

LINA: Oh! Very little. I... I was only...

JOHNNIE: Suppose Beaky was taking you seriously, it’d ruin the whole scheme.

You realize that?

LINA: Yes, but what if it weren’t any good?

JOHNNIE: That’s my business, not yours. If I say it’s good, it’s good. I’m going through

with this deal. I don’t want any interference from you or anyone else. Is that

clear?

LINA: Yes. That’s clear.

III. À vous de juger !

J F A �

Voix audible

Connaissance du texte

Présence sur scène

(occupation de l’espace ; expression

des sentiments)

Mise en scène originale / intéressante

Interaction avec le partenaire

Prononciation

Total

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

/ E

xtra

it d

e S

usp

icio

n (

A.

Hitchcock)

© A

RIÈ

S.

4 5 4 • U15 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • GOODBYE BAFANA

I. Watch Sequence 1 without the soundtrack.

Where does the scene take place?

Work in 3 groups.

a) Concentrate on one aspect of the scene only and fill in the grid.

Group 1The police

Group 2The white family

Group 3The Blacks

Actions

Reactions/ Feelings

b) Report orally to the other groups. Use the following link-words: while, as, suddenly / all of

a sudden, finally.

What explains the little girl’s reaction?

What do you expect to hear on the soundtrack?

II. Watch Sequence 1 (image + soundtrack).

Sum up the scene orally.

1.

2.

3.

4.

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video GOODBYE BAFANAU15

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

Useful words police trucks / vans – cudgel (matraque) –

victims – throw to the ground – flee

(= escape) – pick sth up – witness – beat sb up

U15 • FICHE VIDÉO 1 • GOODBYE BAFANA • 4 5 5

k FICHE 1 • Understanding the video • GOODBYE BAFANAU15

Recap

Police: pitiless / merciless / ruthless – inhumane – cruel – violent – brutal

Blacks: defenceless – panic-stricken – yield to force

Girl: shocked – horrified – amazed – stunned (abasourdie) – outraged (scandalisée) –

powerless

III. Watch Sequence 2.

Focus on people and places.

a) Where does the scene take place?

What time of day is it? Justify.

b) Who are the characters present at the beginning of the scene?

c) What about their social background? Justify with visual elements from the scene.

d) Where is the little girl? Describe the expression on her face.

Listen again to the dialogue between the father and the little girl.

a) What does the little girl sound like?

❍ bewildered (perplexe) ❍ distressed (affligée) ❍ plaintive ❍ melancholic ❍ revengeful

b) Pick out as many stressed words as you can.

c) Organize your notes with the keywords you have heard.

The father The girl

How do the parents justify what happened?

a) Pick out as many keywords as you can.

b) What is their message?

Sum up the scene with the help of the following verbs.understand – want to know – wonder – become aware of – explain – justify

1.

2.

3.

4.

© É

dit

ions

Hati

er, 2

010

. P

hoto

copie

auto

risé

e p

our

une c

lass

e s

eule

ment.

Useful words sparrow (moineau) – swallow (hirondelle)

goose (oie) – duck (canard) – buck

(antilope, en Afrique du Sud)

Fiches d’exploitation des dialogues

du site compagnon

SONG OF MYSELFUNIT

1

4 5 8 • SITE COMPAGNON

Please meet Kareem

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

1 What is the name of the programme?

0,5

2 Give information about the interviewee:

a. name:

b. nationality:

c. origins: 1,5

3 Give information about his family:

a. city of origin:

b. country where they moved to:

c. places where they stay in their new country (give two places):

–

– 4

4 Pick out four other places where part of his family lives:

a.

b.

c.

d. 4

Note : / 10

UNIT

HEROES

UNIT

4

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 5 9

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

Great inspiration

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

1 Find information about the interviewee:

a. name:

b. age:

c. nationality:

d. job / occupation:

0,5

0,5

0,5

1

2 Who inspired her? Complete the prompts.

Someone she , someone she :

The lady whose when her mother was . 4

3 In the following list, tick all the elements that made that person inspiring.

She…

● was a good caregiver.

● was a good caretaker.

● was inspired by the world.

● was connected to the world.

● was dubious.

● was curious.

● connected that curiosity to the interviewee.

● communicated that curiosity to the interviewee. 4

4 Complete the sentence.

She taught the interviewee how to , to

and introduced her to and made things . 4

5 Give an example of something the interviewee was really interested in.

1

6 True or false? Circle the right answers and justify them with elements from the interview.

T F She urged the interviewee to ask questions.

T F The interviewee is still inspired by this person’s life.

4

7 What was the person’s name? 0,5

Note : / 20

UNIT

5 CITY OF GLASS

4 6 0 • SITE COMPAGNON

Portrait of a New Yorker

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

1 Find information about the person who is being interviewed.a. His name:

b. His origin:

c. The city where he lives:

1

1

1

2 What is special about this city compared to...a. other American cities?

b. Paris?

1

1

3 What is Greenwich Village?1

4 Why is it a place to visit?a. atmosphere:

b. people:

c. activities:

1

1

1

5 Why does he show his friends these different places?a. Harlem:

b. The Bronx:

c. Brooklyn:

d. World Trade Centre:

1

1

1

1

6 When and why does he take his friends to: a. Battery City Park?

b. Brooklyn?

1

1

7 What type of food can visitors eat in this city? Give details.

3

8 What food and restaurants does he really appreciate?–

–

1

1

Note : / 20

WILD WILD WESTUNIT

6

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 6 1

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

Cherry Buffalo, a Black Feet

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

1 Complete the journalist’s question.

What does being ? 1

2 Find information about Cherry Buffalo.

a. tribe:

b. location of the reservation:

c. heritage: 3

3 What does Cherry want to teach her children? Give four elements.

a.

b.

c.

d.

1

1

1

2

4 True or False? Circle the right answer and justify with elements from the interview.T F Cherry thinks that Indians are too often described negatively.

1

5 What influences young Native Americans today?

a.

b.

c.

d. 4

6 Complete Cherry’s conclusion.

They need to 1

7 Why did she give her children Black Feet names?

2

8 Complete Cherry’s opinion.

This is part of about their . 1

9 What will be her children’s duty (devoir) in the future?

2

Note : / 20

UNIT TRUE BRITS

UNIT

8

4 6 2 •SITE COMPAGNON

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

A street survey

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

20

09

.

1 Name the programme.

1

2 What type of interview is it?

1

3 What adjectives are linked with being British?

–

–

– 3

4 What famous British institution is referred to?

1

5 What film is mentioned?

1

6 What typically British beverage / drink comes to his mind?

1

7 What people are associated with the word British?

–

–

1

1

Note : / 10

DESTINATION LIVERPOOLUNIT

9

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 6 3

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

A slave ship: The Enterprise

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

1 The sums are given in:● British pounds (£) ● Euros ( ) ● American dollars ($) 0,5

2 Read the following numbers carefully. Then, circle those you have heard on the tape.

2,500 5,500 4,500 4,150 1,600 1,300 950 940 3,000

1,300 1,000 10,000 12,250 12,520 356 365 2,200 22,000 4,5

3 Classify the numbers you have circled (except one) in the following grid.

ship’s cost = number of slaves =

cargo for trading = the slaves’ sale =

sailors’ wages (salary) =

various costs =

agents’ commissions =

k Total = k Total = 9

4 Can you suggest a title for each column?

– Column 1:

– Column 2:

1,5

1,5

5 How profitable was the slave trade? Justify your answer with numbers from the grid.

3

Note : / 20

UNIT LIFE IS ART

UNIT

10

In a museum shop

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

4 6 4 •SITE COMPAGNON

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

1 The situation: Complete.

a. How many people?

b. Where?

c. Doing what?

0,5

0,5

1

2 What kind of postcards have they got in stock?

1

3 Complete the woman’s reaction.

It’s so , so , so . 3

4 Complete the man’s opinion.

It seems and . 2

5 What is the function of art according to the woman? Give two elements.

a.

b. 2

6 What does she compare it to?

1

7 True or false? Circle the right answer and justify with elements from the interview.T F The woman thinks Andy Warhol’s Marilyn looks pretty thanks to the colours

in the painting.

2

8 Quote an element to prove that the man is not convinced that the Campbell soup can is art.

2

9 True or false? Circle the right answer and justify it with elements from the interview.T F If it hadn’t been painted, we wouldn’t appreciate it so much.

2

10 Give the three elements the woman underlines about The Campbell Soup.

a.

b.

c. 3

Note : / 20

UNIT

A WORLD OF GEEKS

UNIT

11

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 6 5

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

A techie chef

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

1 Find information about the interviewee:

a. full name:

b. nationality:

c. job:

d. where?

0,5

0,5

0,5

1

2 Give the adjective that people usually associate with chefs.

1

3 a. What did the Internet transform?

b. What is the Internet for her?

1

1

4 What does she use the Internet for? Give 5 elements.

a.

b.

c.

d.

e. 5

5 Complete the sentence.

She thinks she has become 1

6 What does she use her webcam for? Give two examples.

a.

b. 1

2

7 What does she compare it to?

0,5

8 True or false? Circle the correct answer and justify.T F She can email pictures of a course after making it.

1

9 When does she use her computer?

1

10 Why are people surprised to see the Internet’s so important for her?

2

11 Complete the sentence.She believes tradition and technology are 1

Note : / 20

MOTHER EARTHUNIT

12

4 6 6 • SITE COMPAGNON

Save our planet

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

1 Complete the introduction.a. Global warming is .

b. We have to .

c. Here are five . 3

2 Give the five things to do:a. d. b. e. c. 2,5

3 What should we do with water? Complete the sentences.When you or , turn off water.

Have a rather than a . 2

4 What about electronic devices? Complete the sentences.Turn off electronic devices if you are not . Don’t forget to switch

off your , your , your or your . 2,5

5 What can be recycled nowadays? Give four elements.a. c. b. d. 2

6 What can be found almost everywhere? 0,5

7 When should we use our cars? 0,5

8 What should we do instead of using our cars? Give four elements.a. c. b. d. 2

9 Reorder the following elements: 1,200 pounds • your garbage • you can save •

by only 10% • of carbon dioxide • if you cut down

3

10 Pick up the piece of advice concerning plastic bags.

0,5

11 Complete the conclusion.

We can all be ! Join the and

save our planet for . 1,5

Note : / 20

UNIT

A MIND TO MURDER

UNIT

14

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 6 7

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

Blue Beard strikes back

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE • FICHE D’ÉVALUATION

Écoutez le document sonore deux fois. Complétez ce résumé du dialogue en français.

Durant l’ de son mari, une jeune reçoit un coup

de téléphone et confie à son interlocutrice ses concernant son

. Son apparence physique l’ parfois (il est très

, blond et comme un et porte

une barbe très , son regard la glace de

). Son attitude est aussi (il s’absente

régulièrement plusieurs sans préciser où il ). Mais

surtout, dès qu’ils ont dans la familiale,

il lui a de pénétrer dans la au fond du ,

fermée avec une qui aurait été , selon lui. De plus,

certaines qu’elle a surprises, évoquant les autres

de son mari, comme s’il avait déjà été et qu’elles

aient toutes , renforcent son . Elle

laisse libre cours à son et se demande si son mari ne

pas les corps de ses épouses qu’il aurait

. Malgré sa curiosité, elle n’a jamais franchi le pas de peur de

à ce mari si . Pourtant, cet après-midi-

là, elle entend la porte de la qui et, elle

pour voir ce qu’elle À son grand , elle ne

trouve que des de jardinage. Entendant son époux qui approche,

elle précipitamment et celui-ci, furieux qu’elle ait

à ses ordres, lui son vrai visage : il teint ses cheveux noirs en

pour paraître moins , il se nourrit du

de ses jeunes épouses comme un et

la scie qu’elle a trouvée dans la , pour

en morceaux le corps de ses . Il révèle

qu’elles sont au sous-sol car elles aussi ont

son secret et l’invite à les pour leur tenir !

UNIT OVER THE RAINBOW

UNIT

15Testimony

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

4 6 8 •SITE COMPAGNON

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

1 Complete the information about the place where the interview takes place.The museum in 1,5

2 Find information about the interviewee.a. name:

b. city of origin:

c. age at the time of the events: 1,5

3 What does the date correspond to? Give two elements.a. b. 2

4 How have things changed according to the interviewee?a. life (2 elements):

b. jobs:

c. people:

2

1

0,5

5 Number the following events from 1 to 5 to put them back in the right chronological order.

came back / thieves came into his house / took his

stereo / fired guns / broke a window 2,5

6 What are the consequences of this? Give three elements.a. b. c. 3

7 True or false? Circle the right answers and justify them.a. T F The interviewee is mainly optimistic for the future generations.

b. T F Race relations have changed dramatically.

2

8 What is the change for the interviewee? Complete the sentence.He was a and now he’s a . 2

9 Changes for the population. Match the interviewee’s answers with the correct period of time: PAST, PRESENT or FUTURE.a. go to places they’ve never been to:

b. not sit on a “Whites only” bench:

c. upgrade ourselves:

d. talk to you properly: 2

Note : / 20

JAMAICAN COLOURS OF LONDONUNIT

16A Jamaican in Paris

COMPRÉHENSION ORALE

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 6 9

Fic

he p

hoto

copia

ble

© H

ati

er

2010

.

1 Name the radio programme.1

2 Find information about the person who is being interviewed.a. full name:

b. nationality:

c. age:

0,5

0,5

0,5

3 What’s her current job? 0,5

4 Where does she come from exactly?a. name of the town:

b. location: –

–

c. number of inhabitants:

0,5

2

1

5 Find information about the country she is talking about.a. rank:

b. comparisons with French regions:

–

–

1

1

1

6 What languages are spoken in that country and why?a. languages:

b. reasons:

1

2

7 What is the official language?

0,5

8 What’s her mother’s job?1

9 What is the main characteristic of the country she refers to? Give details.

2

10 a. What is specific about the population of that country?

b. Name the different nationalities present in that country.0,5

1,5

11 What does her mother plan to do?1

12 Find the motto / slogan of that country.1

Note : / 20

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 1 - 4

4 7 0 • SITE COMPAGNON

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 1

Around the World

a. Kareem b. American c. Haitian

a. Port-au-Prince b. the US c. – New York – New Jersey

a. Toronto b. Montreal c. Florida d. California

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: Welcome to “Around the World”. We have with us today, Kareem, who is American

with Haitian origins. Hello Kareem.

Kareem: Hello, Bert.

Journalist: Now, Kareem. Could you tell us exactly where you come from?

Kareem: Well, I come from... My family is from Haiti, um... most of my family was born in

Port-au-Prince, but we live in the countryside, we call it “Sousmana”, just outside of Port-

au-Prince. Um... my family moved to the US and now we’re scattered across America but

my family stays in New York and New Jersey. I’ve other family in Toronto, Montreal, Florida

and also California.

Journalist: Um... it’s a big family!

Kareem: Yes! (laughs)

Journalist: Kareem, thank you very much, that was very interesting.

Kareem: Welcome.

Journalist: Thanks a lot.

Kareem: Thanks.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 4

a. Courtney West b. 45 c. American d. between jobs

Someone she loved very much, someone she knew: The lady whose care she was in

when her mother was away (a lot). She was a good caregiver. / was connected to the world. / was curious. / communicated

that curiosity to her.

She taught the interviewer how to garden, to cook and introduced her to reading and made

things (really) interesting.

Certain books that she passed on to her.

T She urged the interviewee to ask questions. “She would get me to ask questions, like a

teacher.”

T The interviewee is still inspired by this person’s life. “I still carry that with me.” Hilda

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: We’ve asked Courtney who has inspired her in her life. Courtney, could you please

introduce yourself?

Courtney: Um... My name is... um Courtney West and I’m... um 45 years old, I’m American

and I’m between jobs right now.

Journalist: And who in your life has inspired you the most?

Courtney: Um... If I think about it, I really really have to say it’s someone I loved very much,

it’s someone I knew, and that would be the lady whose care I was in when my mother was

away a lot.

Journalist: Oh...

Courtney: Um... she, she was very inspiring for several, several reasons. Not only was she

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

5.6.

7.

Please meet Kareem

Great inspiration

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 4 - 5

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 7 1

a good caregiver, um... but she was completely, um... completely connected to the world,

um... nature, um... animals, um... she was curious and she... um she communicated that

curiosity to me, um... she told me how to, she taught me how to garden, how to cook, um...

she introduced me to reading, and she made things really, really interesting, I mean, certain

books that she’d pass on to me, um... and she’d, um she’d ask me, what I’m trying to say

is, she would, she would... um get me to ask questions, um... like a teacher, so... um I, I was

very much inspired by her in terms of... um of her own life, of her own love of life, I think.

And I still carry that with me.

Journalist: Wonderful. Could you give us her name?

Courtney: Her name was Hilda.

Journalist: Hilda.

Courtney: Um...

Journalist: Thank you very much.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 5

a. His name is Kareem b. He’s Haitian. c. He lives in New York City.

a. New York is completely different from all the other American cities such as Washington

D.C., Seattle, Philadelphia and Newark. It cannot be stereotyped. It does not reveal anything

about the other American cities. b. New York never sleeps. Paris is a city that is very calm.

Greenwich Village is a neighbourhood in Manhattan.

a. It’s exciting at night and during the day too. b. It’s a good mix of New Yorkers, foreigners

and people from the neighbouring cities. c. There are theatres, arts.

a. He takes them to Harlem to show them the brownstones. b. He likes to take his friends

to the Bronx because he has lived there before. c. He likes to show them around Brooklyn.

d. After 9/11, he takes them to the Ground Zero site: The place where the World Trade

Centre was.

a. He takes his friends to Battery City Park in July to see the fireworks and the Statue of

Liberty. It’s near the water and it’s exciting. b. He takes his friends to Brooklyn in September

for the West Indian Parade. It’s a big event and there are many musical artists, so it’s exciting.

You can get any type of food in New York City such as West Indian and Latin food. You can

also try Russian, Italian and Chinese food. You can find food from every culture.

He really appreciates Jamaican and Cuban restaurants.

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: Is living in New York City different from living in any other American city?

Kareem: New York City is completely different from any city in the world, um...

Journalist: Why’s that?

Kareem: If someone were to ask you, if someone were to meet a person from New York,

you couldn’t stereotype them and know everything about the rest of America, um... New

York is different from Washington D.C., is different from Seattle, is different from even cities

that are nearby like Philadelphia or Newark, or Trenton. Um, New York is the city that never

sleeps (laughs). Um... Paris in France is the city that’s very calm (laughs).

Journalist: Yeah, in comparison.

Kareem: In comparison, it’s very calm.

Journalist: OK, fine. What neighbourhood do you like best and why?

Kareem: I think I, I really enjoy Greenwich Village in Manhattan, um... I really enjoy the

atmosphere, it seems that it’s a good mix of New Yorkers and foreigners and people from

the neighbouring cities that come and um, there’s theatre, there’s art, there’s such a mix of

1.2.

3.4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Portrait of a New Yorker

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 5 - 6

4 7 2 •SITE COMPAGNON

nightlife and even in, um, during the day, it’s very exciting, so I really enjoy it there, it’s just

a really good mix of people from the city and out.

Journalist: I see, so, when people come to visit you, is that where you take them, or what

do you do?

Kareem: Yeah, it depends, I, you know, I like to take them to different parts of the city, more,

it’s more about where they’re interested in going. Um, I do like to take them to Greenwich

Village. I like to show them around Brooklyn. Um, I’ve lived in the Bronx before, so I like to

take them there. Um, people always like to see the brownstones in Harlem. Of course, um,

of course, after 9/11, you take them to see the World Trade Centre, the Ground Zero Site.

Journalist: Right.

Kareem: Um, where else? I like to, it depends on what they like to see and what time of

the year. Um... in July, I like to take my friends to Battery City Park. Um, I like to see the

fireworks, um... it’s right, it’s right near the water you know. You can see, um you can see

the Statue of Liberty.

Journalist: OK.

Kareem: So, it’s a very exciting time. Um, during September, I like to take a lot of my friends

to Brooklyn again for the West Indian parade since I’m Haitian, it’s a very big event, so many

musical artists and um, it’s just very exciting.

Journalist: Brilliant, OK, and what food do you like them to try?

Kareem: The best thing about New York is you can get any food, so, my favorites, I like West

Indian food, but I like Latin food also, so I like to take my friends to Cuban restaurants, um

Jamaican restaurants, um there’s a large Russian and Italian population, um so I like to take

my friends to Italian restaurants in Little Italy, um sometimes we go to Chinatown just like we

can see the areas, but there is food from every culture in New York.

Journalist: Yeah, absolutely, OK, well thanks very much Kareem.

Kareem: You’re welcome.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 6

What does being a Native American today mean?a. Black Feet b. in the north-western part of Montana / Glacier County c. very proud and

strong

a. a strong sense of who they are b. to have a lot of values c. to realize sacrifices were

made d. to have a responsibility to their friends and relatives

T A lot of times, Indians are portrayed in a very negative light.

a. TV b. drugs c. alcohol d. things that aren’t a part of their culture

They need to live in both worlds.

Because when they die, the Creator will recognize them by their Indian name.

This is part of learning about their heritage.

They will have something to teach their children (in the next generation).

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: Welcome to our radio show The World Today. What does being a Native American

today mean? Listen to our first report on Cherry Buffalo, who is a Native American. Cherry

Buffalo what tribe do you belong to?

Cherry: I’m a Black Feet. The Black Feet Indian Reservation is located in the north-western

part of Montana, which includes most of Glacier County. On the north it borders the Canadian

province of Alberta. We are the people of this land. We have a very proud and strong heritage.

I want my children to be proud of who they are and where they come from.

1.2.

3.

4.5.6.7.8.9.

Cherry Buffalo, a Black Feet

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 6 - 8 - 9

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 7 3

Journalist: What do you want to teach your children?

Cherry: I want them to have a strong sense of who they are and have a lot of values about

being Black Feet because a lot of times Indians are portrayed in a very negative light, in

a negative way. They must realize sacrifices were made for their life and they do have a

responsibility to their friends, to their relatives, and to their family.

Journalist: In your opinion, what influences young Native Americans today?

Cherry: They are influenced by a lot of things, by TV, by drugs, by alcohol, by a lot of things

that aren’t a part of our culture and they need to live in both worlds.

Journalist: Why do you give your children Black Feet names?

Cherry: We give our children Black Feet names so that when they die, the Creator will

recognize them by their Indian name. And it’s just a part of learning about their heritage.

They will have something to teach their children in the next generation.

Journalist: Thank you very much Cherry Buffalo. That was very interesting. And now on to our

next report.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 8

Crossing Continents.

It’s a street survey.

– proper – well-dressed – polite

M16

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: Now, to prepare a report for our program Crossing Continents, we have made a

street survey. What does the word “British” mean to you?

Man: Well, the word “British”, for me it means... being proper, um... being well-dressed,

um... immediately comes to mind, M16… the film 007, um... tea (laughs), the Royal Family,

um... Princess Diana, um... and um being very polite, at all times.

Journalist: Yeah, that’s very interesting, thank you very much.

Man: You’re welcome.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 9

British pounds (£)

2,500 • 4,500 • 1,300 • 950 • 3,000 • 10,000 • 12,250 • 356 • 22,000

– Column 1: Spending / Charges/ Costs / Investments

– Column 2: Money earned / Profits

The slave trade was very profitable. In this example of The Enterprise, the general expenses

for the trip amounted to £12,250 including the sailors’ wages for many months at sea /

away from Liverpool. Yet the captain made £22,000 from the slaves’ sale, so nearly twice

as much as total expenditure / spending. Therefore this awful transaction was definitely

worth it!

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.

4.

5.

007

tea

The Royal Family – Princess Diana

5.6.7.

A street survey

A slave ship: The Enterprise

ship’s cost = £2,500 number of slaves = 356

cargo for trading = £4,500 the slaves’ sale = £22,000

sailors’ wages (salary) = £1,300

various costs = £950

agents’ commissions = £3,000

k Total = £12,250 k Total = £22,000

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 9 - 10

4 7 4 •SITE COMPAGNON

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: Mr Johns, you are a renowned historian from Liverpool Slavery Museum. Could

you tell us how profitable the slave trade was?

Mr Johns: Oh well, there’s no doubt that big money was at stake and fortunes were made;

I’ll give you an example. Are you good at maths?

Journalist: Well...

Mr Johns: You’ll understand: Let’s take, eh, the Enterprise; that was a slave ship from Liverpool.

The account book gives us very accurate figures. The ship’s owner had to pay for the ship’s

costs (sails, repairs, and equipment and so on) which came to about £2,500. Plus the cargo

for trading with the African chiefs, say, £4,500. The sailors’ wages were £1,300. You have

to add £950 for various costs during the crossings (for example, water, food, supplies, and

so on...) and the agents’ commissions for the slaves’ trading, let’s say £3,000. So the total

spending is eh...

Journalist: Well, let’s see... about £10,000?

Mr Johns: Eh, yes, more or less: £12,250 to be precise.

Journalist: It’s quite an investment, so what about the profits?

Mr Johns: The 356 Africans were sold for £22,000. They made big money.

Journalist: Wow! That’s a lot of money, that’s almost double.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 10

a. two b. in a museum c. choosing cards to send to their friends

Pop Art postcards

It’s so colourful, so alive, so now.

It seems meaningless and superficial. a. getting you to look at things around you b. makes them / things pretty

She compares it to an advertisement.

F I don’t think she looks pretty… Those colours take you into all kinds of moods.

It’s a can of soup / I can open my cupboard and look at that.

T You wouldn’t look at it that way if it hadn’t been painted.

a. shape b. dimensions c. colour

> Script de l’enregistrementTwo people are in a museum shop choosing cards to send to their friends. Listen to their

conversation.

Woman: If you will, um... we’d better get some cards, I’ve got this list, you know, all these

people we have to send these cards to, um... let’s, eh, see what they’ve got in stock, here.

Man: They have a lot of Pop Art.

Woman: Oh cool, look at that!

Man: Yuk!

Woman: No, look! It’s so colourful, it’s so, it’s so alive, it’s so, it’s so now!

Man: It’s so meaningless.

Woman: Oh! How can you say that?

Man: It’s so superficial.

Woman: No, don’t you see what it’s doing? It’s, it’s, it’s, it’s getting you to look at things around

you and actually makes them pretty as opposed to advertisements, and things like that.

Man: You, you believe that?

Woman: I do, I do, look, I’m very very very much for the, the Andy Warhol, you know.

Man: Oh, look, look at that Marilyn!

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.

In a museum shop

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 10 - 11

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 7 5

Woman: Marilyn, look at that!

Man: Marilyn, do you think she’s pretty like that?

Woman: I don’t think she looks pretty, but you look at her and those colours, um sort of

take you into, um... into all kinds of moods, you know and things... It’s also what we’ve

done to her, you know and it’s, there’s a story there, shall we have Warhol and the, the,

I mean, that’s a classic.

Man: All right.

Woman: Classic Pop Art.

Man: Take a Warhol, which one do you like?

Woman: The Campbell Soup.

Man: The Campbell Soup, classic!

Woman: All right, and, eh… let’s see, eh…

Man: What is, what is the point of this? I’m, I’m just trying to understand. It’s a can of soup,

I can open my cupboard and look at that.

Woman: You can, yes, but you wouldn’t look at it that way if it weren’t on, if it hadn’t been

painted. You’d just, you’d just take it down and not see that it has a shape, it has dimensions,

it has colour, you wouldn’t look at the object as, as an object per se, you know. It would be a

can of soup. That’s, that’s the way, eh, that’s the way I understand it.

Man: Right, that’s good.

Woman: OK, well, let’s get one of those and I think that’s about it.

Man: That should do it.

Woman: Let’s do it. OK. All right.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 11

a. Jamie Paige b.British c. chef d. Piazza Restaurant, Soho, London

technophobic

a. her kitchen life b. a real tool

a. to keep grocery lists b. to find recipes c. to look up the history of dishes

d. to look up the names of some ingredients or French cheeses e. to convert European

measurements to British ones

She thinks she has become a better cook.

a. to show her handiwork to chef friends b. to see theirs (= their handiwork)

A revolution (in the kitchen)

F She can email pictures of a course while making it.

whenever she wants

because her job is seen as a traditional one

She believes tradition and technology are compatible.

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: We’ve asked Jamie Paige, an English chef, how important the Internet is in her life.

Chef: Hello! My name’s Jamie Paige and I’m a chef, I work as a cook at Piazza Restaurant in

Soho, London. People think chefs are technophobic but the computer has transformed my

kitchen life and the Internet has become a real tool for me! I use it to keep grocery lists of

course, but also to find recipes or look up the history of dishes; I also look up the names of

some ingredients or French cheeses I don’t know, there are so many of them! I even convert

European measurements to British ones. I think I’ve become a better cook, thanks to the

Internet really. I can consult with online sources even as I’m getting started in the kitchen,

1.2.3.4.

5.6.

7.8.9.10.11.

A techie chef

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 11 - 12

4 7 6 •SITE COMPAGNON

or use my webcam to show my handiwork to chef friends or see theirs: It’s a revolution in the

kitchen! I can also email pictures of a course while I’m making it. There’s no way I’m sitting at

a computer screen all day, but I use it whenever I want. I know people are surprised to see the

Internet’s become so important for me, probably because my job is seen as a traditional one,

but I truly believe that tradition and technology are compatible!

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 12

a. Global warming is changing our planet. b. We have to save the Earth. c. Here are five

simple things you can do to protect the environment.a. save water b. save energy c. recycle d. drive less e. avoid packaging

When you brush your teeth or wash your hands, turn off water. Have a shower rather

than a bath.

Turn off electronic devices if you are not using them. Don’t forget to switch off your

television, your computer, your stereo or your DVD player. a. glass b. paper c. cans d. cardboard

special containers

Only when we don’t have any other alternative.

a. use public transport b. cycle c. walk d. think about car pooling

If you cut down your garbage by only 10%, you can save 1,200 pounds of carbon dioxide.

Bring your own bag.

We can all be environmentalists! Join the fight and save our planet for the future generations.

> Script de l’enregistrementMan: Consider this: Global warming is changing our planet. We have to save the Earth.

Here are five simple things you can do to protect the environment.

1. Save water

Woman: When you brush your teeth or wash your hands, turn off water. Have a shower

rather than a bath.

Man: 2. Save energy

Woman: Turn off electronic devices if you are not using them. Don’t forget to switch off

your television, your computer, your stereo or your DVD player.

Man: 3. Recycle

Woman: Nowadays, glass, paper, cans, cardboard can be recycled. Special containers can

be found almost everywhere, either in the countryside or in towns.

Man: 4. Drive less

Woman: Only use your car when you don’t have any other alternative. Whenever you can,

use public transport, cycle or walk. If you have to drive, think about car pooling.

Man: 5. Avoid packaging

Woman: If you cut down your garbage by only 10%, you can save 1,200 pounds of carbon

dioxide. So when shopping, choose products with as little packaging as possible. Say no to

plastic bags: Bring your own bag. We can all be environmentalists! Join the fight and save

our planet for the future generations.

1.

2.3.

4.

5.6.7.8.9.10.11.

Save our planet

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 14

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 7 7

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 14

Durant l’absence de son mari, une jeune mariée reçoit un coup de téléphone et confie

à son interlocutrice ses inquiétudes concernant son époux. Son apparence physique

l’effraie parfois (il est très grand, blond et fort comme un Viking et porte une barbe très

fournie, son regard perçant la glace de terreur). Son attitude est aussi mystérieuse

(il s’absente régulièrement plusieurs jours sans préciser où il part). Mais surtout, dès

qu’ils ont emménagé dans la demeure familiale, il lui a interdit de pénétrer dans la remise

au fond du jardin, fermée avec une clef qui aurait été égarée, selon lui. De plus, certaines

conversations qu’elle a surprises, évoquant les autres épouses de son mari, comme s’il

avait déjà été marié et qu’elles aient toutes disparu, renforcent son angoisse. Elle laisse

libre cours à son imagination et se demande si son mari ne cache pas les corps de ses

précédentes épouses qu’il aurait tuées. Malgré sa curiosité, elle n’a jamais franchi le

pas de peur de désobéir à ce mari si impressionnant. Pourtant, cet après-midi-là, elle

entend la porte de la cabane qui claque et, elle entre pour voir ce qu’elle contient. À

son grand soulagement, elle ne trouve que des outils de jardinage. Entendant son époux

qui approche, elle raccroche précipitamment et celui-ci, furieux qu’elle ait désobéi à ses

ordres, lui dévoile son vrai visage : il teint ses cheveux noirs en blond pour paraître moins

sinistre, il se nourrit du sang de ses jeunes épouses comme un vampire et utilise la scie

qu’elle a trouvée dans la remise, pour découper en morceaux le corps de ses victimes.

Il révèle qu’elles sont enterrées au sous-sol car elles aussi ont découvert son secret et

l’invite à les rejoindre pour leur tenir compagnie !

> Script de l’enregistrementWoman 1: Hello darling, how are you? I haven’t heard from you since the wedding. Is

everything all right?

Woman 2: Oh, I’m OK.

Woman 1: Are you sure? Tell me everything, I know there’s something wrong.

Woman 2: (nervous voice, slightly hysterical) It’s weird, you know, but I must admit my

husband is scary sometimes. We’ve been married for a month now; he is... well, he’s tall, very

tall and big, strong and impressive. He looks like a Viking, very blond with a bushy beard and

piercing eyes. The way he looks at me is so creepy... but he loves me I know, ah, ah, ah, I’m

overdoing it. But you see I got nervous when I overheard some of his friends talking – well

in low voices – about his other wives! As if he’d already been married several times... and

they were saying they had disappeared... This is ridiculous, I must have got it wrong; it’s so

unlike him. When I moved into his old family house he became tense and watchful; he strictly

forbade me from going into the shed at the back of the garden. It looks like a doll’s house

and I’d noticed it immediately... a little girl’s interest (nervous laugh). He told me it had been

locked for ages and no one could find a key. I must confess I was too scared to disobey... Until

this afternoon. The weather was gorgeous and I’d decided to enjoy the sunshine outside...

My husband’s away... He doesn’t tell me where he goes and often leaves me for days. And

he looked so tired when he left. I hope he’s OK. And guess what?: I heard the old wooden

door bang, so I tried to open the shed and I couldn’t believe it: It wasn’t locked at all... So

I wondered: What should I do? Should I get in? Well just a quick look... Maybe I’ll find his other

wives’ bodies (nervous giggle), don’t be stupid and so romantic! Husbands and wives have no

secrets, do they? Wow, you won’t believe your ears, no corpse, no knive, no sword (relaxed

laughing)... just basic tools, gardening equipment, and lots of it. I didn’t know he enjoyed

gardening, he never does any! (Laughter.) Oh what’s that? I can hear him; I’ll call you back.

(She hangs up.)

Blue Beard strikes back

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 14 - 15

4 7 8 •SITE COMPAGNON

Man: Well my dear, what do you think it is...

Woman 2: It’s... I...

Man: You’re right it’s a saw, very useful to cut trees and hard wood... or bones, in fact.

Woman 2: Bones... You must be joking!

Man: Oh no no dear. I am a sort of, well you could use the word “vampire”. It’s too late

now, I can tell you the truth: I drink blood, human blood. I drink people to death, then I cut

their bodies into pieces.

Woman 2: Oh stop it, this is mad...

Man: It is not... Why do you think I chose you? Because you’re young and healthy. I know

your blood is O rhesus +, I tasted it, just right. Mmm. Oh don’t look at me like that, as if I

was “Bluebeard”. Whoooooo. (She screams.)

Woman 2: Let me go... I know you’re normal and you love me!

Man: You know a lot, don’t you? I’m not who you think I am: I dye my hair and beard blond,

to look different, less sinister, but they are as black as death. That’s why I carefully select

short-sighted wives, but (sigh)... They were too curious, they found out, just like you...

(laughing) Too bad.They’re not in the shed, my dear, come along you’ll meet them soon...

downstairs in the cellar. You will keep them company... for ever...

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 15

The 1976 riots museum in Sowetoa. Sidney Zango b. Soweto c. 12

a. uprising b. the police killed all these students

a. is still not good • has changed for some people, not for others b. people still have no jobs

c. are hungry

1. thieves came into his house 2. fired guns 3. came back 4. broke a window 5. took his

stereo a. installed an alarm b. the police don’t care c. his kids are very scared

a. T We are preparing the ground for our children. b. F There has been a little change.

He was a Coloured and now he’s a South African.

a. go to places they’ve never been to: PRESENT b. not sit on a “Whites only” bench: PAST

c. upgrade ourselves: FUTURE d. talk to you properly: PRESENT

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: We’re standing in front of the 1976 riots museum in Soweto where we are talking

with Sidney Zango. So, Sidney, how old were you and where were you at the time of the riots?

Sidney: I grew up in Soweto and was about 12 during the 1976 uprising when the police

killed all these students.

Journalist: What do you do now?

Sidney: I now sell curios outside the museum here.

Journalist: In your opinion, have things changed a lot since the 1970s?

Sidney: The life is still not good. It has changed for some people, not for others. Some people

still have no jobs, people are hungry. Three weeks ago thieves came into my house and fired

guns. A week ago, they came back, broke a window, and then, took my stereo. And I’ve now

installed burglar bars and an alarm. So, economically, it is killing me. The police do not care

about my file, my kids are very scared.

Journalist: So, you’re not very optimistic, are you?

Sidney: Well, we are not the generation that will really enjoy the new freedoms but we are

preparing the ground for our children and future generations, I am soon to be sent on a

1.2.3.4.

5.

6.7.8.9.

Testimony

CORRIGÉS UNITÉS 15 - 16

SITE COMPAGNON • 4 7 9

tourism course by the government and I am hopeful about the future.

Journalist: What about race relations?

Sidney: As far as race relations are concerned, there has been a little change, not a lot.

People used to suffer a lot, I was a Coloured, now I am a South African. We can go to places

we’ve never been to. Back then, I couldn’t sit on a “Whites only” bench, but it will take twenty

years to upgrade ourselves. In the new South Africa, White people have to talk to you properly,

that’s the result of the new government.

Journalist: Thank you so much, Sidney.

Sidney: Thank you very much.

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 16

Around the World

a. Shani Robinson b. Jamaican c. 25 years old

She is currently an English language assistant in Paris.

a. She comes from a fairly small town called Mandeville. b. It is situated in the middle of the

island and it is in the mountains and about an hour from the sea. c. There are seventy-two

thousand inhabitants living in this town.

a. It’s the third largest island in the Caribbean, a little bigger than most islands. b. It’s larger

than Corsica but smaller than Île-de-France.

a. English, Creole English / Patois (a mix of African and Spanish words) b. English is spoken

because Jamaica used to be an English colony. Creole is made of African words because most

inhabitants of that country were African slaves.

English

She is an English teacher.

The weather / climate is the main characteristic of the country. It’s warm all the year

round. The lowest temperature is 14° (Celsius) and it never lasts long (3 days a year).

a. Most people are black because their ancestors were African slaves.

b. There are Indian people, Chinese people, people from everywhere.

Her mother plans to learn Chinese because many people have come from China.

Out of many, one people

> Script de l’enregistrementJournalist: Welcome to “Around the World”. Today we’re going to interview Shani Robinson,

who is from Jamaica. Shani, hello!

Guest: Hello!

Journalist: Can you introduce yourself?

Guest: I, my name is Shani Robinson, I’m, like you said, from Jamaica, 25 years old and I’m

currently working in Paris as an English language assistant.

Journalist: And where exactly in Jamaica do you come from?

Guest: I come from a town called Mandeville; it’s in the middle of the island, it’s not near to

the beach, most people think of Jamaica and palm trees and the beach but where I live it’s

about an hour from water and... um, it’s a fairly small town, about 72,000 people live there

and, um, unlike the rest of Jamaica, it tends to be less hot, because it’s in the mountains.

Journalist: So, it’s a fairly big island if you can be an hour from the sea?

Guest: Yes... it’s an hour from the sea and three hours from a good beach, so it’s, it’s the

third largest island in the Caribbean, so it’s a little bigger um… than most islands. I describe it

as larger than Corsica but smaller than Île-de-France.

Journalist: Oh, I see.

1.2.3.4.

5.

6.

7.8.9.

10.

11.12.

A Jamaican in Paris

CORRIGÉ UNITÉ 16

Crédits vidéoU1-U4-U8-U13 © ITN Source ;

U5 The Journey, The Greek American

Dream de Maria Iliou © 2007 Proteus

/ Wide Management ; U6 © BBC ;

U7 Modern Times © MCMXXXVI

Charles Chaplin. Renewed

© MCMLXIII The Roy Export

Company Establishment. All Rights

Reserved ; U9 Kick it Out ;

U12-1/© WWF 2/ © Greenpeace ;

U14 Alfred Hitchcock Suspicion,

reproduit avec l’aimable

collaboration d’ARIES / Les Éditions

Montparnasse ; U15 Goodbye Bafana

de Bille August, reproduit avec

l’aimable autorisation d’ARSAM.

Crédits photos342 ph © Underwood & Underwood / Corbis343 g ph © H.R. Locke / Corbis343 d ph © Morgan Creek / Warner Bros / The Kobal Collection344 ph © AP / Sipa Press345 ph © New Line Cinema / The Kobal Collection361, 362 ph © Bettmann / Corbis368 h ph © The Toledo Blade, Ohio / © Kirk Walters, 2009368 b ph © Burn / WWF / Ogilvy & Mather Kyiv, Ukraine369 ph © Sempé et Éditions Denoël, 1962, 2002

Iconographie : Brigitte Célérier / Hatier Illustration

Crédits textes346 : © Dracula, Bram Stocker363 : The Little House on the Prairie, Laura Ingalls Wilder (DR)365 : From DEAR AMERICA: A COAL MINER’S BRIDE, THE DIARY OF ANETKA KAMINSKA by Susan Campbell Bartoletti. Copyright © 2000 by Susan Campbell Bartoletti. Reprinted by permission of Scholastic Inc.

Achevé d’imprimer

Guest: Yeah, in between.

Journalist: Yeah. How come you are an English native speaker?

Guest: Well, Jamaica is a country where we speak English and that’s because Jamaica used

to be part of the British colonies so England speaks English, hence Jamaica speaks English.

Journalist: I see, and is there another language as well?

Guest: There’s a local dialect which is a sort of, like a Creole English with mixes from different

African words, and a few Spanish words, but it’s not a language that’s used in school at all.

You only use it, um, in speaking with your friends and, in my family, my mother is an English

teacher, so we could not use it in our house (laughs) except when my sister and I wanted

to annoy our mother, then we would speak in Creole, in Patois, that is what we call it, but

otherwise, it’s, everything is in English.

Journalist: I see. Oh good. For somebody who’s never been there, how would you describe

Jamaica?

Guest: Well, like I said, it’s the third largest island in the Caribbean. It’s um… the most

important thing I think about Jamaica, it’s, it’s the weather, it’s the climate, it’s warm all year

round, I tell people. Even when it’s cold, it’s still warm, cause cold for us is 14 degrees and we

think that the world is going to end (laughs) and it’s only 14 degrees three days for the year

maybe. Otherwise, like today, it’s 22, I checked and I live in the mountains in Jamaica, so it’s

cooler than the rest of Jamaica, and it’s 22 degrees. So, it’s warm all year round, so it’s very

good in winter to escape to. Um, another thing that I would say about Jamaica, the people

from Jamaica, they’re mostly persons who, um, they’re mostly Black, they’re mostly African

slaves. But then, we have people from India, from China, there’re lots of people from China.

My mum is actually learning, considering learning Chinese.

Journalist: Really?

Guest: Because they have so many Chinese persons that have moved into Jamaica... um

a small Indian community as well, so we have people from everywhere. The national motto

of Jamaica is actually “Out of many, one people” because of the different people that have

come from other places to live in Jamaica.

Journalist: Out of many, one people.

Guest: That’s it.

Journalist: That sounds good.